APRIL 2025 LAUNCH EDITION

LEED v5 REFERENCE GUIDE

BUILDING
DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION
COPYRIGHT
Copyright © 2025 by the U.S. Green Building Council. All rights reserved.

The U.S. Green Building Council, Inc. (USGBC) devoted significant time and resources to create this LEED v5
Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition. USGBC authorizes individual use
of the Reference Guide. In exchange for this authorization, the user agrees: to retain all copyright and other
proprietary notices contained in the Reference Guide; not to sell or modify the Reference Guide; and not to
reproduce, display, or distribute the Reference Guide in any way for any public or commercial purpose, including
display on a website or in a networked environment.

Unauthorized use of the Reference Guide violates copyright, trademark, and other laws and is prohibited.

USGBC reproduces the text of the federal and state codes, regulations, voluntary standards, etc., in the Reference
Guide under license or, in some instances, in the public domain. USGBC owns all other text, graphics, layout, and
other elements of content in the Reference Guide and are protected by copyright under both US and foreign laws.

NOTE: Redistributing the Reference Guide on the internet or through other digital means is STRICTLY prohibited,
even if offered free of charge.

THE USER MAY NOT COPY OR DISTRIBUTE DOWNLOADS OF THE REFERENCE GUIDE. THE USER OF THE
REFERENCE GUIDE MAY NOT ALTER, REDISTRIBUTE, UPLOAD, OR PUBLISH THIS REFERENCE GUIDE IN
WHOLE OR IN PART, AND HAS NO RIGHT TO LEND OR SELL THE DOWNLOAD OR COPIES OF THE
DOWNLOAD TO OTHER PERSONS.

DISCLAIMER
None of the parties involved in the funding or creation of the Reference Guide, including USGBC, its members, its
contractors, or the U.S. government, assume any liability or responsibility to the user or any third parties for the
accuracy, completeness, or use of or reliance on any information contained in the Reference Guide, or for any
injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief ) arising from such use or reliance.

Although we believe the information in the Reference Guide is reliable and accurate, we provide all materials within it
without warranties of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to warranties of the accuracy or
completeness of information in the training or the suitability of the information for any particular purpose.

As a condition of use, the user covenants not to sue and agrees to waive and release the U.S. Green Building
Council, its members, its contractors, and affiliated organizations from any and all claims, demands, and causes of
action for any injuries, losses, or damages (including, without limitation, equitable relief) that the user may now or
hereafter have a right to assert against such parties as a result of the use of, or reliance on, the Reference Guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

2101 L Street, NW, Suite 600
Washington, DC 20037

TRADEMARK
LEED® is a registered trademark of the U.S. Green Building Council.
LEED Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction
April 2025 Edition
ISBN 979-8-99251 10-0-0

i
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The development of LEED v5 has been made possible through the efforts of many dedicated volunteers, staff
members, and others in the USGBC community. Collaborative and consensus-based development is a critical aspect
of LEED, and our members are central to the success of our mission at all scales of involvement ranging from
visioning to development to implementation. We are deeply grateful to these dedicated individuals whose
contributions played a pivotal role in reaching this milestone release.

The LEED v5 rating systems were developed by the USGBC volunteer community and formally ratified by our
broader membership. The reference guide suite is the product of the dedicated efforts of USGBC and Green
Business Certification Inc. (GBCI) staff and consultants, designed to support the industry’s understanding and
implementation of the rating systems.

LEED COMMITTEE MEMBERS

Chairs listed in bold.

LEED Steering Committee LEED Technical Committee Peter Stair

Barry Abramson Barry Abramson Jesse Rosenbluth
Fernando Arias Michele Adams Jennifer Sheffield
Eden Brukman Jamy Bacchus Allison Smith
Stewart Comstock Patrick Boyle Tim Smith
Lance Davis Sandra Brock Marilyn Specht
Sarah Enaharo Yichao Chen Raphael Sperry
Emily English Priscilla Chew Nate Steeber
Brian Gilligan Penny Cole Lisa Storer
Tony Goodman Greg Collins Sarah Talkington
Sarah Gudeman Marc Coudert Raja Tannous
Josh Jacobs Michael Cudahy Ted Tiffany
Adam Jennings Amornrut Detudomsap Kapil Upadhyaya
Emma Jones Isabela Dib Stefanie Young
Michael Karasoulas Emily English
Ibrahim Kronfol Ken Filarski LEED Advisory Committee (LAC)
Kavita Kumari Andrea Fornasiero Keith Amann
Anica Landreneau Gwen Fuertes Michael Arny
Patty Lloyd Cristine Gibney Heidimarie Bonilla de Cienfuegos
Esteban Martinez Tony Goodman Candice Bullard
Lena Ohta Sarah Gudeman Sue Clark
Robert Pickering Josh Hatch Lance Davis
Rock Ridolfi Carrie Havey Peter Doo
Jesse Rosenbluth Julie Hendricks Jonathan Flaherty
Benjamin Roush Tia Heneghan Miranda Gardiner
Lourdes Salinas Kavita Karmarkar Candice Goldsmith
Jennifer Sanguinetti Dirk Kestner Ana Lucia Granda
Chris Schaffner Ibrahim Kronfol Sara Greenwood
Shana Scheiber Patty Lloyd Crissy Haley
Allison Smith Dirk Mason Daniel Huard
Tim Smith Doug Mazeffa Geoff Hurst
Adam Stoker Anna McWilliams Blake Jackson
Lisa Storer Benjamin Meyer Cara Kennedy
Brittany Storm Rachel Nicely Anica Landreneau
Sarah Talkington Lena Ohta Melanie Larkins
Matt Van Duinen William Paddock Theresa Lehman
Kristen Walson Greg Patton Pamela Lippe
Erica Weeks Louisa Rettew Sarah Michelman
Jennifer Wolf Rock Ridolfi Gautami Palanki
Stefanie Young Neil Rosen Jonathan Rowe
Alicia Silva
Rebecca Stafford
Melissa Targett
Cesar Ulises Trevino

ii
CONSENSUS COMMITTEES
Chairs listed in bold.

Design and Construction Existing Buildings

Rachel Berkin Barry Abramson
Amy Costello Stephen Ashkin
Jennifer Emrick Michaela Boren
Marsha Gentile Cristine Gibney
Geoff Hurst Emma Jones
Lindsey Landwehr-Fasules Rishabh Kasliwal
Patty Lloyd Cara Kennedy
Grace Manuel Jim Landau
Eliza Mauro Gianluca Padula
Bradley Nies Cecil Scheib
Maria Perez Alicia Silva
Angi Rivera Dean Stanberry
Stacy Simpson Stephen Ward
Rebecca Stafford
Adam Stoker
Melissa Targett
Megan White

TECHNICAL ADVISORY GROUPS

Chairs listed in bold.

Location and Planning Sustainable Sites Water Efficiency

Neil Angus Michele Adams Michele Adams
Jaquelin Camp Heidemarie Bonilla de Randi Bromm
Eugene Chao Cienfuegos Patrick Boyle
Anne Chen Sandra Brock Daryn Cline
Lizao Chen Gabriela Canamar Clark Michael Cudahy
Chaise Cope Chantal Carius Eric Culter
Christopher Davis Jeremy Caron Larry Eichel
Juliette Desfeux Stewart Comstock Lingyan Gorsuch
Peter Doo Tara Dougherty Ana Lucia Granda
Bill Eger Elena Goldstein Lake Adriana Hansen
Kenneth J. Filarski Robert Goo David Holtzclaw
Tony Goodman Kristen Gros Daniel Huard
Jason Hercules Anshul Gujarathi Hemsa Ibrahim
John Hersey Laura Hansplant Eleni Stefania Kalapoda
Emre Ilicali Caroline Havey Susan Kapetanovic-Marr
Shea Jameel Julie Hendricks Ibrahim Kronfol
Beth Jamieson Liana Kallivoka Rajesh Kunnath
Susan Kapetanovic-Marr Michael Karasoulas Rachel Nicely
Lindsey Kindrat Maria Matamoros Taylor Nokohoudian
Michael Kloha Rachel Nicely Pedro Paredes
Todd Litman Signe Nielsen Robert Pickering
Jennifer Love Ginevra Perelli Rock Ridolfi
Megan Saunders Regina Philson Erin Rowe
Ryan Schwabenbauer Carl Reimer Hrushikesh Sandhe
Beth Shuck Jesse Rosenbluth Prem Kumar Solaisamy
Tim Smith Lila Saari Carmen Spagnoli
Marilyn Specht Lisa Storer Nathan Steeber
Peter Stair Richard Waite Joel Stout
Lisa Storer Jennifer Wolf Aizhan Ussenaliyeva
Amruta Sudhalkar Amanda Von Almen
Megan Susman Erica Weeks
Kath Williams

iii
Energy and Atmosphere Materials and Resources Indoor Environmental Quality
Barry Abramson Denise Braun Andrea Anderson
Jamy Bacchus Torey Brooks Steve Ashkin
Aaron Binkley Eden Brukman Penny Cole
Bonnie Brook Carrie Claytor Casey Cullen-Woods
Victor Catrib Eric Doyle Danai Frantzi-Gounari
Greg Collins Annalise Dum Dwayne Fuhlhage
Devanshi Dadia Emily English Brian Gilligan
Vinay Ghatti Efrie Escott Marcelo Gregório
Joshua Hatch Kristen Fritsch Sarah Gudeman
Brad Hill Jeff Frost Elliott Horner
Daniel Huard Brock Hill Valerie Johnston
Adam Jennings Colley Hodges Viken Koukounian
Jeffrey Landreth Hoda Ibrahim Grace Kwok
Christina LaPerle Kavita Karmarkar Jared Landsman
Luis Lara Dirk Kestner Colleen Large
Robert Maddox Alison Kinn Bennett Melanie Larkins
Joel McKellar Colleen Large Scott Laughlin
Steve Olson Susanne LeBlanc Michael Lehman
Amy Pastor Meghan Lewis Wenting Li
Alexander Pennock Patricia Lloyd Jeevan Mohan
Anisur Rahman Kimberly Loscher Amir Nezamdoost
Louisa Rettew Brad McAllister Lena Ohta
Danna Richey Sarah Michelman Angelica Ospina Alvarado
Kyleen Rockwell William Paddock Gregory Patton
Roberto Rodriguez Lona Rerick Neil Rosen
Phoebe Romero Kelly Roberts Shana Scheiber
Benjamin Roush Allison Smith Lourdes Salinas
Christopher Schaffner Lauren Sparandara Alan Scott
Rohini Srivastava Brittany Storm John Sebroski
Su-Fern Tan Anish Tilak Muhammad Shoaib
Amir Tarazy Tolga Tutar Marilyn Specht
Ted Tiffany Ramie Vagal Stephanie Taylor
Michael Tillou Matt Van Duinen Raja Tannous
Paul Totten Ray Wallin Stephanie Taylor
Elena Verani Dennis Wilson
Stevan Vinci
Kristen Walson
Stefanie Young

iv
WORKING GROUPS
Chairs listed in bold.

Equity Resilience
Patricia Christianson Mara Baum
Simon Fowell Dan Burgoyne
Jared Gilbert Keaghan Caldwell
Katherine Han Cheney Chen
Jeff Heitert Sarah Colasurdo
Naim Jabbour Ana Cunha Cribellier
Leslie Louie Jessica Diaz Avelar
Laura Medina Emma Hughes
Ganesh Nayak Ann Kosmal
Saahiti Penigalapati Lindsey Machamer
Tyra Redus Gail Napell
Humberto Restrepo Mark Nelson
April Ricketts Gautami Palanki
Nora Rizzo D.J. Rasmussen
Anuya Sant Jennifer Sanguinetti
Jasmine Sears Alan Scott
Charu Singh Monika Serrano
Heidi Valdez Vélez Joy Sinderbrand

v
IN REMEMBRANCE
The USGBC community lost two volunteers in 2024. We honor their memory and dedication to creating a more
sustainable world through green building.

Ganesh Nayak
USGBC volunteer from 2023–2024

As the chair of our Equity Working Group at the USGBC, Ganesh was a long-standing leader, mentor, and champion
of sustainable and inclusive design. His dedication to LEED certification and sustainable architecture transformed
over four million square feet of space, leaving a lasting legacy of environmental stewardship.

Stewart Comstock
USGBC volunteer from 2020–2024

Stewart donated his time as the vice chair of the Sustainable Sites Technical Advisory Group, bringing decades of
deep expertise in stormwater management to our work. His influence helped shape some of the most critical aspects
of LEED as it evolved over the years. Stewart helped lay the foundation on which many of today’s green
infrastructure principles and best practices are built.

ADDITIONAL THANKS
A special thanks to USGBC and GBCI staff for their invaluable efforts in developing this reference guide: Abby
Campillo, Marc Cohen, Melissa Cox, Christine Davis, Corey Enck, Karema Enos, Sara Fritz, Nagesh Gupta, Sourabh
Gupta, Gail Hampshire, Kristen Hartel, Selina Holmes, Kavita Jain, Larkin Johnson, Lani Kalemba, Laurie Kerr,
Mikaela Kieffer, Ian LaHiff, John Law, Larissa McFall, Ryan O'Neill, Larissa Oaks, Heather Payson, Abraham Philip,
Kerrie Schueffner, Douglas Smith, Lisa Stanley, Kurt Steiner, Wes Sullens, Justin Taylor, Kristen Vachon-Vogel,
Cloelle Vernon, Apoorv Vij, Kat Wagenschutz, Lyndsay Watkins, and Stefanie Young.

A thank you also goes to Melissa Baker and Sarah Zaleski for their vision and support.

A very special thanks to Dana Scott, staff lead on the development of the LEED v5 Reference Guide suite, for her
unwavering commitment to quality and her dedication to the production of the guides.

A special thanks to the consultant teams, which include EXP and Cantave Creative and Consulting.

6
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PREFACE ....................................................................................................................... 1
The Case for Green Building ..................................................................................................................... 1
About LEED ............................................................................................................................................... 1
LEED’s Goals ............................................................................................................................................. 2
Benefits of Using LEED ............................................................................................................................. 2
LEED Certification Process ....................................................................................................................... 3

GETTING STARTED....................................................................................................... 4
About this Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 4
Rating System Selection ............................................................................................................................ 5
Project Type Requirements........................................................................................................................ 6
Projects with Incomplete Space ................................................................................................................. 7
Project Occupancy ..................................................................................................................................... 7

LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 10

MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS (MPR) ......................................................... 11

MPR 1. Must Be in a Permanent Location on Existing Land ................................................................... 11
MPR 2. Must Use Reasonable LEED Boundaries ................................................................................... 11
MPR 3. Must Comply with Project Size Requirements ............................................................................ 12

LEED SCORECARDS .................................................................................................. 13

INTEGRATIVE PROCESS, PLANNING, AND ASSESSMENTS (IP) ........................... 18

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 18
IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment ..................................................................................................... 20
IPp2: Human Impact Assessment ............................................................................................................ 26
IPp3: Carbon Assessment ....................................................................................................................... 31
IPp4: Tenant Guidelines ........................................................................................................................... 35
IPc1: Integrative Design Process ............................................................................................................. 39
IPc2: Green Leases ................................................................................................................................. 43

LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION (LT) .................................................................. 51

Overview .................................................................................................................................................. 51
 LTc1: Sensitive Land Protection ............................................................................................................... 53
LTc2: Equitable Development .................................................................................................................. 59
LTc3: Compact and Connected Development ......................................................................................... 69
LTc4: Transportation Demand Management ............................................................................................ 84
LTc5: Electric Vehicles ............................................................................................................................. 97

SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS) ....................................................................................... 103

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 103
SSp1: Minimized Site Disturbance ........................................................................................................ 105
SSc1: Biodiverse Habitat ....................................................................................................................... 110
SSc2: Accessible Outdoor Space .......................................................................................................... 116
SSc3: Rainwater Management .............................................................................................................. 122
SSc4: Enhanced Resilient Site Design .................................................................................................. 129
SSc5: Heat Island Reduction ................................................................................................................. 143
SSc6: Light Pollution Reduction ............................................................................................................ 151

WATER EFFICIENCY (WE) ........................................................................................ 158

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 158
WEp1: Water Metering and Reporting ................................................................................................... 160
WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency .......................................................................................................... 163
WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection ........................................................................................... 170
WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency ........................................................................................................ 178

ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE (EA) .......................................................................... 199

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 199
EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan ......................................................... 202
EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency ......................................................................................................... 209
EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 228
EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting .................................................................................................. 250
EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management ...................................................................................... 260
EAc1: Electrification ............................................................................................................................... 267
EAc2: Reduce Peak Thermal Loads ...................................................................................................... 287
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency ....................................................................................................... 301
EAc4: Renewable Energy ...................................................................................................................... 333
EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning .......................................................................................................... 354
EAc6: Grid Interactive ............................................................................................................................ 369
EAc7: Enhanced Refrigerant Management ........................................................................................... 379
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR) ...................................................................... 389
Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 389
MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations .......................................................................................... 391
MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon .................................................................................... 396
MRc1: Building and Materials Reuse ..................................................................................................... 402
MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon ......................................................................................................... 410
MRc3: Low-emitting Materials ............................................................................................................... 420
MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement ............................................................................. 433
MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion ........................................................................... 442

INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ) ............................................................. 451

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 451
EQp1: Construction Management ......................................................................................................... 457
EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality ............................................................................................................. 463
EQp3: No Smoking or Vehicle Idling ...................................................................................................... 463
EQc1: Enhanced Air Quality .................................................................................................................. 477
EQc2: Occupant Experience ................................................................................................................. 481
EQc3: Accessibility and Inclusion .......................................................................................................... 506
EQc4: Resilient Spaces ......................................................................................................................... 514
EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring .............................................................................................. 521

PROJECT PRIORITIES (PR) ...................................................................................... 530

Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 530
PRc1: Project Priorities .......................................................................................................................... 531
PRc2: LEED AP ..................................................................................................................................... 535

APPENDIX I. LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 537

PREFACE
THE CASE FOR GREEN BUILDING
Green buildings are an integral part of the solution to the environmental challenges facing the
planet.

The impetus behind development of the Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design
(LEED) rating systems was recognition that the design, construction building management
industry has the expertise, tools, and technology to transform buildings and make significant
advances toward a sustainable planet. LEED projects throughout the world have demonstrated
the benefits of taking a green design and operations approach that reduces the environmental
harms of buildings and restores the balance of natural systems.

Buildings have a major role to play in sustainability through their construction, the lifetime of
their operation, and patterns of development.

What we build today, how we build it, and where we build it are profoundly important.

ABOUT LEED
LEED is a concise framework for identifying and implementing practical and measurable green
building, design, construction, operations, and maintenance strategies and solutions. A
voluntary, market-driven, consensus-based tool, LEED serves as a guideline and assessment
mechanism.

Within the appropriate rating system, projects that meet the prerequisites and earn enough
credits to achieve the certification threshold have demonstrated performance that spans the
goals in an integrated way. The organization awards certification at four levels: LEED Certified,
LEED Silver, LEED Gold, and LEED Platinum. These levels incentivize higher achievement and,
in turn, faster progress toward the goals.

Since its launch, LEED has evolved to address new markets and building types, advances in
practice and technology, and greater understanding of the environmental and human health
effects of the built environment. The Foundations of LEED detail the principles of transparency,
openness, and inclusiveness that guide this evolutionary process. Learn more by exploring the
Foundations of LEED at usgbc.org/resources/foundations-leed.

LEED does not certify, endorse, or promote any products, services, or companies.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 1
LEED’S GOALS
LEED seeks to optimize the use of natural resources, promote regenerative and restorative
strategies, maximize the positive and minimize the negative environmental and human health
consequences of the construction industry, and provide high-quality indoor environments for
building occupants. Emphasizing integrative design, integration of existing technology, and
state-of-the-art strategies, LEED advances expertise in green building and transforms
professional practice. The technical basis for LEED strikes a balance between requiring today’s
best practices and encouraging leadership strategies. LEED sets a challenging yet achievable
set of benchmarks that define green building for interiors, buildings, and cities and communities.

LEED v5 was developed around three central areas of impact:

• Decarbonization
• Quality of life
• Ecological conservation and restoration

Every credit and prerequisite in LEED v5 links to decarbonization, quality of life, and/or
ecological conservation and restoration. The rating system annotates this connection, enabling
project teams to easily shape and communicate their sustainability stories.

BENEFITS OF USING LEED

LEED is designed to address environmental challenges while responding to the needs of a
competitive market. LEED-certified buildings are designed to deliver many benefits, including:

• Lower operating costs and increased asset value

• Reductions in waste sent to landfills
• Energy and water conservation
• Conserved and restored habitat for improved ecosystem function and biodiversity
• Increased market transparency and expanded access to industry-leading green products
and materials
• More healthful and productive environments for occupants
• Reductions in greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions
• Qualification for tax rebates, zoning allowances, and other incentives in many cities

By participating in LEED, owners, operators, designers, and builders make a meaningful

contribution to the green building industry. By documenting and tracking buildings’ resource use,

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 2
they contribute to a growing body of knowledge that will advance research in this rapidly
evolving field. This will allow future projects to build on the successes of today’s designs and
bring innovations to the market.
GBCI independently verifies sustainability performance against LEED, ensuring the integrity of
outcomes and strengthening market confidence in sustainability investment and innovation.

LEED CERTIFICATION PROCESS

A LEED project begins when the team determines scope, selects the appropriate rating system,
confirms alignment with the minimum program requirements, and registers the project on the
Arc platform. The team designs the project to meet the requirements for all prerequisites and for
the credits they have chosen to pursue, in coordination with their sustainability goals. The
required documentation is compiled and submitted to GBCI for review. GBCI provides feedback
on the documentation received, which gives project teams the chance to make any needed
design and construction changes or take additional steps to improve an existing project’s
performance and/or provide additional clarification needed for GBCI to determine compliance.
Additional rounds of review follow, as needed and allowed, to earn certification of the project.
For a more in-depth understanding of the certification process, see the Guides to Certification.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 3
GETTING STARTED
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide explains the requirements of the LEED v5 Building Design and Construction (BD+C)
rating system, offering essential background information for contractors, engineers (mechanical,
structural, and civil), architects, designers (interior and landscape), architects, designers,
building operators, and LEED consultants. Early attention to rating system selection, minimum
program requirements, and project boundaries ensure a smoother path to certification.

This guide is the first in a series of detailed resources for project teams pursuing LEED v5. It
builds on the rating system requirements, providing background on each LEED category and a
detailed explanation of the technical requirements for each credit.

WHAT’S INSIDE
This guide builds on the requirements listed in the rating system to provide background on each
LEED category and an in-depth explanation of the technical requirements of each credit.

This guide contains:

• LEED v5 rating system requirements

• Rating system requirements explained
• Documentation requirements
• Referenced standards

As teams review each credit and prerequisite, they should carefully evaluate the options and
pathways available, ensuring they align with the project’s specific goals, constraints, and
characteristics.

When preparing documentation to submit for review, these materials may consist of contract
documents (plans, specifications, elevations, sections, construction details, etc.) calculations,
reports, manufacturer product information, photographs, and/or descriptive narratives.

The USGBC glossary is an additional resource: usgbc.org/glossary/v5

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 4
CREDIT CATEGORIES
This LEED rating system organizes the prerequisites and credits into eight categories, each
addressing a fundamental aspect of sustainable, high-performance designs and construction
practices:

• Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments (IP)

• Location and Transportation (LT)
• Sustainable Sites (SS)
• Water Efficiency (WE)
• Energy and Atmosphere (EA)
• Materials and Resources (MR)
• Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ)
• Project Priorities (PR)

RATING SYSTEM SELECTION

LEED offers rating systems designed for specific project types. Projects must register under the
most appropriate LEED rating system and use the guide appropriate to the project’s registration.
In cases where the most appropriate rating system is unclear, additional guidance is provided in
the USGBC Help Center: support.usgbc.org/hc/en-us. The project team may also raise a
request to consult with GBCI: support.usgbc.org/hc/en-us/requests/new. The consultation
should occur prior to registration to avoid the risk of GBCI determining, during the Preliminary
Review, that an inappropriate rating system has been selected.

LEED FOR BUILDING DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION (BD+C)

New Construction and Major Renovations
Applicable to whole buildings, and whole additions to buildings, of various use types that are
either new construction or undergoing major renovations and where at least 60% of the gross
floor area is complete.

Major renovations are buildings with extensive interior alteration work in addition to work on the
exterior shell of the building and/or primary structural components and/or the core and
peripheral MEP (mechanical, electrical, plumbing) and service systems and/or site work.
Typically, the extent and nature of the work prevent the primary function space from being used
for its intended purpose while the work is in progress, and the project team must obtain a new
certificate of occupancy before reoccupying the work area.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 5
Core and Shell Development
Applicable to whole buildings of various use types that are either new construction or
undergoing major renovations and at least 40% of the gross floor area is incomplete.
Incomplete: does not have its basic floor, wall, and/or ceiling finishes installed, or essential
mechanical, electrical, plumbing systems (or fixtures) necessary to occupy the space for its
intended use, within the contracted scope of work.

LEED FOR INTERIOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION (ID+C)

Commercial Interiors
Applicable to interior renovation projects of commercial spaces (that have no scope for the
exterior shell of the building and/or site work). The team installs movable furnishings, fixtures,
and equipment (FF&E) to support the intended regular operations of the space.

LEED FOR BUILDING OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE (O+M)

Existing Buildings
Applicable to existing buildings projects focused on operational improvement. This rating system
focuses on whole buildings that have been fully operational and occupied for at least one year.
Focusing on performance-driven strategies and outcomes allows buildings in use to achieve
greater efficiency.

PROJECT TYPE REQUIREMENTS

A LEED project must have its entire gross floor area certified under a single rating system
(LEED BD+C: New Construction or LEED BD+C: Core and Shell; LEED ID+C: Commercial
Interiors; or LEED O+M: Existing Buildings) and is subject to all prerequisites and attempted
credits in that rating system, regardless of mixed construction or space usage type.

However, in some prerequisites and credits, there may be requirements identified for specific
project types such as schools, warehouse and distribution centers, healthcare, or residential.
If 60% or more of the project’s gross floor area consists of a specific project type, the project
must meet the requirements for that type. For example, if a project is 75% residential and 25%
retail, that project must follow the residential requirements in the rating system. In the Core and
Shell Rating System or in a New Construction/Major Renovation project with incomplete space,
the use type of the incomplete space must be based on the expected future use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 6
PROJECTS WITH INCOMPLETE SPACE
Projects that have incomplete space (future fit-out) can still pursue certification as long as the
following criteria are met:

• Incomplete space comprises no more than 40% of the gross floor area for New
Construction and no less than 40% of the gross floor area for Core and Shell.
• The team counts occupancy for the incomplete space by using projected values or, if
unknown, the LEED Default Occupancy.
• A letter of commitment from the owner is provided attesting that the incomplete spaces
will satisfy the requirements of each prerequisite and credit achieved by the project.
• The team provides a description of the incomplete space, identifying the remaining
scope, the entity responsible for the remaining scope, and the reason the building is
incomplete at the time of the final application.
• Prerequisite calculations must include the completed scope only. Credit calculations
must include the completed and incomplete scope, and the incomplete scope must be
held equivalent to the baseline.
• Contact USGBC, prior to application submission, for any attempted credits in which an
adaptation for the incomplete space is not clear.

PROJECT OCCUPANCY
It is important to establish occupancy that will be used consistently throughout the application
and share them with the whole project team. Whenever possible, use actual or predicted
occupancies. LEED requires the assessment and reporting of occupancy in two ways: regular
building occupants and visitors.

REGULAR BUILDING OCCUPANTS

Regular building occupants are routine users of a project (full- and part- time) such as:
• Employees, daily volunteers, support staff (e.g., janitors).
• Residents (dormitory, apartment, condo), overnight hotel guests, medical inpatients.
• K–12 students.

VISITORS
Visitors are intermittent users of a project, such as:

• Retail customers
• Medical outpatients

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 7
 • Volunteers who only periodically use a building (e.g., once per week)
• Higher-education classroom students

DEFAULT OCCUPANCY COUNTS

If the occupancy is unknown and cannot be reasonably projected, use one of the following
resources to estimate occupancy:

• Default occupant density from ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Table 6-11

Table 1. Default occupancy counts based on gross floor area, excluding structured parking
Gross square feet per Gross square meters per
occupant occupant

Regular Visitors Regular Visitors

General office 250 0 23 0
Retail, restaurant 435 95 40 9
Retail, grocery store 550 115 51 11
Retail, general 550 130 51 12
Retail, service 600 130 56 12
Medical office 225 330 21 31
R&D or laboratory 400 0 37 0
Warehouse, distribution 2,500 0 232 0
Warehouse, storage 20,000 0 1860 0
Educational, daycare 630 105 59 10
Educational, K–12 1,300 140 121 13
Educational, postsecondary 2,100 150 195 14

NOTE: For residential (i.e., apartment or condo), use the number of bedrooms in the dwelling unit plus one, multiplied by the
number of such dwelling units.
NOTE: For a hotel or motel, use 1.5 occupants per guest room multiplied by the total number of guest rooms. Then multiply the
resulting total by 60%.

AVERAGE VS. PEAK OCCUPANCY

In prerequisite/credit calculations, different methods may calculate occupancy:

1 “The Standards for Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality”, ASRAE, last accessed March 21, 2025, https://www.ashrae.org/technical-
resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 8
 • Daily average. The value representative of all the regular building occupants for a
typical 24-hour day of operation. If numbers vary seasonally, use occupancy numbers
that are a representative daily average over the entire operating season of the building.
• Peak total. The value that represents the highest number of occupants expected in the
project at one time (e.g., shift overlap, events). Sometimes the building code generates
the value for fire-safety; but if justified, a lower number can be used.

If default occupancy counts from Table 1 are used, they must be applied as the daily average
and peak occupancy values.

Peak outpatients are the highest number of outpatients at a given point in a typical 24-hour
period.

EQUIVALENCIES
The LEED rating system is written based on the most up to date and widely available standards.
However, alternative standards or compliance paths may also be available to project teams. The
project priority library includes a list of equivalencies and alternative compliance paths available
by credit, project types, or region.

If there is no guidance available allowing an equivalency or alternative compliance path, project

teams may submit a request for USGBC to determine equivalency.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 9
LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS
To earn LEED Platinum in LEED v5, projects must complete all prerequisites, earn a minimum
of 80 points and achieve decarbonization requirements in the following credits:

LEED BD+C
• EAc1 Electrification
• EAc3 Enhanced Energy Efficiency
• EAc4 Renewable Energy
• MRc2 Reduce Embodied Carbon

LEED ID+C
• EAc1 Electrification
• EAc2 Enhanced Energy Efficiency
• EAc3 Renewable Energy
• MRc2 Reduce Embodied Carbon

LEED O+M
• EAc1 Greenhouse Gas Emissions Reduction Performance
• EAc2 Optimized Energy Performance
• EAc5 Decarbonization and Efficiency Plans

See Appendix I for the full list of LEED Platinum requirements.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 10
MINIMUM PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS (MPR)
The minimum program requirements (MPRs) are the minimum characteristics or conditions that
make a project appropriate to pursue LEED certification. These requirements serve as the
foundation for all LEED projects and define the types of buildings, spaces, and neighborhoods
that the LEED rating system evaluates.

MPR 1. MUST BE IN A PERMANENT LOCATION ON

EXISTING LAND

INTENT
LEED evaluates buildings, spaces, neighborhoods, communities, and cities in the context of
their surroundings. A significant portion of LEED requirements depends on the project’s location;
therefore, it is important that LEED projects are evaluated as permanent structures. Locating
projects on existing land is important to avoid artificial land masses that have the potential to
displace and disrupt ecosystems.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must have construction and operations at a permanent location on existing
land. No project that is designed to move at any point in its lifetime may pursue LEED
certification. This requirement applies to all land within the LEED project.

MPR 2. MUST USE REASONABLE LEED BOUNDARIES

INTENT
LEED evaluates buildings, spaces, neighborhoods, communities, cities, and all environmental
impacts associated with those projects. Defining a reasonable LEED boundary ensures the
project is accurately evaluated.

REQUIREMENTS
The project team must include all contiguous land that is associated with the LEED project
boundary and supports its typical operations. This includes land altered as a result of
construction and features used primarily by the project’s occupants, such as hardscape (parking
and sidewalks), septic or stormwater treatment equipment, and landscaping. The LEED

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 11
boundary may not unreasonably exclude portions of the building, space, or site to give the
project an advantage in complying with credit requirements. The LEED project must accurately
communicate the scope of the certifying project in all promotional and descriptive materials and
distinguish it from any non-certifying space.

MPR 3. MUST COMPLY WITH PROJECT SIZE

REQUIREMENTS

INTENT
LEED evaluates buildings, spaces, or neighborhoods of a certain size. The LEED requirements
do not accurately assess the performance of projects outside of these size requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
All LEED projects must meet the size requirements listed below.

LEED BD+C and LEED O+M

The LEED project must include a minimum of 1,000 square feet (93 square meters) of gross
floor area.

LEED ID+C
The LEED project must include a minimum of 250 square feet (22 square meters) of gross floor
area.

Further guidance on the MPRs can be found here:

usgbc.org/credits?MinimumProgramRequirements

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 12
RATING SYSTEM SCORECARDS
CREDIT CATEGORY VIEW
New Core
Construction and Shell
Integrative Process, Planning and Assessments (IP) 1 7
IPp1 Climate Resilience Assessment Required Required
IPp2 Human Impact Assessment Required Required
IPp3 Carbon Assessment Required Required
IPp4 Tenant Guidelines – Required
IPc1 Integrative Design Process 1 1
IPc2 Green Leases – 6

Location and Transportation (LT) 15 16

LTc1 Sensitive Land Protection 1 1
LTc2 Equitable Development 2 2
LTc3 Compact and Connected Development 6 6
LTc4 Transportation Demand Management 4 4
LTc5 Electric Vehicles 2 2

Sustainable Sites (SS) 11 11

SSp1 Minimized Site Disturbance Required Required
SSc1 Biodiverse Habitat 2 2
SSc2 Accessible Outdoor Space 1 1
SSc3 Rainwater Management 3 3
SSc4 Enhanced Resilient Site Design 2 2
SSc5 Heat Island Reduction 2 2
SSc6 Light Pollution Reduction 1 1

Water Efficiency (WE) 9 8

WEp1 Water Metering and Reporting Required Required
WEp2 Minimum Water Efficiency Required Required
WEc1 Water Metering and Leak Detection 1 1
WEc2 Enhanced Water Efficiency 8 7

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 13
 New Core
Construction and Shell
Energy and Atmosphere (EA) 33 27
EAp1 Operational Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan Required Required
EAp2 Minimum Energy Efficiency Required Required
EAp3 Fundamental Commissioning Required Required
EAp4 Energy Metering and Reporting Required Required
EAp5 Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required Required
EAc1 Electrification 5 4
EAc2 Reduce Peak Thermal Loads 5 5
EAc3 Enhanced Energy Efficiency 10 7
EAc4 Renewable Energy 5 4
EAc5 Enhanced Commissioning 4 3
EAc6 Grid Interactive 2 2
EAc7 Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2 2

Materials and Resources (MR) 18 21

MRp1 Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required Required
MRp2 Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon Required Required
MRc1 Building and Materials Reuse 3 5
MRc2 Reduce Embodied Carbon 6 8
MRc3 Low-Emitting Materials 2 1
MRc4 Building Product Selection and Procurement 5 5
MRc5 Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion 2 2

Indoor Environmental Quality (EQ) 13 11

EQp1 Construction Management Required Required
EQp2 Fundamental Air Quality Required Required
EQp3 No Smoking or Vehicle Idling Required Required
EQc1 Enhanced Air Quality 1 1
EQc2 Occupant Experience 7 7
EQc3 Accessibility and Inclusion 1 1
EQc4 Resilient Spaces 2 2
EQc5 Air Quality Testing and Monitoring 2 –

Project Priorities (PR) 10 10

PRc1 Project Priorities 9 9
PRc2 LEED AP 1 1

Total Possible Points 110 110

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 14
IMPACT AREA VIEW
New
Decarbonization Core and Shell
Construction
IP Prerequisite Carbon Assessment Required Required

IP Prerequisite Tenant Guidelines – Required

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1 1

IP Credit Green Leases – 6

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 6 6

LT Credit Transportation Demand Management 4 4

LT Credit Electric Vehicles 2 2

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction 2 2

WE Prerequisite Minimum Water Efficiency Required Required

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 1 1

WE Credit Enhanced Water Efficiency 8 7

Operational Carbon Projection and
EA Prerequisite Required Required
Decarbonization Plan
EA Prerequisite Minimum Energy Efficiency Required Required

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Commissioning Required Required

EA Prerequisite Energy Metering and Reporting Required Required

EA Prerequisite Fundamental Refrigerant Management Required Required

EA Credit Electrification 5 4

EA Credit Reduce Peak Thermal Loads 5 5

EA Credit Enhanced Energy Efficiency 10 7

EA Credit Renewable Energy 5 4

EA Credit Enhanced Commissioning 4 3

EA Credit Grid Interactive 2 2

EA Credit Enhanced Refrigerant Management 2 2

MR Prerequisite Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required Required

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 15
 New
Decarbonization Core and Shell
Construction
MR Prerequisite Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon Required Required

MR Credit Building and Materials Reuse 3 5

MR Credit Reduce Embodied Carbon 6 8

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 5 5

MR Credit Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion 2 2

New
Quality of life Core and Shell
Construction
IP Prerequisite Climate Resilience Assessment Required Required

IP Prerequisite Tenant Guidelines – Required

IP Prerequisite Human Impact Assessment Required Required

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1 1

IP Credit Green Leases – 6

LT Credit Equitable Development 2 2

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 6 6

LT Credit Transportation Demand Management 4 4

SS Credit Accessible Outdoor Space 1 1

SS Credit Enhanced Resilient Site Design 2 2

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction 2 2

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 1 1

MR Credit Low Emitting Materials 2 1

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 5 5

EQ Prerequisite Construction Management Required Required

EQ Prerequisite Fundamental Air Quality Required Required

EQ Prerequisite No Smoking or Vehicle Idling Required Required

EQ Credit Enhanced Air Quality 1 1

EQ Credit Occupant Experience 7 7

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 16
 New
Quality of life Core and Shell
Construction
EQ Credit Accessibility and Inclusion 1 1

EQ Credit Resilient Spaces 2 2

EQ Credit Air Quality Testing and Monitoring 2 –

New
Ecological conservation and restoration Core and Shell
Construction
IP Prerequisite Tenant Guidelines – Required

IP Credit Integrative Design Process 1 1

IP Credit Green Leases – 6

LT Credit Sensitive Land Protection 1 1

LT Credit Compact and Connected Development 6 6

SS Prerequisite Minimized Site Disturbance Required Required

SS Credit Biodiverse Habitat 2 2

SS Credit Accessible Outdoor Space 1 1

SS Credit Rainwater Management 3 3

SS Credit Enhanced Resilient Site Design 2 2

SS Credit Heat Island Reduction 2 2

SS Credit Light Pollution Reduction 1 1

WE Prerequisite Water Metering and Reporting Required Required

WE Prerequisite Minimum Water Efficiency Required Required

WE Credit Water Metering and Leak Detection 1 1

WE Credit Enhanced Water Efficiency 8 7

MR Prerequisite Planning for Zero Waste Operations Required Required

MR Credit Building and Materials Reuse 3 5

MR Credit Building Product Selection and Procurement 5 5

Construction and Demolition Waste
MR Credit 2 2
Diversion
EQ Prerequisite No Smoking or Vehicle Idling Required Required

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 17
INTEGRATIVE PROCESS, PLANNING, AND
ASSESSMENTS (IP)
OVERVIEW
As an industry, the built environment has evolved to prioritize whole-building performance and
impact over isolated systems. The Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments (IP) credit
category builds on this approach in LEED v5 by emphasizing the importance of early-stage
interdisciplinary collaboration and holistic, iterative planning to arrive at interrelated solutions. By
using systems thinking to identify synergies among building systems and components before
the design phase begins, projects prioritize the value of intentionally integrated design
processes.

This holistic approach promotes the proactive consideration of how each project addresses
decarbonization, quality of life — including equity and resilience — and ecosystem conservation
and restoration from the outset. The strategies within the IP category help shape projects that
are environmentally responsible, resilient, and equitable, benefiting both occupants and the
broader community. Key aspects of this category include:

• Timing. Initiating analysis in the early stages of the project (pre-design).

• Engagement. Involving the right people.
• Interdisciplinary collaboration. Leveraging synergies across credit categories to
maximize efficiencies and inform decision-making.
• Assessment-based understanding. Discovery that provides insights into natural
hazards, carbon emissions, and human impacts.

Decarbonization
The built environment contributes significantly to global GHG emissions, accounting for 21% of
total GHG emissions and 31% of global carbon emissions in 2019 for operational carbon
emissions alone.2 The IP category’s 25-year carbon assessment addresses energy use,
refrigerants, embodied carbon, and transportation impacts (IPp3: Carbon Assessment). This
assessment promotes carbon literacy and equips project teams with knowledge to apply to
future projects, fostering industry-wide progress.

This assessment pulls from other sections of the rating system to support consistent and
meaningful carbon reduction (MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon, MRc2: Reduce
Embodied Carbon, MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement).

2 “Chapter 9”: Buildings. (n.d.). IPCC. https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg3/chapter/chapter-9//

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 18
Quality of life
Environmental justice and similar movements highlight the importance of understanding a
community’s social context. Additionally, there is greater emphasis on practitioners' need to
prioritize the health, safety, and welfare of building occupants. The American Institute of
Architects Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct outlines their view of the obligation of
designers, stating, “Members should employ their professional knowledge and skill to design
buildings and spaces that will enhance and facilitate human dignity and the health, safety, and
welfare of the individual and the public.”3 The IP category addresses equity by requiring an
understanding of the local community, workforce, and supply chain, which encourages teams to
confront inequities and positively impact their communities (IPp2: Human Impact Assessment).

Site-level resilience is a key topic throughout LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED BD+C:
Core and Shell. Munich Reinsurance America reported that global disaster losses in 2023
totaled $250 billion, highlighting the significant financial impact that natural disasters have
worldwide.4 The assessment aims to evaluate observed, projected, and future natural hazards
for climate resilience and is meant to enhance awareness, increase transparency, reduce
vulnerabilities, and ensure long-term safety and sustainability (IPp1: Climate Resilience
Assessment).

Ecological conservation and restoration

With a focus on ensuring the applicable expertise is in the room at the earliest stages (pre-
design), the IP category specifically highlights identifying goals that impact ecosystems (IPc1:
Integrative Design Process). Strategies such as restorative site design, responsible product
selection, and light pollution reduction all help improve a building’s impact on the local
environment (Sustainable Sites credit category and MRc4: Building Product Selection and
Procurement). This approach encourages project teams to assess site conditions holistically,
incorporating strategies that enhance biodiversity, protect natural resources, and support long-
term ecological resilience.

By fostering early collaboration, holistic assessments, and interdisciplinary planning, the IP

category helps project teams develop the foundation for resilient, equitable, and environmentally
responsible buildings. These strategies ensure that projects not only meet immediate
performance goals, but also contribute to a sustainable, long-term future for both people and the
planet.

3 AIA Code of Ethics and Professional Conduct, Canon 1, ES1.5 ‘Design for Human Dignity and the Health, Safety, and Welfare of
the Public’ https://www.aia.org/code-ethics-professional-conduct
4 “Uncounted Costs - Data Gaps Hide the True Human Impacts of Disasters in 2023.” 2024. UNDRR. Jan. 17,
2024. https://www.undrr.org/explainer/uncounted-costs-of-disasters-2023.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 19
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

CLIMATE RESILIENCE ASSESSMENT

IPp1
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To promote the comprehensive assessment of observed, projected, and future natural hazards
for climate resilience with an aim to enhance awareness of hazards, increase transparency of
risks, reduce vulnerabilities, and ensure long-term safety and sustainability.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Climate and Natural Hazard Assessment

Complete a climate and natural hazard assessment.

As part of the assessment, identify observed, projected, and future natural hazards that could
potentially affect the project site and building function. Address site-specific natural hazards,
including, but not limited to, drought, extreme heat, extreme cold, flooding, hurricanes and high
winds, hail, landslides, sea level rise and storm surge, tornadoes, tsunamis, wildfires and
smoke, winter storms, and other relevant hazards (specify).

Identify two priority hazards, at minimum, to address through proposed design strategies. For
each priority hazard, the project team must assess and specify the following:

• Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change emissions scenario used, specifying the

shared socioeconomic pathways.
• Projected service life of the LEED project (e.g., fiscal year 2050 or 100 years).
• Hazard level.
• Hazard risk rating.
• Exposure, sensitivity, adaptive capacity, vulnerability, and overall risk levels.
• Potential impact on the project site and building function.
• Potential impact on the project site during construction.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 20
Where possible, use the information from the assessment to inform the planning, design, and
operations and maintenance of the project and describe how project-specific strategies were
considered.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Incorporating climate resilience into the design and development of new construction projects
helps mitigate the impacts of climate change and enhances the long-term durability of buildings
against key vulnerabilities. A climate resilience assessment supports project teams in identifying
and evaluating site-specific climate hazards that could threaten the performance, safety, and
longevity of a building. This process provides a framework for embedding data-driven, forward-
looking strategies that align with regional climate adaptation plans, building codes, and
sustainability objectives.

Addressing climate risks during the design and construction phases not only improves a
building’s ability to withstand extreme weather events but also supports broader goals of public
safety, economic stability, cultural preservation, and community resilience. By integrating these
considerations, new development projects can better adapt to changing conditions. This
ensures long-term functionality, reduced lifecycle costs, and a more sustainable environment.

This prerequisite requires project teams to conduct a comprehensive climate and natural hazard
assessment, identifying current and projected hazards that may impact the project site and
building operations. The assessment must address site-specific hazards such as drought, heat,
flooding, hurricanes, wildfires, tornadoes, and other relevant risks. Teams must prioritize at least
two hazards and analyze them using the emissions scenarios from the Intergovernmental Panel
on Climate Change’s (IPCC) Shared Socioeconomic Pathways5 (SSPs), specifying the project’s
service life and assessing hazard levels, risks, vulnerability, and potential impacts on site
operations and construction. In addition to the safety and welfare of occupants, the findings
should be used to inform the project’s planning, design, construction, operations, and
maintenance and remain in alignment with the critical need to design for asset longevity.

Conducting a climate and natural hazard assessment is required to identify key vulnerabilities
and guide operational decisions to improve project resilience over its lifespan. For many teams,
especially those new to risk assessments, this will be an educational and goal-setting process.
In identifying risks and vulnerabilities, teams can begin to integrate project-specific resilience
strategies aimed at mitigating the impacts of natural hazards and enhancing the project’s
adaptation capacity.

5Iturbide, M., Fernández, J., Gutiérrez, J.M. et al. “Implementation of FAIR principles in the IPCC: the WGI AR6 Atlas repository.”
Sci Data 9, 629 (2022). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41597-022-01739-y.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 21
Climate and Natural Hazard Risk Assessment
A climate and natural hazard assessment is a systematic process to identify, evaluate, and
understand the potential risks that climate change and natural hazards pose to a specific project
and its functionality. This assessment considers observed and projected hazards, including
extreme weather events such as droughts, floods, wildfires, tornadoes, and hurricanes, as well
as long-term phenomena such as sea level rise. The analysis involves gathering data on the
likelihood, severity, and timing of these hazards, using the IPCC’s emissions scenarios. Key
elements of the assessment include evaluating the project’s exposure, sensitivity, adaptive
capacity, and vulnerability to these risks, as well as identifying the overall hazard risk levels.
Climate risk emerges from the interaction of hazard, exposure, and vulnerability. Hazards
include climate-related physical events or trends that can cause damage or loss, while exposure
encompasses the presence of assets, services, resources, and infrastructure that may be
affected. For the purposes of this credit, natural hazards include drought, extreme heat or cold,
flooding, hurricanes and high winds, hailstorms, landslides, sea level rise, storm surge,
tornadoes, tsunamis, wildfires and smoke, and winter storms. For each identified hazard, the
team must complete the climate resilience assessment template or an equivalent, documenting
exposure, risk levels, and potential mitigation strategies.

Vulnerability is the tendency or predisposition to experience negative effects. It can include land
use, public infrastructure, the burden of disease in the population, and previous exposure to
hazards. A climate and natural hazard assessment evaluates the potential risks climate change
and natural hazards pose to a project, helping to identify, analyze, and plan for these risks to
protect the long-term safety, functionality, and resilience of infrastructure, communities, and
ecological systems.

Identification of priority hazards

Based on the assessment, project teams must identify at least two priority hazards by
evaluating site-specific climate conditions, historical hazard data, projected future risks, and the
building’s exposure, sensitivity, and adaptive capacity. The assessment should incorporate
regional climate models, hazard mitigation plans, and available climate risk databases to
determine the likelihood and severity of each potential hazard. Teams should also consider how
local infrastructure, soil conditions, and water management systems may exacerbate or mitigate
risks.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 22
To support this evaluation, project teams can use tools such as the FEMA National Risk Index6,
NOAA Climate Explorer7, or state and municipal hazard mitigation and adaptation plans to
identify patterns of past and projected hazard events. Stakeholder engagement with local
authorities, utilities, and community resilience groups can further inform risk prioritization. For
example, if a site is in a flood-prone area with increasing extreme precipitation events, flooding
may be identified as a priority hazard due to its potential to damage flooring, walls, and electrical
systems. Similarly, in regions experiencing rising temperatures, extreme heat may be prioritized
due to its impact on material degradation and increased cooling loads.

Once teams identify priority hazards, teams must document findings in the climate resilience
assessment template or submit an equivalent assessment using an external tool. This process
allows for climate risks to be systematically analyzed and integrated into the project’s planning,
design, and operational strategies.

Assessing hazards
After two priority hazards have been identified, evaluate the impact by specifying the IPCC
emissions scenario used in the assessment, which outlines possible future atmospheric GHG
concentrations. Teams should define scenarios that are both acceptable and appropriate for the
project’s geographic location, taking into account local climate action plans to guide their
selection. For instance, projects aiming to align with ambitious global climate mitigation goals or
for those with shorter lifespans (20-30 years) should use Shared Socioeconomic Pathways
(SSP) 1–2.6 (Low Emissions Scenario)8, where less severe climate impacts are expected.
Conversely, projects in high-risk areas, those with longer lifespans (50+ years), or where
significant climate impacts are anticipated due to limited mitigation measures or regional
vulnerabilities find SSP5-8.5 (High Emissions Scenario) more suitable.

Next, teams define the projected service life of the project. For LEED projects, the projected
service life refers to the project’s expected lifespan, which could extend to fiscal year 2050 or up
to 100 years, during which the assessment of hazard risks remains applicable. Project teams
must also evaluate the hazard level and assign a hazard risk rating based on the potential
severity and impact. The hazard level reflects the intensity of a specific hazard event,
categorized as low, medium, or high. Project teams should report and identify the level of each
potential hazard using historical data and future projections. Teams can refer to the IPCC
climate projections for historical data or climate projections. The hazard risk rating typically

6 “The National Risk Index”, FEMA, accessed on April 2, 2025, https://hazards.fema.gov/nri/.

7 “The Climate Explorer”, NOAA, accessed April 2, 2025, https://crt-climate-explorer.nemac.org/.
8 Iturbide, M., Fernández, J., Gutiérrez, J.M. et al. “Implementation of FAIR principles in the IPCC: the WGI AR6 Atlas repository.”
Sci Data 9, 629 (2022). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41597-022-01739-y.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 23
comes from local or regional hazard mitigation plans, and it assesses the likelihood of a hazard
occurring. Teams must provide a risk rating for each identified hazard.

Project teams must assess the project’s susceptibility to each hazard and consider multiple
factors, including exposure, sensitivity, adaptive capacity, vulnerability, and overall risk levels.
Exposure refers to the degree to which the project is vulnerable to hazards, such as its proximity
to water bodies or seismic zones. Sensitivity indicates how significantly these hazards may
affect the project, based on factors like materials, structural design, and infrastructure. Adaptive
capacity is the project’s ability to adapt, withstand, or recover from the impacts of hazards
through resilient design, contingency planning, or technology. A project with backup generators
and multiple water supply systems has a higher adaptive capacity compared to one without.

Vulnerability reflects the project’s overall susceptibility, considering both its sensitivity and
adaptive capacity. The overall risk level is a combined assessment of hazard severity, exposure,
sensitivity, adaptive capacity, and vulnerability, categorized as low, medium, or high.

Teams must assess the potential impacts of each hazard on the project. Project hazards can
disrupt essential services, damage structures, cause long-term operational challenges, and
impact project operations. In the operations phase, the assessment must consider how these
hazards affect facility management, occupant safety, and service continuity. This includes
potential disruptions to building systems, energy and water supply, indoor air quality, emergency
preparedness, workforce safety, and the long-term performance of structural and mechanical
components. Hazards may also affect maintenance schedules, operational costs, and the ability
to provide critical services during extreme weather events.

Integration into project planning and design

As part of the climate resilience assessment, use the findings from the hazard assessment to
guide the project’s planning, design, operations, and maintenance phases. For instance, in the
planning and design phase, teams can select less vulnerable areas on site and implement
resilient site design strategies such as elevated foundations. The team must describe how the
climate resilience assessment shaped design strategies, particularly to mitigate priority hazards,
while also demonstrating alignment with specific LEED credits.

For example, if flooding is identified as a priority hazard, strategies could involve raising a
building’s foundation, using permeable paving, or incorporating drought-resistant landscape
features, which also support LEED credits such as SSc3: Rainwater Management and SSc4:
Enhanced Resilient Site Design.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 24
Another example is when operations teams optimize HVAC performance (supporting EA credits)
and implement adaptive occupant comfort strategies (supporting EQ credits) if is extreme heat
is a concern.

Where possible, integrate resilience considerations into project planning, design, and
construction to ensure the building is adaptable to changing climate conditions. Incorporating
risk-informed strategies early in the process allows teams to design for long-term durability,
occupant safety, and operational continuity. Identifying site-specific hazards and vulnerabilities
enables the development of design solutions that mitigate natural hazards, enhance resilience,
and minimize future disruptions. This approach supports building performance, occupant well-
being, and lifecycle sustainability by embedding resilience measures into structural, mechanical,
and site design strategies. Through proactive planning and design, teams can better sustain
functionality, occupant well-being, and asset longevity and ensure resilience measures remain
effective throughout the project’s lifespan. This process facilitates adaptation to evolving threats
and preserves the building’s functionality and safety throughout its expected lifespan, contingent
on effective strategy implementation.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All The project’s climate and natural hazard assessment (using
the USGBC Climate Resilience Assessment Template or
equivalent)

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, Working Group I, Sixth Assessment Report
(interactive-atlas.ipcc.ch/)
• FEMA National Risk Index (hazards.fema.gov/nri/hazards.fema.gov/nri)
• NOAA Climate Explorer (crt-climate-explorer.nemac.org/crt-climate-explorer.nemac.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 25
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

HUMAN IMPACT ASSESSMENT

IPp2
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To ensure that project development is guided by a thorough understanding of the social context of the
local community, workforce, and supply chain, helping to address potential social inequities.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Human Impact Assessment

Human Impact Assessment

Complete a human impact assessment that draws on relevant information from the following
four specified categories, as applicable:

• Demographics. This may include race and ethnicity, gender, age, income, employment
rate, population density, education levels, household types, and identification of nearby
vulnerable populations.
• Local infrastructure and land use. This may include adjacent transportation and
pedestrian infrastructure, adjacent diverse uses, relevant local or regional sustainability
goals/commitments, and applicable accessibility codes.
• Human use and health impacts. This may include housing affordability and availability,
availability of social services (e.g., healthcare, education, and social support networks),
community safety and local community groups, and supply chain and construction
workforce protections.
• Occupant experience. This may include an opportunity for daylight, views, and
operable windows; environmental conditions of air and water; and adjacent
soundscapes, lighting, and wind patterns within the context of the surrounding buildings
(e.g., a microclimate, a solar scape, neighboring structures).
• Other. (specify)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 26
Where possible, use the information from the assessment to inform the planning, design, and
operations and maintenance of the project and describe how project-specific strategies were
considered.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires that the project team comprehensively evaluate and understand the
social, economic, and environmental context of the local community, workforce, and supply
chain before developing the project. To support this, teams should use methods such as site
analysis, community outreach, census reports, GIS mapping, and partnerships with local
organizations. This will help ensure the project aligns with community needs and promotes
equitable outcomes. Teams must select key characteristics to evaluate within the categories of
demographics, local infrastructure and land use, human use and health impacts, and occupant
experience. These analyses and findings will guide the project’s planning, design, operations,
and maintenance strategies.

Ultimately, this assessment balances environmental goals with the needs and aspirations of the
people affected, fostering projects that are both ecologically and socially responsible. It supports
frameworks for how designers ensure the health, safety, and welfare of those they design for.
This will be an educational process for teams, especially for those who have not conducted
similar assessments previously. With intentional planning, teams can integrate project-specific
strategies by identifying potential disparities and work collectively toward creating a more
inclusive and equitable community.

Human Impact Assessment

A human impact assessment is a process in which quantitative and qualitative data for a
proposed project are collected through identifying characteristics unique to the project site and
its surrounding community. Projects are required to consider the sociopolitical context of the
site. The means looking at the cultural makeup of neighboring residents or average income
rates. Additionally, it asks for projects to identify relevant infrastructure and policy such as
zoning restrictions or accessibility codes. The assessment also requires taking stock of what
resources may be accessible to the residents or potential end-users. This includes transit
availability or healthcare. Lastly, it evaluates impacts on occupant experience, such as air and
water quality. Project teams must consider how these elements interact with and impact each
other to ensure that they guide project development with a comprehensive understanding of its
social context.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 27
Defining community
Project teams must first establish the scope of their assessment by identifying who the
community is. Communities have both geographic and functional definitions. Geographic
communities start with the project’s neighborhood. This includes the people who live and work in
and near the project and interact with it by proximity. Geographic communities can also extend
beyond to include towns, cities, or counties. Functional communities include all occupants,
construction workers, and visitors who come to the building. These people may or may not live
nearby. Teams can shape community through various affinities or commonalities, such as age,
ethnicity, income level, housing status, or educational background. The community may extend
to include project team members such as architects, engineers, contractors, and designers who
oversee the planning, design, and construction phases. Community in the supply chain includes
material suppliers, manufacturers, distributors. It also involves the workforce involved in
production and transportation. This highlights the importance of local engagement and fair labor
practices.

Address the core categories of human impact

Teams must complete a thorough assessment that evaluates the potential impact of the project
on people, including living conditions, health, food security, education, and access to other
resources. The assessment must include data collection and analysis of core human impact
categories such as demographic, infrastructure, health, and occupant experience factors, as
well as any other relevant social impacts identified, providing a comprehensive overview of the
human impacts of project development. Project teams encourage engagement with community
members and other relevant groups to gather insights, understand local needs, and validate
data.

DEMOGRAPHICS
The first category evaluates the local demographics of the area surrounding the project
site, which is critical to understanding how the development may influence the social
fabric of the surrounding community. This process involves analyzing key demographic
characteristics, including factors such as race and ethnicity, gender, age distribution,
income levels, employment rates, population density, education levels, and household
types. Additionally, the project includes identification nearby vulnerable populations to
consider how their needs can be addressed its development. It is suggested that teams
collaborate with nonprofit organizations that work directly with the people of the
community.

LOCAL INFRASTRUCTURE AND LAND USE

The second category examines the project’s impact on local infrastructure and land use,
as well as identifying existing infrastructure that provides an opportunity to connect to the
project. Teams must assess the adjacent public transit systems, such as walkways, bike

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 28
 lanes, and road networks, to ensure the project integrates well with existing mobility
options and promotes sustainable transportation. The evaluation requires an analysis of
diverse land uses in the vicinity, such as residential, commercial, industrial, and
recreational spaces. This will help determine how the project might influence the
functional balance of the area.

The assessment highlights the importance of reviewing the local community’s

sustainability commitments. These include city-wide goals to reduce GHG emissions or
promote energy efficiency, highlighting that the project can support broader efforts to
create a more sustainable future. Identifying and complying with relevant accessibility
codes and standards is crucial. This helps the project strengthen the project’s adherence
to legal requirements regarding access for people with disabilities, while following best
practices for creating inclusive, barrier-free environments.

HUMAN USE AND HEALTH IMPACTS

The third category evaluates the project’s effects on human use and its impact on public
health and well-being. This involves a thorough assessment of the community’s current
access to essential resources and assess the overall quality of life for residents. It is
important to assess whether the project will address or alleviate these challenges,
particularly regarding the availability of affordable housing. The assessment must also
consider the community’s access or proximity to social services, such as healthcare
facilities, educational opportunities, and support networks.

Community safety is another important factor for public health and well-being. Projects
that incorporate features such as public spaces, adequate lighting, and pedestrian-
friendly designs can foster a sense of safety and belonging. Projects must also consider
the protections and working conditions for the local supply chain and construction
workforce. This ensures ethical practices and fair treatment. Within the scope of reason,
this includes prioritizing local procurement and employment to support the local
economy, providing fair wages and benefits to workers, establishing safe jobsite
conditions, and implementing transparent labor practices to prevent exploitation and
unjust treatment.

OCCUPANT EXPERIENCE
The fourth category considers the project’s impact on the overall occupant experience.
The goal is to thoroughly examine how the design and construction of the project can
influence the health, comfort, and well-being of its occupants. This includes an analysis
of key environmental factors such as the availability of natural daylight, the quality and
orientation of views, the opportunity to provide operable windows for fresh air circulation,
as well as air and water quality. Additionally, it considers how external elements – such

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 29
 as the surrounding soundscapes, the quality of artificial and natural lighting, and the
impact of wind patterns on the building and adjacent structures – affect the indoor
environment and the overall experience of those inhabiting the space. This assessment
encourages projects to create a positive and health-conscious environment for their
occupants.

OTHER
Project teams may include any additional relevant social factors in the human impact
assessment.

Integration into Project Planning and Design

Project teams should use the human impact assessment findings. These insights help inform
the project’s planning, design, operations, and maintenance phases. Things to consider include
how the identified social factors inform project-specific decisions, such as changes to design
features, operational practices, or community engagement strategies. Implementing strategies
such as these promotes inclusivity, fair labor practices, and equitable access to opportunities,
while supporting the community’s economic and social wellbeing. This integration is a tool to
drive meaningful change within the design as well as the community, thereby creating a more
resilient and sustainable project outcome.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All The project’s human impact assessment (using the USGBC
Human Impact Assessment Template or equivalent)

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 30
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

CARBON ASSESSMENT
IPp3
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To understand and reduce long-term direct and indirect carbon emissions, including on-site
combustion, grid-supplied electricity, refrigerants, and embodied carbon.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Carbon Assessment

Carbon Assessment
USGBC will provide the project team with a 25-year projection of the project’s emissions from
operations, refrigerants, and embodied carbon. The assessment will use the data from the
following:

• EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan

• EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
• MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon
• LTc4: Transportation Demand Management (optional)

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires the project team to conduct a 25-year carbon assessment of all
emissions within the project boundary but does not require any additional data to be entered
beyond what is already required by the three related prerequisites and the optional credit, if
pursued.

Until recently, most projects only considered GHG emissions from operational energy use, if
emissions were considered at all. However, as it has become increasingly clear that emissions
from construction (“embodied carbon”) and refrigerants can also be quite considerable, LEED
v5 has introduced prerequisites which assess carbon emissions from all three sources as well

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 31
as this unifying prerequisite which enables project teams to compare their sources of emissions
and see which are significant. This prerequisite takes the data from EAp1: Operational Carbon
Projection and Decarbonization Plan, EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management, MRp2:
Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon; as well as LTc4: Transportation Demand Management,
if that credit has been pursued. It then provides project teams with a report and visualization
showing how their different sources of emissions will compare over a 25-year time horizon. The
goal is to promote more informed carbon-related decision-making.

Carbon Assessment
USGBC will develop a 25-year carbon assessment of the estimated emissions from energy use,
refrigerants, embodied carbon, and for some projects, transportation from the data in the
prerequisites and optional credit. It includes:

• Annual carbon emissions from each source for 25 years.

• Cumulative emissions from each source each year for 25 years.
• Cumulative emissions over 25 years in total and from each source and the percentage of
the total from each source.

Additional considerations
The information in this carbon assessment provides an overview of the various
sources of carbon emissions and can help owners make informed decisions to
reduce the project’s emissions. Although not required for compliance, sharing the
25-year carbon projection with the owner can be beneficial. From the report,
owners can extract insights on how to reduce emissions over time.

This prerequisite does not require comprehensive carbon accounting, whole-

building life cycle analyses, nor is it meant to be a substitute for more in-depth
analysis. Rather, LEED v5 requires this basic cross-categorical carbon
assessment to enable a broad understanding of how project emissions across
sources will add up over time, using data all LEED v5 projects must be submitted
under other prerequisites and applying reasonable assumptions.

Assumptions Behind the Assessment

While project teams do not need to compile any calculations to complete this credit, the
following section outlines the assumptions behind the USGBC-supplied carbon assessment for
full transparency. Project teams should conduct their own analysis in addition to this carbon
assessment to produce more customized results.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 32
Analysis period
A 25-year period was selected because it captures a significant enough timeframe for projects
to see the impacts of their operational carbon emissions from energy and refrigerants and from
regular cycles of renovations, in comparison with initial carbon embodied. It does not extend
further, unlike some industry projections. This is because future uncertainties grow increasingly
dominant over time (e.g., grid decarbonization and advancements in building technologies).

Operational carbon emissions

The EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan calculates the business as
usual (BAU) carbon projection from operational emissions from energy over 25 years. The BAU
assumes that emissions from fuel use will remain constant, and that emissions from electricity
will decline by 95% over 25 years from the base year. See EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection
and Decarbonization Plan for more information.

Refrigerant emissions
EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management calculates the annual refrigerant emissions. Use
a default annual leakage rate of 2% OR an annual leakage rate of 1% for projects pursuing
Option 2: Limit Refrigerant Leakage of EAc7: Enhanced Refrigerant Management.

Embodied carbon emissions

MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon calculates the embodied carbon in GWP
(kgCO2e) of the structure, enclosure, and hardscape. To calculate the embodied carbon, refer to
the assumptions found in MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon.

To find the upfront embodied carbon emissions, multiply the MRp2: Quantify and Assess
Embodied Carbon embodied carbon values by 1.5 to account for interiors and MEP products,
A4, and A5 emissions. Recurring embodied carbon assumes the project undergoes renovations
every 10 years. To account for the recurring embodied carbon, multiply the MRp2: Quantify and
Assess Embodied Carbon embodied carbon values by 0.25.

These timeframes are estimates based on common renovation cycles and serve illustrative
purposes only.

Transportation emissions
Teams may only calculate the emissions projection from transportation when the project
pursues LTc4: Transportation Demand Management. The projections assume no change in
vehicle miles traveled (VMT) over the 25-year period, and a linear 95% decarbonization of the
grid.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 33
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Completed documentation of EAp1: Operational Carbon
Projection and Decarbonization Plan, EAp5: Fundamental
Refrigerant Management, MRp2: Quantify and Assess
Embodied Carbon, and if attempted LTc4: Transportation
Demand Management.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 34
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Prerequisite and Restoration

TENANT GUIDELINES
IPp4
REQUIRED
Core and Shell

INTENT
To communicate and coordinate the sustainable design and construction features of a base
building with the tenants and facilitate tenant LEED certification so that the completed space
more comprehensively addresses the rating system requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell N/A
Tenant Guidelines

Tenant Guidelines
Create tenant guidelines, to be shared with all tenants before signing the lease, including the
following content:

• A description of the sustainable design and construction features incorporated in the

core and shell project and the project’s sustainability goals and objectives, including
those for tenant spaces.
• Guidance and recommendations for incorporating sustainable strategies, products,
materials, and services in the tenant spaces. Refer to the attempted LEED prerequisites
and credits of the base building for content requirements.
• A point of contact, from the base building team or new owner, for further coordination of
base building design and construction documentation.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires that the base building project provides clear and detailed guidelines
for tenants to integrate sustainability into their spaces. These guidelines serve as a roadmap for
tenants to align their build-outs with the building’s sustainability objectives, fostering
collaboration between the base building team and tenants. It involves creating and distributing a
comprehensive set of guidelines that communicate the base building’s sustainable features and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 35
provide actionable recommendations for tenants. To maximize their impact, it is important that
all tenants receive the tenant guidelines document before they sign the lease, ensuring that they
consider sustainability during their design and build-out phases.

The guidelines must cover the following areas to ensure a comprehensive approach to
sustainability.

Description of the sustainable design and construction features of the base building
Sustainable design and construction features should emphasize the systems and strategies that
enhance energy efficiency, water conservation, materials sustainability, and indoor air quality.
Examples include:

• Energy efficiency. Includes LED lighting, high-efficiency HVAC systems, and renewable
energy integration.
• Water efficiency. Low-flow fixtures, water reuse systems, and high-efficiency plumbing
fixtures.
• Sustainable materials. Use of recycled-content materials, low-VOC paints, and finishes
that reduce environmental impact.
• Indoor air quality. Advanced ventilation systems, enhanced air filtration technologies,
and materials selection to minimize pollutants.

Clear sustainability goals for tenant spaces, aligned with the base building’s LEED
certification efforts
Set specific and measurable sustainability goals for tenant spaces, ensuring alignment with the
base building’s LEED prerequisites and credits. These goals should help tenants:

• Reduce energy and water use through submetering, efficient fixtures, and regular
performance tracking.
• Enhance waste diversion by implementing robust recycling and composting programs.
• Improve indoor environmental quality through strategies such as low-emitting materials
and proper ventilation design.

Providing tenants with measurable targets and examples–such as installing sub-meters or

submitting annual sustainability performance reports—helps them support the base building’s
progress toward LEED certification.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 36
Practical guidance on sustainable strategies for tenants to implement in their spaces,
tailored to meet the base building’s sustainability targets
Offer practical, actionable recommendations for tenants to align their spaces with the base
building’s sustainability goals. Strategies should include:

• Water conservation. Using low-flow fixtures and water-efficient appliances.

• Energy efficiency. Selecting energy-efficient lighting, appliances, and HVAC systems.
• Material selection. Prioritizing low-emitting and sustainable materials to improve indoor
air quality.
• Waste reduction. Incorporating recycling programs and minimizing construction waste.

These strategies must align with the LEED prerequisites and credits pursued by the base
building. Providing tailored guidance ensures tenants understand how their choices can
enhance the overall sustainability of the building.

Some prerequisites and credits in the rating system highlight specific information that must be
included in the tenant guidelines, at a minimum.

Aligning tenants’ operations with the building’s sustainability targets can play a vital role in
supporting future LEED certification or recertification efforts. This alignment encourages tenants
to consider sustainability in their daily operations and decision-making processes, reinforcing a
culture of environmental responsibility.

Point of contact
Designate a specific point of contact, either from the base building team or the building’s owner.
This individual is responsible for:

• Coordinating communication about the base building’s sustainable design and

construction documentation.
• Providing tenants with resources and support to align their spaces with the building’s
sustainability objectives.
• Delivering tenant training sessions, sharing regular updates, and addressing questions.

This role ensures tenants have access to the expertise and guidance needed to implement the
strategies outlined in the guidelines effectively.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 37
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All The project’s tenant guidelines

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 38
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Credit and Restoration

INTEGRATIVE DESIGN PROCESS

IPc1
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To support high-performance, cost-effective, and cross-functional project outcomes through an
early analysis and planning of the interrelationships among systems. To provide a holistic
framework for project teams to collaboratively address decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration across the entire LEED rating system.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Integrative Design Process 1

Integrative Design Process (1 point)

Beginning in predesign and continuing throughout early occupancy, identify and apply
opportunities to achieve synergies across disciplines and building systems through the following
initiatives:

• Integrated team: Assemble and convene an interdisciplinary project team with diverse
perspectives. Ensure the process is an equitable team effort through organized
facilitation.
• Design charette: During predesign or early in design, conduct a charette with the owner
or owner’s representative and participants representing at least four key perspectives
(e.g., architect, contractor, energy modeler, and community engagement
representatives).
• LEED goal setting: Work as a team to define a set of specific and measurable project
goals that address the LEED v5 impact areas of decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration. Incorporate these goals into the owner’s project
requirements.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit requires a different approach to design than the conventional, linear architectural
process. Conventionally, the design and construction disciplines work separately, leading to

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 39
fragmented solutions for design and construction challenges. These solutions often create
unintended consequences — some positive, but mostly negative. Integrating different areas of
practice helps project teams identify opportunities to significantly improve building performance
and achieve synergies that yield economic, environmental, and human health benefits.

Integrative Design Process

In an integrative design process (IDP), an entire team (client, designers, builders, and
operators) identifies overlapping relationships, services, and redundancies among systems so
that interdependencies and benefits that would have otherwise gone unnoticed, to increase
performance and reduce costs. This approach requires project teams to have representatives
from various disciplines sharing their knowledge, analyses, and ideas to inform and connect
each other’s work. Following this model LEED credits become aspects of a whole rather than
separate components, and the entire design and construction team can identify the
interrelationships and linked benefits across multiple LEED credits.

Approaching certification using an integrative process gives the project team the greatest
chance of success. The process includes three phases:

• Discovery. This is the most important phase of the integrative process and is an
extensive expansion of pre-design. Without this phase, it can be a challenge for projects
to meet environmental goals in a cost-effective way. Discovery work should take place
before schematic design begins.
• Design and construction (implementation). This phase begins with schematic design.
It resembles conventional practice but integrates all the work and collective
understanding of system interactions reached during the discovery phase.
• Occupancy, operations, and performance feedback. This phase focuses on
preparing to measure performance and creating feedback mechanisms. Assessing
performance against targets is critical for informing building operations and identifying
the need for any corrective actions.

To achieve economic and environmental performance, every issue and all essential voices
(community, clients, designers, engineers, constructors, operators) should be brought into the
project at the earliest point and before anything is designed.

Conduct this holistic process of research, analysis, and workshops in an iterative cycle that
refines the design solutions. In the best scenario, teams will continue the research and
workshops until the project systems are optimized, all reasonable synergies are identified, and
the related strategies associated with all LEED credits are documented and implemented.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 40
Integrated Team
The first step involves assembling an interdisciplinary design team with relevant and impacted
parties, including owners, building users, architects, engineers, contractors, and community
representatives. Participants are to consider all project phases — from early design to
construction and operations — to collaboratively set goals, refine strategies, and balance
performance, feasibility, and costs.

During construction and procurement, contractors and builders offer insights on constructability,
materials, and life-cycle impacts, while collaboration during occupancy ensures that the design
intent is upheld, energy strategies are implemented effectively, and performance is monitored
for continuous improvement.

Design Charette
The first charrette with interdisciplinary members is crucial for collective agreement on goals,
priorities, and a shared project vision. Teams must proactively address major concerns early to
avoid re-design delays and inefficiencies later in the project lifecycle. Leveraging tools such as
energy and daylight modeling, Building Information Modeling, and life-cycle assessments (LCA)
during the conceptual design phase ensures a data-driven approach to identifying conflicts and
optimizing performance.

To foster engagement and collaboration, project teams must implement equitable processes by
facilitating well-structured meetings, workshops, and charrettes. Resources such as the U.S.
Department of Energy’s Handbook for Planning and Conducting Charrettes9 provide practical
checklists and agendas to guide these efforts.

LEED Goal Setting: Decarbonization, Quality of Life, and Ecosystem

Conservation and Restoration Goals
Project teams must establish measurable goals aligned with LEED v5’s core impact areas:
decarbonization, quality of life, and ecological conservation and restoration. It is an opportunity
for project teams to further connect assessment findings to project outcomes. Experts
recommend clear metrics to guide decisions, such as carbon reduction percentages, well-being
outcomes, or ecosystem restoration targets.

• Decarbonization. Strategies include reducing operational and embodied carbon

emissions. Teams can replace fossil fuel systems with renewable or electric solutions,

9 “A Handbook for Planning and Conducting Charettes”, U.S. Department of Energy, https://www.nrel.gov/docs/fy09osti/44051.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 41
 upgrade to energy-efficient equipment, and specify low-carbon materials such as high-
performance glazing and supplementary cementitious materials (SCMs) in concrete.
• Quality of life. A human-centered approach incorporates health, well-being, resilience,
and equity into the design. Strategies such as inclusive design and biophilic design,
which connect occupants to nature, reduce stress, improve air quality, and enhance
cognitive performance. Selecting non-toxic and hazard-resilient materials promotes
healthier indoor environments, benefiting occupants' physical and mental health as well
as long-term sustainability.
• Ecological conservation and restoration. Sustainable practices such as minimizing
soil erosion, planting native vegetation, and integrating green infrastructure (GI) (e.g.,
permeable pavement, green roofs) reduce environmental impact and restore ecological
functions.

Teams must use this thorough research and analysis during the pre-design phase to inform
LEED documentation requirements, including the owner’s project requirements (OPR), basis of
design (BOD), and construction documents. These documents are expected to clearly articulate
how project goals align with integrative design principles.

Narratives should comprehensively outline strategies and analyses, such as site assessments,
energy and water modeling, and LCAs, to demonstrate how the project meets sustainability
objectives. Teams should include robust justifications for their design decisions to ensure clarity
and accountability throughout the project lifecycle.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Evidence of the design charette date, the participants and their
roles, and the name and company of the facilitator (e.g., the
meeting notes for the design charettes).
All The OPR defines the goals for synergy across building
systems that address decarbonization, quality of life, and
ecosystem conservation and restoration, including how
success of each goal will be measured.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Integrative Process (IP) ANSI Consensus National Standard Guide© 2.0 for Design and
Construction of Sustainable Buildings and Communities (2012)
(usgbc.org/resources/integrative-process-ip-ansi-consensus-national-standard-guide-20-
design-and-construction)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 42
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Integrative Process, Planning, and Assessments Credit and Restoration

GREEN LEASES
IPc2
Core and Shell (1–6 points)

INTENT
To ensure the tenants complete the sustainable design and construction features started by the
base building so that the completed space comprehensively addresses the rating system
requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–6
Option 1. Standard Green Lease 1–6
AND/OR
Option 2. Executed Standard Green Lease 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Green Lease Leaders Recognition 1–6

Comply with a combination of the following options for a maximum of six points.

Option 1. Standard Green Lease (1–6 points)

Develop a standard green lease document that establishes tenant fit-out standards and
incorporates tenant requirements, as described below. Commit to incorporating the green lease
documentation in each future tenant lease.

For any spaces or systems intended to be fit out by the project owner, identify the standards for
the future fit-out, incorporate the criteria referenced in the standard green lease document, and
commit to performing the fit-out(s) in accordance with these standards.

Tenant requirements shall include standards to ensure compliance with the following
prerequisites for any tenant-installed systems:

• IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment

• IPp2: Human Impact Assessment
• IPp3: Carbon Assessment
• WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency
• EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 43
 • EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning
• EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting
• MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations
• EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality

Points are earned by incorporating a combination of the listed best practices into the green
lease (see Table 1).

• Require tenant to pay for their electric and nonelectric energy and water use.
• Implement cost-recovery clause for energy-efficiency upgrades benefiting the tenant.
• Disclose tracked common area energy use, peak demand, peak thermal demand, and
on-site combustion emissions to tenants.
• Disclose whole-building ENERGY STAR® or locally applicable equivalent score to
tenants.
• Ensure brokers or leasing agents have energy training.
• Implement energy management best practices.
• Request annual tenant energy disclosure.
• Require energy efficiency fit-out for tenants that improves upon EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency requirement.
• Establish a tenant energy efficiency engagement and training plan.
• Meter or submeter additional tenant energy use beyond that required in EAp4: Energy
Metering and Reporting.
• Limit on-site combustion emissions.
• Disclose tracked common area water use to tenants.
• Require water efficiency fit-out for tenants that improves upon WEp2: Minimum Water
Efficiency.
• Meter or submeter additional tenant water use beyond that required in WEp1: Water
Metering and Reporting.
• Implement water management best practices.
• Implement indoor air quality best practices.
• Implement thermal comfort best practices.
• Demonstrate innovation in leasing.

Table 1. Points for incorporating best practices

Number of additional best practices Incorporated into the Points
lease
Fewer than 3 1
4–6 2
7–9 3
10–12 4

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 44
 Number of additional best practices Incorporated into the Points
lease
13–15 5
16 or more 6

AND/OR

Option 2. Executed Standard Green Lease (1 point)

One additional point is awarded by providing documentation of an executed tenant green lease
or tenant letter of attestation meeting the criteria in Option 1.

AND/OR

Option 3. Green Lease Leaders Recognition (1–6 points)

Earn Green Lease Leaders recognition:

• At the Silver level (1 point)

• At the Gold level (3 points)
• At the Platinum level (6 points)

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit requires owners to develop a green lease document that establishes clear standards
and best practices for tenants and their operations, aligned with LEED goals. The green lease
functions as a framework for sustainability, incorporating key clauses and operational
procedures to ensure tenants and building owners actively promote sustainable practices, such
as energy and water efficiency, carbon emissions reduction, indoor air quality, and waste
management. A green lease ensures that both owners and tenants commit to achieving high-
performance building standards. Additional recognition is available for executing the green lease
or achieving certification through the Green Lease Leaders program10.

Pursuing green lease agreements fosters collaboration between property owners and tenants,
ensuring that sustainability goals remain a priority throughout the occupancy phase. Green
leases address the split incentive issue, aligning the costs and benefits of energy and water
efficiency investments to create equitable and successful agreements for both parties.

10 Green Lease Leaders. (n.d.), “Green Lease Leaders - Green Leasing Recognition Program”,
https://www.greenleaseleaders.com/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 45
Option 1. Develop a Standard Green Lease
Option 1 requires the development of a standard green lease that establishes tenant fit-out
standards incorporating tenant requirements, aligned with the identified LEED prerequisites. For
any spaces or systems intended to be fit-out by the project owner, teams must identify the
standards for the future fit-out for any tenant-installed systems or spaces. Tenant fit-outs must
comply with the following prerequisites:

• IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment

• IPp2: Human Impact Assessment
• IPp3: Carbon Assessment
• WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency
• EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency
• EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning
• EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting
• MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations
• EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality

Meeting these prerequisites is a critical first step toward achieving LEED certification, as they
establish minimum performance levels that must be met. It also ensures that the needs
identified in the assessments are carried out through operational strategies. Once you have
addressed prerequisites, teams can exceed minimum requirements by incorporating additional
best practices and innovative design strategies, thereby enhancing overall building
sustainability.

Incorporate green lease documentation in future leases

Owners must incorporate the green lease documentation into future tenant leases, including the
criteria outlined in the standard green lease. Resources such as the Institute for Market
Transformation (IMT) 2020 document11 and the BOMA International Green Lease Guide12, offer
detailed language examples and guidance for incorporating green clauses, operational
procedures, and best practices.

11 Institute for Market Transformation (IMT), (2020), Green Lease language examples, imt.org/wp-content/uploads/2020/02/IMT-
Green-Lease-Language-Examples-January-2020.pdf.
12 Noonan, K. M., BOMA International, Teitelbaum, S. A., Boutwell, M. N., Brodsky, S., Conrad, E. A., Engstrom, S. E., Gill, M., Gin,
F. K., Holcomb, C., Jonas, J. M., Mobilio, F., Moebius, W., Neff, S., O’Murray, C., Santamaria, C., Teitelbaum, S., Thalheimer, M.,
Wardle, G., . . . Zoccola, B. (2018), GREEN LEASE GUIDE, In D. Cloutier, L. M. Prats, & B. S. Walraven (Eds.), BOMA
International,
sustainablejersey.com/fileadmin/media/Actions_and_Certification/Actions/Energy/BOMA_2018_Green_Lease_Guide.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 46
Incorporate best practices into the green lease
Owners and landlords must include a tailored combination of best practices in the green lease
to go beyond minimum LEED prerequisites. A few of the best practices include:

• Require tenants to pay for their energy and water usage.

• Implement cost recovery clauses for energy efficiency upgrades that benefit tenants.
• Disclose tracked energy and water usage metrics (e.g., ENERGY STAR® scores, peak
demand).
• Ensure brokers or leasing agents receive energy training.
• Require tenant energy efficiency fit-outs that exceed LEED EA prerequisites.
• Include water and indoor air quality best practices (e.g., sub-metering, low-emitting
materials).
• Establish tenant training and engagement programs for sustainable practices.
• Limit on-site combustion emissions and implement renewable energy strategies.
• Demonstrate innovation in leasing.

Points are awarded based on the number of best practices incorporated (1–6 points).
Incorporating additional practices improves resource management and creates healthier, more
sustainable tenant spaces.

Option 2. Executed Standard Green Lease

Teams may earn one point for projects that provide documentation of an executed tenant green
lease or a letter of attestation meeting the criteria outlined in Option 1. Both parties must provide
a copy of the green lease agreement signed by them. If the tenant has not yet finalized the
green lease, they must submit a signed and dated letter as an alternative. The letter must
confirm the tenant’s commitment to meeting the specific sustainability criteria outlined in the
green lease, including compliance with LEED prerequisites and best practices as detailed in
Option 1. Key components of the letter of attestation may include tenant information, landlord
and tenant acknowledgment, commitment to sustainability requirements, specific best practices,
commitment to documentation and reporting procedures, and the tenant’s signature and date.

Executing a tenant green lease demonstrates a commitment to foster collaboration between

landlords and tenants. This collaboration can lead to improved energy efficiency, reduced
operating costs, and a more sustainable environment. The documentation serves as a tangible
acknowledgment of the efforts made toward sustainability, enhancing the credibility of both the
landlord and the tenant. It can also positively impact corporate reputations and align with
broader Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) goals. Providing this documentation is a

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 47
proactive step toward a sustainable future while securing additional recognition for the project
team’s initiatives.

Option 3. Green Lease Leaders Recognition

Option 3 rewards teams that join the Green Lease Leaders Program, an initiative developed by
the IMT with support from the U.S. Department of Energy. Open to the U.S. and international
companies including those in Canada, Europe, Australia, the United Kingdom, Japan, Costa
Rica, and Mexico, this three-year program offers valuable guidance to practitioners and teams
on best leasing practices to foster mutually beneficial landlord-tenant relationships. To help
create more sustainable buildings and energy efficient spaces, the program focuses on
providing resources that address four key steps to achieving long-term high-performance
buildings: site selection, lease negotiations, tenant fit-out, and tenant operations.

Participants benefit from established guidelines and free support while developing their green
leases, as well as peer leadership recognition and substantial energy savings when leases have
been implemented.13 The program also serves as an essential avenue to demonstrate
commitment to corporate ESG objectives and net-zero goals. Participating organizations
enhance their reputation and contribute to broader sustainability initiatives within the community.
Green Lease Leaders awards recognition through a tiered system, which includes three levels
of achievement: Silver, Gold, and Platinum.14 The recognition criteria align with the U.S. EPA’s
ENERGY STAR® Tenant Space recognition program.15 The points awarded at each level
correspond to the complexity and scope of the actions taken to implement green leasing
practices.

• Silver level. Recognizes the establishment of foundational policies and business

practices (e.g., a standard lease form that incorporates green lease language) that
encourages reduced energy and water consumption in leased spaces. For instance, the
prerequisite of the program minimum efficiency fit-out requires bests practices, such as
ENERGY STAR®-certified appliances and equipment, meter/submeter tenant energy,
use only low/no VOC paints, finishes, and adhesives.
• Gold level. Builds on silver level achievements and recognizes execution of green
leases and utility-efficient tenant fit-outs. For instance, this level may require
performance goal clauses within an executed lease.

13 “ENERGY STAR® Tenant Space”, ENERGY STAR®, (n.d.),

https://www.energystar.gov/buildings/building_recognition/tenant_space_recognition.
14 “Program Requirements - Green Lease Leaders”, Green Lease Leaders, (n.d.), https://www.greenleaseleaders.com/green-
leasing/program-requirements/#silver.
15 “ENERGY STAR® Tenant Space,” ENERGY STAR®.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 48
 • Platinum level. Exemplifies achievements by both the landlord and tenant to integrate
environmental and social priorities into the lease and best practices. This level includes
Gold requirements and additional requirements, such as documentation that verifies the
implementation of the performance goal and action plan.

For all recognition levels, tenants must provide evidence that the standard lease form or
corporate policy meets these two prerequisites:

• Provide sustainability contacts to landlords.

• Require minimum efficiency standards for leased space fit-outs.16

Landlords must establish a standard lease form or corporate policy that Prerequisite 1 and,
depending on the property type, either Prerequisite 2a or Prerequisite 2b.

• Prerequisite 1. Provide sustainability contact and/or information.

• Prerequisite 2a. Implement cost recovery clause for energy efficiency upgrades
benefiting the tenant.
• Prerequisite 2b. For multifamily properties, implement energy efficiency improvements
during unit turns.17

This LEED credit option awards points based on recognition levels. The Silver level carries 1
point, as it represents a first step toward sustainability, focusing on establishing basic green
leasing practices. LEED Gold carries three points, as it is more restrictive and acknowledges a
higher level of commitment. LEED Platinum carries six points, as it exemplifies the highest level
of achievement, where both landlords and tenants fully integrate advanced environmental and
social priorities into the green lease, demonstrating leadership in sustainability.

Landlords and tenants must consult the Green Lease Leaders18 website and the LEED v5
reference guides for comprehensive information on program requirements, detailed guidance on
clauses, and the application process. Additionally, they must use the interactive Microsoft Excel
workbook19 or contact a program team member, who can help through the application process.

16 “Green Lease Leaders Reference Guide for Tenants”, Institute for Market Transformation & U.S. Department of Energy, (2021),
https://www.greenleaseleaders.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Tenant-Reference-Guide.pdf.
17 Green Lease Leaders Reference Guide for Landlords, (2021), In Green Lease Leaders Reference Guide for Landlords [Report],
greenleaseleaders.com/wp-content/uploads/2023/07/Landlord-Reference-Guide.pdf.
18Program Requirements - Green Lease Leaders, (n.d.), Green Lease Leaders, greenleaseleaders.com/green-leasing/program-
requirements/#silver.
19 IMTComms, (2024, September 27), Teams Application Workbook - Green Lease Leaders, Green Lease Leaders,
greenleaseleaders.com/resource/teams-application-workbook/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 49
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options/ Paths Documentation
types Paths
All Option 1. All The project’s standard green lease.
Standard
Green Lease All Evidence of the Core and Shell project owner‘s
commitment to incorporating the green lease
documentation in each future tenant lease (e.g., a digital
signature by the Core and Shell Project Owner in LEED
Online).
Option 2. All For any spaces or systems intended to be fit-out by the
Executed project owner: identification of the standards for the future
Standard fit-out, incorporating the criteria referenced in the standard
Green Lease green lease document and the commitment to performing
the fit-out(s) in accordance with these standards (e.g., a
letter of commitment).
Option 3. All Evidence of the Green Lease Leaders recognition,
Green Lease including level (e.g., a screenshot of the listing in the Green
Leaders Lease Leaders database showing recognition level).
Recognition

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Green Lease Leaders Program (greenleaseleaders.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 50
LOCATION AND TRANSPORTATION (LT)
OVERVIEW
Location and transportation decisions play a crucial role in determining a project’s long-term
sustainability potential. The project’s chosen location significantly influences the surrounding
environment and community, affecting how people access the site, who can use it, and what
impact it has on local resources. By prioritizing strategies at the intersection of resource access,
land use patterns, and transportation, the Location and Transportation (LT) category guides
projects toward an efficient, equitable, and low-carbon future.

Given this significance, the LT category offers the third-largest number of potential points in
LEED v5. It prioritizes location-efficient sites that use existing infrastructure to promote land
conservation and support compact, connected communities. Increasing urban density has
manifold benefits: preserving natural habitats outside of major corridors, advancing equitable
development through transportation access and community connection, and improving
infrastructure efficiency.20 Emphasizing transportation demand management (TDM) further
promotes connected alternatives for mobility and equitable development. These benefits could
also generate trillions of dollars in economic savings for cities before 2050.21 One estimate
suggests that a more compact approach to urban growth could reduce infrastructure capital
requirements by more than $3 trillion USD between 2015 and 2030.22

Next, the LT category recognizes electric vehicle (EV) adoption to further reduce GHG
emissions and cultivate a transition to more sustainable mobility solutions.

Decarbonization
Transportation is responsible for nearly one-quarter of global energy-related carbon emissions.23
Recognizing the enormous momentum in the transportation sector, LEED v5 introduces
measures that anticipate a decarbonized future state. Strategies like transportation demand
assessment, enhanced EV incentives, and support for low-carbon and micromobility
alternatives, such as public transit, scooters, and bikeshares, can significantly reduce
associated project emissions. Public transport like buses and trains can reduce emissions by up

20 Haddaoui, Catlyne, “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl”, World Resources Institute, (n.d.),
https://www.wri.org/insights/cities-can-save-17-trillion-preventing-urban-sprawl.
21 Haddaoui, Catlyne, “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl”, World Resources Institute, (n.d.),
https://www.wri.org/insights/cities-can-save-17-trillion-preventing-urban-sprawl.
22 “New Climate Economy Technical Note: Infrastructure Investment Needs of a Low-Carbon Scenario”, Global Commission on the
Economy and Climate and New Climate Economy, (2014), https://www.newclimateeconomy.net.
23 “Transport - Energy System – IEA”, IEA, (n.d.), https://www.iea.org/energy-system/transport.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 51
to two-thirds per passenger, per kilometer compared to private vehicles.24 Projects should
rethink the dominance of traditional transportation approaches, encouraging a fundamental
mode shift away from SOVs to low-carbon alternatives (LTc4: Transportation Demand
Management, LTc5: Electric Vehicles).

Quality of life
By promoting more equitable and healthy communities through compact and connected growth,
the LT category provides pathways to affordable housing, local jobs, and sustainable
transportation in the surrounding community (LTc2: Equitable Development, LTc3: Compact and
Connected Development). This holistic approach fosters more inclusive, resilient, and
economically vibrant neighborhoods. By encouraging projects to embed these principles, the
category helps create communities where people can thrive.

Ecological conservation and restoration

Implementing low-carbon transportation and compact development options reduces emissions
and mitigates urban sprawl, which disrupts ecosystems and natural habitats.25 Researchers
estimate that about one-third of all terrestrial species will experience habitat loss, with some
species losing at least a tenth of their remaining habitat if global urbanization continues at its
current rate through 2050.26 Safeguarding sensitive lands such as wetlands, prime farmland,
floodplains, and steep slopes enables projects to protect biodiversity, preserve natural carbon
sinks, and bolster community resilience (LTc1: Sensitive Land Protection, LTc3: Compact and
Connected Development).

Through these strategies, the LT category aims to support a transformative increase in

understanding land use choices, accelerate the adoption of EV infrastructure, foster the
transition to low-carbon transportation, and enable project teams to see the enormous potential
to use location choice to support not only their own buildings, but also their surrounding
community.

24 Welle, Ben, “Post-Pandemic, Public Transport Needs to Get Back on Track to Meet Global Climate Goals”, World Resources
Institute, (n.d.), https://www.wri.org/insights/current-state-of-public-transport-climate-goals.
25 Haddaoui, Catlyne. n.d. “Cities Can Save $17 Trillion by Preventing Urban Sprawl.” World Resources Institute.
https://www.wri.org/insights/cities-can-save-17-trillion-preventing-urban-sprawl.
26 Laurance, William F., and Jayden Engert. 2022a. “Sprawling Cities Are Rapidly Encroaching on Earth’s Biodiversity.” Proceedings
of the National Academy of Sciences 119 (16). https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2202244119.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 52
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
and Restoration
Location and Transportation Credit

SENSITIVE LAND PROTECTION

LTc1
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To cultivate community resilience by avoiding the development of environmentally sensitive
lands that provide critical ecosystem services and reduce the environmental impact from the
location of a building on a site.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Option 1. Previously Developed Sites 1
OR
Option 2. Previously Undeveloped Sites 1

Option 1. Previously Developed Sites (1 point)

Locate the development footprint on land that has been previously developed.

OR

Option 2: Previously Undeveloped Sites (1 point)

Locate the development footprint on land that does not meet the following criteria for sensitive
land:

• Prime farmland: Prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local

importance as defined by the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 7, Volume 6, Parts
400 to 699, Section 657.5 (or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) and identified
in a state Natural Resources Conservation Service soil survey (or local equivalent for
projects outside the U.S.).
• Floodplains: A flood hazard area shown on a legally adopted flood hazard map or
otherwise legally designated by the local jurisdiction or the state. For projects in places
without legally adopted flood hazard maps or legal designations, locate on a site that is
entirely outside any floodplain subject to a 1% or greater chance of flooding in any given
year (100-year floodplain).
• Notable habitat: Land identified as habitat for one or more of the following:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 53
 o Species listed as threatened or endangered under the U.S. Endangered Species Act
or the state’s endangered species act.
o Species or ecological communities classified by NatureServe as GH (possibly
extinct), G1 (critically imperiled), or G2 (imperiled).
o Species listed as threatened or endangered species under local equivalent
standards (for projects outside the U.S.) that are not covered by NatureServe data.
• Water bodies: Areas on or within 100 feet (30 meters) of a water body, except for minor
improvements.
• Wetlands: Areas on or within 50 feet (15 meters) of a wetland, except for minor
improvements.
• Steep slopes: Protect 40% of the steep slope area on the site (if such areas exist) from
all development and construction activity.
o For unstable, undeveloped slopes between 15% and 25%, protect 40% from all
development.
o For unstable, undeveloped slopes steeper than 25%, protect from all development
and construction activity 60% of the steep slope area on the site.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards teams for considering their project’s impact on the local community and
ecosystems by selecting sites that minimize disruption and protect sensitive areas, such as
previously developed locations. Teams pursuing this credit can still achieve points for building
on locations not previously developed; however, that location must not be on prime farmland,
floodplains, habitat with threatened or endangered species, waterbodies, wetlands, or steep
slopes.

Option 1: Previously Developed Sites

Previously developed land is any land where infrastructure has been constructed and buildings
on the site do not further disrupt sensitive land. Building on previously developed sites helps to
conserve undeveloped land from development and construction activity within the project
boundary and is essential for maintaining a diverse ecosystem and compact land development
patterns, maintaining biodiversity and sustaining ecosystems that provide services such as
water filtration and soil stabilization, and keeping existing ecosystems intact and preserving their
ecological resilience. This supports ecosystems that are more resilient against future
environmental changes and disturbances.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 54
Option 2: Previously Undeveloped Sites
If developing entirely on previously developed land is not feasible, a project must preserve and
protect 40% of the greenfield area on the site from all development and construction activity and
must not locate the development footprint on sensitive land types, including prime farmland,
flood hazard zones, imperiled species habitat, wetlands or water bodies, and their surrounding
buffers or steep slopes. These types of sensitive lands have been identified as critical to
biodiversity, ecosystem services, and the safety and well-being of people.

The project must be designed so that the development footprint does not encroach on sensitive
areas.

Prime farmland
Prime farmland is land that has the best combination of physical and chemical characteristics
for producing crops and is of major importance in meeting the needs of food and fiber. It has an
adequate and dependable supply of moisture from precipitation or irrigation, a favorable
temperature and growing season, acceptable acidity or alkalinity, acceptable salt and sodium
content, and few to no rocks. Researchers use these lands with very rich soil are used for crop
testing farms, and local or state regulations protect them.

Unique farmland refers to land used for producing high-value food and fiber crops such as
citrus, tree nuts, olives, cranberries, as well as various fruits and vegetables. It possesses a
unique combination of soil quality, growing season, moisture supply, temperature, humidity, air
drainage, elevation, and aspect, allowing for the economical and sustainable production of high
yields when properly managed. 27

In some regions, farmers classify land that does not qualify as prime or unique farmland of
statewide or local importance because it produces food, feed, fiber, forage, and oilseed crops.
The appropriate state of local agencies establishes the defined criteria for this type of farmland
and typically include soils that closely meet the requirements for prime farmland, capable of
producing high crop yields when managed using proper farming practices. In favorable
conditions, some of these areas may yield crops comparable to prime farmland.28

Projects must avoid development on prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide
or local importance.

27 Natural Resources Conservation Service, (n.d.), Soil Data Access,

nrcs.usda.gov/publications/Legend%20and%20Prime%20Farmland%20-%20Query%20by%20Soil%20Survey%20Area.html.
28 Natural Resources Conservation Service, (n.d.), Soil Data Access,
nrcs.usda.gov/publications/Legend%20and%20Prime%20Farmland%20-%20Query%20by%20Soil%20Survey%20Area.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 55
Floodplains
New developments must not be located on floodplains. The project team must determine the
extent of flood hazard areas and identify them on a flood hazard map. Local governments, flood
management agencies, and other local entities such as the Federal Emergency Management
Agency (FEMA)29, may assist teams in using GIS or geospatial data to identify the location of
floodplain area.30 Projects with the development footprint of the site must be located entirely
outside any floodplain that has 1% or more of a chance of flooding for locations that are both
addressed and not addressed by a flood hazard map. A 1% annual-chance flooding, also known
as 100-year floodplain, means that there is a 1% chance that flood water will reach or surpass
base flood elevation in any given year, and that structures built within this area are at a high risk
of flooding. Building outside this zone reduces the likelihood of flood damage.

Notable habitats
Notable habitats refer to areas with threatened or endangered and imperiled species. These
areas are home to diverse plants, animals, and organisms with high ecological value and are
vulnerable to human actions, such as forests and coastal regions. These biodiversity-rich zones
provide human beings with what they eat, from the microorganisms that enrich the soil where
crops grow, to the pollinators that provide fruits and nuts, and the fish that serve as the main
sources of animal protein for billions of people.31 These habitats play an essential role in
maintaining ecological balance and supporting biodiversity, so projects must take action to
protect them.

Threatened or endangered species

Teams must avoid locating development footprints on land that contain species
listed as endangered or threatened that are listed under the U.S. Endangered
Species Act or local equivalent.

Projects must also avoid land identified as a habitat for species or ecological
communities classified by NatureServe.

Water bodies and wetlands

The development footprint cannot be within 100 feet of a water body or 50 feet of a wetland.
The only exception is if there are minor improvements within the buffer area that allow human
interaction, and the improvements do not significantly alter the existing vegetation and
hydrology of the area. Avoiding development on water bodies and wetlands is essential for

29 “Home page”, Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), accessed March 31, 2025, https://www.fema.gov.
30 “Flood Maps”, Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA), accessed March 31, 2025, https://fema.gov/flood-maps.
31 “Why is biodiversity important - with Sir David Attenborough”, The Royal Society, (2021, October 11),
https://youtube.com/watch?v=GlWNuzrqe7U.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 56
mitigating flooding and managing rainwater runoff, as wetlands naturally absorb excess water
and reduce the impacts of heavy rainfall. Human-made water bodies or wetlands do not meet
the requirements.

Projects that include water bodies and/or wetlands within the boundary, must provide a map
identifying the locations of any wetland or water bodies.

Steep slopes
Projects must avoid any unstable and undeveloped steep slopes. Building on steep slopes
presents risks that can affect the safety and stability of the building and pose environmental
risks to the area.

All project teams must identify unstable, undeveloped steep slope area on the site. An unstable
slope is susceptible to collapse or landslides, creating significant risks to human safety and
infrastructure. For unstable and undeveloped slopes between 15% and 25% steepness, the
project team must protect 40% of the steep slope area from all development and construction
activity. For slopes steeper than 25% steepness, teams must allocate 60% of this area as
protected zones where no development or construction activities will occur.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Description shows the previous development of the site.
Previously
Vicinity map or aerial images shows the approximate areas of
Developed
previous development on the site.
Sites
Option 2. All Site map(s) showing project boundary, development footprint,
Previously any previous development, any sensitive areas, topography,
Undeveloped and any minor improvements in required buffers.
Sites The project team that the criteria for prime farmland, flood
hazard, notable habitat, waterbodies, wetlands, and steep
slopes criteria were satisfied.
Estimated area of sensitive land avoided
Steep Percentage of slopes by classification that have been
Slopes developed or protected
Description on the protection of steep slope area according to
classification or legal documents protecting slopes steeper
than 15%.
Site survey or topographic map showing steep slope areas
relative to project site

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 57
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) (nrcs.usda.gov)
• NatureServe (natureserve.org)
• U.S. Endangered Species Act (fws.gov/law/endangered-species-act)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 58
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

EQUITABLE DEVELOPMENT
LTc2
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To support the economic and social vitality of communities, provide opportunities for community
members to live and work in close proximity, encourage project locations in areas with
developmental challenges and promote the ecology, culture, and health of the surrounding area.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. Priority Sites 1–2
Path 1. Brownfield Remediation 2
OR
Path 2. Historic Location 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Housing and Jobs Proximity 1–2
Path 1. Support Local Economy 1
OR
Path 2. Location-Efficient Affordable Housing 2
OR
Option 3. Equitable Construction 2
Schools 1–2
Options 1, 2, and/or 3 1–2
OR
Option 4. Equitable Access to Resources 2
Path 1. Public Use Spaces 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Community Partnership 1
Data Centers, Warehouses, and Distribution Centers 1–2
Options 1, 2, and/or 3 1–2
AND
Option 5. Sensitive Project Location

Option 1. Priority Sites (1–2 points)

PATH 1. BROWNFIELD REMEDIATION (2 POINTS)
Locate the project on a brownfield where soil or groundwater contamination has been identified
and where the local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction) requires its

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 59
remediation. In cases of voluntary remediation by the project team, provide confirmation by the
local, state, or national authority (whichever has jurisdiction), verifying that the site is a
brownfield. Perform remediation to the satisfaction of the relevant authority.

OR

PATH 2. HISTORIC LOCATION (1 POINT)

Locate the project in a historic district, identified by the local government, based on a growth
management plan or policy.

AND/OR

Option 2. Housing and Jobs Proximity (1–2 points)

PATH 1. SUPPORT LOCAL ECONOMY (1 POINT)
Employ individuals that live within the administrative district of the project site for 15% of the
construction jobs created by the LEED project.

OR

PATH 2. LOCATION-EFFICIENT AFFORDABLE HOUSING (2 POINTS)

For residential or mixed-use projects, include a proportion of new, affordable rental and/or for-
sale dwelling units priced for households earning less than the area median income (AMI).
Rental units must be maintained at affordable levels for a minimum of 15 years. Existing
dwelling units are exempt from requirement calculations. Meet or exceed the minimum
thresholds in Table 1. Projects must meet or exceed the requirements mandated through
inclusionary zoning by their local jurisdictions. Additionally, the project must achieve one of the
requirements below:

• Meet the requirements of LTc3: Compact and Connected Development, Option 2,

Access to Transit, for 2 points.
• Meet the requirements of LTc3: Compact and Connected Development, Option 3,
Walkable Location, for 2 points.
• Locate the project in a community where the jobs-to-housing ratio exceeds 1:2 within 0.5
miles (800 meters) of walking distance.

Table 1. Minimum affordable units

Unit type Requirements
Rental dwelling units Rental units, at least 10% of the project’s total residential
floor area, priced for up to 60% AMI.
For-sale dwelling units For-sale units, at least 10% of the project’s total
residential floor area, priced for up to 80% AMI.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 60
OR

Option 3. Equitable Construction (2 points)

Provide access to workforce development training for construction workers through one of the
following:

• Job-related skills training: This is achieved through on-the-job training in a Department

of Labor-registered apprenticeship program (or local equivalent for projects located
outside the U.S.), demonstrating that 15% or more of total project construction hours
were performed by participants enrolled in registered apprenticeship programs.
• Life-skills training: These are programs for construction workers, conducted by an
organization or government entity on the construction site, covering topics such as
financial literacy, debt management, first-time home buying, or entrepreneurship training,
demonstrating scheduling of one course per month for the duration of construction.

Schools (1–2 points)

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above. (1–2 points)

OR

Option 4. Equitable Access to Resources (2 points)

PATH 1. PUBLIC USE SPACES (1 POINT)
In collaboration with school authorities, ensure that at least three of the following types of
spaces in the school are accessible to and available for shared use by the public:

• Auditorium
• Gymnasium
• Cafeteria
• One or more classrooms
• Playing fields and stadiums
• Joint parking

Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours.

AND/OR

PATH 2. COMMUNITY PARTNERSHIP (1 POINT)

In collaboration with the school authorities, contract with the community or other organizations
to provide at least two types of dedicated-use spaces in the building, such as the following:

• Commercial office
• Health clinic

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 61
 • Community service centers (provided by state or local offices)
• Library or media center
• Parking lot
• One or more commercial businesses

Provide access to toilets in joint-use areas after normal school hours.

Data Centers, Warehouses, and Distribution Centers (1–2 points)

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above. (1–2 points)

AND

Option 5. Sensitive Project Location

Locate the project building a minimum of 300 feet (90 meters) away from the property lines of
the nearest sensitive receptors (e.g., residential areas, schools, daycare centers, places of
worship, hospitals, community centers, and public parks).

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit integrates equitable outcomes, community engagement, and community health as
fundamental considerations for achieving equitable development outcomes. Multiple options
and pathways are available to reward projects that show a measurable positive impact on the
surrounding community and adopt innovative approaches to equitable outcomes in physical
development.

Option 1. Priority Sites

Many communities and governments prioritize certain redevelopment sites to address critical
human equity issues. Building these sites can revitalize neighborhoods and bring social and
economic benefits directly to residents, such as improved access to jobs, housing, and services.
This approach helps transform underused or neglected areas into productive spaces that serve
the community. Additionally, redeveloping priority sites rather than greenfield or sensitive
ecological areas offers substantial environmental benefits, helping to conserve natural
landscapes while supporting sustainable urban growth.

PATH 1. BROWNFIELD REMEDIATION

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) defines a brownfield as “a property, the
expansion, redevelopment, or reuse of which may be complicated by the presence or potential

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 62
presence of a hazardous substance, pollutant, or contaminant.”32 This path promotes the
redevelopment of contaminated sites, where developers remove hazardous materials from a
site’s soil or groundwater, thereby reducing human and wildlife exposure to environmental
pollution and improving environmental health. Redeveloping contaminated sites often reduces
the footprint of the project’s elements, with a redevelopment site using an average of 78% less
land than the same project would use if it were built on a greenfield.33

PATH 2. HISTORIC LOCATION

This path rewards investing in historic areas, a proven strategy for maintaining and enhancing
community character. Underutilized properties within historic districts can have a rich history that
can contribute to both architectural and cultural preservation when incorporated into
redevelopment. The redevelopment of sites in historic districts can also reduce urban sprawl
through adaptive reuse. These areas were often originally designed as walkable communities
before the dominance of automobiles, with compact layouts that support pedestrian access to
amenities.

Option 2. Housing and Jobs Proximity

Many metropolitan areas within the U.S. exhibited robust job growth in the favorable economic
conditions that prevailed from 2010 up to the pandemic-induced recession of 2020.34 However,
not all of those areas matched job growth with housing growth. Some of the nation’s most
successful and productive metropolitan areas failed to meet housing demand, largely because
of restrictions on land use.

Projects employing individuals who reside within the administrative district help support the local
economy and foster a stronger connection between the community and the project. Additionally,
prioritizing the development of location-efficient affordable housing ensures that housing options
are both affordable and conveniently located near essential services, public transportation, and
employment opportunities. This not only reduces commuting time and environmental impact but
also enhances access to resources for residents. Furthermore, projects that invest in workforce
development training programs for construction workers can equip them with valuable skills that
promote career growth and economic mobility.

32 “Brownfields”, United States Environmental Protection Agency, last updated March 27, 2025, https://www.epa.gov/brownfields.
33 Deason, J. P., Sherk, G. W., & Carroll, G. A. “Public policies and private decisions affecting the redevelopment of brownfields”,
Environmental and Energy Management Program, George Washington University, (2001),
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/276292802_Public_Policies_and_Private_Decisions_Affecting_the_Redevelopment_of_Br
ownfields_An_Analysis_of_Critical_Factors_Relative_Weights_and_Areal_Differentials.
34 Kober, Eric. “The Jobs-Housing Mismatch: What It Means for U.S. Metropolitan Areas”, Manhattan Institute, (July 7, 2021),
https://manhattan.institute/article/the-jobs-housing-mismatch-what-it-means-for-u-s-metropolitan-areas.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 63
PATH 1. SUPPORT LOCAL ECONOMY
Building projects are key drivers of economic growth and development in local communities.
They generate employment, boost local economies, and enhance the overall well-being of the
regions they impact. The construction industry offers jobs across a wide range of skill levels,
creating opportunities within the community. In 2022 in Canada, over 1.5 million people worked
in the construction sector, which had nearly 95,000 additional jobs available.35 Construction
projects can also positively impact local businesses, such as suppliers of construction materials,
who may see increased demand, sales, and revenue.

Project teams pursuing this path must assess and report on the number of construction jobs
generated by the project as part of its contribution to local economic development. A minimum of
15% of the construction jobs created by the LEED project must employ individuals that live
within the administrative district, defined as a division of local government such as a
municipality, county, parish, or equivalent.

PATH 2. LOCATION EFFICIENT AFFORDABLE HOUSING

Addressing the housing to jobs mismatch is essential to ensure that developers locate
affordable housing near employment opportunities, reducing burdens on low-income
households. This mismatch occurs when housing availability is geographically disconnected
from job centers, forcing workers, particularly low-income individuals, to endure long commutes,
increased transportation costs, and limited access to employment. Rising rents and property
prices are making it harder for people to find homes they can afford, with low-income residents
disproportionately affected by high utility costs and service shutoffs. Affordable housing in the
right places, along with rental assistance, can reduce financial strain and support long-term
stability for these communities. Also, land use regulations are a significant barrier to affordable
housing in urban communities. Zoning restrictions, density limits, and lengthy permitting
processes often create challenges for builders trying to build affordable housing in high-demand
areas where jobs are concentrated.

Project teams must begin by considering the location of the development and identifying the
AMI for the project location. The AMI is a crucial benchmark used to determine affordability, as it
represents the midpoint of household incomes in the area, with half of the households earning
more and half earning less. Once teams determine AMI, they need to calculate pricing that
would qualify as an affordable rental or for-sale unit based on household income levels. The
square footage dedicated to said units must comprise a minimum of 10% of the project’s total
residential floor and meet the AMI requirements of the rating system. Teams must comply with
LTc3: Compact and Connected Development by meeting either Option 2: Access to Transit or

35 Bush, O. , “Construction Industry Statistics in Canada", Made in CA, updated January 3, 2025, https://madeinca.ca/construction-
industry-statistics-canada/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 64
Option 3: Walkable Location to ensure that they locate projects near amenities and public
transportation. Additionally, they must meet a jobs-to-housing ratio, which must exceed 1:2
within a 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking distance if pursuing the third option. A ratio exceeding
1:2 means there are more than 4.8 jobs for every four housing units within the 0.5 miles (800
meters) walking distance. A jobs-to-housing ratio of 1:2 or greater ensures jobs and housing are
located together, which can shorten commuting distances and improve access to employment.

Option 3. Equitable Construction

Providing workforce training is a key factor in maintaining an equitable, healthier, and supportive
environment for construction workers. Training enhances the technical skills of workers, allowing
them to work more efficiently, produce higher-quality results, and receive progressive wage
increases. The 94% of apprentices who complete a Department of Labor registered
apprenticeship program retain employment, with an average annual salary of $80,000 USD.36
Conducting training programs also makes construction workers feel valued and invested in.
Research has shown that this can lead to higher job satisfaction, lower turnover rates, and
reduced costs for recruiting and training new employees.37

Projects must develop and implement a strategy for providing workforce development training
for construction workers, focusing on either job-related skills training in a formal apprenticeship
program approved and validated by a local government agency, accredited school, labor union,
or other training programs conducted by an organization or government entity.

Schools
• Refer to Options 1, 2 and/or 3 above.

Option 4. Equitable Access to Resources

Sharing amenity spaces in the school with the public, organizations, and businesses will bring
social benefits to the local community. Shared spaces also help to reduce the need for new
development, thereby preserving previously undeveloped land and avoiding the financial costs
and environmental consequences of new construction. Schools that typically go unused during
after-school operating hours can offer to host community programs, thereby maximizing the
useful life of the building. In addition, communities may enjoy new or more convenient services.

36 “Explore Registered Apprenticeship”, Apprenticeship USA, updated April 2024,

https://www.apprenticeship.gov/sites/default/files/DOLIndFSApprent101-043024-508.pdf.
37 Rockwood, K. “How Learning and Development Can Attract and Retain Talent”, (January 14, 2022), https://www.shrm.org/topics-
tools/news/all-things-work/how-learning-development-can-attract-and-retain-talent.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 65
PATH 1. EQUITABLE ACCESS TO RESOURCES
Teams must collaborate with school authorities to identify and allocate at least three types of
eligible shared spaces for public use, discuss public needs to determine which spaces will be
available, and obtain written confirmation specifying the selected spaces. These spaces may be
in another school building within 0.25 miles (400m) walking distance, as long as it is part of the
same campus, and they must include toilet access to shared-space users after school hours.

PATH 2. COMMUNITY PARTNERSHIP

Project teams must collaborate with school authorities to identify and allocate at least two types
of eligible dedicated-use spaces within the project that will be made available to specific outside
organizations and with the school authorities and the chosen outside organization(s) to
determine which spaces in the project will be shared. Teams are encouraged to conduct a local
community needs assessment to identify high-priority services and guide outreach to relevant
organizations. Spaces must have designated toilet access to shared-space users after normal
school hours.

Data Centers, Warehouses, and Distribution Centers

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above and Sensitive Project Location.

Data centers and warehouses situated near residential areas or other sensitive sites such as
schools and daycare centers, can subject the community to issues including air and sound
pollution, environmental impacts, traffic, safety, and other community disruptions. For example,
data centers produce constant noise and vibrations because they require extensive amounts of
heating, ventilation, and cooling systems to maintain electronics operations.38

Projects must be at least 300 feet (90 meters) away from the property lines of the closest
sensitive receptors. To protect the health, safety, and well-being of vulnerable populations and
reduce the negative impacts of construction activities, project teams must identify and map all
sensitive receptors in the surrounding area to ensure compliance and minimize disruption.

38 Fischer, K. “Noise and vibration considerations for data centers and IT facilities”, FMJ / IFMA, (n.d.),
https://fmj.ifma.org/articles/noise-and-vibration-considerations-for-data-centers-and-it-facilities.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 66
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1. Documentation from authority having jurisdiction
Priority Sites Brownfield (AHJ) declaring existence of specific contamination
Remediation and confirming that remediation has been completed
to its satisfaction.
Path 2. Site map and vicinity map showing the project is
Historic within a historic district.
Location Documentation from AHJ over historic district
demonstrating the existence of the historic district
(e.g., ordinance, growth management plan,
government website with corresponding map, etc.).
Option 2. Path 1. Description of types of jobs created by the project.
Housing and Support
Total number of construction jobs created by the
Jobs Local
project.
Proximity Economy
Number of local construction jobs created by the
project.
Evidence of the contributing employed individuals live
within the administrative district of the project site.
Path 2. Evidence of AMI thresholds (60% and 80%) using
Location data from a governmental entity.
Efficient Copy of legal documentation to maintain affordable
Affordable rates for at least 15 years.
Housing Project’s total residential floor area.
Confirmation of target gross floor area of rental
dwelling units priced for up to 60% and/or 80% AMI.
Number of affordable units created (rent and sale
combined).
Confirmation showing project meets Compact &
Connected Development Options 2 or 3.
OR
Documentation demonstrating project is in a
community where the jobs-housing ratio exceeds 1.2
within a 0.5 mile (800-meter) walking distance.

Option 3. All Description of strategies to provide job-related skills

Equitable training or life-skills training programs for construction
Construction workers and who is conducting the training.
Schools Option 4. Path 1. Description of strategies to support accessibility to at
Equitable Public Use least three school spaces and accessibility to toilets
Access to Spaces for public use.
Resources Floor plan and/or site plan to show where the uses
occur and access to toilets.
Path 2. Description of strategies to support provision of at
Community least two dedicated-use spaces and accessibility to
Partnership toilets in the building for the community.
Floor plan and/or site plan to show where the uses
occur and access to toilets.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 67
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Data All All Vicinity map locating the project building and
Centers, sensitive receptors with property lines.
Warehouses,
and
Distribution
Centers

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 68
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

COMPACT AND CONNECTED DEVELOPMENT

LTc3
New Construction (1–6 points)
Core and Shell (1–6 points)

INTENT
To conserve land and ecosystem resources by encouraging development in areas with existing
infrastructure. To promote livability, walkability, and transportation efficiency, including reduced
vehicle distance traveled and associated emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–6
Option 1. Surrounding Density 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Access to Transit 1–4
Path 1. Public Transit Service 1–4
OR
Path 2. Project-Sponsored Transit Service 1–2
AND/OR
Option 3. Walkable Location 1–3
Schools 1–6
Options 1, 2, and/or 3 1–6
AND/OR
Option 4. Surrounding Density and Development 1–2
Path 1. Surrounding Density 1–2
AND/OR
Path 2. Connected Site 1–2
AND/OR
Option 5. Access to Transit or Pedestrian Access 1–4
Path 1. Access to Transit 1–4
OR
Path 2. Pedestrian Access 1–2
Data Centers, Warehouses, and Distribution Centers 1–6
Options 1, 2, and/or 3 1–6
AND/OR
Option 6. Surrounding Development and Resources 1–2
Path 1. Development and Adjacency 1–2
AND/OR
Path 2. Transportation Resources 1–2
Healthcare 1–6
Options 1, 2, and/or 3 1–6
AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 69
Achievement pathways Points
Option 7. Surrounding Density 1

Option 1. Surrounding Density (1–2 points)

Located on a site where the surrounding existing density within 0.25 miles (400 meters) offset of
the project boundary meets the values in Table 1. Use either the “separate residential and
nonresidential densities” or the “combined density” values in Table 1.

Table 1. Points for average existing density within 0.25 miles (400 Meters)
Combined density Separate density Points
Square feet per Square meters Residential Residential Nonresidential
acre of per hectare of density density density (FAR)
buildable land buildable land (DU/acre) (DU/hectare)
22,000 5,050 7 17.5 0.5 1
35,000 8,035 12 30 0.8 2

NOTE: DU = dwelling unit; FAR = floor-area ratio

AND/OR

Option 2. Access to Transit (1–4 points)

PATH 1. PUBLIC TRANSIT SERVICE (1–4 POINTS)
Locate any functional entry of the project within either:

• 0.25 miles (400 meters) walking distance of existing or planned bus, streetcar, or
informal transit stops.

OR

• 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking distance of existing or planned bus rapid transit stops,
passenger rail stations (e.g., light, heavy, or commuter rail), or commuter ferry terminals.

The transit service at these stops and stations in aggregate must meet the minimums listed in
Table 2.

Both weekday and weekend trip minimums must be met.

• For each qualifying transit route, only trips in one direction are counted toward the
threshold.
• If service varies by day:
o For weekday trips, count the weekday with the lowest number of trips.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 70
 o For weekend trips, only count the weekend day with the highest number of trips.
• If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only
trips from one stop are counted toward the threshold.
• Planned stops and stations may count if they are sited, funded, and under construction
by the date of the certificate of occupancy and are complete within 24 months of that
date.

Table 2. Minimum daily public transit service

Weekday trips Weekend trips Points

72 30 1
132 78 2
160 120 3
360 216 4

OR

PATH 2. PROJECT-SPONSORED TRANSIT SERVICE (1–2 POINTS)

Commit to providing year-round transit service (e.g., vans, shuttles, or buses) for regular
occupants and visitors that meets the minimums listed in Table 3. Service must provide
transportation between the project site and external destinations, such as residential areas and
public transportation stations, and be guaranteed for at least three years from the project’s
certificate of occupancy.

Provide at least one accessible transit stop shelter within 0.25 miles (400 meters) walking
distance from a functional entry of the project.

• For each qualifying transit route, total trips (inbound and outbound) are counted toward
the threshold.
• If a qualifying transit route has multiple stops within the required walking distance, only
trips from one stop are counted toward the threshold.

Table 3. Minimum daily project-sponsored transit service

Total daily trips Points
Providing shuttles 1
30 2

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 71
Option 3. Walkable Location (1–3 points)
Locate on a site that meets the location efficiency requirements in Table 4 via Walk Score® or
has proximity to existing and publicly available uses within 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking
distance from any functional entry.

Table 4. Points for location efficiency

Walk Score® Proximity to uses Points

60–69 4–7 1
70–79 8–10 2
80 or more ≥ 11 3

The following restrictions apply:

• A use may be counted as only one-use type (e.g., a retail store may be counted only
once even if it sells products in several categories).
• No more than two uses in each type of use may be counted (e.g., if five restaurants are
within walking distance, only two may be counted).
• The counted uses must represent at least three of the five categories.

Schools (1–6 points)

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above. (1–6 points)

AND/OR

Option 4. Surrounding Density and Development (1–2 points)

PATH 1. SURROUNDING DENSITY (1–2 POINTS)
Meet Option 1, Surrounding Density, requirements in New Construction.

AND/OR

PATH 2. CONNECTED SITE (1–2 POINTS)

Locate the project on a previously developed site that also meets one of the connected site
conditions listed below:

• Adjacent site. At least a contiguous 25% of the project boundary must border parcels
that are previously developed sites.
• Infill site. At least 75% of the project boundary must border parcels that are previously
developed sites.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 72
Bordering rights-of-way do not constitute previously developed land; it is the status of the
property on the other side of the right-of-way that contributes to the calculation. Any part of the
boundary that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.

Table 5. Points for connected site

Type of site Points
Adjacent 1
Infill 2

AND/OR

Option 5. Access to Transit or Pedestrian Access (1–4 points)

PATH 1. ACCESS TO TRANSIT (1–4 POINTS)
Meet Option 2, Access to Transit, listed above.

OR

PATH 2. PEDESTRIAN ACCESS (1–2 POINTS)

Locate the project with an attendance boundary where dwelling units are:

• Within 0.75 miles (1,200 meters) walking distance of a functional entry of a school
building for students in eighth grade or below or ages 14 and below.
• Within 1.5 miles (2,400 meters) walking distance of a functional entry of a school
building for students in ninth grade or above or ages 15 and above.

Provide pedestrian access to the site from all residential areas in the attendance boundary.
Points are awarded according to Table 6.

Table 6. Points for dwelling units within walking distance

Percentage of dwelling units in attendance Points
boundary
50% 1
60% 2

Data Centers, Warehouses, and Distribution Centers (1–6 points)

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above. (1–6 points)

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 73
Option 6. Surrounding Development and Resources (1–2 points)
PATH 1. DEVELOPMENT AND ADJACENCY (1–2 POINTS)
Locate the project on a site that meets one of the site conditions listed in Table 7.

• To qualify as an adjacent site, at least a contiguous 25% of the project boundary must
border parcels that are previously developed sites.
• Bordering rights-of-way do not constitute previously developed land; it is the status of the
property on the other side of the right-of-way that contributes to the calculation. Any part
of the boundary that borders a water body is excluded from the calculation.

Table 7. Points for development and adjacency

Type of site Points
Previously developed site that was used for industrial or 1
commercial purposes.
Previously developed and adjacent site with bordering parcels 2
currently used for industrial or commercial purposes.

AND/OR

PATH 2. TRANSPORTATION RESOURCES (1–2 POINTS)

Locate the project on a site that has two of the following transportation resources for 1 point or
all four of the following transportation resources for 2 points:

• The site is within a 10-mile (16-kilometer) driving distance of a main logistics hub.
• The site is within a one-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an on-off ramp to a
highway.
• The site is within a one-mile (1600-meter) driving distance of an access point to an
active freight rail line.
• The site is served by an active freight rail spur.

A planned transportation resource must be sited, funded, and under construction by the date of
the certificate of occupancy and complete within 24 months of that date.

Healthcare (1–6 points)

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 74
Option 7. Surrounding Density (1 point)
Locate on a site where the surrounding existing density within 0.25 miles (400 meters) offset of
the project boundary meets one of the following:

• At least seven dwelling units per acre (17.5 DU per hectare) with a 0.5 floor-area ratio.
The counted density must be existing density, not zone density.
• At least 22,000 square feet per acre (5,050 square meters per hectare) of buildable land.

For previously developed existing rural healthcare campus sites, achieve a minimum
development density of 30,000 square feet per acre (6,890 square meters per hectare).

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit awards project sites near essential services and in densely built locations with
existing infrastructure. There are multiple paths to achieving credit compliance. Project teams
should review the site location and the urban context of the project, including building density,
community amenities, and public transportation routes, to optimize the options selected for the
project.

Option 1. Surrounding Density

Projects in a high-density area are likely to be more walkable and have greater amenities.
Additionally, a denser and more compact neighborhood increases efficiency and reduces the
time getting from one location to another. It provides easier access to basic services including
supermarkets, pharmacies, banks, medical clinics, and offices. People can actively choose a
means of travel when amenities are closely located. More importantly, high surrounding density
promotes more efficient land use and achieves more sustainable growth patterns that protect
natural habitats, farmland, and open spaces, ultimately leading to more resilient and livable
communities.

Projects must meet minimum thresholds for residential, nonresidential, or combined density.
Planners choose these minimum density requirements have been chosen because they are the
levels necessary to support public transit and reduce urban sprawl. Residential density is
measured in dwelling units per acre. Non-residential density is measured in floor-area-ratio
(FAR), which is the ratio of the gross floor area to the size of the lot. FAR measures the density
of the lot according to a building’s gross floor area, and a low FAR indicates low density while a
high FAR indicates higher density. The “combined density” thresholds are measured in square
feet per acre (or square meters per hectare) of buildable land, and they correspond directly to
the FAR for nonresidential density.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 75
Option 2. Access to Transit
PATH 1. PUBLIC TRANSIT SERVICE
A project located in a densely built environment with a compact and connected transportation
and infrastructure network, reduces environmental impact and enhances the quality of life for
regular occupants. When people take public transportation, there are fewer private vehicles on
the road, which reduces VMTs and associated GHG emissions and air pollution. In addition,
buildings close to public transportation can significantly promote equity by providing various
benefits to communities, particularly those that are underserved or disadvantaged. Accessible
public transportation provides accessibility and mobility to people who do not have access to
private vehicles and fosters social interaction by connecting different neighborhoods.

Projects must be located within 0.25 miles (400 meters) distance of existing lower capacity
transit facilities (e.g., bus, streetcar, informal transit stops) or 0.5 miles (400 meters) of high-
capacity transit facilities (e.g., bus rapid transit, rail stations). These distances correspond to
roughly a five-minute and 10-minute walking time. Additionally, minimum transit frequency has
been set to ensure a minimum viable level of service. The weekday trip thresholds in the rating
system roughly correspond to leading interval times of 1–2 hours (72 trips per weekday) to 10–
20 minutes (360 trips per weekday). Together, the distance and frequency work together to
ensure that regular building occupants have a viable transit option for daily travel.

PATH 2. PROJECT-SPONSORED TRANSIT SERVICE

A sponsored transit service, such as vans, shuttles, or buses, for regular occupants and visitors
provides direct and convenient transit options for work, and access to amenities for day-to-day
needs. Offering a sponsored transit service can reduce the number of private vehicles, which
lessens pollution, eases traffic congestion in neighborhoods, and enhances the commuting
experience for regular occupants. Additionally, project-sponsored transit services can
significantly reduce the need for parking infrastructure. Land that would have been used for
parking can be repurposed for other uses, including buildings, green spaces, pollinator habitats,
and recreational areas.

Adapting to new routines can take time, which is why a three-year commitment is required for
the project-sponsored transit service. This can allow the project adequate time to promote the
service and encourage ridership. Also, 0.25 miles (400 meters) walking distance from a
functional entry of the project is required because it corresponds roughly to a five-minute
walking time, which is convenient for most people.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 76
Option 3. Walkable Location
Walk Score®
Knowing the Walk Score® of the project site provides a better understanding of how the building
location can encourage physical activity, reduce GHG emissions, and foster social
interactions.39 Walk Score® data is categorized as either supported or unsupported. A supported
Walk Score® is based on verified, publicly available data and can be used to demonstrate
compliance with walkability requirements for credit achievement. An unsupported Walk Score®,
however, relies on incomplete data and cannot be used to achieve this credit.

A high Walk Score® means that the location is highly walkable, and that area is likely to have
many amenities and services within a short walking distance. A location with a low Walk Score®
indicates that the location is not as walkable, or building users would rely heavily on public or
private transit for daily activities.

Projects must be located on a site with a Walk Score® of at least 60 to earn a point.

Location efficiency
Locating a project close to existing and publicly available uses can significantly improve the
neighborhoods’ quality of life and achieve multiple social benefits including easy access to basic
amenities such as parks, restaurants, supermarkets, medical clinics, and educational facilities,
which promote a vibrant and interconnected community. Increased walkability encourages
building users to walk or bike to their destinations, promoting healthier, active lifestyles. A
reduced dependence on cars directly results in reduced VMTs, reduced GHG emissions, and
improved outdoor air quality.

A walking distance of 0.5 miles (800 meters) from the project is required because it corresponds
roughly to a 10-minute walking time, which most people find reasonable to access the publicly
available uses. The goal is to make the number of required publicly available uses is intended to
be equivalent to the corresponding Walk Score® ranking. Use Table 8 to determine the types
and numbers of uses.

Table 8. Use types and categories40

Category Use type
Food retail Supermarket
Grocery with produce section

39 Get your Walk Score®, (n.d.), Walk Score®, walkscore.com/.

40 “Community Resources”, U.S. Green Building Council, last accessed April 2, 2025, https://www.usgbc.org/credits/homes-
higharise/v4-draft/ltc4.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 77
Category Use type
Community-serving retail Convenience store
Farmers market
Hardware store
Pharmacy
Other retail
Services Bank
Family entertainment venue (e.g., theater, sports)
Gym, health club, exercise studio
Hair care
Laundry, dry cleaner
Restaurant, café, diner (excluding those with only drive-thru service)
Civic and community facilities Adult or senior care (licensed)
Childcare (licensed)
Community or recreation center
Cultural arts facility (e.g., museum, performing arts)
Education facility (e.g., K–12 school, university, adult education
center, vocational school, community college)
Government office that serves public on-site
Medical clinic or office that treats patients
Place of worship
Police or fire station
Post office
Public library

APPENDICES
Public park
Social services center
Community anchor uses (BD+C Commercial office (e.g., 100 or more full-time equivalent jobs)
and ID+C only)

Schools
• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above.

Option 4. Surrounding Density and Development

PATH 1. SURROUNDING DENSITY
Same as Option 1, Surrounding Density above.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 78
PATH 2. CONNECTED SITE
When selecting a project location, it is important to consider whether the parcels directly
adjacent or on the other side of the road are previously developed sites. The more previously
developed land that exists along the border of the project parcel means that existing
infrastructure is reused, and the need for new construction materials is reduced, decreasing
greenhouse emissions and reducing the environmental impacts from new construction.

The project team must identify parcels adjacent to the project’s perimeter on a map and
determine whether the project meets the criteria for an adjacent site or infill site. Teams must
measure the project’s entire perimeter, the length of perimeter segments adjacent to the
waterfront (if any) and the longest continuous perimeter segments adjacent to qualifying
parcels.

Use Equation 1 to determine the percentage of the project boundary that is continuously
adjacent to previously developed parcels. The site qualifies as an adjacent site if the total meets
or exceeds 25%, excluding any waterfront adjacency.

Equation 1. Percentage of adjacent boundary for adjacent sites

% 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑜𝑢𝑠 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑜 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑜𝑢𝑠𝑙𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑙𝑠
= × 100
(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 − 𝐴𝑛𝑦 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑛𝑡 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟)

Equation 2 can be used to determine if the site qualifies as an infill site. If at least 75% of the
project’s boundary is adjacent to previously developed parcels, excluding any waterfront
perimeter, the site qualifies as an infill site.

Equation 2. Percentage of adjacent boundary for infill sites

% 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐴𝑛𝑦 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑜 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑜𝑢𝑠𝑙𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑙𝑠
= × 100
(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 − 𝐴𝑛𝑦 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑛𝑡 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟)

Option 5. Access to Transit or Pedestrian Access

PATH 1. ACCESS TO TRANSIT
Same as Option 2, Access to Transit above. Transit access to schools ensures that workers,
students, and families can access the school facility.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 79
PATH 2. PEDESTRIAN ACCESS
Locating a school within an attendance boundary is important to ensure a safe and accessible
environment for students of various grades and ages.

Data centers, warehouses, and distribution centers

• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above.

Option 6. Surrounding Development and Resources

PATH 1. DEVELOPMENT AND ADJACENCY
Data centers and warehouses are encouraged to select sites previously developed and
adjacent to parcels currently used for industrial or commercial purposes. This helps preserve
undeveloped land and conserves natural habitats. Developing on a site next to existing
industrial or commercial buildings also means existing infrastructure is in place, which may
result in lower greenhouse emissions from future infrastructure development.

The project team must identify parcels adjacent to the project’s perimeter on a map and
determine whether the project is an adjacent site by measuring the project’s entire perimeter,
the length of perimeter segments adjacent to the waterfront (if any), and the longest continuous
perimeter segments adjacent to qualifying parcels. Use Equation 3 to determine the percentage
of the project boundary adjacent to previously developed parcels.

Equation 3. Percentage of adjacent boundary for adjacent sites

% 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑𝑎𝑟𝑦
𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑜𝑢𝑠 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑡𝑜 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑣𝑖𝑜𝑢𝑠𝑙𝑦 𝑑𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑙𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑑 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑙𝑠
= × 100
(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 − 𝐴𝑛𝑦 𝑤𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑛𝑡 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟)

PATH 2. TRANSPORTATION RESOURCES

Locating data centers and warehouses near various transportation resources provides multiple
opportunities to transport goods and services. Proximity to the main logistics hub, an on-off
ramp to a highway, and access points to an active freight rail line would facilitate efficient
movement of people, boosting the overall economy by attracting businesses and residents.

Mapping must show the driving routes and distances from the project to any applicable
transportation resources. The team must also verify that any transportation resources are
completed. Resources that are funded, under construction by the date of certificate of
occupancy and completed within 24 months of that date will also count toward credit
compliance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 80
Healthcare
• Meet Options 1, 2, and/or 3 above.

Option 7. Surrounding Density

Healthcare facilities can be significantly sized developments and should contribute to compact
and connected development. This is achieved by locating a project in an area that meets
surrounding density thresholds in the rating system. However, not all healthcare facilities are in
dense areas, especially when they need to serve rural communities. This option also allows
flexibility for previously developed existing healthcare facilities by meeting campus development
density thresholds instead.

Project teams must identify the building site and buildable land within 0.25 miles (400 meters)
offset of the project boundary on a map. Collect information on the surrounding residential and
nonresidential building densities, including number of dwelling units and building floor area for
all properties within the offset of the boundary, and confirm residential densities and FAR meet
or exceed the residential density of 7 DU/acre (17.5 DU/hectare) and nonresidential density
(FAR) of 0.5 using separate density. Projects must meet the 22,000 sf/acre of buildable land for
combined density. For previously developed rural healthcare campus sites, achieve a minimum
development density of 30,000 sf/acre.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Combined Vicinity map showing buildable land, any non-buildable
Surrounding Density land excluded, project site, and footprints of existing
Density buildings within 0.25 miles (400 meters) offset of
project site.
LEED v5 Surrounding Density calculator, completed
for Combined Density.
Combined density (in square feet, per acre, or square
meters per hectare).
Separate Vicinity map showing buildable land, any non-buildable
Density land excluded, project site, and footprints of existing
residential and non-residential buildings within 0.25
miles (400 meters) offset of project site.
LEED v5 Surrounding Density calculator, completed
for Separate Density.
Non-residential commercial density (in floor area
ratio).
Residential density (in dwelling units per acre or per
hectare).
Option 2. Path 1. Public Vicinity map indicating the project location, location of
Access to Transit Service the transit stop(s), routes serving each stop, and the
Transit walking routes (with walking distance noted) between

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 81
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
the location of the project functional entry and the
stop(s).
Weekday and weekend route schedules showing the
frequency of trips and service.
For any planned transit service, documentation of
planned transit stops and stations sited, funded, and
under construction by the date of the project’s
certificate of occupancy and scheduled for completion
within 24 months of that date.
Path 2. Project- Description of project-sponsored service and shelters
Sponsored meeting credit criteria.
Transit Service Vicinity map indicating the project location, location of
the transit stop(s), route(s) serving each stop, and the
walking routes (with walking distance noted) between
the location of the project functional entry and the
stop(s).
Weekday and weekend route schedules showing the
frequency of trips and service.
Verification (e.g., letter of assurance or agreement,
etc.) that transit service will be provided for at least
three years from the project’s certificate of occupancy.
Option 3. Location Walk Score® document (e.g., screenshot) showing the
Walkable Efficiency score for the project’s address.
Location Project’s Walk Score®.
Public Uses Vicinity map and table of uses identified by type of
uses accessible within 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking
distances.
Schools Option 4. Path 1. Same as Option 1.
Surrounding Surrounding
Density and Density
Development Path 2. Documentation confirming previous developed status
Connected Site of the site.
Percent of contiguous project perimeter or boundary
bordering previously developed parcels (must be at
least 25% for adjacent site status).
Percent of project perimeter or boundary bordering
previously developed parcels (must be at least 75%
for infill status).
Site plan or vicinity map showing previously developed
parcels adjacent to the project boundary with notes
confirming adjacent or infill site status.
Option 5. Path 1. Access Same as Option 2.
Access to to Transit
Transit or Path 2. Vicinity map showing walkshed boundary for each
Pedestrian Pedestrian grade/age level, functional entry of school building and
Access Access estimated calculations of dwelling units (%) within
each walkshed boundary.
Confirmation of pedestrian access to the site from all
residential areas in the attendance boundary.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 82
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Data Option 6. Path 1. Site plan or vicinity map showing project, its previous
Centers, Surrounding Development development, and use.
Warehouses Development and Adjacency Documentation confirming adjacent site status.
and and
Distribution Resources Calculation showing the percentage of contiguous
project perimeter or boundary bordering previously
Centers
developed parcels (must be at least 25% for adjacent
site status).
Path 2. Site plan or vicinity map showing project site, location
Transportation and type of transportation resources, and driving
Resources distance to each.
If planned transportation resources are counted,
verification that they will be sited, funded and under
construction by date of project’s certificate of
occupancy and complete within 24 months of that
date.
Healthcare Option 7. All Documentation in accordance with Option 1. with rural
Surrounding healthcare campus sites demonstrating achievement
Density of minimum development density of 30,000 square
feet per acre (6,890 square meters per hectare).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Walk Score® (walkscore.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 83
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

TRANSPORTATION DEMAND MANAGEMENT

LTc4
New Construction (1–4 points)
Core and Shell (1–4 points)

INTENT
To reduce pollution and land development effects from automobile use through encouraging
alternative transportation networks. To promote more livable and healthy communities through
reduced vehicle distance traveled and associated emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–4
Transportation Demand Assessment
AND
Option 1. Parking 1–3
Path 1. Reduce Parking 1–3
AND/OR
Path 2. Parking Fee 2
AND/OR
Option 2. Active Travel Facilities 1–3
Path 1. Bicycle Network and Storage 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Shower and Changing Facilities 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Bicycle Maintenance 1

Transportation Demand Assessment

Assess the number of vehicle miles traveled (VMT) and carbon emissions associated with the
regular building occupants’ travel to and from the project building as based on the following:

• Estimate the annual VMT.

• Estimate annual baseline case for carbon emissions.
• Assess low-carbon transportation options.
• Estimate annual proposed case for carbon emissions.
• Estimate the total reduction of carbon emissions between annual baseline case and
annual proposed case.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 84
Projects that participate in a local or regional government-mandated transportation demand
management (TDM) program satisfy the Transportation Demand Assessment requirement.
Residential affordable housing projects in an infill location, or office, mixed-use, residential, or
retail projects located within a transit priority area, or within a walking distance of 0.5 miles (800
meters) to an existing or planned major transit stop, are exempt from the above requirements.

AND

Implement one or more of the following for up to a total of four points.

Option 1. Parking (1–3 points)

PATH 1. REDUCE PARKING (1–3 POINTS)
Provide a reduction in parking capacity, using the base ratios for parking spaces found in the
Institute of Transportation Engineers Parking Generation Manual, sixth edition, or a comparable
resource applied by a qualified transportation engineer or planner or in supplementary LEED
guidance. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

Table 1. Points for percentage of reduced parking capacity

Reduced parking percentage Points
30% reduction from base ratios 1
60% reduction from base ratios 2
100% reduction from base ratios (no parking) 3

AND/OR

PATH 2. PARKING FEE (2 POINTS)

Implement a daily, monthly, or annual parking fee at a cost equal to or greater than the local
market rate for public or private parking.

AND/OR

Option 2. Active Travel Facilities (1–3 points)

PATH 1. BICYCLE NETWORK AND STORAGE (1 POINT)
Bicycle network
Design or locate the project such that a functional entry and/or bicycle storage is within a 600-
foot (180-meter) walking distance or bicycling distance of a bicycle network that meets the
following criteria:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 85
 • It provides a contiguous network that spans a distance of at least three miles (4,800
meters).
• It consists of bicycle paths, lanes, multiuse trails, or streets with a maximum speed limit
of 25 mph (40 kph). Sidewalks where local code permits bicycles are acceptable.

Planned bicycle trails or lanes may be counted if they are fully funded by the date of the
certificate of occupancy and are scheduled for completion within three years of that date.

Schools
• Provide dedicated bicycle lanes that extend from the student bike-parking location to at least
the end of the school property without any barriers (e.g., fences on school property).

AND

Bicycle storage
Provide short-term bicycle storage within 600 feet (180 meters) walking distance to any main
entrance, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building.

Provide long-term bicycle storage within 300 feet (90 meters) walking distance from any
functional entry, but no fewer than four storage spaces per building, in addition to the short-term
bicycle storage spaces.

Points are awarded according to Table 2. Shared micromobility storage, bicycle-sharing

stations, and/or publicly available bicycle parking may be counted for up to 50% of the required
short-term and long-term storage space if:

• It meets the maximum allowable walking distance.

• It is not double counted (e.g., The short-term and the long-term storage spaces are
counted separately).
• The storage location is communicated to the building occupants and visitors.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 86
Table 2. Number of spaces required for short- and long-term bicycle storage
Commercial,
institutional,
Residential Mixed use Retail
schools,
healthcare
At least two short-
term bicycle storage
spaces for every
Short-
At least 2.5% of all peak visitors but no 5,000 square feet
term
fewer than four spaces per building. (465 square meters)
storage
but no fewer than two
Meet the storage storage spaces per
requirements for the building.
At least 15% of all nonresidential and At least 5% of regular
At least 5% of all residential portions of
regular building building occupants
regular building the project separately.
occupants but no but no fewer than two
occupants but no
Long- fewer than one storage spaces per
fewer than four
term storage space per building in addition to
storage spaces per
storage three dwelling units, the short-term bicycle
building, in addition
in addition to short storage spaces.
to short-term
term storage
storage.
spaces.
NOTE: For New Construction only: School projects can exclude students in third grade and younger from the regular
building occupant count for long-term storage. Healthcare projects can exclude patients from the regular building occupant
count for long-term storage.

AND/OR

PATH 2. SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES (1 POINT)

Provide access to on-site showers with changing facilities for 1% of all regular building
occupants. Off-site showers and changing facilities are acceptable if they meet the needs of all
occupants and are within 0.25 miles (400 meters) walking distance.

Large occupancy projects

Provide at least one on-site shower with a changing facility for the first 100 regular building
occupants and one additional shower for every 150 regular building occupants thereafter, up to
999 regular building occupants. After that, provide the following:

• One additional shower for every 500 regular building occupants, for an additional 1,000–
4,999 regular building occupants.
• One additional shower for every 1,000 regular building occupants, for the additional
5,000+ regular building occupants.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 87
PATH 3. BICYCLE MAINTENANCE (1 POINT)
Provide a permanent and secure bicycle repair station that includes a complete set of tools and
an air pump securely fastened to the repair stand in the area dedicated to long-term bicycle
storage.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit provides a holistic approach to reducing transportation impacts and supporting
projects’ decarbonization efforts by enhancing transportation options. TDM includes both facility-
related and behavioral strategies to encourage sustainable transportation choices. TDM
strategies may target facilities specifically related to the project, such as bicycle maintenance
stations, secure bicycle storage, and access to connected bicycle networks (paths, trails,
designated bicycle lanes). These strategies align with behavioral approaches that offer travel
incentives or disincentives, such as bus passes and carpooling. TDM helps reduce VMTs, lower
parking demand, support ridesharing, and encourage public transit use by addressing the
project occupants’ current and projected transportation demands. The credit examines
commuting patterns and behaviors of the occupants by estimating VMT and assessing
alternative mode choices, making TDM a comprehensive framework for sustainable
transportation planning.

Transportation Demand Assessment

Sustainable transportation measures require assessing the number of VMT and carbon
emissions associated with the regular building occupants’ travel to and from the project building.
VMT and carbon emissions are important metrics in evaluating the impacts of efforts toward
creating a more sustainable transportation system. It provides critical data for creating effective
TDM strategies and insights in designing projects that aim to reduce travel distances,
encourage alternative transportation modes, and lead to more sustainable and resilient
communities. The USGBC TDM assessment calculator will help to complete the calculations in
the following equations.

Projects that participate in a local or regional government-mandated TDM program are

considered to have met the Transportation Demand Assessment requirement because these
programs are typically designed to achieve the same goals of reducing traffic congestion,
lowering emissions, and supporting more sustainable transportation systems. Residential
affordable housing projects in infill locations, as well as office, mixed-use, residential, or retail
projects located within a transit priority area or within 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking distance of
an existing or planned major transit stop, are exempt from the TDM assessment requirements
because their location inherently promotes sustainable transportation options.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 88
Estimate the annual VMT
Project teams must estimate the annual VMT as part of assessing transportation demand. This
process involves determining the number of days the building will be occupied, identifying the
number of regular project occupants commuting to and from the site and calculating the VMT.
This equation assumes the worst-case scenario of all regular building occupants driving SOVs.

Equation 1. Calculating the annual VMT

𝐴𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑉𝑀𝑇 = 𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 b𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 o𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 × 𝐸𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 n𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 w𝑜𝑟𝑘 d𝑎𝑦𝑠 w𝑖𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑛 𝑎 y𝑒𝑎𝑟
× 𝐷𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑦 𝑉𝑀𝑇

Estimate annual baseline case for carbon emissions

Project teams must estimate the annual baseline case for carbon emissions. This baseline
emissions estimate assumes the worst-case scenario of all regular building occupants driving
SOVs with the same emissions factor.

Equation 2. Calculating annual baseline case for transportation emissions

𝐴𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑠𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟 t𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 e𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑉𝑀𝑇 × 𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟

Assess low-carbon transportation options

After the baseline for annual transportation emissions has been established, teams must assess
the potential for reducing transportation-related emissions by using transportation behavior data
from national census, metropolitan planning organizations, and transportation departments at
local or state governments. If local or state data cannot be found, teams should use other
relevant data sources to estimate actual travel patterns. Based on the findings, teams must also
estimate the portion of regular building occupants likely to use these alternative and active
transportation options for their daily commutes to and from the building. Teams are strongly
encouraged to prioritize Option 1. Parking and Option 2. Active Travel Facilities, as these
options support the promotion of low-carbon transportation strategies. Teams should also
account for unique conditions at the project site and assess whether the travel estimates are
realistic. Key guiding questions include:

• Are there bicycle routes leading to the project?

• Is there sufficient sidewalk connectivity?
• Is the project within walking distance of residential neighborhoods?

Walking and biking trips, which assume zero emissions, can significantly offset the overall
transportation carbon footprint of the project.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 89
Estimate annual proposed case for carbon emissions
After assessing the low-carbon transportation option, project teams must determine the
anticipated number of regular building occupants who will commute using SOVs, based on a
realistic assessment of travel patterns to and from the site. The team should consider work-at-
home arrangements too, as this can reduce VMTs directly related to the building. This analysis
must also account for various commuting methods, such as walking, cycling, public transit, or
carpooling, and estimate the remaining number of individuals who are likely to rely on SOVs.
For example, if 50 employees are expected to regularly walk to and from work, these individuals
would produce zero vehicle emissions for the year.

Equation 3. Calculating the annual proposed case for carbon emissions

𝐴𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑠 = (𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 c𝑎𝑠𝑒 r𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 b𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 o𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 ×
𝐸𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 n𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 w𝑜𝑟𝑘 d𝑎𝑦𝑠 w𝑖𝑡ℎ𝑖𝑛 𝑎 y𝑒𝑎𝑟 × 𝐷𝑎𝑖𝑙𝑦 𝑉𝑀𝑇) × 𝐸𝑚𝑖𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟

Estimate the total reduction of carbon emissions

Project teams are required to calculate the difference in emissions to get the total estimated
reduction of carbon emissions between the annual baseline and proposed case.

AND

Option 1. Parking
TDM strategies, like reducing parking spaces and implementing parking fees, address broader
land use and cost challenges tied to parking. TDM conserves valuable land and reduces
infrastructure and maintenance expenses by decreasing the need for large parking facilities and
promoting more sustainable transportation options that align with project efficiency and
environmental goals.

Limiting parking availability also helps curb induced demand, as fewer parking spaces
discourage single-occupancy vehicle (SOV) trips and encourage alternative transportation
modes. Another effective approach is unbundling parking, which separates the cost of parking
from building rentals or leases. For example, a mixed-use office building leases commercial
spaces to businesses. Instead of including parking spaces as part of the standard lease
package, the building owner offers parking spaces as a separate, optional service.

PATH 1. REDUCE PARKING

Limiting parking availability also helps curb induced demand, as fewer parking spaces
discourage SOV trips and encourage alternative transportation modes. This path uses a parking
baseline against which reductions in parking supply can be compared. The baseline should be
calculated using industry standards on parking demand, such as the Institute of Transportation

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 90
Engineers Parking Generation Manual41 or comparable resource. The significant environmental
benefit of less parking has been recognized in LEED v5 by increasing the point allocation from 1
point in LEED v4.1 BD+C: New Construction and LEED v4.1 BD+C: Core and Shell (LTc4:
Reduced Parking Footprint, Option 1. No Parking or Reduce Parking) to three points. Parking
capacity must include all existing and new off-street parking spaces that are leased or owned by
the project, including parking that is outside the project boundary but is used by the project. On-
street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from these calculations:

Equation 4. Percentage of parking capacity reduction

(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 − 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦)
𝑃𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑟𝑒𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = × 100
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦

PATH 2. PARKING FEE

Implementing a parking fee for public or private parking is a common TDM strategy which aims
to reduce the demand for parking spaces and encourage alternative and more sustainable
transportation options, such as public transit, biking, walking, or carpooling. More importantly, it
helps to address the true cost of parking, which not only includes the construction cost but also
takes into account the land use, maintenance, environmental, social and economic impacts for
building parking facilities.

Project teams must assess the daily, monthly, or annual market rates for parking in the local
area, whether for public or private facilities. Teams are suggested to consider facilities of the
same type, (e.g., surface lot, deck, underground deck, or covered parking). Teams must provide
justification for the parking fee and set it at a rate that meets or exceeds these local market
values. The project promotes fair market competition and encourages more sustainable
transportation options by establishing parking fees at or above the market rate.

Option 2. Active Travel Facilities

Active travel facilities promote sustainable, healthy, and efficient alternatives to car-based
transportation by providing comprehensive facilities that support cycling, e-bicycles, scooters,
and other eco-friendly travel modes. Essential components include secure storage for bikes,
well-designed on-road facilities such as dedicated lanes and paths, access to showers and
changing areas, and bike maintenance stations. Together, these elements create an integrated
system that enables convenient, active travel options for daily commuting and short trips. In
recent years, these modes have surged in popularity and as of 2017, there were around 1,250

41 Parking Generation, 6th Edition (Institute of Transportation Engineers, ITE, 2023), https://www.ite.org/ite.org.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 91
bicycle-sharing systems globally with over 10 million bicycles globally.42 Active transportation not
only reduces carbon emissions and improves public health through increased physical activity
but also helps manage transportation demand by reducing traffic congestion and lessening the
need for vehicle parking infrastructure.

PATH 1. BICYCLE NETWORK AND STORAGE

To promote bicycle-friendly design, this path rewards two items: the provision of long- and short-
term bicycle storage and access to a bicycle network, including paths, trails, designated bicycle
lanes, and slow-speed roadways. Short-term and long-term bicycle storage capacity is
considered separately because visitors and regular project occupants have different bicycle
storage needs. Being adjacent to a bicycle network means that project occupants can more
easily bicycle to and from the project building.

Bicycle network
Project teams are required to identify bicycle network within 600 feet (180 meters) walking
distance or bicycling distance of a functional entry and/or bicycle storage in the project and
gather information and specifications on distance from the project site and street speed limit for
the bicycle network. A bicycle network must be a contiguous network that spans a distance of
three miles (4,800 meters). The three-mile contiguous path refers to the total length and does
not need to span three miles in a single direction. For example, it could consist of one mile to
the north and two miles to the south, totaling three miles. The bicycle network must also consist
of bicycle paths, lanes, or trails that are at least eight feet (2.5 meters) wide for a two-way path
and at least four feet (1.2 meters) wide for a one-way path. Also, any on-street bicycle facilities
are to be on streets with a maximum speed limit of 25 mph (40 km/h). Both bicycle lanes and
bicycle trails must meet the credit’s width requirements. Sidewalks where bicycles are allowed
by local code are also acceptable.

Teams must locate the project close to an existing or planned bicycle network that meets credit
requirements for use within the specified distance from the project boundary. For planned
bicycle trails or lanes, confirm the schedule for funding and completion.

Schools
• This option for schools is in lieu of connecting to a bicycle network. Project teams must
ensure safe access to school buildings by providing on-site bike lane or multi-modal path
that are either on-road or off-road that safely connect the edge of school property to school
buildings without any barriers.

42United Nations, (2021), Sustainable Transport, Sustainable Development, sdgs.un.org/sites/default/files/2021-

10/Transportation%20Report%202021_FullReport_Digital.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 92
Bicycle storage
Teams are required to determine the number of expected occupants in the building and
determine the number of bicycle storage spaces, shared mobility storage, and stations required.
Once the number of bicycle storage spaces is determined, install the short-term and long-term
bicycle storage within 600 feet (180 meters) and 300 feet (90 meters) walking distance from any
main entrance and functional entry, respectively. Shared micromobility storage facilities, such as
those for e-scooters and e-bicycles, as well as bicycle sharing stations and publicly accessible
bicycle parking, can account for up to 50% of the required short-term and long-term bicycle
storage needs. This encourages the use of communal, readily available transportation solutions
and reduces the need for dedicated on-site storage infrastructure.

For commercial, institutional, schools, and healthcare projects, use Equation 5 to determine the
number of short- and long-term bicycle storage. School projects can exclude students in third
grade or younger from regular occupant count for long-term storage. Healthcare projects can
exclude patients from regular project occupant count for long-term storage.

Equation 5. Calculating bicycle storage for commercial, institutional, schools, and healthcare
projects
𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑡-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = (𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑜𝑟 × 0.025) ≥ 4
𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = (𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 × 0.05) ≥ 4

For retail projects, use Equation 6 to determine the number of short- and long-term bicycle
storage:

Equation 6. Calculating bicycle storage for retail projects

[𝐵𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑠𝑠 𝑓𝑙𝑜𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 (𝑠𝑓 𝑜𝑟 𝑚2))

𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑡-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = ( ]≥2
5000 𝑜𝑟 465

𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = (𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 × 0.05) ≥ 2

Equation 7. Calculating bicycle storage for residential projects

𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑟𝑡-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = (𝑃𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑣𝑖𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑜𝑟 × 0.025) ≥ 4

𝐿𝑜𝑛𝑔-𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 = (𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 × 0.15) ≥ 1 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑟𝑒𝑒 𝑑𝑤𝑒𝑙𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑠

PATH 2. SHOWER AND CHANGING FACILITIES

Providing adequate infrastructure for active commuting, such as lockers and changing/shower
facilities, plays a key role in promoting physical activity for all building occupants, not just

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 93
cyclists. These amenities are especially beneficial for those who may engage in exercise or
other physical activities before work. Buildings with these facilities allow occupants to adopt
active lifestyles, including active commuting, fostering a culture that values health and wellness.

Project teams are required to gather occupant information and determine the number of
showers and changing facilities required using the below equation. Off-site showers and
changing facilities are acceptable if they meet the needs of all occupants and are within 0.25-
miles (400 meters) walking distance. Teams must provide a vicinity or area map indicating off-
site shower and changing facilities.

Equation 8. Calculating the number of showers and changing facilities

𝑁𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑠ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑛𝑔𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑒𝑠 = 𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 × 0.01

For large-occupancy projects with regular building occupants up to 999, use Equation 9 to
determine the number of showers and changing facilities required.

Equation 9. Calculating the number of shower and changing facilities for large occupancy up to
999
𝐼𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 ≤ 100, 𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 f𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑒𝑠 = 1

𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 − 100

𝐼𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 > 100, 𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑒𝑠 = 1 +
150

For large-occupancy projects with an additional 1,000–4,999 regular building occupants, use
Equation 10 to determine the number of showers and changing facilities required.

Equation 10. Calculating the number of showers and changing facilities for large occupancy
1000 or more
𝐼𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑏𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 > 1000, 𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 f𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑒𝑠
𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 − 1000
=1+
500

𝐼𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑏𝑢𝑖𝑙𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 > 5000, 𝑆ℎ𝑜𝑤𝑒𝑟 f𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑒𝑠

𝑅𝑒𝑔𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡 𝑜𝑐𝑐𝑢𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑠 − 5000
=1+
1000

PATH 3. BICYCLE MAINTENANCE

Offering on-site bicycle maintenance services is a strategy to promote active commuting.
Projects can make cycling a more convenient and reliable option for commuters by providing

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 94
access to basic bicycle repair tools and air-pump stations. This proactive support ensures that
bicycles remain in good working condition and encourages more individuals to adopt active
commuting as part of their daily routine.

The maintenance facility must be permanently secured and should remain in the same place, so
users know where to find it when needed. Repairs are often needed at unexpected and
inconvenient times, so predictability is key. The tools should accommodate typical repairs and
be securely fastened so they do not go missing. Locating the repair facility in the area dedicated
to long-term bicycle storage ensures it is conveniently located.

Project teams are required to provide a description of the available bicycle services and
facilities, along with a map or site plan indicating the location of the bicycle repair station within
the designated long-term bicycle storage area to ensure that occupants are aware of where to
access these resources, making it easier for them to maintain their bicycles, and promote a
cycling-supportive environment.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All Not Claiming USGBC TDM assessment calculator.
TDA Exemption Baseline VMT.
Proposed VMT.
Baseline emissions from VMT.
Proposed emissions from VMT.
Description of availability of alternative low-carbon and
active travel options.
Claiming TDA Documentation showing participation in a local or
Exemption regional government mandated TDM program.
Documentation showing project is an affordable
housing project in an infill location.
Documentation showing project (office, mixed-use,
residential, or retail) is located within a Transit Priority
Area or within 0.5 miles (800 meters) walking distance
of an existing or planned major transit stop.
Option 1. Path 1. Reduce Calculations demonstrating the percent reduction in
Parking Parking parking capacity from baseline.
Parking Plan or Site Plan showing the LEED boundary
and the parking used by the project.

Path 2. Parking Narrative identifying the parking fees and explaining

Fee how the rate charged is equal to or greater than the
local market rate for parking.
Documentation confirming local market parking rate.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 95
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Option 2. Path 1. Bicycle Vicinity map showing bicycle network meeting the
Active Travel Network and required criteria and walking/bicycling distance of
Facilities Storage functional building entrance and/or bicycle storage to
existing or planned bicycle network.
Evidence that any sidewalks contributing as part of the
bicycle network are permitted for bicycle use by local
code (e.g., excerpt of the code).
Site Plan showing main and functional building
entrances, short-term bicycle storage and long-term
bicycle storage and shared micromobility storage (if
applicable), walking distance from short-term storage to
the main entrance and from long-term storage to a
functional entrance.
Calculations documenting the percentage of occupants
for which short-term bike storage is provided.
Calculations documenting the percentage of occupants
for which long-term bike storage is provided.
Path 2. Shower Site plan showing shower and changing facilities
and Changing location and walking distance within 0.25 miles (400
Facilities meters) for off-site facilities.
Calculation documenting the percentage of regular
building occupants with access provided to showers
with changing facilities.
For large occupancy projects, the number of project
occupants to determine the number of on-site showers
required.
For large occupancy projects, the number of on-site
showers with changing facilities provided.
Path 3. Bicycle Evidence of a permanent, secure bicycle maintenance
Maintenance facility demonstrating complete set of tools and air
pump securely fastened to the repair stand (e.g.,
product information from the manufacturer,
photographs, contract specification).
Evidence of location of the bicycle maintenance facility
in the area dedicated to long-term bicycle storage (e.g.,
contract documents).
Retail Path 1. Bicycle Number of short-term bike storage spaces provided.
Network and
Storage
Schools Path 1. Bicycle Evidence demonstrating dedicated bicycle lanes or
Network and sidewalks, if applicable, that extend from the student
Storage bike parking location to the end of the school property,
at minimum, without any barriers.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE) Parking Generation Manual, 6th Edition (ite.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 96
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Location and Transportation Credit and Restoration

ELECTRIC VEHICLES
LTc5
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To encourage the use of electric vehicles (EVs) and infrastructure. To help reduce the negative
health effects on communities by lowering greenhouse gas emissions and other pollutants
emitted from conventionally fueled cars and trucks.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1: Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2: Electric Vehicle Readiness 1

Option 1. Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (1–2 points)

Install electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) meeting the thresholds listed in Table 1. EVSE
must meet the following criteria:

• Provide Level 2 or Level 3 charging capacity per the manufacturer’s requirements and
the requirements of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).
• Provide 208–240 volts or greater for each required space.
• Meet the connected functionality criteria for ENERGY STAR® -certified EVSE and be
capable of responding to time-of-use market signals (e.g., price).
• At least one EV charging station has an accessible parking space at least 9 feet (2.5
meters) wide with a 5-foot (1.5-meter) access aisle and have accessibility features for
use by people with mobility, ambulatory, and visual limitations.

Table 1. Points for installed EVSE (% of total parking spaces)

Commercial minimum EVSE parking Points

5% or at least two spaces, whichever is greater 1
10% or at least four spaces, whichever is greater 2
Residential minimum EVSE parking Points
10% or at least five spaces, whichever is greater 1
15% or at least 10 spaces, whichever is greater 2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 97
AND/OR

Option 2. Electric Vehicle Readiness (1 point)

Make the minimum number of total parking spaces used by the project EV ready as specified in
Table 2. EV-ready parking spaces must provide a full-circuit installation, including 208–240 volts,
have a 40-amp panel capacity, and a conduit (raceway) with wiring that terminates in a junction
box or charging outlet.

Any space with an installed EVSE counted for credit under Option 1 may not be counted for
credit as an EV-ready space under Option 2.

Table 2. Points for EV-ready parking (% of total parking spaces)

Commercial Residential Points

At least 10% or at least 10 spaces, At least 20% or at least 20
1
whichever is greater. spaces, whichever is greater.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit addresses the advancement of EVSE, or charging stations, which is a significant
impediment to the broad scale adoption of EVs. Option 1 rewards projects that implement EVSE
for a minimum number of spaces. Option 2 provides an achievement path for projects that install
EV-ready spaces. Projects that do not own or lease parking are not eligible for this credit.
Teams may combine Options 1 and 2 for up to two points. Projects must meet the requirement
for each option and may not use weighted averages or double count spaces to prove
compliance with each option.

Option 1. Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE)

New construction projects offer significant opportunities to expand EV charging solutions for
communities. By designing and installing electrical infrastructure during initial construction,
projects can ensure adequate electrical capacity for the EVSEs, provide building occupants with
EVSE on the first day of occupancy, and eliminate future capital costs from digging up parking
lots and replacing electrical panels.

EVSE minimum requirements

All EVSE must have a Level or Level 3 charging capacity, with dedicated services of 208–240
volts for each required space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 98
ENERGY STAR® -certified EVSE are verified to meet performance claims by manufacturers
and fully tested for safety and energy use.43 EVSE are not required to be ENERGY STAR® -
certified; however, all installed EVSE must meet the ENERGY STAR® -connected functionality
criteria, including capabilities of responding to time-of-use market signals.

Ensure the equipment has the capability to integrate with industry networks and connect to
other devices. Devices may include wi-fi routers and electric utility energy management and
price signals.

For projects integrating EVSE with demand response programs or load flexibility and
management strategies, use guidance in EAc6: Grid Interactive.

Minimum number of spaces and accessible parking requirements

Commercial projects must install EVSE for at least 5% of the total vehicle parking capacity and
no fewer than two spaces. Parking capacity must include all existing and new off-street parking
spaces that are leased or owned by the project, including parking that is outside the project
boundary but is used by the project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from
these calculations.

Use Equation 1 to determine the number of spaces required to meet the 5% threshold. If the
equation does not result in a whole number, round up to the next whole number.

Projects must install EVSE for the minimum number of parking spaces, per Table 1. Percentage
thresholds only apply if the minimum number of installed spaces meets or exceeds those listed
in Table 1.

Equation 1. Commercial minimum EVSE parking

𝑀𝑖𝑛. # 𝑜𝑓 𝐸𝑉𝑆𝐸 p𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 (𝐶𝑜𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑖𝑎𝑙) = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 # 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 × 0.05 ≥ 2 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠

Residential projects must install EVSE for at least 10% and no fewer than five spaces.
Determine the minimum number of spaces using Equation 2.

Equation 2. Residential minimum EVSE parking

𝑀𝑖𝑛. # 𝑜𝑓 𝐸𝑉𝑆𝐸 p𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 (r𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙) = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 # 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 × 0.10 ≥ 5 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠

43 ENERGY STAR®, (n.d.), EV chargers, Retrieved from energystar.gov/products/ev_chargers.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 99
For all projects, provide at least one EV charging station in an accessible parking space. The
charging station must have accessibility features that enable equal access to EVSE for a person
with mobility, ambulatory, and/or visual limitations.

Example 1
A new office building includes a surface parking lot with 125 spaces. The project
targets 1 point, requiring 5% of the total spaces install EVSE. Using Equation 1,
the project needs to install one charging station in an accessible parking space
and six additional stations within the parking lot.

The design documents confirm charging stations for one accessible parking
space and six additional spaces. The project achieves 1 point. Refer to
Calculation 1.

However, if the design includes charging stations for seven parking spaces but
does not include charging at an accessible parking space, the project would earn
zero points. The project installs the minimum total number of EVSE but does not
meet the accessible parking requirement.

Calculation 1: 125 × 0.05 = 6.25 spaces = 7 total required spaces, including one
space for accessible parking

Option 2. Electric Vehicle Readiness

Projects that do not install EVSE during the initial construction phase may still achieve
compliance with this credit using Option 2. By designing parking spaces for EV readiness, the
building operators ensure the availability of infrastructure for future EVSE. Installing circuits,
conduits, and wiring to each space, prior to pouring concrete or finishing pavement in a parking
lot equates to less future work to install the equipment. In this design, projects can easily install
EVSE with minimal construction efforts.

Projects must install all infrastructure to be eligible for this option. The intent is that only the
EVSE would require installation when the project purchases the equipment.

EV readiness minimum requirements

Identify the EV-ready spaces and confirm that the design incorporates sufficient infrastructure
for the EV-ready spaces, which includes, at minimum, a dedicated electric circuit for each space
and conduit and wiring sufficient to provide Level 2 charging (or greater). All infrastructure must
terminate at an electrical box or enclosure near each required space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 100
Minimum number of spaces
Projects must design EV-ready parking for the minimum number of spaces, per Table 2.
Percentage thresholds only apply if the minimum number of EV-ready spaces meets or exceeds
those listed in Table 2.

Commercial projects require EV-ready spaces for at least 10% of the total parking spaces and
no fewer than 10 spaces. Parking capacity must include all existing and new off-street parking
spaces that are leased or owned by the project, including parking that is outside the project
boundary but is used by the project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from
these calculations. Use Equation 3 to determine the number of spaces required to meet the
10% threshold. If the equation does not result in a whole number, round up to the next whole
number.

Equation 3. Commercial minimum EV-ready parking

𝑀𝑖𝑛. # 𝑜𝑓 𝐸𝑉-r𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑦 (c𝑜𝑚𝑚𝑒𝑟𝑐𝑖𝑎𝑙) = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 # 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 𝑥 0.10 ≥ 10 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠

Residential projects require EV-ready spaces for at least 20% of the total parking spaces and no
fewer than 20 spaces. Determine the minimum number of spaces using Equation 4.

Equation 4. Residential minimum EV-ready parking

𝑀𝑖𝑛. # 𝑜𝑓 𝐸𝑉-r𝑒𝑎𝑑𝑦 p𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 (r𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙) = 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 # 𝑜𝑓 𝑝𝑎𝑟𝑘𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠 × 0.20 ≥ 20 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑒𝑠

Combining Options 1 and 2

LTc5: Electric Vehicles only rewards teams up to two points. Therefore, when combining
options, projects must meet one point for Option 1 and one point for Option 2.

Projects cannot double count spaces with installed EVSE as an EV-ready space. Each parking
space must meet the characteristics of an EV-ready space or a space with an available EVSE.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 101
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Site plan identifying all parking spaces the project,
Electric and all parking spaces with EVSE.
Vehicle Confirmation that the accessible parking space is at
Supply least 9 feet (2.5-meters) wide, has a five-foot (1.5-
Equipment meters) access aisle, and has charging station
accessibility features for use by people with mobility,
ambulatory, and/or visual limitations.
Calculation documenting the percentage of parking
spaces with EVSE (including break-out for accessible
parking spaces).
Evidence that the EVSE meet all criteria identified in
the credit requirements (e.g., product information
from manufacturer or contract specification).
Option 2. All Site plan identifying all parking spaces used by the
Electric project and the total number of EV-ready spaces,
Vehicle including clear identification of at least 1 EVSE in an
Readiness accessible parking space.
Calculation documenting the percentage of parking
spaces that are EV-Ready.
Evidence that each EV-Ready parking space has the
necessary electrical infrastructure to support the
installation of an EV charger including a 40-amp
panel capacity, dedicated 208/240V branch circuit,
and conduit (raceway) with electrical wiring
terminating at a receptacle or junction box for the
parking space (e.g., contract documents).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• SAE Surface Vehicle Recommended Practice J1772 (sae.org)
• SAE Electric Vehicle Conductive Charge Coupler (sae.org)
• IEC 62196 of the International Electrotechnical Commission (iec.ch)
• ENERGY STAR® (energystar.gov)
• National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) (nfpa.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 102
SUSTAINABLE SITES (SS)
OVERVIEW
LEED v5 prioritizes biodiversity and resilience through credits that highlight not only
conservation, but the restoration of ecosystems and natural water cycles. This updated
framework encourages projects to actively benefit the surrounding ecosystems and create
green spaces that enable pollinators and wildlife to thrive (SSc1: Biodiverse Habitat).
The Sustainable Sites (SS) category acknowledges the powerful impact of healthy ecological
infrastructure, such as rich soil, functioning water cycles, and native vegetation, on a project’s
long-term resilience.44 In fact, this category contains half of the credits in LEED v5 that address
resilience. Moreover, nature-based solutions are consistently a cost-effective approach to
mitigating hazards because of their low-maintenance strategies.45

With a more holistic and future-oriented approach to the intersections between the building, the
site, and their larger ecological context, projects can design spaces that anticipate and reduce
heat island effect, withstand and more quickly recover from the impacts of extreme weather, and
take a proactive approach to adapting to the challenges posed by our changing climate.

Decarbonization
A more resilient future means a decarbonized future. Urban areas may have up to 50–90%
dark, non-reflective surfaces that absorb and retain heat, creating heat islands that significantly
warm the surrounding areas driving up energy consumption as buildings work to maintain
comfortable temperatures, which increases their carbon emissions.46

To reduce buildings’ contribution to these effects, the SS category tackles local temperature
increases through shading, increased tree canopy cover and vegetation, and reflective or green
roofs (SSc5: Heat Island Reduction). These strategies in turn decrease reliance on energy-
intensive systems like HVAC to maintain indoor temperatures, improving resilience, and
mitigating urban heat for the larger community.

Quality of life

44 National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA), "Resilience 101: How Science Helps America Withstand Wild
Weather". https://www.noaa.gov/resilience-101-science-helps-america-withstand-wild-weather.
45 Marta Vicarelli, Karen Sudmeier-Rieux, Ali Alsadadi, Aryen Shrestha, Simon Schütze, Michael M. Kang, Madeline Leue, David
Wasielewski, and Jaroslav Mysiak, "On the Cost-Effectiveness of Nature-Based Solutions for Reducing Disaster Risk," Science of
the Total Environment, October 15, 2024, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.scitotenv.2024.142677.
46 Olsson, Lennart, Humberto Barbosa, Suruchi Bhadwal, Annette Cowie, Kenel Delusca, Dulce Flores-Renteria, Kathleen
Hermans, et al. 2019. “Land Degradation.” In Climate Change and Land: An IPCC Special Report on Climate Change,
Desertification, Land Degradation, Sustainable Land Management, Food Security, and Greenhouse Gas Fluxes in Terrestrial
Ecosystems, by Aliyu Salisu Barau, edited by José Manuel Moreno and Carolina Vera, 345–
405. https://www.ipcc.ch/site/assets/uploads/sites/4/2022/11/SRCCL_Chapter_4.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 103
These same strategies mitigate the rising temperatures that threaten worker safety and public
health. Simply planting trees on city streets would give 77 million people a 1°C reprieve on hot
days.47 By prioritizing the equitable use of shaded, green, and accessible outdoor spaces,
projects can become safe havens during rising temperatures and foster community connection
and inclusion (SSc2: Accessible Outdoor Space). The human health and well-being benefits
from access to urban green space are well-documented, underscoring this category’s far-
reaching impacts.48

Ecological conservation and restoration

As the credit category most directly tied to ecological health, all seven SS credits offer strategies
to minimize impacts on land and wildlife, restore natural habitats that bolster resilience and
biodiversity, and steward natural resources for prolonged and responsible use. Low-impact
development (LID) practices and GI help prevent flooding, reduce erosion, and improve water
quality, while soil restoration, native and adaptive plant use, and bird-friendly glass support
healthy ecosystems (SSc3: Rainwater Management, SSc1: Biodiverse Habitat).

With global commitments to protect and restore at least 30% of the world’s land and seas by
2030, LEED projects are well-positioned to contribute meaningfully to this initiative while
planning for long-term resilience.49

47 “Beating the Heat: A Sustainable Cooling Handbook for Cities.” n.d. UNEP - UN Environment
Programme. https://www.unep.org/resources/report/beating-heat-sustainable-cooling-handbook-cities.
48 White, Mathew P., Lewis R. Elliott, James Grellier, Theo Economou, Simon Bell, Gregory N. Bratman, Marta Cirach, et al. 2021.
“Associations Between Green/Blue Spaces and Mental Health Across 18 Countries.” Scientific Reports 11
(1). https://doi.org/10.1038/s41598-021-87675-0.
49 Secretariat of the Convention on Biological Diversity. n.d. “Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity
Framework.” https://www.cbd.int/gbf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 104
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Sustainable Sites Prerequisite and Restoration

MINIMIZED SITE DISTURBANCE

SSp1
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To limit site disturbance from construction activities and preserve existing native vegetation,
healthy soils, and wildlife habitats.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan
AND
Site Assessment

Minimize site disturbance by designing and constructing the project site to meet the following
requirements:

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan

Create and implement an erosion and sedimentation control plan for all construction activities
associated with the project. The plan must conform to the erosion and sedimentation
requirements of the 2022 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General
Permit (CGP); EU Taxonomy: DNSH, Pollution Prevention, Item 4 Noise and Dust; or the local
equivalent. Projects must apply the CGP regardless of size.

The erosion and sedimentation control plan must also include implementation of the following
measures:

• Establishment of construction-exclusion zones demarcated by physical barriers and

stormwater controls to protect any identified critical habitat for threatened or endangered
species from discharges and discharge-related activities.
• Site inspections for all controls and management practices at least once every seven
calendar days, or once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the occurrence of
a storm event that produces 0.25 inches (6 millimeters) or more of rain within a 24-hour

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 105
 period. Dewatering inspections must occur once per day on which the discharge of
dewatering occurs.
• Immediate corrective actions to repair or replace the controls when failing.

AND

Site Assessment
Collect information about the site in a preconstruction survey or assessment that informs design
of the site to address the following items, as applicable to the project. The survey or assessment
should demonstrate the relationships between the site features and topics listed below and how
these features influenced the project design.

• Special-status vegetation. Conserve 100% of special-status vegetation located on-site

as defined by local, state, or federal entities.
• Healthy habitat. Identify healthy plant communities and implement strategies to
minimize damage to these areas during construction and ongoing project activities.
Establish exclusion zones demarcated by physical barriers to minimize intrusion or
disturbance of identified healthy plant communities during construction activities.
• Invasive vegetation. Indicate locations of existing invasive vegetation species on-site
and address removal and control of invasive species before and during construction.
Include only native and adapted vegetation that is not currently listed as invasive.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires projects to focus on protecting and preserving healthy and mature site
elements and habitats while promoting environmental protection measures that minimize project
construction disturbances. Project teams must preserve special status vegetation and healthy
habitats, manage invasive vegetation, and implement an erosion and sedimentation control
(ESC) plan to minimize soil, rainwater systems, and neighboring property disturbance.

Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan

Construction activities can greatly impact the local environment and can speed up natural
erosion and sedimentation processes by removing vegetation and leaving soil exposed.

Consequently, stormwater runoff from these sites carries high levels of sediment and associated
contaminants. This not only affects water quality, but also negatively affects aquatic habitats and
wildlife. Soil compaction deteriorates soil structure and fertility, precluding optimal root system
development which leads to long-term degradation of the land.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 106
Each project team must create and implement an ESC plan for all construction activities and
then develop the plan based on the unique needs of the project site. The purpose of an ESC
Plan is to prevent soil erosion and sediment runoff, protect natural resources, ensure regulatory
compliance, and promote responsible construction through tailored, site-specific measures and
ongoing management. All projects within the U.S., regardless of size, must apply the CGP. A
local equivalent may be used if it is equally or more stringent than the CGP, if located in the
U.S., or the EU Taxonomy: DNSH, Pollution Prevention, Item 4 Noise and Dust, for international
projects.

Key CGP requirements for ESC plans

The CGP requires ESC plans to include a detailed site description outlining potential erosion
risks, implementation of both temporary and permanent control measures to manage runoff, and
a construction sequence that aligns ESC practices with project phases. It mandates regular
inspections, maintenance protocols, and corrective actions for failing measures, as well as
proper documentation and recordkeeping. Training for construction personnel on ESC
responsibilities is essential, alongside plans for stabilizing disturbed areas during and after
construction. Projects outside the U.S. do not have to comply with the permitting aspects of the
CGP. Each project site is unique, and not all ESC measures identified in the CGP may be
applicable or necessary.

Site Assessment
A site assessment examines environmental characteristics that can influence the design of a
sustainable site and building. It identifies special-status vegetation, healthy habitats, and
invasive species. Conducting a site assessment is a key part of an integrative design process,
guiding informed design choices when completed before or during the conceptual design phase.

Project teams must conduct a pre-construction survey or assessment to gather essential site
information. To complete the assessment, project teams must collect data including a detailed
inventory of plant species, habitat characterization, soil and hydrology analysis, and mapping of
critical areas. A site plan incorporating all necessary details from the site inventory and the site
assessment worksheet are both required.

Special status vegetation

Special status vegetation includes plants listed as endangered, threatened, or rare under local,
state, or federal acts. These plants provide critical functions, such as maintaining soil stability,
which is vital for preventing erosion and supporting environmental health.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 107
Projects must conserve 100% of special status vegetation. This means that all vegetation
classified as special-status due to its rarity, ecological importance, or legal protection must
remain intact.

Healthy habitat
A healthy habitat supports a diverse community of plants, animals, and microorganisms while
protecting soil health and structure, which are essential for thriving ecosystems. Well-preserved
habitats minimize resource use by naturally controlling erosion, stabilizing soils, and reducing
the need for replanting or extensive maintenance. Healthy ecosystems also mitigate climate
change by acting as carbon sinks, absorbing billions of metric tons of CO2 annually.50 They
manage water flow, reduce runoff impact, and trap harmful substances before they cause
damage. Vegetation slows rainwater, allowing it to infiltrate the soil and reduce runoff.
Additionally, healthy soil with well-structured porosity filters out nutrients and pollutants before
they reach rivers, lakes, or groundwater, and helps retain natural fertility, reducing the need for
chemical fertilizers.

Project teams must establish an exclusion zone around healthy habitats to protect them from
construction activities and other disturbances. It is also recommended to include special status
vegetation within the exclusion zone. Teams must establish clear construction boundaries to
minimize disturbances to ecosystems.

Invasive vegetation
Preserving vegetation biodiversity enhances a site’s ecological value. It is essential to plant
adapted and native vegetation to support the health and functionality of ecological systems.
Projects must remove invasive species, as these species can prevent ecological systems from
recovering and thriving, and they compete with and harm native flora and fauna, crops,
fisheries, and forests. Invasive species can be difficult to eliminate and can have severe
consequences for natural areas once established. Effective control and management are
essential to reduce the spread of established invasive species. The most effective method for
managing an invasive species is to prevent its arrival.

Project teams must identify invasive species on a site and only include native and adapted
vegetation and ensure that no planted vegetation is classified as an invasive species at the time
of installation. It must be native or adapted to the project’s EPA Level III ecoregion, or local
equivalent for projects outside of the U.S.51 Teams must determine their presence by conducting
a thorough site survey, paying attention to areas with special status vegetation and healthy
habitats. If protected areas contain invasive species, teams must remove and control them

50 United Nations Development Programme, (2023, October 25), Forests can help us limit climate change – here is how,
climatepromise.undp.org/news-and-stories/forests-can-help-us-limit-climate-change-here-how.
51 Level III and IV Ecoregions by state | US EPA, (2024, January 2), US EPA, epa.gov/eco-research/level-iii-and-iv-ecoregions-state.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 108
using strategies that minimize disruptive activities and ensure removal efforts do not harm
sensitive ecosystems. It is highly encouraged to consult with the local regulatory agency on best
management practices (BMPs) for removal and control.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All Compliance by Confirmation of whether the project site is at least one acre
permit and located in an area where the EPA is the NPDES permitting
authority (or EU Taxonomy).

Compliance by Confirmation that the local standard/code is equivalent to or

local more stringent than the 2022 U.S. EPA CGP or EU Taxonomy:
equivalent DNSH, Pollution Prevention, Item 4 Noise and Dust.
Name of the local standard/code being applied (if applicable)
All The project’s ESC plan.
The project’s site assessment identifying any special-status
vegetation, healthy habitat, exclusion zones demarcated by
physical barriers, and invasive vegetation, invasive vegetation
removal/control plans.
Evidence that the project includes only native and adapted
vegetation that is not currently listed as invasive (e.g.,
landscape plan).
Confirmation that 100% of Special-Status vegetation located
on-site, as defined by local, state, or federal entities, is/will be
conserved.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• 2022 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Construction General Permit (CGP)
(epa.gov/npdes/2022-construction-general-permit-cgp)
• National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) (epa.gov/npdes)
• EU Taxonomy: DNSH, Pollution Prevention, Item 4 Noise and Dust
(finance.ec.europa.eu/sustainable-finance/tools-and-standards/eu-taxonomy-sustainable-
activities_en)
• US National Invasive Species Information Center (NISIC) (invasivespeciesinfo.gov)
• US National Invasive Species Council (doi.gov/invasivespecies)
• USDA PLANTS Database (plants.usda.gov)
• The Xerces Society for Invertebrate Conservation (xerces.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 109
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
and Restoration
Sustainable Sites Credit

BIODIVERSE HABITAT
SSc1
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To conserve existing natural areas, enhance biodiversity, restore damaged areas, and provide
thriving habitats for local wildlife.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. Preserve and Restore Habitat 1–2
Path 1. Greenfield Sites 1
OR
Path 2. Previously Disturbed Sites 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Bird-friendly Glass 1

Option 1. Preserve and Restore Habitat (1–2 points)

PATH 1. GREENFIELD SITES (1 POINT)
Preserve 40% of the greenfield area on the site by protecting these areas from all development
and construction activity.

OR

PATH 2. PREVIOUSLY DISTURBED SITES (1–2 POINTS)

Meet the requirements of Path 1, Greenfield Sites, if such areas exist.

AND

Restore previously disturbed areas of the site (if such areas exist) and follow the soil restoration
and vegetation restoration requirements below. Dedicated athletic fields that are solely for
athletic use are exempted from counting toward the total site area. These areas may not count
toward the protected greenfield or restored habitat areas.

Points are awarded according to Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 110
Table 1. Points for percentage of area restored
Restored area Zero lot line Points
20% of previously disturbed area 10% 1
40% of previously disturbed area 20% 2

Soil restoration
Restore all on-site soils disturbed by previous development and soils disturbed by current
construction activities that will serve as a final vegetated area. Any imported soils must be
reused in a way comparable to their original function and may not include the following:

• Soils defined regionally by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey
(or local equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) as prime farmland, unique farmland, or
farmland of statewide or local importance.
• Soils from other greenfield sites.
• Sphagnum peat moss or organic amendments that contain sphagnum peat.

Engineered growing medium for vegetated roofs are exempt from the soil restoration
requirements.

Vegetation restoration
Plant native and adapted vegetation that is not currently listed as invasive and includes the
following:

• At least 10 species native or adapted to the project’s EPA Level III ecoregion (or local
equivalent for projects outside of the U.S.).
• Minimum of two of the following categories: trees, shrubs, and ground cover. Zero lot line
projects are exempt from this requirement.
• At least 110 square feet (10 square meters) consisting of native flowering plants
appropriate for local pollinators. Plants must be in groupings of at least 10 square feet
(one square meter). Designate the pollinator habitat area with signage.

AND/OR

Option 2. Bird-friendly Glass (1 point)

Glass used below specified heights on the exterior of the building and site must have a
maximum threat factor of 30, as defined in the American Bird Conservancy’s Threat Factor
Database.

This applies to all glass, including spandrel glass, when located:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 111
 • From grade up to 50 feet (15 meters) measured at all points.
• Up to 20 feet (six meters) measured from the finished grade of a green roof.
• At any distance from grade or roof for glass in guardrails and windshields.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit requires the protection of healthy greenfield areas, restoring disturbed vegetation
and soils with non-invasive native and adapted plants, and providing a designated zone for
pollinator habitat. This credit also emphasizes integrating bird-friendly design to protect avian
species by incorporating bird-friendly materials and design strategies.

Option 1. Preserve and Restore Habitat

PATH 1. GREENFIELD SITES
Greenfield areas are important for environmental conservation because they maintain
biodiversity and protect the natural habitats for plants, animals, and insects. Greenfield areas
have not been previously developed, graded, or disturbed and support open space, habitat, or
natural hydrology. Preserving and protecting greenfield areas from development and
construction activity within the project boundary is essential for maintaining a diverse
ecosystem.

Forty percent of all greenfield areas on the site must be protected from all development and
construction activity.

PATH 2. PREVIOUSLY DISTURBED SITES

Restoring previously disturbed sites is crucial to both the ecosystem and building occupants.
Projects that re-establish natural conditions and bring back ecosystem life help rebuild degraded
areas, protect soils, and enhance biodiversity and local ecosystems. Thoughtfully designed
landscapes with greenery and trees also provide building occupants access to nature, which
can positively affect mental health and productivity.

Choose areas that are best suited for restoration. Prioritize restoration strategies in areas with
significant environmental damage, including areas with previous grading, compacted soils,
equipment storage areas, and parking lots. Restoration strategies can include adding natural
site elements, such as ponds, waterbodies, native or adapted vegetation, and other natural
features, such as soil and rocks, supporting a site’s biodiversity. The project must restore at
least 20% (for one point), or 40% (for two points), of previously disturbed areas to minimize
environmental impacts and maintain biodiversity preservation for a significant portion of the site.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 112
If the project site includes a greenfield area, the project must protect 40% of that greenfield area
from all development and construction activity.

Athletic fields solely for athletic use are exempt from the protected greenfield or restored habitat
areas. Athletic fields support human health and well-being by providing physical activity and
social interaction.

Soil restoration
Recognizing the importance of healthy soil conditions and integrating restoration into a project is
vital for maintaining overall ecological balance. Soil restoration focuses on areas that will
undergo revegetation and require restoration of the characteristics necessary to support the
selected vegetation. Designated areas for rainwater infiltration may be excluded from vegetation
or soil restoration requirements.

Additionally, it is important to carefully select and use materials that do not come from or contain
soils defined regionally as prime farmland, unique farmland, or farmland of statewide or local
importance by the Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey (or local/regional
equivalent).52 Prime farmland soil must not be used because of its excellent fertility and
suitability for food production. Using prime farmland soil for restoration can also lead to
disruption of soil structure and loss of soil health as this soil has well-developed soil layers.
Moving and relocating these soils can interrupt the natural structure and reduce its ability to
support ecosystem functions.

Imported soils cannot be sourced from greenfield sites, and they must not contain sphagnum
peat moss or organic amendments that contain sphagnum peat. Greenfield sites often have rich
biodiversity. Removing soil from a greenfield site can disturb the local ecological system and
lead to loss of plant and animal species. Using soil containing sphagnum peat moss is
problematic for building construction. Peat soils are characterized by high water table, absence
of oxygen, reducing condition, low bulk density and bearing capacity, soft spongy substratum,
low fertility, and high acidity. Such soils are not strong enough to support heavy loads and can
affect the stability and integrity of the foundations.

Vegetation restoration
Maintaining vegetation biodiversity enhances the ecological value of the site. Planting native
and climate-adapted vegetation is crucial for sustaining the health and functionality of
ecosystems. When planting species on-site, invasive species must be avoided to prevent
threatening native biodiversity.

52 Nrcs, (n.d.), Web Soil Survey – home, websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 113
Planting diverse vegetation species helps to maintain and improve biodiversity and enhances
the aesthetic value of natural spaces, bringing greater biophilic impacts. Visual preference
studies have shown that people find it more pleasing when several different plant species are
visible instead of a single planting, or monoculture.

Teams must include at least 10 species that are native or adapted to the project’s EPA Level III
ecoregion, or local equivalent for any project outside of the U.S. The team must identify species
from at least two of the following categories: tree, shrubs, and ground cover. Native species are
crucial in maintaining ecological balance, and including the required amount ensures that
construction projects can contribute to ecological health and support of local wildlife.

Pollinators such as birds, butterflies, and bees play a significant role in the pollination of many
crops, climate resilience, and creating spaces that provide support for declining pollinator
populations. They are also essential for the reproduction of many wild plants. Dedicating an
area within the project boundary for native flowering plants appropriate for local pollinators helps
create a pollinator-friendly habitat to promote plant reproduction.

Projects must dedicate at least 110 square feet (10 square meters) of habitat, consisting of
native flowering plants appropriate for local pollinators. Signage must include information and
education about the habitat’s purpose and the native species planted.

AND/OR

Option 2. Bird-friendly Glass

The project team must use elevation plans and section plans to assess all façade materials
(glazing, opaque envelope, etc.) above grade or a green roof within the project boundary.

The American Bird Conservancy (ABC) has developed a system to evaluate and rate materials
based on their potential threat to birds, known as the Material Threat Factor (TF). This system
assigns scores to materials, providing a relative measure of how well they deter bird collisions.
The scores help architects and designers select bird-friendly materials for buildings. The façade
material distances analyzed must consist of the first 50 feet (15 meters) above grade, or up to
20 feet (6 meters) from the finished grade of a green roof. All glass, including spandrel glass,
must have a maximum threat factor of 30 under the ABC Data Base if it is located within these
distances.53 These guidelines consider materials with a Threat Factor of 30 or below are
considered to significantly reduce the risk of bird collisions, estimating at least a 50% reduction

53 American Bird Conservancy, (2011, October), Bird collision deterrence: Summary of material threat factors, abcbirds.org/wp-
content/uploads/2015/05/Docs10397.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 114
in occurrences. This is particularly important for areas like glazed corners and fly-through
conditions, where birds are more likely to collide with glass due to reflections or transparency.54

Experts consider the material threat factor a prescriptive criteria for designing bird-friendly
buildings. Therefore, no tradeoffs are allowed when assessing the façade materials.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1. Greenfield area calculation.
Preserve Greenfield Contract document(s) highlighting the location and size of the
and Sites greenfield area within the LEED project boundary and
Restore demonstrating how the site preserves and protects the
Habitat greenfield area. Identify the location and size of any dedicated
athletic fields exempted from the total site area.
Path 2. Identification of zero lot line project, if applicable.
Previously Contract document(s) highlighting the location and size of the
Disturbed greenfield area within the LEED project boundary and
Sites demonstrates how the site preserves and protects the
greenfield area. Identify the location and size of any dedicated
athletic fields exempted from the total site area.
Restored Previously Disturbed Area calculation.
Evidence of the original function and content of any imported
soils (e.g., the contract document or specification).
Option 2. All Contract documents identifying all glass used below specified
Bird- heights on the exterior of the building and site, the relevant
friendly grade points, and relevant elevation markers (e.g., exterior
Glass elevations, window specifications).
List of exterior glass types used in the project, and their
installed height from its relevant grade, identified by type
according to the American Bird Conservancy’s (ABC) Threat
Factor Database.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Natural Resources Conservation Service web soil survey
(websoilsurvey.nrcs.usda.gov/app/)
• EPA Level III ecoregion (epa.gov/eco-research/level-iii-and-iv-ecoregions-continental-united-
states)
• American Bird Conservancy’s Threat Factor Database (abcbirds.org/wp-
content/uploads/2023/01/What-is-a-Material-Threat-Factor-1_23.pdf)

54 American Bird Conservancy. (2023, January), About the ABC rating system, abcbirds.org/What-is-a-Material-Threat-Factor-
1_23.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 115
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Sustainable Sites Credit and Restoration

ACCESSIBLE OUTDOOR SPACE

SSc2
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To create outdoor open space that encourages interaction with the environment, social and
physical activities, and passive recreation, and to incorporate elements that celebrate the
community served.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Sufficient Outdoor Space Area
AND
Urban Outdoor Space 1
AND
Community Outdoor Space

Comply with the following requirements for 1 point:

Sufficient Outdoor Space Area

Provide barrier-free and physically accessible outdoor space for people with limited mobility —
space that is greater than or equal to 30% of the total site area (including building footprint). At
least 25% of the required outdoor space must be vegetated and planted with two or more types
of vegetation or have an overhead vegetated canopy.

AND

Urban Outdoor Space

Include one or more of the following elements:

• Biophilic space. An area that meets the vegetation restoration requirements of SSc1:
Biodiverse Habitat and includes elements of human interaction, such as observation
platforms or paths.
• Garden. Space dedicated to community gardens or urban food production.
• Recreational area. Recreation-oriented paving or landscape area that encourages
physical activity, such as courts, fields, track, play space, or swimming pools.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 116
 • Social area. Pedestrian-oriented paving or landscape area that accommodates outdoor
social activities and includes seating for 5% of occupants.

AND

Community Outdoor Space

Include one or more of the following elements:

• Community. Publicly accessible during daylight hours and open to all members of the
community.
• Cultural. Include at least two art installations or sculptures by local artists.
• Acoustics. Include elements that provide positive soundscapes if located within 0.24
miles (400 meters) of a significant noise source, such as, but not limited to, a roadway,
airport, or rail line.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit awards projects that include vegetated and paved areas and other green spaces that
encourage social interactions and recreational activities. Teams must include targeted elements
for accessibility and emphasize deliberate attention to enhancing outdoor spaces for community
engagement.

Sufficient Outdoor Space Area

Outdoor spaces provide building users with opportunities to connect to the outdoors. These
spaces play an essential role in enhancing the health and well-being of building users, providing
many positive environmental benefits, such as improving air quality, supporting biodiversity,
managing stormwater, reducing urban heat island effects, and fostering social interaction.

All projects must provide outdoor spaces that are barrier-free and physically accessible,
covering at least 30% of the total site area, including the building footprint. At least 25% of this
outdoor space must feature two or more types of vegetation or include an overhead vegetated
canopy, such as a continuous layer of trees or shrubs that create shaded areas. To maintain the
ecological function of sensitive areas, such as waterbodies or vegetation zones, full accessibility
is not required; however, features like boardwalks designed to meet accessibility standards can
provide inclusive access.

The outdoor space design must incorporate features that make it accessible to people with
disabilities and service animals. This may include providing wheelchair ramps, tactile surfaces,
wide pathways, and signage to ensure that everyone, regardless of physical ability, can
navigate and use the space comfortably.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 117
Urban Outdoor Spaces
Urban outdoor spaces are pedestrian-oriented paving or landscape areas that facilitate social
activities. They also offer users recreational areas where designs incorporate walking paths,
playgrounds, and fitness equipment. Additionally, outdoor spaces with vegetation are crucial for
the environment. Vegetated outdoor areas help reduce the urban heat island effect, improve air
and water quality, and support biodiversity by providing habitats for various species.
Teams pursuing this credit should include multiple, diverse outdoor spaces, which allow for the
inclusion of people of all ages and activity levels. At a minimum, the outdoor space must include
at least one of the following: biophilic space, garden, recreational area, or social area.

Biophilic space
Biophilic space integrates natural elements into building designs and can connect individuals
with nature to enhance health, well-being, and productivity. Restoring vegetation in biophilic
spaces by planting diverse species helps to sustain and enhance biodiversity while boosting the
aesthetic appeal of natural areas, resulting in stronger biophilic effects.

Areas that meet the vegetation restoration requirements of SSc1: Biodiverse Habitat and
include elements of human interaction meet the biophilic space criteria of this credit. These
spaces must integrate features that invite engagement, such as seating, walking paths, shaded
areas, and educational signage about the local ecological system.

Garden
Community gardens and urban food production spaces offer residents an opportunity to connect
with nature and practice environmental stewardship. These areas enable building occupants
and neighbors to grow fruits and vegetables while fostering interaction with the environment and
building connections within the community.

Project teams that incorporate extensive or intensive vegetated roofs in the design may use
these areas to comply with the garden element, if they are physically accessible and include
areas dedicated to food production. Maintenance is necessary for the vegetated roof system to
keep plants healthy and the supporting structure in good condition.

Recreational area
The design of recreation-focused paved and landscaped areas such as sports courts, fields,
tracks, playgrounds, and swimming pools encourage active engagement with the environment.
These spaces promote physical activity, social interaction, and active and passive recreation
opportunities. Recreational spaces support health and fitness and celebrates and strengthen
community connections.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 118
Project may count turf areas in the total outdoor space calculation if these areas contain
physical site elements that support and accommodate outdoor social activities. However, turf is
not required to qualify as this space type. Turf areas cannot apply toward meeting the credit’s
25% vegetated area requirement under the Sufficient Outdoor Space Area requirement.
Projects may also include ponds or wetlands that occur naturally or are designed to function
similarly to natural site hydrology and land cover as outdoor spaces if the average side slope
gradients are 1:4 or less and are vegetated.

Social area
Pedestrian-oriented paving or landscape areas qualify as social spaces when intentionally
designed to include seating and foster outdoor activities, social interaction, and engagement
with nature. They must be accessible to users of all abilities, flexible for diverse activities, and
conveniently located near building entrances or amenities.

The space must include sufficient seating to accommodate at least 5% of the daily average
occupants, including visitors, to ensure adequate resting space.

Community Outdoor Space

Projects must incorporate one or more elements that enhance community outdoor spaces,
focusing on aspects such as social gathering, cultural expression, and acoustic quality. These
elements might include designated community gathering areas and components that improve
the auditory environment, such as natural sound buffers. By integrating these features, projects
foster a sense of community, reflect cultural values, and create welcoming, enjoyable outdoor
spaces for all users.

Community
Projects that pursue these criteria must include outdoor spaces accessible that the public can
access during daylight hours, ensuring all community members can enjoy and use the space.
However, facilities that are not open to the public for security reasons (e.g., data centers) are
exempt from this requirement. This exemption also applies to international projects with gated
apartment complexes, office parks, military bases, manufacturing complexes, research and
development campuses, private hotels, resorts, and similar facilities. This approach is designed
to promote inclusivity, allowing people of all ages and backgrounds to gather and engage in
recreational and social activities in a welcoming environment.

Cultural
These outdoor spaces should be designed to represent the community’s cultural and social
diversity. Project teams can achieve this by incorporating art and sculptures that celebrate and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 119
recognize the area’s unique cultural identity and demographics. Projects must include at least
two art installations, such as paintings on walls, interactive light installations, kinetic art that
moves with wind, or sculptures created by local artists. These additions help to foster a sense of
community pride, create meaningful connections to the place, and enhance the overall
experience for all users.

Acoustics
Projects located within 0.25 miles (400 meters) of a significant noise source must incorporate
design elements that enhance the soundscape and address unwanted or disruptive sounds that
negatively impact building occupants’ comfort, health, or productivity. A significant noise source
is any noise-generating entity or activity that consistently produces sound levels above
recognized comfort or safety thresholds according to local regulations. These soundscape
enhancements may include sound barriers, strategically positioned vegetation, and water
features such as fountains, all designed to mitigate noise pollution. Their effectiveness can be
evaluated through metrics such as interior noise levels, Noise Reduction Coefficients (NRC),
and Sound Transmission Class (STC) ratings. By dampening external noise, these features
contribute to a more pleasant and acoustically balanced environment, which enhances comfort
and well-being for building users.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Landscaping plan(s) that include the vegetation key/schedule
and the LEED project boundary and highlights the locations and
sizes of the barrier-free and physically accessible outdoor
space, the vegetated outdoor space, the urban outdoor space,
and the community outdoor space. Identify/tag each urban
outdoor area as biophilic, garden, recreational, or social area;
show and note the project-specific elements that qualify the
space (e.g., observational platform, seating, etc.). Identify/tag
each community outdoor space as community, cultural, or
acoustics; show and note the project-specific elements that
qualify the space (e.g., sculpture by X), and the source and
general direction of any roadway, airport, or rail line.
Outdoor space calculation.
Vegetated outdoor space calculation.
Social area seating calculation.
Evidence that any outdoor community space is publicly
accessible during operating hours and open to all members of
the community (e.g., shop drawings showing location and
details for publicly posted signage, website content).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 120
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Evidence of any art installations or sculptures by local artists for
the project site (e.g., contract documents and/or purchase
orders).
Evidence of any positive soundscapes provided for the project
(e.g., contract documents and/or purchase orders, product
information from manufacturer).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 121
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
and Restoration
Sustainable Sites Credit

RAINWATER MANAGEMENT
SSc3
New Construction (1–3 points)
Core and Shell (1–3 points)

INTENT
To reduce runoff volume and improve water quality by replicating the natural hydrology and
water balance of the site, based on historical conditions and undeveloped ecosystems in the
region, to avoid contributing to flooding downstream in frontline communities.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–3
Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events 1–3
OR
Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions 3

Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events (1–3 points)

In a manner best replicating natural site hydrology processes, retain the runoff from the
associated percentile of regional or local rainfall events on-site. The percentile event volume
must be retained (e.g., infiltrated, evapotranspired, or collected and reused) using low-impact
development (LID) and green infrastructure (GI) practices. GI and LID strategies can be either
structural or non-structural.

For projects that collect and reuse a portion of the chosen percentile event volume to meet the
needs of one or more end uses for the building and grounds, 1 additional point can be earned.
Eligible end uses include irrigation; flush fixtures; makeup water systems, such as cooling
towers or boilers; or other process water demands. Collecting and reusing rainwater within the
project can also contribute to points earned in the Water Efficiency credit category. Points are
awarded according to Table 1.

Table 1. Points for percentile of regional or local rainfall events retained

All projects Zero lot line projects Points Total points for
water reuse
80th percentile 70th percentile 1 2
85th percentile 75th percentile 2 3
90th percentile 80th percentile 3 –

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 122
OR

Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions (3 points)

Calculate the difference between the projected runoff volume under the proposed design
conditions and the runoff volume under natural land cover conditions that existed prior to any
disturbance. Retain (e.g., infiltrate, evapotranspire, or collect and reuse) on-site the increase in
runoff volume using LID and GI practices.

For zero lot line projects only

Project teams may combine on-site and off-site strategies to retain runoff from the associated
percentile regional or local rainfall event for points, according to Table 1. Engage with local or
regional authorities to coordinate off-site rainwater management strategies that meet the credit’s
intent, such as participating in community-wide rainwater management programs.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards projects that manage water runoff from the site, using methods that most
closely replicate a natural site hydrology process. The system awards points based on
increasing thresholds for the percentage of runoff managed on-site, with additional points given
if someone collects and reuses rainwater. Projects may also earn points for retaining any
excess runoff anticipated due to the new development conditions.

Option 1. Percentile of Rainfall Events

Data from the percentile rainfall event allows design professionals to study changes in
precipitation patterns over time, helping owners and designers understand the impacts of
climate change. Using this information, projects can successfully implement strategies to
mitigate these impacts.

This option requires that teams gather historical rainfall data for the project area. This data must
include the amounts of daily rainfall over a minimum 30-year period. With the data collected,
project teams must calculate the rainfall amount (depth) corresponding to the desired percentile
of rainfall event and the runoff volume. Using the results of the runoff calculations, the project
must implement appropriate stormwater management practices with LID and/or GI measures to
maintain the runoff on site.

For projects encompassing larger watershed boundaries, it is crucial to ensure that stormwater
management requirements comply with the chosen percentile event across the entire
watershed. All development within the boundary must meet the same stormwater performance
standards, ensuring consistent and effective management of runoff. This approach extends

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 123
beyond the immediate building site boundary and encompasses the entire watershed area
associated with the project.

Managing runoff
Projects using this option must retain or manage runoff per the regional/local rainfall percentiles.
Percentile calculations help determine how rare or common a particular rainfall event is by
comparing it to historical data. By analyzing rainfall percentiles, projects can implement
appropriate strategies for water storage, distribution, and retainment.

Table 2 provides a sample list of options that meet the requirements for LID and GI measures.55

Table 2. LID/GI measures

LID/GI measure Description and additional details
Rain gardens and These are decorative gardens which have plants and soil that filter
Bioretention gardens runoff water and encourage infiltration. This practice is ideal for
collecting runoff from rooftops, sidewalks, roads, and small parking lots.
Green roofs Green roofs include plants and soil media that capture and filter water
that would have previously been considered runoff.
Rainwater harvesting Ideal for collecting rooftop runoff, a rainwater cistern captures and
stores (e.g., harvests) runoff for later use. Common uses of collected
rainwater are for irrigation or for indoor plumbing fixture flushing. Project
teams that use any rainwater harvesting strategies with the intent of
reuse will earn additional points.
Vegetated swales The shallow, open channels are ideal for collecting sheet flow runoff
from roads, highways, and from subdivisions.
Permeable pavement Permeable pavement allows stormwater to pass through and into gravel
layers, allowing stormwater to soak into the soil. This practice is ideal
for developed areas, such as parking lots and driveways.
Exfiltration trenches Surface runoff collected through drainage inlets and directed into the
trench via subsurface perforated pipes. The runoff infiltrates into the
ground through the trench’s gravel bed, which filters the pollutants.

Rainfall event calculations

The percentile of rainfall events measures the precipitation depth accumulated over 24 hours,
typically defined as 12:00:00 a.m. to 11:59:59 p.m., and it relies on the range of all daily event
occurrences during the period of record.

Projects in the U.S. may use percentile rainfall events as determined by the National Climatic
Data Center. International projects can use the Global Precipitation Climatology Project (GPCP)
Daily Precipitation Analysis, provided by the National Centers for Environmental Information
(NCEI).56

55 Martin-Mikle, C. J., de Beurs, K. M., Julian, J. P., & Mayer, P. M. (2015), Identifying Priority Sites for Low Impact Development
(LID) in a Mixed-use Watershed, sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S016920461500078X.
56 National Centers for Environmental Information, (n.d.), Climate Data Records: Global Precipitation Climatology Project (GPCP) –
Daily.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 124
Using the data from these resources for the project’s location, the selected timeline, and other
relevant information on the rainfall event from the selected resource, teams must calculate the
percentile of the rainfall event by using the USGBC-approved calculator or provide an additional
calculator including the necessary information for credit compliance.57

Runoff calculations
Teams must calculate the runoff volume using the modified rational method, the Technical
Release 55 (TR-55), Natural Resources Conservation Service method, the U.S. EPA Rainwater
Management Model (SWMM), or other runoff methodologies most appropriate for the
project.58,59,60,61 Equation 1 shows an example of a simplified version of the runoff calculation.
The runoff calculations must include the watershed boundary, such as buildings, parking lots,
landscaping, pervious surfaces, and all other impervious surfaces. This approach ensures a
comprehensive method to managing stormwater.

Equation 1. Runoff volume calculation

𝑅𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓 v𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑒 = 𝑅𝑎𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑙𝑙 d𝑒𝑝𝑡ℎ × 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 × 𝑅𝑢𝑛𝑜𝑓𝑓 𝐶𝑜𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑒𝑛𝑡
where:
Rainfall depth = Measure the rainfall in inches (or meters) as determined by the percentile rainfall calculator.
Area = Measure the area of both impervious and pervious surfaces within the watershed boundary in square feet (or square
meters).
Runoff coefficient = This is an aggregated factor that represents the percentage of rainfall that becomes runoff. For impervious
surfaces like concrete or asphalt, this is typically close to 1 (e.g., 0.95).

Rainwater harvesting
Rainwater harvesting contributes to rainwater management. Rainwater harvesting is a
sustainable practice that captures and stores rainwater to allow for water reuse within the
project site. Projects that collect and reuse rainwater from the chosen percentile event volume
for one of the eligible end-uses can earn one additional point.

57 “LEED v4.1 Rainfall Events Calculator”, U.S. Green Building Council, updated April 10, 2020,
https://www.usgbc.org/resources/leed-v41-rainfall-events-calculator.
58 “Modified Rational Method”, Bentley SewerCAD SS5, Bentley Systems, (n.d.),
https://docs.bentley.com/LiveContent/web/Bentley%20SewerCAD%20SS5-v1/en/GUID-
85A442CDB33D4B1684EE9E795BA6BABE.html.
59 “WinTR-55 Small Watershed Hydrology”, United States Department of Agriculture, Agricultural Research Service, (n.d.),
https://www.ars.usda.gov/research/software/download/?softwareid=8&modecode=80-42-05-10.
60 “Conservation Planning”, Natural Resources Conservation Service, United States Department of Agriculture, (n.d.),
https://www.nrcs.usda.gov/getting-assistance/conservation-technical-assistance/conservation-planning.
61 “Storm Water Management Model (SWMM)”, United States Environmental Protection Agency, (n.d.), https://www.epa.gov/water-
research/storm-water-management-model-swmm.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 125
Eligible end-uses

• Irrigation. Use rainwater to water gardens, lawns, and agricultural fields, reducing the
demand on municipal water supplies.
• Flush fixtures. Conserve potable water for drinking and cooking when used in toilets
and urinals.
• Makeup water systems. Use rainwater can serve as makeup water for cooling towers
and boilers, which require large volumes of water for operation.
• Process water demand. Industries can use harvested rainwater for processes that do
not require potable water, such as washing, cooling, and other operational needs.

Additional considerations
Project teams considering rainwater reuse may also earn points under the WE
Credit Category. Consider using rainwater for toilet flushing or irrigation to earn
additional points for WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency to pursue these
additional points.

Option 2. Natural Land Cover Conditions

Option 2 requires that the proposed design retain the increase in runoff compared to the natural
land hydrology of the project site. Under this option, projects must maintain runoff on-site and
design the site to mimic natural hydrology. This strategy provides absorption and filtration,
supporting diverse ecosystems by maintaining a balance of water levels in wetlands, rivers, and
lakes. Natural land covers, such as forests and grasslands, often allow more water to infiltrate
the ground, recharging groundwater supplies and reducing the volume and speed of runoff.

Natural land hydrology

Natural land hydrology reflects the natural land cover function of water occurrence, distribution,
movement, and balance. Teams must determine how quickly water can seep into the existing
conditions or soil, which influences groundwater recharge and surface runoff. Site features like
topography, soil, and surface water bodies, along with pre-design connections to nearby
ecosystems, help maintain natural land hydrology.

Rainfall event
Document historical rainfall data for the project boundary; however, unlike Option 1, specific
percentile events are not required for this option. Project teams must use a full range of
hydrologic rainfall events over a 10-year period or develop an average representative rainfall
year, then use the following process to determine the average runoff volume under natural land
cover conditions:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 126
 • Average rainfall calculation. Calculate the average annual rainfall based on historical
data. This can be done using methods like arithmetic means.
• Monthly distribution. Distribute the average annual rainfall across months to create a
representative year. This helps in understanding seasonal variations and planning for
water management.
• Runoff estimation. Use the average monthly rainfall data to estimate runoff for each
month. This approach provides a simplified view of runoff patterns over a typical year.

By considering both the full range of hydrologic events and an average representative year,
teams can develop a comprehensive understanding of stormwater runoff patterns and design an
effective management system.

Runoff calculations
Determine runoff volume using the rainfall event as calculated using Equation 1. Natural land
hydrology, for this option, is the natural land cover present prior to any development on the site.
Project teams must use the project’s natural land hydrology and land use to determine the runoff
coefficient. For natural conditions, the runoff coefficient will be lower due to higher infiltration and
vegetation cover.

Natural land cover refers to the original vegetation and soil conditions that existed in an area
before any development or human activities altered the landscape.

By preserving or restoring natural land cover, projects can help to maintain ecological balance,
support biodiversity, and enhance the sustainability of our environment.

Using the proposed design, calculate the design runoff, using the runoff coefficients for the
design conditions as indicated in Option 1, Equation 1.

Retention requirements
Projects must retain any increase in runoff within the project site. The retention design strategies
in Table 2, LID/GI Measures, must mimic natural land hydrology.

Zero Lot Line Projects

For zero lot line projects, coordinate with regional authorities regarding off-site rainwater
management strategies, which may be combined with on-site strategies to retain runoff for the
required percentile. Off-site strategies must meet the credit intent of the LID/GI practices.

Given the limited space, it’s crucial to maximize the infiltration of stormwater on-site. This can be
achieved through permeable pavements, green roofs, and rain gardens. Use underground

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 127
infiltration systems to store and gradually release stormwater. These features help to reduce
runoff and promote natural groundwater recharge prior to consideration of offsite strategies.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Identification of zero lot line project.
LEED v5 Rainwater Management calculator.
Option 1. All Percentile of rainfall events retained.
Percentile of Identify any end-uses that the project meets through
Rainfall collection and reuse of rainwater.
Event The documents depict and explain the site’s design
conditions, including the overland flow paths of
rainwater, the topography, and the soil conditions. They
will also outline how the rainwater will be managed
through infiltration, evapotranspiration, capture, reuse,
and overflow outlets (e.g., topography plans, landscape
plans, plant lists, construction details, cross sections,
specifications, product information from manufacturers,
and narratives).
Option 2. All The difference between the projected runoff volume
Natural under the proposed design conditions and the runoff
Land Cover volume under natural land cover conditions that existed
Conditions prior to any disturbance.
Evidence of the site’s natural land cover conditions that
existed prior to any disturbance (e.g., historical maps,
environmental impact assessments).
The documents depict and explain the site’s design
conditions, including the overland flow paths of
rainwater, the topography, and the soil conditions. The
team will also outline how the increase in runoff will be
managed by infiltration, evapotranspiration, capture
and reuse (e.g., topography plans, landscape plans,
plant lists, construction details, cross sections,
specifications, product information from manufacturers,
and narratives).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Technical Release 55 (T-55) Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds
(ars.usda.gov/research/software/download/?softwareid=8&modecode=80-42-05-10)
• Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) (nrcs.usda.gov)
• U.S. EPA Rainwater Management Model (SWMM) (epa.gov/water-research/storm-water-
management-model-swmm)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 128
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Sustainable Sites Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED RESILIENT SITE DESIGN

SSc4
New Construction (2 points)
Core and Shell (2 points)

INTENT
Reduce the risk of catastrophic impacts from natural and climate events on-site and in adjacent
landscapes by designing, building, and maintaining sites to be more resilient to observed,
projected, and future climate and natural hazards.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 2
Integrate Requirements for Two High-priority Hazards 2

Design and construct the site and site structures to meet the following best practices for at least
two of the highest-priority hazards identified for compliance with IPp1: Climate Resilience
Assessment.

Drought
Comply with WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency requirements. Specify native and/or drought-
tolerant adapted/appropriate plantings. Water makeup for any created water features must
comply with SITES C3.4 or local equivalent.

Core and Shell only

Water makeup for any created water features must not exceed 5,000 gallons
(18,927 liters) of potable water per year, or 75% of annual water makeup must
come from alternative water sources.

AND/OR

Extreme heat
Integrate two or more additional elements from the following list:

• Provide shaded external spaces adjacent to buildings for use during extreme heat
events.
• Provide evaporative cooling solutions (e.g., fountains, misters, water features, etc.).
• Orient buildings and massing to self-shade in summer and extreme heat conditions.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 129
 • Provide outdoor cooling stations with emergency backup power.
• Demonstrate proximity to an emergency cooling station within 0.25 miles (400 meters).
• Use paving materials with an initial solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.33.
• Use an open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).

AND/OR

Flooding
Integrate two or more of the following strategies, in accordance with ASCE 24 and FEMA 543
standards or local equivalent:

• Critical utilities
o Locate critical utilities in new construction above the design flood elevation (DFE),
plus freeboard as recommended.
o In retrofits, locate critical utilities inside protective, floodproofed enclosures to prevent
water intrusion.
o Design new potable water systems to resist flood damage, infiltration of floodwaters,
and discharge of effluent.
o Elevate on-site wellheads above surrounding landscape to allow contaminated
surface water to drain away.
o Design new sewage systems to avoid infiltration and backup from rising floodwaters.
o Design and anchor plumbing conduits, water supply lines, gas lines, and electric
cables that must extend below DFE to resist the effects of flooding.
o Design and anchor rainwater storage tanks to resist flood forces.
• Ensure that all structural materials, finish materials, and connectors used below DFE are
flood resistant.
• Certify the project under a qualifying flood-resilient design standard(s)

AND/OR

Hail
Design and construct the site and site structures according to FORTIFIED Commercial High
Wind and Hail Specific Design Requirements for Hail, or local equivalent.

AND/OR

Hurricanes and high winds

For projects in hurricane-prone areas, design and construct the site and site structures
according to FORTIFIED Commercial Wind standards, or local equivalent. For projects in high-
wind areas, design and construct the site and site structures to comply with wind design

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 130
measures per ASCE/SEI 7-10 in specified Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA)
zones or local equivalent.

• Install backup power systems in hurricane-prone regions.

• Install electrical connections with a transfer switch or docking station (storm switch) to
support connection of backup power for critical mechanical and electrical systems.
• Create windbreaks using landscape forms, vegetation, and other locally appropriate
natural systems.

AND/OR

Sea level rise

Design and construct the site to accommodate flooding based on sea level rise and storm surge
projections for the design service life of the project. In addition, meet two or more of the
following:

• Incorporate elevated foundations to minimize projected flood damage to buildings.

• Use materials resistant to projected water damage for construction.
• Apply sealants and coatings to prevent projected water infiltration into structures.
• Install flood barriers to block projected floodwaters from entering buildings.
• Design green infrastructure solutions to manage projected storm surge and stormwater
runoff effectively.
• Ensure backup power systems are in place to maintain critical functions during projected
flooding events.
• Develop integrated drainage systems to manage projected excess flooding efficiently.
• Engage in community-level planning, partnerships, and/or design workshops to
coordinate flood mitigation efforts to effectively and equitably address the needs of
populations vulnerable to projected flooding.
• Retrofit existing structures to enhance their resilience to future flood risks.

AND/OR

Tsunamis
Mitigate the impact of tsunamis through site-planning strategies as described in Designing for
Tsunamis (U.S. National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program), or local equivalent. Additionally,
incorporate the following elements from the TsunamiReady® Guidelines62, or local equivalent:

• Install tsunami danger area and evacuation route signage.

62 “TsunamiReady® Guidelines”, National Weather Service, (2015),

https://www.weather.gov/media/tsunamiready/resources/2015TRguidelines.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 131
 • Install public-alert-notified NOAA Weather Radio receivers in critical facilities and public
venues, or local equivalent.

AND/OR

Wildfires
Follow wildfire management practices pertaining to wildland–urban interface design, vegetation
management, debris disposal, and fire safety for equipment referenced in the National Wildfire
Coordinating Group Standards for Mitigation 2023, or local equivalent. Design and construct the
site and site structures in compliance with the SITES v2 rating system credit 4.11: Reduce the
risk of catastrophic wildfire, or local equivalent. Reduce fuel using the zone concept
(firewise.org, “Safer from the Start,” Appendix E), or local equivalent.

AND/OR

Winter storms
Meet two or more of the following:

• Provide adequate ingress/egress for vehicles and snow removal equipment.

• Provide a snow-removal plan, including compatible road materials, areas for
accumulated snow, and roof snow removal.
• Ensure safe walking surfaces to exterior parking areas by considering installing heated
sidewalks with renewable energy sources.
• Specify native or adapted planting with a capacity for heavy snow loads.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit requires the design and construction of sustainable and resilient site and site
structures based on best practices for at least two of the highest priority hazards identified in the
IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment. Addressing additional hazards is highly recommended to
create added resilience within the project.

Drought
Climate projections indicate a higher likelihood of more intense droughts in the future. As a
slow-onset hazard, droughts can last for months or even years, leading to significant
consequences such as increased erosion, water scarcity, and a heightened risk of wildfires.63
Implementing sustainable practices ensures projects significantly reduce their dependency on
freshwater resources, safeguard against water shortages, and contribute to the broader goals of
water conservation and climate resilience.

63 Chapter 4: Water, (n.d.), IPCC, ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg2/chapter/chapter-4/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 132
Reduced water use for irrigation
To mitigate the impacts of drought, projects must comply with WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency
requirements to reduce outdoor water use.

Drought-tolerant plant species

Projects must incorporate native and/or drought-tolerant plant species that adapt to the site’s
conditions and local climate to reduce water demand. Native or drought-tolerant plants help
conserve water and reduce soil erosion. They require less water, fertilizer, and maintenance,
making them a key component of water-efficient design.

Makeup water strategies for water features

Projects must minimize or eliminate potable water, natural surface water, and groundwater
withdrawals that are used in water features to reduce short and long-term water use. Designs
must also comply with water feature makeup water requirements, as outlined in SITES Credit
3.4 Reduce outdoor water use.64 This means ensuring that the design of water features,
including fountains or ponds, minimizes water loss through evaporation or leaks, and efficiently
replenishes water, ideally using non-potable sources such as greywater or harvested rainwater.

LEED BD+C: Core and Shell projects must limit makeup water for any newly created water
features to 5,000 gallons (18,927 liters) of potable water annually, or at least 75% of the annual
makeup water must come from alternative water sources.

Extreme Heat
Improving thermal comfort and reducing extreme heat-related risks in a project is essential for
safeguarding public health, enhancing occupant well-being, and ensuring the long-term
resilience and sustainability of built environments in the face of rising temperatures. Nature-
based solutions are key to achieving these goals, as they leverage natural processes to create
cooler, more comfortable spaces while also promoting biodiversity.

Shaded outdoor spaces

Shaded outdoor spaces that use shade from appropriate trees, large shrubs, vegetated trellises,
walls, or other exterior structures help cool the surrounding environment and offer protection
from direct sunlight. Shaded areas adjacent to buildings can significantly reduce evaporation
rates in soil and promote habitats for various species, thereby supporting biodiversity and
maintaining the balance of local ecosystems. Providing cooler environments helps decrease the

64 Sustainable Sites Initiative, https://www.sustainablesites.org/

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 133
incidences of heat exhaustion and dehydration, particularly among vulnerable populations such
as children, the elderly, and those with pre-existing health conditions.

Evaporative and outdoor cooling solutions

Projects may also incorporate evaporative and outdoor cooling solutions, such as fountains,
misters, and water features. These can significantly enhance outdoor thermal comfort by
reducing ambient temperatures through the evaporation of water, creating a more pleasant
microclimate in outdoor spaces.

Providing outdoor cooling stations equipped with emergency backup power is essential for
offering rest and relief during high-temperature events. These stations can include shaded
seating and misting systems to create comfortable environments. The backup power ensures
that cooling stations remain operational during outages, enhancing community resilience and
safety by preventing heat-related illnesses.

Locate emergency cooling stations within 0.25 miles (400 meters) of the building for easy
access.

Passive cooling strategies

Orienting buildings for passive cooling is a key strategy for enhancing energy efficiency and
occupant comfort in sustainable design. Positioning site structures to take advantage of natural
airflow and local wind patterns significantly reduces the need for mechanical cooling systems in
buildings. The thoughtful placement of windows, doors, and shading devices plays a crucial role
in minimizing heat gain from direct sunlight, thereby keeping interior spaces cooler during
extreme heat events.

Reducing heat island effects

Using paving materials with high SR can reduce the absorption of heat from the sun and reduce
urban heat island effects for site paving and structures (including roads, sidewalks, playgrounds,
shelters, and parking lots). Paving materials must have an initial SR value of at least 0.33, as
measured in accordance with ANSI/CRRC S10065. Using vegetated surfaces and planted areas,
such as an open-grid pavement system, are important strategies to reduce the use of
impervious surfaces that can also contribute to heat island effects.

65 “ANSI/CRRC S100”, Cool Roof Rating Council (CRRC), accessed https://coolroofs.org/resources/ansi-crrc-s100

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 134
Flooding
Flooding can lead to significant property damage, infrastructure disruption, and public health
risks, resulting in loss of life and economic hardship for affected communities. Additionally, it
causes ecosystem damage, soil erosion, and long-term recovery challenges, underscoring the
importance of effective flood management strategies to enhance resilience.

To mitigate the impacts of flooding, projects under flood-resilient design must implement at least
two of the indicated flood mitigation strategies, in accordance with FEMA 54366 and ASCE 2467,
or their local equivalents. These standards provide minimum requirements and offer critical
guidelines that enhance the safety and structural integrity of vulnerable sites and buildings
located in flood-hazard areas. Projects can choose from any of the strategies listed under
Critical Utilities, as well as flood resistant materials or certifying under a qualifying design
standard.

Critical utilities
It is essential to elevate critical utilities above the design or base flood Elevation (DFE/BFE) as
well as include additional freeboard to prevent water intrusion. This elevation protects essential
services such as water supply systems, sewage treatment facilities, communication systems,
and electrical infrastructure from submergence, which could lead to costly repairs and service
disruptions. Adding freeboard serves as a buffer and an additional safety measure, further
enhancing the resilience of critical infrastructure. Positioning utilities above the DFE/BFE
significantly reduces the risk of damage from floodwater, ensuring that communities have
continued access to critical services during and after a disaster. This reliability is vital for public
health and safety, as well as for emergency response operations.

Design new potable water and sewage systems to withstand flood conditions, ensuring
uncontaminated drinking water and preventing sewage overflow during flood events. Elevating
on-site wellheads above the surrounding landscape is essential to allow contaminated surface
water to drain away effectively.

Plumbing conduits, water supply lines, gas lines, and electric cables extending below the DFE
must be carefully designed and anchored to withstand flooding. In addition, rainwater storage
tanks must be designed and secured to resist flood forces, ensuring they remain functional and
protected during flood events. These measures help minimize damage to critical utilities and
enhance flood resilience.

66 “Design Guide for Improving Critical Facility Safety from Flooding and High Winds”, FEMA 543, (2007), Federal Emergency
Management Agency (FEMA), accessed April 4, 2025, https://www.fema.gov/sites/default/files/2020-
08/fema543_design_guide_complete.pdf.
67 “Highlights of ASCE 24-14: Flood Resistant Design and Construction”, Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA),
accessed April 4, 2025, https://www.fema.gov/sites/default/files/2020-07/asce24-14_highlights_jan2015.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 135
Flood-resistant materials
Additionally, projects using this strategy must ensure that all structural materials, finish
materials, and connectors used below DFE are flood resistant. Using flood-resistant structural
materials that can withstand water pressure, corrosion, and potential debris impacts during
floods, such as reinforced concrete or high-density polyethylene, helps to further enhance a
building’s resilience to flooding.

Hail
Hail strikes can cause significant damage to site infrastructure, outdoor storage, and building
components such as roofs, siding, equipment, and windows, which can lead to costly repairs.
Hail can also impact landscaping, particularly trees, by shredding leaves, breaking branches,
and damaging bark, which leaves trees vulnerable to disease, pests, and slower growth.
Teams must design and construct the site and site structures according to FORTIFIED
Commercial High Wind and Hail Specific Design Requirements68 for hail, or local equivalent. For
instance, teams may choose hail guards for air conditioning units and impact-resistant materials
for the roofs. Since hail typically occurs during thunderstorms, compromised roofing can allow
water infiltration. Ensuring watertightness and hail resistance reduces the risks of hail damage
and protects both the structure and occupants.

Hurricanes and High Winds

Hurricanes and high winds can cause severe damage to site infrastructure, buildings,
landscaping, and safety. High winds can tear off roofs, break windows, and damage siding.
Landscaping can also be affected when storms uproot trees or severely damage plants.
Additionally, flying debris heightens the risk of injury or even death. Implementing wind-resistant
design measures, such as reinforced structures and impact-resistant materials, can reduce
these risks and enhance the site’s resilience against such extreme events.

To enhance the resilience of a site against hurricanes and high winds, the project site and site
structures must be constructed according to the FORTIFIED Commercial Wind standards or a
local equivalent.69 Apply FORTIFIED Commercial standards along with federal, state, and local
codes, ordinances, and regulations. If there are conflicts between provisions, use the more
stringent regulation. Additionally, projects in high-wind areas must comply with the design and

68 “FORTIFIED Commercial High Wind and Hail Specific Design Requirements”, FORTIFIED, a program of the Insurance Institute
for Business & Home Safety, (2023), https://fortifiedhome.org/commercial-levels/.
69 “FORTIFIED Commercial™ – Wind Standards”, FORTIFIED, a program of the Insurance Institute for Business & Home Safety,
(2020), https://fortifiedcommercial.org/wp-content/uploads/Fortified_Commercial_Wind_Standards_2020.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 136
construction requirements for site structures as outlined by ASCE/SEI 7 Standards70 in specified
FEMA zones or local equivalent.

Backup power systems

Projects must install backup power systems in hurricane-prone regions to ensure that critical
operations can continue during power outages. Critical operations refer to essential functions,
such as HVAC systems, lighting, and communications, which must remain operational
continuously to ensure the safety, stability, and proper functioning of the building. Install
electrical connections with a transfer switch or docking station (storm switch) to support the
connection of backup power must be installed for critical mechanical and electrical systems.
Backup generators or solar-powered systems with battery storage provide an emergency power
supply ensuring the continuation of critical operations during power interruptions.

Windbreaks
A windbreak will reduce wind speed for as much as 30 times the windbreak’s height.71 A
windbreak involves strategically planting trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, and using
landscape forms and other locally appropriate natural systems to reduce wind speed around
buildings and open spaces. Using vegetation also helps prevent topsoil erosion, which is
essential for maintaining the structural integrity of buildings and infrastructure.

Sea Level Rise

Sea level rise poses significant threats to buildings, particularly in coastal areas. As global
temperatures increase, melting ice caps and expanding ocean waters are causing sea levels to
rise, leading to more frequent and severe flooding events. These changes put pressure on
existing buildings, increasing the risk of water infiltration, foundation damage, and structural
instability.

To effectively enhance flood resilience, it is essential to design and construct the site to
accommodate flooding based on sea level rise and storm surge projections for the design
service life of the project. In addition, projects must incorporate at least two measures to limit
the impacts of flooding. First, projects may elevate foundations, at least four feet (1.2 meters)
above sea level rise projections. Elevating foundations can significantly reduce potential flood
damage to buildings, ensuring they remain secure in the face of rising waters.

70 ASCE/SEI 7 Standards, American Spciety of Civil Engineers (ASCE), (2024), https://www.asce.org/publications-and-news/asce-7.

71
U.S. Department of Energy, (n.d.), Landscaping for Wind Control, Energy Saver, energy.gov/energysaver/landscaping-windbreaks.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 137
Projects may ensure that backup power systems are in place to maintain critical functions, such
as communications, security, and fire safety systems, during projecting flooding events.

Additionally, developing integrated drainage systems to efficiently manage projected excess

flooding is a solution. These systems must be designed to work holistically with the landscape
and built environment, ensuring that floodwaters are managed in ways that minimize damage.
An integrated drainage system can combine both traditional and innovative solutions, such as
upgrading or expanding existing stormwater systems, like gutters, drains, and culverts, to
accommodate larger volumes of water. Other measures include installing permeable pavements
and porous materials, as well as integrating sump pumps in basements or lower levels of
buildings to prevent water accumulation.

Retrofitting existing structures is another key strategy to enhance building resilience to future
flood risks. This process may involve reinforcing foundations, installing flood barriers, and
incorporating water-resistant materials to protect critical equipment and prevent water
infiltration.

Flood-resistant materials
Using flood-resistant materials according to FEMA standards or local equivalent, such as
fasteners, connectors, and products designed to withstand moisture, minimizes damage from
water intrusion by preventing rotting and corrosion.72 The application of sealants and coatings to
prevent projected water infiltration into structures is essential.

Flood barriers
Flood barriers around buildings, including permanent walls, portable barriers, or automated
systems that activate when floodwaters are detected, can effectively redirect water away from
vulnerable areas, thereby protecting properties and ensuring public safety. Additionally, restoring
or preserving natural landscapes such as wetlands and mangroves can enhance the resilience
of communities. These ecosystems act as natural buffers, provide habitat for wildlife, and
contribute to biodiversity.

Green infrastructure
Designing and incorporating GI solutions is vital for effectively managing storm surge and runoff.
GI, which includes features like rain gardens, permeable pavements, green roofs, and wetlands,
plays a crucial role in mitigating these risks.

72 Federal Emergency Management Agency, (2025, January), Flood Damage-Resistant Materials Requirements for Buildings
Located in Special Flood Hazard Areas in accordance with the National Flood Insurance Program,
https://www.fema.gov/sites/default/files/documents/fema_tb_2_flood_damage-resistant_materials_requirements_01–22-2025.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 138
Community engagement
The project team may actively engage in community-level planning, partnerships, and/or design
workshops to coordinate flood mitigation efforts effectively and to address the needs of
populations vulnerable to projected flooding. Involving community members in the planning
process allows the team to gain valuable insights into local conditions, vulnerabilities, and
concerns, which leads to more effective and inclusive solutions. Forming partnerships with local
organizations, government agencies, and stakeholders further strengthens these efforts,
fostering a shared commitment to enhance flood resilience and safeguard the well-being of all
community members.

Tsunamis
Tsunamis can cause severe damage, especially in coastal areas where the risks are highest.
They can lead to soil erosion, undermine foundations, result in loss of life and mass injuries, and
damage or destroy homes, businesses, ports, harbors, cultural resources, and critical
infrastructure and facilities. Tsunamis can also overwhelm critical services such as water and
electricity, and contaminate land with saltwater, leading to long-term damage to communities,
ecosystems, and agricultural areas.

TsunamiReady® guidelines
To mitigate these impacts, projects must integrate site planning strategies described in
Designing for Tsunamis (National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program73), or local equivalent.
Projects must also incorporate elements from the TsunamiReady® guidelines, or local
equivalent, including installing danger area and evacuation route signage and Public Alert-
notified NOAA Weather Radio (NWR) receivers in critical facilities and public venues.74 Signage
must be implemented according to state and local policies and as determined to be appropriate
by local authorities.

Wildfires
Designing, constructing, and maintaining sites and structures, in compliance with the SITES v2
Rating System Credit 4.11: Reduce the risk of catastrophic wildfire75, or local equivalent,
reduces the risk of catastrophic wildfires on-site and in surrounding landscapes. The project
team must also implement wildfire-resistant techniques referenced in the NWCG Standards for

73 “National Tsunami Hazard Mitigation Program”, National Weather Service, last accessed April 2, 2025,
https://www.weather.gov/nthmp/.
74 “Final Approved TSUNAMIREADY® Guidelines”, National Weather Service, (2015),
https://www.weather.gov/media/tsunamiready/resources/2015TRguidelines.pdf.
75 “Home page”, Sustainable Sites Initiative, last accessed April 2, 2025, https://www.sustainablesites.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 139
Mitigation 202376, or local equivalent, and apply the Zone Concept as outlined in the Firewise
Landscaping Checklist, which is Appendix E of “Safer from the Start: A Guide to Firewise-
Friendly Developments”.77

The NWGG Standards for Mitigation 2023. Specify proper debris disposal and fire safety
protocols for equipment. Proper debris disposal helps eliminate flammable material, while fire
safety measures for equipment reduce the risk of accidental ignition during construction or
maintenance activities. These integrated strategies enhance the site’s resilience to wildfires,
safeguarding both the environment and the structures built.

It is crucial for projects in wildfire areas to take proactive wildfire management measures,
including strategies for managing vegetative biomass, dead plant materials, and fuel loads to
safe levels. Clearing flammable vegetation and other fuel sources within a specific distance to
create buffer zones around structures reduces wildfire risks. Additionally, conducting prescribed
burns or other fuel management techniques at frequencies and intensities similar to the natural
fire regime for the ecosystem is essential. This proactive approach helps limit the spread and
intensity of wildfires, protecting both the built environment and the surrounding ecosystem.

Winter Storms
Winter storms feature heavy snowfall, blowing snow, cold temperatures, and strong winds, and
they can also include blizzards and ice storms. When winter precipitation falls as freezing rain or
drizzle, it can lead to significant ice accumulation, which may cause considerable damage,
especially when accompanied by high winds. Heavy snow or ice may damage plants, break
branches, and disrupt growth which can affect landscaping. Snow and ice accumulation can
create dangerous conditions for pedestrians and vehicles, increasing the risk of accidents and
injuries. Projects in areas prone to winter storms must implement at least two of the indicated
strategies.

Adequate ingress/egress
Providing safe access and egress for vehicles and snow removal equipment during winter
storms is crucial. This includes conducting regular maintenance and inspections of access
points, such as entrances, sidewalks, and roads, to ensure they are clear of snow and ice for
vehicles and snow removal equipment. Ensuring safe walking surfaces in exterior parking areas
is vital to prevent hazardous walking conditions and related injuries during winter. Using heated
sidewalks powered by renewable energy sources can further enhance safety by preventing
snow and ice buildup.

76“Home page” National Wildfire Coordinating Group (NWCG), last accessed April 2, 2025, https://www.nwcg.gov/.
77“Firewise USA®”, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), last accessed April 2, 2025, https://www.nfpa.org/Education-and-
Research/Wildfire/Firewise-USA.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 140
Snow removal plan and safe walking surfaces
Developing a snow removal plan is important for establishing protocols before storms hit.
Effective planning enhances safety and minimizes disruption to daily activities and
infrastructure. Using appropriate road materials can significantly impact snow removal efficiency.
Choosing materials that improve traction, such as sand, can reduce the risk of accidents during
winter storms. Designating specific areas for the accumulation of snow and roof snow removal
is essential. These areas should be strategically located to prevent the obstruction of roadways,
sidewalks, and emergency access points and limit damage to trees and people. The plan can
include scheduling regular inspections during winter months, providing guidelines for safely
removing snow, and identifying qualified personnel or contractors to conduct the work.

Landscaping considerations
Projects may include adapted plants and native species capable of withstanding significant
weight, such as heavy snow loads, which may vary by location.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Identification of the two hazards the site and site structures are
designed and constructed to meet.
Drought All Confirmation of whether the project includes any created water
features.
Projects Evidence that the makeup water for the created water features
with complies with SITES C3.4 (e.g., SITES certification and
Water scorecard or evidence that 50% of annual make-up water for site
Features water features comes from non-potable water sources or that
site water features only require a total of 10,000 gallons or fewer,
37,854.12 liters or fewer, of potable water annually).
Extreme All Evidence of the two qualifying extreme heat resilience elements
heat included in the project (e.g., contract documents, massing and
orientation studies of the building, map to emergency cooling
station, product information from paving manufacturers or SR
values or open-grid pavement permeability).
Flooding All Evidence that the project is certified under a qualifying flood-
resilient design standard (e.g., certificate/stamped drawings)
and/or evidence that critical utilities meet the design criteria
and/or confirm that all structural materials, finish materials, and
connectors used below DFE are flood resistant (e.g., contract
documents).
Hail All Evidence that the project site and site structures are designed
and constructed according to FORTIFIED Commercial High
Wind and Hail Specific Design Requirements for Hail (for
example, evidence of the FORTIFIED + Hail certification).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 141
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Hurricanes All Evidence that the project site and site structures are designed
and high and constructed according to FORTIFIED Commercial Wind
winds standards (e.g., evidence of the FORTIFIED certification).
Sea level All Evidence of the two qualifying sea level rise resilience elements
rise included in the project (e.g., contract documents, product
information from manufacturers; meeting notes documenting
engagement in relevant community-level planning, partnerships,
and/or design workshops).
Tsunami All Evidence the project has designated a tsunami danger area on
site and installed evacuation route signage and public Alert-
notified NOAA Weather Radio (NWR) receivers.
Wildfire All Evidence that the site and site structures are designed and
constructed in compliance with SITES v2 Rating System Credit
4.11: Reduce the risk of catastrophic wildfire (e.g., SITES
certification and scorecard or contract documents demonstrating
landscaping design practices in alignment with Firewise – Safer
from the Start: A Guide to Firewise-Friendly Developments,
Appendix E).
Winter All Evidence of the two qualifying winter storm resilience elements
Storms included in the project (e.g., contract documents, snow-removal
operations and maintenance plan, product documentation from
manufacturers, planting information).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• SITES v2 Rating System (sustainablesites.org)
• ASCE 24 (asce.org)
• FEMA 543 (fema.gov)
• Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) (ipcc.ch)
• FORTIFIED (Commercial High Wind and Hail Specific Design Requirements)
(fortifiedhome.org)
• ASCE/SEI 7 (asce.org)
• Tsunami-Ready Guidelines (weather.gov/tsunamiready/guidelines)
• NWCG Standards for Mitigation 2023 (nwcg.gov)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 142
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Sustainable Sites Credit and Restoration

HEAT ISLAND REDUCTION

SSc5
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To mitigate disparate impacts on microclimates and habitats caused by heat islands and
extreme heat events.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. Nonroof and Roof 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Parking Under Cover 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Tree Equity 1

Choose one of the following options:

Option 1. Nonroof and Roof (1 point)

Meet the following criteria for the nonroof and roof weighted average approach:

Equation 1. Weighted nonroof and roof calculation

𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑠 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ-𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑣𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓
+ +
0.5 0.75 0.75
≥ 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑝𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑑 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 + 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎

Use any combination of nonroof, high-reflectance roof, and vegetative roof strategies so that the
weighted sum of site design strategies is greater than or equal to the sum of the total pavement
and roof areas. Each surface may only be counted once, even if it is addressed through multiple
strategies.

Nonroof measures
• Shade over pavement areas, measured in plain view at noon, with existing or new
plants, assuming 10-year canopy width, or vegetated structures. Planting or vegetated
structures must be in place at the time of occupancy permit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 143
 • Structures covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,
photovoltaics, and wind turbines.
• Architectural devices or structures. If the device or structure is a roof, it shall have an
aged solar reflectance (SR) value of at least 0.28 as measured in accordance with
ANSI/CRRC S100. If the device or structure is not a roof, or if aged SR information is not
available, at installation it must have an initial SR of at least 0.33 as measured in
accordance with ANSI/CRRC S100.
• Paving materials with an initial SR value of at least 0.33.
• An open-grid pavement system (at least 50% unbound).

High-reflectance roof
Use roofing materials that have an aged solar reflectance index (SRI) value equal to or greater
than the values in Table 1. If aged SRI is not available, the roofing material shall have an initial
SRI equal to or greater than the values in Table 1.

Table 1. Minimum SRI value, by roof slope

Slope Initial SRI Aged SRI

Low-Sloped Roof ≤ 2:12 82 64

Steep-Sloped Roof > 2:12 39 32

A roof area that consists of functional, usable spaces (e.g., helipads, recreation courts,
swimming pools, and similar amenity areas) may meet the requirements of nonroof measures.
Applicable roof area excludes roof area covered by mechanical equipment, solar energy panels,
skylights, and any other appurtenances.

Vegetated roof
Install a vegetated roof using native or adapted plant species.

AND/OR

Option 2. Parking Under Cover (1 point)

Place 100% of parking spaces under cover. Any roof used to shade or cover parking must meet
at least one of the following criteria:

• Have an aged SRI of at least 32. If aged value information is not available, use materials
with an initial SRI of at least 39 at installation.
• Be a vegetated roof.
• Be covered by energy generation systems, such as solar thermal collectors,
photovoltaics, and wind turbines.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 144
The credit calculations must include all existing and new off-street parking spaces that are
subsidized, leased, or owned by the project, including parking that is outside the project
boundary but is used by the project. On-street parking in public rights-of-way is excluded from
these calculations.

AND/OR

Option 3. Tree Equity (1 point)

For all U.S. projects only, evaluate the American Forests Tree Equity score for the site location.
For projects in areas ranked “high priority” and “highest priority,” use the results of the
evaluation to inform an increase in on-site canopy cover from the existing condition.

For international projects, refer to IPp2: Human Impact Assessment and evaluate the tree cover
on-site and in the surrounding community, either by using a local tree census or conducting a
site assessment. Analyze the project’s local community composition to identify any neighboring
underserved and/or disadvantaged populations with lower tree canopy presence. Use the
results of the evaluation to inform an increase in on-site canopy cover from the existing
condition to provide shade to neighboring underserved and/or disadvantaged areas. Projects
with no exterior work are exempt from this requirement.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages the use of strategies that minimize a project’s overall contribution to the
heat island effect. Option 1 addresses nonroof and roof measures including reducing
hardscapes, incorporating high SRI or high SR materials, increasing tree cover, and
implementing vegetation across the site. SRI measures a roofing material’s ability to reject solar
heat, while SR measures the solar heat rejection of hardscape materials.

Unshaded parking lots become mini-heat islands, absorbing the sun’s warmth, and radiating
heat. Option 2 encourages project teams to place parking spaces under cover that have low SRI
roofing materials, solar canopies, or are located underground or within a building.

When considering Option 2, projects must account any existing or new off-street parking that
the project leases or owns. If these spaces are not in direct control of the project team,
coordinate with additional stakeholders to confirm covered parking is a viable option for these
spaces.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 145
Option 1. Nonroof and Roof
Implementing both nonroof and roof measures are essential in mitigating heat island effects,
with each providing significant environmental benefits to the building, site, and occupants. Using
a combination of nonroof and roof strategies can create a more sustainable and resilient urban
environment.

Nonroof measures
Nonroof measures include shading with new or existing plant material or shading structures,
specifying high reflectance paving and open-grid paving, and including vegetated planters
across the site. Using a variety of plant species allows for biodiversity, while tree canopies and
shading structures create areas of respite on a hot, sunny day.

Roof measures
Roof measures, including the use of vegetated and high reflectance roofs, can improve energy
efficiency and thermal comfort and can reduce carbon emissions associated with building
energy use.

Projects pursuing this option must consider the slope of the roof, and both the initial and aged
SRI value when selecting compliant materials. For low-sloped roofs, the roofing material must
meet the minimum value of an initial SRI of 82 or aged value of 64. For steep-sloped roofs, the
minimum required values are an initial SRI of 39 or aged SRI of 32. These specific SRI values
are indicative of a material that performs well in reducing heat absorption both when it is new
and after it has aged.

Vegetated roof
When incorporating a vegetated roof into the design, projects must prioritize the use of native or
adapted plant species. These species are well-adapted to the local environment and typically
require less maintenance and support local biodiversity.78

Nonroof and roof measures calculation

Projects pursuing this option must confirm compliance with the combined roof and nonroof
strategies by calculating the total area associated with each measure (e.g., nonroof, high
reflectance roof, and vegetated roof areas) and dividing it by its weighted value. The total value
of implemented strategies must meet or exceed the total site paving area plus the total roof area
within the project’s boundary.

78Why native plants matter, (n.d.), Audubon, audubon.org/content/why-native-plants-

matter#:~:text=Because%20native%20plants%20are%20adapted%20to%20local%20environmental,and%20perhaps%20the%20m
ost%20valuable%20natural%20resource%2C%20water.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 146
Equation 1. Weighted nonroof or roof calculation
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑠 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ-𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑣𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓
+ +
0.5 0.75 0.75
≥ 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑝𝑎𝑣𝑒𝑑 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 + 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎

Projects should evaluate and achieve compliance using Equation 1. If the project does not
achieve the standard nonroof or roof calculations, teams may use an SRI and SR weighted
average approach to calculate compliance. The weighted nonroof or roof equation weighs the
SR and SRI for total hardscape and roof area, showing its overall consequence on heat island
effect. This equation is useful for projects that have multiple roof angles, and nonroof or roof
materials that fall both above and below the required SR and SRI values.

Equation 2. Weighted nonroof or roof calculation

𝑆𝑅 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝐴
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝐴 ×
𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑆𝑅
( )1
0.5

𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑜𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑛𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑚𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑠

+
0.5
𝑆𝑅𝐼 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝐴
𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 ℎ𝑖𝑔ℎ 𝑟𝑒𝑓𝑙𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 ×
𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑆𝑅
+ ( )2
0.75

(𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑣𝑒𝑔𝑒𝑡𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓)

+ ≥ 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑡𝑒 𝑝𝑎𝑣𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 + 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑟𝑜𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎
0.75

where:
1. Summed for all high reflectance nonroof areas
2. Summed for all high reflectance roof areas

Option 2. Parking Under Cover

Unshaded parking areas have become small urban heat islands as most outdoor parking lots
use dark colored impervious surfaces, such as asphalt or concrete pavements with low SR
value. When parking is under cover, it significantly reduces the exposed hardscape area and
minimizes the heat island effect. Covered parking strategies include placing parking
underground, underdeck, under roof, or under the building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 147
Projects pursuing this option must place 100% of the total vehicle parking spaces under cover.
Include all new parking in the calculation. Factor existing and new off-street parking spaces that
leased or owned by the project into the calculations.

Option 3. Tree Equity

The most effective measure in mitigating the climate change effects generated by heat islands is
to minimize the hardscape on the project site and increase on-site tree canopy. Given the
important role trees play in slowing climate change, American Forests created the Tree Equity
Score to focus on addressing the inequity in tree coverage in neighborhoods in the U.S. and the
UK. A “high priority” or “highest priority” area identified in the Tree Equity Score map means an
area where the community trees the most. Incorporating site landscaping can help contribute to
a greener and cooler environment.

All projects should aim to increase the on-site tree canopy. Projects identified as “high priority”
or “highest priority” must further evaluate the planned tree canopy and increase on-site tree
canopy coverage.

Projects in other countries, or in areas that don’t have a Tree Equity Score, can use platforms
such as Global Forest Watch to help understand tree coverage in the project neighborhood.79
These projects are required to refer to IPp2: Human Impact Assessment during evaluation, and
should consider development in areas where the local tree census or site assessment identifies
neighboring underserved and/or disadvantaged communities with lower tree canopy. Projects
must evaluate the tree cover on-site and in nearby areas and use this evaluation to inform an
increase in on-site tree coverage.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Weighted average nonroof and roof calculation.
Nonroof and LEED v5 Heat Island Reduction calculator.
Roof The project’s hardscape plan identifying all site paving
types, any structures covered by energy generation
systems, any architectural devices or structures, and the
relevant area measurements within the LEED project
boundary.
Evidence of the SR value for each nonroofing material,
architectural device, or structure (e.g., default values, or
product information from the manufacturer).

79 “Forest Monitoring, Land Use & Deforestation Trends”, Global Forest Watch, last accessed April 2, 2025,
https://www.globalforestwatch.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 148
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Evidence of the paving permeability for any contributing
open-grid pavement (e.g., product information from the
manufacturer).
Shadow plan for any planting or vegetated structures
contributing shade over pavement areas in the
calculation.
Evidence of the ten-year canopy width for any planting
contributing shade over pavements areas in the
calculation (e.g., plant growth guide).
The project’s roof plan(s) identifying all vegetated roof
area, helipads, amenity areas, mechanical equipment,
solar energy panels, skylights, other roof
appurtenances, roofing materials with area
measurements, and roof slope(s)
Evidence of each roofing materials’ SRI value (e.g.,
default values or product information from the
manufacturer).
The plant species list for the vegetated roof.
Option 2. All Evidence of the location of all existing and new off-street
Parking parking spaces that are subsidized, leased, or owned by
Under Cover the project, including parking that is outside the project
boundary but is used by the project (e.g., contract
documents).
Evidence that any roof used to shade or cover parking
meets the required criteria (e.g., roofing material product
information from the manufacturer highlighting SRI,
photographs or contract documents depicting the
vegetated roof or energy generation systems).
Option 3. All Areas of existing condition and design/post-construction
Tree Equity tree canopy cover on-site.
Evidence of increase in tree canopy cover (e.g., pre-
design site survey and contract landscape plan).
Projects in Evidence of the project’s Tree Equity Score and ranking
the U.S. (e.g., a screenshot).
International Analysis of the project’s local community composition,
Projects identifying any neighboring underserved and/or
disadvantaged populations with lower tree canopy
presence (e.g., census data from IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment).
Evidence of the tree canopy presence in the surrounding
community (e.g., a local tree census or a surrounding
community site assessment), and identification of any
neighboring underserved and/or disadvantaged
populations with lower tree canopy presence.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ANSI/CRRC S100, Standard Test Methods for Determining Radiative Properties of Material
(coolroofs.org/documents/ANSI-CRRC-S100-2021_Final_Archived.pdf)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 149
• ASTM E1980 Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and
Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces (astm.org/e1980-11r19.html)
• Cool Roof Ratings Council, Rated Products Directory (coolroofs.org/directory)
• US Environmental Protection Agency (epa.gov/heatislands/learn-about-heat-islands)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 150
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Sustainable Sites Credit and Restoration

LIGHT POLLUTION REDUCTION

SSc6
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To increase night sky access, improve nighttime visibility, and reduce the consequences of
development for wildlife and people.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Uplight
AND
Light Trespass 1
AND
Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage

Meet the following uplight, light trespass, and internally illuminated exterior signage
requirements for exterior luminaires located inside the project boundary.

Uplight
Do not exceed the following uplight ratings, based on the specific light source installed in the
luminaire, as defined in Table 1.

Table 1. Maximum uplight ratings for luminaires

Model Lighting Ordinance Luminaire uplight
(MLO) lighting zone rating
LZ0 U0
LZ1 U0
LZ2 U2
LZ3 U3
LZ4 U4

AND

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 151
Light Trespass
Do not exceed the following luminaire backlight and glare ratings (based on the specific light
source installed in the luminaire), as defined in IES TM-15-11, Addendum A, based on the
mounting location and distance from the lighting boundary.

Table 2. Maximum backlight and glare ratings

MLO lighting zone

Luminaire mounting LZ0 LZ1 LZ2 LZ3 LZ4
Allowed backlight ratings

> 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary B1 B3 B4 B5 B5

1 to 2 mounting heights from lighting boundary

B1 B2 B3 B4 B4
and properly oriented
0.5 to 1 mounting height to lighting boundary and
B0 B1 B2 B3 B3
properly oriented
< 0.5 mounting height to lighting boundary and
B0 B0 B0 B1 B2
properly oriented
Allowed glare ratings
Building mounted > 2 mounting heights from any
G0 G1 G2 G3 G4
lighting boundary
Building mounted = 1–2 mounting heights from
G0 G0 G1 G1 G2
any lighting boundary
Building mounted = 0.5–1 mounting heights from
G0 G0 G0 G1 G1
any lighting boundary
Building mounted < 0.5 mounting heights from
G0 G0 G0 G0 G1
any lighting boundary

All other luminaires G0 G1 G2 G3 G4

AND

Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage

Do not exceed the maximum luminance level of internally illuminated signage during nighttime
hours according to Table 3.

Table 3. Maximum sign luminance

MLO lighting zone Signage light output

LZ0 50 cd/m2
LZ1 50 cd/m2
LZ2 100 cd/m2
LZ3 200 cd/m2
LZ4 350 cd/m2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 152
Exemptions to uplight and light trespass requirements
The following exterior lighting is exempt from the requirements, provided it is controlled
separately from the nonexempt lighting:

• Specialized signal, directional, and marker lighting for transportation.

• Lighting used solely for façade and landscape lighting in MLO lighting zones 3 and 4,
and is automatically turned off from midnight until 6 a.m.
• Lighting for theatrical purposes for stage, film, and video performances.
• Government-mandated roadway lighting.
• Lighting for hospital emergency departments, including associated helipads.
• Lighting for the national flag in lighting zones 2, 3, or 4.
• Internally illuminated exterior signage.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards projects which meet the requirements of uplight, light trespass (backlight
and glare), and internally illuminated exterior signage for exterior luminaires within the project
boundary. Minimizing light pollution is essential for preserving our night skies, protecting wildlife,
and improving human health. Strategies include the use of light shielding, where fixtures direct
light downward, reducing glare and light trespass. Using dimmers, motion sensors, and timers
ensure lights are only on when needed.

Luminaires
This credit requires an assessment of all new and existing exterior luminaires within the project
boundary, including any building-mounted fixtures. When performing calculations, the
photometric characteristics of each luminaire must reflect the design conditions, including
mounting orientation and tilt.

Determining the Lighting Zone

Classify projects under a single lighting zone, as identified in the Illuminating Engineering
Society and DarkSky International (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide80.
Teams shall determine the project’s lighting zone based on the property classification, at the
time construction begins or in accordance with MLO guidance.

80 Illuminating Engineering Society and DarkSky International (IES/IDA) Model Lighting Ordinance (MLO) User Guide,
https://store.ies.org/product/ida-ies-mlo-11-model-lighting-ordinance-mlo-with-users-guide/?v=0b3b97fa6688

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 153
Determining the Lighting Boundary
Assess credit compliance using a lighting boundary. Using a lighting boundary ensures that
projects assess the light trespass from the lighting installed within the project and how it impacts
the surrounding areas.

Additional considerations for defining the lighting boundary

Project must consider the following when developing the lighting boundary for
public areas, roadways, and campus properties:

⚫ Lighting boundary. The lighting boundary is typically based on the project’s

property lines and surrounding areas but may not directly align with the project’s
LEED boundary. Under certain conditions, the lighting boundary may extend
beyond the property line.

⚫ Public areas. When a public area, including but not limited to a walkway,
bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, abuts the property line, the property owner may
move the lighting boundary to five feet (1.5 meters) beyond the property line.

⚫ Roadways and transit corridors. When a property line abuts a public

street, alley, or transit corridor, the lighting boundary may move to the center line
of that street, alley, or corridor.

⚫ Campus properties. For buildings on campuses or shared properties, the

lighting boundary can use the campus property line to meet light trespass
requirements. Additional properties owned by the same entity must be
contiguous on the property. They cannot use off-site properties.

Uplight Requirements
Avoiding uplight is an effective strategy to reduce light pollution. Uplighting occurs from site
fixtures that direct light upwards. Prevent excess light pollution for site luminaires by selecting
fully shielded fixtures that direct light downwards.

Uplight Ratings
An uplight rating of U0 indicates that the fixture emits zero light upwards into the night sky and
meets credit intent. This is particularly important for projects aiming to minimize light pollution
and comply with Dark Sky standards. A U0 rating ensures that all light directs downwards,
preventing it from contributing to sky glow.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 154
For projects located in MLO Lighting Zones LZ0 or LZ1, teams must use luminaires with an
uplight rating of U0.

For projects in MLO Lighting Zones LZ2, LZ3, or LZ4, luminaire uplight ratings cannot exceed
U2, U3, and U4, respectively.

Light Trespass Requirements

Light trespass is a form of light pollution where unwanted artificial light spills over into areas
where it is not intended or needed, often causing disturbances. This can happen when outdoor
lighting, such as floodlights or streetlights, illuminate neighboring properties or shine into other
property windows.

Fixture Location and Mounting Heights

A common reason for light trespass typically includes poorly shielded lighting located too close
to property lines. To minimize lighting trespass, examine luminaire spillage along with the
location of the exterior luminaire. This requires a review of the location and mounting height for
each luminaire.

Identify the location of all exterior lights on a site lighting plan and measure the horizontal
distance from the lighting boundary. Then, determine the mounting height of each luminaire. The
mounting height of the exterior luminaire is the vertical distance from the reference plane (i.e.,
the ground surface).

Determining the Maximum Backlight and Glare Requirements

Table 2 defines the maximum allowed backlight and glare ratings, per lighting zone. The team
determines backlight and glare ratings per luminaire by using the mounting height and the
distance from the lighting boundary. The closer the luminaire is to the boundary, the stricter the
requirements.

Exemptions for Uplight and Light Trespass

Specific fixtures are exempt from the light trespass requirements due to their critical functions
and unique needs. Identify fixtures that meet these exemptions. Control any exempt fixtures
separately from non-exempt fixtures.

Transportation and roadways

Specialized signal, directional, and marker lighting for transportation fixtures ensure safety and
proper navigation for vehicles, aircraft, and ships. Government-mandated roadway lighting
provides necessary illumination for public safety on roads and highways.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 155
Theatrical lighting
Lighting for theatrical purposes is essential for stage, film, and video performances, and precise
lighting is crucial for production quality.

Healthcare
Lighting for hospital emergency departments and helipads are critical for emergency services,
ensuring visibility for medical personnel and aircraft.

National and state flag lighting

Lighting for the national flag is symbolic and often requires illumination at night, especially in
higher lighting zones (2, 3, or 4). When state flags are flown with federal or national flags, they
exempt lighting.

Internally Illuminated Exterior Signage

Exterior signage can be a significant source of light pollution, contributing to issues like light
trespass, skyglow, and glare. Table 3 provides maximum nighttime luminance levels for any
exterior signage. Using photometric calculations, verify that the signage light output does not
exceed the luminance levels (cd/m2) during nighttime hours.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All MLO Lighting Zone.
Justification of MLO Lighting Zone classification (e.g., aerial
image of site and bordering parcels/community).
Site lighting plan showing all exterior light fixtures within the
lighting boundary, measuring the distance from the furthest of
each light fixture type to the lighting boundary; include a
key/schedule.
Contract documents showing all the project’s internally
illuminated signage details.
LEED v5 Light Pollution Reduction calculator.

Product information from the exterior lighting manufacturers,

highlighting the BUG ratings for each fixture
Evidence of the maximum nighttime luminance levels of any
internally illuminated signage (e.g., product information from the
manufacturer or test results).
Evidence that all installed exterior lighting in Model Lighting
Ordinance (MLO) Lighting Zones 3 and 4 are automatically
turned off when daylight is available (e.g., contract documents
or commissioning reports showing the programmed settings).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 156
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Evidence that any exterior lighting claiming an exemption from
the requirements is controlled separately from the nonexempt
lighting (e.g., contract documents).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Illuminating Engineering Society and DarkSky International (IES/IDA) Model Lighting
Ordinance (MLO) User Guide (store.ies.org/product/ida-ies-mlo-11-model-lighting-
ordinance-mlo-with-users-guide)
• Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-15-11, Addendum A (ies.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 157
WATER EFFICIENCY (WE)
OVERVIEW
LEED v5 integrates water efficiency with new stewardship strategies, redefining water as a
valuable and limited resource. The WE category encourages projects to conserve potable to
safeguard ecosystems, reduce energy use, and boost resilience on-site and in the wider
community.

New construction projects can design highly efficient water systems by combining LEED’s
proven efficiency strategies with innovative water stewardship approaches. While global water
efficiency has improved, water stress and scarcity remain pressing challenges, with
approximately 2.4 billion people living in water-stressed regions as of 2020.81 Climate change
and population growth intensify these issues, underscoring the need for adaptable, forward-
thinking resource management plans.

The connections between efficiency and stewardship show up clearly in the whole project water
use strategy (WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency). Rather than isolating individual components,
this approach encourages comprehensive site-wide water consumption assessments. Originally
piloted in LEED v4.1, this strategy has become a permanent feature in LEED v5.

This stewardship approach aligns with growing market interest in alternative water use, seen in
water-limited regions like California.82 By incorporating alternative water sources, projects can
reduce reliance on potable supplies, alleviating the strain on overburdened systems (WEc2:
Enhanced Water Efficiency).

Decarbonization
Water efficiency can significantly reduce energy use and carbon emissions. For example,
running a faucet for five minutes uses about as much energy as letting a 60-watt light bulb run
for 14 hours.83 LEED v5 advances decarbonization efforts by reducing the energy use linked to
inefficiencies within water treatment, transportation, distribution, and heating (WEp2: Minimum
Water Efficiency, WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection). Additionally, new appliances must

81 Martin. 2023. “Water and Sanitation - United Nations Sustainable Development.” United Nations Sustainable Development.
October 19, 2023. https://www.un.org/sustainabledevelopment/water-and-
sanitation/#:~:text=Investments%20in%20infrastructure%20and%20sanitation%20facilities%3B%20protection%20and,efficiency%2
0is%20one%20key%20to%20reducing%20water%20stress.
82 “Water Reuse Case Study: Los Angeles County, California | US EPA.” 2025a. US EPA. January 31, 2025.
https://www.epa.gov/waterreuse/water-reuse-case-study-los-angeles-county-california.
83 “Why Water Efficiency | WaterSense | US EPA.” n.d.
https://19january2017snapshot.epa.gov/www3/watersense/our_water/why_water_efficiency.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 158
meet high-performance requirements. This ensures that future water use hits ambitious
performance targets (WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency).
Quality of life
Conserving potable water enables it to go further for broader community use. Projects can
prepare for a resilient future by tracking water consumption indoors and outdoors, identifying
opportunities for savings (WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection).

Ecological conservation and restoration

Through water reduction and optimization strategies, projects ease the strain on ecosystems
and preserve vital resources. Submetering and leak detection sensors reduce water waste from
leaks or system inefficiencies. Through early leak identification, projects can avoid potential
water damage and ensure conservation efforts are on track (WEp1: Water Metering and
Reporting). Building managers and tenants can take immediate action to ensure they meet
conservation goals (WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection).

By embracing the strategies in the WE category, projects not only protect one of the planet’s
most essential resources but also set the foundation for a more resilient, sustainable, and
equitable future for all.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 159
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Prerequisite and Restoration

WATER METERING AND REPORTING

WEp1
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To conserve potable water resources, support water management, and identify opportunities for
additional water savings by tracking water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Water Metering

Install or use existing permanent water meters to monitor, record, and report the total water
consumption for potable and alternative water sources for the building and associated grounds.
Report whole-project use for each type of water source supplied to the building and associated
grounds, with the following additional provisions:

• The facility manager and/or tenant(s) must be able to access the meter data.
• Meter alternative water sources separately from municipally supplied potable water.
• Commit to sharing with USGBC the resulting whole-project water usage data at least
annually. This commitment must carry forward for 5 years or until the building changes
ownership or lessee.

The requirements may be applied to the project scope of work and exclude future tenant utility
services and submeters that will be installed in the tenant scope of work.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires that projects install or use existing meters and collect water
consumption data in gallons or liters from all water sources within the project boundary. This
includes potable water sources and alternative water sources. Projects must also provide data
access to facility managers, operations managers, tenants, and/or another appropriate people.
In addition, projects must commit to reporting the total water consumption to USGBC at least
annually. Share the data for five years, or until the building changes ownership or lessee.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 160
Tracking and reviewing data monthly allow the facility manager and/or tenants ongoing
opportunities to identify inefficiencies or anomalies in consumption and immediately address
problems, such as leaks and failed valves, before larger issues or excess consumption occur.
Projects in a campus environment must only report usage from within the project boundary.

Identifying all Water Sources and Water End-Uses

Project teams must identify all water end uses in the building and on the project site. Teams
should continuously analyze water consumption from each source to identify potential leaks or
operational issues. Common end uses include plumbing fixtures, cooling towers, laundry
facilities, dishwashers, indoor and outdoor water features, irrigation, and other building and site
processes.

For each end use, identify the water source. Potable water sources include public water supply,
on-site wells, and on-site potable water treatment systems. Alternative water sources include
gray water, rainwater, recycled water, and reclaimed water. When using alternative water
sources, meter them separately from municipally supplied potable water.

Meters and Types of Meters

Install meters only for systems within the scope of work. The prerequisite does not require
meters for future tenant utility services and/or submeters not installed within the new
construction scope of work.

Specify permanent meter(s) that provide water consumption data in gallons or liters. A utility-
owned meter that provides the required data meets the prerequisite requirements. Utility
providers often read and bill total water consumption monthly.

Tracking and reporting

Demonstrate that the key person(s) responsible for tracking and reporting water consumption
data can access the utility-owned meter. If the location is not accessible, providing access to
monthly utility bill(s) achieves the same goal. If projects cannot demonstrate access through
direct, visual readings or monthly utility bills, teams must install additional meter(s) to meet the
prerequisite.

Multiple sources of potable or alternative water in a project boundary

Teams must identify whether the project boundary uses multiple sources of potable water or
alternative water. A single meter per water source can meet the requirement if the design allows
for the proper placement of the meter. Projects with campus-level irrigation metering must
submit an engineering calculation that accurately reflects the water consumption of the project

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 161
boundary’s landscaped area. Projects can also prorate irrigation data for the project boundary
from the campus meter.

Additional considerations
Projects that pursue WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection, Option 1
Submeters should consider strategies that meet both the prerequisite and credit.
For example, using a single utility-owned meter for the project’s total potable
water use meets the prerequisite; however, it does not comply with the credit
requirements. For WEc1: Water Metering and Leak Detection, Option 1
Submeters, teams must install additional meters to capture each potable water
end-use, as outlined in the credit.

Commitment to Sharing Data with USGBC

USGBC aims to collect data on water usage from all LEED buildings. Having this data allows
USGBC to identify similarities between high-performing projects and recommend solutions with
proven results.

Projects must commit to sharing whole-project water usage data with USGBC annually for at
least five years, or until the building changes ownership or lessee. Share data using a USGBC-
approved data template or an approved third-party data source, such as ENERGY STAR®
Portfolio Manager.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Documentation showing that all water meters are
permanently installed.
Confirmation that the facility manager and/or tenant(s) can
access the meter data.
Confirmation that alternative water sources are metered
separately from municipally supplied potable water.
Commitment from the Project Owner to share with USGBC
the resulting whole-project water usage data at least
annually.
Method of data sharing.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 162
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Prerequisite and Restoration

MINIMUM WATER EFFICIENCY

WEp2
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To reduce potable water consumption and the associated energy consumption and carbon
emissions required to treat and distribute water, and to preserve potable water resources
through an efficiency-first approach.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency
Option 1. Prescriptive Path–Maximum Flush and Flow Rates
OR
Option 2. Performance Path–Calculated Reduction
AND
Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency
AND
Minimum Outdoor Water Use Efficiency
Option 1. No Irrigation
OR
Option 2. Efficient Irrigation

Meet all minimum water efficiency requirements outlined below.

Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency

Meet the following minimum water efficiency requirements for fixtures and fittings.

Core and Shell only

These requirements must be met for the base building fixtures and fittings,
appliances, equipment, process water, and outdoor water use. For tenant
spaces, include manufacturer documentation for the base building’s fixtures and
fittings, appliances, and equipment in IPp4: Tenant Guidelines.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 163
Projects located where standard supply pressure is different than the LEED baseline supply
pressure may calculate the water consumption of flow fixtures and fittings at the local standard
supply pressure.

OPTION 1. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH — MAXIMUM FLUSH AND FLOW RATES

For all new and existing fixtures and fittings within the project boundary, do not exceed the
maximum flush and flow rates listed in Table 1.

Table 1. Maximum installed flush or flow rates for prescriptive path

Fixture or fitting Maximum installed flush Maximum installed
or flow rate (IP) flush or Ffow rate (SI)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.28 gpf* 4.8 lpf*
Urinal* 0.50 gpf 1.9 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.50 gpm 1.9 lpm
Private lavatory faucets* 1.50 gpm 5.7 lpm
Kitchen faucet 1.8 gpm 6.8 lpm
Showerhead* 2.00 gpm 7.6 lpm
NOTE: The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type. WaterSense-labeled fixtures are recommended for projects located
in the U.S. and Canada.
*For dual-flush toilets, the full-flush volume shall be equal to or fewer than 1.28 gpf/4.8 lpf; a weighted average cannot be used.

OR

OPTION 2. PERFORMANCE PATH — CALCULATED REDUCTION

For all new and existing fixtures and fittings within the project boundary, reduce aggregate water
consumption by 20% from the baseline listed in Table 2.

Table 2. Baseline water consumption of fixtures and fittings

Fixture or fitting Baseline installed flush or Baseline installed flush
flow rate (IP) or flow rate (SI)
Toilet (water closet)* 1.6 gpf* 6.0 lpf*
Urinal* 1.0 gpf 3.8 lpf
Public lavatory (restroom) faucet 0.50 gpm at 60 psi 1.9 lpm at 415 kPa
Private lavatory faucets* 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Kitchen faucet 2.2 gpm at 60 psi 8.3 lpm at 415 kPa
Showerhead* 2.5 gpm at 80 psi per shower 9.5 lpm at 550 kPa per
stall shower stall
NOTE: The WaterSense label is available for this fixture type. WaterSense-labeled fixtures are recommended for projects located
in the U.S. and Canada.
*For dual-flush toilets, the full-flush volume shall be equal to or fewer than 1.28 gpf/4.8 lpf; a weighted average cannot be used.

AND

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 164
Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency
Newly installed appliances, equipment, and processes within the project boundary must meet
the requirements listed in Tables 3 and 4. Existing appliances and equipment can be excluded.

Table 3. Standards for appliances

Appliance Requirement
Residential clothes washers ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent

Commercial clothes washers ENERGY STAR® for commercial clothes washers with ≤ 8.0
cubic feet (227 liters) capacity or performance equivalent
Residential dishwashers (standard ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent
and compact)
Prerinse spray valves ≤ 1.3 gpm (4.9 lpm)
Ice machine ENERGY STAR® or performance equivalent and use either
air-cooled or closed-loop cooling, such as chilled or condenser
water system
Commercial kitchen equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Dishwasher Undercounter ≤ 1.6 gal/rack ≤ 6.0 liters/rack
Stationary, single ≤ 1.4 gal/rack ≤ 5.3 liters/rack
tank, door
Single tank, ≤ 1.0 gal/rack ≤ 3.8 liters/rack
conveyor
Multiple tank, ≤ 0.9 gal/rack ≤ 3.4 liters/rack
conveyor
Flight machine ≤ 180 gal/hour ≤ 680 liters/hour
Food steamer Boilerless/ ≤ 2 gal/hr/pan ≤ 7.5 liters/hr/pan
connectionless
Steam generator ≤ 5 gal/hr/pan ≤ 19 liters/hr/pan
Combination Countertop or ≤ 1.5 gal/pan ≤ 5.7 liters/pan
oven stand
Roll-in ≤ 1.5 gal/pan ≤ 5.7 liters/pan

Table 4. Standards for processes

Process Requirement
Heat rejection and cooling No once-through cooling with potable water for any equipment or
appliances that reject heat.
Cooling towers and Equip with all the following:
evaporative condensers • Makeup water meters
• Conductivity controllers and overflow alarms
• Efficient drift eliminators that reduce drift to max of 0.001% of
recirculated water volume for counterflow towers and 0.002%
of recirculated water flow for cross-flow towers
Discharge water Where local requirements limit the discharge temperature of fluids into
temperature tempering drainage system, use a tempering device that runs water only when
the equipment discharges hot water.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 165
 Process Requirement
OR

Provide thermal recovery heat exchanger that cools drained discharge

water below code-required maximum discharge temperatures while
simultaneously preheating inlet makeup water.

OR

If fluid is steam condensate, return it to boiler.

Venturi-type flow-through Use no device that generates vacuum by means of water flow through
vacuum generators or device into drain.
aspirators

AND

Minimum Outdoor Water Efficiency

OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum
two-year establishment period.

OR

OPTION 2. EFFICIENT IRRIGATION

Reduce the project’s irrigation water requirement by at least 30% from the calculated baseline
for the site’s annual theoretical irrigation requirement (TIR). Reductions must be achieved
through plant species selection and irrigation system efficiency, as calculated by the TIR
methodology outlined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The prerequisite sets minimum water efficiency requirements for fixtures, fittings, appliances,
process water, and irrigation systems. There are two compliance options for fixture and fitting
efficiency and two for outdoor water use efficiency.

Minimum Fixture and Fitting Efficiency

Reducing potable water use for fixtures and fittings begins with conservation efforts. Selecting
high-efficiency fixtures reduces both water consumption and demand. This can lead to savings
from reductions in pump energy and water heating requirements. For example, selecting high-
efficiency fixtures for lavatories, faucets, and showerheads reduces the electric load required for
water heating.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 166
For LEED BD+C: Core and Shell projects, the requirements are only for the following items:
base building fixtures and fittings, appliances, equipment, process water, and outdoor water
use. For tenant spaces, project teams must include manufacturer documentation for the base
building’s fixtures and fittings, appliances, and equipment, which must be part of IPp4: Tenant
Guidelines.

Choose either a prescriptive or performance pathway to demonstrate compliance for fixture and
fitting efficiencies.

OPTION 1. PRESCRIPTIVE PATH — MAXIMUM FLUSH AND FLOW RATES

The prescriptive path offers a streamlined approach for the prerequisite. Table 1 outlines the
maximum allowable flush or flow rate for fixtures and fittings within the project boundary. All
fixtures and fittings installed must not exceed these maximum values.

For projects that install dual-flush toilets, the volume of the full-flush must be used when
calculating the flush rate. The full-flush rate must not exceed 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf). A weighted
average that demonstrates that the average flow is 1.28 gpf (4.8 lpf) may not be used.

Projects in the U.S. and Canada should use WaterSense-labeled toilets (water closets), urinals,
private lavatory faucets, and showerheads. WaterSense-labeled products require testing and
verification for efficiency by third-party vendors. These products comply with the U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency84 (U.S. EPA) specifications.

OPTION 2. PERFORMANCE PATH — CALCULATED REDUCTION

Using the performance-based approach, teams can maximize water conservation across all
applicable fixtures and fittings within the project boundary. Teams pursuing points under WEc2:
Enhanced Water Efficiency should consider Option 2. Performance Path – Calculated
Reduction to show prerequisite compliance. Compliance with WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency,
Option 2. Performance Path – Calculated Reduction and WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency,
Option 2. Fixtures and Fittings – Calculated Reduction requires documented compliance
through the USGBC-approved calculator.

Teams must prove a reduction of 20% from the baseline water use to meet the minimum
prerequisite requirements.

84 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, https://www.epa.gov/watersense

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 167
Determining the baseline and design-case water use
Teams must determine the project’s baseline water consumption. Total annual consumption
depends on project-specific data, including fitting and fixture types, flush and flow rates, the
number of full-time equivalents and visitors, annual days of operation, and gender ratios. This
data must remain consistent across all LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED BD+C: Core
and Shell credits to maintain the integrity of the submission.

The total number of uses for each fixture and fitting remains the same in the baseline and
design case calculations. The baseline flush and flow rates must use values from Table 2, which
represent the maximum allowed flush and flow rates. The design case must use designed
values that represent the fixtures and fittings installed in the project. For projects that have dual-
flush toilets, use the full-flush volume in the design case calculations. Do not use the weighted
average.

Develop calculations using the USGBC-approved calculator for this option to determine the
percentage reduction.

AND

Minimum Equipment Water Efficiency

During design, teams must identify appliances, kitchen equipment, and processes within the
project boundary and specify products that meet the requirements of Tables 3 and 4. Projects in
the U.S. and Canada must use ENERGY STAR®-labeled equipment. For international projects,
a performance-based equivalent meets the requirements.

ENERGY STAR® qualified appliances perform better than conventional appliances. For
example, ENERGY STAR® washing machines and dishwashers use 30% and 18% less water,
respectively, than their conventional counterparts. These appliances also consume 10% to 50%
less energy than conventional appliances.85 Commercial kitchens employ processes that use
high levels of energy and water, such as dishwashing and food preparation.

AND

Minimum Outdoor Water Efficiency

OPTION 1. NO IRRIGATION
For projects that do not install permanent irrigation, Option 1 offers a streamlined path to
compliance. Teams may use irrigation during the first two years of the initial establishment
period but must remove irrigation after that period.

85U.S. Department of Energy, (n.d.), Guide to home water efficiency,

energy.gov/sites/prod/files/guide_to_home_water_efficiency.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 168
Projects that use alternative water sources for irrigation do not automatically comply with this
option. Projects must still prove reductions using WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency, Option 2.
Efficient Irrigation.

OPTION 2. EFFICIENT IRRIGATION

For projects with permanent irrigation, teams must design efficient irrigation systems.

For projects with permanent irrigation, teams must demonstrate that the installed irrigation
system uses at least 30% less water than the baseline. Calculate the baseline water
consumption using the site’s TIR. Projects may use irrigation system efficiencies, plant species
selection, or a combination of strategies to achieve the 30% reduction.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Contract document(s) specifying the project’s plumbing
fixtures and fittings, including performance specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project’s appliances,
equipment, and process water equipment, including
performance specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project’s commercial
kitchen equipment water use, including performance
specifications.
Contract document(s) specifying the project’s water
equipment process, including performance specifications.
LEED v5 Fixture and Fittings Efficiency calculator.
LEED v5 Minimum Outdoor Water Use Efficiency
calculator.
No Irrigation Documentation confirming that an irrigation system is not
installed.
Irrigation Evidence that the landscape does not require a permanent
System irrigation system beyond a maximum two-year
establishment period (e.g., a contract document detailing
the temporary irrigation methods).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ENERGY STAR® (appliance standards) (energystar.gov/products)
• US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Theoretical Irrigation Requirement (TIR)
calculation methodology (epa.gov/sites/default/files/2021-
02/documents/watersense_final_technical_evaluation_process_for_home_certification_v1.0.
pdf)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 169
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Credit and Restoration

WATER METERING AND LEAK DETECTION

WEc1
1 POINT
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell(1 point)

INTENT
To conserve potable water resources, support water management, limit potential material waste
due to water leak damages, and identify opportunities for additional water savings by tracking
water consumption.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Option 1. Submeters 1
OR
Option 2. Leak Detection Sensors 1

Option 1. Submeters (1 point)

Install permanent water meters for each applicable subsystem defined below:

• Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings. Meter systems serving at least 80% of indoor
fixtures and fittings as described in WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency. Fixtures and
fittings not addressed in the prerequisite, including janitor sinks, water coolers, and bottle
fillers, may be included or excluded from the indoor plumbing fixtures’ subsystem at the
project team’s discretion.
• Irrigation system.
• Each makeup water system (e.g., cold water inlet for domestic hot water, swimming
pools, chilled water systems, process water systems).
• Commercial kitchen (if the kitchen serves at least 100 meals per day of operation).
• Laundry (if the project includes commercial laundry equipment that processes at least
120,000 lbs. [57,606 kg] of laundry per year or if the project includes a public laundry
room).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 170
The facility manager and/or tenant(s) must be able to access the submeter data in real time via
local network, building management system, cloud service, app, or online database. All
submeters must be capable of recording data at least hourly.

Core and Shell only

In addition to the requirement above, meters must be installed for future tenant
spaces so that tenants will be capable of independently metering water
consumption in their spaces. Provide a sufficient number of meters to capture
total potable water use with a minimum of one per floor.

Healthcare only
In addition to the requirements above, install water meters in any five of the following:

• Purified water systems (reverse-osmosis, deionized)

• Filter backwash water
• Water use in the dietary department
• Water use in laundry
• Water use in laboratory
• Water use in central sterile and processing department
• Water use in physiotherapy and hydrotherapy and treatment areas
• Water use in surgical suite
• Closed-loop hydronic system makeup water
• Cold-water makeup for domestic hot water systems

If a healthcare project does not include five of the additional subsystems listed above within the
project scope, the project may alternatively submeter all water subsystems that are applicable to
the project scope.

Residential only
Install a permanent water meter for each residential dwelling unit that measures the total
potable water use for the unit. These meters need not be utility owned or utility grade.

OR

Option 2. Leak Detection Sensors (1 point)

Install permanent water flow meter or sensors for each applicable subsystem defined below:

• Project irrigation system at the point of entry, if irrigation is included in the project scope.
• At least 50% of the project flush fixtures. Water sensors can be installed on each flush
fixture or for a group of flush fixtures (e.g., one per restroom facility). For LEED BD+C:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 171
 Core and Shell projects, this only applies to flush fixtures within the project’s scope of
work.
• Each makeup water system (e.g., cold water inlet for domestic hot water, swimming
pools, chilled water systems, and process water systems).

The leak detection system should be able to identify a leak triggered by abnormal flow rate
above normal range, or physically detect a water leak, and initiate an alarm upon a leak
detection.

The facility manager and/or tenant(s) must be able to access the sensor data in real time via
local network, BMS, cloud service, app, or online database.

Develop an action plan that addresses how the building manager or tenant will have access to
data in real time and how the building manager and/or tenant(s) will address and remedy any
detected leak.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages projects to further develop water submetering beyond the WEp1: Water
Metering and Reporting requirements. Projects pursuing this credit must permanently install
submeters and sensors. These tools are necessary to report and track water use for applicable
subsystems. Option 1 requires submeters on all water-using systems within the project
boundary. Healthcare and residential projects have project-specific requirements to meet the
Option 1 requirements. Option 2 requires leak detection sensors and data integration with the
BMS, or something similar.

Projects can only achieve one point for choosing either Option 1 or Option 2 of this credit.

Submetering and leak detection strategies, when developed early in the design, provide
significant benefits to the owner and design team. Teams can identify all water-using systems
and prioritize submeters for major systems.

Option 1. Submeters
Teams must install submeters for all of the following water-using subsystems, as applicable to
the project: indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings, irrigation systems, make-up water systems,
commercial kitchen water use, and laundry water use. WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency
addresses cooling tower submeters.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 172
Core and Shell projects must also install meters for future tenant spaces so that tenants will be
capable of independently metering water consumption in their spaces. These projects must also
install a sufficient number of meters to capture total potable water use with a minimum of one
per floor.

Facility managers and/or tenants must have access to the real-time data via the project’s local
network, BMS, cloud service, web-based application, or an online database.

Indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings

Most projects have indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings. Water use from water closets and
lavatories represents a significant amount of a building’s total water consumption for many
project types. Additionally, leaks from indoor fixtures and fittings often go unnoticed until water
damage occurs on walls, ceilings, or floors.

Projects must submeter at least 80% of the total indoor fixtures and fittings, as identified in
WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency.

Depending on the distribution piping and the metering strategy, projects can directly meter water
consumption from indoor plumbing fixtures and fittings or calculate the consumption by
subtracting all other subsystems from the total water consumption of the building and the
grounds.

Irrigation systems
Projects that include permanently installed irrigation systems must meter the irrigation water
use. This includes any potable or alternative water sources used for the project.

In many cases, irrigation systems require additional submeters to meet the data recording
requirements. While a utility-owned irrigation meter captures the total consumption of the
system, hourly recording and reporting to BMS, cloud service, or online database is not typical.
Teams must confirm meter capabilities and include additional devices when necessary.

Tracking the water used by irrigation systems allows operators to identify leaking or inefficient
sprinkler heads. It can also identify underground pipe leaks, which are often unresolved until
visual inspections observe damp areas on the site.

Make-up water systems

Make-up water requirements vary by system and project. Systems that require make-up may
include cold water inlets for the domestic hot water system, swimming pools, chilled water
systems, or other processes.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 173
Confirm the number of make-up water systems within the project boundary, and meter each
system individually. Provide infrastructure capable of reporting and recording hourly
consumption.

A single meter that reports total make-up water to a building or site does not meet the credit
requirements.

Commercial kitchens
Typical commercial kitchen systems such as dishwashers, food steamers, and combination
ovens require large quantities of potable water. Even when using water-efficient equipment, it is
critical that projects track consumption from these appliances to ensure efficient operations and
identify water supply failures.

The requirement for metering water use in a commercial kitchen depends on the number of
daily meals served. Kitchens designed to serve 100 or more daily meals must meter and report
all water use from the kitchen operations.

Public laundry facilities

Typical commercial laundry systems include large top- or front-load washing machines used to
process thousands of pounds (lbs) or kilograms (kg) of laundry annually. Front-load washers
use less water and energy than top-load washers; however, even when using ENERGY STAR®
(or performance equivalent) equipment, it is critical that projects track water consumption from
these machines to ensure efficient operations and identify water supply failures.

The requirement for metering water use in a commercial laundry depends on the pounds (lbs) or
kilograms (kg) of laundry processed annually. Laundry facilities designed to process 120,000
lbs. (57,606 kg) of laundry annually must meter and report all water use from the laundry
operations.

Option 2. Leak Detection Sensors

Water lost through leaks strains capital and natural resources while creating health and safety
risks.86 Lower system pressures can draw pollutants in from the surroundings, leading to foul
drinking water.87 Capital losses can result from labor costs to identify the location of the leak and

86 Pacific Northwest National Laboratory, (2019) Overview of Available Leak Detection Technologies, Retrieved from
pnnl.gov/main/publications/external/technical_reports/PNNL-28885.pdf.

87
R. Collins, J. Boxall, M. Besner, S. Beck and B. Karney, (2011) “Intrusion Modelling and the Effect of Ground Water Conditions,”
Water Distribution Systems Analysis 2010.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 174
the labor hours and material costs necessary to repair major damage. Leaks that are not
addressed commonly cause higher bills.

Projects pursuing this option must install permanent water flow meters or sensors on each
applicable subsystem (irrigation, flush fixtures, makeup water systems) within the project
boundary. The devices must report abnormalities and generate an alarm at a local network,
BMS, cloud service, app, or online database accessible by the facility manager and tenants.

Data access and action plan

Providing access to and regularly performing reviews of the data optimizes an operator’s ability
to address water leaks. Develop an action plan that addresses, at minimum, data access for
operators and tenants, the approach for resolving detected leaks, and a communication plan to
alert building occupants when repairs impact the building and the site.

Irrigation leak detection requirements

Install devices at the point of entry to the site for permanently installed irrigation systems. This
allows for the earliest possible detection of any leaks within the system.

Flush fixture leak detection requirements

For the flush fixtures, install sensors or meters for at least 50% of the flush fixtures identified in
WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency. Install the device at the flush fixture for an individual toilet
room, such as a unisex or family restroom. A single device that monitors all flush fixtures for
group restrooms is acceptable.

Make-up water system leak detection requirements

All makeup water systems must have permanent sensors or meters for leak detection. Leak
detection must occur at each system. A sensor or meter that collectively monitors leaks for a
single makeup line serving multiple systems does not meet the credit requirement.

Healthcare
OPTION 1. SUBMETERS
Healthcare projects require additional submeters. Many processes typical of healthcare
operations, such as sterilization, water use in surgical suites, and purified water systems,
require significant amounts of water.
The credit requires that healthcare projects meter an additional five subsystems, as outlined in
the Rating System. For projects that do not have at least five additional subsystems within the
project scope, provide meters for all applicable water subsystems included in the project.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 175
OPTION 2. LEAK DETECTION SENSORS
Same as Option 2, Leak Detection Sensors above.

Residential
OPTION 1. SUBMETERS
In addition to any applicable systems in common areas, measure each residential unit’s total
potable water usage.

Designing a system that tracks and reports water use from each residence meets the intent of
the credit.

Meters must report data to the facility manager. Tenants must also have access to the data.
Monthly reporting allows facility managers and tenants the opportunity to address excessive
water use within living spaces.

OPTION 2. LEAK DETECTION SENSORS

Same as Option 2, Leak Detection Sensors above.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 176
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Identification of the permanent water meters installed on the
project.
Metered indoor fixture/fittings calculation.
Contract documents highlighting the locations and types of
the project’s permanent water meters for each applicable
subsystem (e.g., water supply system drawings).
All Contract documents or narratives demonstrating that the
Option 1. facility manager and/or tenant(s) will be able to access the
All
Submeters submeter data in real-time via local network, BMS, cloud
service, app, or online database.
Confirmation that all submeters are capable of recording data
at least hourly (e.g., product information from the
manufacturer and/or contract documents).
Identification of the water systems that are within the project
Healthcare scope and the additional permanent water meters installed on
the project.
Contract documents or narratives demonstrating that the
facility manager and/or tenant(s) will be able to access the
sensor data in real-time via local network, BMS, cloud
service, app, or online database.

Identification of the applicable subsystems (irrigation, flush

fixtures, makeup water) included in the project.
Contract documents highlighting the locations and types of
the project’s permanent water flow meters and/or sensors for
Option 2. each applicable subsystem (e.g., water supply system
Leak drawings).
All All
Detection Narrative or documents detailing the leak detection system
Sensors specifications for when and how an alarm is triggered (e.g.,
the Owner’s Project Requirements, BOD, or Contract
Documents, product information from the manufacturer).

The project’s action plan addresses how the building

manager or tenant will have access to data in real-time and
how the building manager and/or tenant(s) will address and
remedy any detected leak.

Leak Detection for Flush Fixtures Calculation.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 177
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Water Efficiency Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED WATER EFFICIENCY

WEc2
New Construction (1–8 points)
Core and Shell (1–7 points)

INTENT
To reduce potable water consumption and the associated energy consumption and carbon
emissions required to treat and distribute water, and to reward use of alternative water sources
that preserve potable water resources.

REQUIREMENTS: NEW CONSTRUCTION

Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–8
Option 1. Whole-Project Water Use 1–8
OR
Option 2. Fixture and Fittings–Calculated Reduction 1–3
AND/OR
Option 3. Appliance and Process Water 1–2
AND/OR
Option 4. Outdoor Water Use 1–2
Path 1. No Irrigation 2
OR
Path 2. Efficient Irrigation 1–2
AND/OR
Option 5. Optimize Process Water Use 1–2
Path 1. Limit Cooling Tower Cycles 1–2
OR
Path 2. Optimize Water Use for Cooling 1–2
OR
Path 3. Process Water Use 1–2
AND/OR
Option 6. Water Reuse 1–2
Path 1. Reuse-Ready System 1
OR
Path 2. Alternative Water Sources 2

Implement a combination of the strategies below for a maximum of 8 points. Projects may either
attempt Option 1 or any combination of Options 2–6 below.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 178
Option 1. Whole-project Water Use (1–8 points)
To pursue this pathway, project teams must develop a water use baseline and create a
proposed use model. Points are achieved based on reductions from the baseline in Table 1.

Table 1. Points for reducing overall project water use

Percent reduction Points Total points for alternative water
30% 1 2
35% 2 3
40% 3 4
45% 4 5
50% 5 6
55% 6 7
60% 7 8
65% 8 Exemplary performance

OR

Option 2. Fixture and Fittings — Calculated Reduction (1–3 points)

Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WEp2: Minimum
Water Efficiency, Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency, Path 2, Performance Path —
Calculated Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite
level using alternative water sources. Points are awarded according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points for reducing indoor water use

Percentage reduction Points
30% 1
35% 2
40% 3

AND/OR

Option 3. Appliance and Process Water (1–2 points)

Newly installed equipment within the project boundary must meet the minimum requirements in
Tables 3, 4, 5, and/or 6. 1 point is awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any 1 table
for a maximum of 2 points. All applicable, newly installed equipment listed in each table must
meet the standard. Existing appliances and equipment can be excluded.

To use Table 3, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs. (57,606 kg) of laundry per year.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 179
Table 3. Compliant commercial washing machines
Washing machine Requirement Requirement
(IP units) (SI units)
On premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs. (10,886 kg) Maximum 1.8 gal per Maximum 7 liters per
per 8-hour shift pound* 0.45 kg*
NOTE: Based on equal quantities of heavily, medium, and lightly soiled laundry.

To use Table 4, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation.

Table 4. Standards for compliant commercial kitchen equipment

Commercial kitchen equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Stationary, single ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
tank, door performance equivalent
Single tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
conveyor performance equivalent
Multiple tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
conveyor performance equivalent
Flight machine ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Food Boilerless/ ≤ 1.7 gal/hr/pan including ≤ 6.4 liters/hr/pan including
steamer connectionless condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Steam generator ≤ 2.2 gal/hr/pan including ≤ 8.3 liters/hr/pan including
condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Combination Countertop or ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
oven stand performance equivalent
Roll-in ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Food waste Disposer 3–8 gpm, full load 11–30 lpm, full load condition;
disposer condition; 10-minute 10-minute automatic shutoff or
automatic shutoff or 1 gpm, 3.8 lpm, no-load condition
no-load condition
Scrap collector Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup
water water
Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup
water water
Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage

Table 5. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment

Lab equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery
Steam sterilizer For 60 in sterilizer: 6.3 For 1,520 mm sterilizer: 28.5
gal/U.S. tray liters/DIN tray
For 48 in sterilizer: 7.5 For 1,220 mm sterilizer: 28.35
gal/U.S. tray liters/DIN tray

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 180
 Lab equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray
X-ray processor, 150 mm or more in Film processor water-recycling unit
any dimension
Digital imager, all sizes No water use

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 181
To use Table 6, the project must be connected to a municipal or district steam system that does
not allow the return of steam condensate.

Table 6. Compliant municipal steam systems

Steam system Requirement
Steam condensate disposal Cool municipally supplied steam condensate (no return) to
drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed
water
OR
Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse

AND/OR

Option 4. Outdoor Water Use (1–2 points)

PATH 1. NO IRRIGATION (2 POINTS)
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum
two-year establishment period.

OR

PATH 2. EFFICIENT IRRIGATION (1–2 POINTS)

Reduce the project’s theoretical irrigation requirement (TIR) by at least 50% from the calculated
baseline. Points are awarded according to Table 7.

Table 7. Points for reducing outdoor water use

Percentage reduction Points
50% 1
100% 2

AND/OR

Option 5. Optimize Process Water Use (1–2 points)

PATH 1. LIMIT COOLING TOWER CYCLES (1–2 POINTS)
For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one-time potable water analysis,
measuring at least the five control parameters listed in Table 8.

Table 8. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser water

Parameter Maximum level
Ca (as CaCO3) 600 ppm*
Total alkalinity 500 ppm

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 182
 Parameter Maximum level
SiO2 150 ppm
Cl– 300 ppm
Conductivity 3300 μS/cm**
*ppm = parts per million
**µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter

Calculate the maximum number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed
concentration level of each parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found
in the potable makeup water analysis. Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum
values for any of these parameters.

The materials of construction for the water system that contact the cooling tower water must be
of the type that can operate and be maintained within the cycles established in Table 9. Points
are awarded according to Table 9.

Table 9. Points for cooling tower cycles

Cooling tower cycles Points
Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any maximum concentration 1
levels or affecting operation of condenser water system.
Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and increase the number 2
of cycles by a minimum of 25% by increasing the level of treatment and/or maintenance in
condenser or makeup water systems.

OR

Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a minimum 20%
alternative water.

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 1 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

PATH 2. OPTIMIZE WATER USE FOR COOLING (1–2 POINTS)

To be eligible for Option 2, the baseline system designated for the building using ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 or 90.1-2022, Appendix G, Table G3.1.1-3, must include a cooling tower (systems 7, 8, 11,
12, and 13).

Achieve increasing levels of cooling tower water efficiency beyond a water-cooled chiller system
with axial variable-speed fan cooling towers having a maximum drift of 0.002% of recirculated
water volume and three cooling tower cycles. Points are awarded according to Table 10.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 183
Table 10. Points for reducing annual water use compared to water-cooled chiller system
Percentage reduction Points
25% 1
50% 2

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 2 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

PATH 3. PROCESS WATER USE (1–2 POINTS)

Demonstrate that the project is using a minimum of 20% alternative water to meet the process
water demand for 1 point or that the project is using a minimum of 30% alternative water to
meet process water demand for 2 points. Ensure that alternative water is of sufficient quality for
its intended end use.

Process water uses eligible for achievement of Path 3 must represent at least 10% of total
building regulated water use and may not include water used for cooling.

AND/OR

Option 6. Water Reuse (1–2 points)

PATH 1. REUSE-READY SYSTEM (1 POINT)
Install a water supply system to allow the supply of reclaimed or alternative water to reach one
or more of the following end uses. Space shall be provided for treatment equipment as
applicable to end uses.

OR

PATH 2. ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES (2 POINTS)

Incorporate one of the following water reuse strategies for indoor, outdoor, and/or process water
that meets the needs of one or more end uses for the building and grounds:

• On-site water reuse system

• Municipally supplied reclaimed water

Eligible end uses for Paths 1 and 2 include irrigation; flush fixtures; makeup water systems,
such as cooling towers or boilers; or other process water systems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 184
REQUIREMENTS: CORE AND SHELL
Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–7
Option 1. Whole-Project Water Use 1–7
OR
Option 2. Fixtures and Fittings–Calculated Reduction 1–3
AND/OR
Option 3. Appliances and Process Water 1–2
AND/OR
Option 4. Outdoor Water Use 1–3
Path 1. No Irrigation 3
OR
Path 2. Efficient Irrigation 1–3
AND/OR
Option 5. Optimize Process Water Use 1–3
Path 1. Limit Cooling Tower Cycles 1–3
OR
Path 2. Optimize Water Use for Cooling 1–3
OR
Path 3. Process Water Use 1–2
AND/OR
Option 6. Water Reuse 1–2
Path 1. Reuse-Ready System 1
OR
Path 2. Alternative Water Sources 2

Implement a combination of the strategies below for a maximum of 7 points. Projects may either
attempt Option 1 or any combination of Options 2–6 below.

Option 1. Whole-project Water Use (1–7 points)

To pursue this pathway, project teams must develop a water use baseline and create a
proposed use model. Points are achieved based on reductions from the baseline in Table 11.

Table 11. Points for reducing overall project water use

Percent reduction Points Total points for
alternative water
30% 1 2
35% 2 3
40% 3 4
45% 4 5
50% 5 6
55% 6 7
60% 7 –

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 185
OR

Option 2. Fixtures and Fittings — Calculated Reduction (1–3 points)

Further reduce fixture and fitting water use from the calculated baseline in WEp2: Minimum
Water Efficiency, Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency, Path 2, Performance Path —
Calculated Reduction. Additional potable water savings can be earned above the prerequisite
level using alternative water sources. Points are awarded according to Table 12.

Table 12. Points for reducing indoor water use

Percentage reduction Points
30% 1
35% 2
40% 3

AND/OR

Option 3. Appliances and Process Water (1–2 points)

Newly installed equipment within the project boundary must meet the minimum requirements in
Tables 13, 14, 15, and/or 16. 1 point is awarded for meeting all applicable requirements in any
one table for a maximum of 2 points. All applicable, newly installed equipment listed in each
table must meet the standard. Existing appliances and equipment can be excluded.

To use Table 13, the project must process at least 120,000 lbs. (57,606 kg) of laundry per year.

Table 13. Compliant commercial washing machines

Washing machine Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
On-premise, minimum capacity 2,400 lbs. Maximum 1.8 gal per Maximum 7 liters per
(10,886 kg) per 8-hour shift pound* 0.45 kg*
*Based on equal quantities of heavily, medium, and lightly soiled laundry.

To use Table 14, the project must serve at least 100 meals per day of operation.

Table 14. Standards for compliant commercial kitchen equipment

Commercial kitchen equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Dishwasher Undercounter ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Stationary, single ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
tank, door performance equivalent
Single tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
conveyor performance equivalent
Multiple tank, ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
conveyor performance equivalent

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 186
 Commercial kitchen equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Flight machine ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Food steamer Boilerless/ ≤ 1.7 gal/hr/pan, including ≤ 6.4 liters/hr/pan including
connectionless condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Steam generator ≤ 2.2 gal/hr/pan, including ≤ 8.3 liters/hr/pan including
condensate cooling water condensate cooling water
Combination Countertop or ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
oven stand performance equivalent
Roll-in ENERGY STAR® ENERGY STAR® or
performance equivalent
Food waste Disposer 3–8 gpm, full load condition; 11–30 lpm, full load condition;
disposer 10-minute automatic shutoff 10-minute automatic shutoff
or 1 gpm, no-load condition or 3.8 lpm, no-load condition
Scrap collector Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup
water water
Pulper Maximum 2 gpm makeup Maximum 7.6 lpm makeup
water water
Strainer basket No additional water usage No additional water usage

Table 15. Compliant laboratory and medical equipment

Lab equipment Requirement (IP) Requirement (SI)
Reverse-osmosis water purifier 75% recovery
Steam sterilizer For 60 in sterilizer: 6.3 gal/U.S. For 1,520 mm sterilizer: 28.5
tray liters/DIN tray
For 48 in sterilizer: 7.5 gal/U.S. For 1,220 mm sterilizer: 28.35
tray liters/DIN tray
Sterile process washer 0.35 gal/U.S. tray 1.3 liters/DIN tray
X-ray processor, 150 mm or Film processor water recycling unit
more in any dimension
Digital imager, all sizes No water use

To use Table 16, the project must be connected to a municipal or district steam system that
does not allow the return of steam condensate.

Table 16. Compliant municipal steam systems

Steam system Requirement
Steam condensate disposal Cool municipally supplied steam condensate (no return) to
drainage system with heat recovery system or reclaimed water
OR
Reclaim and use steam condensate 100% recovery and reuse

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 187
Option 4. Outdoor Water Use (1–3 points)
PATH 1. NO IRRIGATION (3 POINTS)
Show that the landscape does not require a permanent irrigation system beyond a maximum
two-year establishment period.

OR

PATH 2. EFFICIENT IRRIGATION (1–3 POINTS)

Reduce the project’s theoretical irrigation requirement (TIR) by at least 50% from the calculated
baseline. Points are awarded according to Table 17.

Table 17. Points for reducing outdoor water use

Percentage reduction Points
50% 1
75% 2
100% 3

AND/OR

Option 5. Optimize Process Water Use (1–3 points)

PATH 1. LIMIT COOLING TOWER CYCLES (1–3 POINTS)
For cooling towers and evaporative condensers, conduct a one-time potable water analysis,
measuring at least the five control parameters listed in Table 18.

Table 18. Maximum concentrations for parameters in condenser water

Parameter Maximum level

Ca (as CaCO3) 600 ppm*
Total alkalinity 500 ppm
SiO2 150 ppm
Cl– 300 ppm
Conductivity 3300 μS/cm**
*ppm = parts per million
**µS/cm = micro siemens per centimeter

Calculate the maximum number of cooling tower cycles by dividing the maximum allowed
concentration level of each parameter by the actual concentration level of each parameter found
in the potable makeup water analysis. Limit cooling tower cycles to avoid exceeding maximum
values for any of these parameters.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 188
The materials of construction for the water system that come into contact with the cooling tower
water shall be of the type that can operate and be maintained within the cycles established in
Table 19. Points are awarded according to Table 19.

Table 19. Points for cooling tower cycles

Cooling tower cycles Points
Maximum number of cycles achieved without exceeding any maximum concentration 1
levels or affecting operation of condenser water system.
Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and increase the number 2
of cycles by a minimum of 25% by increasing the level of treatment and/or maintenance in
condenser or makeup water systems.

OR

Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a minimum 20%
alternative water.
Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and increase the number 3
of cycles by a minimum of 30% by increasing the level of treatment and/or maintenance in
condenser or makeup water systems.

OR

Meet the maximum calculated number of cycles to earn 1 point and use a minimum 30%
alternative water.

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 1 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

PATH 2. OPTIMIZE WATER USE FOR COOLING (1–3 POINTS)

To be eligible for Path 2, the baseline system designated for the building using ASHRAE 90.1–
2019 or 90.1–2022, Appendix G, Table G3.1.1–3, must include a cooling tower (systems 7, 8,
11, 12, and 13).

Achieve increasing levels of cooling tower water efficiency beyond a water-cooled chiller system
with axial variable-speed fan cooling towers having a maximum drift of 0.002% of recirculated
water volume and three cooling tower cycles. Points are awarded according to Table 20.

Table 20. Points for reducing annual water use compared to water-cooled chiller system

Percentage reduction Points

25% 1
50% 2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 189
 Percentage reduction Points
100% 3

Projects whose cooling is provided by district cooling systems are eligible to achieve Path 2 if
the district cooling system complies with the above requirements.

OR

PATH 3. PROCESS WATER USE (1–3 POINTS)

Demonstrate that the project is using at minimum 20% alternative water to meet process water
demand for 1 point, using at minimum 30% alternative water to meet process water demand for
2 points, or using at minimum 40% alternative water to meet process water demand for 3 points.
Ensure that alternative water is of sufficient quality for its intended end use.

Process water uses eligible for achievement of Path 3 must represent at least 10% of total
building regulated water use and may not include water used for cooling.

Projects served by district systems are eligible to achieve Path 3 if the district system complies
with minimum thresholds for alternative water use.

AND/OR

Option 6. Water Reuse

PATH 1. REUSE-READY SYSTEM (1 POINT)
Install a water supply system to allow the supply of reclaimed or alternative water to reach one
or more of the following end uses. Space shall be provided for treatment equipment as
applicable to end uses.

OR

PATH 2. ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES (2 POINTS)

Incorporate one of the following water reuse strategies for indoor, outdoor, and/or process water
that meets the needs of one or more end uses for the building and grounds:

• On-site water reuse system

• Municipally supplied reclaimed water

Eligible end uses for Paths 1 and 2 include irrigation, flush fixtures, makeup water systems such
as cooling towers or boilers, or other process water demand.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 190
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit builds on WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency and rewards teams for additional water
conservation strategies. New Construction projects that pursue Option 1 can achieve up to eight
points for the whole project’s water use reductions, and those that pursue Options 2–6 can
achieve up to eight points by combining any of the strategies outlined in the Rating System.
Core and Shell projects that pursue Option 1 can achieve up to seven points for whole project
water use reductions, or up to seven points for any combination of Options 2–6. Projects cannot
combine Option 1 with Options 2–6.

Option 1. Whole-project Water Use

Quantifying whole project water use and developing strategies to reduce consumption across
the entire project can lead to significant water savings. Analyzing all water sources enables
teams to identify large consumers and target both conservation and alternative water strategies.

Projects must demonstrate a minimum of 30% reduction from the project’s baseline to earn
points. Using alternative water sources earns additional points for the calculated reductions.

Develop a Water Balance Model

Teams must calculate the building’s water demand and develop baseline and design case water
balance models. Models must account for all end uses within the project’s scope of work,
including fixtures and fittings, domestic hot water, appliances, commercial kitchen and laundry
equipment, laboratory and medical equipment, process water, HVAC systems, and landscape
irrigation.

BASELINE REQUIREMENTS
The baseline model reflects the minimum requirements and typical water use for the
project type without any additional water-savings measures.

For fixtures and fittings, determine the baseline using a USGBC-approved calculator, as
described in WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency, Option 2. Performance Path —
Calculated Reduction.

Baseline values for appliances, kitchen equipment, as well as laboratory and medical
equipment must align with Tables 13–15 of this credit.

For cooling towers, the baseline water model represents the water use associated with
the minimum number of cooling tower cycles, such that parameters do not exceed the
values of Table 18.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 191
 For outdoor water use, determine the baseline water consumption by calculating the
project’s TIR, as outlined in WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency, Minimum Outdoor Water
Use Efficiency, Option 2. Efficient Irrigation. Projects that do not use irrigation in the
design compare the as-designed condition to a baseline TIR.

DESIGN CASE REQUIREMENTS

The design case water model must use fixtures and fittings, appliances, kitchen
equipment, and laboratory and medical equipment as specified within the contract
documents. For outdoor water use, determine the actual water used on-site.

Projects with alternative water sources

Use of alternative water sources can be highly effective in reducing potable water demand and
utility costs associated with the building and site. Projects that use alternative water sources
achieve one additional point for each threshold met under Table 1. For example, a project that
reduces potable water consumption by 30% earns one point. A project that reduces potable
water consumption by 30% and uses an alternative water source to achieve those reductions
earns two points.

Teams should always prioritize water efficiency first to reduce consumption and demand before
applying alternative water solutions. For any seasonally dependent sources, such as rainwater,
calculations must reflect annual, seasonal totals to confirm the available quantity of the
alternative water source.

Projects pursuing Options 2–6

New Construction projects may earn up to eight points by combining strategies from Options 2–
6, while Core and Shell projects may earn up to seven points by pursuing Options 2–6. Projects
with limited scope, or projects that use targeted reductions by equipment or system type, should
review Option 1 and all relevant Options 2–6 to determine the approach that maximizes points
for this credit.

Option 2. Fixtures and Fittings — Calculated Reduction

Option 2 focuses on reducing potable water use from fixtures and fittings. Using the baseline
and designed water usage calculations determined from WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency,
Minimum Fixture and Fittings Efficiency, Path 2. Performance Path — Calculated Reduction,
projects earn points for additional savings beyond the 20% requirements, based on specific
fixture flow and flush rates. You must calculate using a USGBC-approved calculator.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 192
Along with the use of high-efficiency fixtures and fittings, projects that use alternative water
sources for these systems can report further savings and achieve additional points under this
option.

AND/OR

Option 3. Appliance and Process Water

Option 3 rewards projects that prioritize water-efficient appliances and process equipment.
Projects earn one point for meeting prescriptive water use requirements in a single equipment
category, for up to 2 total points.

Tables 13–16 outline the prescriptive measures for appliances and process equipment. All newly
installed equipment must meet the referenced standards, performance equivalents (outside of
the U.S.), and/or water use limits. Exclude existing appliances and equipment.

Projects that do not include any applicable systems in their scope of work, or projects that can
document compliance with more than two tables, should review the project’s whole water
balance model from WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency, Option 1. Whole Project Water Use, as
it may optimize points for this credit.

AND/OR

Option 4. Outdoor Water Use

There are two paths to earn credit for outdoor water use. Path 1 rewards projects that do not
use permanent irrigation beyond the initial two-year establishment period. Projects that include
irrigation can earn points by reducing water use from the project’s baseline requirements using
native or adapted plants and vegetation, alternative water, and/or smart irrigation controls.

PATH 1. NO IRRIGATION
Projects complying with WEp2: Minimum Water Efficiency, Minimum Outdoor Water Use
Efficiency, Option 1. No irrigation automatically earns 2 points.

PATH 2. EFFICIENT IRRIGATION

WEc2: Enhanced Water Efficiency, Path 2. Efficient Irrigation directly links to WEp2: Minimum
Water Efficiency, Minimum Outdoor Water Use Efficiency, Option 2. Efficient Irrigation. New
Construction projects that achieve a 50% or 100% reduction in irrigation earn up to 2 points,
while Core and Shell projects that achieve a 50%, 75%, or 100% reduction may earn up to 3
points. Proven solutions include alternative water sources, like reclaimed water or rainwater
harvesting, and the use of smart scheduling technology. Calculations completed for WEp2:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 193
Minimum Water Efficiency, Minimum Outdoor Water Use Efficiency, Option 2. Efficient Irrigation
must prove the reduction from the calculated baseline using the annual TIR.

Include all landscaped areas in the irrigation calculations. However, teams may exclude
irrigation for vegetated playgrounds, athletic fields, food gardens, and urban agricultural areas
from the calculations.

AND/OR

Option 5. Optimize Process Water Use

Cooling towers and industrial processes use a significant amount of potable water. Projects that
include these systems must consider opportunities to reduce concentration cycles or optimize
water use for cooling or select alternative water sources.

Process water uses include, but are not limited to, cooling, humidification, sterilization,
dishwashers, clothes washers, and pools. This option offers three pathways, which depend on
the type of process water use. Path 3 also requires that process water use meets a minimum
percentage of the total building water use.

PATH 1. LIMIT COOLING TOWER CYCLES

This path prioritizes water conservation for cooling towers by limiting the cycles of concentration
from the equipment. A cycle of concentration is the number of times water can circulate through
the system without creating performance or operational problems. A low cycle of concentration
means more single-use water passes through the system, resulting in excess water
consumption. However, as we reuse water, dissolved solids remain, which increases the
concentration levels of calcium, silicon dioxide (SiO2), and chloride. Higher cycles of
concentration may result in scaling and corrosion issues.

The intent of the credit is not to impact system operations, but to inform designers on alternative
solutions for reducing water consumption for cooling processes. Finding the correct balance of
cooling tower blowdown and chemical treatment maintains system efficiency, reduces
maintenance, and conserves potable water.

For each cooling process, conduct a potable water analysis to determine set points for the
chemical treatment system and the associated cycles of concentration. Teams must confirm that
the systems will operate at the specified cycles of concentration and not exceed parameters
outlined in Table 18.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 194
Projects with alternative water sources
Projects using alternative water sources do not require a one-time water analysis. Using a
minimum of 20% alternative water can help projects earn two points, as long as the maximum
calculated number of cycles is also met.

Projects in a campus environment

Projects in a campus environment, or those supplied by a district cooling system, may comply
with Path 1 if the district system conducts a potable water analysis and limits the cycles of
concentration for its system. Projects can determine compliance at the district level by working
with the utility provider.

PATH 2. OPTIMIZE WATER USE FOR COOLING

Path 2 has minimum eligibility requirements. Using ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2019 (or later),
Appendix G. Performance Rating Method, Table G3.1.1–2, confirm that the project’s baseline
case includes chilled water for cooling and cooling towers in the baseline design. Table 21
outlines the eligible baseline systems from Appendix G.

Projects pursuing this path do not require an Appendix G energy model. Other tools can help
perform water-use calculations.

Table 21. ASHRAE Standard 90.1–2019, Appendix G Compliant Baseline Systems

System number System description
7 VAV with reheat
8 VAV with parallel fan-powered boxes and reheat.
11 Single-zone VAV system with water-cooled chillers
12 Single-zone constant volume system with water-cooled chillers and a
hot-water fossil-fuel boiler
13 Single-zone constant volume system with water-cooled chillers and
electric resistance heat.

Projects can demonstrate a 100% reduction from baseline if the Appendix G baseline includes a
cooling tower and the final design eliminates the need for a cooling tower.

Projects may benefit from a combination of strategies to reduce water consumption for the
cooling system. Strategies include maximizing cycles of concentration, increased levels of
chemical treatment, smart controls for monitoring and optimization, drift eliminators, flow meters,
and water-level controls.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 195
Projects in a campus environment
For campus environments or projects that receive cooling from a district cooling system,
projects meet the requirements of Path 2 if the district system meets the reduction thresholds.
Projects should consider working with their utility provider to determine compliance at the district
system level.

PATH 3. PROCESS WATER USE

Projects pursuing this path must demonstrate that process water use exceeds 10% of the total
building-regulated water use, excluding cooling water.

Using alternative water sources, such as captured condensate from air handling units, reduces
reliance on fresh water for process systems. Diversifying the water sources on a project site
builds resilience in buildings. This allows projects to divert freshwater for human consumption
instead of processes during a water crisis.

When selecting the alternative water source, ensure that the quality of the water is sufficient for
its intended use and that the local AHJ allows that alternative water source, per local codes and
standards.

AND/OR

Option 6. Water Reuse

Option 6 provides two paths to achieve points for water reuse strategies. Projects must choose
a single path and cannot combine these paths for more points.

Path 1 rewards projects that install systems allowing the future supply of reclaimed or
alternative water sources to at least one specific end use. Path 2 rewards projects that
implement water reuse strategies on-site and/or use reclaimed or alternative water supplied by
municipalities.

The project must include water reuse for at least one end use listed below. Implementing
alternative or reclaimed water sources for as many systems as possible significantly contributes
to potable water conservation efforts.

• Irrigation
• Flush fixtures (urinals, water closets)
• Make-up water systems (including cooling towers and boilers)
• Other process water systems

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 196
PATH 1. REUSE-READY SYSTEM
Path 1 rewards a project for preparing for a future transition to water reuse systems.
Planning for water reuse systems early in design allows project teams to optimize solutions for
the greatest impact. Through this process, teams determine strategies that reduce the demand
and consumption of potable water use in the building and on the project site. The use of
reclaimed or alternative water sources allows projects to reduce potable water for end uses not
intended for human consumption, such as water closet flushing and make-up water for process
systems.

Designing for future infrastructure

Including reclaimed or alternative water supply infrastructure allows for an easier transition
when sources become available for public use. The inclusion of these systems in new
construction projects also results in economic benefits. Planning for future water treatment
equipment enables projects to efficiently design the equipment room to allow for future
equipment, which reduces long-term costs to integrate alternative water supply infrastructure.
Operational savings result from lower utility costs since alternative water sources are often a
lower-cost option.

The credit does not require that projects install physical connections to each flush fixture or
make-up line. However, creating a plug-and-play system is highly recommended to limit future
major renovations.

PATH 2. ALTERNATIVE WATER SOURCES

Option 2 rewards teams for implementing solutions to reduce reliance on potable water by using
alternative water for indoor, outdoor, and/or process water systems.

The project must also meet all metering and commissioning requirements as outlined in WEp1:
Water Metering and Reporting, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, and EAc5: Enhanced
Commissioning (if pursued).

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All LEED v5 Whole Project Water Use calculator.
Whole Contract documents and manufacturer information
Building support the baseline and proposed water use values in
Water Use the calculator.
All LEED v5 Fixture and Fittings Efficiency calculator.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 197
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Option 2. Contract documents showing the project’s alternative
Fixtures and water system details, location, and capacity.
Fittings
Option 3. All Contract document(s) specifying the project’s newly
Appliance installed commercial washing machines, commercial
and Process food waste disposers, commercial laboratory and
Water medical equipment, and/or municipal steam systems
and process water equipment, as applicable, including
performance specifications.
Option 5. Path 1. Limit Results from the potable water analysis for cooling
Optimize Cooling towers and evaporative condensers. Include the
Process Tower concentration levels for all five parameters listed in
Water Use Cycles Table 8 of the Rating System.
Path 2. Equipment schedule indicating cooling tower type.
Optimize Calculation shows the baseline process water use.
Process
Water Use Calculation shows the design process, water use,
including any alternative water savings.
Path 3. Total % of processed water use in building.
Process Description of systems included in the project that
Water Use accounts for more than 10% of the total building
regulated water use (excluding cooling water).
Calculation shows the baseline process of water use.
Calculation showing the design process water use,
including any alternative water savings.
Option 6. Path 1. Contract documents identify with the space provided
Water Reuse Reuse- for future treatment equipment.
ready
System
Path 2. Identification of the alternative water source (onsite
Alternative water reuse system or municipally supplied reclaimed
Water water).
Source
Identification of which eligible end-use(s) the water
reuse system meets the needs (irrigation, flush
fixtures, makeup water systems, such as cooling
towers or boilers, or other process water demand).
Contract documents highlighting the details of the
alternative water source system(s) details.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ENERGY STAR® (energystar.gov)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 198
ENERGY AND ATMOSPHERE (EA)
OVERVIEW
As of 2025, buildings are responsible for one-third of global energy emissions, accounting for
over 34% of energy demand and approximately 37% of energy and process-related carbon
emissions.88 Stabilizing the climate requires the world to decarbonize its new and existing
building by 2050.

Many regions have identified zero energy and zero carbon goals, targeting 2030 for new
construction and by 2050 for existing buildings.89 Thankfully, there are now time-tested and cost-
effective strategies to reach these goals. The market now knows how to design and construct
the low-carbon buildings of the future.

Well-designed, constructed, and operated buildings use less energy, produce fewer emissions,
and increase their resilience to disruptions like power outages or extreme weather events.
LEED v5’s Energy and Atmosphere (EA) credit category aims to make low-carbon buildings
easy to achieve by increasing carbon literacy and providing a clear framework for all buildings to
significantly reduce or eliminate emissions, achieve greater energy independence and security,
and lower operational energy costs.

As businesses and regulatory agencies prioritize resilience and sustainability in their financial
and social continuity planning, decarbonization is becoming an integral priority for leaders
worldwide.

Decarbonization
LEED v5 drives decarbonization. Over half of the LEED v5 credits supporting decarbonization
are in the EA category. By capitalizing on technological advances and industry expertise, project
teams can use EA prerequisites and credits to create more value for owners, occupants, and
communities.

First, LEED v5 helps increase the carbon literacy of design teams. In EAp1: Operational Carbon
Projection and Decarbonization Plan, project teams develop a visual prediction of future carbon
emissions showing annual carbon emissions will reduce over time due to the decarbonization of

88 “2022 Global Status Report for Buildings and Construction.” UN Environment Programme, November 2022,
https://www.unep.org/resources/publication/2022-global-status-report-buildings-and-construction.
89 Taryn Holowka, “Support the Net Zero Carbon Buildings Commitment”, U.S. Green Building Council, August 2022,
https://www.usgbc.org/articles/support-net-zero-carbon-buildings-commitment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 199
most electric grids. This is different from energy use, which stays constant in the no-change
scenario. In addition, time doesn’t impact all sources equally. The annual emissions from
electricity use will nearly vanish with a fully decarbonized grid, while those from onsite
combustion will remain unchanged, an essential distinction for approaching neutrality by 2050.

Then, through the credits of the EA category, LEED v5 provides a simple framework for
designing zero carbon-ready buildings. Through the EA category, this framework lays out three
critical steps and four additional strategies for decarbonization are inherent to the building itself,
such as better envelopes and electrified heating systems, which must be incorporated from the
beginning of the project. The four additional strategies build upon the primary strategies while
providing significant carbon impacts.

The three critical steps are electrification, reduced peak thermal loads, and energy efficiency.
Electrification is a new credit within LEED v5. As electrical grids decarbonize, the carbon
emissions from electrical usage will drastically decrease. However, the emissions from fuel-
powered systems in buildings — usually for space heating and service hot water — will remain.
Replacing those fuel-powered systems with electrically powered equipment, which can provide
heat efficiently, will help emissions shrink to near zero by 2050.

The EAc1: Electrification credit rewards projects that electrify as many of their systems as
possible, while providing compliance options for operations during extreme low temperatures
and emergency backup systems.

EAc2: Reduce Peak Thermal Loads is another new credit within LEED v5 and a key step to
decarbonization. Grid demand will rise as buildings, vehicles, and industries transition from on-
site combustion to electricity. By reducing peak thermal loads, project teams can increase the
building’s resilience to extreme temperatures and reduce demand on the electrical grid. This
credit incentivizes projects to mitigate these peaks.

The third step is energy efficiency — a cornerstone of LEED and high-performing buildings. All
LEED v5 projects start with a baseline of energy efficiency, pairing climate zone-appropriate
building envelopes with building systems and management practices (EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency, EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting, and EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning).

Energy efficiency provides critical benefits, including lower operational costs, less damage due
to the extraction and transport of fuels, less air pollution and accompanying health issues.
Efficiency reduces carbon emissions — even from electricity — because most grids aren’t
carbon neutral yet and won’t be soon. For teams that prefer an alternative to energy modeling,

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 200
LEED v5 offers a new prescriptive option for the full achievement of points. (EAc3: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency).

The additional decarbonization strategies represent industry-leading best practices, found in

EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning, EAc4: Renewable Energy, and EAc6: Grid Interactive, as well
as in the prerequisite and credit for Refrigerant Management. Carried over from earlier versions
of LEED and refined in LEED v5, these approaches continue to be highly effective in reducing
carbon emissions and minimizing energy waste.

LEED v5 Platinum-certified projects will achieve industry best practices for energy efficiency,
eliminate on-site combustion (except for emergency and backup needs), use 100% renewable
energy, and reduce embodied carbon.

Quality of life
When buildings reduce emissions and energy demand while using technology to communicate
with the grid, they’ll ensure optimal operations. These measures also enhance the value they
serve to the community. Teams are encouraged to work toward reducing air leakage from the
envelope and mechanical systems while incentivizing energy storage opportunities (EAc2:
Reduce Peak Thermal Loads, EAc6: Grid Interactive). Combining these strategies with an
energy-efficient design and electrified operations can lead to a more resilient and reliable
building.

LEED v5 EA prerequisites and credits provide clear paths to greater efficiency and reduced
costs and emissions. These tactics help enhance energy and carbon literacy in the building
industries, empowering communities to achieve energy and carbon neutrality by 2050.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 201
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

OPERATIONAL CARBON PROJECTION AND

DECARBONIZATION PLAN
EAp1
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To enable building stakeholders to visualize how their current design decisions will impact their
project’s long-term operational carbon emissions and to ensure that stakeholders are planning
for low-carbon outcomes from the project’s inception.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Design Analysis
AND
Site Energy Estimate
AND
Review Carbon Projection
AND
Decarbonization Plan
Path 1. Design for Electrification
OR
Path 2. Plan for Decarbonization

Comply with the following requirements:

Design Analysis
Analyze efficiency, peak load reduction, and decarbonization measures during the early stages
of the design process and account for the results in design decision-making using at least one
of the following methodologies:

• Simplified energy modeling

• Analysis from similar projects
• Analysis from published data

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 202
AND

Site Energy Estimate

Estimate the amount of each type of energy the project will use annually in terms of site energy
and submit the data to USGBC.

AND

Review Carbon Projection

Using the annual energy use data submitted, the project’s current grid data, and the project’s
location, USGBC will generate a business as usual (BAU) projection of the project’s carbon
emissions from energy use from the present through a 25-year period.

Projects subject to a carbon-based building performance standard (BPS) must create an

ordinance-specific BAU with a carbon projection based on the electrical coefficients as defined
in the ordinance and with an overlay showing the caps applicable to the project. If applicable,
calculate the assessed annual fines or fees that will apply for exceeding the caps, and the
cumulative fines or fees over a 25-year period.

The building owner or owner’s representative shall attest that they have reviewed the BAU
carbon projections and fee projection.

AND

Decarbonization Plan
PATH 1. DESIGN FOR ELECTRIFICATION
Earn 4 or 5 points in EAc1: Electrification.

OR

PATH 2. PLAN FOR DECARBONIZATION

Create a plan detailing how decarbonization could be achieved through a 25-year period. The
building owner or owner’s representative shall attest that they have reviewed the
decarbonization plan.

• The plan shall be a narrative no more than two pages in length.

• The narrative shall describe the retrofits to be made, with the approximate timeline
and cost of each of the retrofit measures.
• Equipment and/or building materials that will be discarded due to the required
retrofits should be described along with new equipment to be purchased.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 203
 • Electrification readiness strategies incorporated into the initial design should be
described along with a rough estimate of the avoided cost, avoided disruption, and
avoided materials waste afforded by each readiness measure. Core and Shell
projects should incorporate strategies to support tenant build-out and address future
retrofits after tenant build-out. Some common readiness strategies include oversizing
electrical panels and/or service or installing conduit for future loads, enhanced
envelope, or heating distribution systems that can accommodate the lower
temperatures of future heat pumps.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONSTRUCTION

To help design teams understand their carbon emissions over time, USGBC provides each
project with a visualization of its projected emissions over the next 25 years in the business as
usual (BAU) scenario. BAU is the scenario in which the building’s operations don’t change.
The USGBC projection assumes that every grid will decarbonize by 95% over that period — a
directionally correct approximation.

This exercise illustrates that carbon emissions from electricity will diminish to near zero over the
next 25 years, emissions from onsite combustion will remain constant, and emissions from
electricity are not zero now and won’t be for some time, except for a few unique carbon-neutral
grids.

This prerequisite has multiple requirements, working together to help project teams design more
energy-efficient projects that shouldn’t require expensive retrofits to achieve low-carbon
outcomes.

Design Analysis
Teams must analyze energy conservation measures and carbon reduction strategies early in
design, creating impactful and cost-effective solutions that integrate into the project.
Collaborative discussions with architects, engineers, contractors, and owners can lead to a
holistic approach to decarbonization.

Analyze design options and develop alternatives that optimize efficiency measures, reduce peak
loads, and prioritize decarbonization. Even a simple box energy model, with minimal zoning and
basic project details, can generate valuable feedback on building massing, orientation, HVAC
system selection, and lighting power density.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 204
Smaller, less complex projects aren’t required to have an energy model in hopes of making
LEED v5 more accessible. Teams may use prototype models that are specific to the project
application. Teams can also use other models for large-scale analysis, such as the publicly
available prototype models used to inform ASHRAE energy code development. Another solution
would be using data from previous, similar projects. Comparing the project’s design to projects
of similar size, use, site, and climate zone can provide teams with a target or benchmark for
developing a high-performing building.

Site Energy Estimate

Along with the initial design analysis, teams must estimate the project’s annual site energy use
from each energy source and submit this information to USGBC, which will use the data to
create the BAU carbon projection — a fundamental part of this credit.

For teams developing an energy model for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency or a simplified
energy model, generate the required data from the simulation results. For teams that use similar
projects or published data, establish estimates based on the predicted design conditions,
including any designed optimization strategies.

Review Carbon Projection

USGBC provides all LEED BD+C: New Construction projects with a BAU projection of the
project’s operational carbon emissions over the next 25 years based on the site energy data
provided and the project’s current grid emissions factor. This BAU projection assumes that the
grid emissions factor starts with the latest national or regional coefficient — such as the sub-
regional eGRID coefficients in the U.S. — and declines in a straight line by 95% over the next
25 years. This step reflects the overall direction of global grid decarbonization and isn’t an exact
prediction of individual project performance.

The projection should educate owners and designers on the carbon impacts of their design
decisions over the next 25 years. Owners must review the data and attest to the review.

Building performance standards

Depending on the project location, it may be subject to a building performance standard (BPS).
These standards are carbon-based or EUI-based performance requirements that many U.S.
cities and states have adopted. Typically, BPSs set caps on energy use or carbon emissions
that decline over time. The project must meet those caps or face fees.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 205
Projects subject to a carbon-based or EUI-based BPS must generate a BPS Carbon BAU or
BPS Energy BAU, depending on which is applicable. Teams must overlay the BPS caps on the
project’s BAU projection and calculate the expected fees if they exceed the caps.

Additional requirements
Grid emissions factors, which step down over time, are often mandated in
carbon-based BPSs. Use these values in the BPS Carbon BAU rather than
USGBC’s assumed grid emissions factors used in the BAU carbon projection.

Understanding whether the project will meet the BPS requirements and, if not,
the fees it may incur over the next 25 years can also impact key decisions during
the design phase. The owner’s review of this information provides awareness of
the exposure to future fees.

Decarbonization Plan
If the current design has not been substantially electrified, projects must create a two-page
decarbonization plan. The plan aims to inform design teams and building owners of the future
costs and disruption they may incur when retrofits for all-electric equipment occur post-
occupancy.

This requirement has two paths for compliance.

PATH 1. DESIGN FOR ELECTRIFICATION

Projects that have been substantially electrified, as documented by achieving four or five points
in EAc1: Electrification, are exempt from having to create a plan since they have already been
designed for the low-carbon future.

PATH 2. DECARBONIZATION PLAN

Projects without substantial electrification must create a plan outlining the future retrofits
required to achieve substantial decarbonization as the grid decarbonizes. Developing this plan
is meant to show project teams and building owners how much less expensive it would be to
build it right the first time than to retrofit it later. The required retrofits would include invasive and
expensive envelope improvements. The replacement of new, costly heating equipment and
potentially new heating distribution systems might encourage design teams going through this
exercise to amend their designs to avoid the worst avoidable future costs on this project or
future projects.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 206
The plan must detail a reasonable estimate of the future cost and effort of decarbonization,
including engineering, architectural, and structural costs. For example, replacing natural gas
heating equipment with electric heating equipment may include costs for power system
upgrades and refrigerant and condensate piping in addition to the heat generation equipment.

Electrification readiness
Projects must consider electrification readiness strategies that would reduce costs and could be
incorporated in the initial design. Beneficial solutions include adding extra electrical panels or
oversizing panels to ensure adequate service for future loads. Installing conduits for the future
loads will limit the amount of destructive renovation work.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: CORE AND SHELL

Design Analysis
Additional considerations for Core and Shell
Teams must analyze design options and develop alternatives to optimize efficiency measures,
reduce peak loads, and prioritize decarbonization. For Core and Shell projects, perform the
analysis based on anticipated occupancy type and associated energy end uses for the planned
future tenant(s). For example, suppose the project is a Core and Shell office building. Teams
must perform the analysis assuming office occupancy, and account for all lighting, plug and
process equipment, and HVAC and service water heating capacity necessary to meet the
tenant’s needs.

While the analysis must consider elements of the future tenant, the primary focus should be on
the components and systems within the owner’s or developer’s scope of work. This includes the
building envelope, common area HVAC systems, common area domestic hot water, electrical
infrastructure, and any base building decisions that can impact the future tenant’s design
choices for energy-using systems.

Decarbonization Plan
Additional considerations for Core and Shell
PATH 1. DESIGN FOR ELECTRIFICATION
To qualify for this path, projects must have sufficient systems installed in the base building
scope of work. The scope must include enough capacity to meet future HVAC requirements for
tenants. It must include systems or power infrastructure that meet service hot water
requirements and potential process loads, like kitchen equipment. A project without these
systems as part of the Core and Shell scope of work cannot use Path 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 207
PATH 2. DECARBONIZATION PLAN
Incorporating assumptions about future tenants into the plan is important, but that’s not the
plan’s main priority. The plan should focus on the base building and equipment elements within
the scope of work. It should include some elements of preparing for future equipment
electrification and retiring combustion-based equipment. For example, strategies like increased
electrical panel capacity, adequate access for future equipment modernization, and identifying
retrofit opportunities during tenant buildout/turnover.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All All Design analysis during the early project design phase
Construction analyzed energy efficiency, peak load reduction, and
and decarbonization strategies for their impact on long-
Core and term operational carbon emissions.
Shell Estimated total annual energy use of each energy
source (electricity, natural gas chilled water, steam,
etc.) and the annual energy use for each of the
following end-uses: space heating; service hot water;
cooking; cooling; refrigeration; ventilation; plug and
process loads; other.
For projects subject to BPS, provide ordinance-
specific BAU carbon projection showing energy and/or
carbon caps applicable to the project, and, if
applicable, annual fines for exceeding caps over a 25-
year period (only for projects subject to a building
performance standard).
Attest that design analysis was performed.
Confirm building owner or owner's rep has reviewed
the carbon projection.
Provide supplied energy types and estimated annual
amounts used.
Decarbonization Path 1 Achieve four or five points for EAc1: Electrification.
plan
Path 2 Evidence of a decarbonization plan with the required
elements. Plan summary and excerpts are acceptable
if the full plan exceeds two pages.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 208
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

MINIMUM ENERGY EFFICIENCY

EAp2
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To promote resilience and reduce the environmental and economic harms of excessive energy
use and greenhouse gas emissions by achieving a minimum level of energy efficiency.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019
OR
Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Projects registering before January 1, 2028, may comply with either Option 1 or Option 2.
Projects registering on or after January 1, 2028, must comply with Option 2.

Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2019 with addendum cr. Use any applicable
compliance path in ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2.

For projects applying the Normative Appendix G, Performance Rating Method compliance path,
the future source energy metric may be used in place of cost:

• Replace all references to cost with future source energy. Use an electric site-to-source
energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S. A lower national
average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of the U.S.
• Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Table 4.2.1.1, Building Performance Factors (BPFs), with
the BPFs derived for the future source energy metric in Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 209
Table 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 — Equivalent building performance factors for a future source
energy metric

Building type Climate zone

0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Multifamily 0.74 0.69 0.73 0.70 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.74
Healthcare/hospital 0.72 0.72 0.73 0.73 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.71 0.74 0.73 0.80 0.73 0.77 0.78 0.79
Hotel/motel 0.72 0.71 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.73 0.73 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.70
Office 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.60 0.57 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.61 0.57 0.58 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.58
Restaurant 0.65 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.77
Retail 0.57 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.52 0.50 0.56 0.57 0.53 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.53 0.60
School 0.57 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.52 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53 0.50 0.51 0.58
Warehouse 0.28 0.30 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.33 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.32 0.29 0.44 0.38 0.40 0.44
All others 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.64

Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2022. Use any applicable compliance path in
ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2.

For projects applying the Normative Appendix G, “Performance Rating Method compliance path,
one of the following metrics may be used in place of “cost:”

• Future source energy

o Replace all references to cost with future source energy. Use an electric site-to-
source energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S. A
lower national average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of the
U.S.
o Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table 4.2.1.1, Building Performance Factors (BPFs),
with the BPFs derived for the future source energy metric in Table 2.
• Site energy or source energy documented using ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Informative
Appendix I.

Table 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 — Equivalent building performance factors for a future source
energy metric
Building type Climate zone
0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Multifamily 0.64 0.59 0.62 0.60 0.61 0.59 0.61 0.60 0.49 0.57 0.59 0.56 0.55 0.57 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.60
Healthcare/hospital 0.64 0.64 0.66 0.65 0.66 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.69 0.63 0.68 0.69 0.70

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 210
 Building type Climate zone
0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Hotel/motel 0.65 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.60 0.60 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.56 0.58 0.56 0.56
Office 0.54 0.54 0.53 0.54 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.52 0.45 0.46 0.52 0.47 0.48 0.51 0.48 0.48 0.50 0.45 0.49
Restaurant 0.61 0.58 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.54 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.69 0.72
Retail 0.47 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.40 0.39 0.37 0.39 0.36 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.45 0.43 0.46 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.46
School 0.52 0.53 0.53 0.53 0.51 0.51 0.53 0.48 0.46 0.43 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.49 0.46 0.46 0.44 0.44 0.48
Warehouse 0.25 0.25 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.30 0.22 0.25 0.36 0.28 0.25 0.40 0.34 0.36 0.40
All others 0.58 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.50 0.47 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.49 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.50 0.55 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.55

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Widely referenced in building codes and regulations, ASHRAE Standard 90.1 determines the
minimum energy efficiency required for prerequisite compliance.

Required ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Version

The required efficiency increases for project registrations beginning in 2028, stepping up from
the ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 to the more stringent ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022.
Compliance with ASHRAE 90.1-2022 achieves a net average site energy savings of 14%
compared to ASHRAE 90.1-2019 when including savings for prescriptively required renewable
energy.

Option 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

Only projects registered before January 1, 2028, can use ASHRAE 90.1-2019. Projects must
apply Addendum cr, which requires a building envelope backstop for projects documented using
the Energy Cost Budget Method (ECB) or Appendix G, Performance Rating Method. All other
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 addenda are optional.

Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Projects registered after January 1, 2028, must use ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

Projects registered before January 1, 2028, can use the 2022 version of the standard to earn
points under EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 211
Summary of ASHRAE 90.1 Section 4.2.1 Compliance Paths
Projects must choose from one of the following compliance paths from ASHRAE 90.1, Section
4.2.1:

• Prescriptive Method
o ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 5–10 (for projects applying Option 1)
o ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 5–11 (for projects applying Option 2)
• Energy Cost Budget Method (ECB)
• Appendix G, Performance Rating Method (PRM)

ASHRAE 90.1 further distinguishes these three compliance paths for each type of construction:

• Section 4.2.1.1: New Buildings

• Section 4.2.1.2: Addition to Existing Buildings
• Section 4.2.1.3: Alterations of Existing Buildings (applicable to major renovations)

The path commonly referred to as the prescriptive method requires individual compliance with
each referenced 90.1 section (building envelope, HVAC, service water heating, electrical power,
lighting, other equipment, and in ASHRAE 90.1-202, additional efficiency requirements).

The Energy Cost Budget Method (ECB) and Appendix G, Performance Rating Method (PRM)
offer greater flexibility in trading off performance between different systems. These methods rely
on whole-building energy modeling, demonstrating that the proposed building performs at least
as well as a project meeting the prescriptive requirements. For both methods, the building
envelope backstop additionally constrains building envelope performance.

To pursue additional credit for regulated energy efficiency in EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency,
project teams must apply either the prescriptive method or the Appendix G, Performance Rating
Method.

Key Changes in ASHRAE 90.1-2022

The following table briefly summarizes key changes to the ASHRAE Standard between the
90.1-2019 and 2022 publications. For a more comprehensive summary, refer to ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 Foreword and ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Informative Appendix M Addenda Description.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 212
Table 1. Key changes in ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Section Key change

Additional efficiency For the prescriptive method of compliance, designers select from a list of 33
requirements energy efficiency measures to satisfy the total required Energy Credits for a
given building type and climate zone, resulting in an average of 4% to 5%
Section 11 savings.

These additional savings are also accounted for when determining the Energy
Cost Budget Method requirements and in the Building Performance Factors
referenced for the Appendix G Performance Rating Method.
On-Site Renewable On-site renewable energy is required for the prescriptive method, averaging
Energy over 4% savings.

Section 10.5.1.1 The Energy Cost Budget Method and Appendix G Performance Rating Method
factors in this prescriptive renewable contribution in determining compliance,
although other efficiency measures can make up the difference for project
designs without renewable energy.

Exceptions to On-Site Renewable Requirements

ASHRAE 90.1, Section 10.5.1.1 exempts buildings with inadequate access to

solar energy and small buildings with less than 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) of
conditioned floor area for the three largest floors.

The following additional guidance applies to LEED projects:

• Where regulatory limitations restrict maximum rooftop solar capacity,

use the lesser of the Section 10.5.1.1 criteria or the maximum capacity
or area stipulated by regulatory limitations.
• Canadian provinces and U.S. eGRID regions aren't required to have
on-site renewable. It’s also not required in other countries where
current annual electric grid emissions average less than 20 grams/kWh
CO2eq.
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum K provides additional alternatives for
projects to find off-site renewable energy meeting the prescriptive
requirements in lieu of the on-site renewable power.
Thermal Bridges A new prescriptive section addresses thermal bridging in the building envelope.
For projects utilizing Section 5.6, Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance
Section 5.5.5 Path, the Energy Cost Budget Method, or the Appendix G, Performance Rating
Method, the proposed design model must account for thermal bridges that
don’t meet prescriptive requirements.

ASHRAE 90.1 Mandatory Provisions

All projects must meet applicable mandatory provisions from the referenced version of ASHRAE
90.1, found in Sections 5.4 (Building Envelope), 6.4 (HVAC), 7.4 (Service Water Heating), 8.4
(Power), 9.4 (Lighting), and 10.4 (Other Equipment).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 213
Early in the design process, the project architect, engineer, and lighting designer should review
these provisions and ensure they get integrated into the project design.

Exceptions to Mandatory Provisions

Project-specific exceptions or Project Priority Library alternatives to the mandatory provisions
may apply to:

• Projects outside the United States where variations in equipment rating methodologies
or limited availability of the required equipment or controls preclude compliance.
• Provisions exempted by the local authority having jurisdiction in areas regulated by
codes of similar stringency to the referenced version of ASHRAE 90.1.
• Provisions available in ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM energy simulation.

Further Description of ASHRAE 90.1, Section 4.2.1 Compliance Paths

PRESCRIPTIVE METHOD
For the prescriptive method, projects must meet all applicable requirements from each
referenced ASHRAE 90.1 section. The provisions of each section don’t permit trade-offs.

• Section 5. Building Envelope

• Section 6. Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)
• Section 7. Service Water Heating
• Section 8. Power
• Section 9. Lighting
• Section 10. Other Equipment

For ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11. Additional Efficiency Requirements

This method provides a straightforward, easy-to-follow path to compliance, especially for

smaller projects or those with less complex designs where flexibility is less of a concern.

The prescriptive method specifies minimum requirements for various building components, such
as insulation levels, window performance, lighting power densities, HVAC system efficiencies,
and system controls.90

90
“ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Performance Based Compliance,” U.S. Department of Energy Building Energy Codes Program,
https://www.energycodes.gov/performance_based_compliance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 214
Additional Considerations
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1. Prescriptive Method, Path 1

CASE 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

Projects that comply with Option 1 of the prerequisite using the ASHRAE 90.1-2019
prescriptive method may earn points for additional improvements to regulated systems
by documenting achievement of energy credits using the methodology referenced in
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11. Additional Efficiency Requirements.

CASE 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Projects that comply with Option 2 of the prerequisite using the ASHRAE 90.1-2022
prescriptive method are awarded four points under the New Construction rating system,
or two points under the Core and Shell rating system.

Additional points may be awarded for incremental energy efficiency credits beyond the
minimum required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11. Additional Efficiency
Requirements.

PERMISSIBLE TRADE-OFFS FOR PRESCRIPTIVE METHOD

Some sections provide an option for limited trade-offs within the section:

• Section 5.6 Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance Path assesses the overall envelope
performance compared to a prescriptively compliant envelope, permitting trade-offs
between building envelope components. For example, improved wall assembly U-factors
may compensate for window-to-wall ratios that exceed the 40% prescriptive maximum.
The project complies when the proposed envelope performance factor does not exceed
the base envelope performance factor determined following the simplified modeling
protocol in ASHRAE 90.1, Normative Appendix C. Software, such as the freely available
COMcheck tool, automates this Appendix C energy simulation, building envelope data
entry by the architect or design professional and completing these calculations in a
matter of minutes.

• Section 6.6.2 Mechanical System Performance Path (90.1-2022 only) uses simplified
energy modeling to calculate the Total System Performance Ratio (TSPR) for the
project’s HVAC systems, typically used for office, retail, hotel/motel,
multifamily/dormitory, and school or education buildings. Professional mechanical
engineers without building energy modeling experience can calculate the TSPR using a
software tool that automates the analysis.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 215
ASHRAE 90.4 for spaces matching the ASHRAE 90.1 definition of computer room such as data
centers or server rooms:

• Section 6.6.1 Computer Room System Path

• Section 8.6.1 Computer Room Systems

OPTION 2. PRESCRIPTIVE METHOD, ASHRAE 90.1-2022, SECTION 11.

ADDITIONAL EFFICIENCY REQUIREMENTS

For the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive method, designers must also select from a list of
additional efficiency measures in Section 11, Additional Efficiency Requirements to earn the
minimum number of Energy Credits required for the project’s building type and climate zone per
Table 11.5.1-1. This gives the project team more flexibility to select the additional measures that
are most feasible and appropriate for their project application.

Each of the efficiency measures referenced in Section 11 is awarded a specific number of base
Energy Credits per building type and climate, equating to approximately 0.1% savings per credit
(See ASHRAE 90.1-22, Tables 11.5.3-1 through 11.5.3-9). Section 11.5.2 outlines opportunities
for further adjustments to augment these base credits for certain efficiency measures.

For example, an office project in climate zone 4A earns eight base credits for achieving a 5%
reduction in lighting power (L06), but this increases to 16 credits for a 10% reduction based on
the adjustment described in the detailed summary of this measure.

Combined credits for renewable and load management measures are limited to 60% of the total
required energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum j allows projects to use the Total System Performance Ratio
(TSPR) to demonstrate overall improvement in HVAC performance rather than applying
individual system efficiency measures.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 216
 Additional considerations

For projects with multiple building types, the minimum required credits and
credits achieved are weighted by the gross floor area of each building type.

Minimum required Energy Credits are adjusted lower than the default
thresholds in Table 11.5.1.1-1 for certain project applications:

Core and Shell projects with central HVAC or service water heating must
achieve 50% of the credits from Table 11.5.1.1-1. Other Core and Shell
projects must achieve 33% of these credits.

Major renovations, referred to as substantial alterations in ASHRAE 90.1,

must achieve 50% of the credits referenced in Table 11.5.1.1-1.

Projects without roof availability for PV or meeting Section 10.5.1 exceptions

may use the referenced equation to adjust required credits below the default
threshold per Section 11.5.1(e).

Unconditioned spaces, semi-heated spaces, and parking garages must

achieve 50% of the credits referenced for other building types in Table
11.5.1.1-1.

ASHRAE 90.1 4.2.1 COMPLIANCE PATH: ENERGY COST BUDGET (ECB) METHOD
This approach compares the annual energy cost of the proposed design to that of a budget
building. The budget building is essentially a clone of the proposed design but adjusted to meet
the prescriptive requirements. The proposed design achieves ASHRAE 90.1-2019 compliance if
the energy cost doesn’t exceed the budget. For ASHRAE 90.1-2022, on-site renewable must be
included in the budget building model when prescriptively required and meet an additional
improvement below the energy cost budget based on an adjustment referencing the
prescriptively required energy credits from Section 11. Refer to the Building Envelope Backstop
section referenced below for further guidance addressing limitations on envelope trade-offs
when applying the ECB Method.

Avoid using the ECB Method to demonstrate improved regulated energy savings for EAc3:
Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 217
ASHRAE 90.1 4.2.1 COMPLIANCE PATH: APPENDIX G PERFORMANCE RATING
METHOD (PRM)
ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Performance Rating Method (PRM) uses a stable baseline
methodology that supports comparison of building performance across versions of ASHRAE
90.1 using a variety of performance metrics. Using the PRM, an energy modeler can develop a
single set of ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Baseline Building Design and Proposed Building
Design models to document compliance with this prerequisite, with EAc3: Enhanced Energy
Efficiency, and with any code requirements linked to ASHRAE 90.1-2016 or later or IECC-2018
or later.

The stable baseline methodology in the PRM requires a Performance Index (PI) less than or
equal to the Performance Index Target (PIT), with further adjustments and limitations addressing
on-site renewable energy. The scale for the Performance Index ranges from one to zero, where
one represents a baseline building that minimally complies with ASHRAE 90.1-2004
requirements, and zero represents a net-zero building.

Calculate the Performance Index Target using the results of the baseline building model
completed under the PRM protocol, and the Building Performance Factor (BPF) for the project
type and climate zone. The BPFs are provided in ASHRAE 90.1, Table 4.2.1.1 for the energy
cost metric.

Refer to the Building Envelope Backstop section for further guidance addressing limitations on
envelope trade-offs when applying the PRM Method. Also, refer to ASHRAE 90.1-2022
G1.2.1(b) for similar requirements limiting trade-offs from interior lighting power.

Major renovations
Major renovations have slightly less stringent Performance Index Targets than New
Construction, determined by multiplying published BPFs by a factor of 1.05 (See ASHRAE 90.1-
2019, Addendum cr or ASHRAE 90.1-2022 4.2.1.3).

Appendix G PRM. Alternative Metrics in Lieu of Energy Cost

Although the ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G PRM references a cost metric, the energy modeler
may instead demonstrate EAp2: Minimum Energy Performance compliance for the PRM using
the future source energy metric referenced in EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, or a site
energy metric, or a current source energy metric. Substitute all PRM references to cost with the
new metric. Building Performance Factors to assess compliance must be specific to the metric
and the referenced version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 218
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency only uses the future source energy metric and does not use
energy cost, site energy, or source energy metrics (See EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency,
Option 2).

Energy modelers can limit the documentation level of effort by calculating both prerequisite and
credit compliance using the future source energy metric.

OPTION 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019. APPENDIX G PRM, ALTERNATIVE METRICS

• Future source energy. Calculate the PIT for both the prerequisite and EAc3: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency with BPFs from the prerequisite Table 1. 90.1-2019, Equivalent
Building Performance Factors for a Future Source Energy Metric.
• Site energy or source energy metric. (Prerequisite only). Apply ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Addendum ch for a source energy metric matching those listed in Addendum ch, Table
X4-1, follow Addendum ch, Section X5, Methodology for BPF Adjustment To Account for
Localized Conversion Factors.

OPTION 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022. APPENDIX G PRM, ALTERNATIVE METRICS

• Future source energy metric. Calculate the PIT for the prerequisite with BPFs from the
prerequisite Table 2. 90.1-2022, Equivalent Building Performance Factors for a Future
Source Energy Metric.
o Core and shell projects. Use the same BPFs to document the prerequisite and
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.
o New Construction projects. Calculate the less stringent PIT for EAc3: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency using Table 6. 90.1-2019 equivalent building performance factors
for a future source energy metric.
o Site energy or source energy metric. (Prerequisite only). Apply ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Informative Appendix I. For the source energy metric, use the 90.1-2022,
Appendix I5. Methodology for BPF Adjustment to Account for Localized Conversion
Factors if the project source energy conversions do not match those listed in
Addendum Table I4-1.

Appendix G PRM. Treatment of On-site Renewable Energy

OPTION 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 PRM. TREATMENT OF ON-SITE RENEWABLE
ENERGY
Per ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 4.2.1.1, the renewable energy contribution towards meeting
PRM requirements is limited to 5% of Baseline Building Performance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 219
This varies from EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 2, which either includes or excludes
the entire renewable contribution from the determination of credit compliance.

OPTION 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 PRM. TREATMENT OF ON-SITE RENEWABLE

ENERGY
Per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 4.2.1.1, the modeler must perform three calculations of
proposed building performance to account for the renewable energy contribution prescriptively
required in Section 10.5.1 Renewable Energy Resources:

• Proposed building performance without any credit for the on-site renewable energy
contribution.
• Proposed building performance including the on-site renewable energy contribution
prescriptively required from Section 10.5.1.
• Proposed building performance including all on-site renewable energy contributions.

The renewable energy contribution toward meeting PRM requirements over and above the
amount prescriptively required from Section 10.5.1 is limited to 5% of baseline building
performance.

This varies from EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 2, which either includes or excludes
the entire renewable contribution from determination of credit compliance.

Appendix G PRM. Exceptions to Mandatory Measures

For mandatory measures, the modular may document the associated savings in the energy
simulation and account for the measure’s absence instead of complying with the mandatory
provisions. Model the Baseline Building Performance (BBP) per Appendix G requirements and
the Proposed Building Performance (PBP) as designed for measures that are not required for
inclusion in the BBP, such as daylighting controls. For measures where Appendix G requires the
PBP to match the BBP, model the measure as present in the baseline BBP and absent in the
proposed PBP.

ECB and Appendix G PRM. Building Envelope Backstop

New buildings using the Energy Cost Budget (ECB) Method or the Appendix G Performance
Rating Method (PRM) must limit building envelope trade-offs per ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Addendum cr or the associated requirements embedded in ASHRAE 90.1-2022. Doing so
prioritizes building envelope performance that has a lifetime impact over more short-lived
efficiency measures.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 220
Projects must either meet the prescriptive building envelope requirements of ASHRAE 90.1,
Section 5.5 or apply ASHRAE 90.1, Section 5.6 Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance Path
to demonstrate that the building envelope does not significantly underperform compared to a
prescriptively compliant building envelope. (See more details for each path under the
prescriptive method section of this guidance).

If using the Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance Path, the proposed envelope performance
factor cannot exceed the baseline envelope performance factor by more than 15% for
residential occupancies or more than 7% for non-residential occupancies.

For projects that cannot prescriptively comply with ASHRAE 90.1 building envelope criteria, the
design team should evaluate Building Envelope Trade-Off compliance early in the design
process and make any necessary design changes to meet these minimum requirements.
Compliance may prove particularly challenging for projects with high window-to-wall ratios.

Additional considerations
Projects pursuing points for EAc2: Reduce Peak Thermal Loads and using
the Building Envelope Trade-Off Compliance Path must have a proposed
envelope performance factor that does not exceed the baseline envelope
performance factor.

Equivalence to ASHRAE 90.1

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence to ASHRAE
90.1.

For U.S.-based projects, state or local codes are equivalent to ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or ASHRAE
90.1-2022 when the U.S. Department of Energy Building Energy Codes Program status of state
energy code adoption indicates a commercial code efficiency category matching the referenced
version of ASHRAE 90.1 or later for the project location in effect at the time of project permit
application.

For projects documenting equivalence with ASHRAE 90.1, provide additional documentation to
demonstrate compliance with the provisions of the envelope backstop referenced in ASHRAE
90.1-2019 Addendum cr and ASHRAE 90.1-2022. Examples include:

• The project meets the prescriptive envelope requirements for the referenced code.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 221
 • The project complies with ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Addendum cr G1.2.1(c) requirements
or ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Section G1.2.1(d) requirements.
• The project complies with Thermal Energy Demand Intensity (TEDI) criteria specified
in the referenced code requirements.
• The envelope weighted average UA (U-factor x Area) in all climate zones and the
weighted average Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) in climate zones 1 through 4
does not exceed the prescriptive maximum by an established percentage. Replace
fenestration area exceeding the prescriptive maximum with opaque assemblies to
determine the prescriptive maximum UA.
• The energy consumption model for the proposed design with a proposed envelope
does not exceed the simulated energy consumption for the proposed design with a
prescriptively compliant envelope by a given percentage.

The 2021 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2021) and ASHRAE 90.1-2019 with
Addendum cr are equivalent.

The 2024 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC 2024) with additional envelope
backstop provisions and ASHRAE 90.1-2022 are equivalent.

For both versions of the standard:

• IECC, Section C407, Total Building Performance may only be used to document
prerequisite compliance with additional documentation demonstrating compliance
with the envelope backstop.
• Use IECC Prescriptive Compliance (C402 through C406) instead of the ASHRAE
90.1-2019 prescriptive method.

District Energy Systems (DES)

ASHRAE 90.1 refers to district energy systems (DES) as purchased chilled water or purchased
heat, even when this energy is part of a campus distribution plant, and not directly purchased
from a utility or municipality. Because DES systems are outside the project scope of work, DES
efficiency cannot contribute towards achieving prerequisite compliance.

For projects that use the ECB method, model purchased heat and/or purchased chilled water as
independent energy sources using the same utility rates per unit of energy for the energy cost
budget and design energy cost models.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 222
For projects that use the PRM, use one of the following modeling methods to document the
DES:

METHOD A. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 ADDENDUM A (REMOVES INHERENT DES

PENALTY)
The project may apply ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum a to either the ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Appendix G criteria as applicable to avoid the inherent penalty in the
Appendix G PRM Performance Index Targets when modeling purchased heat and purchased
chilled water. Model HVAC systems for the baseline building design from the criteria in ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Addendum a, as if all heating and cooling generation equipment is on-site.

Model the proposed design with natural gas-forced draft boilers in place of district heating and
water-cooled chillers in place of district cooling, matching the type and number specified in
Addendum a. For projects using ASHRAE 90.1-2019, replace all ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Addendum a references to Section 6 prescriptive criteria for the proposed building design with
ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 6.

Additional considerations: Linked credits

EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency. Use Method A for prerequisite compliance

if crediting DES efficiency towards the project performance in EAc3: Enhanced
Energy Efficiency.

EAc4: Renewable Energy. In the energy simulation, use submetering to

distinguish onsite fuel from the modeled fuel for the district hot water plant. This
information informs the EAc4: Renewable Energy, Renewable Energy Attributes,
Project Energy Source criteria.

METHOD B. DIRECTLY MODEL PURCHASED HEAT AND/OR PURCHASED

CHILLED WATER
Apply the PRM requirements to model purchased heat and/or purchased chilled water as
independent energy sources in the baseline and proposed design, with the same utility rates or
source energy conversion factors for the baseline and proposed design. Use published utility
rates or source energy conversion factors when available.

Otherwise, if purchased energy rates or source energy conversion factors are not published for
the district energy sources serving the project, derive these purchased energy rates and/or
conversion factors as follows:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 223
 • Purchased chilled water (CHW). Multiply the utility rate or source energy
conversion factor for electricity by a factor of 0.325 to estimate the chilled water utility
rate or source energy conversion factor.
• Purchased heat from district hot water (HHW). Multiply the utility rate or source
energy conversion factor by a factor of 1.5 for the predominant fossil fuel source
used to generate the district hot water or natural gas if unknown.
• Purchased heat from district steam. Multiply the utility rate or source energy
conversion factor by a factor of 1.7 for the predominant fossil fuel source used to
generate the district hot water or natural gas if unknown.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 224
Table 2. Summary of EA credit linkages to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency
Option 1 Option 2
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Applicability Limited to projects registered before Available to all projects.
January 1, 2028 Required for projects registered on or
after January 1, 2028.
Linked Credits
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency
Prescriptive Required as a precondition to Points automatically awarded for
method document points for additional prerequisite compliance using
efficiency. Prescriptive Method. (New Construction:
(Option 1, Path 1 four points. Core and Shell: 2 points).
of the credit) (See Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019). Further points for incremental efficiency
beyond the minimum per ASHRAE
90.1-2022 Section 11. Additional
Efficiency Requirements (See Case 2.
ASHRAE 90.1-2022).
Appendix G PRM Incremental performance New Construction. Points rewarded for
improvement documented using the improvement beyond a 90.1-2019
(Option 2 of the future source energy metric earns equivalent-baseline using the future
credit) points. source energy metric.

NOTE: Treatment Performance target for prerequisite and

of on-site credit are determined separately using
renewable simple calculations adjusting referenced
energy varies Building Performance Factor (BPF).
from prerequisite. Core and Shell: Two points rewarded for
meeting ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the
future source energy metric. Further
points for additional incremental
improvements.
EAc2: Reduce Peak Thermal Loads
Precondition for Building envelope cannot perform Building envelope cannot perform worse
all credit options worse than a prescriptively compliant than a prescriptively compliant envelope
envelope per ASHRAE 90.1-2019 per ASHRAE 90.1-2022 5.5 or 5.6.
5.5 or 5.6
Option 3. Comply with the prescriptive thermal
Thermal Bridging bridging requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Section 5.5.5(a) without
exceptions.
Prescriptive Rewards improvements to peak Rewards improvements to peak thermal
method, ECB, or thermal loads documented using the loads documented using the ASHRAE
Appendix G PRM ASHRAE 90.1 Section 5.6 Building 90.1 Section 5.6 Building Envelope
Envelope Trade-Off Method (used for Trade-Off Method.
(Option 4, Path 2, the prerequisite for the prescriptive
Envelope) method or for the envelope backstop (Used for the prerequisite for the
in the ECB Method, and PRM prescriptive method or for the envelope
Method). backstop in the ECB Method, and PRM
Method).
Prescriptive Total System Performance Ratio Total System Performance Ratio
method (TSPR) (TSPR).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 225
 Option 1 Option 2
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 ASHRAE 90.1-2022
(Option 4, Path 2, Same documentation may be used to Same documentation may be used to
Ventilation) demonstrate peak thermal load demonstrate peak thermal load
reductions for ventilation, reductions for ventilation, prerequisite
prerequisite HVAC compliance using HVAC compliance using the prescriptive
the prescriptive method, and further method, and further improvements for
improvements for EAc3: Enhanced EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.
Energy Efficiency.
Appendix G PRM Same documentation may be used to Same documentation may be used to
demonstrate peak thermal load demonstrate peak thermal load
(Option 4, Path 3) reduction for this credit and energy reduction for this credit and energy
efficiency meeting the efficiency efficiency meeting the efficiency
requirements for EAp2: Minimum requirements for EAp2: Minimum
Energy Efficiency and EAc3: Energy Efficiency and EAc3: Enhanced
Enhanced Energy Efficiency. Energy Efficiency.

DOCUMENTATION
Project types Options Paths Documentation

New Construction All All Document compliance with mandatory measures

and from ASHRAE Standard 90.1.
Core and Shell Prescriptive ASHRAE 90.1 compliance forms or COMcheck
method compliance report confirming a system-by-system
approach.
Energy Input-output reports from modeling software.
simulation
(ASHRAE ASHRAE 90.1 compliance forms.
90.1 Appendix
G PRM or Energy consumption and demand for each
ECB Method) building end-use and energy source.
Exceptional calculation and supporting
documentation (if applicable).
USGBC Minimum Energy Performance Calculator
or ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Performance Based
Compliance Form91.
Supporting documentation for metrics, as
applicable, including published reference for
source energy conversion factors, published
reference for utility rates or tariffs per energy
source, and for projects attempting Enhanced
Energy Efficiency, published reference for
greenhouse gas emissions factors.

Appendix l site or source energy calculations as

applicable for projects using 90.1-2022.
District Energy All All Documentation on DES including energy source
System serving the project (as applicable).

91 ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Performance Based Compliance Form, ASHRAE, (n.d.), https://www.energycodes.gov/ashrae-standard-
901-performance-based-compliance-form.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 226
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ASHRAE 90.4 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-4-
2022?product_id=2524333)
• IECC 2021 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P1)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 227
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING
EAp3
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To improve energy performance and limit greenhouse gas emissions by verifying that systems
are operating per the owner’s project requirements.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Comply with Commissioning Requirements

Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 commissioning requirements for building

systems, controls, and the building envelope, with the following additional provisions:

• All projects shall provide fundamental commissioning. Section 4.2.5.2 exceptions

shall not apply.
• The referenced version of Standard 90.1 with errata shall be:
• 2019 or later for projects registered before January 1, 2028.
• 2022 or later for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028.
• By the end of the design development phase, the owner shall designate a
commissioning provider (CxP) with experience completing commissioning on at least
two projects of equal or larger scope and complexity.
• In addition to the requirements of the applicable version of ASHRAE 90.1, the CxP
shall:
• In predesign or as early as possible, assist in the development of the owner’s
project requirements (OPR), reviewing and updating the OPR through design
and construction. OPR must include HVAC, service water heating, power,
lighting, other equipment (include on-site renewable energy), and envelope.
• During design, review the basis of design (BOD) for compliance with the OPR,
and attend at least one meeting focused on mechanical, electrical, and plumbing,
and one focused on envelope, which may be separate or combined, to discuss
review comments and commissioning.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 228
 • During construction, review submittals and substitutions for design deviations
that impact the OPR, attend milestone meetings at 50% and 100% completion,
and perform a sample review (minimum 10%) of completed contractor
documentation for quality assurance/quality control. For envelope, include testing
in the commissioning documents and witness a sample of tests (not required for
Core and Shell projects).
• Occupancy/operations phase: Develop an ongoing commissioning plan.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The prerequisite requires that projects perform commissioning for building systems, controls,
and the building envelope in compliance with the minimum requirements of ASHRAE Standard
90.1 and additional LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED BC+C: Core and Shell rating
system provisions.

Automatic Achievement of Prerequisite through EAc5: Enhanced

Commissioning, Option 1
Projects that achieve all EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1 requirements for the
building enclosure and MEP systems automatically comply with the prerequisite requirements
since the credit requirements encompass all commissioning requirements from the ASHRAE
90.1 standard referenced in EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning.

Therefore, when planning the commissioning scope, review the EAc5: Enhanced
Commissioning, Option 1 requirements, paying special attention to the required timing for
Commissioning Provider (CxP) engagement during predesign or very early in the
commissioning process to accomplish the broader commissioning scope of work required for
credit compliance.

Tables 1 and 2 compare the required tasks for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and EAc5:
Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1.

Compliance using EAp3 Fundamental Commissioning Path

REQUIRED ASHRAE STANDARD 90.1 VERSION
Projects registered before January 1, 2028, can reference ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 or any
later version. Projects registered on or after January 1, 2028, must use ASHRAE Standard 90.1-
2022 or later.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 229
The commissioning requirements for the 2019 and 2022 versions of ASHRAE 90.1 are similar.
One notable addition to ASHRAE 90.1-2022 that influences the commissioning scope is the
requirement for whole-building air-leakage testing for buildings less than 25,000 square feet
(2,320 square meters).

Additional considerations
Use a single version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 for EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, and EAp4: Energy Metering
and Reporting streamlines documentation efforts.

Approved Equivalent Standards

Projects may use IECC 2021 instead of Standard 90.1-2019 and IECC 2024 instead of
ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022. Projects that use IECC instead of ASHRAE must still comply with
all additional LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED BD+C: Core and Shell rating system
requirements.

SELECTING THE COMMISSIONING PROVIDER (CXP)

As buildings and systems become more complex and the systems required for Cx expand
beyond traditional mechanical equipment, many CxPs will consist of a team instead of one
person. Therefore, either an entity or an individual can act as the CxP. For projects that use a
CxP entity, designating a single person as the Cx Project Lead or Manager ensures consistency
in documentation and quality control of the process.

Minimum qualifications
The CxP must have direct commissioning experience from the design phase through the
construction phase for at least two projects with equal or larger scope and complexity. The
previous experience should address buildings of similar types and size range, similar types and
capacities of HVAC and service water heating equipment, and controls with similar complexity,
and the building envelope unless this scope of work is completed independently by a Building
Envelope Commissioning Provider (BECxP).

Experience documented for a CxP entity must reflect the team performing the commissioning
work for the project.

Eligible entities
Per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019, Section 4.2.5.2, the CxP must be completely independent of
the design or construction team. Consider the following when selecting a CxP:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 230
 • The CxP can be a third-party entity not currently contracted for any design or
construction aspects of the building or site.
• The owner can employ the CxP, provided the entity meets the CxP minimum
qualifications.
• The CxP can be employed by the company performing the design or construction of
the building; however, they must be a completely independent member of the design
team and not directly associated with any aspect of the design and/or installation of
the building systems.
• If the CxP employs any company that has direct influence on the design and
construction, the Commissioning Plan must clearly address any potential conflicts of
interest and demonstrate that the CxP acts and operates solely on behalf of the
owner, reports directly to the owner, and works entirely independently from the
design and construction team.

Verification and Testing (V&T) Providers

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 also requires that the CxP includes Verification and Testing (V&T)
providers. A V&T provider is an entity that completes the activities needed to implement the
building functional performance testing (FPT) activities or verify that elements of the building
project meet stated requirements. In many cases, the entity acting as the CxP fulfills this
requirement. Confirm that an individual qualified in verification and FPT execution is part of the
commissioning team.

CxP requirements for Building Envelope Commissioning

The CxP must include qualified individuals who can perform the building envelope design
review and air barrier inspection or a V&T provider who can perform air leakage testing.

V&T PROVIDER FOR BUILDING ENVELOPE COMMISSIONING

ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019, Section 5.4.3.1.1 requires an independent third party to
test whole-building pressurization for air leakage. Alternately, a continuous air barrier
design and installation verification program conducted by an independent third party
meets the requirements when using Section 5.4.3.1.1, Exception 3. ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2019, Section 5.9.1.2, requires verification and testing, including a design review,
periodic field inspection, and reporting.

Teams must confirm the compliance path for testing and ensure qualified individuals conduct
each element of the commissioning efforts.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 231
Timing for CxP engagement
Identify a CxP no later than the end of the design development phase. The CxP is primarily
responsible for leading the design and construction team through all aspects of the mechanical,
electrical and plumbing (MEP) systems and building envelope systems commissioning,
respectively.

Additional considerations
A single entity can perform all MEP and Building Envelope system
commissioning efforts, provided the entity meets the minimum requirements.

For projects that use different qualified individuals to perform various Cx tasks, ensure sufficient
collaboration within the team to provide continuity from design through operations. For example,
an entity may have different CxP team members review the design documents than the team
witnessing testing.

SCOPE OF FUNDAMENTAL COMMISSIONING

The prerequisite requires that projects conform with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 requirements for
all referenced systems and provisions outlined in the LEED BD+C: New Construction and LEED
BD+C: Core and Shell rating system.

Projects using ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022 for compliance guidance must include relevant
verification, testing, and commissioning for the additional efficiency measures and thermal break
requirements from ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022.

Systems requiring commissioning

At a minimum, commissioned systems must include all energy-using systems within the project
boundary that are referenced in ASHRAE 90.1 Sections 5–10, including the building envelope,
HVAC, service water heating, power, lighting, on-site renewable energy, energy monitoring
systems, refrigeration equipment, energy storage systems, load management systems, and
other energy-using systems within the project’s boundary.

Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR)

The Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR) document the functional requirements of the building.
It also details the expectations of the building’s use and operation. The OPR includes objectives
for the project, which verify that all stated goals integrate with the building design, construction,
and operation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 232
The owner or a design professional can develop the OPR. However, the owner must provide
input during the development, ensuring that the OPR captures the project’s critical elements,
like sustainability goals and targets. If a CxP’s engagement begins before the OPR
development, the CxP may provide input on the initial development efforts. The OPR is a living
document requiring ongoing updates throughout the design phases.

Additional considerations
The owner plays a critical role in developing and updating the OPR. The OPR
establishes a clear vision for the project, identifying expected outcomes and
goals for sustainable building development. As the project progresses, decisions
should align with the OPR. The owner must remain a key stakeholder and
ultimate approver of the document’s final version.

Basis of Design (BOD)

The project’s design professionals typically create the basis of design (BOD). The BOD explains
how the design and construction team will execute the OPR. Include processes and
assumptions made early in the design phases to achieve the OPR’s intent in the BOD, along
with relevant project information. A BOD addresses performance criteria, general building
characteristics (e.g., envelope, HVAC, water), and governing codes and standards, at minimum.

The BOD is a living document requiring updates throughout the design and construction
phases.

Cx Plan
The Cx Plan, developed by the CxP, outlines the goals and objectives, general project
information, and all systems included in the commissioning scope of work. The plan details the
complete Cx process, including roles and responsibilities, key tasks and milestones performed
by each responsible party, and functional performance test (FPT) or verification procedures for
all systems verified, commissioned, or tested.

Design Reviews
Design reviews by the CxP are critical elements of the commissioning process. Reviews support
the energy efficiency goals of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 by verifying that the design meets the
Standard’s requirements. Early reviews allow teams to correct areas of the design that do not
meet the requirements before construction begins, avoiding costly change orders during
construction.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 233
The CxP must review the OPR, BOD, and design reviews and confirm that the construction
documents include the required commissioning information.

The design reviews should confirm that the design meets relevant energy efficiency, energy
metering and reporting, peak thermal load reduction, renewable energy, and grid-interactive
requirements documented for the LEED Energy and Atmosphere (EA) credit category.

During the design phase, the CxP must participate in at least one coordination meeting to
discuss design review comments.

Submittal Reviews and Functional Performance Test Development

During construction, the CxP must review submittals for equipment included in the Cx scope of
work. This review allows the CxP to identify deviations from the design and OPR and provide
comments to the owner, engineer, and contractor on any significant issues. Addressing these
issues before procurement saves time and money by avoiding incorrect equipment purchases.

The CxP is the primary one responsible for developing the functional performance tests (FPTs).
FPTs written specifically for the equipment and systems designed for the project provide the
most value. Therefore, CxPs must use the design team’s approved submittals to develop any
testing procedures for the project. The FPTs should cover all modes of operations, including
seasonal testing.

Pre-commissioning Site Visits and Contractor Documentation Review

Determining commissioning readiness before execution is essential minimizing potential delays
from failed testing efforts. Through visual inspections and a sample review of the contractor’s
completed documents, the CxP can confirm the timing for FPT execution efforts.

The CxP must review at least 10% of the contractor’s completed Cx documents. This quality
assurance review allows the CxP to understand the quality of documentation efforts and identify
any gaps in the process. Performing this review before the Cx readiness site visit helps the CxP
to determine timing for the required site visit.

Before Cx execution, the CxP must complete at least one site visit to verify Cx readiness.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 234
 Additional considerations
Projects with phased construction and phased Cx testing should consider
multiple Cx readiness site visits that align with each phase of the construction
efforts.

Functional Performance Tests — Execution

The CxP must witness functional performance testing executed by the contractors and
subcontractors. Perform testing when all system components are installed, energized,
programmed, balanced, and checked for functionality.

FPT SAMPLING
A sampling strategy is acceptable for functional testing of projects with a large number of
similar system types, like an office with multiple VAV boxes or a multi-family residential
building with individual heat pumps for each tenant.

An acceptable sampling rate is typically 10%. The CxP should consider the testing
procedure’s failure rate when using a sampling rate. If multiple failures occur for the
same equipment or system type, determine if there is a systemic issue.

Additional example — sampling rate and failure rate

A hotel has 200 fan coil units. The owner and CxP agree to a 10% sampling
strategy. During testing, the CxP tests 20 fan coil units. If 10 of the 20 tests fail,
conduct additional testing. Failures of that magnitude would cause more concern.

SEASONAL OR DEFERRED TESTING

When necessary, the CxP can use seasonal or deferred testing. For example, if the
initial FPT effort occurs in the summer, tests for heating mode can occur during colder
months. Once testing is complete, the CxP is responsible for amending the final report
and other documents.

Meetings
During the construction phase, the CxP participates in 50% and 100% milestone meetings to
discuss the commissioning findings and work toward resolving identified issues.

Final Cx Report
The CxP is the primary one responsible for authoring the final Cx report. The final report should
include, at minimum, an executive summary of the Cx process and the results of the project’s
testing efforts, an updated issues and resolution log that identifies items that are closed and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 235
proposed resolutions for outstanding items, copies of the final versions of the OPR and BOD,
design review logs, copies of the approved submittals used for the FPTs, and copies of the
completed FPTs.

Provide a preliminary Cx report for projects that finalize the LEED application before completing
Cx. The Report must address all major envelope, MEP, renewable, and grid-interactive systems,
confirm system installation, and indicate that Cx has commenced for all systems.

The CxP must provide the Final Cx Report to the owner once the Cx is complete.

Ongoing Cx Plan
An ongoing Cx Plan ensures systems remain operationally efficient throughout the building’s
life. The plan should provide facility managers with procedures, blank FPTs, and a
recommended schedule for ongoing Cx activities.

The ongoing Cx plan should address requirements for continuous documentation and updates.
Building operations change over time, including retrofits or equipment replacement projects.
Ensure the ongoing Cx plan reflects the most current information for the building.

KEY TASKS AND MILESTONES FOR COMMISSIONING

The Commissioning Provider is responsible for completing the following tasks to comply with
EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning requirements:

• Predesign (or immediately upon engagement of the CxP no later than the end of
design development)
o Assist in the development of the OPR.
o Develop Cx Plan.

• Design Phase
o Review Basis of Design (BOD).
o Develop or approve Cx specifications.
o Design document reviews (design drawings and specifications).
o Attend at least one coordination meeting.
o Assist in updating the OPR.

• Construction Phase
o Perform focused submittal reviews for design deviations that impact the OPR.
o Perform field reviews.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 236
 o Review/witness performance testing.
o Attend milestone meetings at 50% and 100% completion.
o Review sampling of QA/QC documentation (checklist and tests).
o Track identified issues to resolution (Issues/Resolution Log).
o Develop a preliminary commissioning report.

• Occupancy/Operations Phase
o Review training program.
o Develop final commissioning report.
o Develop or review the ongoing Cx plan.

Comparison of Fundamental EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and EAc5:

Enhanced Commissioning
Table 1 for MEP systems and Table 2 for the Building Envelope provide a detailed comparison
of key tasks and milestones for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and EAc5: Enhanced
Commissioning.

Table 1. MEP System Tasks for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and EAc5: Enhanced
Commissioning
Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
Identification of CxP Section Section 5.1.1, Fundamental: By
4.2.5.2, with with timing the end of design
timing required required by development
by LEED LEED phase.

Enhanced: During
predesign or very
early in the design
phase.
Predesign Assist in Required by Section 6.2, Enhanced: OPR
Development/Revie LEED 6.3 shall list and define
For CxP engaged w and Update the systems and
later than Owner's Project assemblies to be
predesign, tasks Requirements commissioned,
must be completed (OPR) to include including sampling
immediately upon HVAC, Service strategies accepted
CxP engagement. Water Heating, by the Owner. It
Power, Lighting and should clearly
Other Equipment define objectives,
Cx scope and
requirements and
identify the number,
format and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 237
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
scheduling of
design and
submittal reviews.

Develop Cx Plan Section Section 7.2, Fundamental and

4.2.5.2.1 7.3 Enhanced:
Section Development of Cx
4.2.5.2.2 Plan.

Enhanced: Update
Cx plan at least
once per phase
(DD, CD,
Construction).
Design Phase Review Basis of Required by Section 8.2, Enhanced: Review
Design (BOD) LEED 8.3 BOD for compliance
with OPR.
Update Cx Plan Not Required Section 7.2, Enhanced: Update
7.3 Cx plan at least
once per phase
(DD, CD,
Construction).
Develop Cx Section Section 9.2,
Specification 4.2.5.1.1, 9.3
4.2.5.2.1,
6.9.2
Design Document Section Section 10.2, Full Drawing and
Reviews (Design 4.2.5.2, 10.3 Specification
Drawings and 4.2.5.2.2 Review for systems
Specifications) to be
commissioned.

Fundamental and
Enhanced: detail
compliance with the
OPR and provisions
in respective
standards.

Each design review

to include issues
log for
tracking/resolution
of issues.

Enhanced: Back-
check review to
confirm if
recommendations

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 238
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
and comments
have been
addressed.

Attend Required by Required by Fundamental:

coordination/design LEED LEED Minimum of one
meetings to discuss coordination or
review comments design review
and commissioning meeting discussing
design review
comments.

Enhanced:
Minimum of one
additional
coordination or
design review
meeting discussing
review comments.
Update to OPR Required for Section 6.2, Fundamental and
LEED 6.3 Enhanced: Update
OPR as needed
prior to end of
Design Phase.
Construction Phase Pre-Construction Not Required Section 12.2.4 Enhanced: CxP
Kick-off Meeting conducts a Cx kick-
off and scoping
meetings with the
Project Team to
explain Cx
procedures and
coordinate Cx
Activities
throughout the
Construction
Phase.
Update Cx Plan Not Required Section 7.2, Enhanced: Update
7.3 Cx plan at least
once per phase
(DD, CD,
Construction).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 239
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
Submittal Review Required by Section 11.2, Fundamental:
LEED 11.3 Review submittals
or substitutions for
design deviations
impacting the OPR.

Enhanced:
Thorough review of
relevant building
system submissions
for compliance with
the Design
Documents and
OPR.
Schedule Required Section 7.2.3.d Fundamental:
relative to Ensure Cx
other tasks requirements/
milestones are
included in the
project construction
schedule.

Enhanced:
Detailed description
of Cx activities and
a schedule of
activities. Schedule
is included in the Cx
plan.
Field Reviews Section Section 12.2.6 Fundamental:
4.2.5.1 Minimum of one site
visit to verify Cx
readiness

Enhanced:
Minimum of one site
visit to review
contractor
completed
construction
checklists. A
checklist for each
major system type
should be reviewed
during the site visit.
Testing Section Section 12.2.6 Fundamental and
(Review/witness 4.2.5.2 Enhanced:
performance Minimum of one site
testing) visit to witness
execution of
functional-

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 240
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
performance
testing, per the
scope of the
project.

Meetings Required by Required by Fundamental and

LEED LEED Enhanced:
Milestone meetings
at 50% and 100%
QA/QC Required by Section Fundamental:
Documentation LEED 12.2.2a, Sample review of
(Checklist and 12.2.6.c completed
Tests) contractor
documentation (i.e.,
10%)

Enhanced:
Additional reviews
of completed
contractor
documentation (i.e.,
25%)
Track identified 4.2.5.1, Section 13.2, Fundamental:
issues to resolution 4.2.5.2 13.3 Include Issues and
(Issues/Resolution Resolution (I/R) Log
Log) in the preliminary
Cx r Report.

Enhanced:
Maintain a formal
I/R log throughout
the project until the
owner resolves or
accepts all issues.
The final I/R log,
with all items
closed, is included
in the final Cx
rReport.
Systems Manual Not Required Section 14.2, Enhanced:
14.3 Compile the
Systems Manual,
which includes all
information needed
to understand,
operate and
maintain the
building's systems
and assemblies.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 241
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
Operations and Not Required Required for Enhanced:
Maintenance LEED Compile an
Manual Operations and
Maintenance
Manual from
contractor
submissions.
Preliminary 4.2.5.1.2, Section 17.2.1 Fundamental and
Commissioning 4.2.5.2.2 Enhanced:
Report Completion of
LEED Online
documentation as
well as report
summarizing Cx
activities to end of
Construction
Phase, Including
OPR, Cx Plan and
reports.
Occupancy/Operati Review Training 4.5.2.2.2.c.5 Section 15.2, Fundamental:
ons Phase Program- 15.3 Review the training
plan.

Enhanced: Review
the training plan
and confirm that it
has been
implemented.
Include training plan
in the Systems
Manual.
Post-Occupancy Not Required Section 16.2, Enhanced:
Review 16.3 Conduct minimum
of one in person,
post occupancy site
visit with Facility
Maintenance staff
(or similar) prior to
end of the warranty
period.
Final 4.2.5.2.2 Section 17.2.3 Full report
Commissioning summarizing Cx
Report activities, including
Occupancy Phase
activities.
On-going Cx Plan Required for Required for Fundamental and
LEED LEED Enhanced: Provide
an ongoing Cx plan
that allows building
operators to
maintain a

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 242
 Phase Task Descriptions Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
ASHRAE ASHRAE Requirements as
90.1-2019 202-2018 listed
building's high
performance. At
minimum, include a
set of blank forms
for future use by the
O&M team.

Table 2. Building Enclosure (Envelope) Tasks for EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning and
EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning
Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
Phase Task Descriptions ASHRAE ASTM E2947- Requirements as
90.1-2019 2021 listed
Identification of CxP Section Section 5.1.1, Fundamental: By
4.2.5.2, with with timing the end of design
timing required required by development
by LEED LEED phase.

Enhanced: During
predesign or very
early in the design
phase.
Predesign Assist in Required by Section 6.3 Fundamental and
(or immediately Development/Revie LEED Enhanced: Include
upon CxP w and Update building envelope
engagement) Owner's Project requirements in
Requirements OPR. OPR to be
(OPR) to include updated as needed
Envelope during design and
construction
phases.
Design Phase Review Basis of Required by Section 7.2.3 Fundamental and
Design (BOD) LEED Enhanced: Review
BOD for compliance
with OPR related to
building envelope.
Develop BECx Plan Section Section 6.5 Fundamental:
4.2.5.2.1.a 7.3.6 (DD Development of
Section phase) BECx plan.
4.2.5.2.2.a 7.4.5 (CD
phase) Enhanced: Update
9.6 BECx plan at least
(Construction once per phase
Phase) (DD, CD,
Construction).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 243
 Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
Phase Task Descriptions ASHRAE ASTM E2947- Requirements as
90.1-2019 2021 listed
Design Document Section Section 7.1.1 Full Drawing and
Reviews (Design 4.2.5.2.2.b 7.2.3 (SD Specification
Drawings and phase) Review for critical
Specifications) 7.3.4 (DD barrier design and
phase) continuity.
7.4.3 (CD
phase) Fundamental:
Focus on air and
thermal barrier
continuity and
performance.

Enhanced: Review
air, thermal,
moisture and vapor
barrier continuity
and performance.

Each design review

to include issues
log for
tracking/resolution
of issues.

Enhanced: Back-
check review
confirming if
recommendations/c
omments have
been addressed.
Develop BECx Section Section 7.4.6
Specification 4.2.5.1.1
Section
4.2.5.2.1.d
Attend Key Building Required by Section 7.2.2 Fundamental:
Envelope Focused LEED Section 7.3.2 Minimum of one
Design meetings Section 7.4.2 coordination or
design review
meeting to discuss
design review
comments.

Enhanced: Number
of meetings
increased to each
design phase (SD,
DD, CDs)
Update to OPR Required by Sections 7.2.5, Fundamental and
LEED 7.3.5, 7.4.4 Enhanced: Update
OPR as needed

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 244
 Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
Phase Task Descriptions ASHRAE ASTM E2947- Requirements as
90.1-2019 2021 listed
prior to end of
Design Phase.

Construction Phase Pre-Construction Not Required Section 9.2.1 Enhanced: BECxA

Kick-off Meeting to lead meeting,
prepare agenda to
minimally include
discussion on
roles/responsibilitie
s, BECx plan and
spec overview,
schedule, summary
of mock-up, site
reviews and testing.
Review Required by Section 9.2.2 Fundamental:
Submittals/Substitut LEED Review
ions submittals/substituti
ons for design
deviations that
impact the OPR.

Enhanced:
Thorough review of
relevant building
envelope
submissions for
compliance with the
Design Documents
and OPR.
Schedule Required Section 9.2.2.3 Fundamental:
relative to Ensure BECx
other tasks requirements and
milestones are in
the project
Construction
Schedule.

Enhanced: Review
and comment on
Construction
Schedules as
required.
Mock-ups Not Required Section 9.3.3 Enhanced: Attend
mock-up reviews
(laboratory, factory,
Performance mock-
ups (PMU), in place
mock-ups) as
applicable.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 245
 Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
Phase Task Descriptions ASHRAE ASTM E2947- Requirements as
90.1-2019 2021 listed
Field Reviews Section Section 9.3.1 Fundamental:
4.2.5.2.2.c.3 Minimum of one (1)
per envelope
assembly type.

Enhanced: should
include more
regularly scheduled
/periodic site
reviews with a focus
on early reviews
(approx. 10% of
installation).
Testing Section Section 9.3.1 Fundamental: N/A
(Review/witness 4.2.5.2.2.c.3
performance Enhanced:
testing) Witnessing a
sampling of
envelope tests. May
also include
laboratory and
mockup testing.
Meetings Required by Section 9.3.4 Fundamental:
LEED Milestone meetings
at 50% and 100%.

Enhanced:
Additional milestone
meetings (i.e., 25%,
50%, 75% and
100% of envelope
schedule minimum).
QA/QC Required by Section 9.2.2 Fundamental:
Documentation LEED Sampling review of
(contractor's building envelope
checklists) contractor
checklists (i.e.,
10%).

Enhanced: Review
a minimum of 25%
sampling of installer
checklists.
Operations and Not Required Section 9.4 Confirm compliance
Maintenance with OPR, BOD and
Manual BECx Plan.
Construction Phase Section Section 9.7 Fundamental and
BECx Report 4.2.5.2.2.c Enhanced:
Completion of
LEED Online
documentation as

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 246
 Fundamental Enhanced Minimum
Phase Task Descriptions ASHRAE ASTM E2947- Requirements as
90.1-2019 2021 listed
well as report
summarizing BECx
activities to end of
Construction
Phase, Including
OPR, BECx Plan
and reports.
Occupancy/Operat Review Building 4.5.2.2.2.c.5 Section 10.2 Review that training
ions Phase Envelope Training plan has been
Program implemented.
Post-Occupancy Not Required Section 10.3 Enhanced:
Review Conduct minimum
of one in-person
post occupancy site
visit with Facility
Maintenance staff
(or similar) before
the end of envelope
warranty period.
Final BECx Report Section Section 10.1 Full report
4.2.5.2.2.d summarizing BECx
activities, including
Occupancy Phase
activities.
On-going BECx Not Required Section 10.4 Enhanced:
Plan Contribute to
development of
Preventative
Maintenance Plan
for Building
Envelope (i.e., On-
Going BECx Plan)
for owner.

Core and Shell

For LEED BD+C: Core and Shell projects, complete commissioning for systems within the core
and shell scope of work. Follow all BD+C: New Construction requirements with the following
guidance.

SCOPE OF WORK
The commissioning scope of work for a Core and Shell project varies depending on the energy
and water-using systems included in the design. For example, a project may consist of base
building systems, like air-source heat pumps and central air handling units. Alternatively, the
developer may limit the scope of work and provide a cold shell with no central HVAC equipment
and minimal levels of lighting. Per the project scope, the CxP must verify and test systems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 247
DESIGN REVIEW FOR CORE AND SHELL PROJECTS
During the design reviews, include review comments on LEED BD+C: Core and Shell systems
and how any incomplete system can meet ASHRAE Standard 90.1 requirements for tenant fit-
outs. This includes both energy efficiency measures and tenant metering requirements.

FINAL COMMISSIONING REPORT

Along with the required elements listed in the Final Commissioning Report section above,
identify and defer any tests until base building systems connect with future tenant equipment
(e.g., a central VAV air handling unit with controls testing that must be deferred until after
installing tenant VAV terminal equipment).

TENANT GUIDELINES FOR COMMISSIONING

IPp4: Tenant Guidelines allow owners to inform all tenants of the building's sustainable design
and construction features. Project teams are encouraged to include a section on commissioning
addressing any interconnection between base building and tenant-installed systems.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Documentation
types
All All If the report is a draft, include a plan for the completion of
commissioning and training, including climatic and other conditions
required for performance of any deferred tests.
Confirmation of compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1
commissioning requirements for building systems, controls, and the
building envelope (Section 4.2.5.2 exceptions shall not apply).
Confirmation of design phase meeting.
Provide Commissioning Plan and sample FPT Test scripts (one sample
per discipline).
Owner’s Project Requirements and BOD
Identification of Commissioning Provider including key personnel (CxP)
and Verification and Testing (V&T) providers (as applicable).
Qualifications of CxP and V&T providers.
Ongoing Cx Plan (post-occupancy).
Confirmation of construction phase milestone meetings at 50% and
100% completion.
Confirmation that submittals were reviewed and at least 10% of the
contractor’s documents were QA/QC’d

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 248
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 commissioning requirements for building systems,
controls, and the building envelope, with the following additional provisions:
• The referenced version of Standard 90.1 with errata shall be:
o 2019 for projects registered before January 1, 2028.
o 2022 for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028.
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• IECC 2021, (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024, (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P1)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 249
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

ENERGY METERING AND REPORTING

EAp4
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To support energy management practices and facilitate identification of ongoing opportunities for
energy and greenhouse gas emissions savings by tracking and reporting building energy use
and demand.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Energy Monitoring and Recording
AND
Report Energy Data

Comply with the following requirements:

Energy Monitoring and Recording

• Install (or use existing) devices to monitor and record energy use per
ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1. The version of Standard 90.1 shall be:
o 2019 or later for projects registered before January 1, 2028.
o 2022 or later for projects registered on or after January 1, 2028.
• Install (or use existing) devices to monitor and record energy use for the following,
meeting the same monitoring and reporting requirements as required in ASHRAE for
electrical end uses:
o On-site renewable electricity generation
• Major renovations and buildings eligible for exceptions to ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section
10.4.6, or 90.1-2022, Section 10.4.7, must install measurement devices capable of
monitoring whole-building energy use for each building energy source and building peak
electricity demand at least monthly.

AND

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 250
Report Energy Data
Commit to reporting the following data to USGBC at least annually: monthly energy data for 12
consecutive months of total energy consumption for each energy source, on-site renewable
energy generation, and peak electrical demand. This commitment must carry forward for five
years or until the building changes ownership or lessee.

Exception for Core and Shell projects

Future tenant utility services and meters that will be installed in the tenant
scope of work.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The prerequisite requires the installation of devices to monitor and record monthly energy use
per energy source and peak electric demand and to report monthly energy use data to USGBC
post-occupancy for all buildings.

New construction projects subject to the ASHRAE Standard 90.1 provisions referenced by this
prerequisite must also provide metering and sub-metering of electricity at 15-minute intervals,
and additional reporting capabilities. Electrical system designers should evaluate these
requirements early in the project design to ensure the electrical distribution, circuitry, wiring
necessary to accommodate the required submetering. Addressing these requirements too late
in the design can substantially escalate costs.

Record and report data so owners and facility managers can access and use it to make
informed decisions on energy efficiency and carbon emission reduction strategies.

Refer to Table 1 for a summary of the prerequisite energy metering and reporting requirements.

Table 1. Summary of LEED v5 EAp4: energy metering and reporting requirements

Projects subject to ASHRAE 90.1-2010 monitoring and reporting
requirements
Referenced 90.1 New Tenant Small
Sections buildings spaces buildings and
OR (except >= 10,000 major
LEED-specific small sq. ft. renovations
requirements buildings) (excludes
shared LEED-
building specific
systems) requirements
Monitoring
Total energy use by energy 90.1-2019 10.4.6.1 Monthly Monthly
source 90.1-2022 10.4.7.1

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 251
 Projects subject to ASHRAE 90.1-2010 monitoring and reporting
requirements
Referenced 90.1 New Tenant Small
Sections buildings spaces buildings and
OR (except >= 10,000 major
LEED-specific small sq. ft. renovations
requirements buildings) (excludes
shared LEED-
building specific
systems) requirements
(except residential dwelling
units)
• natural gas
• fuel oil
• propane
• district chilled water
• district steam
• district hot water
Total Electricity 90.1-2019 8.4.3.1 15-minute 15-minute Monthly
(except residential dwelling 90.1-2022 8.4.3.1
units)
Sub-metered electricity 90.1-2019 8.4.3.1 15-minute 15-minute N/A
(except residential dwelling 90.1-2022 8.4.3.1
units)
• HVAC
• Interior lighting
• Exterior lighting
• Receptacle circuits
• Refrigeration systems
(90.1-2022)
Large chilled water plant 90.1-2019 6.4.3.11 15-minute 15-minute
electricity and efficiency in 90.1-2022 6.4.3.11
kW/ton
On-site renewable LEED-Specific 15-minute Monthly
electricity
Reporting
Commit to annually sharing LEED-Specific x x
monthly data with USGBC
for:
• Energy consumption by
energy source
• On-site renewable
energy generation
• Peak electrical demand
Capable of creating user 90.1-2019 10.4.6.2 x x
reports for consumption and 90.1-2022 10.7.4.2
demand at least hourly,
daily, monthly, and annually,
with a system capable of
maintaining all data
collected for 36 months.
Visual display

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 252
 Projects subject to ASHRAE 90.1-2010 monitoring and reporting
requirements
Referenced 90.1 New Tenant Small
Sections buildings spaces buildings and
OR (except >= 10,000 major
LEED-specific small sq. ft. renovations
requirements buildings) (excludes
shared LEED-
building specific
systems) requirements
Graphical display of 90.1-2019 8.4.3 x
electricity data for buildings 90.1-2022 8.4.3
with any of the following:
• AHUs with fans > 10 hp
• Chilled water plants
• Hot water plants
Graphical display of chilled 90.1-2019 x
water plant data for large 6.3.4.11.2
chilled water plants 90.1-2022
6.3.4.11.2
NOTE: Small buildings refer to commercial buildings less than 25,000 sq. ft. (2,323 sq. m.) or residential projects with less than
10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) of common space. All other new buildings are subject to ASHRAE 90.1 monitoring and reporting
requirements.

Energy Monitoring and Recording

SMALL BUILDINGS AND MAJOR RENOVATIONS
ASHRAE 90.1 energy monitoring and reporting requirements don’t apply to major renovations
and small buildings eligible for exceptions to ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 10.4.6 or ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 10.4.7, including commercial buildings under 25,000 sq. ft. (2,323 sq. m.),
and new residential buildings with less than 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) of common space.

For these project applications, provide measurement devices capable of monitoring whole-
building energy use for each building energy source and building peak electricity demand at
least monthly. The prerequisite compliance doesn’t require further submetering or interval
metering.

Provide monitoring for all energy sources supplied to the project from outside the building
boundary, including utility usage and energy supplied from a campus utility plant or adjacent
building.

ASHRAE STANDARD 90.1 MONITORING AND RECORDING REQUIREMENTS

All other projects must comply with ASHRAE Standard 90.1 energy monitoring and recording
requirements:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 253
Whole-Building Energy Monitoring Requirements
Electricity meters must be capable of metering and recording total project electricity use at 15-
minute intervals. Refer to ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 8.4.3.1.

For all other fuels, provide measurement devices capable of monitoring whole-building energy
use for each building energy source at least monthly. Include all energy sources supplied to the
building from outside the project boundary. Refer to ASHRAE 90.1-2019 10.4.6.1 or ASHRAE
90.1-2022 10.4.7.1.

Electricity Submetering Requirements (ASHRAE 90.1, Section 8.4.3.1)

Projects must submeter end-use electricity data at 15-minute intervals for HVAC, interior
lighting, exterior lighting, and receptacle; and if using ASHRAE 90.1-2022 - refrigeration
systems.

Combine electricity end-uses less than 10% of the whole-building electrical load with other
categories. For example, if exterior lighting loads are less than 10% of the whole-building load,
teams can report exterior lighting with interior lighting. Use the energy end-use estimation from
EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan to determine applicable loads.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Tenant Electricity Submetering (ASHRAE 90.1, Section 8.4.3.1)
Tenant spaces larger than 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) require electricity submetering at 15-
minute intervals, both for total tenant electricity use, and for direct tenant loads for HVAC,
interior lighting, exterior lighting, receptacle, and if using ASHRAE 90.1-2022 - refrigeration
systems. For acceptable grouping of end-uses, reference the building-level 10% exception.

Exclude electricity from shared HVAC equipment (e.g., a central air handling unit providing
supply air to the tenant space) when determining the tenant submetering requirements. The
estimated load must include electricity for system components in the tenant space such as fan
coil units and variable air volume (VAV) terminals.

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Reporting

Refer to ASHRAE 90.1, Sections 8.4.3.2 and 90.1-2019 10.4.6.1 or 90.1-2022 10.4.7.1.

The monitoring system must include the capability to report total and sub-metered electricity
data at least hourly, daily, monthly, and annually, and the capability of reporting whole-building

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 254
energy consumption monthly and annually, with system capable of maintaining all data collected
for 36 months.

The monitoring system must include functionality for tenants to access their electricity data.

Use third-party energy monitoring services or applications to comply with the data reporting and
storage requirements.

Graphically display electricity data in buildings that are required to have digital control systems
(buildings with air handling units with fans > 10 hp (7.5 kW), chilled water plants, or hot water
plants).

ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Version

Projects registered before January 1, 2028, must reference the energy monitoring and recording
requirements in ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019 or later. Projects registered on or after January 1,
2028, must use the slightly augmented energy monitoring and recording requirements from
ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022. For example, ASHRAE 90.1-2022 adds a submetering
requirement for refrigeration systems.

Additional considerations
Teams that use a single version of ASHRAE Standard 90.1 for EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency, EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, and EAp4:
Energy Metering and Reporting can streamline documentation efforts.

International Energy Conservation Codes (IECC) Equivalent Standard

IECC is an approved equivalent standard for this prerequisite. IECC 2021 requirements can
replace ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2019. IECC 2024 requirements can replace ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2022.

On-site renewable energy

All projects shall separately monitor on-site renewable energy generation. Projects subject to
ASHRAE Standard 90.1 monitoring and recording requirements must record renewable
electricity data in 15-minute intervals. Major renovations or small buildings eligible for
exceptions to ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 10.4.6 or ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 10.4.7
require only monthly data collection.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 255
Energy use on a shared site
Projects in a campus application or shared site can address site lighting or other site energy use
within the project’s metered data or in a separate meter dedicated to the campus. For example,
if there is a shared parking lot with exterior lighting, project teams can include metered data
from all exterior lighting within the project’s reported data. Teams can exclude exterior lighting if
they confirm that the campus energy meter reports the required data.

District heating and district cooling sources supplied from outside the project boundary must be
separately metered for the project and not through a shared campus energy meter.

Additional considerations: EVSE metering recommended

Consider submetering electric vehicle service equipment (EVSE) for vehicle
charging to exclude this energy from the total energy consumption modeled
for EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency or used to assess compliance for
LEED O+M: Existing Buildings.

Report Energy Data

Report data annually to USGBC for at least five years post-occupancy. Data must include
monthly peak electrical demand and monthly energy consumption from each energy source
(including on-site renewable energy generation). Provide data using the USGBC-provided
platform, which includes third-party interfaces with tools such as ENERGY STAR® Portfolio
Manager.

This valuable data enhances the understanding of building performance for project owners and
managers. It also educates occupants and building users on behaviors that impact energy
consumption, and how positive behavioral changes can create better buildings.

USGBC aims to collect data from all LEED BD+C projects. Comparing data across similar
project types allows for ongoing benchmarking of high-performing buildings within the LEED
portfolio. The data influences refinements and enhancements to future LEED Rating System
requirements. Data shared with USGBC gives critical insight into the industry on the design,
construction, and operation of high-performing buildings.

Core and Shell Projects

ENERGY MONITORING AND RECORDING FOR CORE AND SHELL
Comply with the Energy Monitoring and Recording criteria above for the project scope of work.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 256
Provide meters for each utility connection installed in the project scope, each district energy
source supplied to the project, and all on-site renewable energy.

If the project is a new commercial building that is at least 25,000 sq. ft. (2,323 sq. m.) or a
residential project with at least 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) of common space, comply with the
ASHRAE 90.1 monitoring and reporting provisions:

• At 15-minute intervals, provide electricity metering capable of monitoring total

electrical use associated with the project scope of work. Include all common area
and shared space electrical use, plus electric usage for tenant systems and
equipment installed in the project scope.

• Provide electricity end-use submetering at 15-minute intervals for HVAC, interior

lighting, exterior lighting, and receptacles installed within the project scope. Include
all common area and site energy use, all shared HVAC equipment, and any HVAC,
lighting, or receptacles installed in tenant spaces.

• For each tenant space ≥ 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) with electrical systems in scope,
provide electricity submetering at 15-minute intervals for total tenant electricity in
scope, and for HVAC, lighting, and receptacle end-uses in scope. If the future tenant
configuration is unknown, install the necessary circuitry, wiring, and hardware to
accommodate the required submetering upon tenant buildout.

• Provide required recording and reporting functionality. If networking functionality is

not operational upon substantial project completion, design the monitoring system to
comply with the requirements upon activation of networking capabilities.

• If the required monitoring, data storage, and/or reporting functionalities are in the
tenant scope, these may be excluded from the core and shell project scope.

REPORTING FOR CORE AND SHELL

Annually report energy data to USGBC for at least five years for the meters controlled by the
owner.

Additional considerations
Teams can report all data, including tenant energy use. However, this is not
required to meet the prerequisite.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 257
Projects pursuing IPc2: Green Leases
Consider including information on how energy consumption for the whole-building energy use
and in common areas is shared with tenants.

Consider requesting annual tenant energy disclosures, even if not pursuing IPc2: Green
Leases.

RESIDENTIAL
The following are acceptable in place of reporting whole-building energy usage to USGBC:

• Provide a separate electric meter for each non-transient dwelling unit.

• Provide central metering per energy source for all common area uses and shared
services. Report this metered data to USGBC.

Additional considerations
It’s encouraged for residential dwelling units to aggregate and report whole-
building energy consumption, including residential dwelling units, when not
precluded by utility service restrictions or regulatory provisions. This data
must be available for residential projects pursuing LEED EB:O+M
certification.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All All Confirmation of compliance with 90.1-2019 monitoring
Construction or 90.1-2022 requirements.
and Documentation showing monitoring and recording
Core and devices of all utilities, including renewable energy,
Shell district energy, electrical plans, schedules, or other
documents that detail the required monitoring and
recording devices.
Evidence of a commitment from the owner or
responsible party that the required energy data will be
shared with USGBC.
List of energy sources delivered to the building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 258
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• IECC 2021, (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2021P3)
• IECC 2024, (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IECC2024P1)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 259
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Prerequisite and Restoration

FUNDAMENTAL REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

EAp5
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To reduce greenhouse gas emissions from refrigerants by accelerating the phaseout of
refrigerants with high global warming potential (GWP) and by reducing refrigerant leakage.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Option 1. No Refrigerants
OR
Option 2. Refrigerants

Option 1. No Refrigerants
Do not use refrigerants in the project.

OR

Option 2. Refrigerants
Meet the following requirements:

• Complete refrigerant inventory. Complete an inventory of the refrigerant-containing

equipment installed within the project scope of work and any existing equipment owned
by the building owner. The inventory shall include the refrigerant type, GWP, amounts of
refrigerants contained in each, and the total GWP of all refrigerants.
• Do not use hydrochlorofluorocarbon refrigerants in new equipment.
• Evaluate available alternatives during the design process for any refrigerants with GWP
> 700.
• Leak check and repair. Prior to substantial completion, check both new and existing
refrigerant-containing equipment for refrigerant leaks and repair all identified leaks. For
systems with field-assembled joints, perform a leak check, vacuum check, and pressure
check prior to charging with refrigerant.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 260
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Option 1 applies only to projects without refrigerants. Projects with refrigerants must follow
Option 2.

Option 1. No Refrigerants
Buildings with no refrigerant-containing equipment automatically meet the prerequisite.
Option 1 criteria does not preclude the use of equipment containing less than 0.5 lbs. (225 g),
such as standard residential refrigerators, small wine coolers, or portable space dehumidifiers.

OR

Option 2. Refrigerants
Teams pursuing this path must avoid hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) refrigerants, analyze
alternatives for refrigerants with a Global Warming Potential (GWP) greater than 700, inventory
all refrigerant-using equipment, and ensure no leaks from refrigerant-containing equipment.

NO HYDROCHLOROFLUOROCARBON (HCFC) REFRIGERANTS

Projects must not use HCFC refrigerants, which cause damage to the ozone layer and often
have very high global warming potential (GWP).

Developed and developing countries

In developed countries, government regulations have already phased out
HCFC refrigerants for new equipment per the Kigali Amendment to the
Montreal Protocol.

In developing countries, teams must take precautions to limit selections to

equipment that does not use HCFCs. Equipment specifications must disallow
HCFCs such as R-22 used in air conditioners or R-123 commonly used in
chillers.

EVALUATION OF ALTERNATIVE REFRIGERANTS

Global warming potential (GWP) measures the relative contribution of a substance toward
heating the atmosphere compared to the same mass of carbon dioxide (CO2). For example, R-
410A with a GWP of 2,088 traps 2,088 times more heat in the atmosphere than CO2.
This prerequisite references 100-year GWPs assessed in accordance with the
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) Fourth Assessment Report or later.
Reviewing refrigerant properties during the design process allows teams to address high GWP
refrigerants and find suitable alternatives before construction begins. As the industry continues

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 261
developing new alternative refrigerants, projects can find cost-effective solutions that meet
efficiency and environmental goals.

EQUIPMENT WITH GWP > 700

During the design process, if the specifications reference equipment with refrigerant GWP
exceeding 700 or do not specify the refrigerant(s) to use, develop a list of alternative equipment
options with refrigerant GWP less than or equal to 700. Review all proposed options with the
owner.

Refrigerant properties vary in efficiency, toxicity, flammability, volumetric capacity, and pressure
ratings. Not all refrigerants are interchangeable within a piece of equipment or system.
Therefore, completing this evaluation early in design provides the most benefit.

For applications where a GWP less than 700 is impractical, consider using reclaimed refrigerant
instead of newly manufactured virgin refrigerant to limit the overall impact.

• Table 1 provides a common list of refrigerants and their GWP, adapted from the Net Zero
Carbon Guide and The Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Institute of Canada
(HRAI).

Table 1. Common refrigerants and their applications

Refrigerant Classification GWP Common system applications
R404A HFC blend 3,920 Low-medium temperature commercial refrigeration
Low-medium temperature industrial refrigeration
Ice Machines
R410A HFC 2,088 Conventional VRF systems
Heat pumps
Chillers
R22 HCFC 1,810 Commercial refrigeration
Industrial refrigeration
Commercial air conditioning
Residential air conditioning
R134a HFC 1,430 Heat pumps
Chillers
R32 HFC 633 Hybrid VRF systems
Heat pumps
Chillers
R513A HFO 573 Medium temperature commercial refrigeration
Medium temperature industrial refrigeration
Chillers
Air conditioning units
Heat pumps
R600 HC 4 Heat pumps
(Butane) Chillers

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 262
 Refrigerant Classification GWP Common system applications
R290 Natural 3 Commercial Refrigeration
(Propane) Heat Pumps
Chillers
R1234ze HFO <1 Heat Pumps
Chillers
R744 (CO2) Natural 1 Heat Pumps
R717 (NH4, Natural 0 Heat Pumps
ammonia)

EQUIPMENT INVENTORY
Project teams must identify all refrigerant-containing equipment included in the scope of work,
including any existing equipment within the project boundary owned or controlled by the project
owner and/or facilities manager. Equipment that contains less than 0.5 pounds (225 grams) of
refrigerant, such as standard residential refrigerators in dwelling units, can be excluded from the
calculations.

Manage the inventory during the Construction Phase. If equipment substitutions occurred during
the submittal and procurement phases, update the inventory to reflect the actual installed
equipment.

Table 2 is a sample and non-comprehensive list of the types of refrigerant-using equipment that
a project’s scope of work may include.

Additional considerations: Equipment inventory

Completing the inventory in the Construction Documents Phase provides
owners and design professionals with a complete understanding of the future
climate impacts.

Table 2. Refrigerant-containing equipment

Application Equipment/System Type
HVAC, Space Cooling Equipment Stationary air conditioners and heat pump
Chillers
Computer room air conditioning (CRAC) units
Service Water Heaters Heat pump service water heaters
Retail Food Refrigeration
Cold Storage
Commercial Vending Machines
Ice Machines
Industrial Process Refrigeration Process chillers
Ice rink chillers
Other process refrigeration

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 263
Data Collection
Document the refrigerant properties for each type of equipment, including type of refrigerant,
refrigerant GWP (GWPREFRIGERANT), and refrigerant charge (Rc).

When the project design includes field-assembled refrigerant piping with long pipe lengths or
large pressure drops (e.g., variable refrigerant flow (VRF) systems, industrial process
equipment), teams must account for additional required Rc in the calculations per the
manufacturer’s specifications or confirm that the manufacturer’s default charge or referenced
submittals already account for this additional charge.

Calculate the total equipment GWP for each equipment using Equation 1.

Equation 1. GWPEQUIPMENT calculation

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐸𝑄𝑈𝐼𝑃𝑀𝐸𝑁𝑇 = 𝑅𝐶 × 𝐺𝑊𝑃𝑅𝐸𝐹𝑅𝐼𝐺𝐸𝑅𝐴𝑁𝑇

The project’s total GWP is the sum of the GWPs for all refrigerant-using equipment in the
project:

Equation 2. GWPTOTAL calculation

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿 = ∑ 𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐸𝑄𝑈𝐼𝑃𝑀𝐸𝑁𝑇

Determine the weighted average GWP for the project by dividing the project’s total GWP by the
sum of Refrigerant Charge for all equipment:

Equation 3. Weighted average GWP calculation

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝑇𝑂𝑇𝐴𝐿
𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡𝑒𝑑 a𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐺𝑊𝑃 =
𝛴𝑅𝐶

LEAK CHECK AND REPAIR

Perform leak checks for all refrigerant-containing equipment in the project, including new and
existing equipment. Field-installed piping requires vacuum and pressure testing during the
installation process per the International Mechanical Code Chapter 11, EPA Clean Air Act
Section 608, European Union F-Gas Regulations, or similar referenced standards.

For existing systems or self-contained systems, leak check inspections may leverage electronic
leak detectors, data from the Building Automation System, visual inspections for oil residue on

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 264
joints or for bubbling from leaks after applying soapy water, audible detection of hissing or
bubbling sounds, and/or pressure testing.

Renovation Projects
For major renovations, properly decommission refrigerant-containing equipment that has been
removed or disposed of during construction. The U.S. EPA regulations (40 CFR Part 82,
Subpart F) require refrigerant recovery and proper recycling, reclamation, or destruction of
refrigerants classified as ozone-depleting substances. International projects must comply with
other regional regulations, like the European Union F-gas regulation.

• Recovery. Extract all refrigerant from the equipment, including refrigerant in refrigerant
piping. Store in a leak-free container.
• Disposal options. Recycle, reclaim, or destroy the recovered refrigerant as follows:
o Recycling. Clean the refrigerant and reuse it on-site, in other equipment owned by
the same owner.
o Reclamation. Clean the refrigerant for resale. The refrigerant must meet specific
purity requirements. Reclamation efforts commonly occur in a dedicated processing
facility.
o Destruction. Incineration or other technologies break down the refrigerants into less
harmful components that will not contribute to ozone depletion or high GWP.

Core and Shell only

For Option 2, address all refrigerant-containing equipment in the Core and Shell
scope of work and any existing equipment within the boundary owned or
controlled by the project owner and/or facilities manager. The inventory may
exclude tenant equipment not installed as part of the Core and Shell scope of
work.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Path Documentation
types
New Option 1. No All Description of the cooling and heating systems used for
Construction Refrigerants the project. Confirmation that no refrigerants are used
and within the project boundary and how the project meets
Core and cooling, heating, and other project loads without
Shell refrigerants.
Option 2. All Narrative summarizing the evaluation of available
Refrigerants alternatives for any refrigerant with a GWP >700.
Include a list of the original selected refrigerants as
compared to the alternatives considered.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 265
 Project Options Path Documentation
types
Refrigerant inventory with complete list of all
refrigerant-containing equipment. Each piece of
equipment shall include the equipment type, refrigerant
type, GWP, and Rc.
Total GWP of all refrigerants (Equation 2 from EAp5:
Fundamental Refrigerant Management).
Narrative describing the refrigerant leak check
evaluation. Include confirmation that the leak check
has occurred for all equipment.
Attestation that all leaks are repaired prior to charging
with refrigerant.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• EPA 2023 AIM ACT Technology Transitions Rule, (epa.gov/climate-hfcs-
reduction/regulatory-actions-technology-transitions)
• EPA regulations - 40 CFR Part 82, Subpart F, (ecfr.gov/current/title-40/chapter-I/subchapter-
C/part-82/subpart-F)
• International Mechanical Code Chapter 11, (codes.iccsafe.org/content/IMC2021P3)
• EPA Clean Air Act Section 608, (epa.gov/section608/section-608-clean-air-act)
• European Union F-Gas Regulations, (eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 266
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ELECTRIFICATION
EAc1
New Construction (1–5 points): 5 points are required for LEED BD+C: New Construction
Platinum projects
Core and Shell (1–4 points): 4 points are required for LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Platinum
projects

INTENT
To encourage buildings to be designed so they do not depend on burning fuel on-site, leading to
better indoor and outdoor air quality and to low carbon operations as the grid decarbonizes.

REQUIREMENTS: NEW CONSTRUCTION

Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–5
Option 1. No On-Site Combustion 5
OR
Option 2. No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures 1–4
Path 1. Space Heating 2
AND/OR
Path 2. Service Water Heating 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Cooking and Other Process Loads 1

Option 1. No On-site Combustion (5 points)

Design and operate the project from start-up with no on-site combustion except for emergency
support systems.

Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and service water heating
(SWH) must be at least 1.8 coefficient of performance (COP).

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2.

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures.
• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water
heater criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 267
OR

Option 2. No On-site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures (1–4 points)

Pursue any combination of the following paths for a maximum of 4 points:

PATH 1. SPACE HEATING (2 POINTS)

Design space heating to be capable of operating without on-site combustion except in low
temperatures. Projects in climate zones 3 and above must have a weighted average space
heating equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Supplemental or auxiliary heating equipment designed only for operation at low

temperatures.

AND/OR

PATH 2. SERVICE WATER HEATING (1 POINT)

Design service water heating systems to be capable of operating without on-site combustion
except at low temperatures. Projects with total service water heating capacity exceeding 34,000
Btu/hr (10 kW) must have a weighted average service hot water equipment efficiency of at least
1.8 COP OR domestic hot water solar fraction of at least 0.4.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water heater
criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions.
• Supplemental or auxiliary heating equipment designed only for operation at low
temperatures.

AND/OR

PATH 3. COOKING AND OTHER PROCESS LOADS (1 POINT)

Design cooking, laundry, process equipment, and on-site power generation except emergency
support systems to be capable of operating without on-site combustion (projects that do not
have these systems automatically earn this point).

The following equipment may be excluded:

• Process heating equipment designed for operation at low temperatures.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 268
Equipment efficiency: Determine weighted average COP using either of the following:

• Equipment efficiencies at rated conditions: For equipment with multiple rated

conditions, use the rating closest to 17°F (–9°C) OA db, 32°F (0°C) entering liquid
temperature, or 44°F (6°C) heating source leaving liquid temperature.
• Annual average COP calculated with an energy simulation.

District energy: Projects with district energy must comply with the requirements of this credit at
the district facility or see additional guidance for interpretation of credit requirements.

Fuel cells: Fuel cells using fossil fuel are ineligible for credit.

Low temperatures: “Low temperatures” refer to outside air dry-bulb temperatures (OA db)
below 20°F (–6.5°C).

REQUIREMENTS: CORE AND SHELL

Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–4
Option 1. Electrification 2–4
Path 1. No On-Site Combustion 3–4
OR
Path 2. No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures 1–3
Case 1. Space Heating 1–2
OR
Case 2. Service Water Heating 1
OR
Path 3. No On-Site Combustion—Limited Scope 1–2
Option 2. Electrification Readiness 1

Option 1. Electrification (2–4 points)

For Paths 1 and 2:

• Include all heating and service hot water systems necessary to meet total building
heating and service water heating load in the calculations of weighted average COP.
• Future heating or service water heating systems must be included in the calculations
with a COP of 1.0.
• Future equipment may be excluded from the calculations and deemed as compliant
when the applicable building code, or construction drawings for projects with
tenancy, confirms a weighted average COP of at least 1.8 for future installed
equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 269
PATH 1. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION (3–4 POINTS)
Design and operate the project from start-up with no on-site combustion except for emergency
support systems.

Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and service water heating
must be at least 1.8 COP for 4 points and at least 1.3 COP for 3 points.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2.

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures.
• Service hot water heating (SWH) equipment with a total project SWH capacity less
than 34,000 Btu/hr (10 kW).
• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water
heater criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions.

OR

PATH 2. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION EXCEPT AT LOW TEMPERATURES (1–3

POINTS)
Pursue any combination of the following cases for a maximum of 3 points:

Case 1. Space Heating (1–2 points)

Design space heating to be capable of operating without on-site combustion except at low
temperatures. Projects must have a weighted average space heating equipment efficiency of at
least 1.8 COP for 2 points and 1.3 COP for 1 point.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2

• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures

Case 2. Service Water Heating (1 point)

Design service water heating systems to be capable of operating without on-site combustion
except at low temperatures. Projects with total service water heating capacity exceeding 34,000
Btu/hr (10 kW) must have a weighted average service hot water equipment efficiency of at least
1.8 COP OR domestic hot water solar fraction of at least 0.4.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 270
 • SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water
heater criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions.
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures.

OR

PATH 3. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION—LIMITED SCOPE (1–2 POINTS)

Do not install on-site combustion equipment in the project except for emergency support
systems.

Combined weighted average equipment efficiency for space heating and service water heating
must be at least 1.8 COP. Points are awarded per Table 1 based on the qualifying minimum
project scope of work.

The following equipment may be excluded from the COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2.
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at low temperatures.
• Service hot water heating (SWH) equipment with a total project SWH capacity less
than 34,000 Btu/hr (10 kW).
• SWH equipment in nonresidential spaces complying with the point-of-use water
heater criteria in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions.

Table 1. Points for no on-site combustion, limited scope

Minimum Project Scope of Work Points
One or more heating, service water heating, or process heating systems 1
At least 30% of the project’s peak combined heating and service water heating load 2

AND/OR

Option 2. Electrification Readiness (1 point)

Provide building infrastructure that ensures the capability of operating the building without on-
site combustion except at low temperatures, and of installing heating and service water heating
systems that will have a weighted average COP of at least 1.8.

Include the details for electrification readiness in the project plans and the tenant guidelines and
include tenant guidance for designing and installing efficient electrified systems. Provide the
following infrastructure as applicable to the project application, and sized to ensure the
capability to meet the requirements in Table 1:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 271
 • Dedicated physical space for future electric space heating, service water heating, or
process heating equipment. Provide designated spaces of sufficient size for outdoor
heat pump equipment.
• Chase ways with space for refrigerant lines, condensate drainage, or other required
piping.
• When electrical distribution systems are installed within the project scope, provide a
junction box in the same physical space as the space allocated for the future electric
equipment, and dedicated electrical panel space for an appropriately phased branch
circuit sized to accommodate the future electric equipment or appliances to meet the
specified load.
• For portions of the building where ventilation air is not installed within the project
scope of work, provide space and accommodations capable of supporting energy
recovery ventilation for at least 50% of ventilation air.

For all options

Equipment Efficiency

Determine weighted average COP using either of the following:

• Equipment efficiencies at rated conditions:

o For equipment with multiple rated conditions, use the rating closest to 17°F (–9°C)
OA db, 32°F (0°C) entering liquid temperature, or 44°F (6°C) heating source leaving
liquid temperature.
o Annual average COP calculated with an energy simulation.
• District energy: Projects with district energy must comply with the requirements of this
credit at the district facility or see additional guidance for interpretation of credit
requirements.
• Fuel cells: Fuel cells using fossil fuel are ineligible for credit.
• Low temperatures: Low temperatures refer to outside air dry-bulb temperatures (OA
db) below 20°F (–6.5°C).

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONSTRUCTION

This credit rewards decarbonization achieved through electrifying building systems traditionally
fueled with on-site combustion, including space heating, service water heating, cooking, and
other process equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 272
Under Option 1, maximum points are available to projects that fully electrify all building systems.
Option 2 selectively rewards electrification per system category for heating, service water
heating, cooking, and other process loads and affords flexibility for a hybrid design capable of
limiting on-site combustion to low-temperature operation.

For both options, electrified space heating and service water heating equipment must meet
efficiency criteria to limit undue burden on the electric power grid. For further guidance, refer to
the Weighted Average COP section.

Option 1. No On-site Combustion

Electrification
Projects designed to operate entirely without on-site combustion for building energy use or for
district energy supplied to the building offer the most significant emission reduction through
electrification. Projects pursuing this option must eliminate on-site combustion from the building
system design and operations. Refer to the Exemptions section below for limited exceptions.

Efficiency
The combined weighted average equipment efficiency for applicable space heating and service
water heating equipment must be at least 1.8 COP, per the guidance in the Weighted Average
COP section below.

Option 2. No On-site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures

For Option 2, teams may apply any combination of Path 1, Path 2 and Path 3, which separately
address electrification of space heating, service hot water heating, and cooking and other
process systems, respectively.

PATH 1. SPACE HEATING

Electrification
All space heating systems must operate without on-site combustion, except in low-temperature
operating mode at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).

Design electrified space heating equipment with sufficient capacity to meet the entire project
space heating load at the system-, zone- and space-level for outdoor temperatures above 20°F
(-6.5 °C) or the project’s design heating temperature. Hybrid designs with fuel/electric
equipment must have a sequence of operations with at least one all-electric operating mode
above 20°F (-6.5 °C).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 273
Credit achievement is automatic for projects that neither install space heating equipment in the
project scope nor require space heating for occupant thermal comfort.

Efficiency
Projects in climate zones 3 and above must design space heating to achieve a weighted
average equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP. Refer to the Weighted Average COP section
for calculations and exclusions from COP determination.

PATH 2. SERVICE WATER HEATING

Electrification
All service water heating must operate without on-site combustion, except in low-temperature
operating mode at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).

Service water heating supplies hot water for purposes other than space heating and process
applications. It is primarily for handwashing, showering, and cleaning.

Design electrified service water heating equipment with sufficient capacity and distribution
capability to provide all necessary service water heating at outdoor temperatures above 20°F (-
6.5 °C) or the project’s design heating temperature.

Path 2 is unavailable to projects without service water heating.

Efficiency
If the total project service water heating capacity exceeds 34,000 Btu/h (10 kW), design the
service water heating system with efficient heat pump technology to achieve a weighted
average service water heating equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP or generate at least
40% of the building’s total service water heating load with solar thermal energy.

Point-of-use service water heating equipment in non-residential spaces may be excluded from
the weighted average COP determination if it meets ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Section 11.5.2.3.3,
W05, without exceptions.

Refer to the Weighted Average COP section for calculations and exclusions from COP
determination.

PATH 3. COOKING AND OTHER PROCESS LOADS

Electrification
This path encourages design teams to eliminate on-site combustion from cooking, laundry, pool
or spa heating, power generation, and all other process applications.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 274
Other process applications commonly addressed through electrification include process heating,
process drying, pre-conditioned air or 400 Hz systems in airports, and powering of vehicles or
equipment operated exclusively on the project site (e.g., forklifts or golf carts).

All process systems must operate without on-site combustion except in low-temperature
operating mode for outdoor dry-bulb temperatures at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).

Projects automatically comply with Path 3 when electricity powers all building systems and
equipment except space conditioning systems, service water heating systems, and systems
referenced in the Exemptions section below.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: CORE AND SHELL

To achieve full electrification of a core and shell project upon final build-out with efficient heat
pump technologies, the core and shell scope of work must either include the design and
installation of these systems or incorporate electrification readiness strategies to support future
installation of these systems.

The credit rewards projects by the degree of electrification and readiness addressed in the core
and shell scope of work.

Option 1. Electrification
Path 1 and Path 2 require a substantial proportion of heating and service water heating
equipment installed in the project scope of work, included in current tenant construction
drawings, or dictated by local code.

Refer to the Weighted Average COP section for further background and guidance.

PATH 1. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION

Refer to New Construction Option 1 above.

For a Core and Shell project scope that addresses only a portion of combined space heating
and service water heating loads, the 1.3 COP weighted average COP threshold worth three
points is more attainable than the 1.8 COP threshold worth four points.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 275
 Example
A dedicated outside air system with 3.0 COP heat pump supplies 15% of total
combined heating and service water heating required for the project, achieving a
weighted average COP of 1.3. No other systems are in scope.

PATH 2. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION EXCEPT AT LOW TEMPERATURES

Case 1. Space Heating
Refer to New Construction Option 2, Path 1 above.
For a Core and Shell project scope that addresses only a portion of space heating loads, the 1.3
COP weighted average COP threshold worth one point is more attainable than the 1.8 COP
threshold worth two points.

Case 2. Service Water Heating

Refer to New Construction Option 2, Path 2 above.

PATH 3. NO ON-SITE COMBUSTION — LIMITED SCOPE

This path applies to projects that have inadequate scope to achieve points under Path 1 or Path
2.

Projects must fully electrify any space heating or service water heating systems in scope and
achieve a combined weighted average equipment efficiency of at least 1.8 COP for these
systems per the guidance in the Weighted Average COP section below.

Minimum scope must include at least one space heating, service water heating, or process
heating system for one point; and at least 30% of the project’s combined heating and service
water heating load for two points.

Option 2. Electrification Readiness

Electrification of building heating systems directly reduces carbon emissions in buildings. For
Core and Shell projects, the exact project scope may vary, and project teams may only provide
the infrastructure without selecting and installing all heating generation equipment. Under this
circumstance, demonstrate that the provided building infrastructure supports future equipment
that does not rely on combustion for space heating, service water heating, and process heating.
Refer to the rating system language for specific electrification-readiness strategies that must be
included in the project design if applicable to the project application.

Provide tenant guidelines that explain the electrification readiness strategies and address the
design and installation of efficient electrified systems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 276
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: BOTH NEW CONSTRUCTION AND CORE AND
SHELL (ALL OPTIONS)
Weighted Average COP
The minimum weighted average COP criteria is predicated on a design that uses heat pump
technology instead of inefficient electric resistance heating to meet most of the project’s space
heating and service water heating loads. This COP criteria limits increased grid peak demand
associated with electrification.

EXCLUSIONS FROM WEIGHTED AVERAGE COP DETERMINATION

Optionally exclude the following equipment from the weighted average COP determination:

• Space heating equipment in climate zones 0–2. This equipment is not required
because electric resistance heating contributes much less to peak grid load in hot
climates than in cooler climates. Refer to ASHRAE Standard 169, Climatic Data for
Building Design Standards92 to determine the project’s climate zone.
• Supplemental heating equipment designed only for operation at or below 20°F (-6.5 °C).
• This equipment can skew the average efficiencies calculated using capacity-weightings
of rated efficiencies. This exclusion applies to supplemental or auxiliary electric heating
used for space heating or service water heating. It is also fuel for low-temperature
operation for space heating or service water heating in Option 2 (Core and Shell Option
1, Path 2).
• Point of use service water heating equipment in non-residential spaces meeting
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.3.3, W05, without exceptions. Electric point-of-use
water heaters are often more appropriate than centralized heat pump equipment and
negligibly increase peak electric demand for non-residential projects with low service
water heating demand distributed throughout the building. Therefore, teams may
exclude point-of-use water heaters in non-residential spaces from the COP
determination if they comply with ASHRAE 90.1-2022, 11.5.2.3.3, W05 without
exception.
• Non-residential service water heating equipment that does not comply with the ASHRAE
90.1-2022 11.5.2.3.3 criteria must be included in determining the weighted average COP.
For example, storage water heaters supplying showers or commercial kitchen
operations.

92 “ASHRAE Standard 169 Climatic Data For Building Design Standards”, ASHRAE, (2021),
https://www.ashrae.org/file%20library/technical%20resources/standards%20and%20guidelines/standards%20addenda/169_2020_a
_20211029.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 277
 • This exception does not apply to equipment in residential spaces due to higher service
water heating demand for these space types.
• Service water heating equipment for projects with a total service water heating capacity
of less than 34,000 Btu/h (10 kW). For New Construction, this refers to the installed
capacity. For Core and Shell, this refers to the total capacity necessary to meet project
loads, regardless of whether the equipment is in the project scope.

For Core and Shell, future equipment where applicable building code or construction drawings
for projects with tenancy confirm a weighted average COP of at least 1.8.

Projects don’t need to calculate the weighted average COP if all equipment meets one of the
criteria above. For example, there is no required minimum COP for a non-residential project in
climate zone 1 with point-of-use water heating for 100% of its service water heating load per
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 11.5.2.3.3.

When installing heat pump space heating for a project in climate zones 0–2 or heat pump
service water heating is installed for projects with a total service water heating capacity of less
than 34,000 Btu/h (10 kW), the analyst may include all heating and service water heating
equipment in the calculations to demonstrate the required COP.

INCLUDED EQUIPMENT FOR WEIGHTED AVERAGE COP DETERMINATION

• Include all equipment not specifically excluded above in the weighted average COP
determination.
• Option 1. No On-site Combustion. (Core and Shell Option 1, Path 1) Include all space
heating and service water heating not specifically excluded above.
• Option 2. No On-site Combustion. (Core and Shell Option 1, Path 2)
o Path 1. Space Heating. (Core and Shell, Case 1) Include all space heating
equipment not specifically excluded above.
o Path 2. Service Water Heating. (Core and Shell, Case 2). Include all service water
heating equipment not specifically excluded above.
• Projects pursuing both Path 1 and Path 2 may optionally show a combined weighted
average equipment efficiency for space heating and service water heating of at least 1.8
COP rather than a weighted average COP per system.
• Core and Shell Option 1, Path 3. No On-Site Combustion — Limited Scope. Include
all space heating and service water heating equipment included in the project scope of
work not specifically excluded above.

For New Construction, assess the weighted average COP based on total installed equipment
capacity.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 278
 Core and Shell only

Path 1. No On-site Combustion and Path 2. No On-site Combustion Except

at Low Temperatures. Assess weighted average COP based on the total
capacity necessary to meet project loads, regardless of whether the project
scope installs the equipment. Use a COP of 1.0 for future heating or service
water heating capacity that is not in the project scope.

Path 3. No On-Site Combustion — Limited Scope. Assess weighted average

COP based on the project scope of work.

METHODOLOGIES FOR WEIGHTED AVERAGE COP DETERMINATION

Projects may determine weighted average COP using a streamlined method, rated capacities,
or energy simulation.

Method 1. Streamlined Weighted Average COP Determination

The streamlined method conservatively estimates compliance based on ASHRAE 90.1, Section
6.8 mandatory rated heating efficiencies of at least 2.0 COP for heat pumps and heat recovery
chillers.

• To confirm a weighted average COP of at least 1.8, document that at least 80% of
equipment capacity consists of heat pumps, heat recovery chillers, or solar heating.
• To confirm a weighted average COP of at least 1.3, document that at least 30% of
equipment capacity consists of heat pumps, heat recovery chillers, or solar heating.

For New Construction and Core and Shell Path 3, assess compliance based on total installed
equipment capacity.

For Core and Shell Paths 1 and 2, assess compliance based on the total capacity necessary to
meet project loads.

Method 2. Energy Simulation

Calculate the COP by dividing total annual heating generation by total annual heating energy
consumption (using consistent units in numerator and denominator) per Equation 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 279
Equation 1. COP calculation using energy simulation data
T𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑔𝑒𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛
𝐶𝑂𝑃 =
T𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑛𝑛𝑢𝑎𝑙 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑢𝑚𝑝𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛

Include all applicable space heating and service water heating energy used at the plant, system,
and zone levels.

Projects may use any of the following to document the weighted average COP:

• Modeling used for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency

o ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Performance Rating Method, proposed model.
o ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Cost Budget Method design energy cost model.
o Total System Performance Ratio (TSPR). Simplified model from ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Section 6.6.2.2 Mechanical System Performance Rating Method. This only shows
space heating efficiency. Demonstrate service water heating compliance using one
of the other methods.
• Energy simulation used to document local code compliance.
• Simplified energy simulation used to estimate energy consumption for EAp1: Operational
Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan, provided the model inputs include
sufficient detail relevant to equipment efficiencies, capacities, and loads estimations.

For Core and Shell Paths 1 and 2, modifications to these models or post-processing of modeled
results may be necessary to show a COP of 1.0 for all future capacities not in the project scope
of work.

Method 3. Rated Capacities

Calculate the weighted average COP based on the capacity-weighted average rated equipment
efficiency per Equation 2.

Equation 2. Weighted average COP

𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡𝑒𝑑 a𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐶𝑂𝑃
∑ 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 × 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝐶𝑂𝑃 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑎𝑐ℎ 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡
=
𝑡𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡

If equipment has more than one rated condition, calculate the weighted average COP using the
rated conditions closest to the following:

• Air source heat pumps. 17°F (-9°C) OA db

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 280
 • Ground source heat pumps. 32°F (0°C) entering liquid temperature
• Liquid source heat pump and heat recovery water-chilling packages. 44°F (6°C)
heating source leaving liquid temperature.

Reference ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8 Tables to identify applicable rated conditions.
For equipment with efficiency ratings using HSPF, AFUE, or any rating other than COP or
COPH, convert these ratings to COP using Table 2 before calculating the weighted average
COP.

Additional considerations
For heat pump water-chilling packages or heat recovery water-chilling packages
rated per ASHRAE 90.1, Table 6.8.1-16, adjust COP using the equations from
Table 2 to align equipment ratings for entering/leaving heating liquid temperature
at medium, high, or boost conditions with the default low ratings.

Table 2. Determination of equipment COP for calculation of weighted average COP

Heating equipment type Heating equipment Equation to convert Test
efficiency rating to COP procedure
Electrically operated air- HSPF2 = -0.0296 x HSPF22 AHRI 210/240-
cooled unitary heat pumps + 0.7134 x HSPF2 2023
SCOP2H = -0.3446 × AHRI 210/240-
SCOPH22 2023
+ 2.434 × SCOPH2
COPH = COPH AHRI 340/360
at 17°F db/15°F wb
(–8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb)
PTHP COPH = COPH AHRI 310/380
SPVHP COPH = COPH AHRI 390
VRF air cooled HSPF = -0.0296 x HSPF2 + AHRI 1230
0.7134 x HSPF
COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
at 17°F db/15°F wb
(–8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb)
SCOPH = -0.3446 × SCOPH2 AHRI 210/240-
+ 2.434 × SCOPH 2023
VRF water source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
68°F (20°C) entering
water
VRF groundwater source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
50°F (10°C) entering
water
VRF ground source COPH = COPH AHRI 1230
32°F (0°C) entering
water

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 281
 Heating equipment type Heating equipment Equation to convert Test
efficiency rating to COP procedure
Electrically Operated DX- ISCOP = ISCOP AHRI 920
DOAS Air-source heat pump
or water-source heat pump
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-1
source heat pump, water-to- 68°F (20°C) entering
water, water loop water
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-1
source heat pump, water-to- 50°F (10°C) entering
air, groundwater water
Electrically operated water- COPH = COPH ISO 13256-1
source heat pump, brine-to- 32°F (0°C) entering
air, ground loop water
Air-source heat pump and COPH = COPH AHRI 550/590
heat recovery chiller at 17°F db/15°F wb (–
packages 8.3°C db/–9.4°C wb),
Low leaving heating
water temperature =
105°F (40 °C)
COPH at 17°F db/15°F = 1.14 x COPH
wb (–8.3°C db/–9.4°C
wb), Medium leaving
heating water
temperature = 120°F
(50 °C)
COPH at 17°F db/15°F = 1.37 x COPH
wb (–8.3°C db/–9.4°C
wb), High leaving
heating water
temperature = 140°F
(60 °C)
Water source electrically COPH = COPH AHRI 550/590
operated positive Low leaving hot water
displacement. temperature = 105°F
(COPH evaluated at 54°F (40 °C)
(19°C) source water entering COPH = 1.26 x COPH
temperature/44 °F (7°C) Medium leaving hot
source water leaving water temperature =
temperature) 120°F (50 °C)
COPH = 1.73 x COPH
High leaving hot water
temperature = 140°F
Water source electrically COPH = 1.31 x COPH AHRI 550/590
operated positive Boost leaving hot water
displacement or centrifugal. temperature = 140°F
(at 75°F/65 °F source (60 °C)
entering/leaving water
temperature)
Electric furnace AFUE = 1.0 x AFUE 10 CFR 430
Appendix N
Electric boiler None listed COP = 0.96 if not 10 CFR 430
rated

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 282
 Heating equipment type Heating equipment Equation to convert Test
efficiency rating to COP procedure
Electric service hot water COP = COP AHRI Standard
heaters 50°F (10°C) entering air 1301
and 60°F (21°C)
entering water
UEF 10 CFR 430
= UEF x 1.3
Appendix E
NOTE: Equations to convert HSPF, HSPF2, and SCOP2 to COP are from ASHRAE 90.1-2019 11.5.2(c) and 90.1-2022 12.5.2(c).
The remaining conversions are rough approximations not accounting for variability in standby losses or other factors referenced
in the test procedures.

District Energy Systems (Applicable for New Construction and Core and Shell)
If the project has thermal energy from a District Energy System (DES), either refer to DES
compliance paths in the Project Priorities Library or demonstrate that the DES complies with the
following credit requirements at the district facility:

• New Construction Option 1, No On-site Combustion. (Core and Shell Option 1, Path
1)
o No on-site combustion may be used in the district energy facility to generate heating,
cooling, or electricity supplied to the project. Average district heating efficiency must
be at least 1.8 COP.
• New Construction Option 2, No On-Site Combustion Except at Low Temperatures.
(Core and Shell Option 1, Path 1)
o If district heating supplies any of the project’s space heat (New Construction Path 1
or Core and Shell Case 1), service water heating (New Construction Path 2 or Core
and Shell Case 2), or process energy (New Construction Path 3), the district heating
facility must be capable of generating the entire required district heating capacity
without using on-site combustion above 20°F (-6.5 °C). Average district heating
efficiency must be at least 1.8 COP for New Construction Paths 1 and 2 (Core and
Shell Cases 1 and 2).

Fuel Cells and Combined Heat and Power Ineligible

Projects with fuel cells that use fossil fuel to generate electricity or combined heat and power
systems (CHP) that use fuel to generate heat and electricity are ineligible for credit.

Exemptions (Applicable for New Construction and Core and Shell)

On-site combustion may be used for the following limited circumstances:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 283
 • Emergency support systems. Emergency support systems generate electricity,
heating, or cooling upon failure of the primary system in a power outage or extreme
temperature event.
o To apply the exemption, the sequence of operations must specifically limit
emergency support system operations to emergency events associated with power
disruptions or extreme temperatures falling outside of ASHRAE 99% design
conditions for a prolonged period.
o Emergency power systems are not exempt for locations where power outages
commonly occur for more than 200 hours per year.

• Portable equipment. Exclude portable equipment for outdoor cooking amenities or

outdoor patio heating not in the project scope when limited to less than 200 hours per
year. Do not permanently pipe fuel lines to the equipment.
• Special circumstances. Use limited on-site combustion for specialty cases where on-
site combustion is integral to system function. Examples include:
o Portable laboratory equipment
o Wood-fired ovens in commercial kitchens fitted with emissions control devices
o Vocational schools using fossil fuels solely for the purpose of training
o Electric incinerators for medical waste
o Fireplaces, hearths, and fire pits exclusively designated to support ceremonial
practices (such as those unique to indigenous cultures or religious practices that
require the use of fire)

These special circumstances do not extend more broadly to process equipment except where
approved on a project-specific basis for systems with very low greenhouse gas emissions.

Platinum Requirements
Projects aiming to achieve LEED Platinum certification must meet the following criteria
applicable to the project type.

• New Construction. Achieve five points. (no on-site combustion)

• Core and Shell. Achieve four points. (no on-site combustion)
• Projects served by District Energy Systems. Refer to the Project Priorities Library for
DES compliance paths.

The Platinum requirements intentionally encompass industrial and manufacturing processes. To

obtain Platinum certification, on-site boilers used for manufacturing production must comply with
the credit criteria.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 284
Exceptions to Platinum requirements, such as for renewable fuels, may be included in the
Project Priorities Library.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All Documentation of all heating, service water heating, solar
Construction water heating, and process heating equipment within the
and Core and project. Include information on the energy source,
Shell equipment quantity, and the capacity and efficiency for
each piece of equipment (equipment cutsheets or
schedules).
Description of emergency support and on-site generation
equipment, including how it is used on site. Include an
estimated annual run-time for any combustion equipment.
Document emergency support systems and on-site
generation equipment including system type, fuel source,
and capacity.
Documentation that the project is subject to local code
that requires full electrification down to 20 deg F or lower.
Provide relevant code language and applicability (if
applicable).
Weighted average COP calculation, as applicable for
SWH and Space heating. Projects may determine
weighted average COP using a streamlined method,
rated capacities, or energy simulation.
Option 1 Narrative or Mechanical drawings showing that systems
used for heating, SHW, and cooking and other process
loads are not fueled by onsite combustion.
New Option 2 All Sequence of Operations for hybrid electric/non-electric
Construction systems and evidence that electric equipment (electric
mode) can meet space heating, SHW, and process
heating loads >20F (as applicable). Evidence may
include equipment capacities and accompanying design
load calculations, or energy simulation reports, or other.
For projects attempting no on-site combustion except at
low temperatures, document how the applicable systems
can operate without on-site combustion at outside air
temperatures above 20°F (-6.5 °C).
Path 1 Total building space heating load at OA Temp 20*F or
below.
Provide a description of the basis of analysis for space
heating loads.
Sequence of operations for all space heating equipment.

Path 2 Sequence of operations for all service water heating

equipment.
Sequence of operations for all solar water heating
equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 285
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Path 3 Confirmation that the project's emergency support
systems (if installed), use on-site combustion, and that
the system will only run during power outages, and for
less than 200 hour/years.
Path 3 Add multi-option selection (multiple check boxes),
systems in scope of work (cooking, laundry, other
process), similar to CI.
Path 3 Add Schedules or cutsheets showing electrified
equipment.
Core and Option 1 Path 2 For projects attempting no on-site combustion except at
Shell Only low temperatures, document how the applicable systems
can operate without on-site combustion at outside air
temperatures above 20°F (-6.5 °C).
Option 1 Path 3 Add calculation for the installed space heating and
service water heating equipment capacity as a
percentage of the project's peak combined heating and
service water heating load.
Confirmation that the project's emergency support
systems (if installed), use on-site combustion and the
system will only run during power outages and for less
than 200 hour/years.
Option 2 Documentation of base building design showing
applicable infrastructure, including floor plans,
mechanical plans, electrical plans, and one-line
diagrams.
Narrative describing the sizing and capabilities to meet
future needs.
Add tenant guidelines describing electrification readiness
and designing and installing efficient electrified systems.
New District Energy System
Construction Relevant documentation and calculations, demonstrating
and Core and the relevant DES criteria have been met (as applicable).
Shell

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 286
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

REDUCE PEAK THERMAL LOADS

EAc2
New Construction (1–5 points)
Core and Shell (1–5 points)

INTENT
To minimize demand on grid resources and improve the resilience of buildings.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–5
Option 1. Infiltration and Balanced Ventilation 2
AND/OR
Option 2. Ventilation Energy Recovery 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Thermal Bridging 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Peak Thermal Load Reductions 1–3
Path 1. Peak Load Intensity 1–3
OR
Path 2. ASHRAE 90.1 Trade-Off Methods 1–3
OR
Path 3. Energy Simulation 1–3

Comply with any combination of Options 1–4 for a maximum of 5 points.

For all options, the building envelope must meet the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1, Section
5.5, Prescriptive Building Envelope Compliance Path or ASHRAE 90.1, Section 5.6, Building
Envelope Trade-Off Compliance Path per the version of ASHRAE 90.1 referenced in EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency. Building envelope efficiency shall not be traded off with other
building systems.

Option 1. Infiltration and Balanced Ventilation (2 points)

Comply with both of the following:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 287
Balanced Ventilation
Design the ventilation and exhaust airflows within 10% of each other and include a test,
adjusting, and balance (TAB) report demonstrating balanced ventilation in the commissioning
scope. This requirement does not apply to Core and Shell projects.

AND

Infiltration
Use an air leakage test to demonstrate a measured air leakage of the building envelope less
than or equal to Table 1 below. Buildings smaller than 25,000 square feet (2,322 square meters)
must use a whole-building air leakage test.

• Complete air leakage testing using ASTM E779, ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380, ASTM
E3158, ASTM E1827, or equivalent.
• For buildings greater than 5,000 sq. ft. (465 sq. m.), maximum air leakage is
determined per sq. ft. or sq. m. of building envelope area (including exterior walls,
roofs, and base floor/slab).
• For projects that include both new construction and major renovation, use the
weighted average maximum air leakage.

Table 1. Caps on air leakage rates

Building Pressure test conditions Maximum air leakage1

conditioned floor across the building New construction Major renovation
area (CFA) envelope
≥ 5,000 sq. ft. (465 At pressure difference of 50 0.13 cfm/sq. ft. 0.20 cfm/sq. ft.
sq. m.) Pascals (0.2 in H2O) (0.65 L/s*sq. m.) 1 (1.0 L/s*sq. m.) 1
At pressure difference of 75 0.18 cfm/sq. ft. 0.27 cfm/sq. ft.
Pascals (0.3 in H2O) (0.90 L/s*sq. m.) 1 (1.35 L/s*sq. m.) 1
< 5,000 sq. ft. (465 At 50 Pascals 1 ACH 1.5 ACH
sq. m.) (0.2 in in H2O)
At 75 Pascals (0.3 in H2O) 1.35 ACH 2 ACH

OR

Residential
• Compartmentalize each residential dwelling unit to minimize leakage between units. Perform
a blower door test of residential dwelling units, following the procedures in
ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 or equivalent. For each unit tested, demonstrate a maximum
leakage of enclosure area that is no more than 1.5 times the thresholds identified in Table 1
(enclosure area refers to all surfaces enclosing the dwelling unit, including exterior and party
walls, floors, and ceilings). Demonstrate a weighted average leakage of the enclosure area
for the building, including dwelling units, that complies with the caps in the limits identified in
Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 288
AND/OR

Option 2. Ventilation Energy Recovery (1 point)

Each fan system supplying outdoor air must have an energy or heat recovery system with a
minimum 70% enthalpy recovery ratio or a minimum of 75% sensible heat recovery ratio.
Provisions must be made to bypass or control the energy recovery system during moderate
outside air conditions.

In aggregate, fan systems supplying less than 15% of the project’s total outdoor air can be
excluded.

Core and Shell only

Fan systems must supply a minimum of 50% of the ventilation air required for the
project per ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Ventilation Rate Procedure, to qualify
for this option.

AND/OR

Option 3. Thermal Bridging (1 point)

Comply with the prescriptive thermal bridging requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section
5.5.5(a), including all applicable requirements of Sections 5.5.5.1–5.5.5.5, without applying
exceptions for projects in climate zones 0–3.

AND/OR

Option 4. Peak Thermal Load Reductions (1–3 points)

Comply with the following:

• Ventilation loads must be included in the determination of peak coincident loads.

• Measure building envelope air leakage using air leakage testing and use the measured
air leakage to calculate the peak loads for Path 1, Path 2 (envelope), and Path 3.
(Meeting the leakage rates in Option 1 is not required to pursue this option.)
• Demonstrate balanced ventilation meeting the criteria in Option 1 above.

AND

PATH 1. PEAK LOAD INTENSITY (1–3 POINTS)

Limit the sum of peak heating load and peak cooling load per unit of treated floor area to be less
than or equal to the thresholds specified in Table 2 below. Calculate peak loads using one of the
following:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 289
 • WUFI Passive Design Tool, following the Passive House Institute US protocol.
• Passive House Planning Package, following the Passive House Institute protocol to
determine maximum heating load and maximum cooling load.

Table 2. Points for meeting caps on the sum of peak heating and cooling loads

Points New construction Major renovation

1 16 Btu-h/sq. ft. (50 W/sq. m.) 20 Btu-h/sq. ft. (63 W/sq. m.)
2 12 Btu-h/sq. ft. (38 W/sq. m.) 15 Btu-h/sq. ft. (47 W/sq. m.)
3 8 Btu-h/sq. ft. (25 W/sq. m.) 10 Btu-h/sq. ft. (32 W/sq. m.)

OR

PATH 2. ASHRAE 90.1 TRADE-OFF METHODS (1–3 POINTS)

Comply with envelope and/or HVAC improvements for a maximum of 3 points.

Envelope loads (1–2 points)

Demonstrate a percent improvement in the sum of system peak heating loads and system peak
cooling loads associated with the proposed envelope performance factor compared to the base
envelope performance factor determined in accordance with the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Building
Envelope Trade-off Option (Normative Appendix C). Points are awarded according to Table 3.

Table 3. Points for percentage improvement in peak thermal loads from envelope
Points Percent improvement
1 10%
2 20%

AND/OR

Ventilation Loads (1 point)

Demonstrate a minimum 10% improvement in the sum of building peak coincident heating loads
and building peak coincident cooling loads for the total system performance ratio (TSPR)
proposed building design versus the product of the TSPR reference building design and
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table L5-4, Mechanical Performance Factors (MPF), for the project’s
location and climate zone determined in accordance with the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Mechanical
System Performance Rating Method (Normative Appendix L).

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 290
PATH 3. ENERGY SIMULATION (1–3 POINTS)
Demonstrate a performance index calculated per ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or later from Normative
Appendix G’s Performance Rating Method, replacing all references to cost with the sum of
building peak coincident heating loads and building peak coincident cooling loads.

Points are awarded according to Table 4.

Table 4. Points for performance index for peak heating and cooling loads
Performance index Points
0.5 1
0.4 2
0.3 3

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONSTRUCTION

The credit rewards reduced peak heating and peak cooling loads, primarily achieved through
enhanced building envelope performance and lower ventilation loads.

This limits strain on the grid during peak summer and winter operations when grid capacity and
associated grid emissions are highest.

Options 1, 2, and 3 are distinct peak thermal load reduction strategies. Option 4 rewards overall
peak thermal load reductions achieved from the strategies referenced in Options 1–3 and any
further peak load reduction measures employed for the project.

For credit eligibility, the peak thermal load reduction measures designed for the building must be
fully implemented during construction. The construction phase verification is required to confirm
measured air leakage (Options 1 and 4), balanced ventilation (Options 1 and 4), and reduced
thermal bridging (Options 3).

New construction projects may apply any combination of Options 1–4 for up to five points.

For All Options

The building envelope must comply with ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive method requirements as a
pre-condition for all options.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 291
Do not claim trade-offs between the envelope and other energy-using systems. This sets a
higher bar for the building envelope than EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency for projects
documented using ASHRAE 90.1 Energy Cost Budget (ECB) or ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G
Performance Rating Method (PRM).

Envelope performance must comply with one of the following:

• ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Section 5.5, Prescriptive Building Envelope Compliance

Path.
• ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Section 5.6, Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance Path.
(Refer to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency guidance on this topic).

Use the same version of ASHRAE 90.1 referenced for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency (i.e.,
ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or ASHRAE 90.1-2022).

Option 1. Infiltration and Balanced Ventilation

This strategy reduces heat gains and losses associated with infiltration and exfiltration. Projects
must provide testing during the construction phase to verify the achievement of both the
balanced ventilation and measured air leakage criteria.

Balanced ventilation
Design the building’s mechanical system and controls to support balanced ventilation airflow
that maintains the building’s total supply ventilation airflow within 10% of the total exhaust
airflow.

During construction, provide testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) of building air handling
systems that verifies a ratio of ventilation to exhaust airflow between 90% and 110% on a
whole-building basis.

Infiltration
Design and construct the building’s air barrier to minimize air leakage through the building
enclosure. During construction, provide air leakage testing to confirm the project achieves
targeted performance levels (referenced in Table 1 of the credit requirements). The testing must
conform to one of the referenced air leakage testing standards:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 292
ASTM testing criteria
ASTM defines air leakage testing criteria. ASTM E779 uses the fan-pressurization method for
testing.93 ASTM E3158 provides a standard method for testing large or multizone buildings.
ASTM E1827 determines air tightness using an orifice blower door. Residential spaces in
mixed-use buildings may also apply ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380.

Residential buildings
In residential buildings, compartmentalize each unit, incorporating measures to limit air leakage
between units). Determine credit compliance by conducting blower door testing of units per
ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380. Sample rates may apply depending on the number of units within the
building.

Maximum leakage rates for each unit cannot exceed 150% of the Table 1 thresholds for the
enclosure area.

Furthermore, weighted average building leakage rates must be less than the Table 1 thresholds.
Calculate the weighted average using the measured results for the individual dwelling units.

Failed testing
If a unit fails testing, corrective action is recommended to reduce air leakage in the space.
Determine compliance with the credit by the weighted average of leakage rates reported for the
project. If a single unit fails in a project with a large number of dwelling units, the project may still
show compliance with this option.

Option 2. Ventilation Heat Recovery

Energy recovery ventilators (ERV) or heat recovery ventilators (HRV) reduce peak heating and
cooling loads associated with ventilation by pre-treating the incoming outside air with heated or
cooled air recovered from the exhaust stream.

For each system that supplies outdoor air to the building, include an ERV or HRV with at least a
70% enthalpy recovery ratio or 75% sensible heat recovery ratio.

Controls for ERVs and HRVs

ERVs must have controls to disable energy exchange or bypass air during economizer
operation. The requirement does not apply to systems with design outdoor airflow rates of less

93 “Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization,” ASTM, January 23, 2019,
https://www.astm.org/e0779-19.html.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 293
than 80% and design outdoor air volume of less than 10,000 cfm. For details, refer to ASHRAE
90.1-2022 Section 6.5.6.1.2.2, Provision for Air Economizer or Bypass Operation.

Exceptions
In aggregate, fan systems supplying less than 15% of the project’s total outdoor air can be
excluded.

Exclude the following systems from the requirements in addition to this 15% exclusion:
Kitchen exhaust demand ventilation systems meeting the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1
6.5.7.2.3(b).

Laboratory exhaust systems meeting the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1 Section 6.5.7.3 (a) or (b).
Kitchen or laboratory systems must meet these criteria to be eligible for this exclusion, even if
the project’s total kitchen or laboratory exhaust volumes are less than those referenced in
Section 6.5.7.

Option 3. Thermal Bridging

Projects must document prescriptive compliance with each thermal bridging requirement in
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 Section 5.5.5a, designing and constructing a continuous thermal barrier
that minimizes heat conductance associated with thermal bridges. A thermal bridge is an
element that penetrates the building insulation, such as a wall and roof intersection, a wall and
window intersection, an exterior cladding support, or a beam penetrating the exterior wall
assembly.

Do not use the envelope trade-off method to show compliance with this option.

Climate zones 0–3

Projects in warmer climate zones (0–3) cannot apply any exceptions and
must comply entirely with Section 5.5.5. Providing thermal breaks, continuous
insulation, and using reflective exterior coatings on exterior surfaces can
reduce solar heat gain and prevent moisture intrusion.

Option 4. Peak Thermal Load Reductions

Option 4 rewards overall peak thermal load reduction quantitatively assessed for the project
using one of three methods:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 294
 • Path 1 leverages passive building modeling tools to document peak thermal load
intensities below the required thresholds.
• Path 2 leverages ASHRAE 90.1 trade-offs for the prescriptive method to show a
reduction in peak thermal loads below a referenced baseline.
• Path 3 leverages the ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G Performance Rating Method to show a
reduction in peak thermal loads below a referenced baseline.

For all three paths, the referenced tools can be used to inform an integrative design process
and make design decisions that holistically reduce peak thermal loads. The analysis should
reflect the savings from the strategies referenced in Options 1–3 and further savings for any
other load reduction strategies incorporated in the building design, such as improved insulation,
improved window performance, or lower internal loads.

Preconditions applicable to all paths

Projects pursuing Option 4 must comply with all the following:

• Ventilation loads: When calculating peak heating and peak cooling loads, account
for ventilation loads. Use the design of outdoor air from the project’s design
documents.
• Measured Air Leakage: During construction, provide air leakage testing to measure
the building’s air leakage and use the measured air leakage to calculate peak loads.
If evaluating credit compliance during the design phase, perform the peak load
calculations using the targeted air leakage that aligns with project design documents.
Recalculate during construction if measured air leakage exceeds targeted air
leakage.

Measured air leakage must be less than or equal to the ASHRAE 90.1 required air leakage
rates.

For Path 2, this measured air leakage requirement only applies to envelope loads calculations,
not ventilation loads calculations.

• Balanced Ventilation. Maintain the project’s ventilation and exhaust airflows within
10% of each other (see Option 1 Balanced Ventilation requirements).

PATH 1. PEAK LOAD INTENSITY

Path 1 requires projects to limit peak thermal loads below the specified thresholds.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 295
Calculate the sum of the peak heating load and peak cooling load per unit of treated floor area
using either the WUFI Passive Design Tool or the Passive House Planning Package.

Additional considerations
Under this option, projects designed to achieve Passive House compliance
(using either PHIUS or PHI) will likely achieve three points.

PATH 2. ASHRAE 90.1 TRADE-OFF METHODS

For projects documenting EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency using the prescriptive method or
Energy Cost Budget Method, Path 2 provides the most streamlined method for showing
compliance. However, due to the limitations of the referenced ASHRAE 90.1 Trade-off Methods,
it may not be possible to show loads reductions for some buildings using this path. For example,
projects with minimal envelope contribution to peak thermal loads cannot achieve the required
envelope loads thresholds. Similarly, the Total System Performance Ratio (TSPR) calculations
referenced for the Ventilation Loads requirements are only available for a subset of building
types.

Envelope loads
Use the ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Section 5.6, Building Envelope Trade-off Compliance Path
analysis to show credit compliance. (Refer to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency guidance on
this topic). Amend the proposed inputs to reference measured air leakage. If this is not possible
in the software interface, perform the air leakage testing as required, but use the ASHRAE 90.1
prescriptively required air leakage as a conservative savings estimate.

Extract the system peak heating loads and the system peak cooling loads from the modeled
outputs for the proposed envelope factor and the base envelope factor.

Show the project achieves the required percentage improvement in the sum of system peak
heating loads and system peak heating loads comparing the results for the two models.
The peak load metric used here is distinct from the metric of annual energy cost used to assess
compliance with ASHRAE 90.1.

Ventilation loads
This case rewards projects for a 10% improvement in the sum of building peak coincident
heating loads and building peak coincident cooling loads achieved through HVAC control
strategies addressing ventilation loads, such as demand control ventilation or energy recovery
ventilation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 296
Use the ASHRAE Standard 90.1, Section 6.6.2 Mechanical System Performance Path analysis
to show credit compliance. (Refer to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency guidance on this topic).
Extract the building peak coincident heating loads and the building peak coincident cooling
loads from the TSPR modeled outputs for the referenced building design and for the proposed
building design. Calculate performance using the following equations:

Equation 1. Reference peak (based on modeled outputs from the referenced building
design)
𝑅𝐸𝐹𝐸𝑅𝐸𝑁𝐶𝐸𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘
= 𝐵𝑙𝑑𝑔 𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑐𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑠 + 𝐵𝑙𝑑𝑔 𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑐𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑠

Equation 2. Proposed peak (based on modeled outputs from the proposed building design)
𝑃𝑅𝑂𝑃𝑂𝑆𝐸𝐷𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘
= 𝐵𝑙𝑑𝑔 𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑐𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 ℎ𝑒𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑠 + B𝑙𝑑𝑔 𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘 𝑐𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑐𝑜𝑜𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑𝑠

Equation 3. Performance target

𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 t𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑒𝑡 = 𝑅𝐸𝐹𝐸𝑅𝐸𝑁𝐶𝐸𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘 × 𝑀𝑃𝐹
where:
MPF = Mechanical performance factor for project’s location and climate zone per ASHRAE Standard 90.1-2022, Table L5-4

Equation 4. % improvement
𝑃𝑅𝑂𝑃𝑂𝑆𝐸𝐷𝑝𝑒𝑎𝑘
% 𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 100% −
𝑃𝑒𝑟𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 t𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑒𝑡

PATH 3. ENERGY SIMULATION

Projects that comply with EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency using the ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix
G Performance Rating Method (PRM) can use the PRM modeled results to show compliance
with this path.

This path is the most appropriate selection for projects with high process loads or projects with
significant quantities of laboratory or kitchen exhaust. Unlike Path 1 and Path 2, this path allows
credit for lower plug and process loads documented using ASHRAE 90.1 Section G2.5
Exceptional Calculation Methods (See EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency guidance for further
information).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 297
Performance index
For the ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G baseline and proposed models, extract the building peak
coincident heating load and the building peak coincident cooling load.

Calculate the Baseline Building Performance (BBP), the Proposed Building Performance (PBP),
and the Performance Index (PI) by replacing the cost metric with the sum of building peak
coincident heating load and building peak coincident cooling load.

Equation 5. Performance index (PI)

𝑃𝐵𝑃
𝑃𝐼 =
𝐵𝐵𝑃

For this path, neither building performance factors (BPFs) nor performance index targets (PIt)
are used. Per Table 4 of the Rating System, points achievement is directly linked to the
Performance Index equal to the ratio of peak thermal loads for the proposed building compared
to the baseline building that meets ASHRAE 90.1-2004 prescriptive criteria.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: CORE AND SHELL

Option 1. Infiltration
Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 1, except:

Core and Shell projects are not required to meet the Balanced Ventilation requirements of this
option.

Option 2. Ventilation Energy Recovery

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 2, if:

Option 2 is only available to LEED BD+C: Core and Shell projects that include fan systems
within the project scope of work. At least 50% of the total ventilation air required by the ASHRAE
Standard 62.1-2022, Ventilation Rate Procedure must be installed as part of the Base Building
scope of work.

Option 3. Thermal Bridging

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 3, except:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 298
LEED BD+C: Core and Shell projects are not required to meet the Balanced Ventilation
requirements of this option.

Option 4. Peak Thermal Load Reductions

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 4.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New Option 1 All Confirmation that supply and exhaust flows designed
Construction within 10% of each other.
and Balanced ventilation design calculations.
Core and Air leakage test report describing method, conditions,
Shell and results. Note: Include which Path (New Construction
or Major Renovation; larger or smaller than 5,000 sq. ft.;
Pressure Test Condition) is followed.
Option 2 All Documentation showing outdoor air delivery systems
and flow rates, including energy recovery devices and
efficiencies, and OA bypass controls (e.g., mechanical
schedules, specifications, submittals, controls diagram).
Option 3 All Comcheck or ASHRAE 90.1-2022 prescriptive thermal
bridging compliance forms. Include Details of envelope
and calculations showing that intersections and edges of
each type meet ASHRAE 90.1 2022 sections 5.5.5.
Option 4 All Ventilation loads must be included in the determination
of peak coincident loads.
Air leakage test report describing method, conditions,
and results.
Confirmation that supply and exhaust flows are
designed within 10% of each other.
Path 1 Input/output report from PHPP or WUFI.
Sum of peak sensible heating and cooling load.
Input/output reports from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Building
envelope trade-off option and/or TSPR as applicable.

Envelope peak load reduction and/or TSPR peak load

reduction.
Path 2 Sum of peak heating loads and peak cooling loads
Envelope (Base/Reference Case)
AND
Sum of peak heating loads and peak cooling loads
Path 2
(Proposed Case)
Ventilation
Path 3 Calculation of Performance index using sum of peak
heating and peak cooling.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 299
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ASHRAE 62.1-2022 (scope requirements for Core and Shell),
(store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-62-1-2022?product_id=2501063)
• Passive House Planning Package (PHPP) following the Passive House Institute (PHI)
protocol (passivehouse.com/04_phpp/04_phpp.htm#PH10)
• WUFI Passive Design Tool, following the Passive House Institute US (PHIUS) protocol
(phius.org/resources/tools-and-support/wufi-passive-design-tool)
• ASTM E779 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate by Fan Pressurization
(astm.org/e0779-19.html)
• ASTM E3158 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Air Leakage Rate of a Large or
Multizone Building (www.astm.org/e3158-18.html)
• ASTM E1827 Standard Test Methods for Determining Airtightness of Buildings Using an
Orifice Blower Door (astm.org/e1827-11r17.html)
• ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 Standard for Testing Airtightness of Building, Dwelling Unit, and
Sleeping Unit Enclosures; Airtightness of Heating and Cooling Air Distribution Systems; and
Airflow of Mechanical Ventilation Systems (www.resnet.us/wp-content/uploads/Std380-
2022_Strk-Undrln_blk_wCover_cln5.pdf)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 300
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED ENERGY EFFICIENCY

EAc3
New Construction (1–10 points): 8 points are required for LEED BD+C: New Construction
Platinum projects
Core and Shell (1–7 points): 5 points are required for LEED BD+C: Core and Shell Platinum
projects

INTENT
To design buildings that minimize energy use to reduce the environmental damage caused by
resource extraction, air pollution, and greenhouse gas emissions and to facilitate the transition
to a clean energy future.

REQUIREMENTS: NEW CONSTRUCTION

Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–10
Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–10
Path 1. Regulated Loads 1–7
Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 1–5
OR
Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 4–7
AND/OR
Path 2. Plug and Process Loads (PPL) 1–4
Case 1. Plug Load Management 1
AND/OR
Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment 1–4
OR
Case 3. Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation 1–4
OR
Option 2. Energy Simulation 1–10
Path 1. Percentage Reduction Excluding On-Site Renewable 1–10
Contribution
OR
Path 2. Percentage Reduction Including On-Site Renewable 1–10
Contribution

Option 1. Prescriptive Path (1–10 points)

PATH 1. REGULATED LOADS (1–7 POINTS)
Points are awarded according to Table 1 below, using either Case 1 or Case 2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 301
Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (1–5 points)
Available only to projects registered before January 1, 2028.

Comply with the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Sections 5–10.

Implement Additional Efficiency Requirements credits calculated per ASHRAE 90.1-2022,

Section 11, from the list of eligible measures referenced below. Where ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Section 11 references the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–10,
such as lighting power density or equipment efficiency, replace those references with the
matching prescriptive values in ASHRAE 90.1-2019.

OR

Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (4–7 points)

Comply with the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–11.

Implement incremental ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11, credits above the minimum required
from the list of eligible measures below.

Eligible measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2, for LEED points:

• HVAC measures (H01 to H07)

• Service water heating measures (W01 to W09)
• Lighting measures (L01 to L06)
• G07 building mass/night flush

Table 1. Points for ASHRAE 90.1-2022, section 11 credits

Points Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

1 25 credits
2 50 credits N/A
3 75 credits
4 100 credits Min. required by 90.1-2022
5 125 credits Min. required by 90.1-2022 plus 25 credits
6 N/A Min. required by 90.1-2022 plus 50 credits
7 N/A Min. required by 90.1-2022 plus 75 credits

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 302
PATH 2. PLUG AND PROCESS LOADS (1–4 POINTS)
Case 1. Plug Load Management (1 point)

Implement the following:

• Provide a plug load dashboard that is accessible through an application to all regular
occupants of the building if tenants can opt out of displaying their plug loads to other
tenants.
• For building types and/or tenant types with IT departments, implement policies for PCs,
monitors, and visual displays to be controlled off when not in use, except during
scheduled maintenance periods.

AND/OR

Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment (1–4 points)

Install or reuse eligible plug and process equipment meeting the criteria in Table 2 for 90% of
applicable equipment by quantity or rated load. Either include or exclude all eligible equipment
reused in the project from the calculations.

• For one, Table 2 equipment category (1 point)

• For two, Table 2 equipment categories (2 points)
• For three or more, Table 2 equipment categories (3 points)

OR

For process-intensive buildings, install or reuse eligible plug and process equipment meeting
the criteria in Table 2 for at least 90% of total applicable equipment rated load. Rated load of
compliant equipment must total at least:

• 0.5 Watt/sq. ft. (5.4 W/sq. m.) (3 points)

• 1.0 Watt/sq. ft. (10.8 W/sq. m.) (4 points)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 303
Table 2. Plug, process, refrigeration, and conveyance equipment criteria
Equipment category Applicable equipment Criteria
ENERGY STAR® products: Office equipment ENERGY STAR® rated or
plug loads and small Appliances approved equivalent with at
appliances Electronics least 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq.
Other (e.g., vending machines, m.) of total rated load
pool pumps, water coolers)
ENERGY STAR® products: Commercial food service ENERGY STAR® rated or
process loads equipment approved equivalent with at
Data center/server equipment least 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq.
Commercial laundry equipment m.) of total rated load
Electric vehicle chargers
(EVSE)
Other (e.g., laboratory-grade
refrigerators and freezers)
People conveyance Elevators ISO 25745.
Escalators At least Class A rated
Moving walkways
Data center electrical system Electrical system design ASHRAE 90.4-2022.
Design electrical loss
component is at least 20%
lower than the maximum design
electrical loss.
Refrigeration systems Referenced in ASHRAE 90.1, 10% improvement beyond
Section 6.8 tables AND not ASHRAE 90.1, Section 6.8
ENERGY STAR® eligible tables
Refrigerated warehouse California Title 24-2022,
Section 120.6, refrigerated
warehouse requirements
Airport equipment Baggage handling equipment Individual carrier systems with
variable frequency drive
Aircraft and jetway air- Preconditioned air systems with
conditioning efficiencies meeting ASHRAE
90.1 prescriptive efficiencies for
HVAC equipment

OR

Case 3. Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation (1–4 points)

Using the ASHRAE 90.1, Section G2.5, exceptional calculation method, demonstrate a
minimum percentage improvement in total project plug and process, refrigeration, and
conveyance loads. Points are awarded according to Table 3.

Table 3. Points for percent improvement in plug and process loads

Percent improvement Points
10% 1
20% 2
30% 3
40% 4

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 304
OR

Option 2. Energy Simulation (1–10 points)

Demonstrate an improvement in future source energy calculated per ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
Normative Appendix G, Performance Rating Method, with the following additional provisions:

• Use the ASHRAE 90.1 version applied for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency
• Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or 90.1-2022, Table 4.2.1.1, Building Performance
Factors (BPF), with Table 5 below. For major building renovation areas, multiply the
BPF by 1.05.
• Replace all references to cost with future source energy. Use an electric site-to-
source energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S. A
lower national average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of the
U.S.
• Model energy efficiency measures for plug and process loads using the Section G2.5
exceptional calculation method or approved calculations in the LEED reference
guidance.
• Calculate the performance index (PI) and percentage improvement with and without
the plug and process savings.
• Calculate the PI and PI target as follows:
• PInre = PBPnre / BBP
• PI = PBP / BBP
• PIt = [BBUE + (BPF x BBRE)] / BBP
where:
o PInre = performance index for future source energy excluding on-site
renewable contribution
o PI = performance index for future source energy including on-site renewable
contribution
o PIt = performance index target for future source energy use
o BBP = baseline building performance for baseline building future source
energy use
o BBUE = baseline building unregulated future source energy use
o BBRE = baseline building regulated future source energy use
o PBPnre = proposed building performance without any credit for reduced
annual future source energy from on-site renewable energy generation
systems
o PBP = proposed building performance, including the reduced annual future
source energy associated with all on-site renewable energy generation
systems

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 305
Points are awarded according to Table 4, using either Path 1 or Path 2.

Table 4. Points for percentage improvement in PI below PIT

Path 1. Percentage reduction Path 2. Percentage reduction Points
excluding on-site renewable OR including on-site renewable
contribution (100% – PInre / PIt) contribution (100% – PI / PIt)
3% 10% 1
6% 20% 2
9% 30% 3
12% 40% 4
15% 50% 5
18% 60% 6
21% 70% 7
24% 80% 8
27% 90% 9
30% 100% 10

Table 5. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 — Equivalent building performance factors for a future source
energy metric

Building type Climate zone

0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
Multifamily 0.74 0.69 0.73 0.70 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.74
Healthcare/hospital 0.72 0.72 0.73 0.73 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.71 0.74 0.73 0.80 0.73 0.77 0.78 0.79
Hotel/motel 0.72 0.71 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.73 0.73 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.70
Office 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.60 0.57 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.61 0.57 0.58 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.58
Restaurant 0.65 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.77
Retail 0.57 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.52 0.50 0.56 0.57 0.53 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.53 0.60
School 0.57 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.52 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53 0.50 0.51 0.58
Warehouse 0.28 0.30 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.33 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.32 0.29 0.44 0.38 0.40 0.44
All others 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.64

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 306
REQUIREMENTS: CORE AND SHELL
Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–7
Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–7
Path 1. Regulated Loads 1–6
Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 1–5
OR
Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 2–6
AND/OR
Path 2. Plug and Process Loads (PPL) 1–3
Case 1. Plug Load Management 1
AND/OR
Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment 1–3
OR
Option 2. Energy Simulation 1–7
Path 1. Percentage Reduction Excluding On-Site Renewable 1–7
Contribution
OR
Path 2. Percentage Reduction Including On-Site Renewable Contribution 1–7

Option 1. Prescriptive Path (1–7 points)

PATH 1. REGULATED LOADS (1–6 POINTS)
Points are awarded according to Table 1 below, using either Case 1 or Case 2.

Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (1–5 points)

Available only to projects registered before January 1, 2028.

• Comply with the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Sections 5–10.

• Implement Additional Efficiency Requirements credits calculated per ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Section 11, from the list of eligible measures referenced below. Where ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11, references the prescriptive requirements of ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Sections 5–10, such as lighting power density or equipment efficiency, replace those
references with the matching prescriptive values in ASHRAE 90.1-2019.
o Central systems. Earn 1 point for every 13 energy credits where the LEED BD+C:
Core and Shell project includes a central HVAC system or service water heating
system that includes chillers, boilers, service water heating equipment, or loop
pumping systems with heat rejection.
o All others. Earn 1 point for every nine energy credits for all other LEED BD+C: Core
and Shell projects.

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 307
Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (2–6 points)
• Comply with the provisions of ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Sections 5–11.
• Implement incremental ASHRAE 90.1 2022, Section 11 credits, above the minimum
required from the list of eligible measures below.
o Central systems: 1 point for every 13 incremental energy credits where the LEED
BD+C: Core and Shell project includes a central HVAC system or service water
heating system that includes chillers, boilers, service water heating equipment, or
loop pumping systems with heat rejection.
o All others: 1 point for every nine incremental energy credits for all other LEED
BD+C: Core and Shell projects.

Eligible measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2, for LEED points
• HVAC measures (H01 to H07)
• Service water heating measures (W01 to W09)
• Lighting measures (L01 to L06)
• G07 building mass/night flush

Table 1. Points for ASHRAE 90.1-2022, section 11 credits

Compliance Path
Case 1. ASHRAE Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Points 90.1-2019
Central All Central systems All others
systems others
1 13 credits 9 credits N/A N/A
2 26 credits 18 credits Min. required by ASHRAE Min. required by ASHRAE
90.1-2022 90.1-2022
3 39 credits 27 credits Min. required + 13 credits Min. required + 9 credits
4 52 credits 36 credits Min. required + 26 credits Min. required + 18 credits
5 65 credits 45 credits Min. required + 39 credits Min. required + 27 credits
6 – – Min. required + 52 credits Min. required + 36 credits

AND/OR

PATH 2. PLUG AND PROCESS LOADS (1–3 POINTS)

Case 1. Plug Load Management (1 point)

Implement the following:

• Provide a plug load dashboard that is accessible through an application to all regular
occupants of the building displaying base building plug loads, and with the capability for
tenants to choose whether to display plug loads to their occupants.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 308
 • Configure the plug load monitoring system with the capability for expandability to monitor
future plug loads for each floor and for individual tenant spaces.

AND/OR

Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment (1–3 points)

Install or reuse equipment meeting the criteria in Table 2. Points are awarded according to Table
2 up to a maximum of 3 points for each equipment category where the criteria are met.

Table 2. Plug, process, refrigeration, and conveyance equipment criteria

Equipment Applicable equipment Criteria Points
category
People conveyance Elevators ISO 25745. 2
Escalators At least Class A-rated
Moving walkways
Data center Electrical system design ASHRAE 90.4-2022. 1
electrical system Design electrical loss component is at
least 20% lower than the maximum
design electrical loss.
Refrigeration Referenced in ASHRAE 10% improvement beyond ASHRAE 1
systems 90.1, Section 6.8 tables, 90.1, Section 6.8 tables
AND not ENERGY
STAR® eligible
Refrigerated warehouse California Title 24-2022, Section 120.6,
refrigerated warehouse requirements
Airport equipment Baggage handling Individual carrier systems with variable 2
equipment frequency drive
Aircraft and jetway air- Preconditioned air systems with
conditioning efficiencies meeting ASHRAE 90.1
prescriptive efficiencies for HVAC
equipment

Data centers
Data centers that comprise at least 40% of the project’s gross area with the electrical system in
the project scope earn 2 points for complying with the data center electrical system
requirements.

Warehouses
Refrigerated warehouses that comprise at least 20% of the project’s gross floor area with the
refrigeration systems in the project scope earn 2 points for complying with the refrigeration
system requirements.

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 309
Option 2. Energy Simulation (1–7 points)
Demonstrate an improvement in future source energy calculated per ASHRAE Standard 90.1,
Normative Appendix G, Performance Rating Method, with the following additional provisions:

• Use the ASHRAE 90.1 version applied for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency.
o Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019. Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Table 4.2.1.1, Building
Performance Factors, with Table 4. For major building renovation areas, multiply the
BPF by 1.05.
o Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022. Replace ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table 4.2.1.1, Building
Performance Factors, with Table 5. For major building renovation areas, multiply the
BPF by 1.05.
• Replace all references to cost with future source energy. Use an electric site-to-source
energy conversion factor of 2.0 based on future projections for the U.S. A lower national
average value may be used as applicable for projects outside of the U.S.
• Model energy efficiency measures for plug and process loads using the Section G2.5
exceptional calculation method or approved calculations in the LEED reference
guidance. Calculate the performance index (PI) and percentage improvement with and
without the plug and process savings.
• Calculate the PI and PI Target as follows:
• PInre = PBPnre / BBP
• PI = PBP / BBP
• PIt = [BBUE + (BPF x BBRE)] / BBP
where:
o PInre = performance index for future source energy excluding on-site
renewable contribution
o PI = performance index for future source energy including on-site renewable
contribution
o PIt = performance index target for future source energy use
o BBP = baseline building performance for baseline building future source
energy use
o BBUE = baseline building unregulated future source energy use
o BBRE = baseline building regulated future source energy use
o PBPnre = proposed building performance without any credit for reduced
annual future source energy from on-site renewable energy generation
systems
o PBP = proposed building performance, including the reduced annual future
source energy associated with all on-site renewable energy generation
systems

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 310
Points are awarded according to Table 3, using either Path 1 or Path 2.

Table 3. Points for percentage improvement in PI Below PIT

Path 1. Path 2.
Percentage reduction excluding on- Percentage reduction including
site renewable contribution on-site renewable contribution
(100% – PInre / PIt) (100% – PI / PIt)
OR Points
Case 1. Case 2. Case 1. Case 2.
ASHRAE 90.1- ASHRAE 90.1- ASHRAE 90.1- ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 2022 2019 2022

2% N/A 10% N/A 1

5% N/A 20% 0% 2
8% 0% 30% 13% 3
11% 3% 40% 26% 4
14% 6% 50% 39% 5
17% 9% 60% 52% 6
20% 12% 70% 65% 7

Table 4. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 — Equivalent building performance factors for a future source
energy metric

Building type Climate zone

0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
0.74 0.69 0.73 0.70 0.73 0.70 0.71 0.70 0.63 0.70 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.68 0.68 0.74
Multifamily
0.72 0.72 0.73 0.73 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.74 0.71 0.72 0.73 0.71 0.74 0.73 0.80 0.73 0.77 0.78 0.79
Healthcare/hospital
0.72 0.71 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.73 0.73 0.71 0.73 0.74 0.70 0.72 0.70 0.70
Hotel/motel
0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.60 0.57 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.61 0.57 0.58 0.61 0.59 0.58 0.60 0.54 0.58
Office
0.65 0.62 0.63 0.61 0.62 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.66 0.70 0.70 0.68 0.73 0.72 0.74 0.77
Restaurant
0.57 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.52 0.50 0.56 0.57 0.53 0.59 0.58 0.56 0.53 0.60
Retail
0.57 0.57 0.58 0.57 0.55 0.54 0.57 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.51 0.52 0.51 0.53 0.51 0.53 0.50 0.51 0.58
School
0.28 0.30 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.24 0.27 0.23 0.20 0.33 0.26 0.28 0.40 0.32 0.29 0.44 0.38 0.40 0.44
Warehouse
0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.57 0.56 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.60 0.60 0.59 0.65 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.64
All others

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 311
Table 5. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 — Equivalent building performance factors for a future source
energy metric

Building type Climate zone

0A 0B 1A 1B 2A 2B 3A 3B 3C 4A 4B 4C 5A 5B 5C 6A 6B 7 8
0.64 0.59 0.62 0.60 0.61 0.59 0.61 0.60 0.49 0.57 0.59 0.56 0.55 0.57 0.57 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.60
Multifamily
0.64 0.64 0.66 0.65 0.66 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.62 0.64 0.62 0.69 0.63 0.68 0.69 0.70
Healthcare/hospital
0.65 0.63 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.62 0.59 0.60 0.60 0.57 0.58 0.59 0.56 0.58 0.56 0.56
Hotel/motel
0.54 0.54 0.53 0.54 0.49 0.52 0.49 0.52 0.45 0.46 0.52 0.47 0.48 0.51 0.48 0.48 0.50 0.45 0.49
Office
0.61 0.58 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.54 0.58 0.59 0.57 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.67 0.66 0.69 0.72
Restaurant
0.47 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.40 0.39 0.37 0.39 0.36 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.45 0.43 0.46 0.44 0.43 0.42 0.46
Retail
0.52 0.53 0.53 0.53 0.51 0.51 0.53 0.48 0.46 0.43 0.48 0.47 0.45 0.49 0.46 0.46 0.44 0.44 0.48
School
0.25 0.25 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.21 0.24 0.20 0.17 0.30 0.22 0.25 0.36 0.28 0.25 0.40 0.34 0.36 0.40
Warehouse
0.58 0.56 0.56 0.56 0.50 0.47 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.49 0.49 0.50 0.51 0.50 0.55 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.55
All others

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards decreased regulated and unregulated energy usage below the ASHRAE
90.1-2019 requirements referenced in EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, Option 1. To limit
documentation level of effort, use the same ASHRAE 90.1 compliance method for prerequisite
and credit compliance — either the prescriptive method or Appendix G Performance Rating
Method (PRM).

For the prescriptive method, use the ASHRAE 90.1-2022 standard for maximum achievement of
points, and to earn 4 New Construction points or 2 Core and Shell points automatically per
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1 Path 1 Case 2.

Table 6. Linked prerequisite and credit compliance options for energy efficiency
EAp2: Linked EAc3: Enhanced Energy Available points
Minimum Energy Efficiency New Core and
Efficiency Construction Shell
(choose Option 1 OR Option 2)
Option 1. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–9 1–7
ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Path 1. Regulated Loads, Case 1. ASHRAE 1–5 1–5
90.1-2019.
Prescriptive method Implement additional efficiency measures
for HVAC, service water heating, lighting,
and/or building mass with night flush using
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 method

AND/OR + +

Path 2. Plug and Process Loads 1–4 1–3

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 312
 EAp2: Linked EAc3: Enhanced Energy Available points
Minimum Energy Efficiency New Core and
Efficiency Construction Shell
(choose Option 1 OR Option 2)
Option 2. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–10 1–7
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Path 1. Regulated Loads, Case 2. ASHRAE 4–7 2–6
90.1-2022.
Prescriptive Method 4 New Construction or 2 Core and Shell
points automatically rewarded for
prerequisite compliance. Up to 3 additional
points to implement incremental efficiency
measures for HVAC, service water heating,
lighting, and/or building mass with night
flush per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.
AND/OR + +
Path 2. Plug and Process Loads 1–4 1–3
Option 1 or Option 2. Option 1. Prescriptive Path 1–4 1–3
90.1-2019 or 90.1- Path 2. Plug and Process Loads
2022
Energy Cost Budget
Method (ECB)
New Construction Option 2. Energy Simulation 1–10 1–7
and Core and Shell Implement efficiency measures to achieve a
Option 1. percentage reduction in future source
ASHRAE 90.1-2019: energy below a performance Index Target
and New (PIt) referenced to ASHRAE 90.1-2019
Construction Option equivalent performance.
2. ASHRAE 90.1-
2022,
Appendix G
Performance Rating
Method (PRM)
Core and Shell Option 2. Energy Simulation 2–7
Option 2 Implement efficiency measures to achieve a
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, percentage reduction in future source
Appendix G energy below a performance Index Target
Performance Rating (PIt) referenced to ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Method (PRM) equivalent performance. 2-3 points
automatically rewarded for future source
energy that minimally complies with
ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (0% reduction).

Option 1. Prescriptive Path

Option 1. Prescriptive Path rewards improved efficiency for regulated loads under Path 1 and for
plug and process loads under Path 2, with points weighted for each path based on the typical
distribution of regulated versus plug and process loads in buildings. Combined points for Paths
1 and 2 cannot exceed 10 for LEED BD+C: New Construction, or seven for LEED BD+C: Core
and Shell.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 313
For less complex buildings, the prescriptive path offers a streamlined approach to achieving
energy efficiency without requiring complex energy modeling by implementing predefined
efficiency measures. It is particularly beneficial for projects with limited resources or those that
do not require the flexibility of the energy simulation path.

PATH 1. REGULATED LOADS

Path 1 is available to projects that comply with EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency using the
prescriptive method.

• Case 1 applies to projects complying with Prerequisite Option 1 using ASHRAE 90.1-
2019, Sections 5–10.
• Case 2 applies to projects complying with Prerequisite Option 2 using ASHRAE 90.1-
2022, Sections 5–11.

Projects registered beginning January 1, 2028 must use ASHRAE 90.1-2022, and earlier
registered projects may use either ASHRAE 90.1-2019 or ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

For both Case 1 and Case 2, projects must use the protocol in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.
Additional Efficiency Requirements to achieve energy credits. See guidance from EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency and ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11. Additional Efficiency
Requirements.

Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits must be achieved from the list of eligible HVAC,
lighting, service water heating, or building mass/night flush measures rather than the full list of
measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.

Use the less stringent ASHRAE 90.1-2019 prescriptive references in lieu of ASHRAE 90.1-2022
prescriptive references for the following measures:

• H02: HVAC Heating Performance Improvement (ASHRAE 90.1-2019 11.5.2.2.2).

o Refer to the heating equipment efficiencies in ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 6.8.1
tables.
• H03: HVAC Cooling Performance Improvement (ASHRAE 90.1-2019 11.5.2.2.3).
o Refer to the cooling equipment efficiencies in ASHRAE 90.1-2019, Section 6.8.1
tables.
• L06: Reduce Interior Lighting Power (ASHRAE 90.1-2019 11.5.2.5.6).
o Determine the interior lighting power allowance using the ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Section 9.6 Alternative Compliance Path: Space-by-Space Method.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 314
Points are awarded dependent on project scope, up to a maximum of 5 points:

• New Construction. One point for each 25 ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy
credits documented for eligible measures.
• Core and Shell — projects with central systems. One point for each 13 ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits documented for eligible measures. This
encompasses any project with Core and Shell scope of work that includes central
boilers, chillers, service water heating equipment, or loop pumping systems with heat
rejection such as water- or ground-source heat pump loops.
• Core and Shell — projects without central systems. One point for each nine
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits documented for eligible measures.

Example. Path 1. Regulated Loads, Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019

A New Construction retail project in climate zone 4A achieves 52 energy credits from three
eligible measures, earning two LEED Points.

• H02: HVAC Heating Performance Improvement. 20% or greater weighted average

improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-2019 heating efficiency achieves 28 energy credits
per 90.1-2022, Table 11.5.3-6 and adjustment equations from 11.5.2.2.2.
• L04: Increased Daylighting Control Area. 65% of total daylighting area with
continuous daylight dimming achieves four energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Table 11.5.3-6.
• L06: Reduce Interior Lighting Power. 10% or greater improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 regulated lighting power achieves 20 energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2019,
Table 11.5.3-6 and allowed adjustments from 11.5.2.5.6.

ECeligible = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06

ECeligible = 28 + 4 + 20 = 52

Ineligible measures such as E01: Improved Envelope Performance or R01: On-site Renewable
Energy do not contribute towards achievement of points under Case 1.

Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022

Minimum Required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Projects earn 4 New Construction points or 2 Core and Shell points for complying with EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency, Option 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the prescriptive method. Any
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2 efficiency measures may be used to achieve the minimum
energy credits required by 2022 Section 11 for the project’s building type and climate zone.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 315
However, per ASHRAE 90.1-2022 11.5.2, the combined contribution of renewable and load
management measures is limited to 60% of the total required energy credits.

Incremental energy credits

For additional LEED points, projects must achieve incremental energy credits above the
minimum required for prescriptive method compliance. These incremental energy credits must
be from the list of eligible HVAC, lighting, service water heating, or building mass/night flush
measures rather than the full list of measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2.

To assess achievement of incremental energy credits (ECinc):

• Identify the minimum energy credits required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 (ECreq).
• Determine the total combined energy credits achieved using AHRAE 90.1-2022, Section
11 from eligible measures and from non-eligible measures (ECtotal).
• Determine the total combined energy credits achieved from the list of eligible measures.
(ECeligible).
• The quantity of incremental energy credits achieved is equal to the lesser of the energy
credits from eligible measures, or the total combined energy credits minus the energy
credits required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.

ECinc = Minimum (ECeligible, ECtotal – ECreq)

Points are awarded dependent on project scope:

• New Construction. Earn one point for each 25 incremental ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Section 11 energy credits documented for eligible measures, up to a maximum of three
additional points.
• Core and Shell projects with central systems. Earn one point for each 13 incremental
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits documented for eligible measures, up to
a maximum of four additional points. Central systems refer to LEED BD+C: Core and
Shell scope of work that includes central boilers, chillers, service water heating
equipment, or loop pumping systems with heat rejection such as water- or ground-
source heat pump loops.
• Core and Shell projects without central systems. Earn one point for each nine
incremental ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 energy credits documented for eligible
measures, up to a maximum of 4 additional points.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 316
Example 1
A new construction two-story retail project in climate zone 4A earns five LEED points: four points
for complying with ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the prescriptive method and one additional point
for achieving at least 25 incremental energy credits above the minimum required from the list of
eligible measures.

Per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table 11.5.3-6, the project must achieve at least 50 energy credits to
comply with ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the prescriptive method.

ECreq = 50

• The project documents achievement of 97 total energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Section 11.
• H02: HVAC Heating Performance Improvement. 20% or greater weighted average
improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-2022 heating efficiency achieves 28 energy credits.
• L04: Increased Daylighting Control Area. 65% of total daylighting area with continuous
daylight dimming achieves four energy credits.
• L06: Reduce Interior Lighting Power. 10% or greater improvement in ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 regulated lighting power achieves 20 energy credits.
• E01: Improved Envelope Performance. 4.5% improvement in envelope performance
factor achieves 45 energy credits.

ECtotal = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06 + EC_E01

ECtotal = 28 + 4 + 20 + 45 = 97

• 52 of these energy credits are from measures eligible for LEED points (H02, L04, and
L06).

ECeligible = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06

ECeligible = 28 + 4 + 20 = 52

• The project achieves 47 incremental energy credits above the minimum required for
prescriptive method compliance.

ECinc = Minimum (ECeligible, ECtotal − ECreq)

ECinc = Minimum (52, 97 − 50) = 47

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 317
Example 2.
The project referenced in Example 1 adds a roof-mounted photovoltaic array with a rated
capacity of at least 0.75 W/sq. ft. (8.1 W/sq. m.) of the project’s gross floor area, achieving 30
energy credits for measure R01: On-site Renewable Energy, and maximizing the combined
allowable ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 contribution for renewable and load management
credits. This results in achievement of six total LEED points for Path 1: four points for complying
with ASHRAE 90.1-2022 using the prescriptive method, and two additional points for achieving
at least 50 incremental energy credits above the minimum required from the list of eligible
measures.

• ECreq = 50
• The project documents achievement of 127 total energy credits per ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Section 11.

ECtotal = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06 + EC_E01 + EC_R01

ECtotal = 28 + 4 + 20 + 45 + 30 = 127

• 52 of these energy credits are from measures eligible for LEED points (H02, L04, and
L06).

ECeligible = EC_H02 + EC_L04 + EC_L06

ECeligible = 28 + 4 + 20 = 52

• The project achieves 52 incremental energy credits above the minimum required for
prescriptive method compliance.

ECinc = Minimum (ECeligible, ECtotal − ECreq)

ECeligible = Minimum (52, 127 − 50) = 52

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 318
Eligible Measures for Path 1

Table 1. Eligible measures from ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2 for LEED points
HVAC measures Lighting measures
H01: HVAC System Performance L01. Lighting System Performance
Improvement (ASHRAE 90.1-2022, (not included in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, but may
Addendum j). be in future ASHRAE addenda)
(cannot be used in conjunction with H02,
H03, or H06)
H02: HVAC Heating Performance L02: Lighting Dimming and Tuning
Improvement
H03: HVAC Cooling Performance L03: Increase Occupancy Sensor
Improvement
H04: Residential HVAC Controls L04: Increase Daylight Area
H05: Ground-Source Heat Pump L05: Residential Light Controls
H06: DOAS/Fan Controls L06: Light Power Reduction
H07: Guideline 36 Sequences
Service Water Heating (SWH) measures Load management measures
W01: SHW Preheat Recovery G07: Building Mass/Night Flush
W02: Heat-Pump Water Heater
W03: Efficient Gas Water Heater
W04: SWH Pipe Insulation
W05: Point-of-Use Water Heaters
W06: Thermostatic Balancing Valves
W07: SHW Submeters
W08: SHW Distribution Sizing
W09: Shower Drain Heat Recovery

The remaining measures referenced in ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11.5.2 are ineligible for
incremental LEED points, since these measures are separately rewarded in other LEED credits:

• E01: Improved Envelope Performance rewarded in EAc2: Reduce Peak Thermal Loads
• P01: Energy Monitoring is rewarded under EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 2,
Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx)
• R01: Renewable Energy rewarded in EAc4: Renewable Energy
• Q01: Efficient Elevator Equipment and Q02: Efficient Kitchen Equipment rewarded in
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1, Path 2. Plug and Process Loads.
• G01 to G06: Load Management measures rewarded in EAc6: Grid Interactive.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 319
Maximum achievable points
Lower quantities of available ASHRAE 90.1-2022 energy credits from eligible measures for
some project types and climate zones place further limitations on the maximum available LEED
points for these applications, as shown in Table 2.

Table 2. Maximum LEED points availability for Option 1, Prescriptive Path, Path 1. Regulated
Loads (New Construction)
Building Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019 Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022
type
Maximum Climate zones Maximum Climate zones
points points
Multifamily 5 All 7 All
Healthcare 5 0B, 1B, 2A, 0A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 3C, 7 All
4A, 5C, 6A, 6B, 7, 8
4 1A, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B
Office 4 0A, 0B, 1A, 1B, 2A, 2B, 6A, 6B, 7 All
7, 8
3 3A, 3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B,
5C
Hotel Motel 5 0A, 0B, 1A, 1B, 2A, 3A, 6A, 6B, 7 All
7, 8
4 2B, 3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B,
5C
Restaurant 5 0A, 0B, 1B, 4A, 5A, 5B, 6A, 6B, 7 All except 3C
7, 8
4 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 4B, 4C, 5C 6 3C
2 3C
Retail 5 0A, 0B, 1A, 1B2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 7 All
4A, 6A, 6B, 7, 8
4 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B, 5C
Warehouse 5 6A, 8 7 0A, 0B, 1A, 1B, 4A,
5A, 5B, 6A, 6B, 7, 8
4 5A, 6B, 7 6 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 3C,
3 0A, 0B, 1A, 1B, 4A, 5B 4B, 4C, 5C
2 2A, 2B, 3A, 3B, 3C, 4B, 4C, 5C
Education 5 0A, 0B, 1B, 1A, 2A, 2B, 3A, 8 7 All
3B, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4C, 5A, 5B, 5C,
4
6A, 6B, 7
2 All except 0A 6 All except 0A
Other
1 0A 5 0A

Equivalence to ASHRAE 90.1

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence to ASHRAE
90.1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 320
To be eligible to apply EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, Option 1, Prescriptive Path, Path 1.
Regulated Loads, projects using an ASHRAE 90.1-equivalent standard must use a prescriptive
method from the equivalent standard: compliance must be demonstrated per category of
building systems (building envelope, HVAC, lighting, service water heating, etc.), without trade-
offs between system categories.

For projects that use a standard other than ASHRAE 90.1 or International Energy Conservation
Code (IECC) for prerequisite compliance, projects must apply the methodology in ASHRAE
90.1-2022, Section 11 to achieve points under Path 1:

• Case 1. Prescriptive values from the ASHRAE 90.1-2019-equivalent standard for

efficiencies such as lighting power density allowance or equipment efficiency may
replace ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 referenced values.
• Case 2. Four New Construction points or two Core and Shell points are automatically
rewarded for prescriptive compliance with an ASHRAE 90.1-2022-equivalent standard.
For additional points, projects must document achievement of ASHRAE 90.1-2022
Section 11 credits, including:
o The minimum required credits for the project type and climate zone AND
o Incremental credits above the minimum required from the list of eligible measures.

For projects that use the International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) prescriptive method
for prerequisite compliance, energy credits from IECC-2024, Section C406 Additional Efficiency
Renewable and Load Management Requirements may directly replace energy credits from
ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Section 11 Additional Efficiency Requirements. Projects must exclusively
use either ASHRAE 90.1-2022 or IECC-2024 to document achievement of energy credits.
Eligible measures from IECC-2024 C406 are limited to HVAC (H01 to H05), Lighting (L01 to
L06), and Service Water Heating (W01 to W10).

• Case 1: Implement additional efficiency credits calculated per IECC-2024 C406 from the
list of eligible measures. Prescriptive values from IECC-2021, Sections C402–C405 such
as lighting power density allowance and equipment efficiency may replace IECC-2024,
Section 11 referenced values.
• Case 2
o Four New Construction points or two Core and Shell points are automatically
rewarded for compliance with IECC-2024, Sections C402–C406.
o Implement incremental C406 credits, above the minimum required from the list of
eligible measures.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 321
District energy
Projects may optionally account for District Energy System (DES) efficiency when assessing
energy credits for Case 1 and incremental energy credits beyond the minimum required for
Case 2:

• H02: HVAC Heating Performance Improvement or H03: HVAC Cooling Performance

Improvement. Calculate the heating and/or cooling capacity weighted-average
improvement separately for the DES system, and for the building systems. Use the
peak DES capacity supplied to the building and the sum of equipment capacity on-
site to calculate the heating and/or cooling capacity-weighted average improvement
for the combined systems.
• H05: Ground-Source Heat-Pump System. Demonstrate that the credit requirements
are met by a Ground-Source Heat-Pump District Energy System serving the project.
• W02: Heat-Pump Water Heater or W03: Efficient Gas Water Heater. Demonstrate
that the credit requirements are met for a District Heating System serving the project.

PATH 2. PLUG AND PROCESS LOADS

Path 2 places a spotlight on plug, process, cooking, refrigeration, and elevator/escalator system
energy use that represent 30% to 50% of building energy usage yet are only partially or
peripherally addressed through ASHRAE 90.1 standard requirements.

Projects may apply Case 1 in conjunction with Case 2, or document compliance with Case 1,
Case 2, or Case 3 independently (Case 3 is only available for New Construction).

Case 1. Plug Load Management (New Construction and Core and Shell)
A plug load dashboard empowers building occupants to actively engage in reducing building
energy consumption from plug loads. For projects with required monitoring and recording of
receptacle use at 15-minute intervals per EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting, the dashboard
should visualize this data and compare receptacle energy consumption to the prior interval
annually, monthly, daily, and hourly. The dashboard is only required to show usage for
receptacle circuits but may optionally address other process usage (such as elevators), or other
building end-uses (such as lighting or HVAC energy).

New Construction
The dashboard must be accessible to all regular building occupants. For buildings with multiple
tenants or multiple floors, the dashboard may be configured so that an individual user sees only
the receptacle usage for common areas and for their space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 322
Buildings that have Information Technology (IT) departments operating in the building must also
develop and implement policies for monitors, visual displays, personal computers, and laptops
to be controlled off or in a very low power mode when not in use, except during scheduled
maintenance periods.

Core and Shell

The dashboard must be configured with the capability for all regular building occupants to view
common area receptacle usage and include functionality enabling each tenant manager to
provide their occupants with access to plug load data specific to the tenant space. The project
design must include a plug load monitoring system feeding into the plug load dashboard,
including the capability for expandability to monitor future plug loads for each floor and for each
individual tenant spaces.

Case 2. Efficient Plug and Process Load Equipment (New Construction and Core and Shell)
Case 2 provides a streamlined path for rewarding plug and process equipment efficiency. The
path is best suited for projects where a significant proportion of the project’s plug and process
load consists of equipment referenced in Table 2.

New Construction
One point is rewarded for each equipment category where at least 90% of applicable project
equipment in the project scope meets the efficiency criteria, up to a maximum of three points.

Up to 90% of applicable equipment may be assessed using either equipment quantity or rated
load:

• Equipment quantity. Divide the total quantity of equipment that meets the efficiency
criteria for the equipment category by the total quantity of applicable equipment within
the project scope for the equipment category.
• Rated load. For applicable equipment in the equipment category, divide the sum of
rated load for equipment that meets the efficiency criteria by the sum of rated load for all
equipment within the project scope.

Either include or exclude all applicable equipment reused in the project from the calculations.
Reused ENERGY STAR® products are deemed compliant even when not meeting current
ENERGY STAR® specifications.

To ensure a measurable impact on project performance, Table 2 criteria for both ENERGY
STAR® products and categories specify a minimum 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq. m.) of eligible
equipment per unit of gross floor area. Credit gets rewarded as one consolidated Table 2

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 323
equipment category when the project has less than 0.1 W/sq. ft. (1.1 W/sq. m.) of rated load for
each individual ENERGY STAR® Products Equipment Category but exceeds this value for the
sum of the two categories.

New Construction: Process-intensive buildings

Process-intensive buildings such as data centers, restaurants, or refrigerated warehouses have
greater potential to achieve substantial building energy savings from a single Equipment
Category. Therefore, projects with combined equipment load from the equipment categories in
Table 2 totaling at least 0.5 Watt/sq. ft. (5.4 W/sq. m.) of gross floor area may assess
compliance based on 90% of total applicable equipment rated load rather than per equipment
category. All applicable equipment from all Table 2 equipment categories must be included in the
assessment of credit compliance.

Core and Shell

The credit rewards efficiency measures implemented for plug and process equipment commonly
within the Core and Shell scope of work. Points are rewarded per Core and Shell Table 2 for
each equipment category with project scope meeting the credit criteria, up to a maximum of
three points. To be eligible for credit, all equipment installed within the project scope of work for
the referenced equipment category must meet the credit criteria. For example, for a project with
multiple elevators and escalators, each elevator and escalator that is eligible for an ISO 25745
rating must achieve at least a Class-A rating to qualify for points under the people conveyance
equipment category.

Equivalence to ENERGY STAR® products

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional paths addressing equivalence
to ENERGY STAR® products.

Case 3. Plug and Process Load Exceptional Calculation (New Construction only)
Case 3 primarily applies to project applications with unique plug and process loads largely
unaddressed by Table 2 equipment categories (such as manufacturing or laboratory) or projects
where the streamlined methodology from Cases 1 and 2 insufficiently reveals magnitude of
impact for plug and process efficiency measures implemented for the project. Case 3 cannot be
combined with Case 1 or Case 2.

Project analysts must use the ASHRAE 90.1, Section G2.5 exceptional calculation method to
demonstrate a minimum percentage improvement in total plug and process energy usage
compared to a baseline representative of standard practice for a similar newly constructed
building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 324
Perform a detailed assessment to determine the total estimated annual building energy
consumption from all plug and process equipment, even when regulated under ASHRAE 90.1:

• Receptacle equipment
• Cooking equipment
• Refrigeration equipment
• Conveyance equipment including elevators, escalators, or moving walkways
• Process heating or process cooling (e.g., for manufacturing processes)
• Data center IT equipment and Electrical Loss Component
• All other process energy used to support a manufacturing, industrial, or commercial
activity other than conditioning spaces and maintaining comfort and amenities for the
occupants of a building.

For projects where startup plug and process energy usage projections are lower than estimated
full build-out usage, use either the full build-out usage or a lesser value representing the
maximum plug and process usage possible from the building power and thermal energy
generation capacity installed in the project scope of work.

For each process efficiency measure implemented in the project, document that the efficiency
measure is not conventional practice. Examples include:

• A recent study with researched tabulations or monitored data establishing standard

practice for the given application in similar newly constructed facilities.
• A new-construction utility or government program that provides incentives for the
measure.
• A document showing the systems used to perform an analogous function in similar
facilities built or reconstructed within the past 10 years.
• Applicable prescriptive requirements from the version of ASHRAE 90.1 or equivalent
standard used for EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency.

Use the conventional practice references to define the baseline systems. Provide detailed
calculations and supporting narrative justification for any variations in baseline and proposed
energy use.

Option 2. Energy Simulation

Option 2 rewards future source energy improvement below a Performance Index Target (PIt)
documented per ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Performance Rating Method (PRM). The credit
structure prioritizes efficiency over on-site renewable energy, setting the performance

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 325
improvement thresholds more than three times higher for Path 2 (including on-site renewable
contribution) than for Path 1 (excluding on-site renewable contribution).

For credit compliance assessment, apply simple additional calculations to the outputs from the
ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G PRM energy models used to document EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency, adjusting the metric, treatment of renewable energy, and/or Building Performance
Factor (BPF).

• Future source energy. The future source energy metric must be used to assess credit
compliance even when a different metric is used to document prerequisite compliance.
• Building Energy Factor (BPF). Performance Index Target (PIt) must be calculated
using LEED-published BPFs derived for the future source energy metric.
• Treatment of on-site renewable energy.
o The on-site renewable energy contribution must either be fully excluded for Path 1 or
fully included for Path 2.
o The Performance Index Target (PIt) includes no adjustments for renewable energy,
unlike ASHRAE 90.1-2022 which adjusts for prescriptively required on-site
renewable energy.

Further energy savings may also be documented for plug and process and/or district energy
efficiency measures that do not contribute towards prerequisite compliance.

Future source energy metric

All projects must use the future source energy metric for credit compliance. This metric reflects
the average environmental impact of building energy consumption through 2050, considering
the primary energy sources and their associated emissions.

Future source energy conversion factor (primary energy factor)

The terms source energy and source energy conversion factor referenced below may be used
interchangeably with the corresponding terms primary energy and primary energy factor (PEF)
commonly used in the European Union (EU).

Source energy is defined as the site energy plus the estimated energy consumed or lost in the
extraction, processing, and transportation of primary energy forms such as coal, oil, natural gas,
biomass, and nuclear fuel; energy consumed in conversion to electricity or thermal energy; and
energy consumed or lost in transmission and distribution to the building site.

Source energy conversion factors must be at least one for all electricity and combustible fuel
sources.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 326
Electricity
For electricity, future source energy is determined using a national average electric site-to-
source conversion factor rather than a more granular determination by grid region or province to
enable broader comparison of building energy efficiency across the entire spectrum of projects,
and to account for the interconnectedness of electric grids.

For projects located in the U.S., use a national average electricity source energy conversion
factor of 2.0 based on projections through 2050.

Projects located in other countries must use this same source energy conversion factor of 2.0 or
provide data supporting a lower average source energy conversion factor for the project’s
country. EU-average values may be used instead of the national average for projects in the
European Union. The source energy conversion factor must be one of the following:

• Current published national- or EU-average source energy conversion factor.

• National- or EU-average source energy conversion factor from the present through 2050
or earlier, determined based on published policy-based grid renewable projections.
Calculate by averaging the current published national or EU-average source energy
conversion factor and the predicted source energy conversion factor for the year 2050 or
earlier or by an average that accounts for year-to-year source energy projections.

For example, projects in Europe may use the current default factor from the EU directive (1.9 as
of this publication94), a lower published factor from the project’s EU member state, or a factor
determined based on policy-based published grid renewable projections through 2050 for the
EU or the project’s member state.

More granular future source energy conversion factors per state, province, or eGRID region are
not allowed because these necessitate greater complexity of the EAc3: Enhanced Energy
Efficiency credit requirements and increase ambiguity in comparative results.

Fuel
Use one of the following references for conversion factors:

• ENERGY STAR® Portfolio Manager Technical Reference: Source Energy

• Natural Gas source energy conversion factor = 1.09 per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Table I5-1.
• ASHRAE 100-2024, Table 5-2 or ASHRAE 228, Table 4.

94Directive (EU) 2023/1791 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 13 September 2023 on energy efficiency and
amending Regulation (EU) 2023/955 (recast) (Text with EEA relevance), https://eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/dir/2023/1791/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 327
 • Published national or EU-average source energy conversion factor conforming to the
definition of source energy provided above.

District Energy Systems (DES)

For projects that directly model purchased heat and/or purchased chilled water as independent
sources, refer to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency, District Energy Systems (DES), Method B.

Source energy factors published by the DES provider or calculated for a campus DES system
must conform to the definition of source energy provided above.

Future source energy metric

The future source energy metric prioritizes energy efficiency, limiting trade-offs with
decarbonization measures recognized in other LEED credits. Other metrics used for code
compliance or EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency are not applicable for EAc3: Enhanced Energy
Efficiency:

• Energy costs can fluctuate due to market conditions, subsidies, and other economic
factors, skewing the representation of the environmental footprint of energy use for the
cost metric.
• A site energy metric overemphasizes the decarbonization already credited under EAc1:
Electrification.
• A greenhouse gas emissions metric overemphasizes the decarbonization already
credited under EAc1: Electrification and EAc4: Renewable Energy.

Building performance factor

Performance Index Target (PIt) must be calculated using LEED-published Building Performance
Factors (BPFs) derived for the future source energy metric.

For major renovations or projects with existing building area in the project boundary, multiply the
LEED-published BPFs by 1.05 for the proportion of existing building area associated with each
building area type.

NEW CONSTRUCTION
Reference New Construction Table 5. 90.1-2019, Equivalent Building Performance
Factors for a Future Source Energy Metric. For projects that document prerequisite
compliance using ASHRAE 90.1-2022, this directly rewards the differential future source
energy savings from ASHRAE 90.1-2019 to ASHRAE 90.1-2022.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 328
 CORE AND SHELL
Case 1. ASHRAE 90.1-2019: If the prerequisite was documented using ASHRAE 90.1-
2019 Appendix G PRM, use Building Performance Factors from Core and Shell Table 4.
90.1-2019, Equivalent Building Performance Factors for a Future Source Energy Metric.

Case 2. ASHRAE 90.1-2022: If the prerequisite was documented using ASHRAE 90.1-
2022 Appendix G PRM, use Core and Shell Table 5. 90.1-2022, Equivalent Building
Performance Factors for a Future Source Energy Metric. Future source energy less than
or equal to the Performance Index Target automatically achieves three points without
crediting on-site renewable energy (Path 1), or two points when counting on-site
renewable energy (Path 2).

Treatment of on-site renewable energy

The Performance Index Target (PIt) for EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency omits the ASHRAE
90.1-2022 4.2.1.1 PRE adjustment for prescriptively required on-site renewable energy,
matching the ASHRAE 90.1-2019 equation for PIt:

PIt = [BBUE + (BPF x BBRE)] / BBP

To determine the Performance Index (PI), either fully exclude the renewable contribution for
Path 1, or fully include the renewable contribution for Path 2.

PATH 1. PERCENTAGE REDUCTION EXCLUDING ON-SITE RENEWABLE

CONTRIBUTION
Path 1, the default energy simulation path, focuses solely on energy efficiency, requiring energy
savings at or near achievable technical potential for maximum achievement of points.

This path does not recognize any on-site renewable contribution for the project (striking out
ASHRAE 90.1 G2.4 on-site renewable energy guidance). Calculate the proposed building
performance with total proposed design energy for all electricity, fuel, and district energy use,
regardless of whether this energy is purchased or generated from on-site renewable systems.

PATH 2 PERCENTAGE REDUCTION INCLUDING ON-SITE RENEWABLE

CONTRIBUTION
Path 2 applies primarily to project types that have limited opportunities for incremental energy
savings beyond the referenced standard, such as unconditioned warehouses; and to projects
that generate a large proportion of total building energy from on-site renewables.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 329
Consistent with ASHRAE 90.1 G2.4, this path credits the on-site renewable contribution for the
project. Prior to calculating the proposed building performance (PBP), subtract eligible on-site
renewable energy generation from the proposed design energy consumption. Total savings
documented for on-site renewable electricity generation can be up to 100% of building electricity
use on an annual basis. To qualify for credit compliance, the on-site renewable energy must be
installed and commissioned within the project scope of work or an earlier scope of work on the
site of a contiguous campus with all renewable attributes allocated to the project.

Plug and process efficiency

For EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, projects may document credit for plug and process
efficiency using ASHRAE 90.1, G2.5 Exceptional Calculation Method.

Document that each process efficiency measure is not conventional practice. Provide detailed
calculations and narrative justification supporting the future source energy savings claimed.
(See additional guidance above from Option 1, Path 2, Case 3 Plug and Process Load
Exceptional Calculation). To convey the magnitude of impact associated with process efficiency
measures, the energy analyst must separately report the Performance Index, Performance
Index Target, and all associated terms with- and without- the process efficiency savings.

District energy
For EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, energy analysts may optionally replace prescriptive
purchased heat and purchased chilled water efficiencies modeled per ASHRAE 90.1-2022,
Addendum a with improved virtual DES efficiencies representative of the DES purchase heat
and purchased chilled water systems serving the project.

Provide an engineering analysis based on monitored data and/or energy simulation to justify the
improved virtual DES efficiencies modeled for the project. For each DES source, virtual DES
efficiency must account for total annual energy required to generate and distribute the district
energy. Include all pump energy use from the DES and within the project, thermal distribution
losses, heat rejection, and all operational effects influencing efficiency such as standby losses,
equipment cycling, equipment staging, and partial-load operation. When thermal distribution
losses are not measured or modeled, estimate default losses of 5% for chilled water, 10% for
hot water, 15% for closed-loop steam, and 25% for open-loop steam.

No further adjustments are required to a Baseline Building Performance model with purchased
heat and purchased chilled water documented per ASHRAE 90.1-2022, Addendum a in EAp2:
Minimum Energy Efficiency.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 330
Combined Heat and Power
To limit undue credit for site-recovered energy from Combined Heat and Power (CHP) with on-
site combustion emissions, projects must model CHP systems using one of the following
methods instead of ASHRAE 90.1 G2.4.2.1:

• CHP in baseline and proposed. Model CHP systems including all fuel inputs and
associated site-recovered energy identically in the baseline design and the proposed
design.
• Purchased electricity in baseline and proposed. Model purchased electricity instead
of the on-site electricity generation. Either credit site-recovered energy from the CHP
towards the thermal loads for the baseline and proposed design identically or ignore the
site-recovered energy contribution in the baseline and proposed design).
• CHP in proposed; purchased electricity in baseline. Model CHP systems including all
fuel inputs and associated site-recovered energy in the proposed design. Model the
baseline design per ASHRAE 90.1 with purchased electricity and with no credit for site-
recovered energy.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New Option 1 Path 1: Case 1 Demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Construction and 2 Efficiency.
and Path 1: Case 1 List options showing prescriptive compliance with
Core and and 2 ASHRAE 90.1 2019.
Shell Path 2: Case 1 IT department policies for plug load controls.

Evidence of a plug load dashboard accessible to all

regular occupants of the building (specifications,
photos, screenshots, etc.)
Path 2: Case 2 Provide documentation demonstrating the ISO 25745
rating for people conveyance equipment (as
applicable).
Provide the design ELC calculation following methods
in Informative Appendix C, and calculation for the
percentage of reduction from ASHRAE 90.4-2022
maximum design electrical loss (as applicable).
Provide refrigeration equipment cut-sheets (as
applicable).
Provide refrigerated warehouse design documents to
verify compliance with California Title 24-2022 Section
120.6 (as applicable).
Provide documentation for the Baggage Handling
Equipment Individual Carrier System, such as
specifications or cut sheets, to verify the installation of
variable frequency drives (as applicable).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 331
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Provide documentation for the Preconditioned Air
(PCA) Systems, such as specifications or cut sheets, to
verify efficiencies meeting ASHRAE 90.1 prescriptive
efficiencies for HVAC equipment (as applicable)
Option 2 Path 1 and Link to EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency.
Path 2
USGBC MEPC.

New Option 1 Path 2: Case 2 Evidence of ENERGY STAR® equivalency

Construction documentation for non-rated equipment (as applicable).
Applicable plug and process load equipment power
density and calculated percent meeting the required
criteria. Including equipment, rated power, and quantity
(either including or excluding all reused equipment).
Path 2: Case 3 Plug and process load exceptional calculation and
documentation.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527).
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082).
• ASHRAE 100-2024 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standard-100)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 332
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

RENEWABLE ENERGY
EAc4
New Construction (1–5 points): 100% of site energy use from any combination of Tier 1, Tier 2,
and Tier 3 renewable energy is required for LEED Platinum projects.
Core and Shell (1–4 points): 100% of base building energy use from any combination of Tier 1,
Tier 2, and Tier 3 renewable energy is required for LEED Platinum projects.

INTENT
To encourage and recognize the use of renewable energy to reduce environmental and
economic impacts associated with fossil fuel energy use and increase the supply of new
renewable energy within the electrical grid, fostering a just transition to a green economy.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–5
Option 1. Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement 1–5
Core and Shell 1–4
Option 1. Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement 1–4
AND/OR
Option 2. Renewable Energy Readiness 1

Option 1. Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement (1–5 points New

Construction, 1–4 points Core and Shell)
Supply or procure renewable energy meeting the renewable energy criteria referenced below.
Points are rewarded according to Table 1.

Points documented for Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 renewable energy may be added together up
to a maximum of 5 points:

Table 1. Points for renewable energy procurement for New Construction projects
Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3
Percent of Percent of Percent of
Points Minimum Rated
OR Annual Site Annual Site Annual Site
Capacity1
Energy Energy Energy
A * 1 W/sq. ft.
1 OR 5% 20% 50%
(A * 10.8 W/sq. m.)
A * 2 W/sq. ft.
2 OR 10% 40% 100%
(A * 21.6 W/sq. m.)
3 20% 60%

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 333
 Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3
Percent of Percent of Percent of
Points Minimum Rated
OR Annual Site Annual Site Annual Site
Capacity1
Energy Energy Energy
4 35% 80%
100% Tier 1 and/or Tier 2
5
renewable energy
*A = the sum of gross floor area of all floors up to the three largest floors.

Core and Shell only

Points documented for Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 renewable energy may be
added together up to a maximum of 4 points, based on the percentage of total
annual base building site energy use, where base building energy use is defined
as the greater of the estimated site energy consumption from base building
energy meters or 25% of the total estimated building energy use:

Table 2. Points for renewable energy procurement for Core and Shell projects

Points Tier 1 Tier 2 Tier 3

Minimum Rated OR Percent of Annual Percent of Annual Percent of Annual

Capacity1 Base Building Base Building Site Base Building Site
Site Energy Energy Energy

1 A* 1 W/sq. ft. OR 15% 35% 100%

(A* 10.8 W/sq. m.)

2 A* 2 W/sq. ft. OR 30% 70% 200%

(A* 21.6 W/sq. m.)

3 65% 100%

4 100% 200%

*A = the sum of gross floor area of all floors up to the three largest floors.

Renewable Energy Criteria

Renewable energy classifications
TIER 1: ON-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY GENERATION OR SOCIAL IMPACT
PROJECT

The renewable generation equipment may be located:

• On the project site.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 334
 • On the campus on which a project is located.
• On the site of a social impact project, provided that the renewable power system is
provided, installed, and commissioned at no cost to the social impact entity, that the
ownership of the renewable power system is transferred to the social impact entity, and
that the rights to the power provided be given to the social impact entity.

TIER 2: NEW OFF-SITE RENEWABLE ELECTRICITY

Off-site renewable electricity produced by new generation asset(s):

• Contracted to be operational within two years of building occupancy, OR

• Contracted no more than five years after commercial operations date

TIER 3: OFF-SITE RENEWABLE ENERGY

• Off-site renewable electricity that is Green-e® Energy certified or equivalent.

• Renewable fuels that are Green-e® Energy certified or equivalent.

Renewable energy contract length

• Contract length shall be 10 years or prorated across 10 years for shorter contract lengths.

Renewable energy environmental attributes

• Ownership: All environmental attributes (energy attribute certificates, EACs) or
renewable energy certificates, RECs) associated with renewable energy generation
must be retired on behalf of the LEED project for the renewable energy procurement to
contribute to credit achievement.
• Project energy source: Renewable electricity generation and EAC/REC procurement
can only be applied to project electricity use or district energy use up to 100% of annual
electricity plus district energy use. Renewable fuels can only be applied to project fuel
use or district heat up to 100% of annual fuel plus district heat use.

Core and Shell only

Renewable electricity generation and EAC procurement can only be applied to
project electricity use or district energy use up to 100% of total estimated building
annual electricity plus district energy use. Renewable fuels can only be applied to
project fuel use or district heat up to 100% of total estimated building annual fuel
plus district heat use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 335
 • Vintage: EACs credited to the project must be generated no earlier than 18 months
before the LEED project’s initial application submission date.
• Location: Tier 2 and Tier 3 renewable assets must be in the same country or region
where the LEED project is located.
• Tier 2 bulk purchase: Green-e® Energy certification or equivalent is required for one-
time purchase or annual purchase of EACs or renewable power totaling more than 100%
of the tenant’s annual electricity use.

AND/OR

Option 2. Renewable Energy Readiness (1 point) — Core and Shell only

Design the project for renewable energy readiness. Document renewable energy readiness
features in the project design and provide tenant guidelines indicating how tenants can leverage
these features to install renewable energy capacity for their tenant space. Tenant guidelines
shall include a copy of the construction documents or a comparable document indicating the
information below. Projects shall either document solar readiness in accordance with the criteria
below or an equivalent solar readiness standard, or document equivalent on-site renewable
energy readiness for another qualifying renewable energy source.

SOLAR READINESS
Solar zone
A designated solar zone shall be included in the project design.

• Designate a dedicated solar zone area equal to at least 40% of the gross roof area.
• Conduct an analysis to determine the most appropriate location for optimal location of
the solar zone, avoiding shading from trees, buildings, etc., and accounting for future
construction that may result in shading.
• Perform a wind and load analysis and confirm that the roof or other structure
encompassing the solar zone is designed to accommodate all mounting configurations
identified in the tenant guidelines.
• Total area shall be comprised of areas that have no dimension less than five feet and are
no less than 160 square feet.
• No obstruction, such as vents, chimneys, or roof-mounted equipment, shall be in the
solar zone or planned for future installation in the solar zone.
• Any obstruction located on the roof or other part of the building that projects above a
solar zone shall be located at least twice the distance, measured in the horizontal plane,
of the height difference between the highest point of the obstruction and the horizontal
projection of the nearest point of the solar zone, measured in the vertical plane.
(Exceptions: projects located within 10 degrees of the earth’s equatorial plane, or any

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 336
 obstruction located north of all points of the solar zone in the northern hemisphere, or
any obstruction located south of all points of the solar zone in the southern hemisphere.)
• All sections of the solar zone located on steep-sloped roofs shall have an azimuth range
between 90 degrees and 300 degrees of true north.
• If the project is intended to include future mechanical or electrical equipment in or near
the solar zone, tenant guidelines shall include a sample plan showing how the
equipment can be installed to maintain the integrity of the solar zone.

Mounting considerations
• Identify the panel-mounting options most likely to be implemented in a future solar panel
installation. Provide documentation confirming that the roof warranty is not affected by
the future installation of solar panels. Install roof-penetrating mounts at the time of roof
installation if analysis indicates roof-penetrating mounts are best-suited for the project
application. Roof-penetrating mounts must be designed to limit thermal bridging and
included in the envelope commissioning.

Interconnection pathways
• Construction documents shall indicate locations reserved for inverters and metering
equipment, and a pathway reserved for routing of conduit from the solar zone to the
point of interconnection with the electrical service. For projects with high service water
heating loads where there is the potential for the solar zone to be used for water heating,
construction documents shall indicate a pathway for routing of plumbing from the solar
zone to the water heating system.

Electrical service
• The main electrical service panel shall have a minimum busbar rating of 200 amps.
• The main electrical service panel shall have a reserved space to allow for the installation
of a double pole circuit breaker for a future solar electric installation. The reserved space
shall be permanently marked as “For future solar electric”.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONSTRUCTION

This credit promotes renewable energy generation and procurement, reducing the impacts of
fossil fuel use and supporting grid decarbonization.

Option 1. Renewable Supply or Procurement

The credit establishes a three-tier hierarchy for renewable energy, preferentially rewarding
renewable energy supply and procurement that has the most direct and long-term impacts on
building decarbonization:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 337
 • Tier 1. On-site renewable energy generation or social impact project
• Tier 2. New off-site renewable electricity
• Tier 3. Off-site renewable energy

Projects may choose to supply or procure renewable energy from Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3
renewable energy for a maximum of five points.

For all three tiers of renewable energy, the project team should first confirm that the project will
comply with the credit requirements for renewable energy environmental attributes and
renewable contract length before proceeding with procurement and/or installation of the
renewable energy.

RENEWABLE ENERGY CLASSIFICATIONS

Tier 1: On-site Renewable Energy Generation or Social Impact Project
On-site renewable energy generation when strategically integrated with grid-interactive
strategies can increase the building resilience and support effective grid management.

To qualify as a Tier 1 renewable system, the renewable energy must be produced and
generated either on the project site, the site of the contiguous campus where the project is
located, or the site of a social impact project.

ELIGIBLE TIER 1 RENEWABLE RESOURCE TYPES

Eligible Tier 1 renewable energy resources include:

o Solar electric (photovoltaic)

o Solar thermal (i.e., for service water heating or hot water heating)
o Wind
o Recovered heat from municipal wastewater

Only usable energy generated from the renewable system shall be considered towards
the Tier 1 renewable energy contribution. Usable energy is defined as the output energy
from the system less any transmission and conversion losses, such as standby heat
loss, losses when converting electricity from DC to AC, or waste heat that is exhausted
to the atmosphere. Sell the excess energy beyond the building’s energy demand at a
given point to the utility company (net metering) when all associated renewable
attributes are retained by the project owner. Net metered electricity may count toward
the renewable contribution up to 100% of annual electricity and district energy use.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 338
 Additional considerations: non-qualifying systems
Renewable fuels harvested, produced, or refined offsite and used to generate
thermal energy or electricity onsite are classified as Tier 3 renewable energy and
don’t count as Tier 1 renewable energy.

TIER 1 SOCIAL IMPACT PROJECT

Project owners may opt to install renewable energy on the site of a social impact project
with a capital investment like that incurred for installing a new renewable system on their
own project site. A social impact project is defined as a building or project site providing
housing and/or community services to historically marginalized communities. Examples
include but are not limited to affordable housing projects, community centers, schools, or
recreational facilities serving historically marginalized communities.

For social impact projects, the social impact project owner who owns, operates, and/or
occupies the building will have no financial burden for the renewable equipment, the
installation, or the commissioning of the renewable system. The social impact project
owner must gain ownership of the system. They will have the right to power generated
from the new system. This provides affordable clean power that will result in permanent
cost savings to members of historically marginalized communities.

For residential social impact projects, residents responsible for paying their own
electricity bills must receive proportionate cost savings for the renewable power
generation. Renewable generation may be allocated first to central water heating and
HVAC equipment serving the residential units before proportioning the remainder to the
residents.

Additional considerations: Non-qualifying Tier 1 social impact projects

Most community renewable energy installations do not comply with the social
impact project requirements for location of the renewable system and permanent
transfer of ownership and rights to the power to the social impact project owner.

TIER 1 COMMISSIONING
Tier 1 renewable systems must be installed and commissioned per EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning. For projects pursuing EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning, Option 1, Path
1: Enhanced Commissioning for MEP Systems, Tier 1 renewable systems must also
comply with the commissioning criteria for that credit. Qualifying for the credit requires
completing the functional testing of renewable before the final LEED Certification
application.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 339
The commissioning provider for an equity or campus renewable project may be different than
the project’s commissioning provider. Documentation of previous commissioning of equity or
campus renewable projects is acceptable, provided it complies with the EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning and EAc5: Enhanced Commissioning requirements. For existing campus or
equity systems that were not commissioned during the original system design and construction,
re-commissioning of the system is required.

TIER 1 METHODS FOR DEMONSTRATING COMPLIANCE

To achieve points in Tier 1 on-site renewable energy systems a project must either install
the minimum rated capacity of on-site renewable energy as a function of project area for
the three largest floors or install qualifying renewable energy that will generate the
specified percent of the project’s annual site energy. Projects may quickly calculate
compliance using either method and apply the method that leads to greatest
achievement of points.

TIER 1 MINIMUM RATED CAPACITY METHOD FOR DEMONSTRATING

COMPLIANCE
The minimum rated capacity method is most appropriate for multi-story building projects
or projects with high process loads not capable of supplying a significant proportion of
building site energy use through on-site renewable energy.

The area (A) used to calculate the minimum rated capacity is the sum of the gross
project floor area of all the floors up to the three largest floors. This value refers to the
project dimensions, regardless of whether the renewable system is installed on the
project site, on the campus, or on the site of a social impact project.

o For projects with three floors or less, A is equal to the total gross floor area of the
project.
o For multi-story buildings with equal floor plates across all floors, A is equal to three
times the floor plate area.
o For all other projects, A is determined by identifying the three largest floors and
summing the area for these three floors.

Use the area (A) to calculate the required minimum rated capacity of renewable energy
for up to two points. For solar photovoltaic panels, use the Direct Current (DC) rated
capacity, without degrading for system losses.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 340
Table 3.
Points Minimum rated capacity
IP units SI units
1 A x 1.0 Watt/sq. ft. A x 10.8 Watt/sq. m.
2 A x 2.0 Watt/sq. ft. A x 21.6 Watt/sq. m.

For a building taller than three stories, the minimum required rated capacity corresponds
to:

o Approximately 20% of gross roof area covered by solar photovoltaics for one point,
OR
o Approximately 40% of gross roof area covered by solar photovoltaics for two points.

The 1-point threshold for minimum rated capacity is double the value of on-site
renewable energy prescriptively required by ASHRAE 90.1-2022 without exceptions.

TIER 1 PERCENT OF ANNUAL SITE ENERGY METHOD FOR DEMONSTRATING

COMPLIANCE
This method is most appropriate for projects with three or fewer floors that have
relatively low process loads. Projects must use the percent of annual site energy method
when documenting more than two points for Tier 1 renewable energy.

Tier 2: New Off-site Renewable Electricity

Age of the renewable generator marks the key difference between Tier 2 and Tier 3 qualified
electricity generation resources. Tier 2 requires new off-site renewable power either from
generators contracted to be built and operational within two years of building occupancy or from
generators with a commercial operations date (COD), no more than five years before the
execution of the purchase contract.

OLDER CONTRACTS
It is acceptable to use older long-term purchase contracts to comply with the COD
requirement, provided that the contract shows the COD for the generators occurred less
than five years before the contract was executed, and the allocated energy generation
from the contract meets all Renewable criteria below. For example, a 20-year purchase
contract for newly installed wind power executed 10 years ago allocated to the project in
accordance with Renewable criteria below qualifies as Tier 2 renewable energy.

Tier 3: Off-site Renewable Energy

Tier 3 encompasses both renewable electricity that is Green-e® Energy-certified or equivalent,
and renewable fuels certified to the Green-e® Renewable Fuels standard or equivalent.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 341
For renewable electricity, the Commercial Operations Date of the renewable power generator
may be up to fifteen years old to meet the Green-e® Energy Generator Age and New Date
criteria.

Eligible renewable electricity resource types: Tiers 2 and 3

Eligible renewable power generation resources for Tier 2 and Tier 3 electricity include:

• Solar electric (Photovoltaics)

• Wind
• Geothermal energy (electricity or heat generated from subterranean steam or hot water)
• Ocean-based energy (such as wave or tidal energy conversion)*
• Low-impact hydropower*
• Biomass production*

These renewable electricity generation sources should meet the criteria in Green-e®
Framework for Renewable Energy Certification, Section IIIA, Renewable Resource Types,
including any applicable location-specific criteria (e.g., Section II. Eligible Sources of Supply
from the Green-e® Renewable Energy Standard for Canada and the United States).

Nearly all solar electric, wind, and geothermal power generation systems that meet the
Green-e® New Date criteria qualify as Green-e® renewable resource types.

By contrast, many hydropower, biomass power generation, and ocean-based energy systems
do not meet the Green-e® Framework criteria governing those system types. If considering a
renewable resource that is not wind or solar and is not Green-e® certified, review applicable
Green-e® criteria to confirm resource eligibility.

For instance, in the United States, hydropower must meet one of the following criteria per the
Green-e® Renewable Energy Standard for Canada and the United States, Section II. Eligible
Sources of Supply:

• New generation capacity on a non-impoundment, OR

• New generation capacity on an existing impoundment from a hydropower facility certified
by the Low Impact Hydropower Institute (LIHI), or from a hydropower facility consisting
of a turbine in a pipeline or in an irrigation canal.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 342
 Additional considerations: Geoexchange systems ineligible
Geoexchange systems such as geothermal heat pumps that use vapor
compression cycles are not considered a renewable energy resource. These
systems are credited in EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency.

Eligible Tier 3 Renewable Fuel Resource Types

For any fuel used on the project site or for district heating, the project may procure renewable
fuel that is Green-e® certified or equivalent. The Green-e® renewable fuels standard certifies
biomethane—also called renewable natural gas (RNG) — that meets specific production facility
and feedstock criteria and is purified to meet gas pipeline specifications.

Annual Site Energy Determination (For Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 Percent of Annual Site Energy)
For New Construction, annual site energy refers to the total building annual site energy use
including electricity, on-site fuel use, and district thermal energy. This includes all regulated and
unregulated energy use.

Exclusion of energy for electric vehicle charging

Exclude energy for electric vehicle charging of vehicles used for off-site
transportation purposes if this electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) is
separately metered from the main building energy use.

Renewable energy procurement may be contractually linked to a percentage of monthly

metered data for each project energy source, summing together to the renewable percent of
annual site energy claimed for the project, or annual site energy may be estimated for the
project.

ANNUAL SITE ENERGY ESTIMATION: ENERGY SIMULATION

Projects using energy modeling to demonstrate compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency must use the proposed building performance before accounting for renewable
energy credit as the basis for annual site energy.

o For projects referencing the ASHRAE 90.1, Appendix G Performance Rating Method
(PRM), use the site energy consumption for the proposed building performance
(PBP) without any credit for the on-site renewable energy contribution.
o For projects referencing the ASHRAE 90.1, Energy Cost Budget Method (ECB), use
the site energy consumption for the proposed design without any credit for the on-
site renewable energy contribution.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 343
 ANNUAL SITE ENERGY ESTIMATION: PRESCRIPTIVE PATH
Projects using the prescriptive method to show compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy
Efficiency must rely on estimations from EAp1: Operational Carbon Projection and
Decarbonization Plan to determine total annual site energy for renewable energy credit
calculations. Break down the site energy into electric, fuel, and district energy
consumption.

Additional considerations
Refer to the District Energy Guidance for optional site energy adjustments that
may be applied for district energy use.

RENEWABLE ENERGY CRITERIA

Contract Length
Projects must retain energy attribute certificates (EACs) for the annual renewable energy
generation for a minimum of 10 years. Contractual documentation must show ownership of the
EACs for the required duration. Examples include a ten-year contract for renewable power from:

• Tier 1. Third party-owned on-site renewable energy system

• Tier 2. Virtual Power Purchase Agreement (VPPA)
• Tier 3. Green Tariff

For contract durations shorter than 10 years, prorate the renewable energy across 10 years. For
a one-time bulk purchase of renewable energy, the annual renewable energy quantity allocated
to the project is the total purchase quantity divided by 10.

For older contracts, only count the remaining time left in the contract no earlier than 18 months
before the initial submission date for LEED certification (consistent with the Vintage criteria
below).

For Tier 3 renewable energy where a ten-year contract is not available, project teams may show
compliance with the 10-year minimum contract term by demonstrating the following:

• The project has an executed contract for a minimum of one year, or where contracts are
not available per regulatory requirements, document that the project has been enrolled
in the Green-e® or equivalent utility tariff for a minimum of one month. AND
• The building owner must provide a signed letter of commitment indicating that the project
will remain continuously enrolled in the 100% renewable Green-e® or equivalent utility
tariff, or alternate 100% Green-e® or equivalent procurement source for a minimum of
10 years (or the number of years documented for credit if less than 10 years).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 344
Environmental Attributes
When procuring off-site electricity, environmental attributes must meet specific requirements for
ownership, source, vintage, and location.

An energy attribute certificate (EAC) is a transferrable certificate, record or guarantee used to

track the environmental attributes for a unit of energy and the rights to those attributes.
Examples of EACs include Renewable Energy Certificates (RECs) and Guarantees of Origin
(GOs), where one REC or one GO corresponds to one Megawatt-Hour (MWH) of renewable
electricity.

OWNERSHIP
Ownership of the renewable energy environmental attributes must reside with the LEED
BD+C project, demonstrated through retirement of the energy attribute certificates
(EACs) on behalf of the LEED project.

If the renewable attributes are not retained by the project owner, the renewable project is
disqualified from credit compliance. For example, if the project cedes ownership of the
RECs from on-site photovoltaics in exchange for a utility incentive, the system is
ineligible for credit.

The renewable energy contract shall not permit replacement of EACs from one project
with that of a different renewable energy project (referred to as REC Arbitrage) unless
the contract specifies that the replacement EACs meet all relevant LEED criteria. For
example, the contract shall not allow replacement of Tier 2 EACs with those of an asset
older than five years at the time of contract execution.

PROJECT ENERGY SOURCE

Renewable electric generation from Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 can only be applied to
electricity or district thermal energy up to 100% of total combined electricity and district
thermal energy.

Tier 3 renewable fuels can only be applied to project fuel use or district heat up to 100%
of the total combined fuel and district heat.

Therefore, if the project uses any fuel on-site:

o The qualifying combined Tier 1 and Tier 2 energy use as a percentage of annual site
energy will be less than 100%.
o The project must procure both Tier 3 electricity and Tier 3 renewable fuel to achieve
100% Tier 3 renewable energy required for two points.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 345
 VINTAGE
Renewable energy cannot be generated more than 18 months before the initial
submission date for LEED certification.

A one-time purchase of EACs or RECs cannot occur more than 18 months before the
initial submission date for LEED Certification unless the terms of the purchase
agreement ensure renewable energy generation occurs no earlier than the referenced
date.

Allocation of renewable power to the project from a multi-year contract must be limited to
power generation beginning 18 months prior to LEED initial submission.

LOCATION
For projects in large countries such as the U.S., India, and China, the renewable energy
must be generated in the same country as the project. For projects in smaller countries
such as those in the European Union, the renewable energy must be generated in the
same multi-country geographical region as the project, provided that these countries
share an interconnected electric utility grid or that EACs are unavailable in the project’s
country.

TIER 2 BULK PURCHASES

Tier 2 bulk purchases totaling more than 100% of the project’s total combined annual
electricity and district energy usage require Green-e® Energy certification (or
equivalent). This ensures the proper level of transparency and verification necessary to
confirm additionality and environmental impact associated with the EACs.

GREEN-E® EQUIVALENCE
Projects not using Green-e® certified products for Tier 2 bulk purchases or for Tier 3 electricity
or fuel must demonstrate equivalency to the Green-e® requirements.

For electricity, the EACs retired on behalf of the LEED Project must:

• Be certified under an eco-label or similar program developed by an independent

organization or government entity with transparent accounting process and standards in
place.
• Be from an eligible renewable energy resource (see Green-e® Framework for
Renewable Energy Certification, Section IIIA, Renewable Resource Types, and
additional regional requirements as applicable, i.e., Appendix D: Green-e® Renewable

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 346
 Energy Standard for Canada and the United States, Section II (Eligible Sources of
Supply).
• Be from renewable assets that have come online within the last 15 years, or for projects
outside the U.S., the eco-label program may instead include provisions ensuring
incremental environmental benefits for assets older than 15 years.
• Have a verifiable chain of custody.
• Have a mechanism to prevent double counting.

For Tier 3 fuel, the EACs retired on behalf of the LEED Project must have a mechanism to
prevent double counting and meet one of the following criteria:

• Certified under an eco-label or similar program developed by an independent

organization with transparent accounting process and standards in place, OR
• Officially recognized as a renewable fuel source in the country, province, state, or locality
in which the project is located.

DISTRICT ENERGY SYSTEMS (DES)

District Energy Systems Fueled by Renewable Energy
For District Energy sources fueled by renewable energy, projects may either allocate this
renewable energy towards credit compliance, or exclude the renewable energy proportion from
the project’s annual site energy determination:

ALLOCATION OF DES RENEWABLE ENERGY TO THE PROJECT

For each district energy source serving the project, assign the project the proportion of
DES input energy that meet the LEED requirements for each Tier of renewable energy:

o Tier 1. On-site renewable electricity generation or solar thermal energy generation at

the District Energy Plant.
o Tier 2. New off-site renewable electricity.
o Tier 3. Green-e® or equivalent off-site renewable electricity for DES electricity
inputs, or Green-e® or equivalent fuel for DES fuel inputs.

For example, allocate the project Tier 3 renewable fuel totaling 60% of the project’s annual
district heating energy consumption for a district heating system with 60% of annual energy
inputs from Green-e® or equivalent fuel. EACs must be retained by either the DES supplier or
the project owner to be eligible for this approach.

In place of documentation showing a 10-year contract for renewable fuels, the project may
submit evidence of annual DES renewable percentage achieved for the most recent three years

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 347
of operation and provide narrative confirmation justifying that ongoing achievement is
anticipated at or above the specified level.

OR

EXCLUSION OF DES RENEWABLE ENERGY PROPORTION FROM ANNUAL SITE

ENERGY DETERMINATION
For each district energy source fueled by renewable energy, exclude this proportion of
renewable energy from the annual site energy determination. To be eligible for exclusion,
the renewable energy shall either be an Eligible Renewable Electricity Resource Type or
an Eligible Tier 3 Renewable Fuel Resource Type per the descriptions above, or shall be
classified as renewable energy by national, state, or local policy governing the project
location.

For example, for a district heating system fueled by 70% biofuel classified as renewable
in the project’s country, include only the 30% of project district heating associated with
non-renewable fuel inputs in the annual site energy determination used for credit
compliance.

Annual Site Energy Adjustments for District Energy Systems (optional)

For projects where the high efficiency associated with district chilled water generation artificially
inflates total estimated site energy consumption, projects may optionally apply either the DES
Multiplier or the Virtual DES Efficiency to all District Energy System (DES) sources serving the
project:

DES Multiplier
• Multiply total reported site energy consumption for purchased chilled water by 0.325.
• Multiply total reported site energy consumption for purchased heat by 1.2.

Virtual DES efficiency in EAc3 Enhanced Energy Efficiency

Projects crediting DES efficiency towards the project performance in EAc3: Enhanced Energy
Efficiency by modeling the proposed district energy use as virtual on-site chilled-water and hot-
water plants may optionally use the total modeled site energy consumption from this proposed
rather than separating out the site energy consumption for purchased chilled water and
purchased hot water.

In the energy simulation, use submetering to distinguish fuel used onsite from the modeled fuel
use for the district hot water plant. Per the Renewable Attributes, Project Energy Source criteria,
either renewable electricity generation or renewable fuel may be applied to the submetered fuel

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 348
and/or electricity use associated with the district heating system, whereas only renewable fuel
may be applied to fuel used on the project site.

DES Site energy adjustments are not applicable to projects modeled using ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2022, Addendum a. Projects applying Addendum a should use submetering to distinguish
fuel used onsite from the modeled fuel used for the district hot water plant.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: CORE AND SHELL

Core and Shell options afford enhanced flexibility for developers to implement renewable energy
supply, procurement, and/or readiness strategies. Projects may achieve all four available points
through Option 1. Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement or one point for Option 2.
Renewable Energy Readiness and up to three points under Option 1.

Option 1. Renewable Energy Supply or Procurement (Core and Shell)

Core and Shell projects may choose to supply or procure renewable energy from Tier 1 or Tier 2
for a maximum of four points, from Tier 3 for a maximum of two points, or from any combination
of Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 renewable energy for a maximum of two points.

The Tier 1 Minimum Rated Capacity Method for Demonstrating Compliance is identical for New
Construction and Core and Shell, with no differences in the required thresholds.

By contrast, for Core and Shell, the percentage of annual site energy is calculated using the
base building site energy rather than the total building site energy referenced in New
Construction, more closely aligning the required percent procurement with the core and shell
scope of work.

Annual base building site energy determination (for Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3)
To calculate the annual base building site energy use:
• Perform the total annual site energy determination described above. Include all building
energy consumption inclusive of base building energy use tenant use.
• Estimate the total annual site energy consumption from base building energy meters,
including:
o Meters for equipment fully contained within the project scope of work, such as
elevators, parking garage lighting and ventilation, site lighting, common area lighting,
common area HVAC, and common area receptacles and process equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 349
 o Meters for shared building systems serving tenants (i.e., chiller plant, boiler plant,
central water heating, shared VAV air handling units, and dedicated outside air
handling units).

Annual base building site energy use is equal to the total annual site energy consumption from
base building energy meters when this comprises more than 25% of estimated total annual site
energy use.

Otherwise, the base building site energy use is 25% of total annual site energy use.

Option 2. Renewable Energy Readiness

For projects where financial and leasing considerations preclude large on-site renewable energy
installations within the Core and Shell scope of work, Option 2 incentivizes developers to
incorporate renewable energy readiness features into the project design to enable future on-site
renewable energy installation by tenants.

Projects must design for solar readiness in accordance with the Solar readiness credit criteria or
a similar standard, or document equivalent on-site renewable readiness for another qualifying
renewable energy source such as wind energy or solar thermal energy.

Tenant guidelines must integrate guidance on how tenants can use this available infrastructure
to apply on-site renewables to their project.

SOLAR READINESS
A design for solar readiness must include one or more solar zones, and address mounting
considerations, interconnection pathways, and electrical capacity per the detailed criteria in the
credit requirements.

Solar zones
Solar zones set aside designated spaces to house future solar energy generation equipment
and provide the necessary structural support to accommodate the equipment. The design team
must perform a wind and load analysis to inform the solar zone design and design the roof or
other supporting structure with the structural integrity to accommodate the solar installation. The
solar zone should avoid shaded areas or obstructions from other equipment, maximizing the
potential for solar collection.

Mounting considerations
The solar zone must be designed to accommodate all panel-mounting options identified in the
tenant guidelines. For roof-penetrating mounts, it may be necessary to install these mounts
within the Core and Shell scope of work to ensure the future integrity of the roofing system.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 350
Envelope commissioning must address any potential impact of the roof mounts on the building
enclosure integrity, including thermal bridging and/or moisture intrusion.

Interconnection pathways
Dedicated areas must be designed for future inverters and metering equipment, and pathways
reserved for conduit routing. These interconnection pathways must specifically address
anticipated tenant design configurations. For example, for distributed net-metering of each
tenant’s electricity, the design should accommodate conduit pathways to the projected location
for each tenant electrical panel and should reserve nearby space for inverters and other
equipment. For projects where solar thermal hydronic systems may be installed, the design
should address pathways for routing of plumbing.

Electrical service
Sufficient electrical space must be permanently reserved and marked for future solar electric
use within the main electrical service panel.

LEED Platinum Requirements

To achieve LEED Platinum, projects must supply 100% of energy usage from any combination
of Tier 1, Tier 2, and/or Tier 3 renewable energy:

• New construction. 100% of total annual site energy usage

• Core and Shell. 100% of total annual base building site energy usage

Refer to the Project Priorities Library for regional compliance alternatives.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All All For third-party-owned systems, provide a purchase letter
Construction or contract of commitment showing renewable energy for
and targeted point threshold, including confirmation of
Core and renewable attribute ownership, quantity of renewable
Shell energy, type of renewable energy, country or region,
duration of contract, and commercial operations date
(COD).
Confirmation of renewable attribute ownership by building
owner.
For shared RE attributes, provide confirmation of
allocation of attributes to the project. Documentation from
owner’s representative confirming the capacity/generation
that is allocated to the project building and confirming that
this capacity/generation will double count toward any
other LEED projects, only for projects that share on-site

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 351
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
renewable resources with other buildings on a campus,
and/or share off-site renewable resources with other
buildings in a portfolio.
Tier 1 Plans or documentation confirming Tier 1 renewable
systems and their rated capacity (DC and AC).
Documentation showing the system meets the
requirements for a social impact project.
Calculation for Tier 1 renewable energy system rated
capacity per floor area W/sq. ft. using Equation 1 and
Equation 2.
Gross building area of the three largest floors (if using the
area-based approach for Tier 1).
Tier 2 and Evidence that EACs meet
Tier 3 ownership/vintage/location/Green-e® or equivalent
requirements as applicable.
New All All Calculator showing percent of annual site energy per Tier
Construction (1,2,3).
Documentation describing method and/or calculations for
determining annual site energy consumption if values are
adjusted due to DES (as applicable).
Core and All All Calculator showing percent of annual base building site
Shell energy per Tier (1,2,3).
Documentation describing method and/or calculations for
determining annual base building site energy
consumption.
Option 2 Documentation demonstrating equivalent onsite
renewable energy readiness for an alternative qualifying
renewable energy source.
Confirm an analysis was conducted for the solar zone
location, including considerations for wind and load, and
explaining how the solar zone meets the credit
requirements. Additionally, identify the selected mounting
option.
Confirm that the roof warranty is not affected by the future
installation of solar panels.
Confirm that tenant guidelines have been provided and
developed, including dimensioned construction
documents (e.g., building roof plans, elevations, and site
plan) showing the designated solar zone, obstructions,
and location reserved for inverters and metering
equipment, pathways, future mechanical or electrical
equipment, etc.
Confirm the main electrical service panel’s busbar rating
and the reserved space allocated for the installation of a
double-pole circuit breaker in the main electrical service
panel to accommodate a future solar electric installation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 352
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Green-e® Framework for Renewable Energy Certification (green-
e.org/programs/energy/documents)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 353
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED COMMISSIONING
EAc5
New Construction (1–4 points)
Core and Shell (1–3 points)

INTENT
To further ensure that the building systems function as designed, and that they continue to
maintain energy performance over time.

REQUIREMENTS: NEW CONSTRUCTION

Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–4
Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning 1–3
Path 1. Enhanced Commissioning for MEP Systems 2
AND/OR
Path 2. Enhanced Commissioning for Building Enclosure 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx) 1–2
Path 1. Basic Software 1
OR
Path 2. Enhanced Software 2

Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning (1–3 points)

Owner must designate an independent commissioning provider (CxP) during predesign or very
early in the design phase.

PATH 1. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR MEP SYSTEMS (2 POINTS)

• Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024, Commissioning Process, for
mechanical, electrical, plumbing, control, data center, process, building monitoring, and
renewable energy systems.
• Comply with the following additional requirements:
o During the design phase, attend at least two coordination/design meetings to discuss
review comments and commissioning.
o Prior to or during occupancy, review the training materials to confirm that they meet
the training plan, and confirm that the training occurred.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 354
PATH 2. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE (1 POINT)
Comply with all tasks and deliverables referenced with ASTM E2947-21a, Standard Guide for
Building Enclosure Commissioning, except Sections 7.2.4 and 7.4.3.

Comply with the following field-testing requirements:

• Building air leakage testing, as per ASTM E783, ASTM E779, ASTM E1186, or ASTM
E3158.
• Water penetration testing, as per ASTM E1105 or AAMA 501.2.
• Infrared imaging, as per ASTM C1153 or ASTM C1060.

During occupancy, review the training materials to confirm that they meet the training
requirements provided in the building enclosure commissioning (BECx) plan or specification,
and confirm that the training occurred.

AND/OR

Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx) (1–2 points)

PATH 1. BASIC SOFTWARE (1 POINT)

Process and communications
Commit to implementing MBCx for a minimum of three years, through a contract with an MBCx
provider or qualified monitoring-based commissioning provider (MBCxP) staff person. MBCx
shall commence no later than building occupancy and shall be fully coordinated between the
commissioning provider, facilities management, and MBCxP.

Develop a monitoring-based commissioning plan summarizing the process including all of the
following:

• Roles and responsibilities

• Software technology description, including frequency and duration for trend monitoring
• Review and reporting criteria, including:
o Training of facilities staff
o Expeditious communication of major anomalies or faults identified to facilities staff
o At least quarterly, MBCxP summary of anomalies and faults detected and
communication with facilities staff to discuss and prioritize issues
o At least annually, MBCxP summary reporting of trends, benchmarks, faults, energy
savings opportunities, corrective actions taken, and planned actions
o At least two MBCxP reviews of building systems, equipment, and operational
controls

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 355
Energy information system (EIS)
Provide a remotely accessible platform with software functionality to perform smart analytics
and visually present all metered data referenced in EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting.

Include the following functionality:

• Annual energy benchmarking of energy use intensities

• Comparison of energy consumption to the prior interval annually and monthly; for electric
interval meters, daily and hourly
• For electric interval data, hourly loadshape with comparisons
• Visualization and reporting of hourly electric submetered data

In addition, provide hourly monitoring and visualization of electric energy use for:

• Elevators, escalators, and/or moving walkways.

• Commercial kitchen equipment in spaces with more than 10 kW of rated capacity.
• Process equipment in spaces with more than 10 kW of rated capacity.

OR

PATH 2. ENHANCED SOFTWARE (2 POINTS)

Comply with Path 1 AND provide the following enhanced monitoring and software technology
functionality:

• Fault detection and diagnostics (FDD) for projects with large HVAC or refrigeration
capacity. For total project installed capacity of cooling, heating, or refrigeration systems
exceeding 7,200 kBtu/hr (600 tons or 2,110 kW), provide a remotely accessible FDD
system that addresses at least 60% weighted by capacity of:
o Air-handling equipment AND
o Large hydronic or commercial refrigeration equipment (chillers, boilers, etc.)

• The FDD system must include the following functionality:

o Perform smart analytics and visually present FDD data
o Direct link from reported fault to view relevant trend data
o Fault sorting and filtering
o Exporting of fault reports (summary reports and detailed individual faults)
o Data historian capable of storing critical trend data for at least three years

• Energy information system (EIS)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 356
 o For major renovations and buildings less than 25,000 sq. ft., comply with ASHRAE
90.1, Section 8.4.3 requirements, for measurement devices in new buildings, without
exceptions. Include visualization of this data per Path 1 requirements above and
provide automated reporting of energy use anomalies.

o For all other buildings, include the following additional functionality for the EIS:
• Automated reporting of energy use anomalies
• Normalization of energy consumption
• Greenhouse gas emissions reporting

REQUIREMENTS: CORE AND SHELL

Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–3
Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning 1–2
Path 1. Enhanced Commissioning for Building Enclosure 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Enhanced Commissioning for Building Enclosure and MEP 2
Systems
AND/OR
Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx) 1

Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning (1–2 points)

Owner must designate an independent commissioning provider (CxP) during predesign or very
early in the design phase.

PATH 1. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE (1 POINT)

Comply with all tasks and deliverables referenced with ASTM E2947-21a, Standard Guide for
Building Enclosure Commissioning, except Sections 7.2.4 and 7.4.3.

Comply with the following field-testing requirements:

• Building air leakage testing, as per ASTM E783, ASTM E779, ASTM E1186, or ASTM
E3158
• Water penetration testing, as per ASTM E71105 or AAMA 501.2
• Infrared imaging, as per ASTM C1153 or ASTM C1060

During occupancy, review the training materials to confirm that they meet the training
requirements provided in the building enclosure commissioning (BECx) plan or specification,
and confirm that the training occurred.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 357
OR

PATH 2. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE AND MEP

SYSTEMS (2 POINTS)
Comply with Path 1, AND:

• Comply with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024, Commissioning Process, for

mechanical, electrical, plumbing, control, data center, process, building monitoring, and
renewable energy systems.
• Provide commissioning for components installed within the project scope of work. For
any systems or controls that require future interconnection with tenant systems, provide
templates for future commissioning of these interconnections addressing the most likely
tenant interconnection scenarios in the systems manual and tenant guidelines. At a
minimum, provide these templates for design review checks, functional tests, and
systems manual addenda.
• The CxP must comply with the following additional requirements:
o Attend at least two coordination meetings during the design phase and at least four
milestone meetings during the construction phase to discuss review comments and
commissioning.
o Provide an ongoing commissioning plan.
o During occupancy, review the training materials to confirm that they meet the training
plan, and confirm that the training occurred.

AND/OR

Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx) (1 point)

PROCESS AND COMMUNICATIONS
Commit to implementing MBCx for a minimum of three years, through a contract with an MBCx
provider or qualified monitoring-based commissioning provider (MBCxP) staff person. MBCx
shall commence no later than building occupancy and shall be fully coordinated between the
commissioning provider, facilities management, tenants, and MBCxP.

Develop a monitoring-based commissioning plan summarizing the process including all the
following:

• Roles and responsibilities

• Software technology description including frequency and duration for trend monitoring
Review and reporting criteria including:
o Training of facilities staff
o Expeditious communication of major anomalies or faults identified to facilities staff

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 358
 o At least quarterly, MBCxP summary of anomalies and faults detected and
communication with facilities staff to discuss and prioritize issues
o At least annually, MBCxP summary reporting of trends, benchmarks, faults, energy
savings opportunities, corrective actions taken, and planned actions
o At least two MBCxP reviews of building systems, equipment, and operational
controls

AND

ENERGY INFORMATION SYSTEM (EIS)

Provide a remotely accessible platform with software functionality to perform smart analytics
and visually present all metered data referenced in EAp4Energy Metering and Reporting, and to
be expandable to include all tenant data referenced in EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting.
Include the following functionality:

• Annual energy benchmarking of energy use intensities

• Comparison of energy consumption to the prior interval annually and monthly, and for
electric interval meters, daily and hourly
• For electric interval data, hourly loadshape with comparisons
• Visualization and reporting of hourly electric submetered data
• For tenant spaces > 10,000 sq. ft. (930 sq. m.), tenant portal with capability to provide
visualization and reporting of:
o Base building data for shared systems serving the tenants and
o Tenant electricity energy use (excluding shared systems)

In addition, provide hourly monitoring and visualization of electric energy use for:
• Elevators, escalators, and/or moving walkways.
• Commercial kitchen equipment in spaces with more than 10 kW of rated capacity.
• Process equipment in spaces with more than 10 kW of rated capacity.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONTRUCTION

The credit rewards projects that provide commissioning beyond the EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning requirements. Option 1 requires early engagement of a Commissioning Provider
to lead a comprehensive commissioning process spanning from pre-design through the
warranty period.

Option 2 requires the implementation of a monitoring-based commissioning process that verifies

ongoing performance post-occupancy leveraging automated data analytics and reporting.
Projects can combine Options 1 and Option 2 to achieve up to four points.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 359
Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning
Option 1 offers two compliance paths. Projects can combine Paths 1 and 2 to achieve a total of
three points. Enhanced commissioning activities for MEP systems or the building enclosure will
lead to optimized system performance and further integration of the CxP into the design and
post-occupancy efforts in a new construction project.

Enhanced commissioning provides substantial value for the limited additional efforts beyond
EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning. EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning Tables 1 and 2
provide a comparison of the ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Commissioning Requirements for the
prerequisite versus the credit requirements from ASHRAE Standard 202 for MEP systems and
ASTM E2947-2021 for the building enclosure, along with typical milestones for key tasks to
occur.

Projects that achieve both paths under Option 1 will automatically achieve EAp3: Fundamental
Commissioning.

PATH 1. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR MEP SYSTEMS

ASHRAE Standard 202-2024
ASHRAE Standard 202-2024 outlines the commissioning process for mechanical, electrical,
plumbing, control, data center, process, building monitoring, and renewable energy systems. It
is a systematic process that begins in the early design phase and continues through the
warranty or post-occupancy phase. Along with the ASHRAE Standard 202-2024 requirements,
teams must also comply with incremental LEED BD+C requirements.

EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, Table 1 provides a detailed comparison of the ASHRAE

Standard 90.1, Commissioning Requirements for the prerequisite and the ASHRAE Standard
202 requirements for Enhanced Commissioning of MEP systems. The table also provides timing
for each task.

Timing of CxP Engagement

ASHRAE 202 requires CxP review of the Owners Project Requirements (OPR) and initial
development of the Commissioning Plan during pre-design, necessitating very early
engagement of the CxP in the design process. If the CxP is engaged after pre-design, take
alternative measures ensuring alignment with the intent of the Standard 202 timeline.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 360
 Examples of acceptable CxP engagement after pre-design

⚫ Portfolio applications where the OPR and Cx Plan at the predesign phase
are like other projects.

⚫ A qualified employee of the owner provides the initial review of the OPR and
initial draft of the Cx Plan and CxP is designated early in design development to
continue the analysis.

Commissioning Scope
The enhanced MEP commissioning scope must comprehensively address alignment with the
OPR, expanding the focus beyond energy and GHG emissions to address water efficiency, air
quality, and thermal comfort. Commissioned systems must include the following if in the project
scope:

• Mechanical (HVAC and refrigeration, including any process heating or cooling systems
in the project).
• Electrical (lighting, receptacle power).
• Plumbing (indoor fixtures, service water heating, pool equipment, etc.).
• Data center (electrical, cooling, humidity; identify a mechanism for evaluating whether
server equipment efficiency targets are met).
• Building monitoring. Include all monitoring systems required by ASHRAE 90.1, as well
as any Energy Information System and Fault Detection and Diagnostic (FDD) systems
referenced in Option 2.
• On-site renewable systems, including all Tier1 systems credited in EAc4: Renewable
Energy.
• Controls. Include systems credited in EAc6: Grid Interactive.

Additional LEED Tasks

LEED appends additional required tasks to those referenced in ASHRAE 202-2024:

MINIMUM OF TWO DESIGN PHASE MEETINGS

Early CxP involvement in design phase meetings aids complete integration of
commissioning requirements and recommendations from the CxP into the final
construction documents. Using these early interactions also leads to collaborative
discussions and collectively addressing the CxP’s design review comments.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 361
 REVIEW OF TRAINING MATERIALS
Facility staff training represents a critical step between the construction phase and post-
occupancy. Before or during occupancy, the CxP must review training material to confirm
that the training documents meet the training plan and sufficiently address the OPR and
BOD. The CxP must also confirm that training occurred.

PATH 2. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE

Addressing the performance of the building enclosure (also referred to as the building envelope)
is as important as the MEP systems. For certain project types, the building enclosure may be
the most important factor for continued building energy performance. The credit requires
projects to follow a comprehensive process that includes all tasks referenced in ASTM E2947-
21a, Standard Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning, except Section 7.2.4 and 7.4.3
ASTM Standard E2974-21a.

Building Enclosure Commissioning Provider (BECxP)

ASTM E2974-21a requires a Building Enclosure Commissioning Provider (BECx) to lead and
implement the Building Enclosure Commissioning Process. The entity serving as the BECxP
performs each required task or delegates it to the appropriate member. The BECxP must be
proficient in core competencies for enclosure-related design, construction, and performance.

The CxP and the BECxP can be the same entity or distinct entities.

TIMING OF BECXP ENGAGEMENT

E2947-21a, Section 6 describes the pre-design phase tasks, which require BECxP
engagement by pre-design. If the BECxP is engaged after pre-design, take alternative
measures ensuring alignment with the intent of E2947-21a timeline.

Examples of acceptable BECxP engagement after pre-design

⚫ Portfolio applications where the OPR and Cx Plan at the predesign phase
are like other projects.

⚫ A qualified employee of the owner provides the initial review of the OPR and
initial draft of the Cx Plan and CxP is designated early in design development to
continue the analysis.

Minimum field testing

At minimum, field testing must include air leakage testing, water penetration testing, and
infrared imaging, if applicable to the project scope:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 362
 • Air leakage testing. Provide field testing of air leakage using one of the referenced
ASTM or ANSI standards. ASTM E783 evaluates air leakage through windows and
doors. ASTM E779 uses the fan-pressurization method for testing. ASTM E1186
provides an array of methods for evaluating air leakage. ASTM E3158 provides a
standard method for testing large or multizone buildings. ASTM E1827 determines air
tightness using an orifice blower door. Residential spaces in mixed use buildings may
also apply ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380.
• Water penetration testing. For projects with scope of work including fenestration or
exterior doors, apply ASTM 1105 or AAMA 501.2 to provide water penetration of
installed exterior windows, skylights, doors, and curtain walls. Otherwise, water
penetration testing is not required.
• Infrared imaging. ASTM C160 is appropriate for envelope scope of work that includes
framed members. For scope that includes a roof with insulation above deck, ASTM
C1153 can be used to locate wet insulation. Otherwise, infrared imaging is not required.

EAp3: Fundamental Commissioning, Table 2 compares the ASHRAE 90.1 Commissioning

Requirements for the prerequisite and the ASTM E2947-21a requirements for Enhanced
Commissioning of the Building Enclosure. The table also provides the timing for each task.

Option 2. Monitoring-Based Commissioning (MBCx)

Monitoring-based commissioning enables building operators to identify operational issues as
they occur, facilitating achievement of the project’s performance goals on an ongoing basis.
Both Paths 1 and 2 require an Energy Information System (EIS) that enables visualization,
analytics, and automated reporting of the metered data referenced in EAp4: Energy Metering
and Reporting; and a minimum three-year commitment to implement monitoring-based
commissioning (MBCx) informed by the EIS. Path 2 requires enhanced monitoring and software
functionality.

SELECTING AN MBCX PROVIDER

Contract with a third-party MBCx Provider (MBCxP) for a minimum three-year timeframe or
designate a qualified MBCxP on the building operations team. The MBCxP must have direct
experience on similar projects. Many MBCxP’s have a programming or controls integration
background and extensive experience with Energy Information System (EIS) and Fault
Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) technologies.

The MBCxP can be the same as the CxP or can be a different entity. If the CxP and the MBCxP
are different entities, a communication plan must be established so both entities can coordinate
during the construction phase and the warranty period.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 363
MBCX PLAN
Teams must develop a comprehensive MBCx Plan that summarizes the complete process
building operators will follow during the term of the MBCx contract. Refer to the rating system
language for the specific details that must be included in the plan.

Path 1. Basic Software

An Energy Information System (EIS) empowers operators to review trends, identify anomalies,
perform preventative and predictive maintenance, and reduce energy consumption and
greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions over the building’s lifespan.

The EIS system must provide visualization and analytics of the metered data required in EAp4:
Energy Metering and Reporting.

• For new commercial buildings that are at least 25,000 sq. ft. (2,323 sq. m.) and
residential projects with at least 10,000 sq. ft. (929 sq. m.) of common space, the
metered data includes monthly energy use for each non-electric energy source, and
hourly energy use for electricity recorded for the whole project, for each tenant ≥ 10,000
sq. ft. (929 sq. m.), for specific end-uses (HVAC, interior lighting, exterior lighting,
receptacles, and refrigeration), and for on-site renewable electricity generation. Marginal
additional EIS visualization and analytics capabilities are necessary beyond the
ASHRAE 90.1 energy monitoring and recording requirements.

• For major renovations and smaller new buildings, the metered data only includes
monthly energy consumption for each energy source, and monthly peak electric
demand. Unlike EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting, this data must be automatically
transmitted for use in the EIS platform analytics.

The credit further requires hourly monitoring of large electric power uses — like elevators and
commercial kitchen equipment — and incorporation of this data into the EIS reporting.
The EIS system must include all visualization and analytic capabilities referenced in the credit
language.

Path 2. Enhanced Software

Projects that comply with Path 1. Basic Software requirements can achieve an additional point
for providing enhanced monitoring and software functionality to inform the monitoring-based
commissioning.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 364
The path requires the most incremental functionality for projects with large HVAC or refrigeration
capacity, or major renovations, or small new buildings. For all other project applications, this
path only requires three additional functions for the EIS system.

FAULT DETECTION AND DIAGNOSTICS (FDD) FOR PROJECTS WITH LARGE

HVAC OR REFRIGERATION CAPACITY
FDD Software is only required for projects with large HVAC or refrigeration capacity,
where any of the following apply:

o Total project installed capacity of cooling exceeds 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or 2110
kW)
o Total project installed capacity of heating exceeds 7,200 kBtu/h (2110 kW)
o Total project installed capacity of refrigeration exceeds 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or
2110 kW)

FDD is a program procedure for identifying and isolating system operational flaws. FDD
uses data-driven or knowledge-driven techniques. Data-driven techniques include
artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning. Knowledge-driven techniques include
having an FDD specialist use qualitative methods to analyze fault scenarios.95 Refer to
the credit language for minimum required FDD software functionality.

Include fault detection algorithms that address at least 60% of total air handling unit
capacity. Additionally, include fault detection algorithms that address at least 60% of total
combined capacity for large commercial refrigeration systems, large hydronic heating
systems, and large hydronic cooling systems where large systems are defined as a
system with total installed capacity exceeding 7,200 kBtu/h (600 tons or 2110 kW).

Faults assessed may include improper economizer or energy recovery operation, faulty
sensor readings, improper valve and damper operation, improper equipment schedules,
Improper operation of control system reset algorithms (e.g., setpoint always at maximum
value), non-optimal zone temperature setpoints (e.g., lower than recommended
deadband; same values for occupied and unoccupied setpoints), equipment short
cycling, improper chiller and boiler plant lockouts, and unstable/hunting control loop.

ADDITIONAL MONITORING FOR MAJOR RENOVATIONS AND SMALL BUILDINGS

For major renovations and small buildings less than 25,000 sq. ft. (2,323 sq. m.) provide
additional hourly electricity metering for the whole project, for each tenant ≥ 10,000 sq.
ft. (929 sq. m.), for specific end-uses (HVAC, interior lighting, exterior lighting,

95 Mirnaghi, M., and Haghighat, F. (2020), “Fault detection and diagnosis of large-scale HVAC systems in buildings using data-
driven methods: A comprehensive review”, Energy and Buildings, 229, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2020.110492.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 365
 receptacles, and refrigeration), and for on-site renewable electricity generation. (See
ASHRAE 90.1, Section 8.4.3 criteria, ignoring exceptions addressing building area).

The EIS shall provide visualization and analytics of this metered data.

ADDITIONAL EIS SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY

For new construction of buildings larger than 25,000 square feet (2,323 square meters),
provide additional functionality for the EIS:

o Automated reporting of energy use anomalies

o Normalization of energy consumption
o Greenhouse gas emissions reporting

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: CORE AND SHELL

Option 1. Enhanced Commissioning
PATH 1. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE
Same as BD+C: New Construction Option 1, Path 2.

PATH 2. ENHANCED COMMISSIONING FOR BUILDING ENCLOSURE AND MEP

SYSTEMS
To achieve 2 points under Option 1, Core and Shell projects must address both Building
Enclosure and MEP systems. This encourages a focus on the envelope, which often has the
greatest impact on building lifetime performance for the Core and Shell scope of work. Refer to
the additional guidance above for BD+C: New Construction Option 1, Paths 1 and 2.

For Core and Shell projects, commission systems and equipment installed in the base building
scope of work.

Base buildings often install central air handling units or central plant equipment that require
future interconnections to tenant-provided systems or components (such as VAV terminal units,
or fan coils, or water loop heat pumps. For these systems, the CxP must provide templates that
support the tenant in commissioning of these interconnections. These should provide a listing of
key considerations that should be evaluated during design review, sample functional test
procedures, and sample systems manual content that the tenant would include to address the
tenant design.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 366
Option 2. Monitoring-based Commissioning
Meet the same requirements as BD+C: New Construction Option 2, plus:

For Core and Shell projects, the base building EIS must have expansion capability, to ensure all
data identified in EAp4: Energy Metering and Reporting is accessible through the EIS. This
includes metering requirements for future tenants.

Tenant requirements
If the project anticipates future tenants will lease space that is greater than 10,000 sq. ft. (929
sq. m.), install submeters for compliance with EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency. The base
building EIS must include a tenant portal, where tenants can access reports, including visual
representations of the energy consumption. At minimum, tenants must have access to the base
building data for shared systems that serve the tenant space, and the electricity energy use
associated with their space.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All All Final (or Draft) Commissioning Report. If the report is a
Construction draft, include a plan for the completion of commissioning
and and training, including climatic and other conditions
Core and required for performance of any deferred tests.
Shell Option 1 Path 1 Confirmation of compliance with ANSI/ASHRAE/IES
and/or Standard 202-2024 and/or ASTM E2947-21a Standard
Path 2 Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning, except
Section 7.2.4 and 7.4.3 (As applicable)
Confirmation of design phase/milestone meetings
Provide Commissioning Plan and sample FPT Test
scripts (1 sample per discipline)
Owner’s Project Requirements and BOD
Identification of Commissioning Provider including key
personnel (CxP) and Verification and Testing (V&T)
providers (as applicable)
Qualifications of CxP and V&T providers
Confirmation that submittals were reviewed and at least
25% of the contractors’ documents were QA/QC’d
Option 1 Path 1. Provide evidence, such as contract or other
Enhanced documentation, confirming the involvement of CxP
Cx for MEP during predesign or very early in the design phase
Systems
Path 2. Field report or completed test that proves building air
Enhanced leakage testing, water penetration testing, infrared
Cx for imaging was completed
building
Enclosure

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 367
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Option 2 Path 1. Documentation of owner commitment to at least three
MBCx – years of MBCx for the building and identification of key
Basic individual(s) responsible for MBCx (contract, letter
Software signed by owner, job descriptions or other evidence)
MBCx Plan
Narrative describing the EIS, including functionality,
accessibility, and sample graphics. Identify systems
included in the MBCx plan
Option 2 Path 2. Narrative describing the EIS, including functionality,
MBCx – accessibility, and sample graphics. Identify systems
Enhanced included in the MBCx plan. As applicable, confirm
EIS compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 Section 8.4.3 or
additional functionality of EIS.
Path 2. Schedules, drawings, or other documentation confirming
MBCx – FDD devices installed in the system and verification that
Enhanced 60% threshold is met for systems exceeding 600 tons
Software Narrative describing the FDD system functionality,
accessibility, and sample graphics, reports or trends from
the system.
Core and Option Path 1. Confirmation of all construction phase milestone
Shell Enhanced meetings
Cx for MEP
Systems

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 90.1-2019, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2019-i-
p?product_id=2088527)
• ASHRAE 90.1-2022, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-90-1-2022-i-
p?product_id=2522082)
• ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024, (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-
202-2024?product_id=2908468)
• ASTM E2947-21a Standard Guide for Building Enclosure Commissioning, (astm.org/e2947-
21a.html)
• ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 202-2024, (ashrae.org/technical-
resources/bookstore/commissioning)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 368
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

GRID INTERACTIVE
EAc6
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To enhance power resilience and position buildings as active partners contributing to grid
decarbonization, reliability, and power affordability through integrated management of building
loads in response to variable grid conditions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. Energy Storage 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Demand Response Program 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Automated Demand-Side Management 1
Path 1. System-Level Controls 1
OR
Path 2. Building Automation System 1
Option 4. Power Resilience 1

All projects must evaluate grid-interactive measures concerning the current and forecasted grid
context, location, building type, and ownership structure and account for the results in decision-
making.

Interval recording meters and equipment capable of accepting an external signal must also be
provided.

Option 1. Energy Storage (1–2 points)

Provide on-site electric storage and/or thermal storage meeting the criteria in Table 1.

Include automatic load management controls capable of storing the electric or thermal energy
during off-peak periods or periods with low grid carbon intensity and using stored energy during
on-peak periods or periods of high grid carbon intensity.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 369
Table 1. Peak storage capacity relative to peak demand
Storage 1 Point 2 Points
Electric Storage Capacity 0.2 kWh/kW 0.4 kWh/kW
Relative to peak electric demand
Thermal Storage Capacity 1.0 kWh/kW 2.0 kWh/kW
Relative to peak coincident thermal demand (heating or Btu/Btu/hr or Btu/Btu/hr
+ cooling + service water heating + process heat) or ton-hrs/ton or ton-hrs/ton

AND/OR

Option 2. Demand Response Program (1 point)

Enroll in a minimum one-year demand response (DR) contract with a qualified DR program
provider, with the intention of multiyear renewal.

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria.

AND/OR

Option 3. Automated Demand-side Management (1 point)

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria.

PATH 1. SYSTEM-LEVEL CONTROLS (1 POINT)

Provide automated demand response controls for at least two of the following systems installed
within the project scope of work:

• HVAC systems (50% of rated capacity)

• Lighting systems (50% of power)
• Automatic receptacle controls
• Service water heating (90% of capacity)
• Electric vehicle supply equipment

OR

PATH 2. BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (1 POINT)

Develop a plan for shedding at least 10% of the project’s peak electricity demand for a minimum
of one hour. The plan must address both winter and summer peaks considering electrified grid
projections.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 370
Have in place a control system that automatically sheds electricity demand in response to
triggers denoting strain on the grid or high grid emissions. For example:

• A signal from a demand response program provider

• Data obtained through an API indicating high grid emissions
• Peak demand tariff period when the grid is operating in the highest demand window
• Time-of-use rate when pricing is highest

AND/OR

Option 4. Power Resilience (1 point)

Identify critical equipment that requires continuous operation. Design the project to be able to
island and operate independently from the grid to power the critical loads with the project’s on-
site renewable and energy storage systems for at least three days.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit rewards projects that implement solutions to reduce stress on the grid and increase
building resilience. Projects are encouraged to combine the strategies from Options 1–3 to
optimize resilient solutions for the project.

All options

Evaluate Grid-interactive Measures

Projects that pursue this credit must complete an evaluation of potential grid-interactive
measures that are viable for the project. Using this research, teams can make informed
decisions on solutions that can be integrated into the design.

Helpful guidance supporting this evaluation is provided in New Buildings Institute (NBI)
GridOptimal Buildings Initiative,96 ASHRAE’s Grid-Interactive Building Guide or the U.S.
Department of Energy’s Grid-Interactive Efficient Building guide.97 98 Projects outside the U.S.
are encouraged to reference local technical reports that include further context for the regional
grid context.

96 “The GridOptimal Buildings Initiative”, New Buildings Institute (NBI), (October 26, 2021),
https://newbuildings.org/resource/gridoptimal/.
97 “ASHRAE Releases Guide on the Role of Grid Interactivity in Decarbonization”, ASHRAE, (November 2, 2023),
https://www.ashrae.org/about/news/2023/ashrae-releases-guide-on-the-role-of-grid-interactivity-in-decarbonization.
98 “Grid-Interactive Efficient Buildings”, U.S. Department of Energy, (n.d.), https://www.energy.gov/eere/buildings/grid-interactive-
efficient-buildings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 371
Interval-recording and External Signal
For all options, the design must include electric meters with interval recording capabilities. Grid-
interactive equipment installed as part of the project’s scope must be capable of receiving an
external signal directly or indirectly to indicate when load management should be enabled.

Peak Load Determination — Option 1 and Option 3, Path 2

For options that reference a reduction in peak thermal or peak electricity demand, use the
modeled coincident peak demand for the proposed design for projects documented using the
Energy Cost Budget Method or Appendix G Performance Rating Method in EAp2: Minimum
Energy Efficiency. For projects documented using the prescriptive method, generate estimates
of peak thermal or peak electricity demand using the approach outlined in EAp1: Operational
Carbon Projection and Decarbonization Plan.

The peak demand contribution from electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) for recharging
vehicles used for off-site transportation may be excluded from the peak load determination if
separate metering is provided for the EVSE.

Option 1. Energy Storage

Projects are awarded points for installing on-site electric and/or thermal storage that meets
capacity requirements, relative to peak demand, per Table 1.

Electricity storage refers to large batteries that store electricity until it is needed.

Thermal energy storage (TES) stores heating or cooling energy for later reuse. Examples
include ice storage, chilled water storage, and hot water storage.

Electrical peak demand differs from thermal peak demand, especially in an all-electric building.
In an all-electric building, the peak demand includes the contribution of thermal demand and
other loads such as lighting, plug and process loads, pumps, and fans. For an all-electric
building, the Table 1 thermal storage capacity thresholds that compare to peak coincident
thermal demand are expected to achieve similar electricity demand reductions to the Table 1
electric storage capacity thresholds that compare to peak electric demand.

Using the peak electric or peak thermal demand determined consistent with the method
described above, determine the total capacity required to meet thresholds for the type of
storage.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 372
Energy simulation results typically report the peak thermal load separately for each category of
peak thermal load (i.e., heating, cooling, service water heating, and process heating or cooling).

To assess peak coincident heating load for heating + cooling + service water heating + process
heating or cooling:

• Determine the category with the highest peak load (the primary load).
• Determine the time (month, day, and hour) when this highest peak load occurs.
• Calculate peak coincident load by adding the primary load to the simultaneous load for
all other categories with substantive use. Ignore categories with peak loads or annual
energy use less than 10% of the primary load.

Provide automatic load management controls for the thermal or electric storage systems.

For projects that include both an electric and thermal storage system on site, points can be
prorated to achieve the minimum required thresholds of Table 1.

Example: Thermal storage

A project with peak space heating loads of 1,000,000 Btu/h (290 kW) and
coincident cooling loads occurring at the same time are negligible. The energy
modeling results indicate peak space heating occurs January 10 at 6 a.m., based
on the modeled weather data. Peak space cooling loads occurring in the summer
are lower than the space heating peak. The analyst uses the simulation outputs
to identify simultaneous service water heating loads of 200,000 Btu/h (60 kW),
resulting in peak coincident loads of 1,2000,000 Btu/h (350 kW). This requires
the project to install 1,2000,000 Btu (350 kWh) of thermal storage capacity to
earn one point.

Option 2: Demand Response Program

Established demand response (DR) programs and contracting with a qualified provider offers a
streamlined path to credit compliance. Projects can contract directly with the utility or with a DR
program provider.

Project teams must clearly identify what systems will be included in the program, during a
demand response (DR) event. Teams should work with the DR provider to determine the best
strategy for the specific project and contract. For example, teams can commit to a reduction of a
specified percentage, when a signal is received. Teams may also commit to automated

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 373
reductions in select equipment or systems, in response to a direct, automated signal from the
DR program provider.

Contract length
Execute contracts for at least one year and commit to ongoing renewal of the contract.

Option 3. Automated Demand-side Management

Projects must select between Paths 1 and Path 2.

On-site electricity generation and fuel combustion cannot be used to meet the demand-side
management criteria. This includes renewable electricity generation, which is separately
credited in EAc4: Renewable Energy.

PATH 1. SYSTEM-LEVEL CONTROLS

Path 1 is most suitable for small buildings or buildings without a Building Automation System.

Projects must provide Automated Demand Response (ADR) controls for at least two systems,
selecting from HVAC, lighting, automatic receptacle controls, service water heating, or EVSE.

HVAC systems
Provide ADR for at least 50% of the total rated capacity. Examples include smart thermostats
that adjust the cooling and heating setpoints or controllers for variable-speed equipment that
limits maximum speed during a demand response event.

Lighting systems
Provide ADR for at least 50% of installed lighting power. For example, provide automated
dimming for 50% of installed lighting power.

Automatic receptacle controls

Provide ADR to turn off automatic receptacle controls as defined in ASHRAE 90.1 Section 8.4.2.

Service water heating

Provide ADR for at least 90% of installed service water heating capacity. For example, provide
storage water heaters with ADR technology that controls the heating cycle off during a demand
response event.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 374
Electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE)
Provide ADR capable of curtailing and scheduling vehicle charging for all EVSE. The project
must have at least some EVSE equipment in scope.

PATH 2. BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM

Path 2 requires building-level controls that automatically shed at least 10% of building electricity
in response to triggers denoting strain on the grid. A signal from a demand response provider is
the most common trigger. Refer to the Rating System for other examples.

Develop a comprehensive plan that provides clear direction for implementing the automated
load shedding, both in summer and in winter. Address the following in the plan:

• Individual assignments.
• Communication protocols.
• Project total peak electricity demand.
• Systems and end-uses targeted for peak load shedding.
• Justification for why systems and end uses were selected.
• Triggers for initiating automated load shedding, and rationale for selecting these triggers.
Address both current grid context and future projections that account for renewables and
electrification trends.
• Total percentage of load included in the load-shedding program and a description of the
method used to estimate this percentage. Address both winter and summer peaks.

Option 4. Power Resiliency

This option requires on-site renewable generation paired with energy storage capable of
powering the building’s critical equipment operation for at least 72 hours. Critical equipment is
those most essential to maintain functionality during a power outage, often related to life safety
or business continuity. Examples include servers, communication equipment, life support
equipment, security systems, emergency lighting, or minimum HVAC capacity needed to
maintain life-support conditions. To be eligible for this option, the project must have at least
some critical equipment.

The design must include an automatic transfer switch and controls that enable the project to
operate the building’s on-site renewable systems, energy storage, and critical equipment in the
event of a power outage (referred to as islanding).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 375
CORE AND SHELL PROJECTS
For Core and Shell projects, peak electric demand or coincident peak thermal demand must be
determined for the whole building energy use, inclusive of expected tenant energy.

Owners may provide an option for future tenants to opt out of participation in the DR program. It
is highly recommended that owners include educational information on the importance of the
DR program, including environmental and resilience benefits.

Option 1. Energy Storage

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 1.

Option 2. Demand Response Program

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 2.

Option 3. Automated Demand-Side Management

Same as LEED BD+C: New Construction, Option 3, plus:

For Core and Shell projects, the tenant lease agreement must describe details of what systems
are included in the automatic DR control. Communicating this information is important for both
the base building systems and for any systems that may impact the tenant spaces.

Additionally, include language describing any tenant efforts to integrate their systems with the
DR controls, as applicable.

Option 4. Power Resiliency

Same as BD+C: New Construction, Option 4.

District Energy Systems (DES)

For projects documenting energy efficiency savings for a campus district energy system in
EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency, the district energy must be included in the determination of
peak electric demand.

Grid-interactive strategies applied to the DES system may be used to document achievement of
Option 1, Option 3, and Option 4 at the building level.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 376
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Description of the grid interactive measures evaluated and
the relevant context (e.g., forecasted grid conditions,
project location, building type, ownership structure, and
other relevant factors), and confirmation that the results
have been accounted for in decision-making.
Confirmation the project has interval recording meters and
equipment capable of accepting an external signal.
Documentation that the technology and controls in place for
energy storage, demand response, automated demand-
side management, and power resiliency, as applicable, are
within the CxP scope of work.
Affirmation that the technology and controls in place for
energy storage, demand response, automated demand-
side management, and power resiliency, as applicable, are
documented in the project systems manual, or Current
Facilities Requirements (CFR) and Operations and
Maintenance (OM) plan.
Option 1 Calculation showcasing achievement of point threshold.
(Estimated Energy use, Peak Demand, Storage Capacity,
Peak Storage Capacity Relative to Peak Demand).
Narrative documenting the automatic load management
controls.
Option 2 Proof of enrollment in demand response program.

Option 3 Path 1 Identification of systems with automatic demand response

controls and calculation showing required thresholds have
been met.
Path 2 Project total peak electricity demand and total percentage
of load included in the load shedding program.
Description of how the project will shed 10% of the peak
demand for one hour and what triggers the event.
(Examples include short narrative, Sequence of
Operations, etc.).
Option 4 Define and give examples of critical equipment that
requires continuous operation. Provide evidence of controls
capable of meeting power resiliency
Narrative describing the on-site renewable and energy
storage system design and operation, and calculation to
demonstrate islanding capabilities for the critical
infrastructure for at least three days.
Core and Option 3 Path 1 and Tenant Lease Agreement showing the inclusion of
Shell Path 2 automatic demand response control within their scope of
work.
Path 1. Building systems manual, or Current Facilities
System Requirements and O&M plan that address the technology
Level and controls in place for Automated Demand Response
Controls System-Level controls.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 377
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• GridOptimal (The GridOptimal Buildings Initiative) (newbuildings.org/resource/gridoptimal)
• ASHRAE Grid-Interactive Building Guide (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/grid-
interactive-buildings-for-decarbonization-design-and-operation-resource-guide)
• DOE Grid-interactive efficient buildings (energy.gov/eere/buildings/grid-interactive-efficient-
buildings)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 378
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Energy and Atmosphere Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED REFRIGERANT MANAGEMENT

EAc7
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To reduce greenhouse gas emissions by accelerating the use of refrigerants with low global
warming potential (GWP) and promoting better refrigerant management practices.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP 1–2
Path 1. No Refrigerants 1
OR
Path 2. Low GWP Refrigerants 1–2
AND/OR
Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage 1
AND/OR
Option 3. GreenChill Certification for Food Retailers 1–2

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP (1–2 points)

PATH 1. NO REFRIGERANTS (1 POINT)
Do not use refrigerant-containing equipment in the project.

Core and Shell only

Projects with future equipment necessary to meet the project’s heating or cooling
load are not eligible for this option.

OR

PATH 2. LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS (1–2 POINTS)

The maximum total weighted average refrigerant GWP in all new refrigerant-containing
equipment is less than or equal to 80% (1 point) or 50% (2 points) of the total weighted average
GWP of refrigerants meeting the benchmarks in Table 1.

Projects that limit effective refrigerant GWP by reducing refrigerant charge per unit of capacity
relative to comparable equipment may use adjusted benchmarks.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 379
Table 1. Refrigerant GWP Benchmarks

GWP benchmark* Equipment and systems

1400 Heat pump service hot water heaters
700 HVAC
Data centers, computer room air-conditioning, and information
technology equipment cooling
Process chiller equipment or ice rink refrigeration equipment
300 All other process refrigeration for retail, industrial, or cold storage
*GWP benchmarks are based on a 100-year time horizon GWP relative to CO2.

AND/OR

Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage (1 point)

Core and Shell only

This option is only applicable to projects with at least 20% of total estimated
heating and cooling generation capacity in the project scope of work.

Design, construct, and operate the project’s refrigerant-using equipment to

minimize refrigerant leakage.

DESIGN
• Refrigerant-using equipment shall be self-contained, with no field-installed piping:
o For equipment with refrigerants > 700 GWP AND
o For at least 80% of the total GWP of refrigerants used in the project.
• Specify an automatic leak detection system in fully enclosed spaces with equipment that
has an overall refrigerant charge exceeding 100 tCO2e.

INSTALLATION
• Field-installed refrigerant piping shall use brazed or press type fittings.

OPERATION
• Have in place a refrigerant maintenance plan and designate a responsible oversight
party. The plan shall include standards for recordkeeping and protocols for:
o Updating the refrigerant inventory.
o Tracking and recording refrigerant charge and leakage rates for all refrigerant-using
equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 380
 o Ensuring that installation, maintenance, and removal of refrigeration-containing
equipment is performed by appropriately certified refrigeration personnel, including in
tenant spaces.
o Performing an annual audit and calibration of automatic leak detection systems.
o For equipment without automatic leak detection systems, checking pressure loss and
leaks at least as frequently as follows at the following minimum intervals for
equipment containing refrigerant with total GWP as follows: every 24 months for 50
tCO2e or less; every 12 months for 50 to 500 tCO2e; every 3 months for more than
500 tCO2e.
o Identifying the maximum time frame for repairing leaks.
o Making leakage testing and repair twice as frequent if the total annual refrigerant
recharge/leakage exceeds 1%.

AND/OR

Option 3. GreenChill Certification for Food Retailers (1–2 points)

Available to projects where food retailing constitutes more than 20% of the project’s gross area.

Demonstrate achievement of the Environmental Protection Agency’s GreenChill Certification

program for projects in the U.S. For international projects, comply with the relevant GreenChill
requirements for the certification level.

• GreenChill Silver certification (1 point)

• GreenChill Gold or Platinum certification (2 points)

For all options

District Energy
Projects with district energy must comply with the requirements of this credit at the district
facility or see additional guidance for interpretation of credit requirements.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit builds on the EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management requirements and
rewards teams who further minimize or eliminate refrigerant impacts for their projects.
Refrigerants used in equipment that provides thermal comfort, service water heating, process
heating or cooling, or refrigeration for food storage or other process application in buildings are
powerful greenhouse gases, typically causing over one thousand times the detrimental impact
than carbon dioxide. As projects electrify heating and service water heating systems with heat
pumps, mitigation of refrigerant impact becomes increasingly important.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 381
This credit rewards strategies for reducing refrigerant impact by limiting refrigerant global
warming potential under Option 1, and by reducing refrigerant leakage under Option 2. Projects
may achieve a maximum of two points using either Option 1, Path 2, or by combining Option 1,
Path 2 and Option 2.

There is a third path available for food retailers that comprehensively addresses the high
refrigerant emissions associated with refrigeration equipment for cold storage.

Option 1. No Refrigerants or Low GWP Refrigerants

Path 1 rewards the elimination of refrigerants for the few project applications that can
accomplish this without jeopardizing thermal comfort or total greenhouse gas emissions.

Path 2 requiring the selection of low-impact refrigerants is more appropriate for most projects,
supporting a design that comprehensively addresses decarbonization through electrification
using efficient heat pump technology.

PATH 1. NO REFRIGERANTS
To pursue this path, the project cannot use refrigerants in the building or in district energy
systems serving the building.

Alternative design solutions — including passive strategies — present opportunities to remove

refrigerants from buildings and promote further decarbonization. Consider employing passive
cooling strategies such as natural ventilation, night flushing, and thermal massing solutions or
passive heating strategies such as solar storage and added insulation. Review opportunities to
minimize infiltration and ventilation losses through the building envelope.

Additional considerations
Projects are encouraged to pursue a design that includes electrification of space
heating, service water heating, and process heating systems with efficient heat
pump technology per EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency rather than using
electric resistance or fuel heating to meet the requirements for this path.
Therefore, Path 1 is limited to one point.

PATH 2. LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS

Path 2 requires the use of refrigerants with weighted average global warming potential that
average at least 20% lower than the Refrigerant GWP benchmarks in Table 1 of the credit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 382
These GWP benchmarks are primarily derived from GWP limits in the EPA 2023 AIM Act
Technology Transitions Rule, which are like those in the EU F-Gas Regulations and other
regulations following the Montreal Protocol and Kigali Agreement.

Calculations
Use equipment data and the project’s total weighted average GWP reported in the refrigerant
inventory completed for EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management.

For each refrigerant-using equipment, determine the GWP benchmark using the equipment’s
refrigerant charge reported in the refrigerant inventory, and the Table 1 GWP benchmark for the
equipment:

Equation 1. GWP benchmark for each piece of equipment

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐸𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡_𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘 = 𝑅𝐶𝐸𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 × 𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘

Calculate the total benchmark GWP by summing the GWP benchmark for each piece of
equipment.

Equation 2. Total GWP benchmark

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙_𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘 = 𝛴 𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐸𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡_𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘

Calculate the weighted average GWP benchmark by dividing the total GWP benchmark by the
sum of refrigerant charge for all equipment.

Equation 3. Weighted average GWPBenchmark calculation

𝐺𝑊𝑃𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙_𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘
𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡𝑒𝑑 a𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐺𝑊𝑃 𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘 =
𝛴𝑅𝑐 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑝𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡

Total weighted average GWP for the project cannot exceed 80% of the weighted average GWP
benchmark for 1 point; and cannot exceed 50% of weighted average GWP to achieve both
points.

Equation 4. Percentage (%) threshold calculations

𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡𝑒𝑑 a𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐺𝑊𝑃
% 𝑜𝑓 𝑏𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘 =
𝑊𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡𝑒𝑑 a𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒 𝐺𝑊𝑃𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 383
Adjusted Benchmarks for Limiting Effective GWP
For equipment that has been specifically designed to limit effective refrigerant GWP by
minimizing refrigerant charge, projects may reference comparable equipment to establish an
adjusted benchmark instead of using the refrigerant charge for the project equipment.
To be eligible to apply adjusted benchmarks, neither the GWP for the comparable equipment,
nor the GWP for the referenced project equipment may exceed the GWP benchmark in Table 1.
Comparable equipment shall have the same equipment type description and size category as
the referenced project equipment (see section 6.8 tables in the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard for
equipment types and size categories).

Calculate the adjusted benchmark by multiplying the original Table 1 benchmark by the ratio of
refrigerant charge per unit of capacity for the comparable equipment versus the project
equipment.

Example: Adjusted benchmark calculation

The project team evaluates two water-cooled centrifugal chiller alternatives with
GWP less than 700, the first with a refrigerant charge per unit of capacity equal
to 3.0 lb/ton (0.38 kg/kW), the second with a refrigerant charge per unit of
capacity equal to 1.5 lb/ton (0.19 kg/kW). The project team selects the second
chiller.

From Table 1, the GWP Benchmark for HVAC equipment is 700. The adjusted
GWP Benchmark is 1,400, calculated as 700 x 3.0 / 1.5.

Option 2. Limit Refrigerant Leakage

Combine design and construction strategies with operational best practices to effectively
manage refrigerant leakage for the life of a building.

Design
Field-installed piping experiences much higher leakage rates than self-contained equipment.
During design, prioritize self-contained equipment. At minimum, projects must specify self-
contained equipment for systems that use refrigerants with a GWP ≥ 700. Additionally, teams
must use self-contained equipment for at least 80% of the total refrigerant GWP. Self-contained
equipment is less prone to leakage and better accommodates leakage detection measures than
equipment with field installed piping.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 384
Installation
For projects that include field-installed piping, install piping in a manner that limits leakage. Use
brazed or press type fittings to minimize the potential for refrigerant leaks.

Install automatic leak detection systems in any fully enclosed space that houses equipment with
an overall refrigerant charge greater than 100 tCO2e. (tCO2e is a metric ton of carbon dioxide
equivalent, where a metric ton equals 1,000 kg or 2,205 lbs.)

Operations
Maintaining systems during operations provides continued assurance that refrigerant leaks are
identified as soon as possible, reducing GWP for leakage. Teams must develop a refrigerant
maintenance plan that requires updates to the refrigerant inventory, tracking and recording of
refrigerant charge and leakage rates, routine pressure testing on required systems, annual
audits, and calibration of automatic leak detection system devices.

Major leaks identified during operations require immediate corrective action. Additionally, where
leakage exceeds 1% of the total annual refrigerant recharge, teams must conduct additional
testing and repairs, to reduce the total leakage of the system. This ensures systems operate as
intended and minimizes global warming associated with leakage.

Teams must designate a key individual or the appropriate management team to manage and
enforce the plan.

Core and Shell Projects

OPTION 1. NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS
Path 1. No Refrigerants
To be eligible for Path 1, demonstrate that additional equipment is not required to meet the
project’s heating and cooling load.

This path is not available to projects where mechanical heating or cooling are likely to be
installed during tenant buildout, even for a single space such as an office space in a large
unconditioned warehouse.

Projects that do not install equipment as part of the base scope are ineligible for this option.

Path 2. Low GWP Refrigerants

Teams must include any new refrigerant-containing equipment installed during the project’s
scope of work. Future tenant equipment may be excluded. Core and shell projects may also

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 385
include refrigerant-using equipment installed as part of the tenant scope of work if tenants
specify the equipment on their construction documents. When including tenant equipment,
include all refrigerant-using equipment specified on the tenant drawings.

OPTION 2. LIMIT REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE

Include at least 20% of the total predicted heating and cooling generation capacity in the
project’s scope of work for the base building.

Example 1: Eligible project

An owner pursues LEED BD+C: Core and Shell certification for a speculative
office and laboratory base building. The base building systems include chillers,
central air handling units, and laboratory exhaust fans. Through energy modeling
or load calculations, the project team confirms that the total heating and cooling
generation capacity exceeds 20% of the total predicted capacity. The building is
eligible to pursue this credit and document compliance for the systems within the
scope of work.

Example 2: Non-eligible project

An owner pursues LEED BD+C: Core and Shell certification for a speculative
office building. The scope of work is limited to a cold, dark shell. The project
excludes base building systems and cannot pursue this credit.

District Energy Systems

OPTION 1. NO REFRIGERANTS OR LOW GWP REFRIGERANTS

Path 1. No Refrigerants
Refrigerants cannot be used to generate any district energy source serving the project.
Teams connected to a DES for any energy source should work directly with their provider to
determine if compliance is met for this option.

Path 2. Low GWP Refrigerants

Teams can elect to include the refrigerant impacts from the DES when compliance cannot be
demonstrated based solely on new equipment within the project scope.

Where teams include DES equipment within the calculations, account for all new and existing
equipment containing refrigerant from all district energy sources serving the project. Teams

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 386
must work with the district energy provider to determine the equipment type, refrigerant type,
and refrigerant charge.

For projects that also have refrigerant-containing equipment within the building, the weighted
average GWP can be determined using the percentage capacity from each source. For
example, if 90% of the energy comes from a DES and 10% from systems on site, teams can
apply those percentages to respective DES and on-site equipment weighted average GWP
values.
OPTION 2. LIMIT REFRIGERANT LEAKAGE
Demonstrate that at least 50% of the combined peak heating and cooling capacity generates
on-site. Alternatively, projects demonstrate compliance with the specified criteria for all
refrigerant-using systems in the building and all refrigerant-using systems in the district energy
system serving the project.

Retail Only
• Meet Option 1 and/or Option 2 under the LEED BD+C: New Construction criteria.

AND/OR

OPTION 3. GREENCHILL CERTIFICATION FOR FOOD RETAILERS

Option 3 offers another path, eligible for up to two points for projects with 20% or more gross
floor area of food retail space. Food retail spaces include grocery stores, convenience stores,
big-box wholesalers, and general merchandise retailers with large refrigeration sections.
Additional spaces may include bakeries, seafood and meat markets, and juice and smoothie
bars.

In 2007, the U.S. EPA launched a voluntary partnership program called GreenChill that works
cooperatively with the food retail industry to reduce refrigerant emissions and decrease their
impact on the ozone layer and climate change.99 A food retailer achieves Silver-, Gold-, or
Platinum-Level certification.

U.S. projects that document GreenChill certification earn points based on the level of
certification achieved. International projects must document compliance with each requirement
outlined on the EPA GreenChill website for the targeted certification level.

99 “GreenChill Program”, U.S. EPA, (2024, November 4), https://epa.gov/greenchill.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 387
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
New All All Mechanical schedules (or similar) that show
Construction equipment type, capacity, quantity, refrigerant type,
and and maximum refrigerant charge.
Core and Option 1 Path 1 Attestation that no refrigerants are used on the project
Shell (EAp5: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
requires a narrative describing how the building loads
will be met if this option is pursued).
Path 2 Weighted Average 𝐺𝑊𝑃 𝐵𝑒𝑛𝑐ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟𝑘 calculation
(Equation 3 from EAc7: Enhanced Refrigerant
Management).
Weighted Average GWP calculation from EAp5:
Fundamental Refrigerant Management.
Option 2 All Documentation of compliance with field-installed piping
limits.
Contractor documentation demonstrating that
installation complies with credit criteria.
Refrigerant Maintenance Plan that describes how the
refrigerant-using systems will be maintained. The plan
must identify the designated responsible party for
implementing the plan.
Plans, specifications, or field photos confirming
automatic leak detection, if applicable.
Option 3 US projects Demonstrate that the project has achieved EPA’s
GreenChill Store Certification Program.
International Compliance documentation demonstrating that the
Projects project meets relevant GreenChill requirements for the
certification level specified.
Core and All All Confirmation that Core and Shell project is eligible for
Shell this Option.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE Standard 15-2019: Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems,
(ashrae.org/technical-resources/standards-and-guidelines/read-only-versions-of-ashrae-
standards)
• EPA Green Chill, (epa.gov/greenchill)
• EPA 2023 AIM Act Technology Transitions Rule, (epa.gov/climate-hfcs-reduction/regulatory-
actions-technology-transitions)
• European Union F-gas regulations, (eur-lex.europa.eu/eli/reg/2024/573/oj)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 388
MATERIALS AND RESOURCES (MR)
OVERVIEW
The Materials and Resources (MR) category in LEED v5 focuses on critical areas that result in
reductions in embodied carbon, protecting human and environmental health, and fostering a
circular economy. Alongside these critical areas of focus, the credits target data availability,
transparency, and supply chain improvements, ultimately increasing the accessibility of
compliant materials for all.

The MR credits support LEED v5’s materials strategy by furthering the shift toward multi-
attribute product selection and procurement. This approach evaluates materials based on a
variety of key metrics, from their sourcing to manufacturing processes and overall environmental
and social impacts to guide projects toward well-rounded material choices that go beyond
single-issue solutions.

Another key focus of the MR credit category is embodied carbon, or the emissions generated
during the extraction, manufacturing, transportation, installation, and disposal of products. The
impact of opportunities for reductions in embodied carbon go beyond design phase EPD
analysis and whole building life cycle assessment, with material reuse and key waste
management practices playing an important role in the global effort to minimize the impacts of
building materials on the environment. As embodied carbon from building materials accounts for
at least 11% of annual global emissions, LEED v5 targets strategies for high-impact actions like
supply chain decarbonization, low-embodied carbon material selection, and building reuse to
help project teams achieve meaningful carbon reductions immediately.

LEED v5 simplifies strategies to maximize impact and promote industry alignment. The MR
category harmonizes terminology and standards across systems, aligning with initiatives like the
Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization (ECHO) project, the Mindful Materials
Common Materials Framework and the AIA Architecture and Design Materials Pledge.100101102
These efforts reduce complexity, making it easier for manufacturers and project teams to meet
sustainability goals and establish workflows that will keep industry advancement moving
forward.

100 “Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization (ECHO) Project”, Embodied Carbon Harmonization and Optimization
(ECHO) Project, (n.d.), https://www.echo-project.info/.
101 “Mindful MATERIALS Home”, mindful MATERIALS, (2024), https://www.mindfulmaterials.com/.
102 “AIA Materials Pledge”, AIA, (n.d.) https://www.aia.org/design-excellence/climate-action/zero-carbon/materials-pledge.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 389
Decarbonization
The MR category equips projects to reduce embodied carbon across the supply chain using
strategies like whole building life cycle assessments, analysis of environmental product
declarations (EPDs) and jobsite emissions tracking (MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon, MRp2:
Quantify and Assess Embodied Carbon). Reducing construction waste and promoting circularity
lessens demand for virgin resources and extends material life, which also directly reduce
embodied carbon emissions from the supply chain (MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste
Diversion, MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste Operations).

Embodied carbon could account for half of new construction’s carbon footprint by 2050. LEED
v5 plans for a different outcome by rewarding manufacturing innovations that decarbonize new
materials coupled with circular strategies that preserve resources and cut emissions.

Quality of life
The MR category enhances indoor environmental quality by promoting low-emitting materials
reducing occupant exposure to harmful chemicals (MRc3: Low-Emitting Materials, MRc4:
Building Product Selection and Procurement). Improved air quality supports health, cognitive
function, and overall well-being, benefiting building occupants. Upstream and downstream
impacts from product manufacturing can also affect fence line communities, supply chain actors,
and installers, making the selection of materials focused on green chemistry and ecological
protections a priority (MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement).

Ecological conservation and restoration

Prioritizing reuse and diverting waste from landfills decreases reliance on virgin material and
reduces methane emissions, preserving natural resources and reducing environmental harm
(MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion, MRp1: Planning for Zero Waste
Operations). When product manufacturing shifts to support a circular economy, improvements to
ecological conservation and restoration can be significant (MRc4: Building Product Selection
and Procurement).

Ultimately, LEED v5 empowers project teams to make practical, high-impact choices that cut
embodied carbon emissions, improve health outcomes and advance a sustainable market —
building a future where both people and the planet can thrive.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 390
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Prerequisite and Restoration

PLANNING FOR ZERO WASTE OPERATIONS

MRp1
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To reduce the amount of waste that is generated by building occupants and hauled to and
disposed of in landfills and incinerators through reduction, reuse, and recycling services and
education, and to conserve natural resources for future generations. To set the building up for
success in pursuing zero waste operations.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Storage and Collection of Recyclables
AND
Zero Waste Operations Planning

Comply with the following requirements:

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Provide dedicated areas accessible to waste haulers, janitorial staff, and building occupants for
the collection and storage of recyclable materials for the entire building.

• Collection and storage areas may be separate locations.

• Recyclable materials must include organics/food waste, mixed paper, corrugated
cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.
o Mixed recyclables are acceptable for paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics,
and metals if required by local conditions.
o Space for the storage of organics/food waste recycling is required even if service is
not available at the time of building occupancy.
• Take appropriate measures for the safe collection, storage, and disposal of batteries,
mercury-containing lamps, and electronic waste.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 391
Zero Waste Operations Planning
Include design details, maintenance manuals, and/or other resources from the design and
construction team that help facilitate building occupants and operators to meet high-
performance waste prevention and recycling goals once in operation.

Core and Shell only

Communicate the building’s infrastructure and service options information in the
tenant guidelines.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The goal for the prerequisite is to minimize waste generated by building occupants and to
implement strategies in reducing, reusing, and recycling waste throughout the building’s
lifecycle. This includes incorporating design measures that prioritize waste prevention, material
reuse, and effective waste management. It also encourages project teams to thoughtfully
consider and plan for the access requirements of all individuals who will service and use the
building. Additionally, teams should anticipate and accommodate the operational needs
necessary for achieving zero waste by enabling effective waste diversion practices. This
includes ensuring proper sorting, storage, and access solutions to facilitate recycling,
composting, and other waste diversion methods while prioritizing reuse as a key strategy.

Storage and Collection of Recyclables

Municipal solid waste has become a growing concern as the volume of waste generated in the
U.S. continues to increase.103 An obstacle to effective recycling in buildings is the lack of
convenient, dedicated physical spaces for collection. Incorporating recycling infrastructure early
in the design process encourages successful recycling once operations begin. Well-designed
and accessible waste management infrastructure is intuitive (easy to locate, reach, and use) for
all occupants, regardless of physical ability or mobility, anticipating how and where waste will be
discarded by occupants. Address concerns for noise, odor, and vectors.

Recycling includes traditional materials like glass, plastic, and metals, as well as organic
materials, like food scraps, paper products, and landscape materials. Organic materials
collected in buildings can be composted onsite or offsite. Composting can occur at multiple
scales and locations: small-scale systems might include basic compost piles or bins, while
large-scale operations involve centralized, commercial facilities that process organic waste from
an entire region.

103 “U.S. Municipal Solid Waste”, University of Michigan Center for Sustainable Systems, (2024),
https://css.umich.edu/sites/default/files/2025-02/CSS04-15.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 392
To meet the prerequisite, teams must provide dedicated area(s) for recyclable items including
organics (compostables), mixed paper, corrugated cardboard, glass, plastics, and metals.
Teams should work with the owner and architects to provide sufficient collection and storage
space for all required recyclables based on the building size, occupants, and local recycling
markets. In many places, recycling of various materials is required by laws or regulations.
Project teams should check for local requirements and service vendors to ensure maximal
waste diversion.

Given the substantial greenhouse gas emissions from discarded organic waste in landfills (from
methane production), it is required to plan space for composting organic materials generated by
occupants, even if composting services are not immediately available at time of building
occupancy. For organics collection, some material processors will encourage paper products to
be recycled separately (such as office paper placed in mixed-paper recycling bins and excluded
from food scraps collection). Check with local authorities for guidance on best practices for
mixed paper or cardboard and other forms of organics composting.

To meet the prerequisite, project teams must provide an adequate amount of dedicated space
for recycling with the appropriate infrastructure to handle such recycling. This includes planning
for the installation of collection systems or bins for recyclable materials that are collected by the
building and sent for recycling at time of occupancy. Base these bins or collection on current
service offerings in the project region.

Commingled recycling bins (excluding organics) are acceptable if the local municipality or
recycling vendor allows commingled recycling, though commingled recycling tends to reduce
the quality of diverted materials and leads to lower overall recovery rates. Therefore, source
separation of recycled material types is encouraged to maximize diversion rates and help meet
zero-waste goals, but is not required unless separate streams are required by local regulations
or guidelines.

There is a growing environmental concern for the increasing volume of electronic waste (e-
waste), such as computers, cameras, printers, and keyboards. The e-waste disposal procedure
is more hazardous than cardboard, glass, plastic, metals, and paper. Therefore, identifying safe
storage areas, recycling facilities, and haulers that can process e-waste is important. Teams
must indicate space dedicated to the storage and collection of recyclables, composts, and e-
waste areas on a floor plan and describe how these spaces will be serviced and accessed
safely by building occupants and staff.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 393
Project teams should follow the TRUE waste hierarchy framework that prioritizes waste
management actions to minimize environmental impact and conserve resources. It ranks waste
management strategies from most to least preferred, focusing on reducing waste generation
and maximizing resource recovery before resorting to disposal, in this order:

• Reduce. Minimize waste at the source e.g., use fewer materials and resources.
• Reuse. Extend the life of products by using them more than once.
• Recycle. Transforming waste material into new products.
• Compost. Decomposing organic waste into nutrient-rich soil.
• Anaerobic Digestion. Breaks down organic material into a form of nutrient-rich liquid for
soil application and it does not necessarily equal composting.

Zero Waste Operations Planning

Project teams must include design details, maintenance manuals, and other resources in a plan
to help building operators to minimize waste and implement recycling practices post-occupancy.
Consider implementing reusable infrastructure, such as refillable dispensers, reusable service
ware, and reusable event items, while also establishing comprehensive systems for waste
diversion, including take-back programs for specialty items and user-friendly sorting stations
with adequate storage. The plan should consist of materials for training staff and contractors,
such as literature, presentations, and onboarding training resources. These resources may
cover topics like designated recycling and composting areas, waste separation procedures, and
proper disposal guidelines. It can include strategies to help with waste prevention, materials
recovery, and operational procedures that support zero-waste objectives.

Core and Shell only

Communicate the building’s infrastructure and service options information in the
Tenant Guidelines.

Core and Shell project teams may have limited influence on how the final tenant
space is fitted out. The tenant guidelines help tenant design teams understand
and design features to achieve significant reductions in waste generation. To
effectively communicate details of waste management, the Tenant Guidelines
should provide clear, actionable information that outlines the building’s waste
management system and encourages responsible waste disposal practices. This
allows tenants to remain informed about the building’s systems and their
responsibilities. Teams should include information on the waste collection and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 394
 disposal collection area, waste minimization initiatives, waste pick up schedule,
training materials, and contact information.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Storage and All Proof of space for recycling and composting.
Collection of Pictures of final spaces incorporated into the building with
Recyclables signage.
Narrative describing the dedicated recycling storage areas for
the project, including the size, accessibility, and expected
volume for the project.
Zero Waste Zero-waste plan, including any resources used to train staff
Operations and contractors (e.g., literature, presentation, onboarding
Planning training, etc.).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Compostable BPI standard (bpiworld.org)
• TRUE diversion rate guidelines (true.gbci.org/true-diversion-data-additional-guidance)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 395
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Prerequisite and Restoration

QUANTIFY AND ASSESS EMBODIED CARBON

MRp2
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To quantify the embodied carbon impacts of the structure, enclosure, and hardscape of a project
and assess the top sources of embodied carbon.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Embodied Carbon
AND
High-Priority Embodied Carbon Sources

Comply with the following requirements:

Embodied Carbon
• Quantify the embodied carbon impacts (global warming potential or GWP) of the
structure, enclosure, and hardscape materials for the project. All ancillary structures,
such as parking structures or outbuildings within the LEED project boundary, must be
included in the calculations. At a minimum, include asphalt, concrete, masonry, structural
steel, insulation, aluminum extrusions, structural wood and composites, cladding, and
glass.
• Quantify the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon emissions for each material,
defined as the product’s GWP/unit times the amount of material used.
o Alternatively, projects using life-cycle assessment or embodied carbon software tools
may report A1–A3 results from their tool.

AND

High-Priority Embodied Carbon Sources

Identify the top three sources of embodied carbon on the project and describe how project-
specific strategies were considered to reduce the impacts of these hot spots.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 396
 Core and Shell only
Communicate the embodied carbon measurements and material suppliers in the
tenant guidelines.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite ensures that all projects become acquainted with embodied carbon and gain a
basic understanding of how to quantify and measure it. It also highlights the critical role of
material selection, emphasizing that informed choices across major material categories are
essential to achieving meaningful reductions in embodied carbon. The prerequisite aims to raise
awareness of the upfront embodied carbon associated with key materials used in the structure,
enclosure, and hardscape of a project. This prerequisite does not mandate reductions in
embodied carbon.

Project teams can achieve this prerequisite in two ways:

• As a stand-alone assessment conducted for projects not attempting the MRc2: Reduce
Embodied Carbon, OR
• As an output from projects that are attempting the MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon.

The intention is that many projects will attempt to earn points from the MRc2: Reduce Embodied
Carbon and use the analysis as the documentation for this prerequisite with no further analysis
needed.

In addition, all projects will need to summarize the top three sources of embodied carbon in their
project and describe what strategies in the project were considered to reduce the impact of
these hotspots.

Embodied Carbon
The extraction and manufacturing phases of building materials account for a substantial portion
of embodied carbon emissions, primarily due to energy-intensive raw material extraction,
transportation from manufacturers to construction sites, and the waste produced during
manufacturing. Projects that seek carbon reductions in the early design phases (schematic
design and design development) can make the most significant decisions to reduce embodied
carbon early in projects, not after design is complete when material substitutions may not be
allowed or become cost prohibitive. The owner, designers, and contractors can collectively

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 397
make decisions to reduce the impacts a building’s materials will have on the environment by
using a fully integrated and collaborative design process.

QUANTIFY EMBODIED CARBON IMPACTS

Quantifying the Embodied Carbon Impacts provides a holistic assessment of embodied carbon
impacts across major material groups within the project’s structure, enclosure, and hardscape.
Calculate the Global Warming Potential (GWP) for all materials within each sub-category. For
example, within the structural system, the GWP of each type of concrete, steel, or other
materials is individually assessed and then combined to determine the total GWP for the
structure. Similarly, for the enclosure, materials like insulation, cladding, and glazing are
evaluated, and components such as paving and landscaping materials are analyzed for the
hardscape. By summing up the impacts of all sub-category materials, the project team can
achieve a detailed understanding of the embodied carbon for each major group, enabling
informed decisions to reduce the project’s overall environmental impact.

Teams must use building project documents, including construction drawings and specifications
or software tools to group materials into a Bill of Materials (BOM) of structure, enclosure, and
hardscape materials used on the project. The BOM must encompass all elements within the
LEED project boundary, including any ancillary structures like attached or detached parking
garages and other components with significant embodied carbon impacts. Quantities may come
from as-built data or estimated quantities from the design phase.

QUANTIFY THE CRADLE-TO-GATE EMBODIED CARBON EMISSION

Quantifying the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon emissions for each material focuses
on emissions associated with raw material extraction (A1), transportation to the manufacturing
site (A2), and the manufacturing processes (A3). Calculate the GWP based on the cradle-to-
gate (A1-A3 stages) impacts for each applicable material used in the project. This involves
multiplying the GWP/unit (from EPDs or default values) by the quantity of each material.

Teams will locate EPDs to determine the embodied carbon values for each material. If EPDs are
unavailable, teams may use industry-standard defaults provided by regional data sources or
integrated within qualifying software tools. Projects should follow a hierarchy of data:

• Use specific EPDs for the product, as published by the manufacturer. If a product-
specific EPD is not available, use the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)
default values when available.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 398
 • Refer to the most recent Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) Material Baselines report.104
• Consult other widely used, well-established, authoritative publications or databases in
the industry and supported by extensive peer-reviewed research.
• Use industry-wide EPDs relevant to the project region (see Table 1).

Table 1. Common industry-wide EPD data for North America

Material Organization
Concrete National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA)
Steel American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
Steel Recycling Institute (SRI)
Masonry National Concrete Masonry Association (NCMA)
Wood American Wood Council (AWC)
Insulation North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA)

Tools and databases

A variety of free tools and databases are available for finding EPDs and calculating embodied
carbon as part of common building design software/tools, enhancing usability in design
workflows. Below is a list of different types of tools and databases relevant to embodied carbon
and LCA for analyzing and comparing materials and products.

The data sources within these databases vary, from EPDs, manufacturer-provided data,
academic research, industry statistics, government publications, and other databases. These
differences in data sources can influence the accuracy and comparability of the results. Some
databases account for regional variations in life cycle inventory (LCI) data, baseline LCA values,
and EPD information, while others may only support analysis within specific countries or
regions. Refer to the table below for credible and widely recognized LCA tools and data sources
and standardized methodologies, supported by robust, up-to-date databases.

RESULTS OF THE EMBODIED CARBON QUANTIFICATION

When tallied up, the results of the embodied carbon quantification represent the total embodied
carbon calculated from the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) stages of materials used in the project’s
structure, enclosure, and hardscape. With the results of this quantification, teams can identify
the high GWP materials early in design and prioritize alternatives or modifications.

Table 2. Common LCA software and reporting metrics

LCA Software Reporting Metrics
Athena A1–A3 stages (cradle-to-gate)
Tally A1–A5, B1–B7 stages, and C1–C4

104 “Carbon Leadership Forum Material Baselines for North America / August 2023”, Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF), (2023),
https://carbonleadershipforum.org/clf-material-baselines-2023/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 399
 LCA Software Reporting Metrics
OneClick LCA A1–A5, and optional B and C

High-priority embodied carbon sources

High-priority embodied carbon sources such as concrete steel and insulation are responsible for
significant embodied carbon emissions. There is an incredible opportunity for embodied carbon
reduction in these high-impact materials through policy, design, material selection, and
specification. For example, optimizing a structure to minimize the use of concrete can lower
demand for concrete and reduce emissions by 22%.105 In addition, projects can explore
mandates to procure structural steel produced in the U.S. to reduce transportation emissions.

Projects must identify the three primary contributors to embodied carbon using the analysis from
this prerequisite. Use strategies within design and procurement to reduce carbon emissions
from the structure, enclosure, and/or hardscape materials. A hot spot analysis is mandatory to
identify the most carbon-intensive materials, allowing teams to focus on areas with the greatest
potential for impactful reductions.

For each of these key sources, explain how the team evaluated and implemented project-
specific strategies to reduce their environmental impact. For instance, structural materials such
as concrete and steel often emerge as hot spots due to their high embodied carbon. An
acceptable analysis would include examining options like low-carbon concrete mixes, recycled
steel, or changes in design that reduce material use and are ideally part of an early design
analysis to ensure the greatest impact.

Core and Shell only

Projects must include the embodied carbon measurements and material supplier
information in the tenant guidelines. This involves sourcing EPDs, conducting a
WBLCA to calculate embodied carbon impacts, and documenting suppliers’
sustainability attributes like recycled content or certifications. The guidelines
should offer recommendations for low-impact material selection and outline
opportunities for material reuse. This ensures that tenants have information

105 “Increase Material Efficiency and Reduce Use”, Carbon Smart Materials Palette™, Architecture 2030, (n.d.),
https://www.materialspalette.org/increase-material-efficiency-and-reduce-use/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 400
 about the environmental impact of the project’s materials, helping to promote
sustainable decision-making during fit-out and renovation processes.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Embodied All Bill of Materials (worksheet) that lists the quantities of major
Carbon structure, enclosure, and hardscape materials used in the
project, along with the cradle-to-gate (A1–A3) embodied carbon
emissions for each material.

Provide a description of the data sources used to determine the

embodied carbon values for each material. Include
justification of used baselines (regional, industry, similar
construction type, etc.) if EPA GSA, CLF, or other
recommended embodied carbon values are not available.

Projects using life-cycle assessment or embodied carbon

software tools may report the results from their tool.
Provide alternative documentation if EPDs are not available.
High- Document the top three high-priority embodied carbon sources
Priority and describe the solutions considered to reduce the impacts.
Embodied
Carbon
Sources

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Buy Clean/GSA/EPA (gsa.gov/real-estate/gsa-properties/inflation-reduction-act/lec-program-
details/material-requirements)
• Carbon Leadership Forum (benchmarks) (carbonleadershipforum.org/clf-material-baselines-
2023)
• NRMCA average EPDs (nrmca.org/association-resources/sustainability/environmental-
product-declarations/)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 401
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

BUILDING AND MATERIALS REUSE

MRc1
New Construction (1–3 points)
Core and Shell (1–5 points)

INTENT
To incorporate reused materials into new building design, thereby reducing embodied carbon,
keeping materials in circularity, reducing demand for virgin material sourcing, preserving
resources and histories, and increasing demand for reused materials.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–3
Option 1. Building Reuse 1–3
AND/OR
Option 2. Materials Reuse 1–2
Core and Shell 1–5
Option 1. Building Reuse 1–5
AND/OR
Option 2. Materials Reuse 1–2

Option 1. Building Reuse

(1–3 points New Construction, 1–5 points Core and Shell)
Maintain the existing building structure, including floor decking, roof decking, and enclosure.
Calculate reuse of the existing project area according to Table 1.

Portions of buildings deemed structurally unsound or hazardous are excluded from the credit
calculations.

Table 1. Points for reuse of existing building structure and enclosure elements for New
Construction projects

Percentage of Existing Structure and Enclosure Reuse by Project Area Points

20% 1
35% 2
50% 3

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 402
Table 2. Points for reuse of existing building structure and enclosure elements for Core and
Shell projects
Percent of Existing Structure and Enclosure Reuse by Project Area Points
10% 1
20% 2
30% 3
40% 4
50% 5

AND/OR

Option 2. Materials Reuse (1–2 points)

• Survey and identify opportunities for materials reuse and/or procurement of reused
materials from off-site.
• Reuse materials by keeping them in place or acquiring them from applicable salvage
sources or reuse markets and incorporating the materials into the new project design.
Specific targeted materials are valued higher because they have high impacts
(embodied carbon or pollution) are hard to recycle and significant amounts of these
materials end up in landfill.
• For projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope, conduct a salvage assessment
prior to deconstruction or demolition activities and identify materials that can be retained
on-site or diverted off-site to reuse markets.
o Salvaged materials sent for off-site reuse contribute to MRc5: Construction and
Demolition Waste Diversion. Materials retained on-site contribute to this credit
option.

Calculate the percent reused per material type according to Equation 1.

Points are achieved according to Table 3.

Equation 1. Reuse % per material type

𝑅𝑒𝑢𝑠𝑒 % 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑦𝑝𝑒 =
𝐴𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑦𝑝𝑒 𝑟𝑒𝑢𝑠𝑒𝑑 / 𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑎𝑚𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑡 𝑜𝑓 𝑚𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑡𝑦𝑝𝑒 𝑖𝑛 𝑁𝑒𝑤 𝐶𝑜𝑛𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑝𝑒

Table 3. Points for incorporating reused materials

Reuse materials threshold Points
Reuse at least 15% of 1 targeted material type 1 point
OR
Reuse at least 15% of 2 other material types
OR
Reuse an equivalent weighted average of targeted and other material types

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 403
 Reuse materials threshold Points

Reuse at least 30% of 1 targeted material type 2 points

OR
Reuse at least 15% of 2 targeted material types
OR
Reuse at least 15% of 4 other material types
OR
Reuse an equivalent weighted average of targeted and other material types

Table 4. Reuse material types and correlating units

Material type Unit
Targeted materials
Carpeting Surface area
Ceilings Surface area
Furniture (ancillary and systems) Pieces, weight, volume, or floor area
Interior walls Linear or surface area
Other materials
Dimensional lumber Board foot or linear
Doors Count
Casework Linear
Floor-covering materials (not including carpet) Surface area
Lighting fixtures Count
Plumbing fixtures Count
Mechanical equipment Count
Door hardware Count
Project defined other Project defined

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages projects to reuse existing buildings and building materials. Option 1
rewards projects that reuse structural and enclosure elements of existing buildings. Option 2 is
focused on the reuse of nonstructural products by keeping materials in place or acquiring
materials from salvaged sources. This option encourages projects to focus on reusing targeted
materials that have high environmental impacts. Points are earned based on the percentage of
targeted and other materials that are reused in the project.

Reusing materials in new building designs benefit the environment by lowering the demand for
virgin material sourcing, decreasing embodied carbon, and extending the lifecycle of products.
Materials diverted through construction activities and sent offsite for reuse contribute to the
MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 404
 • MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement
• MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion
• MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon
• PRc1: Project Priorities

Option 1. Building Reuse

Building reuse extends the lifespan of structures by revitalizing existing buildings or adapting
properties when their original function changes. Demolishing an old building and rebuilding with
new materials increases a building's carbon footprint due to the energy required for both
processes. Reusing a building conserves resources by reducing the need for new construction
materials and minimizes waste. This option can be more cost-effective, reducing the
environmental impact associated with construction.

Option 1 addresses the onsite reuse of existing structure and enclosure materials, including
materials left in-situ as well as those procured offsite and incorporated into the building's
structure/enclosure. To earn points, projects maintain portions of the existing building structure
and enclosure and/or incorporate offsite reuse from the early design phase and work with
architects and structural engineers to identify structural elements of the existing space that can
be reused.

Table 5 outlines how different types of reuse are recognized within the LEED v5 Materials and
Resources category, including their contributions to MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste
Diversion and MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement.

Table 5. Types of building/material reuse and credit contributions

Credits/Options/Paths Onsite reuse Procure offsite Divert onsite
(keep materials salvaged materials to
in place or within materials and salvage markets
the same project) incorporate them
into the project
(Onsite-onsite) (Offsite-onsite) (Onsite-offsite)
MRc1: Building and Material x x
Reuse, Option 1. Building Reuse
(structural materials)
MRc1: Building and Material x x
Reuse, Option 2. Materials Reuse
(nonstructural materials)
MRc5: Construction and x
Demolition Waste Diversion
MRc4: Building Product Selection x x
and Procurement (nonstructural
materials)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 405
Teams are awarded points by salvaging 20% or more of the existing building structural
elements, including enclosure elements. Key existing structural elements include floor and roof
decking, load-bearing walls, columns, and beams that provide the primary support framework
for the building. Enclosure elements include the building’s exterior skin and structural framing
that form the thermal and weather barrier of the building. Enclosure materials in this credit
includes facades, cladding, and exterior walls, while excluding nonstructural components like
roofing membranes, shingles, window assemblies, and other elements that are not essential to
the building's integrity or enclosure.

Teams must exclude hazardous and unsound materials (e.g., remediated as part of the project
for historic, abandoned, or unsafe buildings) from the calculation because these materials
cannot be safely reused or incorporated into the project. Nonhazardous materials are
encouraged to be diverted from landfill or incineration and can contribute to MRc5: Construction
and Demolition Waste Diversion.

For projects with new building components or additions, base the calculations on the existing
floor area, not including additional floor area. Per the equation below, the reuse calculation is
based on the surface areas of major existing structural and enclosure elements. Teams should
prepare a calculation table or spreadsheet listing all enclosure and structural elements within
the existing building prior to construction or renovation. Teams should quantify each item, listing
the square footage of both the existing area and the retained area. Determine the percentage of
existing elements that are retained by dividing the square footage of the total retained materials
area by the square footage of the total existing materials area. The reused area in the
calculation should include any salvaged or reused materials sourced off-site and integrated into
the project.

Equation 2. Percentage of existing building reuse

Area reused onsite + Area reused from offsite
Existing building reuse =
Existing building area
× 100

Option 2. Materials Reuse

Option 2 addresses the onsite reuse of nonstructural materials. This option also encourages the
scanning of availability for the procurement of offsite reused materials that are incorporated into
the building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 406
Deconstruction, which involves carefully dismantling structures to salvage materials, supports
environmental outcomes by reducing waste, air pollution, carbon emissions, and resource use
while conserving energy from the creation of otherwise new materials.106

Teams must conduct a salvage assessment to identify opportunities for reusing materials within
the project. The assessment must also scan local or regional sources for reclaimed materials
from off-site locations that could be incorporated into the project. A salvage assessment is
typically conducted prior to any construction taking place, and is done by deconstruction
professionals, sustainability consultants, or salvage experts and includes an inventory of
materials categorized by type, quantity, and reuse potential. An assessment is considered
adequate if it thoroughly covers all relevant materials, addresses safety concerns, and provides
actionable guidance for stakeholders to implement reuse or recycling strategies effectively.

The assessment also includes evaluating the existing building or site for salvageable
components and exploring local markets, suppliers, or deconstruction initiatives for reusable
materials. Architectural salvage stores, reuse websites/databases, and Habitat for Humanity
ReStores are places to find reused building materials.

Table 2 of the requirement outlines the points awarded for incorporating reused materials into a
project. Points are based on the reuse percentage per material type, by quantity, relative to the
total amount of the material type. Higher percentages of reused materials and achieving more
material types earn more points, encouraging teams to prioritize salvaging and reusing
structural elements, enclosure components, and other building materials.

Reusing materials
Reusing existing materials for a purpose other than what it was originally built or designed for,
reused for the same purpose, or materials that are modified and reinstalled can reduce waste
and extend useful life, providing economic and environmental benefits to owners, contractors,
building occupants, and communities. Reduce the need to purchase new materials when
reusing existing materials, leading to direct savings on materials and transportation costs.
Reusing materials onsite also helps reduce the overall embodied carbon on the project as it
eliminates the need to produce new materials that generate greenhouse gas emissions. A
reduction in construction and demolition waste will decrease the environmental burden on waste
management systems.

This credit option rewards projects for incorporating reused elements into the building. The
sources for reused materials can be from onsite or gathered offsite from vendors, other projects,

106 “Deconstruction and Building Material Reuse: A tool for local governments and economic development practitioners”, Delta
Institute, (2018, May), https://delta-institute.org/wp-content/uploads/2018/05/Deconstruction-Go-Guide-6-13-18-.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 407
salvage yards, donations, and more. Early coordination with contractors is recommended to
help identify salvageable materials and align salvage efforts with the construction schedule.
Teams should photograph materials before, during, and after salvage, as well as images of
offsite-sourced items for verification if requested by reviewers.

Targeted materials found in Table 3 for this credit include carpeting, ceilings, furniture (ancillary
and systems), and interior walls. Prioritizing these materials is based on several criteria,
including high embodied carbon, toxic impacts in landfills, and significant potential for recovery
in existing or emerging salvage and reuse markets, despite current low participation levels.
Teams should refer to the EPA WARM tool and Build Reuse association for more on the impacts
of targeted materials in LEED.107,108 These targeted materials receive a 2x multiplier compared
to other reused materials. However, all forms of reuse are recognized in this credit and are
eligible for additional rewards in other LEED credits.

Salvaging materials
Successful salvaging begins with careful planning and requires a thorough audit of the existing
materials and structures to identify which materials can be reclaimed. It is recommended to
conduct an early salvage assessment during building design to determine which tools and
methods will be most valuable and effective for removal and preservation.

Teams must calculate the percentage of salvaged materials per material type categories listed
in the credit, Table 3. Calculation must be based on the unit specified per the materials type.
Project teams are welcome to include unlisted material type(s) in the table as “project defined
other.”

Conduct salvage assessment for projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope

For projects with deconstruction or demolition in scope, conduct a salvage assessment to
document the quantity of materials that could be salvaged and reused on- or off-site. A salvage
assessment is most useful when conducted before construction activities begin. Conducting a
salvage assessment identifies valuable materials and components that can be reclaimed and
reused, thus reducing waste and disposal costs. Examples of salvageable materials include
clean wood, siding, roofing materials, plumbing, finishes, and lighting fixtures.

Teams are recommended to connect with local/regional reuse organizations and/or visit reuse
facilities to understand available materials that could be incorporated into the project. Teams
can also better understand the demand in the local area for salvaged materials generated by

107 “Waste Reduction Model (WARM)”, United States Environmental Protection Agency, (n.d.), https://www.epa.gov/warm.
108 “Home page”, Build Reuse, (n.d.), https://www.buildreuse.org/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 408
deconstructing building(s). Examples include structural elements like wood, steel, brick, and
concrete, as well as non-structural components such as doors, windows, cabinetry, and flooring.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Worksheet that shows the percent reuse compared to the
Building existing structure.
reuse Photos or as-built drawings that show the existing building
structure, including floor decking, roof decking, and enclosure
maintained. Floor plan that demonstrates the areas of reuse.
Option 2. Worksheet that shows material reuse.
Materials Salvage assessment if demolition or deconstruction is within the
Reuse project scope.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• US EPA WARM (epa.gov/warm)
• Build Reuse Association (buildreuse.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 409
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

REDUCE EMBODIED CARBON

MRc2
New Construction (1–6 points): A 20% reduction in embodied carbon is required for LEED
Platinum projects
Core and Shell (1–8 points): A 20% reduction in embodied carbon is required for LEED Platinum
projects

INTENT
To track and reduce embodied carbon of major structural, enclosure, and hardscape materials
from construction processes on new construction and renovation projects.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–6
Option 1. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment 1–6
AND/OR
Option 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) Analysis 1–3
Path 1. Project-Average Approach 1–3
OR
Path 2. Materials-Type Approach 1–2
AND/OR
Option 3. Track Carbon Emissions from Construction Activities 1–2
Core and Shell 1–8
Option 1. Whole-Building Life-Cycle Assessment 1–7
AND/OR
Option 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) Analysis 1–4
Path 1. Project-Average Approach 1–4
OR
Path 2. Materials-Type Approach 1–3
AND/OR
Option 3. Track Carbon Emissions from Construction Activities 1–2

Quantify the reduction of embodied carbon of major structure, enclosure, and hardscape
materials. All ancillary structures, such as parking structures or outbuildings within the LEED
project boundary, must be included in the calculations.

Both baseline projects and final results may use as-designed or as-constructed final quantities
provided that quantities did not change more than 10% from design through construction.
Results must be based on embodied carbon intensities of materials as constructed.

Points are awarded according to Table 1 for reductions in embodied carbon. Projects may earn
up to 6 points total.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 410
Table 1. Points for embodied carbon reductions in Options 1 and 2 for New Construction
projects
Option 1. Option 2.EPD Analysis
Whole- AND/ Path 1. Project- Path 2. Materials-type
building life OR average approach OR approach
cycle
assessment
Meet baseline or 2 1 Three material
industry average categories for one
point

OR

Five or more material

categories for two
points
10% reduction in 3 – –
GWP
20% reduction in 4 2 –
GWP
30% reduction in 5 – –
GWP
40%+ reduction 6 3 –
in GWP
NOTE: Meeting the baseline or industry average in Table 1 can achieve no more than two points.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 411
Table 2. Points for embodied carbon reductions in Options 1 and 2 for Core and Shell projects

Option 1. Option 2. EPD analysis

Whole- AND/
building life OR Path 1. Project- Path 2. Materials-type
cycle average approach OR approach
assessment
Meet baseline or 2 1 Two material categories for
industry average one point
OR
Four material categories
for two points
OR
Six or more material
categories for three points
10% reduction in 3 – –
GWP
20% reduction in 4 2 –
GWP
30% reduction in 5 – –
GWP
40%+ reduction in 6 3 –
GWP
50%+ reduction in 7 4 –
GWP
NOTE: Meeting the baseline or industry average in Table 2 can achieve no more than two points.

Option 1. Whole-building Life Cycle Assessment

(1–6 points New Construction, 1–7 points Core and Shell)
Conduct a cradle-to-grave (modules A–C, excluding operating energy and operating water-
related energy) whole-building life-cycle assessment (WBLCA) of the project’s structure,
enclosure, and hardscape materials. Compare results to a baseline developed for the project
and earn points according to Table 1.

Include results for the following impact categories in the WBLCA report:

• Global warming potential (GWP) (greenhouse gases), in kg CO2e

• Depletion of the stratospheric ozone layer, in kg CFC-11e
• Acidification of land and water sources, in moles H+ or kg SO2e
• Eutrophication, in kg nitrogen eq or kg phosphate eq
• Formation of tropospheric ozone, in kg NOx, kg O3 eq, or kg ethene

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 412
 • Depletion of nonrenewable energy resources, in MJ using CML/depletion of fossil fuels
in TRACI

AND/OR

Option 2. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD) Analysis (1–3 points New

Construction, 1–4 points Core and Shell)
PATH 1. PROJECT-AVERAGE APPROACH (1–3 POINTS)
Earn points for reducing embodied carbon of the project based on EPD data for the procured
materials compared to industry average values. Points are awarded according to Table 1 for the
whole-project weighted average of applicable material categories. Industry averages for material
categories are defined by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the most recent
Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) Material Baselines report, or similarly robust and widely
recognized publications, and industry-wide EPDs applicable to the project region.

Projects must track the GWP/unit of the materials installed, reconciling the design-phase
embodied carbon intensities if materials or GWP values have changed. The reconciliation of
material quantities is not necessary unless quantities have changed more than 10% from design
through construction. Projects must use project-specific material quantities and identify product-
specific or facility-specific Type III EPDs for covered materials to demonstrate reductions.
Biogenic carbon may only be included for calculations that include C-stage emissions.

OR

PATH 2. MATERIALS-TYPE APPROACH

(1–2 POINTS NEW CONSTRUCTION, 1–3 POINTS CORE AND SHELL)
Earn points according to Table 1 by demonstrating that structural, enclosure, and hardscape
materials for targeted material types have lower embodied carbon impacts than industry
benchmarks as demonstrated by product-specific Type III EPDs. Track the GWP per unit of the
materials installed, reconciling the design-phase embodied carbon intensities if materials or
GWP values have changed. The reconciliation of material quantities is not necessary unless
quantities have changed more than 10% from design through construction.

A weighted-average approach can be used to calculate average embodied carbon intensity

values within a product category.

Industry averages for embodied carbon intensity values are defined by the U.S. EPA, the most
recent CLF Material Baselines report, or similarly robust and widely recognized publications and
industry-wide EPDs applicable to the project region.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 413
Option 3. Track Carbon Emissions from Construction Activities (1–2 points)
Earn points for tracking carbon emissions during construction activities according to Table 3.

Table 3. Points for tracking emissions during construction activities

Pathway Type of construction-phase emissions to track LCA modules Points
Path 1 Track all fuel and utility usage for contractor jobsite A5 1
operations
Path 2 Track all fuel and utility usage for contractor and A5 2
subcontractor jobsite operations

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The goal of MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon is to implement strategies that reduce embodied
carbon through the various stages of a project, from early design development through
construction activities and procurement. There are several pathways to reduce embodied
carbon. Each way can be tailored to different project stages and objectives.

The intention of this credit is to provide flexibility but increase carbon literacy through
incentivizing completing a WBLCA alongside product research through EPD analysis. This
allows project teams to earn a maximum of six points, but meeting the baseline or industry
average can achieve no more than two points in this credit.

For example, if a project team aims to achieve the maximum six points for this credit but are
only able to achieve a 20% reduction in GWP as identified in their WBLCA, they can take either
Path 1 or Path 2 in Option 2 to earn the additional two points. Path 1 and Path 2 are not allowed
to be combined. Project teams could also pursue Option 3 and track construction phase
emissions to earn points in action or exclusion of Option 1 or Option 2.

Option 1. Whole-building Life Cycle Assessment

This pathway rewards projects seeking carbon reductions in the early design phases
(Schematic Design and Design Development). The most significant decisions can be made
early on in projects to reduce embodied carbon, rather than after the design is complete when
material substitutions may not be allowed or become cost prohibitive. When using a fully
integrated and collaborative design process, decisions can collectively be made by the owner,
designers, and contractors to substantially cut embodied carbon emissions.

A WBLCA allows projects to demonstrate reductions in life cycle stages from raw material
extraction and manufacturing, through construction, demolition, and disposal and provides
owners and design teams with a better understanding of the full life cycle impacts of design

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 414
decisions. WBLCAs assess all stages of a building’s life cycle in their calculation, including the
product stage (Modules A1–A3), construction stage (Modules A4–A5), use stage (Modules B1–
B7), end-of-life stage (Modules C1–C4) and the benefits and loads beyond the system boundary
stage (Modules D).109

The baseline and proposed buildings must be of comparable size, function, orientation, and
operating energy performance as defined in EAp2: Minimum Energy Efficiency. The service life
of the baseline and proposed buildings must be the same and at least 60 years to fully account
for maintenance and replacement. Baseline assumptions must be based on standard design
and material selection for the project location and building type. Use the same life cycle
assessment software tools and data sets to evaluate both the baseline building and the
proposed building and report all listed impact categories. Data sets must be compliant with ISO
14044110.

When developing a baseline model (also known as reference building), use recommended
modeling software and generate a model that is comparable in size, function, orientation,
building geometry, structural and thermal performance. If a team iterates early in design and
makes design changes to create a lower embodied carbon design, they may use their early
design iteration as a baseline given that it aligns with the comparative requirements listed
above. A team may also make a copy of their proposed design which includes low embodied
carbon implementation and replace materials with the regional commonly used materials. For
further guidance on developing a baseline model, see the following resources:

• Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment: Reference Building Structure and Strategies111
• National Guidelines for whole-building life cycle assessment112
• City of Vancouver Embodied Carbon Guidelines113

Option 2: EPD Analysis

EPDs are a standardized way of communicating the environmental impacts associated with a
product’s raw material extraction, energy use, chemical makeup, waste generation, and air, soil
and water emissions, among other endpoints. Project teams who analyze EPDs can more

109 “Measuring Embodied Carbon” (Figure 1), Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF), (2023), https://carbonleadershipforum.org/toolkit-2-
measuring/.
110 “ISO 14040”, ISO, (2006), https://www.iso.org/standard/37456.html.
111 “Whole Building Life Cycle Assessment: Reference Building Structure and Strategies”, American Society of Civil Engineers
(ASCE), (2018), https://sp360.asce.org/personifyebusiness/Merchandise/Product-Details/productId/239605051.
112 Bowick, Matthew, O’Connor, Jennifer; et al. “National guidelines for whole-building life cycle assessment”, National Research
Council Canada, https://doi.org/10.4224/40002740.
113 “Embodied Carbon Guidelines”, City of Vancouver, (October 2023), https://vancouver.ca/files/cov/embodied-carbon-
guidelines.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 415
accurately compare and evaluate similar products, improving their decisions when selecting
materials during design.

PATH 1: PROJECT-AVERAGE APPROACH

Projects can earn points by reducing embodied carbon, measured by comparing the project's
total embodied carbon of procured materials to industry average values through an EC3
comparison or similar tool. For industry averages values project teams should use EPA values,
the most recent Carbon Leadership Forum (CLF) Material Baselines Report, or similar. If no
values are found in these given sources, regionally appropriate industry wide EPD’s are
acceptable. Project teams must provide a narrative comparing the impact between the procured
materials and the industry averages as well as a justification of the sources used for comparison
if they vary from those recommended.

PATH 2: MATERIAL-TYPE APPROACH

This path is also meant to align with state and federal procurement policies, specifically the
Federal Buy Clean Act114, a U.S. federal government initiative that prioritizes the use of locally
made, lower-carbon construction materials in federal procurement and federally funded projects
to allow flexibility in choosing products to reduce embodied carbon. Project teams will compare
their structure, enclosure, and hardscape targeted material types to product-specific Type III
EPDs to demonstrate that the products they have procured have a lower embodied carbon
intensity than typical across the industry.

Project teams can research products with EPDs in online databases (see Table 4). In addition to
these databases, many manufacturers publish EPDs directly on their website. Industry-specific
associations may also have resources available for searching EPDs related to their trade.

Table 4. Resources for finding EPDs

Material and product databases
Embodied Carbon in Construction Calculator (EC3)115
LCA Digital Commons116
Quartz117
Athena118

114 “Federal Buy Clean Initiative”, Office of the Federal Chief Sustainability Officer, Council on Environental Quality, (n.d.), accessed
April 2, 2025, https://www.sustainability.gov/archive/biden46/buyclean/index.html.
115 “Embodied Carbon in Construction Calculator”, Building Transparency, (n.d.), https://buildingtransparency.org/auth/login.
116 “LCA Digital Commons”, Federal LCA Commons, (n.d.), https://www.lcacommons.gov/.
117 “Quartz Countertops”, Pharos, (2025), https://pharos.habitablefuture.org/common-products.
118 “Athena research teams follow common building materials from cradle-to-grave to calculate the environmental effects at each
stage in the product’s life cycle”, Athena Sustainable Materials Institute, (2025), https://www.athenasmi.org/our-software-data/lca-
databases/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 416
 Material and product databases
EPD Library119
The ICE Database120
Open LCA Nexus121
The International EPD System122
UL Spot123
Environmental Product Declaration Australasia 124
Institut Bauen and Umwelt e.V.125
Sustainable Minds126

Option 3: Track Carbon Emissions from Construction Activities

Tracking construction emissions is an emerging practice among leading contractors aiming to
reduce environmental impact and achieve sustainability goals. This option provides incentives
for projects to begin tracking and reporting carbon emissions. It is not required for projects to
show reduction of carbon emissions to earn points.

Option 3 aligns with aspects of the Sustainable Construction Leaders Contractor

Commitment127, where the guidelines are intended to set a sustainability benchmark specific to
the construction industry. The guidelines also encourage companies to procure sustainable
materials through the submittal process. Contractors are encouraged to follow the Associated
General Contractors (AGC) Playbook on Decarbonization and Carbon Reporting for the
Construction Industry128, a document created by contractors for contractors to help address
carbon emissions for the projects they build.

PATH 1. TRACK ALL FUEL AND UTILITY USAGE FOR CONTRACTOR JOBSITE
OPERATIONS
Fuel usage tracking may include the type and amount of fuel consumed by construction
equipment, vehicles, and machinery. Utility usage tracking may include electricity and water
consumption on-site for construction activities.

119 “Search the EPD Library”, The International EPD System, (n.d.), https://environdec.com/library.
120 “Embodied Carbon – The ICE Database”, Circular Ecology, (2025), https://circularecology.com/embodied-carbon-footprint-
database.html.
121 “openLCA Nexus”, Open LCA Nexus, (n.d.), https://nexus.openlca.org/.
122 The International EPD System, (n.d.), EPD International AB, (n.d.), https://portal.environdec.com/.
123 UL Spot, UL LLC, (n.d.), spot.ul.com/.
124 “Register and manage you EDPS online”, The EPD Portal, The International EPD System, (n.d.), https://epd-australasia.com/.
125 “Home page”, Institut Bauen and Umwelt e.V., (n.d.), http://ibu-epd.com/.
126 “Home page”, Sustainable Minds, (n.d.), https://www.sustainableminds.com/.
127 “Contractor’s Commitment to sustainable building practices”, Building Green, (2021),
https://www.buildinggreen.com/sites/default/files/Contractors-Committment-Sustainability.pdf.
128 Associated General Contractors (AGC) Playbook on Decarbonization & Carbon Reporting, Association of General Contractors of
America, (2024), https://www.agc.org/climate-change-playbook.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 417
PATH 2. TRACK ALL FUEL AND UTILITY USAGE FOR CONTRACTOR AND
SUBCONTRACTOR JOBSITE OPERATIONS
See Path 1. for fuel and utility usage for contractor jobsite operations. Path 2 additionally
requires that subcontractors also track their fuel and utility usage, including equipment operation
and specific tasks. This can include fuel used to transport materials to or from the jobsite.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 418
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Provide Baseline LCA report and raw WBLCA file. Provide
Whole- Proposed Design LCA report and raw WBLCA file. Provide
building Life comparative excel file or input into LEED form comparing
Cycle the outputs of the baseline vs. proposed reports to identify
Assessment reductions achieved by major material category or strategy.
Align with ECHO.

Justification of used baselines (regional, industry, similar

construction type, etc.) if EPA GSA, CLF, or other
recommended embodied carbon values are not available.
Narrative of process to use WBLCA to inform design.
Summary of strategies that resulted in reductions.
Confirmation that material quantities in the reports
represent as-constructed final quantities, or as-designed
quantities (provided quantities did not change more than
10% from design through construction).
Option 2. Path 1. Results of analysis using EC3 or similar tool/software or
EPD Project- EPDs.
Analysis Average Justification of used baselines (regional averages, industry
Approach averages, etc.) if EPA GSA, CLF, or other recommended
embodied carbon values are not available.
Confirmation that material quantities in the reports
represent as-constructed final quantities, or as-designed
quantities (provided quantities did not change more than
10% from design through construction).
Narrative of major savings/changes.
Option 2. Path 2. Provide summary sheet/table and the product-specific Type
EPD Materials III EPDs for the as-constructed materials.
Analysis Type Provide justification of used baselines if EPA GSA, CLF, or
Approach other recommended embodied carbon values are not
available.
Confirmation that material quantities in the reports
represent as-constructed final quantities, or as-designed
quantities (provided quantities did not change more than
10% from design through construction).
Option 4. Paths 1 Description of tracking process initiated and how it was
Track and 2 monitored and logged.
Carbon Proof of emissions tracking (such as monthly tracking logs,
Emissions photos or log of shipments inbound/outbound from jobsite,
from and associated emissions estimates).
Construction Carbon emissions calculations (spreadsheet or report).
Activities

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 419
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS
MRc3
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To reduce concentrations of chemical contaminants that can damage air quality and the
environment. To protect human health and the comfort of installers and building occupants.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–2
Low-emitting Material Criteria 1–2
Core and Shell 1
Low-emitting Material Criteria 1

Specify and install permanently installed products, paints, coatings, adhesives, sealants,
flooring, walls, ceilings, insulation, furniture, and/or composite wood products that meet the low-
emitting criteria. Points are awarded according to Table 1.

Table 1. Thresholds for low-emitting materials for New Construction projects

Pathway Product categories Threshold Points
Path 1 Achieve all three categories: >90% of all products in 1
each product category
• Paints and coatings
• Flooring
• Ceilings
Path 2 Achieve Path 1, plus any two of these >80% of each 2
additional categories: additional product
category
• Adhesives and sealants
• Walls
• Insulation
• Composite wood
Path 3 Achieve Path 1 plus the furniture >80% of the furniture 2
category product category

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 420
Table 2. Thresholds for low-emitting materials for Core and Shell projects

Product categories Threshold Points

Achieve any three categories: >90% of all products in 1

each product category
• Paints and coatings
• Flooring
• Ceilings
• Adhesives and sealants
• Walls
• Insulation
• Composite wood

Core and Shell only

Products to be specified and installed by tenants may be excluded.
Communicate the base building’s product list in the tenant guidelines.

Product Categories
The following products and materials are not applicable to the low-emitting materials product
categories: structural elements, equipment related to fire suppression, HVAC (including
ductwork), plumbing, electrical, conveying and communications systems, poured concrete,
structural framing, structural insulated panels (SIPs), and water-resistive barriers (material
installed on a substrate to prevent bulk water intrusion).

Paints and coatings

• Paints and coatings, by volume, cost, or surface area, must meet the volatile organic
compounds (VOC) emissions evaluation criteria.
• The paints and coatings product category includes all interior paints and coatings wet-
applied on-site.
• Exclude foamed-in-place and sprayed insulation (include in insulation category).

Adhesives and sealants

• Adhesives and sealants, by volume or cost, must meet the VOC emissions evaluation
criteria.
• The adhesives and sealants product category includes all interior adhesives and sealants
wet-applied on-site, including those used to install air or vapor barrier membranes and floor-
setting materials.

Flooring
• Nonstructural flooring materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 421
• The flooring product category includes all types of hard and soft surface flooring finishes
(e.g., carpet, ceramic tile, vinyl, rubber, engineered wood, solid wood, stone, or laminate),
raised flooring systems, entryway (“walk-off”) systems, area rugs, wood subflooring,
underlayments, sandwich panels, and air barrier membranes and vapor barrier/vapor
retarder membranes (if used inside an air barrier membrane).
• Exclude poured concrete, composite wood subflooring (include in the composite wood
category, if applicable), and wet-applied products applied on the floor.

Walls
• Nonstructural wall materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The walls product category includes all finish wall treatments (e.g., wall coverings or wall
tile), finish carpentry (e.g., millwork, paneling, railings, or trim/moldings), gypsum wallboard,
wall base/skirting, interior and exterior doors, nonstructural wall framing, and nonstructural
sandwich panels.
• Exclude wet-applied products applied on the wall, case goods, cabinetry (included in the
furniture category), countertops (included in the furniture category), bathroom accessories,
door hardware, and curtain wall and storefront systems.

Ceilings
• Nonstructural ceiling materials, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The ceilings product category includes all types of ceiling finishes (e.g., ceiling panels and
ceiling tile), suspension grids, surface ceiling structures (such as gypsum wallboard or
plaster), suspended systems (including canopies and clouds), and nonstructural sandwich
panels.
• Exclude wet-applied products applied on the ceiling and corrugated metal decking.

Insulation
• Insulation products, by surface area or cost, must meet the VOC emissions evaluation
criteria.
• The insulation product category includes all thermal and acoustic boards, batts (faced and
unfaced), rolls, blankets, sound attenuation fire blankets, and foamed-in-place, loose-fill,
blown, and sprayed insulation.
• Exclude insulation installed outside an air barrier membrane.

Furniture
• Furniture in the project scope of work, by cost, area, or number of units, must meet the
furniture emissions evaluation criteria or VOC emissions evaluation criteria.
• The furniture product category includes all permanently installed office furniture,
cubicles/systems furniture, seating, desks, tables, filing/storage, specialty items, beds, case
goods, casework, countertops, moveable/demountable partitions, bathroom/toilet partitions,
shelving, lockers, retail fixtures (including slatwall), window treatments, and furnishing items
(such as nonfixed area rugs, cubicle curtains, and mattresses) purchased for the project.
• A custom item in the furniture category is considered to meet the low-emitting criteria if all
components of the finished piece, applied on- or off-site, are declared under the furniture

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 422
 category and meet the VOC emissions evaluation criteria. Alternatively, a custom piece
meets the criteria if the finished piece meets the furniture emissions evaluation or VOC
emissions evaluation criteria.
• Exclude office and bathroom accessories, art, recreational items (such as game tables),
cabinet and drawer hardware, and planters from the credit.

Composite wood
• Composite wood products, by surface area or cost, must meet the formaldehyde emissions
evaluation criteria.
• The composite wood product category includes all particleboard, medium-density fiberboard
(both medium density and thin), hardwood plywood with veneer, composite or combination
core, and wood structural panels or structural wood products.

Low-emitting Criteria
VOC emissions evaluation criteria
• Third-party certification. Product has a qualifying third-party certification, valid at the time
of product purchase, that demonstrates testing and compliance according to the California
Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method v1.2-2017. using the private office
scenario. Products used in classrooms may be modeled using the schools or private office
scenario.

OR

• Qualified independent laboratory report. Product has a qualifying laboratory report (or
summary) demonstrating the product has been tested no more than three years prior to the
product’s purchase, according to the California Department of Public Health (CDPH)
Standard Method v1.2-2017. Products must meet the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the private
office scenario. Products used in classrooms may be modeled using the schools or private
office scenario.

OR

• Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

Furniture emissions evaluation criteria

• Product has a qualifying third-party certification, valid at the time of product purchase, that
demonstrates testing according to ANSI/BIFMA Standard Method M7.1-2011 (R2021) and
complies with specific sections of the ANSI/BIFMA e3-2014 or e3-2024, Furniture
Sustainability Standard. Statements of product compliance must include the exposure
scenario(s).
• Seating products must be evaluated using the seating scenario. Classroom furniture must
be evaluated using the standard school classroom scenario. Other products should be
evaluated using the open plan or private office scenario, as appropriate. The open plan
scenario is more stringent.

OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 423
• Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

Salvaged and reused materials

Product is more than one year old at the time of use.

If another product (including but not limited to adhesives, sealants, paints, and coatings) is
applied to the inherently nonemitting material and has a separate manufacturer and cost, to the
end user, from the original material, the applied product may be documented as a separate
product and meet the low-emitting criteria applicable to the applied product, even if applied off-
site.

If another product is applied to the inherently nonemitting/salvaged/reused material and does

not have a separate manufacturer and cost, to the end user, the result is considered a new
finished product that no longer qualifies as an inherently nonemitting material and is subject to
the VOC emissions evaluation criteria.

Formaldehyde Emissions Evaluation Criteria

Product has a qualifying third-party certification from a California Air Resources Board (CARB)
approved/Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) recognized third-party certifier (TPC), valid at
the time of product purchase, that demonstrates the product is one of the following:

• Certified as ultra-low-emitting formaldehyde (ULEF) product under the EPA Toxic

Substances Control Act, Formaldehyde Emission Standards for Composite Wood
Products (TSCA, Title VI) (EPA TSCA Title VI), or CARB Airborne Toxic Control Measure
(ATCM).
• Certified as no added formaldehyde resins (NAF) product under EPA TSCA Title VI or
CARB ATCM.
• Wood structural panels manufactured according to PS 1-09 or PS 2-10 (or one of the
standards considered by CARB to be equivalent to PS 1 or PS 2) and labeled bond
classification Exposure 1 or Exterior.
• Structural wood product manufactured according to ASTM D 5456 (for structural
composite lumber), ANSI A190.1 (for glued laminated timber), ASTM D 5055 (for I-
joists), ANSI PRG 320 (for cross-laminated timber), or PS 20-15 (for finger-jointed
lumber).

OR

• Product is inherently nonemitting, salvaged, or reused.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 424
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Installing low-emitting products can significantly reduce the quantity of indoor air contaminants
in buildings. Coupled with adequate ventilation and filtration, specifying and installing low-
emitting materials is an important strategy towards improving indoor air quality.

This credit is awarded to projects with permanently installed products that meet established low-
emitting criteria. There are multiple pathways for earning credit compliance. In New
Construction, product categories are grouped to reflect the significant impact emissions can
have from walls, ceiling, and flooring due to the large surface area these categories cover, as
well as progress in the market. In the Core and Shell and ID+C rating systems, product
categories may be attempted individually, based on project scope.

Identifying and Specifying Low-emitting Products

The easiest way to find products with a VOC emissions evaluation may be to search third-party
certification program databases from the qualified third-party certifiers or programs listed on the
CDPH website.

Other sources for finding compliant products include online aggregated product databases
including Ecomedes129, the Sustainable Minds® Transparency Catalog™130, Building Ease131,
and UL SPOT®.132

Save certificates for the specified products, ensuring that the specified products and the
certificates match. Make note of any certificates expected to expire before the time of purchase.
Certification periods that begin after the product’s date of purchase do not demonstrate
compliance with the installed product. Track progress towards credit achievement using the
LEED materials calculator.

There are international third-party programs and low-emitting third-party standards that can be
used for this credit. See the Low-emitting Materials resource document on USGBC’s website.133

129 “Home page”, ecomedes, (n.d.), https://www.ecomedes.com/.

130 “Sustainable Minds® Transparency Catalog™”, Sustainable Minds, (2025), https://transparencycatalog.com/.
131 “Welcome to the BuildingEase Platform”, BuildingEase, (n.d.), https://app.buildingease.com/.
132 “SPOT® – Sustainable Product Database”, UL Solutions, (2025), https://spot.ul.com/.
133 “Low-Emitting Materials”, U.S. Green Building Council, (n.d.), https://www.usgbc.org/credits/new-construction-core-and-shell-a-
new-construction-retail-new-construction-data-38.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 425
Calculating Product Category Achievement
Project teams can decide how many product categories to attempt to earn points. To achieve
one point, the project demonstrates meets or exceeds the threshold for each product category.
This can be based on cost, surface area, volume, or number of units, depending upon the
measurement methods available for each product category. Project teams can choose different
measurement types to measure progress towards achievement if the measurement method is
consistent in each product category. For example, a project could use “surface area” to
demonstrate achievement of the Flooring category, “number of units” for the furniture category,
and “volume” for the Adhesives and Sealants category.

Project teams are advised to set project-achievable category goals and research, specify, and
track low- or non-emitting products in those categories according to the low-emitting criteria
appropriate for the products. A targeted approach focusing on specific products, or product
categories, is likely to be more manageable and successful than amassing documentation for all
products in every category and determining attempted categories post-construction. Additionally,
aiming for 100% compliance within a category, when possible, may simplify the process by
eliminating the need to track individual units.

This credit will be documented by product category using the LEED materials calculator. Note
that this calculator is combined with the MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement
calculator. Teams are encouraged to combine submittal reviews and product vetting with the
criteria found in both credits to maximize credit achievement and harmonize product selection,
specification, and documentation processes.

Except for the overall product exclusions stated in the Requirements, all permanently installed,
nonstructural products — within and inclusive of the project's air barrier membrane — must be
in the calculation for the attempted categories. These products are expected to impact indoor air
quality and can be tested in alignment with the low-emitting criteria. Products installed in parking
garages and basements are to be included, as these spaces are occupied by people, even if
intermittently.

Product categories which have no applicable products installed (i.e., they are not in the project
scope of work) are not eligible to attempt the category.

PAINTS AND COATINGS

This category applies to products covered in CSI Masterformat 09 90 00 Painting and Coating.
Exterior painting, staining and finish can be excluded. Exterior paint cannot be excluded from
the calculation if used indoors. Aerosol products are included. Coatings also includes sealers
which are products applied to either block materials from penetrating into or leaching out of a

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 426
substrate, to prevent subsequent coatings from being absorbed by the substrate, or to prevent
harm to subsequent coatings by materials in the substrate (SCAQMD Rule 1113).

VOCs in paints and coatings may be ingredients that are included to enhance product
performance and shelf life, added by the contractor, or byproducts of the paint drying process.
Water-based acrylic latex paints generally have lower VOCs than solvent-based paints. Lime
and mineral silicate paints are most likely to be compliant with VOC limits. Paints that are
advertised as antimicrobial, recycled, specialty paints (chalk, dry-erase, magnetic), and paints
containing alkylphenol ethoxylates (APE) or PFAS may have compliant emissions evaluations,
but introduce additional human and/or environmental hazards not addressed by this credit that
the project team may wish to consider.

ADHESIVES AND SEALANTS

Common adhesives and sealants used in construction are defined in SCAQMD Rule 1168. An
adhesive is any substance used to bond one surface to another surface by attachment. A
sealant is any material with adhesive properties that is designed to fill, seal, waterproof, or
weatherproof gaps or joints between two surfaces. Note that sealers are different types of
products and are to be categorized as coatings. Aerosol products are also included in this
product category for LEED calculation purposes.134

FLOORING
In most buildings, the flooring category represents a significant source of indoor emissions due
to the large amount of surface area covered in relation to the project. Consider reusing existing
floors, where possible. When reuse is not available, solid wood floors, ceramic tiles, cork floors
(especially pre-finished without a PVC/vinyl layer), linoleum sheet and tile, are likely to have
compliant VOC emissions evaluations, as are many carpet and vinyl flooring products. Evaluate
products holistically, like the presence of contaminants or additives like lead in recycled content
products, additives included in sealants, and those used for the cleaning of flooring materials.

Other concerns can relate to the project team’s environmental priorities, such as the lack of
recovery and circularity options for vinyl products at end of life, or potential toxic emissions
released during a product’s production. These additional multi-attribute considerations may not
be addressed by product emissions criteria but are considered in the aligned MRc4: Building
Product Selection and Procurement.

134United States Environmental Protection Agency, (n.d.), Controlling Pollutants and Sources: Indoor Air Quality Design Tools for
Schools, epa.gov/iaq-schools/controlling-pollutants-and-sources-indoor-air-quality-design-tools-schools#WallsandCeilingMaterials.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 427
WALLS
In many buildings, the walls category represents a significant source of indoor emissions from
products due to the large surface area. For instance, gypsum wallboard and doors often
comprise most of the surface area in this category. Look for compliant gypsum wallboards
especially those made with natural gypsum or post-consumer recycled content. As it relates to
the MRc5: Construction and Demolition Waste Diversion, consider how a project can separate
unpainted gypsum wallboard cut-offs for manufacturer take-back and recycling.

CEILINGS
Like the walls category, the ceilings category is likely to be strongly influenced by surface area.
See the walls category for notes on gypsum wallboard. Acoustical ceiling systems are also a
popular material option and are likely to have compliant VOC emissions evaluation. Be sure to
also include ceiling suspension grids/components, noting that powder-coated metal components
are most likely to be compliant.

INSULATION
Insulation products with compliant testing typically include both natural and synthetic products.
Products include:

• Expanded cork
• Blown-in wood fiber
• Cellulose
• Fiberglass or mineral wool
• Hemp or wood fiber batts and boards
• Unfaced fiberglass batts
• Formaldehyde free mineral wool batts and boards

Plastics and foam insulation products can also meet the emission criteria. Even if products meet
the emissions evaluation criteria, they may still include problematic ingredients like
formaldehyde and fire retardants. Consider these when selecting products and seek synergies
for product optimization with the MRc4: Building Product Selection and Procurement.

FURNITURE
The furniture category includes both systems furniture as well as ancillary furniture. Typically,
the ability to find compliant furniture will be more available from systems furniture
manufacturers, as opposed to free standing or custom furniture. A convenient way to find
products with a furniture emissions evaluation is to search product databases that list qualified

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 428
third-party verified programs and reports. See the Low-Emitting Materials resource document on
USGBC’s website.

The Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association (BIFMA) writes standards
for furniture safety, ergonomics, and sustainability. Qualifying furniture products in LEED will
meet the ANSI/BIFMA M7.1-2011 (R2021) Standard Test Method for Determining VOC
Emissions from Office Furniture Systems, Components, and Seating. In addition, products must
comply with ANSI/BIFMA e3-2024e Furniture Sustainability Standard, Section 7.6.2.
Laboratories that conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test
methods they use.

COMPOSITE WOOD
The composite wood product category includes all particleboard, medium density fiberboard
(both medium density and thin), hardwood plywood with veneer, composite or combination core,
and wood structural panels or structural wood products. Products in this category must meet the
Formaldehyde Emissions Evaluation requirements in the rating system.

Formaldehyde emissions evaluation

The composite wood category typically includes products that adhere to classifications and
standards defined by leading industry organizations and frameworks, such as the CARB
standards, ensuring low formaldehyde emissions and compliance with stringent air quality
requirements. CARB maintains a list of composite wood mills that have been approved by third-
party certifiers135, and this list can be used to help find and specify compliant composite wood
products. Certificates demonstrating a product is certified as NAF or ULEF for products must be
from a CARB-approved Third-Party Certifier136. The certification period must cover the date of
purchase.

Note that this credit does not refer to the minimum requirements of the CARB 93120 ATCM or
EPA TSCA Title VI. It uses the more stringent requirements for ULEF resins or NAF resins as
defined in the CARB ATCM. These criteria are some of the strongest available for formaldehyde
emissions from composite wood. Ensure the certificate confirms this threshold is met.

The CARB composite wood definition includes wood structural panels, structural composite
lumber, glued laminated timber, I-joists, cross-laminated timber, and finger-jointed lumber.

135 “CARB composite wood mills”, CARB, (n.d.), https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/certified-mills-list-january-2-2025.

136 “CARB-Approved Third-Party Certifier”, CARB, (n.d.), https://ww2.arb.ca.gov/resources/documents/carb-approved-third-party-
certifiers-executive-orders.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 429
These products are subject to other standards. APA – The Engineered Wood Association
website137 can be used to source compliant products.

Goods containing composite wood components like doors with a composite wood core do not
belong in the composite wood category. They are subject to the more comprehensive emissions
evaluations of other categories.

VOC Emissions Evaluation Criteria

CDPH Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions
from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, v.1.2-2017138 is also known as the
emission testing method for California Specification 01350, which is widely recognized as a
leadership standard for its stringent scientific criteria and detailed specificity. It uses the chronic
reference exposure levels established by the California Office of Environmental Health Hazard
Assessment, which include some of the most stringent criteria in use, although they do not
account for non-cancer risks.

Compliant products can come from qualified third-party product certifications or from a qualified
independent laboratory. See USGBC resource for list of qualifying third-party certifications.

Qualifying independent laboratory reports that are provided by the manufacturer may be used to
demonstrate VOC emissions evaluation, although because they are not third-party verified, the
project team must confirm all criteria are reported on the report, including:

• Declaration that the product has been tested according to CDPH Standard Method v1.2-
2017 and complies with the VOC limits in Table 4-1 of the method.
• TVOC results at 14 days measured as specified in CDPH Standard Method v1.2-2017
• Test date (less than three years from date of purchase).
• The name of the laboratory that performed the evaluation and documentation (such as
accreditation number or certificate with scope of accreditation) demonstrating the
accreditation under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test method.
• The modeling scenario used (must be private office unless the product is installed in a
classroom).

137 “About Us”, APA, (n.d.), https://www.apawood.org/about-us.

138 “Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources using
Environmental Chambers, version 1.2”, Indoor Air Quality Section Environmental Health Laboratory Branch Division of
Environmental and Occupational Disease Control, California Department of Public Health, (January 2017),
https://www.cdph.ca.gov/programs/ccdphp/deodc/ehlb/iaq/cdph%20document%20library/cdph-
iaq_standardmethod_v1_2_2017_ada.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 430
 • For wet-applied products, the amount of product applied in mass per surface area
(during testing).

Inherently Non-emitting Criteria

Inherently non-emitting products are building materials that, owing to their composition or use in
construction, do not emit VOCs and therefore do not require an emissions evaluation. Products
that are inherently non-emitting include stone, ceramic, powder-coated metals, plated or
anodized metal, and unfinished or untreated solid wood. For the purposes of this credit,
untreated and unfinished solid wood (not engineered wood) can also be considered non-
emitting even though such materials will likely emit some amount of formaldehyde naturally.
Ceramic and powder-coated metals meet the criteria for being inherently non-emitting when
their manufacturing processes result in chemically stable and inert surfaces that do not release
VOCs into the environment after production. These materials are compliant without any VOC
emissions testing if they do not include additives, surface coatings, binders, or sealants, as such
products would emit VOCs.

If a product applied to the inherently non-emitting material has a separate manufacturer and
cost to the end-user from the original material, the applied product may be documented as a
separate product subject to the applicable low-emitting criteria, even if applied off-site.

If a product applied to the inherently non-emitting material does not have a separate
manufacturer and cost to the end-user, the result is considered a new finished product that no
longer qualifies as an inherently non-emitting material and is subject to the applicable low-
emitting criteria.

Salvaged or Reused Materials Criteria

Products that are salvaged and reused and more than one year old will automatically comply
with the VOC emission evaluation and do not require emissions evaluations. For salvaged or
reused composite wood products, project teams must account for any off-site applied finishes or
treatments in the composite wood category. These must comply with the VOC emissions
evaluation criteria to ensure comprehensive assessment of the product’s total environmental
impact.

Some salvaged or reused materials will have products applied to them (such as sealants or
finishes). For instance:

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 431
 • If a product is applied to the salvaged or reused material and has a separate
manufacturer and cost to the end-user from the original material, the applied product
may be documented as a separate product subject to the applicable low-emitting criteria,
even if applied off-site.
• If a product is applied to the salvaged or reused material but does not have a separate
manufacturer and cost to the end-user, the result is considered a new finished product
that no longer qualifies as a salvaged or reused material and is subject to the applicable
low-emitting criteria.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All Path 1. Achieve Provide documentation for every product in the
Paints and calculator that meets Low Emitting Materials criteria.
Coatings, Flooring, Complete the USGBC material calculator.
and Ceilings
All Path 2. Achieve Provide documentation for every product in the
Path 1 plus any calculator that meets Low Emitting Materials criteria.
two: Adhesive and Complete the USGBC material calculator.
Sealants, Walls,
Insulation, and
Composite Wood
All Path 3. Achieve Provide documentation for every product in the
Path 1 plus calculator that meets Low Emitting Materials criteria.
Furniture Complete the USGBC material calculator.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• CDPH Standard Method v1.2
(cdph.ca.gov/programs/ccdphp/deodc/ehlb/iaq/cdph%20document%20library/cdph-
iaq_standardmethod_v1_2_2017_ada.pdf)
• ANSI/BIFMA Standard M7.1, etc. (bifma.org)
• SCAQMD Rule 1113 (aqmd.gov/home)
• SCAQMD Rule 1168 (aqmd.gov/home)
• CARB ATCM 93120 (arb.ca.gov)
• EPA TSCA Title VI (epa.gov/formaldehyde/formaldehyde-emission-standards-composite-
wood-products)
• ASTM D5456, 5055 (astm.org)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 432
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

BUILDING PRODUCT SELECTION

AND PROCUREMENT
MRc4
New Construction (1–5 points)
Core and Shell (1–5 points)

INTENT
To encourage the use of products and materials that have sustainability information available
and that have environmentally, economically, and socially preferable impacts in alignment with
industry momentum. To reward project teams for selecting products from manufacturers who
have disclosed sustainability information about their products and optimized their products
across multiple criteria areas.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–5
Product Categories 1–5

Select nonstructural building products that demonstrate achievement in one or more of five
criteria areas:

• Climate health
• Human health
• Ecosystem health
• Social health and equity
• Circular economy

Products that achieve two or more criteria areas are considered multi-attribute. Products that
achieve higher levels of use and/or that are across additional criteria areas will be given a
higher value in credit calculations.

Achievement is demonstrated through eligible compliant manufacturer product documentation,

which includes third-party product certifications, ecolabels, declarations, and standards. A single
product document can demonstrate multiple benefits and/or achievement levels, or the product
can earn multi-attribute criteria through a combination of separate eligible product documents.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 433
There are three achievement levels for products:

• Level 1: A product in this level achieves a first step toward sustainability for a criteria
area. Widespread achievement of these practices drive market transformation toward
sustainability outcomes within the criteria area. Products scored at this level earn a 1x
multiplier.
• Level 2: This level represents a leadership position in the marketplace for a given
sustainability attribute. Products at this level are optimized and demonstrate a level of
sustainability that peers aspire to achieve. Products scored at this level earn a 2x
multiplier.
• Level 3: Products that earn this level are elite and represent the forefront of
sustainability. Products scored at this level earn a 3x multiplier.

This credit rewards the selection of eligible interior and enclosure materials from the following
product categories:

• Paints and coatings

• Adhesives and sealants
• Flooring
• Walls
• Ceilings
• Insulation
• Furniture
• Composite wood
• Plumbing fixtures

Eligible products meet the achievement levels and are scored as 1, 2, or 3. These scores are
added across criteria areas to add up to a maximum score of 5 per product. This cumulative
score is called the product “multi-attribute score.”

Each individual product’s value (cost, area, volume, or unit) is adjusted based on its multi-
attribute score:

Product value × Multi-attribute score = Adjusted product value for LEED

To determine total compliant product value per category, follow Equation 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 434
Equation 1. Calculate the multi-attribute adjusted value of a product category
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑦 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝐿𝐸𝐸𝐷
(𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐴 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖-𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×) + (𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐵 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖-𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×) +
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐴 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐵 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
( 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐶 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖-𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×)+( 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐷 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖-𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×)
= 100 × 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐶 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐷 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑠 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑦)

Any product category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 100% earns 1 point. Points are
awarded for achievement of whole product categories, up to a maximum of 5 points according
to Table 1.

Table 1. Points for multi-attribute achievement of product categories

Number of product categories Points

1 product category 1
2 product categories 2
3 product categories 3
4 product categories 4
5 product categories 5

NOTE: Please see the resources section of the credit library for additional details on this credit.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit incentivizes projects to prioritize more environmentally responsible materials and
choose products with multiple eco-friendly attributes. It focuses on finish materials, such as
paints, coatings, flooring, and walls, and considers their impact on the overall environmental
performance of the project.

Some structure, enclosure, and hardscape materials are not included in this credit, but are
addressed in the embodied carbon credits including MRp2: Quantify and Assess Embodied
Carbon and MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon. Other materials can earn rewards for multi-
attribute considerations within the Project Priorities library.

In this credit, products are evaluated based on how they perform according to five criteria areas:
climate health, human health, ecosystem health, social health and equity, and circular economy.
Within each criteria area, there are three achievement levels that products can meet. Evaluation
will be based on how products demonstrate achievement in each of the criteria areas with
respect to the three levels. A product that reaches achievement levels in multiple criteria areas
is considered a multi-attribute product and will earn a higher value within this credit.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 435
Selecting Building Products
The goal is to recognize products that are optimized across multiple attributes, including
promoting human and environmental health, supporting regenerative sourcing practices, and
fostering a circular economy. These criteria areas are meant to align with the impact areas in the
Mindful Materials Common Materials Framework (CMF) and the AIA Architecture and Design
(A&D) Materials Pledge.

The AIA A&D Materials Pledge139 provides a framework to encourage the use of building
materials that prioritize sustainability throughout their lifecycle, including aspects like green
chemistry, responsible sourcing, and end-of-life management. The Mindful Materials Common
Materials Framework (CMF)140 standardizes product evaluations, emphasizing environmental
and health impacts. AIA has also introduced reporting requirements, while the CMF is
expanding its focus to include data integration and related advancements. Both initiatives aim to
enhance transparency and optimization in building materials, functioning independently of
specific certifications by providing a structured framework that allows various standards to align
with key impact areas. The five criteria areas help connect different ecolabels, offering a
consistent and holistic approach to material evaluation, where certifications are scored based on
disclosure, verification, and optimization, among other criteria.

Product Categories
To achieve a point, the project must demonstrate they meet or exceed the threshold for each
product category. This can be based on cost, surface area, volume, or number of units,
depending upon the measurement methods available for each product category. Project teams
can choose different measurement types to measure progress towards achievement as long as
the measurement method is consistent in each product category. For example, a project could
use “surface area” to demonstrate achievement of the flooring category, “number of units” for
the furniture category, and “volume” for the adhesives and sealants category.

This credit will be documented by product category using the LEED materials calculator. This
calculator is combined with the MRc3: Low-Emitting Materials calculator. Teams are encouraged
to combine submittal reviews and product vetting with the criteria found in both credits to
maximize credit achievement and harmonize product selection, specification, and
documentation processes.

139 Materials Pledge | AIA, (n.d.), aia.org/design-excellence/climate-action/zero-carbon/materials-pledge.

140 mindful MATERIALS CMF Reference Guide, (n.d.), Mindful MATERIALS, mindfulmaterials.com/cmf-reference-guide.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 436
PRODUCT MULTIPLIERS
Multipliers are awarded for products that earn any level of achievement in one or more criteria
areas. A product does not have to be multi-attribute (meet achievement levels in multiple criteria
areas) to have a multiplier. Products that achieve a first step towards sustainability for a criteria
area are categorized as Level 1 and will receive a 1x multiplier. Products in Level 2 represent a
leadership position in the marketplace for a given sustainability attribute and will receive a 2x
multiplier. Products in Level 3 are elite and represent the forefront of sustainability and will
receive a 3x multiplier. These scores are added across criteria areas to add up to a maximum
score of five per product. This value is called the multi-attribute score for the product.

MULTI-ATTRIBUTE SCORING OF PRODUCTS

Product documentation provided by manufacturers will be eligible for reward in this credit. The
documentation must meet the USGBC-approved list of eligible product documentation.
Individual products selected for compliance with MRc4: Building Product Selection and
Procurement credit may have more than one eligible product documentation. Multiple document
scores can be added together for a combined multi-attribute score for that product, but only the
highest value in each criteria area will be awarded (double counting is not allowed).

MULTI-ATTRIBUTE ADJUSTED VALUE

Each eligible product earns a multi-attribute score (MAS) based on its level of achievement in
each criteria area. The MAS is multiplied by the product's value to find each product's adjusted
product value for LEED. In a single product category, each eligible product's adjusted value is
added together and divided by the total unadjusted value of all products in the product category.
This value is the Product Category Adjusted Value for LEED. This value is how to determine
credit achievement. Any product category adjusted value for LEED that exceeds 100% earns
one point.

Equation 2. Calculating product category adjusted value

𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑦 𝑎𝑑𝑗𝑢𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝐿𝐸𝐸𝐷 = 100 ×
(𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐴 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖−𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×)+(𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐵 𝑚𝑢𝑙𝑡𝑖−𝑎𝑡𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑒 ×)
𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐴 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑃𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝐵 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒
(𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑣𝑎𝑙𝑢𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑠 𝑖𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡 𝑐𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑔𝑜𝑟𝑦)

NUMBER OF PRODUCT CATEGORIES

There are a total of nine product categories to consider, which include paints and coatings,
adhesives and sealants, flooring, walls, ceilings, insulation, furniture, composite wood, and
plumbing fixtures. Projects may earn one point for each category up to a maximum of five
product categories.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 437
Projects can earn points based on the number of categories in which they select eligible
materials that meet the required criteria. Nonstructural products that do not clearly align with
one of the product categories listed below may still be eligible to be included for assessment.
This credit is designed to offer flexibility in evaluating different product types that fall outside the
nine listed categories. This tiered point system incentivizes broader and deeper integration of
sustainable materials across multiple categories, encouraging projects to enhance their overall
environmental performance by incorporating products that support health, sustainability, and
reduced environmental impact. Table 2 lists the product categories and some examples of
products found within the categories.

Table 2. Product categories and example of products

Product Description and example of products
categories
Paints and Paints and coatings are materials applied to surfaces for protection and decoration.
coatings Coatings are generally chosen for their enhanced protective properties and
functional capabilities, whereas paints are chosen for their aesthetic appeal.

Examples of products:

• Primers
• Sealers
• Topcoats
• Specialized dyes
• Specialized sealers
• Specialized hardeners
• Specialized toppings for concrete floors
• Plasters

Adhesives and Adhesives and sealants are substances used to bond two materials together and
sealants are widely used in construction, manufacturing, and various other industries. The
main difference is that adhesives are focused on creating strong bonds between
surfaces, while sealants are designed to fill gaps and prevent the infiltration or
leakage of fluids, gases, or other substances.

Examples of products:

• Wood bonding adhesive

• Tile bonding adhesive
• Carpet bonding adhesive
• Sealants for joints and gaps in walls, floors, and ceilings
• Specialty adhesives for flooring
• Specialty adhesives for panel
• Sealants for HVAC system

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 438
 Product Description and example of products
categories
Flooring Flooring are materials used to cover the ground surface of a building or structure to
provide a functional walking surface for building users. The flooring product
category encompasses a wide range of materials, including both hard and soft
surface finishes.

Examples of products:

• Carpet
• Ceramic tile
• Vinyl flooring
• Rubber flooring
• Engineered wood flooring
• Solid wood flooring
• Stone flooring
• Terrazzo flooring
• Laminates flooring
• Raised flooring systems
• Wall base
• Transition strips
• Stair nosing
• Entryway systems
• Area rugs
• Wood and composite wood subflooring
• Underlayment
• Other types of floor coverings

Walls Wall products are designed to provide crucial functions within a building and refer to
materials and finishes used to provide structural support, insulation and protection
within a building. It also helps regulate indoor temperatures and maintain comfort
levels by reducing heat transfer between the indoor and outdoor environments. Wall
serves as barriers for protection against sound, fire and moisture.

Examples of products:

• Wall coverings
• Wall paneling
• Wall tile
• Surface wall structures e.g., gypsum wall board or plaster
• Cubicle wall
• Curtain wall
• Partition walls
• Trim
• Interior and exterior doors
• Wall frames
• Interior and exterior windows
• Window treatments

Ceilings Ceiling products are materials and systems used to construct, finish, or enhance the
ceilings of a building. Ceilings play a key role in acoustics, lighting, insulation, and
the overall functionality of a space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 439
 Product Description and example of products
categories

Examples of products:
• Ceiling panels
• Ceiling tile
• Surface ceiling structures e.g., gypsum or plaster
• Suspended or drop ceiling systems e.g., grid systems, canopies and clouds
• Glazed skylights

Insulation Insulation is any type of material that provides a barrier within the walls, ceilings,
and floors of a home and helps regulate temperature and noise. 141 It plays an
important role in heat transfer and maintaining indoor temperatures in buildings by
providing thermal resistance.

Examples of products:
• Thermal and acoustic boards
• Batt Insulation
• Roll Insulation
• Blanket Insulation
• Sound attention fire blankets
• Foamed-in place insulation
• Loose-fill insulation
• Blown insulation
• Sprayed insulation

Furniture Furniture refers to movable objects that support various human activities, such as
seating, eating, sleeping, and storing items. Furniture is both functional and
decorative, playing a significant role in the design and use of interior spaces. It can
be made from a variety of materials, including wood, metal, plastic, glass, and
fabric, and comes in many styles, shapes, and sizes to suit different needs and
tastes.

Examples of products:

• Seating
• Desks
• Tables
• Filing/storage
• Free-standing cabinetry
• Systems furniture
• Partitions
• Bathroom partitions
• Shelving
• Lockers
• Specialty and custom fixtures
• Furniture furnishing

141 Powering today, Transforming tomorrow, (n.d.), The Department of Energy’s Energy.gov, energy.gov/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 440
 Product Description and example of products
categories
Composite Composite wood is engineered wood products that are made by combining wood
wood fibers, particles, or veneers with adhesives or resins to create a material that is often
used in place of solid wood.

Examples of products:

• Particleboard
• Medium density fiberboard
• Hardwood plywood with veneer
• Composite or combination core
• Wood structural panels or structural wood products

Plumbing A plumbing fixture is connected to the plumbing system and is designed to deliver
fixtures and drain water.

Examples of products:

• Water closets
• Urinals
• Lavatory and kitchen faucets
• Showerheads

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Product All USGBC material calculator.
categories Provide documentation for every product in the calculator
that meets BPSP criteria.
Confirmation that all products were installed, and that all
relevant products in the category were included in
calculations.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• AIA A&D Materials Pledge (aia.org/design-excellence/climate-action/zero-carbon/materials-pledge)
• Mindful Materials CMF (mindfulmaterials.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 441
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

— Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Materials and Resources Credit and Restoration

CONSTRUCTION AND
DEMOLITION WASTE DIVERSION
MRc5
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To reduce construction and demolition waste disposed of in landfills and incineration facilities
and pollution to the environment. To reduce the environmental impacts and embodied carbon of
manufacturing new materials and products. To delay the need for new landfill facilities that are
often located in frontline communities. To create green jobs and materials markets for building
construction services.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan
AND
Diversion 1–2

Comply with the following requirements:

Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan

Develop and implement a construction and demolition (C&D) materials management plan and
achieve points through diversion and recycling.

AND

Diversion (1–2 points)

Follow the materials management plan and provide a final waste management report detailing
all waste generated, including disposal and diversion rates for the project. Calculations can be
by weight or volume but must be consistent throughout. Points are awarded according to Table
1.

Divert C&D waste materials by employing strategies including off-site salvage, source-
separation for single-material recycling, mixed C&D recycling, and industry/manufacturer take-
back programs.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 442
 • Source-separated materials are considered 100% diverted for credit calculation
purposes. These include:
o Recovered materials sent to a single-material recycler.
o Recovered materials sent for off-site salvage/reuse.
o Materials sent to a qualifying manufacturer or industry take-back program.
o Salvaged materials, which are valued at twice the diversion rate (200%) of other
diverted materials for credit calculation purposes. Salvaged materials include
recovered materials sent off-site for reuse.
NOTE: Materials reused on-site contribute to MRc1: Building and Materials Reuse.
• Mixed C&D materials sent to a processing facility for recovery must take the facility
average recycling rate. Recycling rates not verified by a third party must assume a
maximum of 35% diversion rate.
• Materials destined for alternative daily cover or incineration/energy recovery are
considered waste (0% diverted).
• Exclude hazardous waste from calculations. Exclude on-site reuse from credit
calculations (include in MRc1: Building and Materials Reuse).
• Exclude excavated soil and land-clearing debris from calculations.

Table 1. Points for C&D diversion

Thresholds Points
Divert at least 50% of the total construction and demolition material 1

At least 10% of diverted materials must be salvaged or source-separated and sent to

single-material recycler(s)
Divert at least 75% of the total construction and demolition material 2

At least 25% of the total diverted materials must be salvaged or source-separated and sent
to single-material recycler(s)

Core and Shell only

Include the building’s approved construction and demolition waste management
plan in the tenant guidelines.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages projects to plan and make design changes that reduce waste during
construction. It rewards behavior change that leads to increased quality of recycling and a
higher potential for materials to be recovered during construction.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 443
Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan
Creating the construction and demolition material management plan early in the design phase
allows sufficient time for planning and coordination, identifying effective strategies, and
establishing contractual agreements to maximize waste prevention and diversion. It also
educates project teams, construction site workers, and waste haulers on the importance of
following the plan for diverting materials from landfills and incinerators successfully. The salvage
assessment featured in the MRc1: Building and Materials Reuse is also useful to identify
materials that can be diverted off-site to reuse markets. A well-structured plan can minimize
costs and maximize returns by lowering disposal costs, recovering value from scrap materials,
and identifying materials for reuse.

General contractors are required to develop a customized C&D material management plan for
the deconstruction/demolition and construction phases. This plan should begin in the project
design phase prior to construction. The plan must include a summary of materials targeted for
diversion from landfills or incineration, and identify recycling haulers, single-material recycling
facilities, mixed C&D processing facilities, data collection, and reporting procedures. Teams
must indicate in the plan whether the selected recycling facilities that process mixed C&D
materials have third-party verification of their recycling rates. Recycling rates not verified by a
third-party must assume a maximum of 35% diversion rate. The 35% cap serves as a baseline
assumption for mixed-material facilities without verification, reflecting an approximate average
recycling rate for facilities in the U.S. If the project team uses a recycling facility for which
recycling rates have been independently certified by an approved third-party process, such as
the Recycling Certification Institute, then the project team can use the verified recycling rate.
This third-party verification of recycling rates provides assurance that diversion rates are
accurate and that materials are being diverted from the landfill.

The plan must also include strategies targeted to reduce the total amount of waste generated
during construction, renovation, or demolition activities.

Diversion
WASTE TRACKING
Teams are required to develop a method for tracking the amount of all waste and recyclable
materials generated during demolition activities. Web-based tools can provide contractors with
an easy, step-by-step process for electronically tracking and submitting waste management and
recycling plans. Electronic tracking can also save time and money by identifying materials that
can be recycled, locating the nearest recycling facilities, following recycling progress in real
time, gathering comprehensive statistics, and creating reports regarding waste generation and
recycling for projects. Waste tracking systems can also identify opportunities for recycling, off-

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 444
site reuse, and salvage. Examples of waste tracking software include Green Halo, Waste
Management’s Diversion and Recycling Tracking Tool (DART), SmartWaste, and Enviance.

DIVERSION RATE
Project teams are required to calculate total waste generated and diverted to determine the
C&D waste diversion rate. Contractors are recommended to keep all tickets/paperwork in a safe
location (if not online) and track the diversion rate periodically (e.g., monthly or bimonthly) so
that adjustments can be made to meet diversion goals. Teams must ensure that calculations for
all materials are done by weight. Many waste management facilities use scales to weigh loads
of materials as they enter and exit the site. However, not all facilities have scales available. In
such cases, a volume-based calculation is used instead. When a facility does not have scales,
use a volume-to-weight conversion factor if volume is provided. If local conversion rates are not
available, projects may use national averages, such as those found in Table 2.

Table 2. Default volume to weight conversion factors for common C&D waste
Construction and Demolition (C&D) materials
Asphalt paving (with or without rebar) 1 cubic yard = 773 lbs
Concrete (with or without rebar) 1 cubic yard = 860 lbs
Gypsum Board 1 cubic yard = 467 lbs
Wood 1 cubic yard = 169-268 lbs
Metal 1 cubic yard = 143-225 lbs
Roofing 1 cubic yard = 731-860 lbs.
Mixed C&D (Bulk) 1 cubic yard = 484 lbs
Aggregate (rock) 1 cubic yard = 999 lbs
Cardboard (flat) 1 cubic yard = 106 lbs
Cardboard (baled) 1 cubic yard = 700-1100 lbs
SOURCE: U.S. Environmental Protection Agency Volume-to-Weight Conversion Factors, April 2016

Excluding ADC
All materials that are recycled, salvaged, reused, or donated are included in the project’s
diversion rate. However, projects must exclude certain materials from the diversion total while
still accounting for them in the total C&D waste calculations. Specifically, alternative daily cover
cannot be counted as diverted waste because it’s a disposal method rather than a true form of
recycling, as the material is used for landfill operations rather than being repurposed into new
products. To obtain ADC values from a mixed recycling or certified facility, request detailed
documentation of material processing and their average ADC rates per month. If they do not
have the ADC rates monthly, then quarterly, semi-annual, or annual rates are acceptable.

Hazardous waste, land-clearing debris, soil, and landscaping materials must be excluded from
diversion totals. Soil is excluded because clean soil is rarely landfilled due to its high cost and

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 445
other suitable uses, which could skew results, while contaminated soil is typically classified as
hazardous and managed under strict regulations, often requiring specialized disposal. Similarly,
land-clearing debris, such as rocks and trees, is generally not landfilled due to its weight and is
commonly diverted. Hazardous waste must follow regulatory guidelines for safe handling,
disposal in lined landfills, or destruction to prevent environmental harm. This includes proper
identification, labeling, and containment of hazardous materials, as well as transportation by
certified handlers to facilities equipped to manage such waste.

Equation 1. Diversion rate

𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑤𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒 𝑑𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑑𝑓𝑖𝑙𝑙
𝐷𝑖𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒 = × 100
𝑇𝑜𝑡𝑎𝑙 𝑤𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑒 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑒𝑑 𝑏𝑦 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡

SOURCE-SEPARATED MATERIAL
Project teams must identify materials that will be diverted from landfill and incineration facilities.
Common C&D waste materials include concrete, metals, brick, wood, and cardboard.
Depending on the project’s scope of work, additional sources may include carpet, ceilings,
gypsum board, and furniture.

The project must account for source separation or salvage as a percentage of the total diversion
in the achievement thresholds. This represents a percentage of the overall diversion amount for
the project and is not in addition to the overall diversion rate.

Teams should target source separation where each homogeneous material is collected and sent
to a specific recycling facility (or is sent for reuse). Source-separated materials in this way are
not mixed with other materials, significantly reducing the contamination in recycling streams and
leading to higher diversion rates overall for those recovered materials. Source separation
involves segregating recyclable materials from mixed waste at the point of generation. This
practice involves sorting materials such as metals, wood, and concrete directly at the
construction or demolition site before they are commingled in a central recycling area or bin.
Contractors should consider setting up dedicated areas on construction sites and clearly label
and monitor bins for each source separated material to ensure proper collection. Teams are
encouraged to prioritize the source separation of materials like carpet, ceiling tiles, gypsum
board, and furniture. While these materials may not be specifically targeted, their significant
environmental impacts make their diversion particularly important for reducing overall
environmental harm.

SALVAGING MATERIALS
Successful salvaging begins with careful planning and requires a thorough audit of the existing
materials and structures to identify which materials can be reclaimed. It is recommended to

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 446
conduct an early salvage assessment during building design to determine which tools and
methods will be most valuable and effective for removal and preservation.

Projects that salvage materials offsite must send materials from the job to legitimate offsite
salvage and reuse vendors or markets. Destinations must be locations that either directly reuse
the materials or place them into a marketplace for distribution, sale, or reuse. Materials must not
be stockpiled without the intention of being cycled back into use. Stockpile locations are
acceptable only if they actively work to move materials through reuse cycles and provide
documentation detailing what actions will be taken if the materials remain unused for an
extended period. Even with best intentions, some salvaged materials do not find a home in a
new project for various reasons and ultimately get recycled or disposed. This entropy of
salvaged materials is acceptable so long as the majority of materials sent for salvage are
intended to remain in circulation.

MIXED C&D MATERIALS

Mixed C&D materials, or commingled waste is recyclable material mixed in a single container
that is sorted and processed at an off-site recycling facility.

Projects must obtain diversion rates from each commingled or mixed waste processing facility
used. Facilities must operate legally and be regulated by state and local authorities. However,
these authorities may not oversee diversion rates or the reporting of such rates, hence the need
for certifications like Recycling Certification (RCI) or equivalent (as determined by USGBC) to
ensure accurate tracking and reporting of diversion rates. Project teams are encouraged to use
facilities verified by an approved third-party to achieve higher diversion rates. Facilities whose
recycling rates are not third-party verified can only claim a maximum diversion rate of 35%.

Certified recycling facilities

Projects must use a recycling facility that processes and recycles commingled (mixed)
construction and demolition waste materials that have received independent third-party
certification of their recycling rates. Qualified third-party organizations who certify facility
average recycling rates include these minimum program requirements:

• The certification organization follows guidelines for environmental claims and third-party
oversight, including ISO/IEC 17065 and relevant portions of the ISO 14000 family of
standards.
• The certification organization is an independent third-party who continuously monitors
certified facilities to ensure that they are operating legally and meeting the minimum
program requirements for facility certification and recycling rates.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 447
 • Certification organizations shall certify to a protocol that was developed on a consensus
basis for recycling facility diversion rates that is not in a draft or pilot program.

The methodology for calculating facility recycling rates:

• Must be developed with construction and demolition recycling industry stakeholders and
be specific to the construction and demolition recycling industry;
• Must include a methodology that is applicable across broad regions (i.e., nationally);
and,
• Must refer to a published and publicly available standard.

Data submitted by the facilities to the certification organization in support of the recycling rate is
audited. At a minimum, the audit includes the evaluation of recyclable sales records, verification
of facility sales into commodity markets, an assessment of downstream materials and how
these materials are managed after they leave the site, monitoring off-site movement of
materials, and a review of the facility’s customers’ weight tags information.

• Facilities submit data to the certification organization that supports the recycling rate,
such as a mass balance recycling rate (tons in/tons out) for a 12-month period, or
quarterly sorts completed and verified by an independent third-party entity.
• Breakdown of materials (by type and by weight), including analysis of supporting data
relating to amounts (in tons) and types of materials received and processed at the
facility.
• At a minimum, the third-party certifying organization conducts an on-site visit of the
facility for the first-year certification, with subsequent site visits occurring at least once
every two years, unless additional visits are deemed necessary by the certification
organization. The site visit will:
o Examine how materials enter, are measured, deposited, processed/sorted, and exit
facility.
o Conduct interviews with key personnel and discuss how materials are managed after
they leave the site.
o Confirm equipment types and capacity.
o Observe and verify load/materials sorting and accuracy.
o Verify use and accuracy of scales including calibration frequency.

• Diversion rates shall adhere to these requirements:

o Measurements must be based on weight (not volume), using scales.

o Diversion rates must be available on a website and viewable by the general public.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 448
 o Methodology for calculating diversion and recycling rates must be publicly available
and applicable to national or country-level accounting standards for construction and
demolition waste recycling facilities.

Facility recycling data submitted to certification program will be analyzed for recycling rates
using a mass balance formula or quarterly sorts completed and verified by an independent third-
party entity.

Final recycling rate will include overall facility diversion rates with and without ADC/Beneficial
Reuse and will include separate recycling rates by material type as well as combined average
including wood derived fuel/biofuel separate from other waste to energy or incineration end
markets.

Project Type Variations

For projects with incomplete or speculative spaces, the building owner must commit to
preserving the approved C&D waste management plan and applying it during future phases of
construction to ensure consistency in waste reduction efforts. Additionally, they may pursue
certification under LEED AP Interior Design + Construction (LEED AP ID+C) for the unfinished
spaces, which promotes sustainable practices such as material reuse, recycling, and overall
resource efficiency.

For projects with incomplete or speculative spaces completed by the tenant, project teams must
include the building’s approved C&D waste management plan in the Tenant Guidelines, serving
as a best-practice example to guide tenants in managing their own construction or fit-out
activities. This inclusion not only promotes uniformity in waste management practices but also
encourages tenants to adopt sustainable strategies that align with the broader environmental
goals of the building.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 449
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Construction All Provide the Construction and Demolition Materials
and Management Plan.
Demolition
Materials
Management
Plan
Diversion Provide the C&D Waste Diversion calculator.

Summary of waste tickets and confirmation that the numbers

reported correspond to all the tickets for the project.
Confirmation that ADC is excluded from diverted waste
calculations (but is included in total construction and demolition
waste generated calculations).
Upload documentation with the facility average diversion rate of
any mixed C&D materials sent to a processing facility. For
those projects sending mixed C&D materials to a processing
facility that has third party verified recycling rates, include proof
of the third-party recycling rate and facility certification through
an approved program.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• EPA volume to weight conversion factors (epa.gov/smm/volume-weight-conversion-factors-
solid-waste)
• RCI (recyclingcertification.org)
• TRUE diversion criteria (true.gbci.org/true-diversion-data-additional-guidance)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 450
INDOOR ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY (EQ)
OVERVIEW
Buildings are more than shelters — they offer stable environments with the power to enable
human activities, foster health, and cultivate safety and comfort. Through the Indoor
Environmental Quality (EQ) credit category, LEED v5 offers a framework to create places where
more people can thrive. The rating system includes established practices for air quality, thermal
comfort, daylight and views, and acoustics and incorporates holistic design considerations such
as biophilia, accessibility, adaptability and responsiveness. Using these strategies, project
teams can develop buildings that welcome and care for all occupants more effectively, adapt to
changing conditions, and drive long-term value.

Decarbonization
Decarbonization is integral for creating a more stable and predictable climate as well as lasting
social and economic value. The reduction in fossil fuel use from energy efficiency and
renewable energy measures has the co-benefit of improved air quality, especially in
neighborhoods close to sources like power plants and highways. Through an integrative design
process and collaborative planning, project teams can create spaces that are energy and
resource-efficient, and human-centric.

Quality of life
Human-centric design is interwoven throughout EQ, fostering diverse environments that
enhance occupant well-being, improve health outcomes, and create more memorable, delightful
spaces. LEED v5 builds on established approaches and advances new, innovative pathways to
address a broader range of human experiences and bolster occupants’ quality of life.

Good indoor air quality is a cornerstone of the EQ credit category. LEED v5 offers best practices
for responding and adapting to regular or episodic indoor and outdoor air pollution, to reduce
exposures and protect the health of occupants. Key methods to achieve that goal include
improved filtration (EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality), designing management modes for wildfire
smoke or respiratory diseases (EQc4: Resilient Spaces), and testing and monitoring air quality
(EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring).

EQ credits provide additional options to support the well-being of workers and building users,
including older adults and children, caregivers, and people with disabilities. For example, EQc3:
Accessibility and Inclusion encourages careful design with best practices for physiological and
neurological inclusivity, while EQp1: Construction Management outlines comprehensive
construction management practices to reduce construction workers’ exposure to harmful

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 451
pollutants and extreme heat. Through these and other strategies, occupants benefit from better
health and cognitive outcomes, and increased levels of comfort and satisfaction.

Together, EQ credits and prerequisites help indoor spaces remain conducive to health and well-
being even during adverse conditions.

Ecosystem conservation and restoration

Finally, the EQ category emphasizes the importance of dynamic spaces that foster emotional
connections between people and their environments. With credit strategies that enhance access
to high-quality daylight, views, and biophilic design, EQ credits incentivize ecological
placemaking. Aligning building systems with natural environmental patterns, for example,
through lighting or thermal patterns, can contribute to a positive occupant experience while also
improving building efficiency (EQc2: Occupant Experience).

EQ prerequisites and credits empower project owners, occupants, and the building community
to create buildings where occupants can experience a sense of belonging and stewardship
toward their built environment, community, and natural world.

CROSS-CUTTING ISSUES
Floor area calculations and floor plans
For many of the credits in the EQ category, compliance is based on the percentage of floor area
that meets the credit requirements. In general, floor areas and space categorization should be
consistent across EQ credits. Any excluded spaces or discrepancies in floor area values should
be explained and highlighted in the documentation. See Space Categorization below for
additional information on which floor area should be included in which credits.

Space categorization
The EQ category focuses on the interaction between the occupants of the building and the
indoor spaces in which they spend their time. For this reason, it is important to identify which
spaces are used by the occupants, including any visitors (transients), and what activities they
perform in each space. Depending on the space categorization, the credit requirements may or
may not apply (Table 1).

Occupied versus unoccupied space

All spaces in a building must be categorized as either occupied or unoccupied. Occupied
spaces are enclosed areas intended for human activities. Unoccupied spaces are places
intended primarily for other purposes; they are occupied only occasionally and for short periods

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 452
of time. In other words, they are inactive areas. Examples of spaces that are typically
unoccupied include the following:

• Mechanical and electrical rooms

• Egress stairway or dedicated emergency exit corridor
• Closets in a residence (but a walk-in closet is occupied)
• Data center floor area, including a raised floor area
• Inactive storage area in a warehouse or distribution center

For areas with equipment retrieval, the space is unoccupied only if the retrieval is occasional.

Regularly versus nonregularly occupied spaces

Occupied spaces are further classified as regularly occupied or nonregularly occupied, based
on the duration of the occupancy. Regularly occupied spaces are enclosed areas where people
normally spend time, defined as more than one hour of continuous occupancy per person per
day, on average. The occupants may be seated or standing as they work, study, or perform
other activities.

For spaces that are not used daily, the classification should be based on the time a typical
occupant spends in the space when it is in use. For example, a computer workstation may be
largely vacant throughout the month, but when it is occupied, a worker spends 1-5 hours there.
It would then be considered regularly occupied because that length of time is sufficient to affect
the person’s well-being, and they would have an expectation of thermal comfort and control over
the environment.

Occupied spaces that do not meet the definition of regularly occupied are nonregularly
occupied, areas that people pass through, or areas used an average of less than one hour per
person per day.

Examples of regularly occupied spaces include the following:

• Airplane hangar
• Auditorium
• Auto service bay
• Bank teller station
• Conference room
• Correctional facility cell or day room
• Data center network operations center
• Data center security operations center

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 453
 • Dorm room
• Exhibition hall
• Facilities staff office
• Facilities staff workstation
• Food service facility dining area
• Food service facility kitchen area
• Gymnasium
• Hospital autopsy and morgue
• Hospital critical-care area
• Hospital dialysis and infusion area
• Hospital exam room
• Hospital waiting room
• Hospital diagnostic and treatment area
• Hospital laboratory
• Hospital nursing station
• Hospital operating room
• Hospital patient room
• Hospital recovery area
• Hospital staff room
• Hospital surgical suite
• Hospital solarium
• Hospital waiting room
• Hotel front desk
• Hotel guest room
• Hotel housekeeping area
• Hotel lobby
• Information desk
• Meeting room
• Natatorium
• Open-office workstation
• Private office
• Reception desk
• Residential bedroom
• Residential dining room
• Residential kitchen
• Residential living room
• Residential office, den, workroom

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 454
 • Retail merchandise area and associated circulation
• Retail sales transaction area
• School classroom
• School media center
• School student activity room
• School study hall
• Shipping and receiving office
• Study carrel
• Warehouse materials-handling area

Examples of nonregularly occupied spaces include the following:

• Break room
• Circulation space
• Copy room
• Corridor
• Fire station apparatus bay
• Hospital linen area
• Hospital medical record area
• Hospital patient room bathroom
• Hospital short-term charting space
• Hospital prep and cleanup area in surgical suite
• Interrogation room
• Lobby (except hotel lobby)*
• Locker room
• Residential bathroom
• Residential laundry area
• Residential walk-in closet
• Restroom
• Retail fitting area
• Retail stock room
• Shooting range
• Stairway
*Hotel lobbies are considered regularly occupied because people often congregate, work on laptops, and spend more time there
than they do in an office building lobby.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 455
Table 1. Space types in EQ credits
Space category Prerequisite or credit
Occupied space EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality
EQc1: Enhanced Air Quality
EQc2: Occupant Experience
EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring
Regularly occupied space EQc2: Occupant Experience
EQc1: Enhanced Air Quality
EQc4: Resilient Spaces
EQc5: Air Quality Testing and Monitoring
Quiet space EQc2: Occupant Experience
Classroom and core learning spaces EQc2: Occupant Experience

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 456
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
EQp1
REQUIRED
New Construction

INTENT
To promote the well-being of construction workers and building occupants by minimizing
environmental quality problems associated with construction and renovation.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Construction Management

Develop and implement construction management practices for the construction and
preoccupancy phases of the building. The practices must address all of the following:

• No smoking: Prohibit smoking during construction except in designated smoking areas

located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the building. Install signage that prohibits
smoking during construction.
• Extreme heat protection: Implement measures that protect construction workers from
extreme heat.
• HVAC protection: Keep contaminants out of the HVAC system. Do not run permanently
installed equipment if possible or maintain proper filtration if it is used. Replace all air
filtration media after completion of construction and before occupancy. Confirm that
testing and balance work is completed with new filtration.
• Source control: Keep sources of contaminants out of the building and have a plan to
eliminate any that are introduced.
o Store carpets, acoustical ceiling panels, fabric wall coverings, insulation, upholstery
and furnishings, and other absorptive materials in a designated area protected from
moisture damage.
• Pathway interruption: Prevent circulation of contaminated air and when cutting
concrete or wood, sanding drywall, installing volatile-organic-compound-emitting
materials, or performing other activities that affect indoor air quality in other workspaces.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 457
 o Isolate areas of work to prevent contamination of other spaces, whether they are
finished or not. Seal doorways and windows, or tent off areas as needed using
temporary barriers.
o Use walk-off mats at entryways to reduce introduced dirt and pollutants.
o Use dust guards and collectors on saws and other tools.
• Housekeeping: Maintain a clean jobsite. Use vacuum cleaners with high-efficiency
particulate filters and use sweeping compounds or wetting agents for dust control when
sweeping.
• Scheduling: Sequence construction activities to reduce air quality problems. For
renovation projects, coordinate construction activities to minimize or eliminate disruption
of operations in occupied areas.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Using established best practices during construction can protect construction workers from poor
air quality and extreme heat.

The prerequisite requires projects to develop and implement construction management

practices for the buildings’ construction and preoccupancy phases. The required practices are
primarily adapted from the SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction,
2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008–2008, Chapter 3.142 The extreme heat requirement is
adapted from OSHA prevention guidance for preventing heat-related illness.143

The practices must address all the following criteria:

No Smoking
Prohibiting smoking during construction supports a healthier and safer work environment.
Smoking is a fire hazard. It creates odors and elevated levels of airborne contaminants that are
associated with respiratory, cardiovascular, and other health problems.144 Although cigarette
smoking has declined among U.S. workers overall, its prevalence remains high among
construction workers.145 Prohibiting smoking preserves the integrity and longevity of building
materials that can absorb smoke, such as insulation and drywall.

142 “SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction”, SMACNA, (n.d.), https://store.smacna.org/iaq-guidelines-
for-occupied-buildings-under-construction.
143 “Heat Prevention”, OSHA, (Accessed Feb 3 2025), https://www.osha.gov/heat-exposure/prevention.
144 Öberg, Mattias et al., “Worldwide burden of disease from exposure to second-hand smoke: a retrospective analysis of data from
192 countries”, (2021), The Lancet, Volume 377, Issue 9760, 139 – 146.
145 Syamlal, G., King, B. A., and Mazurek, J. M. , “Tobacco product use among workers in the construction industry, United States,
2014-2016”, (2018), American Journal of Industrial Medicine, 61(11), 939–951, https://doi.org/10.1002/ajim.22907.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 458
Projects must prohibit smoking on the entire jobsite during the construction phase except in
designated outdoor smoking areas. This applies to conventional cigarettes (cigarettes, cigars,
pipes), cannabis (medical or recreational), and electronic smoking devices (e-cigarettes).

Projects may elect to provide an outdoor designated smoking area on site. An outdoor smoking
area can be a covered pavilion with safe disposal bins for cigarettes. The area must be at least
25 feet (7.5 meters) away from the building.

Temporary signage
Projects must communicate the no smoking policy with temporary signage that is displayed until
construction completion. The exact design and content of the signs is up to the project team and
can be tailored to the project location and circumstances including to accommodate safety sign
guidelines.

Protection from Extreme Heat

Construction workers exposed to hot environments are at risk for heat-related illnesses and
injuries.146 Construction management practices must address actions that employers and
workers can take to prevent heat-related illnesses, which include heat stroke, exhaustion,
cramps, and fainting.

Preventive measures include providing cool, shaded, or air-conditioned areas for rest,
implementing required rest breaks, and scheduling labor-intensive activities in cooler parts of
the day. Scheduling must accommodate reduced workdays for workers who are new to working
in a warm environment (or returning to work), and during seasonal changes or abrupt weather
changes. Provide workers with proper attire, like light-colored, breathable clothing.

Train workers on extreme heat measures to increase awareness and likelihood of successful
implementation. Refer to the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment and IPp1: Climate Resilience
Assessment findings to ensure the training and preventive measures are guided by a thorough
understanding of the social context of the local community and workforce.

146 Heat stress and workers, (2024, July 11), Heat Stress, cdc.gov/niosh/heat-
stress/about/index.html#:~:text=Workers%20who%20are%20exposed%20to,heat%20storage%20within%20the%20body.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 459
HVAC Protection
Construction activities release contaminants that may unintentionally enter the building’s HVAC
system. Safeguard against this by avoiding use of HVAC systems during construction or, when
use of the system is necessary, by ensuring the equipment has proper filtration during use.

Replace all HVAC filters prior to occupancy and after all construction activities are complete.
Additionally, complete all tests and balance efforts after installing the new filters.

Source Control
Building materials that are exposed to the environmental conditions during construction can be
soiled or degraded prior to installation. Proper storage and material handling can ensure they
are protected from contaminants, dirt, debris, and moisture during the construction process.

If there is enough storage capacity on site, keep materials in a separate, ventilated or

conditioned building or storage area. Keep materials away from heavy traffic areas to limit
exposure to dirt, debris, and dust. Absorptive materials like carpet, ceiling panels, wall
coverings, and insulation can trap moisture, leading to mold and mildew growth. Cover or raise
these materials off the floor.

Pathway Interruption
Certain construction activities, such as cutting, sawing, sanding, and painting, can result in
emissions of airborne contaminants into the interior space. Their migration to adjacent spaces
can result in inadvertent exposure to contaminated air, dust, debris, and odors. Proper hazard
identification and appropriate control measures are necessary to safeguard health.

Control measures include the use of personal protective equipment, and the use of temporary
barriers to isolate emissions and prevent their spread into adjacent spaces. Examples of
isolation techniques include sealing doors and windows, tenting areas with high levels of
activity, or using dust guards or collectors on power tools. Additionally, when installing
manufactured countertops, implement dust control measures and use personal protective
equipment when sawing or sanding. 147

For entryways and indoor pathways between construction areas and other interior spaces, use
walk-off mats to minimize migration of dirt and pollutants into clean areas.

147“Worker Exposure to Silica during Countertop Manufacturing, Finishing and Installation”, (n.d.), OSHA NIOSH Hazard Alert
(Number 2015-106), Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH), https://osha.gov/sites/default/files/publications/OSHA3768.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 460
Housekeeping
Regular and thorough housekeeping can help control or eliminate workplace hazards.148

Sweeping
Sweep finished and hard surfaces using sweeping compounds or wetting agents, which can be
oil-based, gritted, or gritless, to help control dust.

Vacuums
Use vacuums with high-efficiency filters to trap fine particles that would otherwise escape
through the vacuum’s exhaust, for a cleaner job site with better air quality.

Scheduling
Construction activities can be sequenced to minimize exposure, resulting in adverse impacts for
workers not directly involved in the construction activity.

Schedule construction activities that generate significant dust or emissions at different times or
places. For example, schedule drywall finishing and carpet installation for different days or
different sections of the building.

Install absorptive-finish materials after wet-applied materials have fully cured whenever
possible. For example, install carpet and ceiling tile after paints and stains are completely dry.

In currently occupied buildings, consider relocating them before disruptive activities start in
those areas to reduce their exposure to air and noise pollution. If the building is operational,
communicate the construction activity schedule with workers and occupants. This may minimize
foot traffic and encourage avoidance of the area, as necessary and feasible.

Schedule high-intensity activities during cool hours of the day and plan for work/rest periods and
other scheduling modifications in line with the extreme heat protections.

148Canadian Centre for Occupational Health and Safety, (2024 Feb 10), Workplace Housekeeping,
ccohs.ca/oshanswers/hsprograms/housekeeping.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 461
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All LEED v5 Construction Management Implementation
Checklist
LEED v5 Construction Management Implementation
Checklist Affirmation at completion of construction

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 2nd edition, 2007, ANSI/SMACNA
008–2008 (Chapter 3) (store.smacna.org/iaq-guidelines-for-occupied-buildings-under-
construction)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 462
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

FUNDAMENTAL AIR QUALITY

EQp2
REQUIRED
New Construction

INTENT
To design for above-average indoor air quality to support occupant health and well-being.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality
AND
Ventilation and Filtration Design
AND
Entryway System Design

Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality

Investigate outdoor air quality in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Sections 4.1–
4.3.

AND

Ventilation and Filtration Design

Meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Sections 5 and 6. Use the ventilation
rate procedure, the IAQ procedure, the natural ventilation procedure, or a combination thereof.
Comply with the following additional provisions:

• Filtration. Each central HVAC system that supplies outdoor air and/or recirculated air to
regularly occupied spaces must meet one of the following:
• Minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 13, in accordance with ASHRAE Standard
52.2–2017; OR
• Equivalent filtration media class of ePM1 50%, as defined by ISO 16890-2016,
Particulate Air Filters for General Ventilation — Determination of the Filtration
Performance; OR
• In-room air-cleaning systems; OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 463
 • Systems tested for effectiveness and safety per ASHRAE Standard 241-2023, Section
7.4 (and Normative Appendix A). If treating for particles and gases, use systems tested
for effectiveness per ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Addendum N. If treating for infectious
aerosols, use systems tested for effectiveness per ASHRAE Standard 241-2023,
Section 7.
• Outdoor air measurement. Provide outdoor airflow measurement devices for all
mechanical ventilation systems with outdoor air intake flow greater than 1,000 cfm (472 L/s).

Healthcare
• For healthcare spaces, meet the requirements of Sections 6–10 of ASHRAE Standard 170-
2021.

Residential
• For residential spaces, follow the additional dwelling unit provisions below.

Dwelling Unit Provisions

If the project building contains residential units, each dwelling unit must meet all of the following
requirements:

• Design and install a dwelling-unit mechanical ventilation system that complies with
ASHRAE 62.2-2022, Sections 4, 6.6, and 6.7. Supply and balanced mechanical
ventilation systems must be designed and constructed to provide ventilation air directly
from the outdoors. Mechanical ventilation systems are not required when the project
meets the exception detailed in ASHRAE 62.2-2022, Section 4.1.1.
• Design and install local mechanical exhaust systems in each kitchen and bathroom,
including half baths, that comply with ASHRAE 62.2-2022, Sections 5 and 7. Exhaust air
to the outdoors. Do not route exhaust ducts to terminate in attics or interstitial spaces.
Recirculating range hoods or recirculating over-the-range microwaves do not satisfy the
kitchen exhaust requirements. For exhaust hood systems capable of exhausting in
excess of 400 cubic feet per minute (188 liters per second), provide makeup air at a rate
approximately equal to the exhaust air rate. Makeup air systems must have a means of
closure and be automatically controlled to start and operate simultaneously with the
exhaust system. Use ENERGY STAR® labeled bathroom exhaust fans in all bathrooms
(including half baths) or performance equivalent for projects outside the U.S. A heat
recovery ventilator (HRV) or energy recovery ventilator (ERV) may be used to exhaust
single or multiple bathrooms if it has an efficacy level meeting the ENERGY STAR®
Technical Specifications for Residential Heat-Recovery Ventilators and Energy-Recovery
Ventilators (H/ERVs), version 2.3 as certified by the Home Ventilating Institute.
• Unvented combustion appliances (ovens and ranges excluded) are not allowed.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 464
 • A carbon monoxide (CO) monitor must be installed on each floor of each dwelling unit,
hard-wired with a battery backup. CO monitors are required in all types of units,
regardless of the type of equipment installed in the unit.
• Any indoor fireplaces and woodstoves must have solid glass enclosures or doors that
seal when closed. Any indoor fireplaces and woodstoves that are not closed combustion
or power-vented must pass a backdraft potential test to ensure that depressurization of
the combustion appliance zone is less than 5 Pa.
• Space- and water-heating equipment that involves combustion must be designed and
installed with closed combustion (i.e., sealed supply air and exhaust ducting) or with
power-vented exhaust or located in a detached utility building or open-air facility.

AND

Entryway System Design

Install permanent entryway systems to capture dirt and particulates entering the building at
primary exterior entrances. There is no length requirement for entryway systems.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This prerequisite requires the project team to research regional and local air quality and provide
ventilation systems and design elements that effectively support air quality within the building.
Healthcare and residential projects have additional considerations.

Investigate Regional and Local Air Quality

Indoor air quality is significantly influenced by outdoor air quality, which can be highly localized
varying over time, season, and throughout the project site.

To understand outdoor air quality for the project, regional air quality and local air quality must be
investigated, considering seasonal variations. ASHRAE 62.1 provides a template for
documenting this investigation. In many regions, spring months have higher pollen levels from
flowering plants and trees. Summer months in some dry, hot regions have higher levels of
PM2.5 due to wildfires and ozone from photochemical smog. Air quality for the project’s location
will likely change over time, due to climate change. For example, the periods with higher pollen
levels and wildfires may increase or intensify. For this reason, information collected during the
IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment should be included in this investigation.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 465
REGIONAL AIR QUALITY
Regional air quality is partially determined by reviewing compliance with national ambient air
quality standards. In the U.S., use available air quality monitoring data to determine the region’s
status relative to acceptable levels for six regional outdoor air quality pollutants (particulate
matter, carbon monoxide, ozone, nitrogen dioxide, lead, sulfur dioxide).

LOCAL AIR QUALITY

Local air quality is typically determined through observations by walking around the project site
and reviewing the neighborhood context. Examples of items to survey include facilities on site
and on adjacent properties, description of sources of vehicle exhaust on site and adjacent
properties, identification of potential contaminant sources on the site and from adjoining
properties. Most of this information will be gathered in the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment.

The results of the outdoor air quality investigation inform the design of critical elements of the
mechanical system, including the air intake locations on the building, the filtration levels used, or
the use of air-cleaning devices. The investigation also helps determine exhaust and equipment
locations to minimize impacts to neighboring buildings or building occupants.

Ventilation and Filtration

ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022 is the referenced ventilation standard for most commercial
buildings. The Standard establishes minimum ventilation requirements and other measures for
indoor air quality that is acceptable to human occupants and that minimizes adverse health
effects.149

The standard involves designing for indoor air quality using one of three available procedures:
the ventilation rate procedure (VRP), indoor air quality procedure (IAQP), or the natural
ventilation procedure (NVP). Any combination of options may be used for compliance with this
prerequisite.

IAQP VERIFICATION
If the IAQP is used to comply with this prerequisite, an extra verification step after building
completion is required that involves air quality testing and conducting a subjective occupant
evaluation. These verification steps are outlined in ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 7.3 Indoor Air
Quality Procedure Verification.

149 “Standards 62.1 & 62.2”, ASHRAE, (2022), https://www.ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 466
FILTRATION
This prerequisite has additional filtration requirements beyond those in ASHRAE 62.1. MERV 13
filtration (and ePM1 50%) is becoming standard practice. Most HVAC systems can be designed
to easily accommodate this level of filtration. The filtration requirements apply to all central
HVAC systems that supply outdoor air, recirculated air, or outdoor air and recirculated air to
regularly occupied spaces.

MERV 13 filtration is not required for systems that supply air to warehouses or other areas
addressed in the ASHRAE exemption for outdoor air treatment.

Exemption to 6.1.4
Systems supplying air for enclosed parking garages, warehouses, storage
rooms, janitor’s closets, trash rooms, recycling areas, and
shipping/receiving/distribution areas are exempt.

An alternative approach that uses in-room air cleaning systems offers flexibility in meeting this
prerequisite requirement for situations where design constraints make the central system-level
filtration requirement infeasible or impractical.

AIR CLEANING SYSTEMS

Air cleaning systems may be used in the design to meet the prerequisite requirements. Before
selecting the air cleaning system ensure the manufacturer has a safety testing report and
manufacturer certification that the product is safe. Verified effectiveness values also provided by
the manufacturer must be used in the design calculations as applicable.

• Safety. All air cleaning systems require safety testing according to ASHRAE Standard
241-2023 Section 7.4 and Normative Appendix A. This standard has the most up to date
language to assess safety which includes addressing chemical emissions and some
potential byproducts, ultraviolet radiation, combustion byproducts and noise generated
during operation. Testing is conducted in a specialized test chamber with specific
environmental controls.150
• Effectiveness for particle filtration efficiency or gaseous removal efficiency. For
systems that treat particles and gases, use only systems that have a verified
effectiveness determined according to ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022, Addendum N.
• Effectiveness for infectious aerosols. For systems being selected to treat infectious
aerosols and meet the minimum equivalent clean airflow rates outlined in ASHRAE 241-

150 “Control of Infectious Aerosols”, ASHRAE. (2023),

https://www.ashrae.org/file%20library/technical%20resources/standards%20and%20guidelines/standards%20addenda/241_2023_a
_20241021.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 467
 2023, Section 5.1, for compliance with the EQc4: Resilient Spaces credit Option 2 -
Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases treat infectious aerosols - use only systems
that have a verified effectiveness according to ASHRAE Standard 241-2023, Section 7.

OUTDOOR AIR MEASUREMENT

With proper outdoor airflow monitoring, facility managers can identify ventilation issues and
correct problems before they impact IAQ. This credit requires airflow monitoring for larger
systems (more than 1,000 cfm (472 L/s) of outside air). Airflow monitoring is encouraged for
smaller systems but not required.

Specific alarm and system control capabilities are not addressed in this prerequisite and may be
designed to suit the project’s specific needs.

Healthcare
• Healthcare projects must comply with ASHRAE Standard 170-2021 for ventilation design
and filtration requirements. ASHRAE 170, Table 7-1 specifies the minimum outdoor air
changes per hour (ACH) and minimum total ACH for each healthcare space type. Both
requirements must be met. For space types not covered in Standard 170, use ASHRAE
Standard 62.1-2022.

Entryway Systems
Permanent entryway systems prevent dirt and particulates from entering the building. The
entryway system requirement for this prerequisite is intentionally broad to accommodate more
project situations and to ensure feasibility as a prerequisite requirement.

Acceptable entryway systems include permanently installed grates, grilles, and slotted systems
that allow for cleaning underneath, or rollout mats.

Entryway systems are required at all primary exterior entrances.

PRIMARY VS. NON-PRIMARY ENTRANCES

Primary exterior entrances are the main, designated entry points to the building. These
entrances typically have the most visibility and accessibility. Design elements, like canopies or
biophilic elements, often attract entry.

Non-primary entrances are less visible and often have limited access or are used less
frequently. A non-primary entrance includes service access points or lift lobbies, side or back

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 468
doors, garage and parking level entries, emergency exits, connections between concourses,
and atrium entries.

While the prerequisite only requires entryway systems at primary exterior entrances, projects
may benefit from installing entryway systems at all exterior entrances of the building.

ENTRYWAY SYSTEM LENGTH AND DESIGN

There are no length requirements for the entryway systems, but it is highly recommended to use
the best practice length of at least 10 feet (3 meters) long in the primary direction of travel which
allows for approximately two full steps per shoe from an average person.

Design the entryway system to accommodate and withstand specific climate conditions. Areas
with high precipitation, for example, may need more absorbent mats made with mold- and
mildew-resistant materials. If using rollout mats, consider selecting ones that have a solid
backing. A nonporous backing captures dirt and moisture and helps prevent contaminants from
collecting underneath the mat.

Regular cleaning and maintenance will extend the integrity of the entryway system. Projects are
encouraged to provide routine care for these systems which is typically weekly.

Residential
• Residential projects have additional provisions for dwelling units.

DWELLING-UNIT MECHANICAL VENTILATION

ASHRAE Standard 62.2-2022 establishes minimum requirements for acceptable indoor air
quality in residential buildings. Requirements for dwelling-unit mechanical ventilation systems
are specified for different system types that consist of supply systems, exhaust-only systems, or
balanced systems. Exhaust-only ventilation systems are only permitted in certain situations.
Supply and balanced mechanical ventilation systems must provide ventilation air directly from
the outdoors via a dedicated outdoor air supply duct to the unit or the HVAC equipment serving
the unit. All systems must be tested and balanced before occupancy.

MECHANICAL EXHAUST SYSTEMS

ASHRAE Standard 62.2-2022 requires mechanical exhaust systems for kitchens, bathrooms,
and half-baths. Recirculating range hoods do not meet the requirements of the Standard.

Fans with ENERGY STAR® labels (or performance equivalent for projects outside the U.S.) are
required in all bathrooms (including half-baths). These fans use about 50% less energy than

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 469
standard models.151 Performance equivalent for international projects means that the product
meets the ENERGY STAR® key product criteria for the product type outlined on the ENERGY
STAR® website.

UNVENTED COMBUSTION APPLIANCES

Unvented combustion appliances such as charcoal and propane grills are a significant source of
air pollution and are not permitted within the project. Lease agreements should clearly identify
this requirement for all residents.

CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORING

Hard-wired CO monitors are required for each dwelling unit. A monitor must be installed on each
level for dwelling units with multiple floors. Specify CO monitors with battery backup to ensure
continuous functionality in the event of a power outage.

INDOOR FIREPLACES AND WOOD STOVES

Indoor fireplaces and wood stoves must include solid glass enclosures or doors that seal when
closed to reduce the risk of smoke exposure for residents.

For projects that do not include smoke control elements (closed combustion or power-venting),
perform a backdraft potential test for each appliance. Testing must confirm the depressurization
of the combustion appliance zone is less than five Pascals. This is the pressure difference
considered safe to ensure proper combustion air intake for natural draft appliances, preventing
dangerous back drafting while still allowing for efficient operation.152

DWELLING UNIT SPACE-HEATING AND WATER-HEATING EQUIPMENT

Many residences have their own water-heating equipment in the dwelling unit, including
equipment that uses combustion (i.e., gas-fired water heaters). When including these systems,
design and confirm that the installed systems use a closed combustion design.

151 “Ventilation fans”, (n.d.), ENERGY STAR®, https://energystar.gov/products/ventilation_fans.

152 Fitzgerald, J., Bohac, D., “Measure Guideline: Combustion safety for natural draft appliances through appliance zone isolation”,
The National Renewable Energy Laboratory and U.S. Department of Energy’s Building America Program, NorthernSTAR, and
Center for Energy and Environment, (2014),
https://www1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/publications/pdfs/building_america/measure_guide_combustion_safety_appliancezone.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 470
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Results of regional and local air quality investigation, at
minimum, date and time of observations, a description of
the site, observed odors or irritants, and conclusions
regarding acceptability of the outdoor air quality.
Indication of whether the building is in an area where the
national guideline is exceeded (outdoor air treatment is
required per ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6.1.4).
Calculation documents for mechanical ventilation (VRP),
natural ventilation (NVP) and IAQ procedure (IAQP).
Air cleaning systems (if used): supporting documentation
for safety and effectiveness.
IAQ Procedure: Air Quality Test Plan and Occupant Survey
Methodology.
IAQ Procedure: Completed air quality testing report
including time, date, testing methods complying with credit
requirements, results and limits of the tested contaminants
in all locations, and lab accreditation scope for VOCs.
IAQ Procedure: Subjective Occupant Evaluation Results.
Floor plans or photos of entryway systems.
Design documents confirming filter grade and
implementation.
Control diagrams showing outdoor air measurement
devices (where required).
Confirmation the outdoor air measurement devices
measures airflow rates.
Residential All All Confirmation there are CO monitors in all units.
Description of how each system complies with ASHRAE
62.2-2022.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE standard 62.1-2022 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2)
• ASHRAE standard 62.2-2022 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standards-62-1-62-
2)
• ASHRAE standard 170-2021 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/standards-and-
guidelines/standards-addenda/ansi-ashrae-ashe-standard-170-2017-ventilation-of-health-
care-facilities)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 471
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Prerequisite and Restoration

NO SMOKING OR VEHICLE IDLING

EQp3
REQUIRED
New Construction
Core and Shell

INTENT
To minimize exposure to tobacco smoke, smoke from tobacco substitutes or cannabis, and
vehicle emissions.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell N/A
Prohibit Smoking
AND
Prohibit Vehicle Idling

Comply with the following requirements:

Prohibit Smoking
• Indoor smoking: Prohibit smoking inside the building with limited exceptions (see
below).
• Outdoor smoking: Prohibit smoking outside the building except in designated smoking
areas located at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) (or the maximum extent allowable by local
codes) from all entries, outdoor air intakes, and operable windows.
• School projects: Prohibit all smoking on-site.

AND

Prohibit Vehicle Idling

• Prohibit vehicle idling on-site.

Communicate the no-smoking and vehicle idling prohibition policy to occupants. Have in place
provisions for enforcement or prohibitive signage.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 472
Residential
• Meet the requirements above for all areas inside and outside the building except dwelling
units and private balconies:

• For residential projects that do not prohibit smoking, each dwelling unit where smoking
will be permitted must meet the following compartmentalization requirements:
o Perform a blower door test of residential dwelling units, following the procedures in
ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 or equivalent. For each unit tested, demonstrate a maximum
leakage of enclosure area that is no more than 1.5 times the thresholds identified in
Table 1 (“enclosure area” refers to all surfaces enclosing the dwelling unit, including
exterior and party walls, floors, and ceilings). Demonstrate a weighted average
leakage of enclosure area for the building, including dwelling units, that complies with
the caps in the limits identified in Table 1.

Table 1. Caps on air leakage rates

Building Pressure test Maximum air leakage
conditioned floor conditions across the New construction Major renovation
area (CFA) building envelope
≥ 5,000 sq. ft. At pressure difference of 0.13 cfm/sq. ft. 0.20 cfm/sq. ft.
(465 sq. m.) 50 Pascals (0.2 in H2O) (0.65 L/s*sq. m.) (1.0 L/s*sq. m.)
At pressure difference of 0.18 cfm/sq. ft. 0.27 cfm/sq. ft.
75 Pascals (0.3 in H2O) (0.90 L/s*sq. m.) (1.35 L/s*sq. m.)
< 5,000 sq. ft. At 50 Pascals 1 ACH 1.5 ACH
(465 sq. m.) (0.2 in H2O)
At 75 Pascals (0.3 in 1.35 ACH 2 ACH
H2O)

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Establishing smoke-free and idle free policies may minimize exposure to tobacco smoke, smoke
from tobacco substitutes and cannabis, and vehicle emissions.

This prerequisite requires the project to prohibit smoking inside the building and its immediate
vicinity, restrict smoking on site, and prevent vehicle idling.

Prohibit Smoking
Smoke-free policies effectively reduce tobacco use, protect people from secondhand smoke
exposure, prevent tobacco-related illnesses and deaths, and help more people successfully quit
smoking.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 473
Smoking is prohibited for conventional cigarettes (cigarettes, cigars, pipes), cannabis (medical
or recreational), and electronic smoking devices (e-cigarettes). The intent is to keep the air
inside the building free from pollutants and contaminants associated with smoking.

INDOOR SMOKING
Smoking must always be strictly prohibited inside the building. Evidence of this prohibition can
be obtained through a policy from the owner or facility manager or smokefree indoor air law.

OUTDOOR SMOKING
Smoking must be prohibited on the project site except in areas specifically designated for
smoking. No smoking is permitted within 25 feet (7.5 meters) of all building openings, such as
doors, windows, and ventilation intakes to minimize the likelihood of smoke entering the
building. Emergency exits do not qualify as building openings if the doors are alarmed, as
alarmed doors will rarely be opened. Emergency exits without alarms qualify as building
openings.

Smoking is not allowed in programmable spaces (e.g., outdoor cigar lounges or casino areas,
courtyards, outdoor cafes or sidewalk seating, space used for business purposes).

A designated smoking area is a specific outdoor location where smoking is permitted. This can
be an unenclosed pavilion with safe disposal bins for cigarettes. Business cannot be conducted
in this area but design strategies to make people feel comfortable such as covered seating are
encouraged.

Schools
• Schools must prohibit all smoking on site to ensure no secondhand smoke exposure to
students, staff, and visitors. Banning smoking on school premises also sets a strong
example for students, encouraging them to adopt and maintain healthy, smoke-free
lifestyles. Signage must be posted on the property line to indicate the no-smoking policy.
Signage at the school helps to ensure public awareness and compliance with smoke-free
environments, especially in areas where children's health is a priority. The signs serve as a
clear visual reminder for staff, visitors, and passersby.

Residential
• Smoking is prohibited for all areas inside and outside residential buildings except in dwelling
units and on private balconies. If smoking is permitted in a residential project, each dwelling
unit where smoking will be permitted must meet the compartmentalization requirements that
follow the procedures in ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 or equivalent. For each unit tested,
demonstrate a maximum leakage of enclosure area that is no more than 1.5 times the
thresholds identified in Table 1.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 474
• Prohibiting smoking on private residential balconies is a best practice for protecting nearby
nonsmoking units and balconies from ETS infiltration. Consider prohibiting smoking on
balconies in lease agreements.

Exclusions
The enforcement of no-smoking policies does not extend to areas within
residential healthcare projects, such as long-term care facilities, where residents
may have a clinical need to smoke.

This prerequisite is not intended to prohibit or deter indigenous or other cultural

ceremonial practices (e.g., smudging) which may include the combustion of
tobacco and other ceremonial materials. LEED projects that accommodate
cultural ceremonial practices may still pursue this prerequisite.

NO SMOKING SIGNAGE
The project team determines the placement and design of signage, allowing for flexibility to
address site-specific considerations.

When communicating a no smoking policy, use signage that includes illustrations, photographs,
or clear and concise wording. Consider using explicit language such as “No smoking allowed
within x feet” or “Smoking is allowed in designated smoking areas only”. Signs should clearly
indicate the designated smoking areas.

Prohibit Vehicle Idling

Vehicle idling is prohibited to minimize the likelihood of vehicle exhaust entering the building and
to provide better air quality on site and for the neighboring community. An idling vehicle emits
harmful chemicals and gases into the air. Exposure to these chemicals can aggravate asthma,
allergies, and cardiovascular and respiratory diseases. Note that some cities, campuses, and
other institutions may already have vehicle idling policies in place as part of their efforts to
reduce emissions.

A vehicle idling policy is a set of guidelines designed to minimize the unnecessary running of
vehicle engines while stationary. Such a policy typically prohibits idling beyond a specified
duration, except in certain situations where exceptions may apply. For example, exceptions
might be allowed for cold weather conditions where engine idling is necessary to maintain
vehicle performance or occupant comfort, during emergency or safety situations, or for vehicles
with specific operational needs, such as refrigeration trucks or vehicles running specialized

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 475
equipment. The policy should require all vehicles and equipment to be turned off when not in
active use.

NO IDLING SIGNAGE
It is the responsibility of the project team to determine signage content and the best locations for
placement. For best results, place signage where drivers are most likely to idle, such as near
vehicle waiting or parking areas. The signage should inform drivers of the policy upon arrival,
departure, and waiting for parking spaces or picking up passengers.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All All Site plan or map showing the location of designated
outdoor smoking areas, vehicle idling signage,
location of property line, and site boundary and
indicating 25-foot (7.5-meter) distance from building
openings.
Description of project’s no smoking policy, including
information on how policy is communicated to building
occupants and enforced.
Description of project’s vehicle idling policy, including
information on how policy is communicated to building
occupants and enforced.
Core and All Core and All Core and The Tenant Guidelines communicating the building's
Shell Shell Shell indoor and outdoor smoking and vehicle idling policies
Projects Projects and the locations and details of signage installed to
communicate the policies.
Residential Projects that Air leakage calculations and blower door test report
permit Confirmation that the blower door test of residential
smoking dwelling units follows the procedures in
ANSI/RESNET/ICC 380 or equivalency of testing
method demonstrated.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 476
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

ENHANCED AIR QUALITY

EQc1
New Construction (1 point)

INTENT
To design for increased indoor air quality (IAQ) to better protect the health of building occupants.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Option 1. Increased Ventilation 1
OR
Option 2. Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Design 1

Design the building to exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6. If using the
ventilation rate procedure to comply with EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality, use Option 1 or
Option 2; if using the IAQ procedure, use Option 2.

Option 1. Increased Ventilation (1 point)

Increase breathing zone outdoor air ventilation rates by at least 15% above the minimum rates
(for 1 point, or 30% for exemplary performance) as determined in EQp2: Fundamental Air
Quality.

Increased outdoor air rates should be provided to 95% of all regularly occupied spaces.

OR

Option 2. Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Design (1 point)

In addition to the design compounds and design limits outlined in ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Tables 6-
5 and 6-6, design and verify enhanced IAQ using the lower design limits listed below in Table 1.

Table 1. Additional design limits for enhanced indoor air quality design
Design compound or PM2.5 Enhanced IAQP design limit
PM2.5 10 ug/m3
Formaldehyde 20 µg/m³
Ozone 10 ppb

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 477
REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit incentivizes designing systems that continuously provide enhanced air quality during
building occupancy. For measures that provide enhanced air quality only in specific
circumstances, refer to EQc4: Resilient Spaces for more guidance.

Both options in this credit use measures described in ASHRAE Guideline 42-2023, Enhanced
Indoor Air Quality in Commercial and Institutional Buildings, with the goal of providing enhanced
indoor air quality. Projects are encouraged to address additional measures from ASHRAE
Guideline 42 beyond those included in this credit.

NOTE: If the Ventilation Rate Procedure is being used for EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality, it is
expected Option 1 for this credit will be used. However, it is not required. Review both options
and choose the one that most aligns with the project goals for enhanced air quality.

Option 1. Increased Ventilation

Providing additional outdoor airflow, above the minimum requirements for ventilation and
building pressurization, can further dilute and reduce indoor air pollutants. Research has shown
increased ventilation may improve cognitive performance and associated productivity and
income, reduce absenteeism in commercial offices153, and sleep quality in residential
applications. 154

INCREASED VENTILATION THRESHOLDS

Projects must demonstrate a 15% increase in outdoor airflow rates over the minimum
requirements of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2022. Most large HVAC systems can accommodate a
15% increase with minimal impacts to the design and to energy consumption.

REGULARLY OCCUPIED SPACES REQUIREMENT

At least 95% of all regularly occupied spaces must have increased ventilation. This provides
flexibility for projects that cannot meet the higher thresholds in every space.

153 Licina, D., Wargocki, P., Pyke, C., and Altomonte, S. “The future of IEQ in green building certifications”, Buildings and Cities,
2(1), (2021): pp. 907–927, https://doi.org/10.5334/bc.148.
154 Wargocki, P.,Akimoto, Mizuho, et al. “Ventilation and sleep quality”, AIVC, (2023), https://www.aivc.org/resource/ventilation-and-
sleep-quality.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 478
DETERMINING THE INCREASED VENTILATION REQUIREMENT
The following VRP calculations determine the increased ventilation requirement:

• Single-zone or 100% outdoor air system. Multiply the calculated minimum outdoor air
flow for the system (Vot) by 1.15.
• Multiple-zone recirculating system. Multiply the uncorrected outdoor air flow for the
system (Vou) by 1.15. Multiply the breathing zone outdoor airflow for the critical zone (Vbz
for critical zone) by 1.15. Calculate the new system ventilation efficiency (Ev) using the
updated values for Vou and the critical zone Vbz and recalculate the required outdoor air
intake flow for the system (Vot) using these values.

Option 2. Enhanced Indoor Air Quality Design

The option requires using more stringent design limits for ozone, formaldehyde and PM2.5 to
achieve enhanced levels of IAQ beyond EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality. This credit uses LEED-
specific design targets, selected by the LEED indoor environmental quality technical advisory
group, with the following basis:

OZONE
A design target of 10 ppb was selected as referenced in the Environmental Health Committee
(EHC) Emerging Issue Report. This number reflects the thinking that ozone indoors is harmful
and lower the concentration the better. Studies indicate that any safe threshold would exist at
very low concentrations.155

FORMALDEHYDE
A design target of 20 µg/m³ (16 ppb) was selected based on the NIOSH recommended airborne
exposure limit (REL) and FEMA goal for emergency housing156. Formaldehyde is a carcinogen
that can irritate the skin and eyes.157 Long-term exposure has been associated with increased
allergic sensitivity and asthma. Many building products contain formaldehyde as addressed in
the MRc3: Low-Emitting Materials.

155 “Emerging issue: Ozone and indoor air chemistry”, ASHRAE, (2011),
https://www.ashrae.org/file%20library/communities/committees/standing%20committees/environmental%20health%20committee%2
0(ehc)/ehc_emerging_issue-ozoneandindoorairchemistry.pdf.
156 “Formaldehyde — A Common Air Pollutant”, Chemical Insights, (2021), https://chemicalinsights.org/wp-
content/uploads/FactSheet_Formaldehyde.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 479
PM2.5
A design target of 10 ug/m3 was selected based on the WHO global air quality guidelines,
PM2.5 interim target 4. 158 This number reflects the thinking that adverse effects from PM2.5 can
occur at low concentrations approaching zero, so PM2.5 should be maintained as low as
reasonably achievable in interior spaces.

If air cleaning systems are used to achieve the enhanced IAQ design targets, refer to the
guidance on air cleaning devices in EQp2: Fundamental Air Quality.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. All Calculations documented under the fundamental air
Increased quality prerequisite
Ventilation
Option 2. All Documentation provided under the fundamental air
Enhanced quality prerequisite
Indoor Air
Quality
Design

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE 62.1-2022 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-62-1-
2022?product_id=2501063)

158 “WHO global air quality guidelines”, World Health Organization, (2021)
https://iris.who.int/bitstream/handle/10665/345329/9789240034228-eng.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 480
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

OCCUPANT EXPERIENCE
EQc2
New Construction (1–7 points)

INTENT
To move beyond neutral or sufficient spaces toward human-centered design that supports
customization, enjoyment, and emotional connections between people and the building, thus
increasing the likelihood of consistent satisfaction and ongoing stewardship.

REQUIREMENTS: NEW CONSTRUCTION

Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–7
Option 1. Biophilic Environment 1–4
Path 1. Integrated Biophilic Design 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Views 2–3
AND/OR
Option 2. Adaptable Environment 1
AND/OR
Option 3. Thermal Environment 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Sound Environment 1–2
Path 1. Mapping Acoustical Expectations for Indoor and Outdoor 1
Spaces
OR
Path 2. Acoustic Criteria for Indoor and Outdoor Spaces 2
AND/OR
Option 5. Lighting Environment 1–6
Path 1. Solar Glare 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Electric Lighting 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Proximity to Windows for Daylight Access 1
AND/OR
Path 4. Daylight Simulation 1–4

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 481
Option 1. Biophilic Environment (1–4 points)
PATH 1. INTEGRATED BIOPHILIC DESIGN (1 POINT)
Integrate biophilic design that demonstrates each of the following five principles adapted from
The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese159:

• Biophilic design requires repeated and sustained engagement with nature.

• Biophilic design focuses on human adaptations to the natural world that, over
evolutionary time, have advanced people’s health, fitness, and well-being.
• Biophilic design encourages an emotional attachment to the building and building
location.
• Biophilic design promotes positive interactions between people and nature that
encourage an expanded sense of relationship and responsibility for the human and
natural communities.
• Biophilic design encourages mutual reinforcing, interconnected, and integrated
architectural solutions.

AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY VIEWS (2–3 POINTS)

Provide occupants in the building with a view to the outdoor natural or urban environment for
75% (for 2 points, 90% for 3 points) of all regularly occupied floor area. Auditoriums, conference
rooms dedicated to video conferencing, and gymnasiums may be excluded. Views into interior
atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area.

• Views must be through glass with a visible light transmittance above 40%. If the glazing
has frits, patterns, or tints, the view must be preserved. Neutral gray, bronze, and blue-
green tints are acceptable.
• Views must include at least one of the following:
o Nature, urban landmarks, or art; OR
o Objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing.
• Occupants must have direct access to the view and be within three times the head
height of the glazing.

AND/OR

Option 2. Adaptable Environment (1 point)

Allow occupants choice and flexibility, and/or the capability to adapt the space to meet their
individual needs. Provide variability and/or optionality for thermal, sound, and lighting

159 Kellert, S. and Calabrese, E. The Practice of Biophilic Design, (2015), https://www.biophilic-design.com.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 482
environments that invite occupants to either alter their experience and/or move between
sensory zones. Include at least one accessible quiet space that allows occupants to retreat from
high levels of sensory stimulation. Projects must also demonstrate at least one of the additional
strategies below:

Additional strategies
• Provide socializing, meeting, dining, eating, and/or working areas where occupants can
sit outside the main action and have permanent architectural features at their backs,
creating a comfortable, semi-protected space that overlooks the larger area (prospect).
Provide alternative paths that enable travel around the perimeter of the space so that
people are not required to travel across a large open space.
• Provide choice in furniture configuration and a variety of seating to accommodate a wide
range of body types, including seating with back rests and without arm rests.
• Provide height variety for permanently installed fixtures, like counters and sinks, and/or
height-adjustable tables and desks, where appropriate.
• Provide outdoor or transitional space that encourages interaction with nature and is
flexible or multiuse. Ensure the space is easily accessible for all occupants from within
the building or located within 2,000 feet (600 meters) of a building entrance or access
point.

AND/OR

Option 3. Thermal Environment (1 point)

Design indoor occupied spaces to meet the requirements of ASHRAE Standard 55-2023,
Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy with errata. Investigate thermal
conditions in and around the project and explain how the design considers the following:

• Thermal conditions that align and adjust with changing seasons.

• Overcooling during nontemperate seasons.
o Design solutions for newly arrived occupants or occupants transitioning between
different thermal environments to adjust to the space while maintaining an
appropriately warm environment for those already in the building.
o Design solutions for long-term occupants in transition spaces to customize their
working area.
• Support for occupants carrying out different tasks requiring varying levels of movement.
o Cooling solutions for those completing high-movement tasks.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 483
Option 4. Sound Environment (1–2 points)
PATH 1. MAPPING ACOUSTICAL EXPECTATIONS FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR
SPACES (1 POINT)
Determine the desired sound environment early in the design process by mapping the
acoustical expectations for each primary indoor and outdoor space, specific to the use of the
space and occupant needs. Categories to consider include noise exposure, acoustical comfort
and noise sensitivity, acoustical privacy, communication, and soundscape.
These are example classifications for:

• Noise exposure zones: High risk, medium risk, low risk, or no risk.
• Acoustical comfort: Loud zone, quiet zone, mixed zone, circulation, sensitive, and no
specific expectations.
• Acoustical privacy: High speech security, confidential speech privacy, normal speech
privacy, marginal speech privacy, or no privacy.
• Communication zones: Excellent, good, marginal, and none or no specific
expectations.
• Soundscape management: Preserve, improve, restore, mitigate, specialized (e.g.,
wellness, therapeutic, or agency in equity), or no specific expectations.

Define acoustic criteria and potential design strategies and solutions to meet the acoustical
expectations for each space. Categories to consider include internally generated background
noise, externally intrusive background noise, electronically generated masking sound, outdoor
acoustical environment, airborne sound reverberation, sound insulation, vibration insulation, and
impact noise.

OR

PATH 2. ACOUSTIC CRITERIA FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SPACES (2 POINTS)

Through calculations, modeling, and/or measurements, demonstrate that the mapping exercise
completed in Path 1 informed design strategies and solutions to meet acoustic criteria for at
least 75% of the occupied spaces, and all classrooms and other core learning spaces.

AND/OR

Option 5. Lighting Environment (1–6 points)

PATH 1. SOLAR GLARE (1 POINT)
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices in all regularly
occupied spaces that will receive direct or reflected sun penetration. Spaces designed
intentionally for direct sunlight may be excluded.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 484
AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY ELECTRIC LIGHTING (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements for regularly occupied spaces:

Electric light glare control

Each luminaire shall meet one of the following requirements:

• Have calculated luminance of less than 6,000 candela per square meter (cd/sq. m.)
between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.
• Achieve a unified glare rating (UGR) of 19 or lower using the UGR tabular method for
each space.
• Achieve a UGR rating of 19 or lower using software modeling calculations of the
designed lighting. (Modeling must be performed as outlined in the NEMA White Paper on
Unified Glare Rating160).

Color rendering
Use luminaires that have a color rendering index of at least 90, or that meet the color rendering
requirements in Table 1, in accordance with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-30-20.

Table 1. Color rendering requirements using TM-30-20

Measure Requirement
Fidelity index Rf 78 or higher
Gamut index Rg 95 or higher
Red Local Chroma Shift Rcs,h1 -1% to 15%

AND/OR

PATH 3. PROXIMITY TO WINDOWS FOR DAYLIGHT ACCESS (1 POINT)

Design the interior layout to provide at least 30% of the regularly occupied area to be within a
20-foot (6 meters) horizontal distance of envelope glazing. The glazing must have a visible light
transmittance above 40%. Regularly occupied areas with visual obstructions (incapable of
providing a view to envelope glazing) should be excluded from the compliant area.

OR

160 “NEMA White Paper on Unified Glare Rating”, NEMA, (2021), accessed March 21, 2025,
https://www.nema.org/standards/view/white-paper-on-unified-glare-rating-(ugr)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 485
PATH 4. DAYLIGHT SIMULATION (1–4 POINTS)
Perform a daylight simulation analysis for the project to understand and optimize access to
daylight and visual comfort. Use the calculation protocols in IES LM-83-23 with the following
clarifications:

• Calculate spatial daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) and annual sunlight

exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) as defined in IES LM-83-23 for each regularly occupied
space in the project. sDA150/50% may be used for areas without visual tasks with design
targets of 225 lux.
• For any regularly occupied spaces with ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%, identify how the
space is designed to address glare.
• Calculate the average sDA300/50% or sDA150/50% for the total regularly occupied floor area.
Do not exclude spaces based on ASE. Points are awarded based on this calculation,
according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points for daylight simulation

Average sDA300/50% or sDA150/50% value Points
≥ 40% 1
≥ 55% 2
≥ 65% 3
≥ 75% 4

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 486
REQUIREMENTS: CORE AND SHELL
Achievement pathways Points
Core and Shell 1–7
Option 1. Biophilic Environment 1–4
Path 1. Integrated Biophilic Design 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Views 2–3
AND/OR
Path 3. Outdoor Connections 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Lighting Environment 1–6
Path 1. Solar Glare 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Quality Electric Lighting 1
AND/OR
Path 3. Proximity to Windows for Daylight Access 1
AND/OR
Path 4. Daylight Simulation 1–4

Option 1. Biophilic Environment (1–4 points)

PATH 1. INTEGRATED BIOPHILIC DESIGN (1 POINT)
Integrate biophilic design that demonstrates each of the following five principles adapted from
The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese161:

• Biophilic design requires repeated and sustained engagement with nature.

• Biophilic design focuses on human adaptations to the natural world that, over
evolutionary time, have advanced people’s health, fitness, and well-being.
• Biophilic design encourages an emotional attachment to the building and building
location.
• Biophilic design promotes positive interactions between people and nature that
encourage an expanded sense of relationship and responsibility for the human and
natural communities.
• Biophilic design encourages mutual reinforcing, interconnected, and integrated
architectural solutions.

AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY VIEWS (2–3 POINTS)

Provide occupants in the building with a view to the outdoor natural or urban environment for
75% for 2 points or 90% for 3 points of all regularly occupied floor area. Auditoriums, conference

161 Kellert, S. and Calabrese, E. The Practice of Biophilic Design, (2015), https://www.biophilic-design.com.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 487
rooms dedicated to video conferencing, and gymnasiums may be excluded. Views into interior
atria may be used to meet up to 30% of the required area.

• Views must be through glass with a visible light transmittance above 40%. If the glazing
has frits, patterns, or tints, the view must be preserved. Neutral gray, bronze, and blue-
green tints are acceptable.
• Views must include at least one of the following:
o Nature, urban landmarks, or art; OR
o Objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the glazing.
• Occupants must have direct access to the view and be within three times the head
height of the glazing.

AND/OR

PATH 3. OUTDOOR CONNECTIONS (1 POINT)

Allow occupants choice and flexibility to easily transition between indoor and outdoor
environments. Provide outdoor or transitional space that encourages interaction with nature.
Ensure the space is accessible for all occupants from within the building or located within 2,000
feet (60 meters) of a building entrance or access point.

AND/OR

Option 2. Lighting Environment (1–6 points)

PATH 1. SOLAR GLARE (1 POINT)
Provide manual or automatic (with manual override) glare-control devices in all regularly
occupied spaces that will receive direct or reflected sun penetration. Spaces designed
intentionally for direct sunlight may be excluded.

AND/OR

PATH 2. QUALITY ELECTRIC LIGHTING (1 POINT)

Comply with the following requirements for regularly occupied spaces:

Electric light glare control

Each luminaire shall meet one of the following requirements:

• Have calculated luminance of less than 6,000 candela per square meter (cd/sq. m.)
between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir.
• Achieve a unified glare rating (UGR) of 19 or lower using the UGR tabular method for
each space.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 488
 • Achieve a UGR of 19 or lower using the software modeling calculations of the designed
lighting. Modeling must be performed as outlined in the “NEMA White Paper on Unified
Glare Rating”162.

Color rendering
Use luminaires that have a color rendering index of at least 90, or that meet the color rendering
requirements in Table 1, in accordance with Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-30-20.

Table 1. Color rendering requirements using TM-30-20

Measure Requirement
Fidelity index Rf 78 or higher
Gamut index Rg 95 or higher
Red Local Chroma Shift Rcs,h1 -1% to 15%

AND/OR

PATH 3. PROXIMITY TO WINDOWS FOR DAYLIGHT ACCESS (1 POINT)

Design the building floorplates and interior layout to provide at least 30% of the regularly
occupied area to be within a 20-foot (six-meter) horizontal distance of envelope glazing. The
glazing must have a visible light transmittance above 40%. Regularly occupied areas with visual
obstructions (incapable of providing a view to envelope glazing) should be excluded from the
compliant area.

OR

PATH 4. DAYLIGHT SIMULATION (1–4 POINTS)

Perform a daylight simulation analysis for the project to understand and optimize access to
daylight and visual comfort. Use the calculation protocols in IES LM-83-23 with the following
clarifications:

• Calculate spatial daylight autonomy300/50% (sDA300/50%) and annual sunlight

exposure1000,250 (ASE1000,250) as defined in IES LM-83-23 for each regularly occupied
space in the project. sDA150/50% may be used for areas without visual tasks with design
targets of 225 lux.
• For any regularly occupied spaces with ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%, identify how the
space is designed to address glare.

162 “NEMA White Paper on Unified Glare Rating”, NEMA, (2021), accessed March 21, 2025,
https://www.nema.org/standards/view/white-paper-on-unified-glare-rating-(ugr)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 489
 • Calculate the average sDA300/50% or sDA 150/50% for the total regularly occupied floor
area. Do not exclude spaces due to ASE. Points are awarded based on this calculation,
according to Table 2.

Table 2. Points for daylight simulation

Average sDA300/50% or sDA150/50% value Points

≥ 40% 1
≥ 55% 2
≥ 65% 3
≥ 75% 4

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED: NEW CONSTRUCTION

This credit promotes spaces that are designed to enhance the occupant experience through
multisensory experiences, connections with nature and natural systems, spatial variability and
opportunities for personalization, as well as a broader view of thermal, sound, and lighting
design. Though there are multiple options to achieve the credit — and strategies will (and
should) look significantly different between projects — all approaches should aid in catalyzing
enjoyment and memorability of the space, in turn, increasing the likelihood of sustained
satisfaction and ongoing stewardship of the building.163

Core and Shell projects do not have Options for Thermal or Lighting Environment, as there are
fewer opportunities for projects to address these topics within the Core and Shell scope. These
topics may be included in the IPp4: Tenant Guidelines.

Option 1. Biophilic Environment

PATH 1. INDOOR BIOPHILIC DESIGN
Biophilic design is based on the ethical imperative to promote human and environmental health
and wellbeing by reconnecting people to nature and to each other within the built environment.
Incorporating nature, both directly or indirectly, can offer significant benefits to physical, mental,
and social health.164 Biophilic design can also be a tool to improve how we connect with others

163 DeKay, M., and Brager, G. (2023), Experience Design Schemas: Diagrams for Bioclimatic, Energy, and Resiliency Architecture.
Routledge.
164 Catherine O. Ryan, William D. Browning, and Dakota B. Walker, The economics of biophilia: Why designing with nature in mind
makes financial sense, second edition, New York: Terrapin Bright Green, LLC., (2023),
http://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/eob-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 490
to enhance a sense of community.165 Effective biophilic design considers cultural, geographical,
and ecological contexts. Refer to the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment findings for relevant
contextualization.

Strategies must contribute to an integrated experience and should not exist in an individual or
fragmented manner. As such, there is no minimum threshold for the number of required biophilic
design strategies. Instead, projects must demonstrate compliance with each of the five
principles adapted from The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese166:

• Biophilic design requires repeated and sustained engagement with nature.

Projects must incorporate nature, or natural patterns or systems, throughout multiple
facets of the building.
• Biophilic design focuses on human adaptations to the natural world that over
evolutionary time have advanced people’s health, fitness, and wellbeing.
Complying with this principle requires creating spaces that support fundamental needs of
both human and natural communities, including access to daylight and fresh air,
connections to nature through views and materials, opportunities for movement and
sensory engagement, spaces for both social interaction and quiet refuge, and integration
with local ecosystems and natural patterns.
• Biophilic design encourages an emotional attachment to particular settings and
places. Projects must understand, embrace, and celebrate the specific ecology, culture,
climate, and/or region of a project so that it is culturally and ecologically responsive and
unique.
• Biophilic design promotes positive interactions between people and nature that
encourage an expanded sense of relationship and responsibility for the human
and natural communities. Complying with this principle requires design that elicits a
positive emotional response, increasing the likelihood of ongoing enjoyment, belonging,
and, ultimately, stewardship, of fellow occupants and of the building.
• Biophilic design encourages mutual reinforcing, interconnected, and integrated
architectural solutions. Projects must apply an ecosystem approach to the design
process, where the solution is greater than the sum of its parts, and nature and natural
systems or processes are holistically integrated directly and indirectly throughout the
project.

165 Heath, O., Jackson, V., and Goode, E. Creating Positive Spaces by Designing for Community, Interface, Wellbeing, (2019),
https://www.interface.com/content/dam/interfaceinc/interface/publications/brochures-collateral/emea/design-guides/community-
design-guide/DesignGuide_community_emea_EN.pdf.
166 Kellert, S. and Calabrese, E. The Practice of Biophilic Design, (2015), https://www.biophilic-design.com.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 491
Any biophilic design framework may be used to demonstrate compliance. Other widely
respected frameworks include the 14 Patterns of Biophilic Design by Terrapin Bright Green167
and the Biophilic Design Framework168 developed by Judith Heerwagen and Gordon H. Orians.

Table 3. Frameworks and strategies for biophilic design

Frameworks Strategy category Specific strategy
14 Patterns of Nature in the space Visual connection with nature
Biophilic Design Non-visual connection with nature
(Terrapin Bright Non-rhythmic sensory stimuli
Green) Thermal and airflow variability
Presence of water
Dynamic and diffuse light
Connection with natural systems
Natural analogues Biomorphic forms and patterns
Material connection with nature
Complexity and order
Nature of the space Prospect
Refuge
Mystery
Risk/Peril
The Practice of Direct experience of nature Light
Biophilic Design Air
(Kellert & Water
Calebrese) Plants
Animals
Weather
Natural landscapes and ecosystems
Fire
Indirect experience of nature Images of nature
Natural materials
Natural colors
Simulating natural light and air
Naturalistic shapes and forms
Evoking nature
Information richness
Age, change, and the patina of time
Natural geometries
Biomimicry

167“14 Patterns of Biophilic Designs”, Terrapin Bright Green, (n.d.) https://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/reports/14-patterns/

168Heerwagen, J. and Orians, G.H. Biophilic design: the theory, science and practice of bringing buildings to life, (USGBC and John
Wiley & Sons: 2011), https://www.usgbc.org/resources/biophilic-design-theory-science-and-practice-bringing-buildings-life

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 492
 Frameworks Strategy category Specific strategy
Experience of space and Prospect and refuge
place Organized Complexity
Integration of Parts to Wholes
Transitional Spaces
Mobility and Wayfinding
Cultural and Ecological Attachment to Place
Biophilic Design Prospect Unobstructed views
Framework Visual access to the horizon
(Heerwagen & Elevated positions
Orians) Refuge Concealed or protected spaces
Shelter from environmental conditions
Secluded seating areas
Mystery Curving paths
Partial views into other spaces
Elements that entice exploration
Complexity Diverse textures and patterns
Richness in visual detail
Layered views
Coherence Logical organization of space
Clear pathways
Consistent design elements
Change and Variability Seasonal changes
Natural lighting variations
Presence of water
Risk/Peril Elements that evoke thrill or excitement
Overlooks or balconies
Stepping stones or bridges
Security and Safety Easily accessible escape routes
Clear lines of sight
Sturdy construction

PATH 2. QUALITY VIEWS

Light, shadow, color, and patterns can create engaging spaces that enhance occupant well-
being.169 Visual connections to the outdoors, particularly through windows offering natural views,
provide documented psychological and emotional benefits.170 These benefits extend across
building types and sectors, from improved patient recovery in healthcare settings to increased

169 Heschong, L., Visual Delight in Architecture: Daylight, Vision, and View, (2021), Routledge.
170 Kellert, S. and Calabrese, E. (2015), The Practice of Biophilic Design, https://www.biophilic-design.com/.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 493
productivity in offices to better learning outcomes in schools.171 Views and daylight are essential
components of healthy human habitats, however, this doesn't require excessive glazing.
Strategic window placement and thoughtful interior layouts can maximize outdoor connections
while maintaining building performance.

Consider findings from the IPp2: Human Impact Assessment, related to the project’s physical
context. Identify exterior site elements that meet the view quality requirements of this credit:
nature, urban landmarks, arts, or objects at least 25 feet (7.5 meters) from the exterior of the
glazing.

Occupants must have direct access to the view and be within three times the head height of the
glazing. For example, if the top of a window is eight feet high, occupants must be positioned no
more than 24 feet (8 × 3) away from that window. Account for any permanent interior
obstructions in the calculations. For example, identify interior features that may block the view to
the window, such as structural columns. Vertical columns smaller than one foot (0.3 meters)
wide and horizontal features smaller than one foot (0.3 meters) high typically do not block views.
Analysis must consider occupant positions throughout all regularly occupied areas to confirm
that quality views are present for at least 75% of the total area.

Exterior views through glazing, or vision glazing, must be clear and undistorted. Projects should
use bird-friendly — or glazing with elements visible only to birds — to maintain clear views (refer
to SSc1: Biodiverse Habitat, Option 2. Bird-friendly Glass). While some patterns are permitted if
they maintain visibility, avoid frits, fibers, patterned glazing, or added tints that distort color
balance or obstruct the views. Neutral gray, bronze, and blue-green tints typically do not distort
the color balance.

Gymnasiums and Auditoriums

• Gymnasiums and auditoriums may be excluded from the quality views requirements.

Option 2. Adaptable Environment

OPTIONALITY OR FLEXIBILITY
Adaptable environments empower occupants to control and customize their surroundings,
fostering a greater sense of comfort and belonging. This can take two forms: by providing
occupants the ability to move between spaces with different sensory characteristics and to

171 Catherine O. Ryan, William D. Browning, and Dakota B. Walker, The economics of biophilia: Why designing with nature in mind
makes financial sense, second edition, (2023), New York: Terrapin Bright Green, LLC.
http://www.terrapinbrightgreen.com/report/eob-2.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 494
adjust conditions of the space itself. While adaptable spaces have the potential to benefit all
occupants, sensory customization opportunities are particularly important for neurodivergent
individuals — approximately 15–20% of the population — who may experience heightened
sensitivities to environmental factors or stimuli like noise, light, and textures.172173

Rating system requirements are flexible to encourage highly specific design strategies. Projects
must demonstrate optionality between zones or flexibility through personal comfort options for
categories outlined in Table 4.

Table 4. Optionality or flexibility strategies

Category Examples
Thermal environment Personal control systems, warm or cool enclaves, radiant heating or
cooling, transitional spaces that act as buffer zones between indoor and
outdoor areas, or spaces with varying sun and shade exposure.
Sound environment Combining active, high-sensory collaboration zones with quieter areas
featuring sound masking, white noise, nature sounds, or acoustic alcoves
for focused work, which aligns with the requirements under Option 4.
Sound Environment.
Lighting environment Combination of task lighting, dimmable lighting systems, circadian lighting
that mimics natural daylight cycles in intensity and color temperature,
zoned lighting controls, natural light zones, or gradual transition lighting
designed to change in intensity to help eyes adjust.

Project specific strategies that do not fit within the three categories, but meet the intent of Option
2, to create diverse sensory spaces, may be submitted for compliance. This may include spatial
character, degree of stimulation, or other strategies to enable people to manage their own
sensory needs.174

QUIET ZONES
Quiet zones are required for all projects pursuing this option. Quiet zones are crucial for
neurologically inclusive spaces because many neurodivergent individuals, including people with
autism, experience hypersensitivity, or sensory processing differences that make them more
sensitive to environmental stimuli, particularly sound. For these individuals, everyday sounds
that some individuals might easily filter out — like HVAC systems, conversations, or equipment
noise — can trigger sensory overload, leading to increased stress, decreased focus, and

172 “Designing a neurodiverse workplace”, HOK, (2019), https://www.hok.com/ideas/publications/hok-designing-a-neurodiverse-

workplace/, accessed October 26, 2021.
173 Doyle N., “Neurodiversity at work: A biopsychosocial model and the impact on working adults.” Br Med Bull; (2020), https://doi:
10.1093/bmb/ldaa021.
174 “Designing a neurodiverse workplace”, HOK.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 495
difficulty communicating effectively.175 Quiet zones must be accessible to all occupants and
comfortable for extended use. Restrooms are not applicable for compliance.

Adaptability Strategies
There is a menu of adaptability strategies intended to increase the number of people who can,
not only successfully use the space, but enjoy it. Findings from the IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment must be used to better understand unique occupant needs to inform strategy
selection. An alternative strategy may be acceptable in place of the provided strategies if it
meets this intent.

Option 3. Thermal Environment

More closely aligning indoor conditions with outdoor environments by adjusting temperature
setpoints to correspond with exterior conditions can positively impact thermal comfort, as
research indicates that occupants’ thermal comfort preferences and expectations vary
seasonally in relation to climate conditions.176,177 Designing in connection with natural patterns
can increase occupant comfort and result in more efficient buildings by reducing reliance on air
conditioning and heating.

To prevent thermal discomfort and wasted energy, projects must carefully manage cooling
systems to avoid overcooling spaces during warmer seasons. Project designs must consider
seasonal temperature changes, potential overcooling during non-temperate months, and the
needs of occupants performing tasks with high metabolic rates. ASHRAE Standard 55-2023
outlines methods to determine acceptable thermal conditions in mechanically conditioned
spaces and in occupant-controlled naturally conditioned spaces, considering occupants’
anticipated metabolic rate (activity level) and clothing as well as environmental variables such
as temperature and air speed. Projects must comply with ASHRAE Standard 55–2023 using the
applicable method. To address the risk of overcooling in non-temperate/warm seasons, teams
must refer to ASHRAE 55-2023, Informative Appendix E, Sections 8.1 and 8.2.

To avoid discomfort or physiological stress for people transitioning between thermal

environments, specifically occupants entering from the outdoors, create zones with intermediate
temperatures to allow gradual acclimatization and consider utilizing air movement as a cooling

175 Gonçalves, A.M., Monteiro, P. “Autism Spectrum Disorder and auditory sensory alterations: a systematic review on the integrity
of cognitive and neuronal functions related to auditory processing.” J Neural Transm 130, (2023): 325–408
https://doi.org/10.1007/s00702-023-02595-9.
176 Lyu Yue, Chen Zhongqing, Seasonal thermal comfort and adaptive behaviours for the occupants of residential buildings:
Shaoxing as a case study, Energy and Buildings, Volume 292, 2023, 113165,
https://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S037877882300395X, https://doi.org/10.1016/j.enbuild.2023.113165.).
177 Munonye, C. (2020) The Influence of Seasonal Variation of Thermal Variables on Comfort Temperature
in Schools in a Warm and Humid Climate, Open Access Library Journal, 7: e6753, https://doi.org/10.4236/oalib.1106753.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 496
strategy. Transition spaces include spaces at the indoor/outdoor boundary (e.g., lobby
entrance). Projects must also account for long-term occupants of these areas including, but not
limited to, receptionists or security guards, etc. Provide adaptability options such as local air
speed reduction to allow long-term occupants to customize their microclimate (these design
strategies may also contribute to Option 2. Adaptable Environment).

Provide thermal comfort support for occupants carrying out tasks requiring varying levels of
movement. This must include considerations for occupants completing metabolically demanding
tasks.

Option 4. Sound Environment

PATH 1. MAPPING ACOUSTICAL EXPECTATIONS FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR
SPACES
Mapping involves establishing acoustical expectations for the project spaces and identifying
design targets that increase the likelihood of achieving those expectations. Performing this
mapping early in the design process minimizes the potential of locating incompatible spaces
adjacent to each other.

The mapping exercise must include documenting acoustical expectations based on intended
space function and related occupant needs. Standardized classifications for typical acoustical
expectations may be used for this mapping exercise (see Table 5). Teams may refer to the
USGBC worksheet to help guide this mapping process.

Table 5. Mapping acoustical expectations

Noise exposure Acoustical Acoustical Communication Soundscape
zones comfort privacy zones management
High risk, Loud zone, High Speech Excellent, Preserve,
Medium risk, Quiet zone, Security, Good, Improve,
Low risk, Mixed zone, Confidential Marginal, Restore,
No risk. Circulation, Speech Privacy, None, Mitigate,
Sensitive, Normal Speech No specific Specialized (e.g.,
No specific Privacy, expectations Wellness,
expectations. Marginal Speech Therapeutic,
Privacy, Agency in
No Privacy equity),
No specific
expectations.

For each primary indoor and outdoor space, the mapping exercise is continued to identify
acoustic criteria and subsequent design strategies or solutions that if implemented in the design

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 497
increase likelihood of the project to meet the desired expectations. Example acoustic criteria
and design targets are listed in Table 6.

Table 6. Common acoustic criteria

Acoustic criteria category Example design or performance target
Acoustic criteria threshold Threshold reference
Internally generated background noise e.g., ANSI S12.60–2010
e.g., 35 dBA
Externally intrusive background noise
Electronically generated masking sound None N/A
Outdoor acoustical environment e.g., Daytime: 55 dBA, e.g., local code
Nighttime: 50 dBA
Airborne sound reverberation e.g., 0.7s e.g., AS/NZS 2107:2016
Sound insulation e.g., STC 45 e.g., FGI Guidelines
Vibration insulation e.g., IIC 50 e.g., WELL Beta Feature
Impact noise e.g., NISR Impact Noise Management

PATH 2. ACOUSTIC CRITERIA FOR INDOOR AND OUTDOOR SPACES

This pathway builds off the mapping exercise in Path 1. It requires using generally accepted
engineering practices to demonstrate the project design is likely to meet the acoustical
expectations outlined for the space. The acoustical consultant will select calculations, modeling
methods, or measurements as appropriate for the acoustic criterion. For example, if the acoustic
criterion is internally generated background noise below 35 dBA, the project might calculate
sound pressure levels or measure sound pressure levels in the completed space.

The acoustic environment is particularly important to consider when designing classrooms and
other core learning spaces because it can affect students’ learning and teacher health and well-
being. For this reason, to earn this path all classroom or core learning spaces must comply with
the acoustic criteria defined in Path 1.

For other project types, more flexibility is provided for projects prioritizing better acoustics in
targeted environments. 75% of the occupied spaces must comply with the acoustic criteria
defined in Path 1.

Option 5. Lighting Environment

PATH 1. SOLAR GLARE
When designing spaces with daylight, solar glare must be considered, which can significantly
disrupt visual comfort and impact thermal comfort. This means evaluating how natural light
might create uncomfortable reflections on digital screens and potentially interfere with tasks
requiring visual concentration.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 498
Projects must provide glare-control devices for all transparent glazing in regularly occupied
spaces. The requirement applies to transparent glazing, so diffused and translucent glazing
systems do not require glare-control devices. All glare-control devices must be operable by the
building’s occupants to address unwanted glare and to allow for active participation between the
building and the building occupant. Automatic devices with user override and exterior shading
designs such as awnings, louvers, and shading screens are acceptable.

Glare-control devices are not required for spaces designed specifically for direct sunlight such
as atriums or solar collection areas where direct sunlight is part of the design intent. In these
cases, teams must establish a clear rationale, articulate the benefits, and ensure alignment with
project goals. For example, the space may be intentionally designed to support Option 1.
Integrated Biophilic Design or Option 2. Adaptable Environments.

Table 7. Glare control devices

Acceptable glare-control devices Unacceptable glare-control devices
Interior window blinds Fixed fins
Interior shades Fixed louvers
Curtains Dark color glazing
Moveable exterior louvers Frit glazing treatment
Moveable screens Additional glazing treatments
Moveable awnings

PATH 2. QUALITY ELECTRIC LIGHTING

Properly focused lighting at the right level and quality enhances concentration and minimizes
distractions.6 Poorly lit spaces can cause headaches and eye discomfort while well-illuminated
work environments can help reduce stress levels and improve the overall well-being of
employees.6 Electric lighting glare can significantly impact specific populations — such as aging
adults and neurodivergent individuals — by causing discomfort, visual strain, and even
emotional or cognitive disruptions.178

Projects must meet both Electric Light Glare Control and Color Rendering requirements within
all regularly occupied spaces. Exceptions to the electric glare requirements include wallwash
fixtures properly aimed at walls, as specified by manufacturer’s data, indirect uplighting fixtures,
provided there is no view down into these uplights from a regularly occupied space above, and

178 Aryani,S., Kusumawanto, A., Suryabrata, J. and Wijaya, D. “The correlation of lighting and mood in the workplace: digital image-
based research”, Journal of Graphic Engineering and Design. (2024): 15. 23-31, https://doi.org/10.24867/JGED-2024-1-023,
accessed April 5, 2025,
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/378820577_The_correlation_of_lighting_and_mood_in_the_workplace_digital_image-
based_research.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 499
any other specific applications (i.e., adjustable fixtures). Exceptions to the color rendering
requirements include non-white light sources used for decorative color effects that are in
addition to the general illumination.

Electric light glare control can be documented based on individual luminaire specifications
(luminance) or for the space as a whole (UGR).

Luminance
Minimizing light fixture luminance helps reduce disability and discomfort glare. The threshold,
6,000 candela per square meter (cd/sq. m.) between 45 and 90 degrees from nadir, was
selected to align with WELL v2 Feature L04 — Electric Light Glare Control.179 Luminance
information for the luminaire can be found in manufacturer specifications.

Unified Glare Rating

Unified Glare Rating (UGR) is a measure of the discomfort produced by a lighting system along
a psychometric scale of discomfort. The value of 19 corresponds to just acceptable glare. The
UGR approach requires software modeling calculations of the designed lighting. Modeling must
be performed as outlined in the NEMA White Paper on Unified Glare Rating180.

Color Rendering: Color Rendering Index

Color Rendering Index (CRI) is the most widely adopted method for evaluating color fidelity. The
CRI requirement of 90 or above indicates that the light source closely mimics natural light,
allowing colors to appear vibrant and true to their actual hue. This is especially important in
environments where color differentiation is critical, such as in medical facilities, retail spaces, or
galleries. CRI information for the luminaire can be found in manufacturer specifications. The
luminaire must have a CRI of at least 90.

Color Rendering: TM-30-20

TM-30 is a newer method developed by the Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) for
measuring color fidelity. The luminaire requirements for this credit are based on the Priority
Level 1 criteria for the Preference design intent recommendation in TM-30-20 Annex E (see
Table 8). This threshold was selected to align with WELL v2 Feature L08 – Electric Light
Quality.181

179 “Electric Light Glare Control”, WELL Standard v2, (n.d.) https://v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/4.
180 “NEMA White Paper on Unified Glare Rating”, NEMA, (2021), accessed March 21, 2025,
https://www.nema.org/standards/view/white-paper-on-unified-glare-rating-(ugr)
181 WELL Standard v2, https://v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/8.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 500
Table 8. Color rendering requirements for TM-30 method
Measure Requirement
Fidelity index Rf 78 or higher
Gamut index Rg 95 or higher
Red Local Chroma Shift Rcs,h1 -1% to 15%

PATH 3. PROXIMITY TO WINDOWS FOR DAYLIGHT ACCESS

This path involves designing the building floorplates and interior layout to have regularly
occupied areas located in close proximity — within 20 feet (six meters) — of envelope glazing
(e.g., windows, curtain walls, or other transparent elements in the building façade).
The 30% threshold serves as a baseline or entry-level standard that aligns with WELL v2
Precondition L01 — Light Exposure, encouraging projects to incorporate daylight access into
the design.182 Projects aiming for more extensive daylighting strategies should explore Path 4.
Daylight Simulation.

PATH 4. DAYLIGHT SIMULATION

Daylight is dynamic and highly dependent on local climate and site conditions, with daily and
seasonal variations. These dynamic qualities can be explored during the design process using
daylight simulation tools and daylight performance metrics standardized by the daylight design
community. Incorporating simulation early in the design phase supports the optimization of
building form, window placement, façade elements, and interior configurations to achieve the
best possible balance of natural light.

Occurrences of direct sunlight can be minimized with thoughtful design, but daylight glare and
reflections will likely still be needed and desired by occupants for certain parts of the day or
year. For this reason, it is highly recommended to also pursue Option 5. Path 1. Solar Glare.

This path uses a tiered point system with four thresholds of increasing stringency based on
spatial Daylight Autonomy (sDA) calculations, indicating how much of a space receives
sufficient daylight throughout the year. According to research conducted under the Illuminating
Engineering Society's LM-83 standard183, spaces with sDA values of 75% or higher provide
preferred levels of daylight, while spaces with sDA values between 55% and 75% achieve
nominally acceptable daylight levels. The credit's highest point threshold aligns with this
research by requiring the preferred sDA level of 75% or greater.

182WELL Standard v2, https://v2.wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/light/feature/1.

183Illuminating Engineering Society LM-83 Standard, https://store.ies.org/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-
sda-and-annual-sunlight-exposure-ase/?v=0b3b97fa6688

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 501
Building Model
The model must be sufficiently detailed and complete to ensure accurate predictions of daylight
performance. A simulation checklist must be used to support high-quality modeling practices.
Checklist details are outlined in LM-83, Section 4. Details include but are not limited to:

• Exterior details, e.g., neighboring buildings/obstructions, trees, ground plane

• The orientation of the building, in relation to true north, is as designed.
• The geometry of the space is accurately modeled, i.e., wall thicknesses, angled ceilings,
walls, fenestration surfaces, interior partitions and furniture.
• Blinds and window groupings and glazing properties
• Interior surface reflectance/material properties
• Local climate data, e.g., TMY weather data files

Daylight Performance Metrics

There are two daylight performance metrics that must be calculated: spatial daylight autonomy
(sDA) and annual sunlight exposure (ASE). Both metrics are outlined in the Illuminating
Engineering Society (IES) standard LM 83-23: Approved Method: IES Spatial Daylight
Autonomy (sDA) and Annual Sunlight Exposure (ASE).

The sDA method assesses the prevalence of daylight over the course of a year. Calculate sDA
for each regularly occupied space and calculate an average sDA across the total regularly
occupied floor area. Include all regularly occupied spaces regardless of the ASE results. This
approach intentionally differs from the calculation procedure outlined in the LM-83 standard to
accommodate the wide range of project types and locations that pursue LEED. LEED
associates points to daylit areas, despite the glare risk. Some designers find it confusing to
exclude overlit areas from daylight calculations. Use sDA300/50%. for all spaces except areas
without visual tasks.

REGULARLY OCCUPIED AREAS WITHOUT VISUAL TASKS

Some spaces in the indoor environment are used for less critical visual tasks like walking
through spaces or performing non-visually demanding activities. Adequate daylight in
these spaces is 150 lux in LM-83. These spaces may be identified by reviewing IES
horizontal ambient illuminance design targets for spaces with illuminance targets of 225
lux or less. For these spaces, calculate sDA using sDA150/50% as an alternative to the
standard sDA300/50%.

ASE assesses the risk of visual discomfort from too much sunlight in the space. There
are two variations of ASE introduced in the 2023 version of the LM-83 standard. ASEnet
is used for this LEED credit to encourage LEED projects to use automated glare control

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 502
 if desired. Calculate ASEnet1000,250 for each regularly occupied space. ASE is only
calculated on a room-by-room basis.

Regularly occupied spaces with ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%

Based on IES’s experience to date and analysis of the study data, an ASEnet of 20% or higher is
a level of concern. For spaces where ASEnet exceeds 20%, projects must work with the designer
to consider architectural methods to reduce the risk of sunlight penetration or consider the use
of an automated daylight management system in as many window areas necessary to
guarantee that it can avoid excessive occurrence of direct sunlight within the space.

Auditoriums
• Auditoriums may be excluded from the daylight requirements.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1. Report/narrative identifying, classifying, and
Biophilic Integrated explaining each of five biophilic design principles
Environment Biophilic Design incorporated into the project using the LEED v5
Indoor biophilic design Template.
Evidence of the project's indoor biophilic design
features (for example any one of the following:
contract documents, photographs, renderings,
architectural mood board).
Path 2. Percentage of regularly occupied area with access
Quality Views to views (%)
LEED v5 Quality Views calculator or a quality view
simulation report.
Architectural drawings that demonstrate direct
access to the view and qualifying distance from
glazing or a quality view simulation report and report
checklist.
Option 2. All Report/narrative identifying, classifying, and
Adaptable explaining each variability and/or optionality strategy
Environment for thermal, sound, and lighting environments.
Optional evidence of variability and/or optionality
strategy for thermal, sound, and lighting
environments (for example, contract documents,
photographs, product information from the
manufacturer).
Identification of one or more accessible quiet space.
Identification of the additional adaptability strategy in
the project (prospect areas, furniture, permanently
installed fixtures, outdoor transitional space).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 503
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Prospect areas Evidence of the project's prospect spaces and
alternative paths of travel (for example, contract
documents, photographs, narrative).
Furniture Evidence of the project's furniture configuration
choices and variety of seating (for example, contract
documents, photographs, product information from
manufacturer).
Permanently Evidence of the height variety for permanently
Installed installed fixtures (for example, contract documents,
Fixtures photographs, product information from
manufacturer).
Outdoor Evidence of occupant access to outdoor or
Transitional transitional space and opportunities for interaction
Space with nature (for example, floor and site plans,
contract documents, photographs, narrative).
Option 3. All Design documentation per ASHRAE 55-2023.
Thermal
Identify transition spaces and spaces with occupants
Environment
carrying out different activities and provide design
documents that show solutions for these spaces to
address various thermal comfort requirements.
Option 4. Sound Path 1. Mapping LEED v5 Acoustics Mapping Template.
Environment Acoustical
Potential design strategies and solutions the project
Expectations for
could use to meet the Acoustical Expectations for
Indoor and
each space.
Outdoor Spaces
Option 4. Path 2. Calculations, modeling, and/or measurements to
Acoustic Criteria demonstrate how the strategies and solutions
for Indoor and contribute to accomplishment of the Acoustic Criteria
Outdoor Spaces identified in the LEED v5 Acoustics Mapping
Template.
Option 5. Path 1. Solar Contract documents highlighting provision of glare-
Lighting Glare control devices in all qualifying regularly occupied
Environment spaces.
Floor plans highlighting regularly occupied spaces.
Path 2. Quality Lighting specifications with luminance values.
Electric Lighting
Documentation demonstrating required UGR using
UGR Tabular Method or software modeling
calculations of the designed lighting.
Lighting specifications with color rendering
information.
Path 3. LEED v5 Daylight calculator a quality view
Proximity to simulation report.
Windows for Evidence of proximity to envelope glazing (for
Daylight Access example, floor plans and sections, showing furniture
(at least within scope), identifying all space types
and whether they are regularly or nonregularly
occupied, indicating the horizontal distance from
regularly occupied areas to the envelope glazing).

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 504
 Project Options Paths Documentation
types
Evidence of the visible light transmittance for each
regularly occupied space (for example, contract
documents)
Path 4. Daylight Average sDA value for all regularly occupied floor
Simulation area (%).
Daylight simulation report and model simulation
checklist.
Evidence of the simulation inputs including model
simulation checklist.
Explain which regularly occupied spaces have a
ASEnet(1000,250h) greater than 20%. How was the
space is designed to address glare?
Explain which areas used sDA150/50% in the
simulation, and the tasks that take place there,
justifying that design targets of only 225 lux are
needed.

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• The Practice of Biophilic Design by Kellert and Calabrese
(docs.wixstatic.com/ugd/21459d_81ccb84caf6d4bee8195f9b5af92d8f4.pdf)
• 14 Patterns of Biophilic Design by Terrapin Bright Green,
(terrapinbrightgreen.com/reports/14-patterns)
• Biophilic Design Framework developed by Judith Heerwagen and Gordon H. Orians,
(usgbc.org/resources/biophilic-design-theory-science-and-practice-bringing-buildings-life)
• ASHRAE 55 (ashrae.org/technical-resources/bookstore/standard-55-thermal-environmental-
conditions-for-human-occupancy)
• Illuminating Engineering Society (IES) TM-30-20 (ies.org)
• WELL v2 (wellcertified.com/en/wellv2/overview.
• LM-83 (store.ies.org/product/approved-method-ies-spatial-daylight-autonomy-sda-and-
annual-sunlight-exposure-ase/?v=0b3b97fa6688)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 505
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

ACCESSIBILITY AND INCLUSION

EQc3
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To support the diverse needs of occupants and increase widespread usability of the building to
foster an individual and collective sense of belonging.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
Accessibility and Inclusion Strategies 1

Comply With Local Accessibility Codes

All projects must support access for those with physical disabilities through designs meeting all
locally applicable accessibility codes identified in IPp2: Human Impact Assessment. If there is
no code in place, include the following strategies:

• Accessible routes or regularly used exterior building entrances have ramps to

accommodate elevation change.
• All doors meant for human passage have a minimum clear width of 32 in (0.86 meters).
• Reception desks, security counters, and service counters all have a front approach,
wheelchair-accessible section.

AND

Include at least 10 of the following accessibility and inclusion strategies most relevant to the
project that go beyond the locally applicable accessibility code.

ACCESSIBILITY FOR PHYSICAL DIVERSITY

• Provide wave-to-open or vertical hand/foot press door operators at all regularly used
building entrances.
• Design meeting spaces to accommodate mobility devices for at least 10% of occupants.
• Incorporate accessible and inclusive equipment and activities in fitness facilities. Ensure
an open and accessible route to and around the equipment.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 506
 • Where nonaccessible routes are provided (e.g., stairs), provide an alternate accessible
route that starts and terminates at the same location.

ACCESSIBILITY FOR SAFETY AND AGING

• Provide nonslip flooring.
• Fix underside of area rugs to floor and provide transition strips at all edges.
• Provide visual indication or railing at all full-height glazing, except in private residences.
• Provide audible and visual alerts for emergency alerts.
• Provide closed risers (visually and physically) in all stairs.
• Use visual contrast between walls and floors, walls and doors, and walls and casework.
• Provide visual, tactile, contrasting, or photoluminescent warnings at floor level changes.

ACCESSIBILITY FOR SOCIAL HEALTH

• Provide lactation room pods.
• Provide at least one fully accessible, all-gender, single-use restroom OR one multiuse,
all-gender restroom on each floor of the building.
• Include at least one adult changing station or table in a designated, accessible restroom or
family restroom, or in one men’s and one women’s restroom.
• Provide signage in all languages spoken by more than 5% of the local population.
• Support neurodivergent users by achieving EQc2: Occupant Experience, Option 1,
Biophilic Environments, Path 1, Integrated Biophilic Design.

ACCESSIBILITY FOR NAVIGATION

• Provide wayfinding signage that clearly indicates exits, entrances, and major functions in
the project.
• Provide nontext diagrams and symbols at signage.
• Provide braille, visual and auditory cues, and/or continuous linear indicators on paths of
travel.
• Use patterns and color blocking to identify key access spaces.
• Provide haptic/tactile maps for wayfinding.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit encourages design that embraces the principles of accessibility and Inclusive
Design, considering physical, sensory, and cognitive needs of occupants.184 The goal is to go

184Zallio, M. and Clarkson, P. (2021, December), Inclusion, diversity, equity and accessibility in the built environment: A study of
architectural design practice, sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S0360132321007496.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 507
beyond basic accessibility measures to create environments that not only accommodate
individuals with disabilities but also consider how all people interact, socialize, and move
through spaces.

Comply with Local Accessibility Codes

All projects must ensure accessibility at a foundational level by demonstrating compliance with
all relevant local accessibility codes identified in IPp2: Human Impact Assessment. If the project
is in a region with no accessibility code, demonstrate three foundational physical accessibility
elements:

• Ramps for accessible routes and entrances

• Clear width for human passage
• Front approach wheelchair accessible section

In these cases, including fully accessible restrooms on all floors is highly encouraged.

RAMPS FOR ACCESSIBLE ROUTES AND ENTRANCES

Ramps are required in and around buildings to provide accessibility for individuals with mobility
impairments, as mandated by the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). Unlike solutions that
require separate or specialized accommodations, integrated ramps allow people with mobility
disabilities, as well as people with strollers, to use the same paths as other occupants,
promoting dignity and inclusion through shared building circulation. Ramps must be installed at
primary entrances where steps are present to ensure at least one accessible entry point. Inside
buildings, ramps are necessary where level changes exceeding 0.5 inches occur, such as
between floors or platforms, if elevators or lifts are not available. In parking areas, ramps should
connect accessible parking spaces to building entrances via an accessible route. Emergency
exits must also include ramps or accessible egress routes to support safe evacuation. All ramps
must comply with ADA design standards, including proper slope, width, landings, handrails, and
slip-resistant surfaces, ensuring they are safe and functional for all users.

CLEAR WIDTH FOR HUMAN PASSAGE

Projects must provide a minimum clear width of 32 inches (0.815 meters) at all doorways meant
for human passage and 36 inches (0.915 meters) for circulation paths, with passing spaces of
60 inches (1.525 meters) provided at least every 200 feet (61 meters) along any path less than
60 inches (1.525 meters) wide. Teams are strongly encouraged to consider a minimum clear
doorway width of 36 inches (0.91 meters) for enhanced accessibility for all occupants.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 508
FRONT APPROACH WHEELCHAIR ACCESSIBLE SECTION
For all transaction surfaces, including reception desks and service counters, a front approach
wheelchair-accessible section is required to promote height inclusivity and ensure individuals
using wheelchairs can access and navigate spaces safely, efficiently, and with dignity.

Projects must demonstrate that the accessible portions of counters are no higher than 36 inches
(0.914 meters) above the floor and at least 36 inches (0.914 meters) wide.

Accessibility and Inclusion Strategies

Accessibility and inclusion strategies are organized into four categories: physical diversity,
safety and aging, social health, and navigation. These strategies were selected based on
research showing they provide the most significant benefits to the largest number of people,
beyond what is typically required by local accessibility codes, including ADA.

Projects must include at least 10 of the following strategies. Findings from the IPp2: Human
Impact Assessment must be used to understand unique occupant needs to inform strategy
selection. Do not select strategies that are present in the existing local code, unless the team
demonstrates increased stringency.

If fewer than 10 strategies are relevant to the project due to project type variations, teams may
submit up to three alternative inclusive design strategies that meet the intent of credit, for
compliance.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 509
Table 1. Accessibility for physical diversity strategies
Accessibility for physical diversity Examples, specifications, and explanation
Wave-to-open or vertical hand/foot No-touch door activation devices accommodate a wide
press door operators at all regularly range of users, including those with mobility impairments,
used building entrances. people carrying objects or children, and individuals with
temporary injuries.
Meeting spaces to accommodate Accommodations include, but are not limited to, clear floor
mobility devices for at least 10% of spaces, and pathways of travel without obstruction. Users
occupants. must be able to park mobility devices next to or within the
seating area to avoid exclusion.
Accessible and inclusive equipment Projects with fitness equipment and activities must be
and activities in fitness facilities. designed to accommodate a range of physical abilities. This
And includes providing an inclusive range of strength and
Open and accessible route to and stretching training equipment.
around the equipment.
A minimum clearance of 36 inches (0.915 meters) is the
appropriate threshold for accessible routes between
exercise equipment, as this aligns with ADA requirements
for accessible paths and allows adequate space for
wheelchair users to navigate between equipment.
Alternate accessible route that starts Directness and proximity of the accessible route are
and terminates at the same location essential to maintain a similar level of convenience to the
for non-accessible routes. non-accessible route. The alternative accessible route must
be in the same general area as the circulation paths.

As per International Code Council (ICC), the maximum

allowable difference between the start and end points of an
accessible route and its non-accessible counterpart is 200
feet (61 meters) in most indoor facilities, though it’s
recommended to minimize this distance for those with
mobility challenges, ideally to 100 feet (30 meters).185

Table 2. Accessibility for safety and aging

Accessibility for safety and aging Examples and explanation
Non-slip flooring Acceptable non-slip flooring includes but is not limited to
textured tiles, rubber flooring, and epoxy coated flooring
providing slip resistance.
Fix area rugs to floor below and Solutions include non-slip backing, double-side carpet tape,
provide transition strips over high and rug gripper to keep the rug in place. Transition strips to
traffic areas.* smooth the connection between two different types of
flooring materials are required in high traffic areas.
Provide visual indication or railings at Providing visual indicators, such as markers or patterns, will
all full height glazing, except in private make it more noticeable for all users, including those with
residences. vision impairments. Adding railings at full-height glass also
helps provide a physical barrier for people to easily detect
and use for support, though not required.
Provide audible and visual alerts for Providing emergency alerts ensures that all users, including
emergency alerts. those with hearing or visual impairments, can respond to

185 “Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities”, International Code Council, (2017), 2017 ICC A117.1,
https://codes.iccsafe.org/content/icca117-12017P4/chapter-4-accessible-routes.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 510
 Accessibility for safety and aging Examples and explanation
emergencies. This includes, but is not limited to, loud unique
alarm sounds, voice announcements, flashing strobe lights,
or LED beacons.
Provide closed risers (visually and Closed risers eliminate gaps, reduce the risk of tripping or
physically) on all stairs. falling, particularly for small children or pets, and make
stairs more secure. In addition, closed risers also offer
privacy and reassurance through a more solid visual
structure.
Use visual contrast between walls and Incorporating distinct visual contrast between different
floors, walls and doors, and walls and architectural elements improves navigation and wayfinding,
casework. particularly for individuals with visual impairments. Projects
must use contrasting colors, textures, and/or material for
walls, floors, doors, casework i.e., drawers and cabinet
doors, or other permanently installed features.
Provide visual, tactile, contrasting, or Incorporate bold color contrasts or reflective strips to mark
photoluminescent warnings at floor transitions, use textured materials such as ribbed or
level changes. grooved strips to provide tactile cues, and apply varied
surface finishes to create both visual and tactile distinctions.
Photoluminescent markings are recommended to be applied
to ensure visibility in low-light conditions, particularly in
staircases or emergency exit areas.
*Not required for Core and Shell projects

Table 3. Accessibility for social health

Accessibility for social health Examples and explanation
Provide lactation rooms or lactation Dedicated lactation rooms, or breastfeeding support rooms,
pods. support higher rates of breastfeeding, improved work
performance, and physical and emotional wellbeing. 186 It is
recommended that these rooms include features such as an
electrical outlet, seating, and a table, along with access to a
sink and refrigerator either within the room or on the same
floor to better accommodate pumping and breastfeeding
needs.
Provide at least one fully accessible Providing all-gender restrooms creates a more inclusive and
all-gender single-use restroom OR welcoming environment for people who may prefer gender-
one multi-use all-gender restroom on neutral options.187
each floor of the building.
At least one adult changing station or Locate the changing station in a family or accessible
table in a designated, accessible restroom that complies with ADA guidelines for door width,
restroom or family restroom. turning space (60 inches or 1.52 meters diameter), and
clear floor area (30 x 48 inches or 0.76 x 1.22 meters). Use
a height-adjustable adult changing table with a weight
capacity of at least 350 lbs (160 kg) to accommodate
diverse user needs. Ensure the table is at least 72 inches

186 De Souza, C. B., Venancio, S. I., and da Silva, R. P. G. V. C. (2021), Breastfeeding Support Rooms and Their Contribution to
Sustainable Development Goals: A Qualitative Study, Frontiers in public health, 9, 732061,
https://doi.org/10.3389/fpubh.2021.732061.
187 Harwood-Jones, M., Martin, K. and Airton, L. (2021, August), Research and Recommendations on Gender-Inclusive Washrooms
and Changerooms, queensu.ca/hreo/sites/hreowww/files/uploaded_files/Washroom%20Report%20-%20Digital.pdf.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 511
 Accessibility for social health Examples and explanation
(1.83 meters) long and 30 inches (0.76 meters) wide for
adequate space.
Provide signage in all languages Ensure services and information are accessible to diverse
spoken by more than 5% of the local communities. Provide additional signage for people with
population. limited English proficiency (LEP) when they constitute 5% of
the population or 1,000 individuals, whichever is smaller.
Support neurodivergent users by
Biophilic design is particularly valuable for neurodivergent
achieving at least 1 point under EQc2:
populations, approximately 15-20% of the global
Occupant Experience, Option 1.
population.188 Achieve at least 1 point under EQc2:
Biophilic Environments, Path 1.
Occupant Experience, Option 1. Biophilic Environments,
Integrated Biophilic Design.
Path 1. Integrated Biophilic Design.

Table 4. Accessibility for navigation

Accessibility for navigation Examples and explanation
Provide wayfinding signage that Signage should be clear, concise, and easy to understand,
clearly indicates exits, entrances, and using both text and universally recognized symbols to
major functions in the project. accommodate individuals with varying levels of literacy.
Provide non-text diagrams and Diagrams and symbols can convey instructions or warnings
symbols at signage. more quickly than text alone, making it easier for people
with varying levels of literacy or visual impairments to
understand. Provide alternative signage where applicable.
Provide Braille, visual and auditory Braille, along with visual and auditory cues or continuous
cues, and/or continuous linear linear indicators, enhances safety and usability for
indicators on paths of travel. everyone, including those with vision impairments.
Use pattern and color blocking to Utilizing contrasting colors and unique patterns helps
identify key access spaces. differentiate important spaces such as entrances, exits, and
pathways, making them more recognizable and easier to
navigate, particularly for the visually impaired. Provide visual
contrast where applicable.
Provide haptic maps or tactile maps Wayfinding remains a significant barrier for visually impaired
for wayfinding. people during their daily life.189 Haptic or tactile maps enable
more users to form a clearer and more comprehensive
understanding of an environment.

188 Doyle, N. (2020, October 14), Neurodiversity at work: a biopsychosocial model and the impact on working adults,
https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/32996572/.
189 Ottink, L., van Raalte, B., Doeller, C.F., Van der Geest, T.M., and Van Wezel, R.J.A. (2022, July 7), “Cognitive map formation
through tactile map navigation in visually impaired and sighted persons”, Scientific Reports, 12, 11499,
https://www.nature.com/articles/s41598-022-15858-4.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 512
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All All Comply with Confirmation of whether there is a locally applicable
Local accessibility code for the project.
Accessibility If the project has not met all locally applicable accessibility
Codes codes: contract documents highlighting the appropriate
ramps, door widths, and front approach wheelchair
accessible counter sections.
Accessibility Project Strategies (check, from the standard list in
and Requirements, which strategies have been implemented).
Inclusion
Narrative identifying locations in documents where project
Strategies
strategies are documented (file name, page number, at
minimum).

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ADA (ada.gov/law-and-regs/design-standards/)
• ANSI A117.1 (codes.iccsafe.org/content/ICCA117.12017P7)
• OSHA (osha.gov/laws-regs)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 513
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

RESILIENT SPACES
EQc4
New Construction (1–2 points)
Core and Shell (1–2 points)

INTENT
To support design features that increase the capacity for occupants to adapt to changing climate
conditions and be protected from events that may compromise the quality of the indoor
environment and subsequently occupant health and well-being.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–2
Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions — 1
New Construction Only
AND/OR
Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases — New 1
Construction Only
AND/OR
Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages 1–2
Path 1. Consider Extreme Heat 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Consider Extreme Cold 1
AND/OR
Option 4. Operable Windows 1–2

Comply with any of the following options for up to two points:

Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions — New

Construction Only (1 point)
This option applies to LEED BD+C: New Construction projects only.

Design systems with the capability to operate an episodic outdoor event management mode as
described in ASHRAE Guideline 44. The mode should address varying outdoor conditions or
events that could negatively influence indoor air quality, such as wildfire smoke. Include the
management mode in the design and commissioning documents. Verify proper implementation
of the mode during commissioning.

AND/OR

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 514
Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases — New Construction
Only (1 point)
Design occupied spaces with the capability to operate an infection risk management mode that
provides the minimum equivalent clean airflow rates outlined in ASHRAE 241-2023, Section 5.1.
Include the management mode in the design and commissioning documents as outlined in
ASHRAE 241-2023, Section B10.2 Design Documentation. Verify proper implementation of the
mode during commissioning.

AND/OR

Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages

(1–2 points)

PATH 1. CONSIDER EXTREME HEAT (1 POINT)

Demonstrate through thermal modeling that a building will passively maintain thermally
habitable conditions during a power outage that lasts two days during peak summertime
conditions of a typical meteorological year. Designate specific thermal safety zones where
habitable conditions will be maintained during a power outage.

AND/OR

PATH 2. CONSIDER EXTREME COLD (1 POINT)

Demonstrate through thermal modeling or Passive House certification that a building will
passively maintain thermally habitable conditions during a power outage that lasts two days
during peak wintertime conditions of a typical meteorological year. Designate specific thermal
safety zones where habitable conditions will be maintained during a power outage.

AND/OR

Option 4. Operable Windows (1–2 points)

Design 50% for 1 point or 75% for 2 points of the regularly occupied spaces to have operable
windows with the capability to provide access to outdoor air during heat waves or localized
power outages. The windows must meet the opening size and location requirements of
ASHRAE 62.1-2022, Section 6.4.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Incorporating resilient design solutions into our buildings increases the adaptive capacity of our
communities, strengthening their capacity to respond to climate change and natural disasters.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 515
This credit addresses a building’s ability to remain functional, maintain the quality of the indoor
environment, and protect occupant health and wellbeing during major, episodic, disruptive
events such as extreme weather conditions, wildfires, pandemics, or power outages. Although
this credit addresses the design of events separately, teams are encouraged to consider and
design for the possibility of multiple events occurring at the same time (such as a wildfire and
extreme heat event).

Leveraging information from IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment and IPp2: Human Impact
Assessment, select two strategies for up to two points. Teams can select any two options or
paths, even those not identified as a high priority under IPp1: Climate Resilience Assessment.

Building readiness plans may be developed and communicated to facilitate operating in

specialized modes only when necessary, and to educate building occupants on the transition
from normal operations to management mode for the duration of the condition or event.

Option 1. Management Mode for Episodic Outdoor Ambient Conditions

Episodic outdoor ambient conditions can range from incidents such as the release of toxic
chemicals outside a building to the widespread presence of wildfire smoke. Having an episodic
outdoor event management mode facilitates the protection of building occupants from these and
other outdoor pollution events.

System design for event management mode

ASHRAE Guideline 44, Protecting Building Occupants from Smoke During Wildfire and
Prescribed Burn Events, specifies enhanced modes of operation to preserve indoor air quality
(IAQ) during periods of heightened outdoor air pollution.

Refer to ASHRAE Guideline 44 to design HVAC systems capable of operating in a smoke-ready

mode or other event management mode. Teams can leverage guidance from Standard 44 to
design and apply similar modes of operation for any events that impact outdoor air quality
including increases in nearby construction activity or chemical gas releases.

Commissioning requirements
ASHRAE Guideline 44 prescribes testing HVAC systems in smoke-ready conditions. Include the
requisite sequences of operation in design documents and ensure that event management
mode is included in the commissioning scope of work to verify that all equipment responds as
intended.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 516
Option 2. Management Mode for Respiratory Diseases
Following the COVID-19 pandemic, industry experts developed strategies to reduce airborne
infectious disease transmission in buildings for the protection of public health and to facilitate
keeping buildings operational during periods of heightened risk. One resulting standard —
ASHRAE Standard 241-2023, Control of Infectious Aerosols — specifies an infection risk
management mode with ventilation and filtration strategies for reducing occupant exposure to
airborne pathogens that cause significant personal and economic damage each year.

Projects pursuing this option must design occupied spaces with the capability to operate in an
Infection Risk Management Mode. This mode provides minimum equivalent clean airflow rates,
calculated as the equivalent clean airflow rate per person multiplied by the anticipated number
of people in a space. The building owner and facility manager must determine when to apply
this mode of operation.

Commissioning requirements
Include the requisite sequences of operation in design documents and ensure that Infection
Risk Management Mode is included in the commissioning scope of work to verify that all
equipment responds as intended.

Option 3. Design for Occupant Thermal Safety During Power Outages

During power outages when backup power is unavailable, mechanical cooling, heating, and
ventilation become inaccessible. Designing spaces to sustain thermal habitability passively or
through manual occupant controls allows the building to remain livable until power is restored.

Projects that pursue Option 3 have two paths to consider: One for extreme cold and one for
extreme heat. Based on the project's location, teams should determine which option, or both,
are appropriate.

Thermal safety zones

Designate thermal safety zones where thermal habitability can be maintained during a loss of
power. Analyze conditions on the assumption that building occupants will congregate in the
safety zones during an outage. This may increase the expected occupant density above normal
assumptions for the space. Include enough thermal safety zones so the occupant density does
not exceed one person per 20 square feet (1.9 square meters).

Example
An office building has 400 employees. If 20,000 square feet (1,858 square
meters) of space is identified as being thermally safe, teams must analyze the

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 517
 space assuming 400 people will be in that 20,000 square feet area (1,858 square
meters).

A 20,000 square feet (1,858 square meters) zone can accommodate up to 1,000
people. Therefore, the project would meet the sizing requirements.

Thermal habitability
Define habitable conditions as applicable to the project type. Thermally safe conditions may
differ from a healthcare facility to a typical office building. For example, the heat stress index for
an office building will be different than a nursing home. Consider the project type and the
population when performing the initial analysis. Thermal habitability is not thermal comfort and
will therefore be different than the comfort zone prescribed in ASHRAE Standard 55.

Natural ventilation
Thermal safety zones must have access to natural ventilation. This is achievable through
operable windows, doors, operable panels, or louvers.

Thermal models
Thermal models analyze heat transfer within a building, accounting for climate, insulation,
glazing specifications, solar gains, envelope leakage rates, and ventilation. Use computer
simulation software to perform the thermal modeling for each path, based on project-specific
inputs. Consider using modeling tools that are approved for Passive House compliance.

The analysis uses a two-day period. This was selected as an entry-level duration for LEED
projects for design purposes. A four-day period has been used previously in the LEED v4 pilot
credit Passive Survivability and Back-up Power During Disruptions. A timeframe of 72 hours (3
days) is often used for general emergency preparedness planning (such as disaster-ready kits).
For example, extreme heat or cold periods can last longer than two days. According to the EPA
using heat wave tracking data by the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA),
the average heat wave in major U.S. urban areas has been about four days long.190

PATH 1. CONSIDER EXTREME HEAT

Demonstrate with a thermal model that the building will passively maintain habitable conditions
for at least two days during a power outage in hot, summer months. The two-day period must
represent the peak summertime conditions of a typical meteorological year (TMY).

AND/OR

190 https://www.epa.gov/climate-indicators/climate-change-indicators-heat-waves#ref6.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 518
PATH 2. CONSIDER EXTREME COLD
Demonstrate with a thermal model or through Passive House certification that the building will
passively maintain habitable conditions for at least two days during a power outage in cold,
winter months. The two-day period must represent the peak wintertime conditions of a TMY.

Option 4. Operable Windows

During a power outage, ventilation may rely on operable windows, doors, or other openings to
maintain airflow. Operable windows can also be used for thermal comfort depending on outside
weather conditions and may minimize reliance on building systems and support adaptability for
future changes in building use.

For this option, design operable windows to support ventilation in at least 50% of the regularly
occupied floor area. Specify and size the windows to meet minimum window opening area and
locations. The natural ventilation procedure in ASHRAE 62.1-2022 Section 6.4 includes
calculations and minimum openable area tables for determining these minimums. The opening
sizes and locations will depend on the designer’s approach to opening placement. For example,
openings may be placed on one side of a zone, on opposite sides of a zone, or in the corner of
a zone. The information provided in the tables is based solely on buoyancy-driven flow and
does not address thermal comfort.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Management All Design documents confirming management
Mode for Episodic mode design and sequence of options.
Outdoor Ambient Final Commissioning Report, confirming that
Conditions management mode was tested during
Commissioning.
Option 2. Management All Design documents confirming management
Mode for Respiratory mode design and sequence of options.
Diseases Final Commissioning Report, confirming that
management mode was tested during
Commissioning.
Option 3. Design for Path 1 and Thermal model report and results and identify
Occupant Thermal Path 2 thermal safety zones.
Safety during Power
Outages
Option 4. Operable All ASHRAE Standard 62.1 calculations for
Windows opening areas and distances for all regularly
occupied spaces.
Percentage of spaces with operable windows.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 519
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ASHRAE Guideline 44 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/guideline-44-2024-
protecting-building-occupants-from-smoke-during-wildfire-and-prescribed-burn-
events?product_id=2923808)
• ASHRAE 241-2023 (store.accuristech.com/ashrae/standards/ashrae-241-
2023?product_id=2567398)
• FEMA P-361 (fema.gov/sites/default/files/documents/fema_p-361_safe-rooms-for-
tornadoes-and-hurricanes_122024.pdf)
• FEMA E-74 (2011) (fema.gov/sites/default/files/2020-07/fema_earthquakes_reducing-the-
risks-of-nonstructural-earthquake-damage-a-practical-guide-fema-e-74.pdf)
• REDi Version 1.0 (redi.arup.com)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 520
 Impact Area Alignment

— Decarbonization

Quality of Life

— Ecological Conservation
Indoor Environmental Quality Credit and Restoration

AIR QUALITY TESTING AND MONITORING

EQc5
New Construction (1–2 points)

INTENT
To support better management of indoor air quality (IAQ) and identify opportunities for health-
based approaches to building operations.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction 1–2
Option 1. Preoccupancy Air Testing 1–2
Path 1. Particulate Matter and Inorganic Gases 1
AND/OR
Path 2. Volatile Organic Compounds 1
AND/OR
Option 2. Continuous Indoor Air Monitoring 1

Option 1. Preoccupancy Air Testing (1–2 points)

After construction ends and before occupancy, but under ventilation conditions typical for
occupancy, conduct baseline IAQ testing. Retail projects may conduct the testing within 14 days
of occupancy. The number of measurements should be specified according to Table 1 and taken
in representative locations of the building.

Table 1. Number of measurements required for preoccupancy air testing

Total occupied floor area, sq. ft. (sq. m.) Number of measurements
≤ 5,000 (500) 1
> 5,000 (500) and ≤ 15,000 (1,500) 2
> 15,000 (1,500) and ≤ 25,000 (2,500) 3
> 25,000 (2,500) and ≤ 200,000 (20,000) 4 plus 1 additional measurement per each
25,000 sq. ft. (2,500 sq. m.) above 25,000 sq. ft.
> 200,000 10 plus 1 additional measurement per each
50,000 sq. ft. (4600 sq. m.) above 200,000 sq. ft.

PATH 1. PARTICULATE MATTER AND INORGANIC GASES (1 POINT)

Test for the particulate matter (PM) and inorganic gases listed in Table 2 using an allowed test
method and demonstrate that the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 521
the table. Measure for a four-hour period, calculating peak concentration for carbon monoxide
and average concentration for ozone, PM2.5, and PM10.

Table 2. Limits for particulate matter and inorganic gases

Contaminant Concentration limit Allowed test methods Direct reading
(CAS#) (µg/m3) (laboratory-based) instrument minimum
specifications
Carbon monoxide 9 ppm; no more than ISO 4224 Direct calibrated
(CO) 2 ppm above outdoor EPA Compendium Method electrochemical
levels IP-3 instrument with accuracy
GB/T 18883-2002 for of +/– 3% of reading and
projects in China resolution of 0.1 ppm
NDIR CO sensors with
accuracy of 1% of 10
ppm full scale and display
resolution of less than 0.1
ppm
Particulates (for ISO class 8 or lower n/a Accuracy (+/–): Greater
projects in per ISO 14644- of 5 μg/m3 or 20% of
attainment areas) 1:2015 reading
IP-10A Resolution (+/–): 5 μg/m3
OR meet

PM 10: 50 μg/m3

PM 2.5: 12 μg/m3
Particulates (for ISO class 8 or lower n/a Accuracy (+/–): Greater
projects in per ISO 14644- of 5 μg/m3 or 20% of
nonattainment 1:2015 reading
areas) IP-10A Resolution (+/–): 5 μg/m3
OR meet

PM 10: 50 μg/m3

PM 2.5: 35 μg/m3
Ozone 0.07 ppm ISO 13964 Monitoring device with
ASTM D5149-02 accuracy greater of 5 ppb
OR 0.01 ppm for EPA-designated methods or 20% of reading and
projects pursuing for ozone resolution (5 min.
EQc1: Enhanced Air average data) +/– 5 ppb
Quality, Option 1,
Path 2

AND/OR

PATH 2. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS (1 POINT)

Perform a screening test for total volatile organic compounds (TVOC). Use ISO 16000-6, EPA
TO-17, or EPA TO-15 to collect and analyze the air sample. Calculate the TVOC value per EN
16516:2017; CDPH Standard Method v1.2 2017, Section 3.9.4; or alternative calculation
method if full method description is included in test report.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 522
If the TVOC levels exceed 500 µg/m3, investigate for potential issues by comparing the
individual volatile organic compound (VOC) levels from the GC/MS results to associated
cognizant authority health-based limits. Correct any identified issues and retest if necessary.

Test for the individual VOCs listed in Table 3 using an allowed test method and demonstrate that
the contaminants do not exceed the concentration limits listed in the table. Laboratories that
conduct the tests must be accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test methods they use.

Table 3. Volatile organic compound limits

Contaminant (CAS#) Concentration limit Allowed test methods

(µg/m3)

Formaldehyde 50-00-0 20 µg/m3 (16 ppb) ISO 16000-3, 4

EPA TO-11a
EPA comp. IP-6A
Acetaldehyde 75-07-0 140 µg/m3
ASTM D5197-16

Benzene 71-43-2 3 µg/m3 ISO 16000-6

EPA IP-1
Hexane (n-) 110-54-3 7000 µg/m3 EPA TO-17
EPA TO-15
Naphthalene 91-20-3 9 µg/m3 ISO 16017-1, 2
ASTM D6196-15
Phenol 108-95-2 200 µg/m3

Styrene 100-42-5 900 µg/m3

Tetrachloroethylene 127-18-4 35 µg/m3

Toluene 108-88-3 300 µg/m3

Vinyl acetate 108-05-4 200 µg/m3

Dichlorobenzene (1,4-) 106-46-7 800 µg/m3

Xylenes — total 108-38-3, 95-47-6, and

700 µg/m3
106-42-3

AND/OR

OPTION 2. CONTINUOUS INDOOR AIR MONITORING (1 POINT)

Provide indoor air monitors for all the following parameters:

• Carbon dioxide (CO2)

• Particulate matter (PM2.5)
• Total volatile organic compounds

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 523
 • Temperature
• Relative humidity

Monitors must be building grade or better and located 3–6 feet (1–2 meters) above the floor.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
This credit helps the project gain a better understanding of their indoor air.

The pre-occupancy testing provides this insight prior to building use to prevent occupant
exposure to unsatisfactory air. Continuous indoor air monitoring provides this understanding
throughout operations, to track contaminant levels over time and to proactively identify any
issues and faults.

Teams may use both options for a total of two points and may find it beneficial to perform air
testing prior to occupancy at the same time as setting up the continuous monitoring systems.

Option 1. Pre-occupancy Air Testing

Construction activities and building materials can introduce contaminants that may negatively
affect a building’s indoor air quality. Testing after construction incentivizes the contractors to
follow construction management practices in accordance with EQp1: Construction Management
and follow low-emitting material specifications. It also verifies that the indoor environment is
acceptable for human occupancy and ensures that ventilation systems are effectively
maintaining adequate IAQ.

Number of measurements
The number of measurement points required is outlined in Table 1 of the rating system. The
table provides a consistent number of measurements per floor area (square feet or square
meters) to help with planning for testing and the associated costs.

The floor area in Table 1 reflects the total occupied floor area for the project, including all
regularly and non-regularly occupied areas. For example, corridors are non-regularly occupied
and must be included in the total area for this calculation. Unoccupied areas, such as
mechanical and electrical rooms, are excluded.

Projects may choose to test take more measurements beyond the minimum if desired.
Exceeding the minimum number of measurements does not earn additional points but will
provide a more comprehensive assessment of the indoor air quality.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 524
Measurement locations
Measurement locations must be selected to best represent the project occupancy and
function(s). Use the following criteria to determine representative locations for the project:

• Regularly occupied spaces. Prioritize regularly occupied spaces. Non-regularly

occupied spaces must be included in the total area for determining the occupied floor
area but need not be tested.
• Multiple space types. If more than one measurement is necessary per Table 1, test
multiple space types. For example, in an office building, test open office spaces, but also
consider closed offices, conference rooms, quiet space, and other occupied space
types. In a school building, test classroom spaces, but also consider the auditorium,
administrative offices, student assembly areas, and lab spaces.
• Different ventilation systems. If the project has multiple ventilation systems, identify a
measurement location in areas served by each ventilation system, up to the required
number of measurement points.
• Multiple floors. For projects with multiple floors, select locations on different floors.
• Spaces where the highest concentrations of contaminants are likely to occur. This
could be due to the construction or fit-out of the space, or a lower ventilation rate. For
example, private offices may have a higher concentration of contaminants compared to
open offices, due to a higher density of furniture and finish materials in an enclosed
space.

Failed testing
If a test fails, take corrective action (e.g., clean and flush out the space) and retest. All test
locations must meet the concentration limits in Table 2 for Path 1 compliance and/or Table 3 for
Path 2 compliance.

Timing for air quality testing

Air quality measurements must be conducted after construction is complete and before
occupancy. For the purposes of this credit, construction is complete once all furniture and
finishes are installed, construction punch-list items that would generate VOCs or other
contaminants are complete, and testing and balancing of the HVAC system has been
conducted.

Testing must be done under normal operating ventilation conditions. If there are unoccupied
setbacks in the ventilation system, test during normal occupied hours to achieve the typical
ventilation conditions.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 525
All testing and retesting must be completed before occupancy.

Retail Projects
• Retail projects may perform testing within 14 days of occupancy. This is to accommodate
the unique compressed construction timeline for typical retail projects.

PATH 1. PARTICULATE MATTER AND INORGANIC GASES

Each location must be tested for all contaminants in Table 2.

Table 2 outlines the approved test methods for each contaminant. Teams can use laboratory-
based testing or take measurements using direct-reading instruments. If using direct readings,
all instruments must meet the minimum specifications of Table 2. Alternative methods may be
used for Path 1 contaminants if the project team documents that the accuracy and resolution
specifications in Table 2 are met.

PATH 2. VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUNDS

A screening test for total volatile organic compounds (TVOC) and test for each individual VOC in
Table 3 must be performed at each measurement location.

Because VOC testing and analysis is complex, it must be performed using specific methods by
a laboratory that is accredited under ISO/IEC 17025 for the test method used.

TVOC screening is intended to serve as a general indicator of the VOC levels in the building
and is used to capture situations where investigation of individual VOCs beyond those targeted
via Table 3 may be needed. While projects are not required to meet a specific TVOC threshold,
they are required to report TVOC results. If the TVOC concentration exceeds 500 ug/m3, the
team must work with the laboratory to compare the individual VOC levels from the GC/MS
results to associated cognizant health-based limits and perform corrective actions as necessary.

Option 2. Continuous Indoor Air Monitoring

During occupancy, airborne contaminants can enter a building from the outdoors or be
introduced by indoor sources and activities such as cleaning, cooking, candles, 3D printers, or
improperly vented heating appliances. Permanently installed continuous indoor air monitors
enable the identification of potential issues and timely corrective actions to assure systems
designed to maintain indoor air quality in the building continue to work as intended through the
project’s operational phase.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 526
Number of monitors
A successful monitoring strategy must consider the data collection purpose and dedicated
resources for ongoing data management. Fewer, well managed monitors are usually more
beneficial than copious neglected monitors. Include at least one monitor per 25,000 square feet
(2,500 square meters) of total occupied floor area. This density is a good entry point for getting
started with indoor air quality monitoring. Additional monitors can be added as desired up to the
best-practice density of one monitor per 5,000 square feet (500 square meters) of total occupied
floor area.

Monitor locations
Monitors must be placed to best represent the project occupancy and function(s). This will vary
depending on the purpose of the monitoring. Use the following criteria to determine
representative locations for the project:

• Multiple space types. Consider including monitors in multiple space types. For
example, in an office building: monitor the open office spaces, but also consider closed
offices, conference rooms, quiet spaces, and other occupied space types. In a school
building: monitor classroom spaces, but also consider the auditorium, administrative
offices, student assembly areas and lab spaces.
• Different ventilation systems. If the project has multiple ventilation systems, consider
placing monitors in areas served by each ventilation system.
• Multiple floors. For projects with multiple floors, consider placing monitors on different
floors.
• Spaces where the highest concentrations of contaminants are likely to occur. This
could be due to the construction or fit-out of the space, a lower ventilation rate or air
filtration level, the presence of combustion or operable windows, or occupant activities.
For example, cafeterias may have a higher concentration of contaminants compared to
classrooms, due to the presence of cooking.
• Spaces occupied by at-risk populations or spaces designated for cleaner air.
Consider placing monitors in areas where people who are more susceptible to poor
indoor air quality congregate. For example, this may include spaces with infants,
children, pregnant women, acute care facilities, and assisted living facilities.

If monitoring to support IAQ management during wildfires and prescribed burn events, review
ASHRAE Guideline 44, Section 5.5.1.2 for considerations for monitor placement.

Monitors must be permanently installed at a height corresponding to the breathing zone of a

typical occupant. In most situations, the breathing zone is 3–6 feet (0.9–1.8 m) above finished

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 527
floor height, based on the location of an occupant’s head when seated or standing. Alternative
mounting heights based on the anticipated occupant position in a space may be considered.

Where possible, place monitors at least three feet (0.9 meters) away from doors, windows, air
filters, air supply outlets, exhaust intakes, stoves, printers, and other potential airborne
contaminant sources or sinks. In areas where this is not possible, locate monitors closer to air
returns than air diffusers.

Monitors located in ducts do not meet the requirements.

Monitor specifications
Select indoor air monitoring devices that measure carbon dioxide (CO2), fine particulate matter
(PM2.5), total volatile organic compounds (TVOC), temperature, and relative humidity. Monitors
must meet the building grade requirements of RESET Grade B191 or UL 2095 Grade B.

Hourly reporting
Monitors must report hourly (or higher frequency including 15-minute data for CO2) data to a
remote location that logs pollutant levels over time. A digital display, or integration with the
building management system, is not required to achieve the credit.

Table 4. RESET Grade B monitor specifications

RESET Grade B CO2 PM2.5 TVOC Temperature Relative
monitor humidity
specifications
Data loss 10%
Operating range for 0–40 ℃
temperature
Operating range for 10-80 % RH non-condensing
relative humidity
Data output interval 5 min
Sampling type Active airflow
Sensor output 5 ppm 1 μg/m3 4.4 ppb 0.1 ℃ 1 % RH
resolution
Measuring range 400–5000 0-500 μg/m3 65-870 ppb 0-40 ℃ 10-80 % RH
ppm
Accuracy* 400–2000 0 - 150 : ±5 65 – 260 ppb ±1 ℃ ±8% RH
ppm : ±50 && 15% : ±8.7 &&
&& 3% 150 - 500 : 15%
2000–5000 ±5 && 20% 260 - 870 :
: ±50 && ±8.7 && 20%
5%

191 “Indoor Air Quality Monitors”, RESET, GIGAbase Canada, (2025), accessed April 5, 2025,
https://reset.build/directory/monitors/type/indoor.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 528
 RESET Grade B CO2 PM2.5 TVOC Temperature Relative
monitor humidity
specifications
Performance check Required Required Required Required Required
and re-calibration
*EXAMPLE: If a reference monitor is reading 900 ppm, a Grade B monitor’s reading must read within 50 + (0.03 x 900) = ±77.
The Grade B monitor’s reading must be between 823 and 977 ppm

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options Paths Documentation
types
All Option 1. Path 1 and Completed air quality testing report, including time,
Pre-occupancy Path 2 date, testing methods complying with credit
air testing requirements, results and limits of the tested
contaminants in all locations, and lab accreditation
scope for Path 2 VOCs if applicable.
Evidence of testing locations

Document confirming substantial completion of

construction, highlighting the date. The intent is to
confirm that construction was complete prior to the
time/date of the air quality testing.
Option 2. All Evidence of monitoring locations and description of
Continuous monitoring approach
Indoor Air Specifications of building grade air monitors.
Monitoring

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• ISO 4224 (iso.org/standard/32229.html)
• EPA Compendium Method IP-3, GB/T 18883-2002
(nepis.epa.gov/Exe/ZyPURL.cgi?Dockey=30003ULE.txt)
• ISO 13964 (iso.org/standard/23528.html)
• ASTM D5149-02 (astm.org/d5149-24.html)
• EPA designated methods for Ozone (epa.gov/system/files/documents/2024-12/amtic-list-
december-2024_final.pdf)
• ISO IEC 17025 (iso.org/ISO-IEC-17025-testing-and-calibration-laboratories.html)
• CDPH Standard Method v1.2-2017
(cdph.ca.gov/Programs/cls/dehl/ehl/Pages/AQS/VOCs.aspx)
• Reset Air Accredited Monitors (reset.build/directory/monitors)
• UL 2905 (shopulstandards.com/ProductDetail.aspx?productId=ULE2905_2_S_20230110)

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 529
PROJECT PRIORITIES (PR)
OVERVIEW
The historical Innovation credit category has evolved in LEED v5 to become the Project
Priorities (PR) credit category. The goal is greater flexibility for projects to address their unique
context and priorities including typology, culture, location, areas of innovation and individual
performance objectives. Credits can be added to the library as they are developed enabling an
adaptive and agile response to rapidly evolving industry knowledge, developing technologies
and emerging innovative solutions. And empowering projects to pursue improvements that are
most meaningful to their specific goals and circumstances.

For example, the evolution of the building industry over the last 15 years has fostered a need for
more sector-specific sustainability metrics. Additionally, greater adoption of reporting has
prompted real estate organizations to establish targets in areas including decarbonization,
occupant health and biodiversity. The PR credit category aims to provide recognition for projects
pursuing these goals outside of the established credits in LEED v5.

New metrics and strategies can be continually applied to LEED without waiting for the next
version to debut, allowing for a more nimble and dynamic development of credits and
compliance paths in between releases of new rating system versions.

By embracing flexibility and encouraging continuous innovation, the PR credit category ensures
that LEED remains a dynamic tool for advancing sustainability. It empowers project teams to
align their efforts with evolving best practices, sector-specific goals, and emerging global
challenges, ensuring that buildings remain resilient, forward-thinking, and impactful over time.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 530
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Project Priorities Credit and Restoration

PROJECT PRIORITIES
PRc1
New Construction (1–9 points)
Core and Shell (1–9 points)

INTENT
To promote achievement of credits that address geographically sensitive or adaptation-specific
environmental, social equity, and public health priorities. To encourage projects to think
creatively to test and accelerate new sustainable building practices and strategies.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1–9
Regional Priority
Project-Type Credits
Exemplary Performance 1–9
Pilot Credits
Innovation Strategies

Achieve any combination of the following for a maximum of nine points:

Regional Priority
Achieve a regional priority credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits have
been identified by USGBC as having additional regional importance for the project’s region.

Project-type Credits
Achieve a project-type credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits have been
identified by USGBC as addressing unique needs for the given adaptation or building
application.

Exemplary Performance
Achieve an exemplary performance credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library. These credits
have been identified by USGBC as going above and beyond an existing LEED v5 prerequisite
or credit in the LEED v5 priority areas of scale, decarbonization, resilience, health, equity,
and/or ecosystems.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 531
Pilot Credits
Achieve a pilot credit from USGBC’s Project Priority Library.

Innovative Strategies
Achieve significant, measurable, environmental performance using a strategy not addressed in
the LEED v5 green building rating system.

Identify all the following criteria:

• The intent of the proposed innovation strategy

• Proposed requirements for compliance
• Proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance
• The design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
Teams earn recognition for implementing innovative measures addressing distinct focus areas
in their projects through the PRc1: Project Priorities. This credit offers multiple pathways for
projects to address their respective priorities and go beyond the requirements listed in other
LEED credits. This flexibility enables teams to effectively address the distinct needs of their
projects, fostering innovation and adaptability. Each project can chart its path forward based on
its own goals.192

Projects prioritize efforts based on their unique contexts. Teams can choose the best credits for
addressing their project’s goals and targets. Some projects may concentrate most of their effort
toward a single priority area, including project type specific priorities or exemplary performance.
Other projects might choose to address different priority areas more uniformly.

For example, an office building in a coastal city prone to hurricanes and flooding might prioritize
enhancing resiliency to regional climate challenges with applicable credit pathways focused on
flood mitigation, building safety, and reinforced construction materials and design. Similarly, an
urban mixed-use development comprised of residential and commercial spaces might have a
variety of sustainable priorities to address, such as incorporating renewable energy efficiency,
providing indoor environmental quality to building tenants and promoting methods for active or
cleaner forms of transportation.

192 “Green buildings”, PNNL, (n.d.), https://www.pnnl.gov/explainer-articles/green-buildings.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 532
To achieve the maximum nine points available, project teams should incorporate as many
credits under each pathway as they prefer, using any combination of project type credits,
exemplary performance credits, regional priorities, innovation strategies, and pilot credit
pathways.

Project Type
Achieve a project-type credit from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. USGBC has identified
these credits as addressing unique needs for the given adaptation or building application.

Example strategies: Project type

A data center project might focus on project type credits specific to data centers
that address energy efficiency, advanced cooling technologies, and renewable
energy integration.

Exemplary performance
Achieve exemplary performance requirements of an existing LEED v5 credit eligible for
exemplary performance, as specified in USGBC’s Project Priority Library. Exemplary
performance earns points by exceeding the credit requirements or achieving the next
incremental percentage threshold for the credit.

Regional priority
Identify the environmental and/or social equity and/or public health priorities for the project’s
location and achieve LEED credits that address those regional priorities. Regional priority
credits address geographically specific environmental and/or social priorities for the project’s
region.

Innovation strategies
Achieve innovation credits from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. Alternatively, achieve
innovation credits by adopting new strategies not addressed in the LEED rating system that
demonstrate reduced environmental impacts, increased decarbonization, and improved social
impacts. Projects must submit documentation identifying the intent of the proposed innovation
credit, proposed requirements for compliance, proposed submittals to demonstrate compliance,
and the design approach or strategies used to meet the requirements.

Pilot credits
Achieve pilot credits from the USGBC’s Project Priority Library. USGBC has identified these
credits to explore new aspects of sustainable design, building, and construction and potentially
include in future additions of the LEED rating system.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 533
DOCUMENTATION
Project Options/ Required for Documentation
types Paths Upload
All Project type Description Project type narrative
Documentation Project type submittals
Exemplary N/A Exemplary performance credit and threshold are
performance documented in the credit pursuing an EP point
Regional Description Narrative describing regional priorities
priority
Innovation Description Narrative describing the innovation, including details
strategies Documentation Any documentation, including calculations, submittals,
case studies, etc. that supports the innovation
strategy
Pilot credit Registration Upload confirmation that the project is registered for a
Pilot credit
Survey Complete and upload the pilot credit survey
Submittals Complete and upload all pilot credit submittals

REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 534
 Impact Area Alignment

Decarbonization

Quality of Life

Ecological Conservation
Project Priorities Credit and Restoration

LEED AP
PRc2
New Construction (1 point)
Core and Shell (1 point)

INTENT
To encourage team integration required by a LEED AP and to streamline the application and
certification process.

REQUIREMENTS
Achievement pathways Points
New Construction and Core and Shell 1
LEED AP 1

At least one principal participant of the project team must be a LEED AP with a specialty
appropriate for the project.

REQUIREMENTS EXPLAINED
The credit rewards projects that include a LEED AP with an active credential on the project team
at the time of certification review.

A key design team member must have a LEED AP with a Building Design and Construction
specialty. While all LEED AP credentials provide an understanding of the green building
community and certification requirements, team members with the Building Design and
Construction specialty have extensive knowledge and experience with prerequisites and credits
for a New Construction or Core and Shell project.

LEED APs without specialty do not qualify for this credit.

DOCUMENTATION
Project Options/ Required for Documentation
types Paths Upload
All All (open-ended inputs) Full name of LEED AP with specialty
(open-ended inputs) Specialty credential of the LEED AP
(open-ended inputs) GBCI Credential Number

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 535
REFERENCED STANDARDS
• None

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 536
APPENDIX I. LEED PLATINUM REQUIREMENTS
NEW CONSTRUCTION
EAc1: Electrification
Five points are required.

EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency

Eight points are required.

EAc4: Renewable Energy

100% of site energy use from any combination of Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3 renewable energy.

MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon

20% reduction in embodied carbon.

CORE AND SHELL

EAc1: Electrification
Four points are required.

EAc3: Enhanced Energy Efficiency

Five points are required.

EAc4: Renewable Energy

100% of base building energy use is from any combination of Tier 1, Tier 2, and Tier 3
renewable energy.

MRc2: Reduce Embodied Carbon

20% reduction in embodied carbon.

U.S. Green Building Council

LEED v5 Reference Guide for Building Design and Construction, April 2025 Launch Edition 537
ISBN # 979-8-99251 10-0-0 usgbc.org